Sinamics g120x
Uploaded by
Muhamad YasrinSinamics g120x
Uploaded by
Muhamad YasrinOperating instructions
SINAMICS
SINAMICS G120X
Infrastructure converter
for HVAC/water/wastewater
Edition 06/2019 www.siemens.com/drives
Fundamental safety
instructions 1
Description 2
Mounting 3
SINAMICS
Wiring 4
SINAMICS G120X
SINAMICS G120X converter
Commissioning 5
Advanced commissioning 6
Operating Instructions
Parameters 7
Saving the settings and
series commissioning 8
Warnings, faults and system
messages 9
Corrective maintenance 10
Technical data 11
Appendix A
Edition 06/2019, firmware V1.01
06/2019, FW V1.01
A5E44751209B AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this
publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG A5E44751209B AC Copyright © Siemens AG 2018 - 2019.
Digital Industries Ⓟ 06/2019 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents
1 Fundamental safety instructions.................................................................................................................11
1.1 General safety instructions.....................................................................................................11
1.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge ......................................17
1.3 Warranty and liability for application examples ......................................................................18
1.4 Industrial security ...................................................................................................................19
1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems ...................................................................................21
2 Description..................................................................................................................................................23
2.1 About the Manual ...................................................................................................................23
2.2 About the converter................................................................................................................24
2.3 Scope of delivery....................................................................................................................25
2.4 Directives and standards........................................................................................................29
2.5 Device disposal ......................................................................................................................31
2.6 Optional components .............................................................................................................32
2.6.1 External line filter....................................................................................................................32
2.6.2 Line reactor ............................................................................................................................33
2.6.3 Line harmonics filter ...............................................................................................................35
2.6.4 Output reactor ........................................................................................................................36
2.6.5 Sine-wave filter.......................................................................................................................38
2.6.6 dv/dt filter plus VPL ................................................................................................................39
2.6.7 Push-through mounting kit .....................................................................................................41
2.6.8 Mounting grips for push-through mounted converters ...........................................................44
2.6.9 IP21 top cover ........................................................................................................................44
2.6.10 Mounting kit for line-side cable connection, left (FSH only) ...................................................45
2.6.11 I/O Extension Module.............................................................................................................45
2.6.12 Operator panel .......................................................................................................................47
2.6.13 SINAMICS G120 Smart Access.............................................................................................48
2.7 Motors and multi-motor drives that can be operated..............................................................49
3 Mounting.....................................................................................................................................................51
3.1 Installing the label for the North American market .................................................................51
3.2 EMC-compliant setup of the machine or plant .......................................................................52
3.2.1 Control cabinet .......................................................................................................................53
3.2.2 Cables ....................................................................................................................................54
3.2.3 Electromechanical components .............................................................................................56
3.3 Power losses and air cooling requirements ...........................................................................57
3.4 Mounting the converter ..........................................................................................................59
3.4.1 Basic installation rules............................................................................................................59
3.4.2 Dimension drawings and drill patterns ...................................................................................61
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 3
Table of contents
3.4.2.1 Mounting the converter on the mounting panel......................................................................62
3.4.2.2 Mounting the converter utilizing push-through technology (FSA to FSG only) ......................64
3.4.3 Mounting the shield connection kits .......................................................................................67
3.4.4 Additional mounting instructions for FSD ... FSJ....................................................................69
3.4.4.1 Additional mounting instructions, FSD ... FSG.......................................................................69
3.4.4.2 Additional mounting instructions, FSH/FSJ............................................................................72
3.4.5 Mounting the optional components ........................................................................................73
4 Wiring .........................................................................................................................................................75
4.1 Line supply and motor............................................................................................................75
4.1.1 Permissible line supplies........................................................................................................75
4.1.1.1 TN system ..............................................................................................................................75
4.1.1.2 TT system ..............................................................................................................................77
4.1.1.3 IT system................................................................................................................................78
4.1.1.4 Removing functional grounding of the converter....................................................................78
4.1.2 Minimum cross-section of the protective conductor ...............................................................80
4.1.3 Maximum permissible motor cable length..............................................................................82
4.1.4 Connecting the converter and converter components ...........................................................87
4.1.4.1 Connection overview..............................................................................................................88
4.1.4.2 Connnecting converters .........................................................................................................89
4.1.4.3 Cable cross-sections and screw tightening torques ..............................................................94
4.1.4.4 Cable lug ................................................................................................................................95
4.1.4.5 Connecting the cable shields (FSA ... FSG only)...................................................................96
4.1.5 Connecting the motor to the converter in a star or delta connection......................................98
4.2 Control interfaces ...................................................................................................................99
4.2.1 Overview of the interfaces......................................................................................................99
4.2.2 Fieldbus interface allocation.................................................................................................100
4.2.3 Terminal strips......................................................................................................................101
4.2.4 Terminals strips for I/O Extension Module ...........................................................................103
4.2.5 Factory interface settings .....................................................................................................105
4.2.6 Default setting of the interfaces (macros) ............................................................................107
4.2.7 Additional digital inputs and digital outputs on converters FSH and FSJ.............................126
4.2.8 "Safe Torque Off" safety function .........................................................................................128
4.2.9 Application examples for "Safe Torque Off" .........................................................................132
4.2.10 Wiring the terminal strips......................................................................................................139
4.2.11 Connecting to PROFINET and Ethernet ..............................................................................141
4.2.11.1 Communication via PROFINET IO and Ethernet .................................................................141
4.2.11.2 Protocols used .....................................................................................................................142
4.2.11.3 Connecting the PROFINET cable to the converter ..............................................................144
4.2.11.4 What do you have to set for communication via PROFINET? .............................................144
4.2.11.5 Installing GSDML .................................................................................................................145
4.2.11.6 Connect converter to EtherNet/IP ........................................................................................145
4.2.11.7 What do you need for communication via EtherNet/IP? ......................................................146
4.2.12 RS485 interface for the fieldbus...........................................................................................146
4.2.13 Connecting to PROFIBUS....................................................................................................147
4.2.13.1 Connecting the PROFIBUS cable to the converter ..............................................................148
4.2.13.2 What do you have to set for communication via PROFIBUS? .............................................148
4.2.13.3 Installing the GSD ................................................................................................................149
5 Commissioning .........................................................................................................................................151
5.1 Commissioning guidelines ...................................................................................................151
SINAMICS G120X converter
4 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Table of contents
5.2 Tools ....................................................................................................................................152
5.3 Preparing for commissioning................................................................................................153
5.3.1 Collecting motor data ...........................................................................................................153
5.3.2 Forming DC link capacitors ..................................................................................................155
5.3.3 Converter factory setting ......................................................................................................157
5.4 Quick commissioning using the BOP-2 operator panel........................................................159
5.4.1 Fitting the BOP-2 to the converter........................................................................................159
5.4.2 Overview of quick commissioning ........................................................................................160
5.4.3 Start quick commissioning and select the application class.................................................161
5.4.4 Selecting an application class ..............................................................................................162
5.4.5 Standard Drive Control.........................................................................................................163
5.4.6 Dynamic Drive Control .........................................................................................................165
5.4.7 Expert...................................................................................................................................167
5.4.8 Identifying the motor data and optimizing the closed-loop control .......................................171
5.5 Restoring the factory settings...............................................................................................173
5.6 Handling the BOP-2 operator panel .....................................................................................174
5.6.1 Changing settings using BOP-2 ...........................................................................................175
5.6.2 Changing indexed parameters .............................................................................................176
5.6.3 Directly entering the parameter number and value ..............................................................177
5.6.4 A parameter cannot be changed..........................................................................................178
6 Advanced commissioning.........................................................................................................................179
6.1 Overview of the converter functions.....................................................................................179
6.2 Brief description of the parameters ......................................................................................181
6.3 Drive control .........................................................................................................................182
6.3.1 Sequence control when switching the motor on and off.......................................................182
6.3.2 Adapt the default setting of the terminal strips .....................................................................186
6.3.2.1 Digital inputs.........................................................................................................................188
6.3.2.2 Analog input as digital input .................................................................................................191
6.3.2.3 Digital outputs ......................................................................................................................193
6.3.2.4 Analog inputs .......................................................................................................................196
6.3.2.5 Adjusting characteristics for analog input.............................................................................199
6.3.2.6 Setting the deadband ...........................................................................................................200
6.3.2.7 Analog outputs .....................................................................................................................202
6.3.2.8 Adjusting characteristics for analog output ..........................................................................205
6.3.3 Drive control via PROFINET or PROFIBUS.........................................................................206
6.3.3.1 Setting the address ..............................................................................................................206
6.3.3.2 Receive data and send data ................................................................................................206
6.3.3.3 Telegrams ............................................................................................................................207
6.3.3.4 Parameter channel...............................................................................................................213
6.3.3.5 Expanding or freely interconnecting telegrams ....................................................................218
6.3.3.6 Acyclically reading and writing converter parameters ..........................................................220
6.3.3.7 Reading and changing parameters via data set 47..............................................................220
6.3.4 Drive control via EtherNet/IP................................................................................................224
6.3.4.1 Configuring communication via EtherNet/IP ........................................................................225
6.3.4.2 Supported objects ................................................................................................................226
6.3.4.3 Create generic I/O module ...................................................................................................240
6.3.4.4 The converter as Ethernet node...........................................................................................241
6.3.5 Drive control via Modbus RTU .............................................................................................242
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 5
Table of contents
6.3.5.1 Activating communication via fieldbus .................................................................................242
6.3.5.2 Setting the address ..............................................................................................................244
6.3.5.3 Parameters for setting communication via Modbus RTU.....................................................244
6.3.5.4 Modbus RTU telegram .........................................................................................................247
6.3.5.5 Baud rates and mapping tables ...........................................................................................248
6.3.5.6 Mapping tables - converter data...........................................................................................250
6.3.5.7 Acyclic communication via Modbus RTU .............................................................................253
6.3.5.8 Write and read access using function codes........................................................................254
6.3.5.9 Reading and writing parameters acyclically via FC 16.........................................................256
6.3.5.10 Communication procedure ...................................................................................................259
6.3.5.11 Application example .............................................................................................................260
6.3.6 Drive control via USS ...........................................................................................................261
6.3.6.1 Activating communication via fieldbus .................................................................................261
6.3.6.2 Setting the address ..............................................................................................................262
6.3.6.3 Telegram structure ...............................................................................................................262
6.3.6.4 Specify user data of telegram ..............................................................................................263
6.3.6.5 USS process data channel (PZD) ........................................................................................264
6.3.6.6 Telegram monitoring ............................................................................................................267
6.3.6.7 USS parameter channel.......................................................................................................268
6.3.7 Drive control via BACnet MS/TP ..........................................................................................274
6.3.7.1 BACnet properties................................................................................................................274
6.3.7.2 Activating communication via fieldbus .................................................................................275
6.3.7.3 Setting the address ..............................................................................................................276
6.3.7.4 Parameters for setting communication via BACnet..............................................................277
6.3.7.5 Supported services and objects ...........................................................................................279
6.3.7.6 Acyclic communication (general parameter access) via BACnet.........................................288
6.3.8 Jogging.................................................................................................................................290
6.3.9 Switching over the drive control (command data set) ..........................................................292
6.3.10 Selecting physical units........................................................................................................294
6.3.10.1 Motor standard .....................................................................................................................294
6.3.10.2 Unit system ..........................................................................................................................294
6.3.10.3 Technological unit of the technology controller ....................................................................295
6.3.11 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function.................................................................................296
6.3.11.1 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function.................................................................................296
6.3.11.2 Setting the feedback signal for Safe Torque Off ..................................................................298
6.4 Pump control ........................................................................................................................300
6.4.1 Multi-pump control................................................................................................................300
6.4.1.1 Pump switch-in/switch-out....................................................................................................303
6.4.1.2 Stop mode............................................................................................................................308
6.4.1.3 Pump switchover..................................................................................................................311
6.4.1.4 Service mode .......................................................................................................................313
6.4.2 Frost protection ....................................................................................................................316
6.4.3 Condensation protection ......................................................................................................318
6.4.4 Cavitation protection ............................................................................................................320
6.4.5 Deragging.............................................................................................................................322
6.4.6 Pipe filling.............................................................................................................................324
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing .......................................................................................327
6.5.1 Setpoints ..............................................................................................................................327
6.5.1.1 Analog input as setpoint source ...........................................................................................328
6.5.1.2 Specifying the setpoint via the fieldbus ................................................................................329
6.5.1.3 Motorized potentiometer as setpoint source ........................................................................330
SINAMICS G120X converter
6 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Table of contents
6.5.1.4 Fixed speed setpoint as setpoint source..............................................................................333
6.5.2 Setpoint processing..............................................................................................................338
6.5.2.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................338
6.5.2.2 Invert setpoint.......................................................................................................................339
6.5.2.3 Enable direction of rotation ..................................................................................................340
6.5.2.4 Skip frequency bands and minimum speed .........................................................................341
6.5.2.5 Speed limitation....................................................................................................................344
6.5.2.6 Ramp-function generator .....................................................................................................345
6.5.2.7 Dual ramp function ...............................................................................................................348
6.6 Technology controller...........................................................................................................350
6.6.1 PID technology controller .....................................................................................................350
6.6.1.1 Autotuning the PID technology controller.............................................................................361
6.6.1.2 Adapting Kp and Tn .............................................................................................................364
6.6.2 Free technology controllers..................................................................................................367
6.6.3 Cascade control ...................................................................................................................368
6.6.4 Real time clock (RTC) ..........................................................................................................373
6.6.5 Time switch (DTC) ...............................................................................................................375
6.7 Motor control ........................................................................................................................376
6.7.1 Reactor, filter and cable resistance at the converter output.................................................376
6.7.2 V/f control .............................................................................................................................377
6.7.2.1 U/f control.............................................................................................................................377
6.7.2.2 Optimizing motor starting .....................................................................................................382
6.7.2.3 U/f control with Standard Drive Control................................................................................387
6.7.2.4 Optimizing the motor start-up for application class Standard Drive Control.........................389
6.7.3 Encoderless vector control...................................................................................................391
6.7.3.1 Structure of vector control without encoder (sensorless) .....................................................391
6.7.3.2 Optimizing the speed controller............................................................................................396
6.7.4 Electrically braking the motor ...............................................................................................398
6.7.4.1 DC braking ...........................................................................................................................400
6.7.4.2 Compound braking...............................................................................................................402
6.7.5 Pulse frequency wobbling ....................................................................................................403
6.8 Drive protection ....................................................................................................................404
6.8.1 Overcurrent protection .........................................................................................................404
6.8.2 Converter protection using temperature monitoring.............................................................406
6.8.3 Motor protection with temperature sensor............................................................................409
6.8.4 Motor protection by calculating the temperature ..................................................................412
6.8.5 Motor and converter protection by limiting the voltage.........................................................414
6.8.6 Monitoring the driven load....................................................................................................415
6.8.6.1 Stall protection .....................................................................................................................417
6.8.6.2 No-load monitoring...............................................................................................................417
6.8.6.3 Blocking protection...............................................................................................................418
6.8.6.4 Torque monitoring ................................................................................................................419
6.8.6.5 Blocking protection, leakage protection and dry-running protection ....................................420
6.8.6.6 Rotation monitoring ..............................................................................................................422
6.9 Drive availability ...................................................................................................................423
6.9.1 Flying restart – switching on while the motor is running.......................................................423
6.9.2 Automatic restart ..................................................................................................................425
6.9.3 Kinetic buffering (Vdc min control) .......................................................................................428
6.9.4 Essential service mode ........................................................................................................429
6.10 Energy saving ......................................................................................................................434
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 7
Table of contents
6.10.1 Efficiency optimization..........................................................................................................434
6.10.2 ECO mode ...........................................................................................................................437
6.10.3 Bypass .................................................................................................................................439
6.10.4 Hibernation mode.................................................................................................................445
6.10.5 Line contactor control...........................................................................................................451
6.10.6 Calculating the energy saving for fluid flow machines .........................................................453
6.10.7 Flow meter ...........................................................................................................................455
6.10.8 PROFIenergy .......................................................................................................................456
6.10.8.1 Control commands ...............................................................................................................457
6.10.8.2 Status queries ......................................................................................................................458
6.10.8.3 Error values and measured values ......................................................................................458
6.11 Switchover between different settings..................................................................................460
6.12 Explanations of the function diagrams .................................................................................462
6.12.1 Symbols in the function diagrams ........................................................................................462
6.12.2 Interconnecting signals in the converter...............................................................................464
7 Parameters ...............................................................................................................................................467
7.1 Explanation of the detailed parameter list ............................................................................467
7.2 Parameter list .......................................................................................................................470
7.3 ASCII table ...........................................................................................................................936
8 Saving the settings and series commissioning.........................................................................................939
8.1 Memory card ........................................................................................................................940
8.1.1 Recommended memory cards .............................................................................................940
8.1.2 Saving setting on a memory card.........................................................................................940
8.1.2.1 Automatic backup.................................................................................................................941
8.1.2.2 Manual backup.....................................................................................................................942
8.1.3 Transferring the setting from the memory card ....................................................................942
8.1.3.1 Automatic transfer ................................................................................................................942
8.1.3.2 Manually transferring............................................................................................................943
8.1.4 Safely remove the memory card ..........................................................................................944
8.1.5 Message for a memory card that is not inserted ..................................................................945
8.2 Operator panel .....................................................................................................................946
8.2.1 Backup using the operator panel .........................................................................................946
8.2.2 Transfer to the converter......................................................................................................946
8.3 Other ways to back up settings ............................................................................................948
8.4 Series commissioning ..........................................................................................................949
8.5 Write protection ....................................................................................................................950
8.6 Know-how protection............................................................................................................952
8.6.1 Extending the exception list for know-how protection ..........................................................955
8.6.2 Activating and deactivating know-how protection ................................................................956
9 Warnings, faults and system messages ...................................................................................................959
9.1 Operating states indicated on LEDs.....................................................................................960
9.2 System runtime ....................................................................................................................962
9.3 Identification & maintenance data (I&M) ..............................................................................963
SINAMICS G120X converter
8 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Table of contents
9.4 Alarms, alarm buffer, and alarm history ...............................................................................964
9.5 Faults, alarm buffer and alarm history..................................................................................967
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes......................................................................................970
9.6.1 Overview of faults and alarms..............................................................................................970
9.6.2 Fault codes and alarm codes ...............................................................................................970
10 Corrective maintenance..........................................................................................................................1049
10.1 Replacing the converter .....................................................................................................1050
10.1.1 Overview of how to replace a converter.............................................................................1050
10.1.2 Replacing a converter with data backup ............................................................................1051
10.1.3 Replacing a converter without data backup .......................................................................1052
10.2 Replacing spare parts ........................................................................................................1054
10.2.1 Spare parts compatibility....................................................................................................1054
10.2.2 Spare parts overview .........................................................................................................1054
10.2.3 Fan units ............................................................................................................................1055
10.2.3.1 Replacing the fan unit, FSA ... FSC ...................................................................................1057
10.2.3.2 Replacing the fan unit, FSD ... FSG...................................................................................1058
10.2.3.3 Replacing the fan unit, FSH/FSJ........................................................................................1059
10.2.3.4 Replacing the internal fan, FSH/FSJ only ..........................................................................1060
10.2.4 Assemblies for FSH and FSJ .............................................................................................1063
10.2.4.1 Replacing the power supply board.....................................................................................1063
10.2.4.2 Replacing the free programmable interface (FPI) ..............................................................1066
10.2.4.3 Replacing the current sensor .............................................................................................1069
10.3 Firmware upgrade and downgrade ....................................................................................1073
10.3.1 Preparing the memory card................................................................................................1074
10.3.2 Upgrading the firmware......................................................................................................1075
10.3.3 Firmware downgrade .........................................................................................................1077
10.3.4 Correcting an unsuccessful firmware upgrade or downgrade............................................1079
10.4 Reduced acceptance test after component replacement and firmware change ................1080
11 Technical data ........................................................................................................................................1081
11.1 Technical data of inputs and outputs .................................................................................1081
11.2 Load cycles and overload capability ..................................................................................1084
11.3 General converter technical data .......................................................................................1086
11.4 Technical data dependent on the power ............................................................................1089
11.5 Derating data......................................................................................................................1092
11.5.1 Current derating as a function of the installation altitude ...................................................1092
11.5.2 Current derating as a function of the ambient temperature................................................1093
11.5.3 Current derating as a function of the line voltage...............................................................1094
11.5.4 Current derating as a function of the pulse frequency .......................................................1096
11.6 Low frequency performance...............................................................................................1098
11.7 Data regarding the power loss in partial load operation.....................................................1099
11.8 Electromagnetic compability of the converter ....................................................................1100
11.8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................1100
11.8.2 Operation in the Second EMC environment.......................................................................1101
11.8.2.1 High-frequency interference emissions EMC category C3 ................................................1101
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 9
Table of contents
11.8.2.2 High-frequency interference emissions EMC category C2 ................................................1102
11.8.2.3 Current harmonics..............................................................................................................1102
11.8.3 Operation in the First EMC environment............................................................................1103
11.8.3.1 General information............................................................................................................1103
11.8.3.2 High-frequency, conducted and radiated interference emissions, EMC Category C2 .......1103
11.8.3.3 High-frequency, conducted interference emissions, EMC Category C1 ............................1104
11.8.3.4 Current harmonics of individual devices ............................................................................1104
11.8.3.5 Harmonics at the power supply connection point acc. to IEC 61000-2-2...........................1106
11.8.3.6 Harmonics at the power supply connection point acc. to IEEE 519...................................1106
11.9 Protecting persons from electromagnetic fields .................................................................1108
A Appendix.................................................................................................................................................1109
A.1 Manuals and technical support ..........................................................................................1109
A.1.1 Overview of the manuals....................................................................................................1109
A.1.2 Configuring support............................................................................................................1110
A.1.3 Product Support .................................................................................................................1111
Index.......................................................................................................................................................1113
SINAMICS G120X converter
10 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Fundamental safety instructions 1
1.1 General safety instructions
WARNING
Electric shock and danger to life due to other energy sources
Touching live components can result in death or severe injury.
● Only work on electrical devices when you are qualified for this job.
● Always observe the country-specific safety rules.
Generally, the following six steps apply when establishing safety:
1. Prepare for disconnection. Notify all those who will be affected by the procedure.
2. Isolate the drive system from the power supply and take measures to prevent it being
switched back on again.
3. Wait until the discharge time specified on the warning labels has elapsed.
4. Check that there is no voltage between any of the power connections, and between any of
the power connections and the protective conductor connection.
5. Check whether the existing auxiliary supply circuits are de-energized.
6. Ensure that the motors cannot move.
7. Identify all other dangerous energy sources, e.g. compressed air, hydraulic systems, or
water. Switch the energy sources to a safe state.
8. Check that the correct drive system is completely locked.
After you have completed the work, restore the operational readiness in the inverse sequence.
WARNING
Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively high impedance
Excessively low short-circuit currents can lead to the protective devices not tripping or tripping
too late, and thus causing electric shock or a fire.
● In the case of a conductor-conductor or conductor-ground short-circuit, ensure that the
short-circuit current at the point where the inverter is connected to the line supply at least
meets the minimum requirements for the response of the protective device used.
● You must use an additional residual-current device (RCD) if a conductor-ground short
circuit does not reach the short-circuit current required for the protective device to respond.
The required short-circuit current can be too low, especially for TT supply systems.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 11
Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively low impedance
Excessively high short-circuit currents can lead to the protective devices not being able to
interrupt these short-circuit currents and being destroyed, and thus causing electric shock or
a fire.
● Ensure that the prospective short-circuit current at the line terminal of the inverter does not
exceed the breaking capacity (SCCR or Icc) of the protective device used.
WARNING
Electric shock if there is no ground connection
For missing or incorrectly implemented protective conductor connection for devices with
protection class I, high voltages can be present at open, exposed parts, which when touched,
can result in death or severe injury.
● Ground the device in compliance with the applicable regulations.
WARNING
Electric shock due to connection to an unsuitable power supply
When equipment is connected to an unsuitable power supply, exposed components may
carry a hazardous voltage. Contact with hazardous voltage can result in severe injury or death.
● Only use power supplies that provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV-
(Protective Extra Low Voltage) output voltages for all connections and terminals of the
electronics modules.
WARNING
Electric shock due to equipment damage
Improper handling may cause damage to equipment. For damaged devices, hazardous
voltages can be present at the enclosure or at exposed components; if touched, this can result
in death or severe injury.
● Ensure compliance with the limit values specified in the technical data during transport,
storage and operation.
● Do not use any damaged devices.
SINAMICS G120X converter
12 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions
WARNING
Electric shock due to unconnected cable shield
Hazardous touch voltages can occur through capacitive cross-coupling due to unconnected
cable shields.
● As a minimum, connect cable shields and the conductors of power cables that are not used
(e.g. brake cores) at one end at the grounded housing potential.
WARNING
Arcing when a plug connection is opened during operation
Opening a plug connection when a system is operation can result in arcing that may cause
serious injury or death.
● Only open plug connections when the equipment is in a voltage-free state, unless it has
been explicitly stated that they can be opened in operation.
WARNING
Electric shock due to residual charges in power components
Because of the capacitors, a hazardous voltage is present for up to 5 minutes after the power
supply has been switched off. Contact with live parts can result in death or serious injury.
● Wait for 5 minutes before you check that the unit really is in a no-voltage condition and start
work.
NOTICE
Property damage due to loose power connections
Insufficient tightening torques or vibration can result in loose power connections. This can
result in damage due to fire, device defects or malfunctions.
● Tighten all power connections to the prescribed torque.
● Check all power connections at regular intervals, particularly after equipment has been
transported.
WARNING
Spread of fire from built-in devices
In the event of fire outbreak, the enclosures of built-in devices cannot prevent the escape of
fire and smoke. This can result in serious personal injury or property damage.
● Install built-in units in a suitable metal cabinet in such a way that personnel are protected
against fire and smoke, or take other appropriate measures to protect personnel.
● Ensure that smoke can only escape via controlled and monitored paths.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 13
Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions
WARNING
Active implant malfunctions due to electromagnetic fields
Inverters generate electromagnetic fields (EMF) in operation. Electromagnetic fields may
interfere with active implants, e.g. pacemakers. People with active implants in the immediate
vicinity of an inverter are at risk.
● As the operator of an EMF-emitting installation, assess the individual risks of persons with
active implants.
● Observe the data on EMF emission provided in the product documentation.
WARNING
Unexpected movement of machines caused by radio devices or mobile phones
When radio devices or mobile phones with a transmission power > 1 W are used in the
immediate vicinity of components, they may cause the equipment to malfunction.
Malfunctions may impair the functional safety of machines and can therefore put people in
danger or lead to property damage.
● If you come closer than around 2 m to such components, switch off any radios or mobile
phones.
● Use the "SIEMENS Industry Online Support app" only on equipment that has already been
switched off.
NOTICE
Damage to motor insulation due to excessive voltages
When operated on systems with grounded line conductor or in the event of a ground fault in
the IT system, the motor insulation can be damaged by the higher voltage to ground. If you use
motors that have insulation that is not designed for operation with grounded line conductors,
you must perform the following measures:
● IT system: Use a ground fault monitor and eliminate the fault as quickly as possible.
● TN or TT systems with grounded line conductor: Use an isolating transformer on the line
side.
WARNING
Fire due to inadequate ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating of components with subsequent fire
and smoke. This can cause severe injury or even death. This can also result in increased
downtime and reduced service lives for devices/systems.
● Ensure compliance with the specified minimum clearance as ventilation clearance for the
respective component.
SINAMICS G120X converter
14 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions
NOTICE
Overheating due to inadmissible mounting position
The device may overheat and therefore be damaged if mounted in an inadmissible position.
● Only operate the device in admissible mounting positions.
WARNING
Unrecognized dangers due to missing or illegible warning labels
Dangers might not be recognized if warning labels are missing or illegible. Unrecognized
dangers may cause accidents resulting in serious injury or death.
● Check that the warning labels are complete based on the documentation.
● Attach any missing warning labels to the components, where necessary in the national
language.
● Replace illegible warning labels.
NOTICE
Device damage caused by incorrect voltage/insulation tests
Incorrect voltage/insulation tests can damage the device.
● Before carrying out a voltage/insulation check of the system/machine, disconnect the
devices as all converters and motors have been subject to a high voltage test by the
manufacturer, and therefore it is not necessary to perform an additional test within the
system/machine.
WARNING
Unexpected movement of machines caused by inactive safety functions
Inactive or non-adapted safety functions can trigger unexpected machine movements that
may result in serious injury or death.
● Observe the information in the appropriate product documentation before commissioning.
● Carry out a safety inspection for functions relevant to safety on the entire system, including
all safety-related components.
● Ensure that the safety functions used in your drives and automation tasks are adjusted and
activated through appropriate parameterizing.
● Perform a function test.
● Only put your plant into live operation once you have guaranteed that the functions relevant
to safety are running correctly.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 15
Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions
Note
Important safety notices for Safety Integrated functions
If you want to use Safety Integrated functions, you must observe the safety notices in the Safety
Integrated manuals.
WARNING
Malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed parameter settings
As a result of incorrect or changed parameterization, machines can malfunction, which in turn
can lead to injuries or death.
● Protect the parameterization against unauthorized access.
● Handle possible malfunctions by taking suitable measures, e.g. emergency stop or
emergency off.
SINAMICS G120X converter
16 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Fundamental safety instructions
1.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge
1.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge
Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) are individual components, integrated circuits, modules
or devices that may be damaged by either electric fields or electrostatic discharge.
NOTICE
Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge
Electric fields or electrostatic discharge can cause malfunctions through damaged individual
components, integrated circuits, modules or devices.
● Only pack, store, transport and send electronic components, modules or devices in their
original packaging or in other suitable materials, e.g conductive foam rubber of aluminum
foil.
● Only touch components, modules and devices when you are grounded by one of the
following methods:
– Wearing an ESD wrist strap
– Wearing ESD shoes or ESD grounding straps in ESD areas with conductive flooring
● Only place electronic components, modules or devices on conductive surfaces (table with
ESD surface, conductive ESD foam, ESD packaging, ESD transport container).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 17
Fundamental safety instructions
1.3 Warranty and liability for application examples
1.3 Warranty and liability for application examples
Application examples are not binding and do not claim to be complete regarding configuration,
equipment or any eventuality which may arise. Application examples do not represent specific
customer solutions, but are only intended to provide support for typical tasks.
As the user you yourself are responsible for ensuring that the products described are operated
correctly. Application examples do not relieve you of your responsibility for safe handling when
using, installing, operating and maintaining the equipment.
SINAMICS G120X converter
18 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Fundamental safety instructions
1.4 Industrial security
1.4 Industrial security
Note
Industrial security
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Products and solutions from Siemens constitute one element of such a
concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected
to an enterprise network or the Internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and
only when appropriate security measures (e.g. using firewalls and/or network segmentation)
are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that can be implemented, please
visit:
Industrial security (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity)
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure.
Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they become
available, and that only the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are
no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customer’s exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed at:
Industrial security (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity)
Further information is provided on the Internet:
Industrial Security Configuration Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/108862708)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 19
Fundamental safety instructions
1.4 Industrial security
WARNING
Unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation
Software manipulations, e.g. viruses, Trojans, or worms, can cause unsafe operating states
in your system that may lead to death, serious injury, and property damage.
● Keep the software up to date.
● Incorporate the automation and drive components into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept for the installation or machine.
● Make sure that you include all installed products into the holistic industrial security concept.
● Protect files stored on exchangeable storage media from malicious software by with
suitable protection measures, e.g. virus scanners.
● On completion of commissioning, check all security-related settings.
● Protect the drive against unauthorized changes by activating the "Know-how protection"
converter function.
SINAMICS G120X converter
20 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Fundamental safety instructions
1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems
1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems
When assessing the machine- or system-related risk in accordance with the respective local
regulations (e.g., EC Machinery Directive), the machine manufacturer or system installer must
take into account the following residual risks emanating from the control and drive components
of a drive system:
1. Unintentional movements of driven machine or system components during commissioning,
operation, maintenance, and repairs caused by, for example,
– Hardware and/or software errors in the sensors, control system, actuators, and cables
and connections
– Response times of the control system and of the drive
– Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification
– Condensation/conductive contamination
– Parameterization, programming, cabling, and installation errors
– Use of wireless devices/mobile phones in the immediate vicinity of electronic
components
– External influences/damage
– X-ray, ionizing radiation and cosmic radiation
2. Unusually high temperatures, including open flames, as well as emissions of light, noise,
particles, gases, etc., can occur inside and outside the components under fault conditions
caused by, for example:
– Component failure
– Software errors
– Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification
– External influences/damage
3. Hazardous shock voltages caused by, for example:
– Component failure
– Influence during electrostatic charging
– Induction of voltages in moving motors
– Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification
– Condensation/conductive contamination
– External influences/damage
4. Electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields generated in operation that can pose a risk
to people with a pacemaker, implants or metal replacement joints, etc., if they are too close
5. Release of environmental pollutants or emissions as a result of improper operation of the
system and/or failure to dispose of components safely and correctly
6. Influence of network-connected communication systems, e.g. ripple-control transmitters or
data communication via the network
For more information about the residual risks of the drive system components, see the relevant
sections in the technical user documentation.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 21
Fundamental safety instructions
1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems
SINAMICS G120X converter
22 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Description 2
2.1 About the Manual
Who requires the operating instructions and what for?
These operating instructions primarily address fitters, commissioning engineers and machine
operators. The operating instructions describe the devices and device components and enable
the target groups being addressed to install, connect-up, set, and commission the converters
safely and in the correct manner.
What is described in the operating instructions?
These operating instructions provide a summary of all of the information required to operate the
converter under normal, safe conditions.
The information provided in the operating instructions has been compiled in such a way that it
is sufficient for all standard applications and enables drives to be commissioned as efficiently
as possible. Where it appears useful, additional information for entry level personnel has been
added.
The operating instructions also contain information about special applications. Since it is
assumed that readers already have a sound technical knowledge of how to configure and
parameterize these applications, the relevant information is summarized accordingly. This
relates, e.g. to operation with fieldbus systems.
What is the meaning of the symbols in the manual?
Reference to further information in the manual
Download from the Internet
DVD that can be ordered
End of a handling instruction.
❒
Examples of converter function symbols
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 23
Description
2.2 About the converter
2.2 About the converter
Use for the intended purpose
The converter described in this manual is a device to control a three-phase motor. The
converter is designed for installation in electrical installations or machines.
It has been approved for industrial and commercial use on industrial networks. Additional
measures have to be taken when connected to public grids.
The technical specifications and information about connection conditions are indicated on the
rating plate and in the operating instructions.
Use of third-party products
This document contains recommendations relating to third-party products. Siemens accepts
the fundamental suitability of these third-party products.
You can use equivalent products from other manufacturers.
Siemens does not accept any warranty for the properties of third-party products.
Use of OpenSSL
This product contains software developed in the OpenSSL project for use within the OpenSSL
toolkit.
This product contains cryptographic software created by Eric Young.
This product contains software developed by Eric Young.
Further information is provided on the Internet:
OpenSSL (https://www.openssl.org/)
Cryptsoft (mailto:eay@cryptsoft.com)
SINAMICS G120X converter
24 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Description
2.3 Scope of delivery
2.3 Scope of delivery
The delivery comprises at least the following components:
● A ready-to-run converter with loaded firmware. Each converter comprises a Power Module
and a Control Unit.
Options for upgrading and downgrading the firmware can be found on the Internet:
Firmware (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67364620)
● One set of connectors for connecting the I/O control terminals.
● One set of shield connection kit for the Power Module (available for FSA to FSG only).
● One set of shield connection kit for the Control Unit (available for FSD to FSG only).
● Compact Installation Instructions in German and English.
● A printed full-size drill pattern (available for FSD to FSG only) which allows the easy drilling
of the necessary mounting holes.
● The converter contains open-source software (OSS). The OSS license terms are saved in
the converter.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 25
Description
2.3 Scope of delivery
3-phase 380 V AC to 480 V AC (article number: 6SL32...)
99 5DWHGRXWSXW 5DWHGRXWSXW $UWLFOHQXPEHU
SRZHUN: KS FXUUHQW
N:$ KS$
)UDPHVL]H %DVHGRQDORZRYHUORDG :LWKRXWILOWHU :LWKILOWHU
)6$ 6/ <( 8 6/ <( $
6/ <( 8 6/ <( $
6/ <( 8 6/ <( $
6/ <( 8 6/ <( $
6/ <( 8 6/ <( $
)6% 6/ <( 8 6/ <( $
6/ <( 8 6/ <( $
6/ <( 8 6/ <( $
)6& 6/ <( 8 6/ <( $
6/ <( 8 6/ <( $
)6' 6/ <( 8 6/ <( $
6/ <( 8 6/ <( $
6/ <( 8 6/ <( $
6/ <( 8 6/ <( $
)6( 6/ <( 8 6/ <( $
6/ <( 8 6/ <( $
)6) 6/ <( 8 6/ <( $
6/ <( 8 6/ <( $
6/ <( 8 6/ <( $
6/ <( 8 6/ <( $
)6* 6/ <(
6/ <(
6/ <(
)6+ QD 6/ <( &
6/ <( &
6/ <( &
)6- QD 6/ <( &
6/ <( &
6/ <( &
(QYLURQPHQWFODVV&
(QYLURQPHQWFODVV&
:LWKRXWRSHUDWRUSDQHO
:LWK2SHUDWRU3DQHO%23
:LWK2SHUDWRU3DQHO,23
:LWKRXW,2([WHQVLRQ0RGXOH
:LWK,2([WHQVLRQ0RGXOH
)LHOGEXV8660RGEXV578 % %
)LHOGEXV352),1(7(WKHUQHW,3 ) )
)LHOGEXV352),%86 3 3
)LOWHU& $
)LOWHU& &
SINAMICS G120X converter
26 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Description
2.3 Scope of delivery
3-phase 500 V AC to 690 V AC (article number: 6SL32...)
9 9 5DWHGRXWSXW 5DWHGRXWSXW $UWLFOHQXPEHU
SRZHUN: KS FXUUHQW
N:$ KS$
)UDPHVL]H %DVHGRQDORZRYHUORDG :LWKRXWILOWHU :LWKILOWHU
)6' 6/ <+ 8 6/ <+ $
6/ <+ 8 6/ <+ $
6/ <+ 8 6/ <+ $
6/ <+ 8 6/ <+ $
QD 6/ <+ 8 6/ <+ $
6/ <+ 8 6/ <+ $
6/ <+ 8 6/ <+ $
6/ <+ 8 6/ <+ $
6/ <+ 8 6/ <+ $
6/ <+ 8 6/ <+ $
)6( 6/ <+ 8 6/ <+ $
6/ <+ 8 6/ <+ $
)6) 6/ <+ 8 6/ <+ &
6/ <+ 8 6/ <+ &
6/ <+ 8 6/ <+ &
6/ <+ 8 6/ <+ &
)6* QD 6/ <+ &
6/ <+ &
6/ <+ &
)6+ 6/ <+ &
6/ <+ &
6/ <+ &
6/ <+ &
)6- QD 6/ <+ &
6/ <+ &
6/ <+ &
(QYLURQPHQWFODVV&
(QYLURQPHQWFODVV&
:LWKRXWRSHUDWRUSDQHO
:LWK2SHUDWRU3DQHO%23
:LWK2SHUDWRU3DQHO,23
:LWKRXW,2([WHQVLRQ0RGXOH
:LWK,2([WHQVLRQ0RGXOH
)LHOGEXV8660RGEXV578 % %
)LHOGEXV352),1(7(WKHUQH,3 ) )
)LHOGEXV352),%86 3 3
)LOWHU& $
)LOWHU& &
)RUV\VWHPVDFFRUGLQJWR8/ 99
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 27
Description
2.3 Scope of delivery
Rating plate
① Article number ④ Net weight
② Product serial number ⑤ Degree of protection
③ Motor data
Figure 2-1 Example for a rating plate
You will find the rating plate at the side of the converter.
SINAMICS G120X converter
28 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Description
2.4 Directives and standards
2.4 Directives and standards
Relevant directives and standards
The following directives and standards are relevant for the converters:
European Low Voltage Directive
The converters fulfill the requirements stipulated in the Low-Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU, if
they are covered by the application area of this directive.
European Machinery Directive
The converters fulfill the requirements stipulated in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC, if they
are covered by the application area of this directive.
However, the use of the converters in a typical machine application has been fully assessed for
compliance with the main regulations in this directive concerning health and safety.
Directive 2011/65/EU
The converter fulfills the requirements of Directive 2011/65/EU relating to the restriction of the
use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic devices (RoHS).
European EMC Directive
The compliance of the converter with the regulations of the Directive 2014/30/EU has been
demonstrated by full compliance with the IEC/EN 61800-3.
EMC requirements for South Korea
The converters with the KC marking on the rating plate satisfy the EMC requirements for South
Korea.
Underwriters Laboratories (North American market)
Converters provided with one of the test symbols displayed fulfill the requirements stipulated for
the North American market as a component of drive applications, and are appropriately listed.
Eurasian conformity
The converter complies with the requirements of the Russia/Belarus/Kazakhstan customs
union (EAC).
Australia and New Zealand (RCM formerly C-Tick)
The converters showing the test symbols fulfill the EMC requirements for Australia and New
Zealand.
Immunity to voltage drop of semiconductor process equipment.
The converters comply with the requirements of standard SEMI F47-0706.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 29
Description
2.4 Directives and standards
Quality systems
Siemens AG employs a quality management system that meets the requirements of ISO 9001
and ISO 14001.
Certificates for download
● EC Declaration of Conformity: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
58275445)
● Certificates for the relevant directives, prototype test certificates, manufacturers
declarations and test certificates for functions relating to functional safety ("Safety
Integrated"): (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22339653/134200)
● Certificates for products that were certified by UL: (http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/
template/LISEXT/1FRAME/index.html)
● Certificates for products that were certified by TÜV SÜD: (https://www.tuev-sued.de/
industrie_konsumprodukte/zertifikatsdatenbank)
Standards that are not relevant
China Compulsory Certification
The converters do not fall in the area of validity of the China Compulsory Certification (CCC).
SINAMICS G120X converter
30 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Description
2.5 Device disposal
2.5 Device disposal
Recycling and disposal
For environmentally-friendly recycling and disposal of your old device, please contact a
company certified for the disposal of waste electrical and electronic equipment, and dispose of
the old device as prescribed in the respective country of use.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 31
Description
2.6 Optional components
2.6 Optional components
The following optional components are available so that you can adapt the converter to different
applications and ambient conditions:
● External line filter (Page 32)
● Line reactor (Page 33)
● Output reactor (Page 36)
● Sine-wave filter (Page 38)
● Line harmonics filter (Page 35)
● dv/dt filter plus VPL (Page 39)
● Push-through mounting kit (Page 41)
● Mounting grips for push-through mounted converters (Page 44)
● IP21 top cover (Page 44)
● Mounting kit for line-side cable connection, left (FSH only) (Page 45)
● I/O Extension Module (Page 45)
● Operator panel (Page 47)
● SINAMICS G120 Smart Access (Page 48)
Further information
Further information about the technical specifications and installing of these optional
components is described in the documentation provided.
2.6.1 External line filter
With a line filter, the converter achieves a higher radio interference class. The converters of
frame sizes FSA to FSF are available with and without integrated line filter. The converters of
frame sizes FSG to FSJ are available with integrated line filter only. External line filters are
available as optional components for the converters FSA to FSF (without integrated filters) as
well as FSH and FSJ.
NOTICE
Overloading the line filter when connected to line supplies that are not permissible
The line filter is only suitable for operation on TN or TT line supplies with a grounded neutral
point. If operated on other line supplies, the line filter will be thermally overloaded and will be
damaged.
● For converters equipped with line filter, only connect to TN or TT line supplies with a
grounded neutral point.
SINAMICS G120X converter
32 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Description
2.6 Optional components
Article number
Converter frame size Rated power (kW) Line filter
400 V converters
FSA 0.75 … 3 6SL3203-0BE17-7BA0
FSB 4 … 7.5 6SL3203-0BE21-8BA0
FSC 11 … 15 6SL3203-0BE23-8BA0
FSD 18.5 … 37 6SL3203-0BE27-5BA0
FSE 45 … 55 6SL3203-0BE31-1BA0
FSF 75 … 90 6SL3203-0BE31-8BA0
110 ... 132 6SL3203-0BE32-5BA0
FSG 160 … 250 -
FSH 315 ... 400 6SL3760-0MR00-0AA0
FSJ 450 ... 560
690 V converters
FSD 11 ... 37 6SL3000-0BG32-5AA0
FSE 45 ... 55
FSF 75 ... 132
FSH 315 ... 450 6SL3760-0MS00-0AA0
FSJ 500 ... 630
2.6.2 Line reactor
Note
Line reactors are available as optional components for converters of frame sizes FSH and FSJ
only. As the converters of frame sizes FSA to FSG have integrated DC-link chokes, line
reactors are thus not required.
A line reactor is needed for high short-circuit power levels, partly to protect the actual converter
against excessive harmonic currents, and thus against overload, and partly to limit line
harmonics to the permitted values. The harmonic currents are limited by the total inductance
comprising the line reactor and mains supply cable inductance. Line reactors can be omitted if
the mains supply cable inductance is increased sufficiently, i.e., the value of RSC must be
sufficiently small.
RSC = Relative Short-Circuit power: ratio of short-circuit power Sk Line at the supply connection
point to the fundamental apparent power Sinv of the connected converters (to IEC 60146-1-1).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 33
Description
2.6 Optional components
&RQQHFWLRQSRLQWRI
WKHFRQYHUWHU
6NOLQH
/LQH &RQYHUWHU
0DLQVXSSO\FDEOH
LQGXFWDQFH /LQHUHDFWRU
Requirements for line reactors
Rated power of converter (kW) Line reactor can be omitted for Line reactor is required for RSC
RSC
315 ... 500 ≤ 33 > 33
> 500 ≤ 20 > 20
It is recommended that a line reactor is always connected on the line side of the converter, as
in practice, it is often not known on which supply configuration individual converters are to be
operated, i.e. which supply short-circuit power is present at the converter connection point.
A line reactor can only be dispensed with when the value for RSC is less than that in the above
table. This is the case, when the converter, as shown in the following figure, is connected to the
line through a transformer with the appropriate rating.
Note
A line reactor is always needed if a line filter is used.
&RQQHFWLRQSRLQWRI &RQQHFWLRQSRLQWRI
WKHWUDQVIRUPHU WKHFRQYHUWHU
6NOLQH 6WUDQVI 6N
/LQH &RQYHUWHU
0DLQVXSSO\FDEOH
LQGXFWDQFH 8NWUDQVI
In this case, the line short-circuit power Sk1 at the connection point of the converter is
approximately:
Sk1 = Stransf / (Uk transf + Stransf / Sk2 line)
Stransf = Transformer rated power
Sk2 line = Short-circuit power of the higher-level voltage level
Uk transf = Relative short-circuit voltage
SINAMICS G120X converter
34 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Description
2.6 Optional components
Article number
Converter frame size Rated power (kW) Line reactor
400 V converters
FSH 315 6SL3000-0CE36-3AA0
355 ... 400 6SL3000-0CE37-7AA0
FSJ 450 6SL3000-0CE38-7AA0
500 ... 560 6SL3000-0CE41-0AA0
690 V converters
FSH 315 ... 400 6SL3000-0CH34-8AA0
450 6SL3000-0CH36-0AA0
FSJ 500
560 ... 630 6SL3000-0CH38-4AA0
2.6.3 Line harmonics filter
Note
Line harmonics filters are available as optional components for 400 V converters of frame sizes
FSB to FSG.
The line harmonics filters reshape the distorted current back to the desired sinusoidal
waveform. With the line harmonics filters, the converter fulfills the IEEE 519 standards.
If you use a line harmonics filter, you do not need a line reactor or a line filter.
When using the line harmonics filter, observe the following restrictions:
● The permissible line voltage is 380 V ... 415 V 3 AC ±10 %.
● The operating frequency is 50 Hz.
For technical details refer to the following link:
Line harmonics filter (https://www.schaffner.com/products/download/product/datasheet/
fn-3440-ecosine-50hz-passive-harmonic-filters/)
Article number
400 V Converter Rated power (kW) Line harmonics filter
frame size
FSB 5.5 UAC:FN34406112E2XXJRX
7.5 UAC:FN34408112E2XXJRX
FSC 11 UAC:FN344011113E2FAJRX
15 UAC:FN344015113E2FAJRX
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 35
Description
2.6 Optional components
400 V Converter Rated power (kW) Line harmonics filter
frame size
FSD 18.5 UAC:FN344019113E2FAJRX
22 UAC:FN344022115E2FAJRX
30 UAC:FN344030115E2FAJRX
37 UAC:FN344037115E2FAJRX
FSE 45 UAC:FN344045115E2FAJRX
55 UAC:FN344055115E2FAJRX
FSF 75 UAC:FN344075116E2FAJRX
90 UAC:FN344090116E2FAJRX
110 UAC:FN3440110118E2FAJRX
132 UAC:FN3440132118E2FAJXX
FSG 160 UAC:FN3440160118E2FAJXX
200 UAC:FN3440200118E2FAJXX
250 2x UAC:FN3440132118E2FAJXX *)
*)
Parallel connection between two line harmonics filters with 132 kW each
The converters FSA are not assigned to a line harmonics filter. If the rated power of the line
harmonics filter is not exceeded, you may operate several convertors FSA on a common line
harmonics filter.
Special restrictions for converter FSG
When connecting 400 V converter FSG with line harmonics filters, parameter p1300 must be
set to 20.
For converter FSG with line harmonics filter, operation is only permissible in the vector control
mode. It is not permissible for U/f mode to be used.
2.6.4 Output reactor
Note
Output reactors are available as optional components for converters FSD ... FSJ.
The output reactor reduces the voltage rate of rise and dampens transient voltage peak at the
converter output, and enable longer motor cables to be connected.
SINAMICS G120X converter
36 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Description
2.6 Optional components
Maximum permissible motor cable length (Page 82)
NOTICE
Damage to the output reactor by exceeding the maximum pulse frequency
The maximum permissible pulse frequency when using the output reactor is 4 kHz or 2 kHz
(for FSH/FSJ). The output reactor can be damaged if the pulse frequency is exceeded.
● When using an output reactor, the pulse frequency of the converter must not exceed 4 kHz
or 2 kHz (for FSH/FSJ).
NOTICE
Damage to the output reactor if it is not activated during commissioning
The output reactor may be damaged if it is not activated during commissioning.
● Activate the output reactor during commissioning via parameter p0230.
● Activate the output reactor during commissioning according to the electric specifications.
Article number
Converter frame size Rated power (kW) Output reactor
400 V converters
FSD 18.5 6SL3202-0AE23-8CA0
22 ... 37 6SE6400-3TC07-5ED0
FSE 45 ... 55 6SE6400-3TC14-5FD0
FSF 75 ... 90
110 6SL3000-2BE32-1AA0
132 6SL3000-2BE32-6AA0
FSG 160 6SL3000-2BE33-2AA0
200 6SL3000-2BE33-8AA0
250 6SL3000-2BE35-0AA0
FSH 315 6SL3000-2AE36-1AA0
355 ... 400 6SL3000-2AE38-4AA0
FSJ 450 ... 500 6SL3000-2AE41-0AA0
560 6SL3000-2AE41-4AA0
690 V converters
FSD 3 … 18.5 JTA:TEU2532-0FP00-4EA0
22 … 37 JTA:TEU9932-0FP00-4EA0
FSE 45 … 55 JTA:TEU9932-0FS00-0EA0
FSF 75 … 90 JTA:TEU9932-1FC00-1BA0
110 … 132 JTA:TEU9932-0FV00-1BA0
FSG 160 … 250 JTA:TEU4732-0FA00-0BA0
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 37
Description
2.6 Optional components
Converter frame size Rated power (kW) Output reactor
FSH 315 ... 355 6SL3000-2AH34-7AA0
400 6SL3000-2AH35-8AA0
450 6SL3000-2AH38-1AA0
FSJ 500 ... 630
2.6.5 Sine-wave filter
Note
Sine-wave filters are available as optional components for 400 V converters of frame sizes FSD
to FSG.
The sine-wave filter limits the voltage gradient and the capacitive recharging currents which
generally occur in converter operation. Therefore, when a sine-wave filter is used, longer
screened motor cables are possible and the motor lifetime reaches the same values which are
achieved when the motor is connected directly to the mains.
Maximum permissible motor cable length (Page 82)
When using sine-wave filters, observe the following restrictions:
● For rated power up to 90 kW, the pulse frequency should not exceed 8 kHz; for rated power
above 90 kW, the pulse frequency should be 4 kHz.
● The maximum permissible output frequency is 150 Hz.
NOTICE
Damage to the sine-wave filter if it is not activated during commissioning
The sine-wave filter may be damaged if it is not activated during commissioning.
● Activate the sine-wave filter during commissioning via parameter p0230.
● Activate the sine-wave filter during commissioning according to the electric specifications.
SINAMICS G120X converter
38 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Description
2.6 Optional components
Article number
Converter frame Rated power (kW) Sine-wave filter
size
400 V converters
FSD 18.5 … 22 6SL3202-0AE24-6SA0
30 6SL3202-0AE26-2SA0
37 6SL3202-0AE28-8SA0
FSE 45
55 6SL3202-0AE31-5SA0
FSF 75
90 6SL3202-0AE31-8SA0
110 … 132 6SL3000-2CE32-3AA0
FSG 1) 160 6SL3000-2CE32-8AA0
200 6SL3000-2CE33-3AA0
250 6SL3000-2CE34-1AA0
1)
For converter FSG with sine-wave filter, operation is only permissible in the vector control mode. It is
not permissible for U/f mode to be used.
2.6.6 dv/dt filter plus VPL
Note
dv/dt filters plus VPL are available as optional components for converters FSD to FSJ only.
A combination of dv/dt filter and a voltage peak limiter (VPL) - dv/dt filter plus VPL - are available
to suppress voltage peaks and enable longer motor cables to be connected.
Maximum permissible motor cable length (Page 82)
When using the dv/dt filter plus VPL, observe the following restrictions:
● The maximum output frequency is 150 Hz.
● The maximum pulse frequency is 4 kHz.
NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter plus VPL if it is not activated during commissioning
The dv/dt filter plus VPL may be damaged if it is not activated during commissioning.
● Activate the dv/dt filter plus VPL during commissioning via parameter p0230.
● Activate the dv/dt filter plus VPL during commissioning according to the electric
specifications.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 39
Description
2.6 Optional components
Further information is provided on the Internet:
● dv/dt filter plus VPL for G120X (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109766019)
● Functional principle and application cases (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109748645)
Article number
Converter frame size Rated power (kW) dv/dt filter plus VPL
400 V converters
FSD 18.5 JTA:TEF1203-0HB
22 …30 JTA:TEF1203-0JB
37 JTA:TEF1203-0KB
FSE 45
55 JTA:TEF1203-0LB
FSF 75
90 … 132 JTA:TEF1203-0MB
FSG 160 … 250 6SL3000-2DE35-0AA0
FSH 315 ... 400 6SL3000-2DE38-4AA0
FSJ 450 ... 560 6SL3000-2DE41-4AA0
690 V converters
FSD 3 …18.5 JTA:TEF1203-0GB
22 … 37 JTA:TEF1203-0HB
FSE 45 … 55 JTA:TEF1203-0JB
FSF 75 … 90 JTA:TEF1203-0KB
110 … 132 JTA:TEF1203-0LB
FSG 160 … 250 JTA:TEF1203-0MB
FSH 315 ... 400 6SL3000-2DH35-8AA0
450 6SL3000-2DH38-1AA0
FSJ 500 ... 630
SINAMICS G120X converter
40 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Description
2.6 Optional components
2.6.7 Push-through mounting kit
Overview
The optional push-through mounting kit is used to mount a converter in a control cabinet with
its heatsink passing through the cabinet panel. The push-through mounted converters can fulfill
a degree of protection of IP20 (UL Open Type). The back side of the converter must be
enclosed adequately.
Note
Push-through mounting kits are available for converters of frame sizes FSA to FSG only.
WARNING
Spread of fire from the back side of the converter
Component failures can cause spread of fire and smoke from the back side of a converter
installed with a push-through mounting kit. This can result in serious personal injury or
property damage.
● Cover the back side of the converter sufficiently with a metallic cover or a separate metallic
air duct or similar.
Article number
Converter frame size Article number
FSA 6SL3261-6GA00-0BA0
FSB 6SL3261-6GB00-0BA0
FSC 6SL3261-6GC00-0BA0
FSD 6SL3261-6GD00-0BA0
FSE 6SL3261-6GE00-0BA0
FSF 6SL3261-6GF00-0BA0
FSG 6SL3261-6GG00-0BA0
Mounting the converter with the push-through mounting kit
The push-through mounting kit comprises one piece of frame for converter FSA to FSC, and
four pieces of frames for converter FSD to FSG.
Mount the converter with push-through mounting kit on the uncoated panel of the control
cabinet. Further information about EMC-compliant installation is available in the following
section:
EMC-compliant setup of the machine or plant (Page 52)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 41
Description
2.6 Optional components
Procedure, FSA ... FSC
1. Prepare a cutout and holes in the control cabinet panel for the push-through mounting kit.
Dimension drawings and drill patterns (Page 64)
2. Fix the U-shape frame to the converter using screws (4 × M4 - 2.5 Nm) (step ①).
3. Push the converter heatsink through the cutout of the control cabinet.
4. Fix the converter to the cabinet panel with screws (FSA/FSB: 6 × M6 - 2.5 Nm; FSC: 6 × M6
- 3 Nm) (step ②).
You have correctly installed the converter with the push-through mounting kit.
❒
Procedure, FSD ... FSG
1. Prepare a cutout and holes in the control cabinet panel for the push-through mounting kit.
Dimension drawings and drill patterns (Page 64)
2. Fix the top and bottom frames (bearing "TOP" and "BOTTOM" marks respectively) to the
converter using screws (FSD/FSE: 8 × M5 - 3 Nm; FSF/FSG: 8 × M8 - 25 Nm) (step ①).
SINAMICS G120X converter
42 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Description
2.6 Optional components
3. For converter FSD to FSF, first attach the left and right frames (bearing "LEFT" and "RIGHT"
marks respectively) to the rear of the converter, and then fix them together with the top and
bottom frames using screw nuts (FSD/FSE: 8 × M5 - 3 Nm; FSF: 8 × M8 - 25 Nm) (step ②).
For converter FSG, after attaching the left and right frames, you also need to attach four
additional support clips from the front of the converter, and fix the clips with all mounting
frames together using the screw nuts (see below) (8 × M8 - 25 Nm).
4. Fix the mounting frames in place with screws (FSD: 4 × M5 - 6 Nm; FSE: 4 × M6 - 10 Nm;
FSF: 4 × M8 - 25 Nm; FSG: 4 × M10 - 50 Nm) at the mounting holes of the converter
(step ③).
5. Push the heatsink through the cutout of the control cabinet.
6. Fix the converter with the fixing screws (FSD/FSE: 6 × M5 - 6 Nm; FSF/FSG: 8 × M8 -
25 Nm) to the cabinet panel (step ④).
You have correctly installed the converter with the push-through mounting kit.
❒
Mounting the shield connection kit for the Power Module, push-through mounted FSD ... FSG
The push-through mounting kits for converters of frame sizes FSD to FSG provide separate
shielding plates for the power connections. In order to connect the line supply and motor cable
shields for a push-through mounted converter FSD to FSG, you must use the shielding plate
provided in the push-through mounting kit.
Procedure, FSD ... FSG
1. Remove the four screws at the bottom of the converter.
2. Attach the shielding plate to the converter and fix it in place by fastening the four screws.
For converter FSG, use two additional screws to fix the shielding plate to the cabinet panel.
)6')6) )6*
)6')6( 1P OEILQ
)6))6* 1P OEILQ
3. If the converter has an integrated line filter, mount the EMC connecting bracket provided in
the scope of delivery of the converter. For more information about mounting the EMC
connecting bracket, see the following section:
Mounting the shield connection kits (Page 67)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 43
Description
2.6 Optional components
You have now mounted the shield connection kit.
❒
2.6.8 Mounting grips for push-through mounted converters
For the push-through mounted converters FSD to FSG, the optional mounting grips can be
used to mount the converters without hoisting gear.
Article number: 6SL3200-0SM22-0AA0
For more information about the installation of this optional component, see the following
section:
Additional mounting instructions, FSD ... FSG (Page 69)
2.6.9 IP21 top cover
Overview
The optional IP21 top cover provides extra protection for the converter. The IP21 top cover is
mounted above the converter and includes the necessary seals to ensure compliance with
degree of protection IP21.
Mounting
Mounting instructions:
● Mount the IP21 top cover on the control cabinet panel using two screws.
● Mount the IP21 top cover right above the converter so that the cover and converter are
aligned by their centers.
● Maintain the clearance to the converter.
%
&OHDUDQFH
&
'
$
SINAMICS G120X converter
44 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Description
2.6 Optional components
Table 2-1 IP21 top cover dimensions - mm (inch)
Frame size Clearance A B C D Ø Tightening
torque
FSA 100 (3.9) 25 (1.0) 120 (4.7) 80 (3.15) 306 (12.0) 4.5 (0.18) 3 Nm
FSB 160 (6.3) 118 (4.6) 5.5 (0.22) (27 lbf.in)
FSC 29 (1.1) 260 (10.2) 170 (6.7) 323 (12.7) 6.0 (0.24) 6 Nm
FSD 300 (11.8) (53 lbf.in)
FSE 335 (13.2) 230 (9.1)
FSF, FSG 365 (14.4) 270 (10.6) 443 (17.4)
Article number
Converter frame size Article number
FSA 6SL3266-1PA00-0BA0
FSB 6SL3266-1PB00-0BA0
FSC, FSD 6SL3266-1PD00-0BA0
FSE 6SL3266-1PE00-0BA0
FSF, FSG 6SL3266-1PF00-0BA0
FSH, FSJ Not available
2.6.10 Mounting kit for line-side cable connection, left (FSH only)
Alternatively, for converters of frame size FSH, the line supply cables can be connected on the
left side of the converter using this optional mounting kit. The converter can then be installed
higher in the control cabinet, allowing more efficient use of the available cabinet space. In many
cases, use of this installation kit also helps in the implementation of effective cabinet cooling.
For converters of frame size FSJ, the line supply cables can only be connected from the top.
Article number: 6SL3366-1LH00-0PA0
2.6.11 I/O Extension Module
The SINAMICS G120X I/O Extension Module is available as an optional component. It expands
the number of the I/O terminals on the converter, enabling more converter control functions. It
also provides connection to the operator panel or SINAMICS G120 Smart Access.
Article number: 6SL3255-0BE00-0AA0
Note
The SINAMICS G120X I/O Extension Module is only supported on the G120X converter with
FS version 02 02 (FSA ... FSG)/02 (FSH/FSJ) or higher.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 45
Description
2.6 Optional components
Outline dimensions
P P
PP
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
P
P
PP
Interface overview
To access the interfaces at the front of the I/O Extension Module, you must open the front cover.
)URQWYLHZ %DFNYLHZ
① Interface to an operator panel or SINAMICS G120 Smart Access
② Switch for AI 2 (temperature/current) ,
7HPS
$,
③ Terminal strip X202
④ Hole for fixing screw
⑤ Terminal strips X203 and X204
⑥ Interface to converter
SINAMICS G120X converter
46 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Description
2.6 Optional components
Mounting
NOTICE
Device damage due to installation with power supply switched on
Installing or removing the SINAMICS G120X I/O Extension Module when the converter is in
the power-on state can cause damage to the device.
● Make sure that the converter is powered off before installing or removing the SINAMICS
G120X I/O Extension Module.
To mount the I/O Extension Module, you must first open the cover of X21 interface (Page 99)
at the front of the Control Unit of the converter, and then proceed with the following steps:
1. Locate the lower edge of the I/O Ex‐
tension Module into the matching re‐
cess of the Control Unit.
2. Plug the module onto the converter
until the latch audibly engages.
3. Open the cover of the terminal strips
at the front of the I/O Extension Mod‐
1P
ule, and fix the module with the pro‐ OEILQ
vided M3 screw.
You have now mounted the I/O Extension Module.
❒
Note
The SINAMICS G120X I/O Extension Module does not support the mounting in the door of a
control cabinet.
Wiring the terminal strips
For more information on wiring the terminal strips, refer to the following chapters:
Terminal strips (Page 101)
Wiring the terminal strips (Page 139)
2.6.12 Operator panel
An operator panel can be ordered either together with the converter or separately as an optional
component. It has been designed to enhance the interface and communications capabilities of
the converter. You can use an operator panel to commission, troubleshoot, and control the
converter, as well as to back up and transfer the converter settings.
The operator panels (BOP-2 and IOP-2) can be mounted either directly on the converter or in
a control cabinet door using a door mounting kit.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 47
Description
2.6 Optional components
Article number
Basic Operator Panel 2 (BOP-2) 6SL3255-0AA00-4CA1
Intelligent Operator Panel 2 (IOP-2) 6SL3255-0AA00-4JA2
SIPLUS IOP-2 (with 3C4 class coating) 6AG1255-0AA00-2JA2
IOP-2 Handheld 6SL3255-0AA00-4HA1
Door mounting kit for the operator panel 6SL3256-0AP00-0JA0
2.6.13 SINAMICS G120 Smart Access
The SINAMICS G120 Smart Access is a Wi-Fi-based Web server module and an engineering
tool. It has been designed for quick commissioning, parameterization, and maintenance of the
converters.
Article number: 6SL3255-0AA00-5AA0
FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109765499)
SINAMICS G120X converter
48 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Description
2.7 Motors and multi-motor drives that can be operated
2.7 Motors and multi-motor drives that can be operated
Siemens motors that can be operated
You can operate standard induction motors with the converter.
You can find information on further motors on the Internet:
Motors that can be operated (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
100426622)
Third-party motors that can be operated
You can operate standard induction motors from other manufacturers with the converter:
NOTICE
Insulation failure due to unsuitable third-party motor
A higher load occurs on the motor insulation in converter mode than with line operation.
Damage to the motor winding may occur as a result.
● Please observe the notes in the System Manual "Requirements for third-party motors"
Further information is provided on the Internet:
Requirements for third-party motors (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/79690594)
Permissible power of standard induction motors
The following standard induction motors are permissible without restriction:
● 400 V converter
Motor power in the range of 25% to 150% of the converter power
● 690 V converter
Motor power in the range of 50% to 125% of the converter power
Multi-motor operation
Multi-motor operation involves simultaneously operating several motors from one converter.
For standard induction motors, multi-motor operation is generally permissible.
Additional preconditions and restrictions relating to multi-motor operation are available on the
Internet:
Multi-motor drive (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84049346)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 49
Description
2.7 Motors and multi-motor drives that can be operated
SINAMICS G120X converter
50 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Mounting 3
3.1 Installing the label for the North American market
Description
Figure 3-1 Adhesive label with danger and warning notes for North America
The converter is supplied with an adhesive label with danger and warning notes for the North
American market.
Attach the adhesive label in the required language to the inside of the control cabinet where it
is clearly visible at all times.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 51
Mounting
3.2 EMC-compliant setup of the machine or plant
3.2 EMC-compliant setup of the machine or plant
The converter is designed for operation in industrial environments where strong
electromagnetic fields are to be expected.
Reliable and disturbance-free operation is only guaranteed for EMC-compliant installation.
To achieve this, subdivide the control cabinet and the machine or system into EMC zones:
EMC zones
/LQHVXSSO\ &RQWUROFDELQHW
)XVHVVZLWFKHVDQG
FRQWDFWRUV
/LQHUHDFWRURUOLQHILOWHU 9SRZHUVXSSO\
+LJKHUOHYHOFRQWURO
,QYHUWHU V\VWHP
&RQQHFWLRQRIVHQVRUV
2XWSXWUHDFWRU HJSRVLWLRQSUHVVXUHRU
WHPSHUDWXUH
'ULYHQPDFKLQH
Figure 3-2 Example of the EMC zones of a plant or machine
Inside the control cabinet
● Zone A: Line supply connection
● Zone B: Power electronics
Devices in Zone B generate energy-rich electromagnetic fields.
● Zone C: Control and sensors
Devices in Zone C do not generate any energy-rich electromagnetic fields themselves, but
their functions can be impaired by electromagnetic fields.
Outside the control cabinet
● Zone D: Motors
Devices in Zone D generate electromagnetic fields with a significant amount of energy
SINAMICS G120X converter
52 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Mounting
3.2 EMC-compliant setup of the machine or plant
3.2.1 Control cabinet
● Assign the various devices to zones in the control cabinet.
● Electromagnetically uncouple the zones from each other by means of one of the following
actions:
– Side clearance ≥ 25 cm
– Separate metal enclosure
– Large-area partition plates
● Route cables of various zones in separate cable harnesses or cable ducts.
● Install filters or isolation amplifiers at the interfaces of the zones.
Control cabinet assembly
● Connect the door, side panels, top and base plate of the control cabinet with the control
cabinet frame using one of the following methods:
– Electrical contact surface of several cm² for each contact location
– Several screw connections
– Short, finely stranded, braided copper wires with cross-sections
≥ 95 mm² / 000 (3/0) (‑2) AWG
● Install a shield support for shielded cables that are routed out of the control cabinet.
● Connect the PE bar and the shield support to the control cabinet frame through a large
surface area to establish a good electrical connection.
● Mount the control cabinet components on a bare metal mounting plate.
● Connect the mounting plate to the control cabinet frame and PE bar and shield support
through a large surface area to establish a good electrical connection.
● For screw connections onto painted or anodized surfaces, establish a good conductive
contact using one of the following methods:
– Use special (serrated) contact washers that cut through the painted or anodized surface.
– Remove the insulating coating at the contact locations.
Measures required for several control cabinets
● Install equipotential bonding for all control cabinets.
● Screw the frames of the control cabinets together at several locations through a large
surface area using serrated washers to establish a good electrical connection.
● In plants and systems where the control cabinets are lined up next to one another, and which
are installed in two groups back to back, connect the PE bars of the two cabinet groups at
as many locations as possible.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 53
Mounting
3.2 EMC-compliant setup of the machine or plant
&RQWUROFDELQHW &RQWUROFDELQHW
7UDQVIRUPHU
0RXQWLQJSODWH
)XVHVVZLWFKHVDQG
FRQWDFWRUV
/LQHILOWHU (OHFWULFDOO\
/
FRQGXFWLYH
/
,QYHUWHU FRQQHFWLRQV
/ WKURXJKDODUJH
1 VXUIDFHDUHD
2XWSXWUHDFWRURU
3( VLQHZDYHILOWHU
6KLHOGVXSSRUW
3( 3(
(TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJ
'ULYHQPDFKLQH
3(
)RXQGDWLRQ
Figure 3-3 Grounding and high-frequency equipotential bonding measures in the control cabinet and
in the plant/system
Further information
Additional information about EMC-compliant installation is available in the Internet:
EMC installation guideline (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
60612658)
3.2.2 Cables
Cables with a high level of interference and cables with a low level of interference are
connected to the converter:
● Cables with a high level of interference:
– Cable between the line filter and converter
– Motor cable
– Cable at the converter DC link connection
● Cables with a low level of interference:
– Cable between the line and line filter
– Signal and data cables
SINAMICS G120X converter
54 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Mounting
3.2 EMC-compliant setup of the machine or plant
Cable routing inside the cabinet
● Route the power cables with a high level of interference so that there is a minimum
clearance of 25 cm to cables with a low level of interference.
If the minimum clearance of 25 cm is not possible, insert separating metal sheets between
the cables with a high level of interference and cables with a low level of interference.
Connect these separating metal sheets to the mounting plate to establish a good electrical
connection.
● Cables with a high level of interference and cables with a low level of interference may only
cross over at right angles:
● Keep all of the cables as short as possible.
● Route all of the cables close to the mounting plates or cabinet frames.
● Route signal and data cables - as well as the associated equipotential bonding cables -
parallel and close to one another.
● Twist incoming and outgoing unshielded individual conductors.
Alternatively, you can route incoming and outgoing conductors in parallel, but close to one
another.
● Ground any unused conductors of signal and data cables at both ends.
● Signal and data cables must only enter the cabinet from one side, e.g. from below.
● Using shielded cables for the following connections:
– Cable between the converter and line filter
– Cable between the converter and output reactor
&RQWUROFDELQHW
0RXQWLQJSODWH
)XVHVVZLWFKHVDQG
FRQWDFWRUV
/LQHILOWHU
&RQQHFWVKLHOG
,QYHUWHU (OHFWULFDOO\
FRQGXFWLYH
&RQQHFWVKLHOG FRQQHFWLRQV
WKURXJKDODUJH
2XWSXWUHDFWRU VXUIDFHDUHD
6KLHOGVXSSRUW
&RQQHFWVKLHOG
Figure 3-4 Routing converter cables inside and outside a control cabinet
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 55
Mounting
3.2 EMC-compliant setup of the machine or plant
Routing cables outside the control cabinet
● Maintain a minimum clearance of 25 cm between cables with a high level of interference and
cables with a low level of interference.
● Using shielded cables for the following connections:
– Converter motor cable
– Signal and data cables
● Connect the motor cable shield to the motor enclosure using a PG gland that establishes a
good electrical connection.
Requirements relating to shielded cables
● Use cables with finely-stranded, braided shields.
● Connect the shield to at least one end of the cable.
&RQQHFWVKLHOG
6KLHOGSODWH
%DUHVKLHOG
7RRWKHG
WDSH
0RXQWLQJSODWH
+RVHFODPS
Figure 3-5 Examples for EMC-compliant shield support
● Attach the shield to the shield support directly after the cable enters the cabinet.
● Do not interrupt the shield.
● Only use metallic or metallized plug connectors for shielded data cables.
3.2.3 Electromechanical components
Surge voltage protection circuit
● Connect surge voltage protection circuits to the following components:
– Coils of contactors
– Relays
– Solenoid valves
– Motor holding brakes
● Connect the surge voltage protection circuit directly at the coil.
● Use RC elements or varistors for AC-operated coils and freewheeling diodes or varistors for
DC-operated coils.
SINAMICS G120X converter
56 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Mounting
3.3 Power losses and air cooling requirements
3.3 Power losses and air cooling requirements
Overview
To protect the components from overheating, the control cabinet requires a cooling air flow,
which depends on the power loss of the individual components.
Measures in order to ensure that the components are adequately cooled
● Add the power losses of the individual components.
– Technical data (Page 1081)
– Use the manufacturers' data for components, for example reactors or filters.
● Calculate the air flow required:
airflow [l/s] = power loss [W] * 0.86 / ΔT [K]
Power loss: Total of the power losses of the individual components.
Δ T: Permissible temperature rise in the control cabinet.
● Ensure that the control cabinet is appropriately ventilated and equipped with suitable air
filters.
● Ensure that the components maintain the specified clearances with respect to one another.
● Ensure that the components are provided with adequate cooling air through the cooling
openings.
● Use appropriate air barriers to prevent cooling air short circuits.
● Ensure that the electrical cabinet is adequately ventilated and is equipped with suitable air
filters.
Comply with the replacement intervals of the air filter.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 57
Mounting
3.3 Power losses and air cooling requirements
Further measures
Air barriers can prevent converters from overheating each other. Such measures are only
necessary in extreme cases when the cooling air temperature reaches the maximum ambient
temperature of the converter.
$LUEDUULHU
&RROLQJDLUIORZ &RROLQJDLUIORZ
$LUEDUULHU
SINAMICS G120X converter
58 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Mounting
3.4 Mounting the converter
3.4 Mounting the converter
3.4.1 Basic installation rules
Requirements
General installation conditions
When installing the converters carefully observe the conditions listed below in order to
guarantee reliable, continuous and disturbance-free operation.
● The converters are designed for installation in a control cabinet.
● The converters are suitable for mounting on non-combustible surfaces only, for example, on
an uncoated metal mounting plate.
● The converters comply with degree of protection IP20 according to IEC 60529. The
converters utilizing push-through technology fulfill a degree of protection of IP20 (UL Open
Type).
● The converters are certified for use in environments with degree of pollution 2 without
condensation, that is in environments where no conductive pollution/dirt occurs.
Condensation is not permissible.
● Ensure that the device is free of dust and dirt. When using a vacuum cleaner, this must
comply with ESD equipment rules.
● Keep the device away from water, solvents and chemicals. Take care to install it away from
potential water hazards, for example, do not install it beneath pipes that are subject to
condensation. Avoid installing it where excessive humidity and condensation may occur.
● Keep the device within the maximum and minimum operating temperatures. At
temperatures > 40 °C and installation altitudes > 1000 m, the devices must be derated.
● Ensure that the correct level of ventilation and air flow is provided.
● Fast temperature changes of the air drawn in (for example, by using cooling units) are not
permitted due to the danger of condensation.
● Ensure that all converters and the cabinet are grounded according to the EMC guidelines
EMC-compliant setup of the machine or plant (Page 52)
Converters for systems in the United States/Canada (UL/cUL)
● For a system configuration in conformance with UL/cUL, use the UL/cUL-approved fuses or
circuit breakers under the following Internet address:
Fuses and circuit breakers (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109762895)
● The converter of frame size FSA has to be mounted in an enclosure sized min. 500 mm
(height) × 400 mm (depth) × 255 mm (width).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 59
Mounting
3.4 Mounting the converter
● The integrated solid-state short-circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection.
– UL: Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the Manufacturer
Instructions, National Electrical Code and any additional local codes.
– CSA: Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the Canadian
Electrical Code, Part I
● On the system side, provide branch circuit protection in conformance with NEC or CEC, Part
1, and the local regulations.
● The converters provide internal motor protection corresponding to UL61800-5-1. The
protection threshold is 115% of the converter full load current. When commissioning, you
can adapt the motor overload protection using parameter p0640.
● For frame sizes FSF and FSG, to connect the line supply and motor only use UL approved
ring-type cable lugs (ZMVV), which are certified for the particular voltage, with a permissible
current of at least 125% of the input and output current. Use the higher value as basis.
● The line and output voltage may not be lower than 400 V or higher than 600 V.
● Only use copper cables rated for 60 °C/75 °C. For converters FSA to FSC, only use copper
cables rated for 75 °C 1).
1)
When connecting a cable with a higher rated temperature, do not reduce the cable cross-
section.
Example: If a cable with a rated temperature of 60 °C is specified, the cable cross-section must
also be rated according to 60 °C. When connecting a cable with a higher rated temperature,
e. g. 90 °C, you must determine the cable cross-section as if the cable had a rated temperature
of 60 °C.
WARNING
Risk of explosion or spread of fire from built-in devices
Short circuits in the converter or its components may cause explosion or fire in the control
cabinet, which can result in serious personal injury or property damage.
● Install built-in devices in a suitable and robust metal cabinet in such a way that personnel
are protected against the explosive shock and fire, or take other appropriate protection
measures, for example, using five safety cabinet locks additionally.
Protection against the spread of fire
The device may be operated only in closed housings or in control cabinets with protective
covers that are closed, and when all of the protective devices are used. The installation of the
device in a metal control cabinet or the protection with another equivalent measure must
prevent the spread of fire and emissions outside the control cabinet.
Protection against condensation or electrically conductive contamination
Protect the device, e.g. by installing it in a control cabinet with degree of protection IP54
according to IEC 60529 or NEMA 12. Further measures may be necessary for particularly
critical operating conditions.
SINAMICS G120X converter
60 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Mounting
3.4 Mounting the converter
If condensation or conductive pollution can be excluded at the installation site, a lower degree
of control cabinet protection may be permitted.
Mounting position
Figure 3-6 Only mount in the vertical position with the line connection at the bottom
3.4.2 Dimension drawings and drill patterns
Overview
The converters are designed to be mounted in accordance with the dimension drawings, in a
cabinet using screws, nuts and washers.
Note
To comply with EMC specifications, it is recommended to mount the converter on an electrically
conductive mounting panel in the cabinet. This mounting panel should be connected to the
cabinet PE.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 61
Mounting
3.4 Mounting the converter
3.4.2.1 Mounting the converter on the mounting panel
Dimensions and clearance distances - mm (in)
:L
GW K
&OHDUDQFH$
SWK
SWK 'H
+HLJKWLQFOXGLQJVKLHOGSODWH
GH
DO
LRQ
GLW
$G
+HLJKW
&OHDUDQFH%
Fram Height Height in‐ Width Depth Additional depth Clearance 2)
e cluding With oper‐ With With I/O A B lateral front
size shield ator panel G120 Extension
plate Smart Ac‐ Module
cess
FSA 232 330 (13.0) 73 (2.8) 209 9 (0.4) 7 (0.3) 27 (1.1) 1) 80 (3.1) 100 0 3) -
(9.1) (8.2) (3.9)
FSB 275 383 (15.1) 100 209 9 (0.4) 7 (0.3) 27 (1.1) 1) 80 (3.1) 100 0 3) -
(10.8) (3.9) (8.2) (3.9)
FSC 295 423 (16.7) 140 209 9 (0.4) 7 (0.3) 27 (1.1) 1) 80 (3.1) 100 0 3) -
(11.6) (5.5) (8.2) (3.9)
FSD 472 625 (24.6) 200 239 9 (0.4) 7 (0.3) 27 (1.1) 1) 300 350 0 3) -
(18.6) (7.9) (9.4) (11.8) (13.8)
FSE 551 729 (28.7) 275 239 9 (0.4) 7 (0.3) 27 (1.1) 1) 300 350 0 3) -
(21.7) (10.8) (9.4) (11.8) (13.8)
FSF 709 969 (38.1) 305 360 9 (0.4) 7 (0.3) 27 (1.1) 1) 300 350 0 3) -
(27.9) (12) (14.2) (11.8) (13.8)
FSG 999 1255 305 360 9 (0.4) 7 (0.3) 27 (1.1) 1) 300 350 0 3) -
(39.3) (49.4) (12) (14.2) (11.8) (13.8)
SINAMICS G120X converter
62 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Mounting
3.4 Mounting the converter
Fram Height Height in‐ Width Depth Additional depth Clearance 2)
e cluding With oper‐ With With I/O A B lateral front
size shield ator panel G120 Extension
plate Smart Ac‐ Module
cess
FSH 1696 - 548 393 - - - 200 250 30 (1.2) 100
(66.7) (21.6) (15.5) (7.9) (9.8) (3.9)
FSJ 1621 - 801 393 - - - 200 250 30 (1.2) 100
(63.8) (31.5) (15.5) (7.9) (9.8) (3.9)
1)
Additional depth of 11.8 mm/9.8 mm is required with an operator panel/G120 Smart Access mounted onto the I/O Extension
Module.
2)
The cooling air clearances A and B refer to the converter without shield plate.
3)
For tolerance reasons, we recommend a lateral clearance of approx. 1 mm. For converters FSA ... FSC, the side-by-side
mounting (with 0 mm lateral clearance) allows a maximum surrounding air temperature during operation of 50 °C; in case
of the surrounding air temperature higher than 50 °C, a lateral clearance of 50 mm or greater is required.
Drill patterns - mm (in)
Table 3-1 FSA … FSG
Drill pattern Dimensions FSA FSB FSC FSD FSE FSF FSG
$ A 55 (2.2) 80 (3.2) 118 (4.6) 170 (6.7) 230 (9.1) 270 265
(10.6) (10.4)
B 221.5 265 283 430 509 680 970.5
(8.7) (10.4) (11.1) (16.9) (20.0) (26.8) (38.2)
Ø 5 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 5.5 (0.2) 6.0 (0.2) 6.5 (0.3) 8.5 (0.3) 12 (0.5)
Fixings (bolts, 4 × M4 4 × M4 4 × M5 4 × M5 4 × M6 4 × M8 4 × M10
washers, nuts)
Tightening torque 2.5 2.5 2.5 6 (53.1) 10 (88.5) 25 50
%
- Nm (lbf. in) (22.1) (22.1) (22.1) (221.3) (442.5)
Note: For the converters FSD to FSG, a printed full-size drill pattern is supplied with each converter. This can be used to easily
drill the necessary mounting holes.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 63
Mounting
3.4 Mounting the converter
Table 3-2 FSH and FSJ
Drill pattern Dimensions FSH FSJ
* $ $ $ A1 160 (6.3) 200 (7.9)
A2 150 (5.9) 290 (11.4)
A3 160 (6.3) 200 (7.9)
A4 225 (8.9) 345 (13.6)
A5 225 (8.9) 345 (13.6)
B 1419 (55.9) 1399 (55.1)
G1 39 (1.5) 60.5 (2.4)
G2 49 (1.9) 60.5 (2.4)
Ø 20 (0.8) 20 (0.8)
%
Fixings (bolts, wash‐ 7 × M8 7 × M8
ers, nuts)
Tightening torque - Nm 25 (221.3) 25 (221.3)
(lbf. in)
* $ $
3.4.2.2 Mounting the converter utilizing push-through technology (FSA to FSG only)
Use the optional mounting kit to mount a converter in push-through technology in a control
cabinet. Mounting instructions are provided in the following section:
Push-through mounting kit (Page 41)
The following dimension drawings and drilling patterns are not to scale.
Panel thickness of the control cabinet ≤ 3.5 mm
SINAMICS G120X converter
64 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Mounting
3.4 Mounting the converter
Mounting dimensions - mm (in)
)6$)6& )6')6* 7
7 7
:
7
:
+ +
+ +
Frame size Width (W) Height Depth
H (with shield plate) H1 (wthout shield plate) T1 T2
FSA 127 (5.0) 324 (12.7) 234 (9.2) 160 (6.3) 57 (2.2)
FSB 154 (6.1) 384 (15.1) 279 (10.9) 153 (6.0) 66 (2.6)
FSC 192 (7.6) 407 (16.0) 295 (11.6) 154 (6.1) 65 (2.5)
FSD 271 (10.6) 647 (25.5) 514 (20.2) 142 (5.6) 98 (3.9)
FSE 360 (14.2) 773 (30.4) 600 (23.6) 145 (5.7) 93 (3.7)
FSF 396 (15.6) 1003 (39.5) 749 (29.5) 185 (7.3) 185 (7.3)
FSG 384 (15.1) 1275 (50.2) 1026 (40.4) 184 (7.2) 188 (7.4)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 65
Mounting
3.4 Mounting the converter
Cutouts and drilling patterns - mm (in)
H D D D D
H
H H
E E E E
E E E E
)6')6( )6) )6*
F
E E E E
F F F
E E
E E
G G
E G E E G E
)6$)6&
G
)RXUKROHVIRUPRXQWLQJWKH
VKLHOGLQJSODWH
Frame Drilling dimensions - mm (in) Fixings Tighten‐
size a b b1 b2 c d e Ø ing tor‐
que - Nm
(lbf.in)
FSA 105.5 102.5 - - 233 (9.2) 82 (3.2) 18.5 6.5 (0.26) 6 × M6 2.5 (22.1)
(4.2) (4.0) (0.72)
FSB 132.5 117 (4.6) - - 280 (11) 109 (4.3) 28 (1.1) 6.5 (0.26) 6 × M6 2.5 (22.1)
(5.2)
FSC 170.5 120.5 - - 296 149 (5.9) 32 6.5 (0.26) 6 × M6 3 (26.6)
(6.7) (4.7) (11.6) (1.26)
FSD 246 (9.7) 235 (9.3) 241 (9.5) - 497 216 (8.5) 10.5 7 (0.3) 6 × M5 6 (53.1)
(19.6) (0.4)
FSE 323 275 281 - 588 (23) 292 19 (0.7) 7 (0.3) 6 × M5 6 (53.1)
(12.7) (10.8) (11.1) (11.5)
FSF 350 220 (8.7) 250 (9.8) 226 (8.9) 731 324 20.5 10 (0.4) 8 × M8 25
(13.8) (28.8) (12.8) (0.8) (221.3)
FSG 350 328 330 (13) 328 1015 (40) 324 14.6 10/11*(0. 8 × M8/ 25
(13.8) (12.9) (12.9) (12.8) (0.6) 4) 4 × M10* (221.3)/
50
(442.5)*
* Four holes for mounting the shielding plate
SINAMICS G120X converter
66 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Mounting
3.4 Mounting the converter
3.4.3 Mounting the shield connection kits
Overview
We recommend that you mount the shield connection kits provided. The shield connection kit
makes it simpler to install the converter in compliance with EMC regulations and to provide
strength relief for the connected cables.
Mounting the shield connection kit for the Control Unit
Note
The shield connection kit for the Control Unit is available for converters FSD to FSG only.
Attach the shielding plate to the bottom of the Control Unit, and use a cross-tip screwdriver PZ
to tighten the screw to fix it onto the converter.
01P OEILQ
Mounting the shield connection kit for the Power Module, FSA ... FSC
Procedure
1. Remove the two screws and two U clamps from the bottom of the converter ①.
2. Mount the two U clamps with the two screws on the shield plate ②.
3. Fasten the shield plate in place using two screws ③.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 67
Mounting
3.4 Mounting the converter
1P OEILQ
You have now mounted the shield connection kit.
❒
Mounting the shield connection kit for the Power Module, FSD ... FSG
Note
For a push-through mounted converter FSD ... FSG, use the shielding plate provided in the
push-through mounting kit.
Push-through mounting kit (Page 41)
Procedure, FSD/FSE
1. Attach the shielding plate to the bottom of the converter and fasten it in place using four
screws ①.
2. If the converter has an integrated line filter, mount the EMC connecting bracket additionally.
a. Slide the EMC connecting bracket into the converter, so that it is held in the converter by
the clamping spring ②.
The EMC connecting bracket is positioned correctly if you feel some resistance when pulling
it out from the converter.
b. Having ensured that it is positioned correctly, fasten the EMC connecting bracket in place
using three screws ③.
1P OEILQ
1P OEILQ
You have now mounted the shield connection kit.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
68 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Mounting
3.4 Mounting the converter
Procedure, FSF
1. Attach the shielding plate to the bottom of the converter and fasten it in place using four
screws ①.
2. If the converter has an integrated line filter, mount the EMC connecting bracket additionally
by fastening it to the shielding plate with four screws ②.
1P OEILQ
1P OEILQ
You have now mounted the shield connection kit.
❒
Procedure, FSG
1. Secure each side part to the shielding plate with two screws ①.
2. Attach the shielding plate to the bottom of the converter and fasten it in place using six
screws ②.
3. If the converter has an integrated line filter, mount the EMC connecting bracket additionally
by fastening it to the shielding plate with four screws ③.
1P OEILQ
1P OEILQ
1P OEILQ
You have now mounted the shield connection kit.
❒
3.4.4 Additional mounting instructions for FSD ... FSJ
3.4.4.1 Additional mounting instructions, FSD ... FSG
When mounting the converters FSD to FSG, the weight of the converter should be considered
and appropriate hoisting gear for mounting should be applied.
converter weight:
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 69
Mounting
3.4 Mounting the converter
Technical data dependent on the power (Page 1089)
Hoisting gear
For cabinet panel mounted converters
Use crane lifting lugs and the appropriate hoisting gear when mounting the converters on the
cabinet panel.
)6')6) )6*
For push-through mounted converters
Use the hoisting gear shown below when mounting the converters utilizing push-through
technology.
SINAMICS G120X converter
70 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Mounting
3.4 Mounting the converter
Mounting grips
Alternatively, you can use the mounting grips to mount the push-through mounted converters
without hoisting gear. Install the four mounting grips as shown below.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 71
Mounting
3.4 Mounting the converter
3.4.4.2 Additional mounting instructions, FSH/FSJ
Installing
Removing the pallet
/LIWLQJIUDPH
5HPRYHWKHWUDQVSRUWDWLRQIL[WXUHV
DQGSDOOHWW
Lifting the converter into the cabinet
The converters FSH and FSJ can be lifted into the cabinet with the lifting eyes. Use a lifting
harness where the ropes or chains are maintained in a vertical position. The device must not
be lifted at an angle because this can damage the housing. Rope spreaders may have to be
used.
PP LQ
SINAMICS G120X converter
72 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Mounting
3.4 Mounting the converter
The electrical cabinet installation must be realized in accordance with the dimension drawings
supplied. The minimum cabinet sizes for the installation of converters FSH and FSJ are
provided as follows:
● For FSH: 800 mm (width) × 2000 mm (height) × 600 mm (depth)
● For FSJ: 1000 mm (width) × 2000 mm (height) × 600 mm (depth)
Before converter installation, remove the side, back, and top plates from the cabinet frame, and
mount at least two support plates in the cabinet.
&DELQHWIUDPH
6XSSRUWSODWHV
After the converter is installed in the cabinet, install the side, back, and top plates back to the
cabinet frame.
3.4.5 Mounting the optional components
Depending on the particular application, converters may require optional components. For
more information about optional components, refer to Section "Optional components
(Page 32)".
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 73
Mounting
3.4 Mounting the converter
SINAMICS G120X converter
74 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring 4
4.1 Line supply and motor
Note
Fault protection for the motor circuit
The electronic overcurrent trip complies with the requirements laid down in IEC
60364-3-2:2005/AMD1:- Section 411 for protection against electric shock.
● Observe the installation specifications provided in this manual.
● Observe the applicable installation standards.
● Ensure the continuity of the protective conductor.
4.1.1 Permissible line supplies
4.1.1.1 TN system
Overview
([DPSOH 6HSDUDWHWUDQVIHURI1DQG3(
JURXQGHGQHXWUDOSRLQW
/
/
/
1
3(
7UDQVIRUPHURU 7RWKHV\VWHP
JHQHUDWRU
Figure 4-1 TN system
A TN system transfers the PE protective conductor to the installed plant or system using a cable.
Generally, in a TN system the neutral point is grounded. There are versions of a TN system with
a grounded line conductor, e.g. with grounded L1.
The TN system can transfer the neutral conductor N and the PE protective conductor either
separately or combined.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 75
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
Function description
Table 4-1 Converter operated on a TN system
Converter Line supply with grounded neutral Line supply with grounded phase conduc‐
tor and a voltage ≤ 600 V phase to phase
Frame size A B C D E F G H J A B C D E F G H J
Without line ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ○ ○ ○ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ○ ○ ○
filter
Integrated ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ○ ○ - - - - - - ✓ ○ ○
line filter C2 1)
Integrated ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - ✓ ✓ ✓
line filter C3 1) 1) 1)
✓ = Operation permissible
✓ 1) Operation permissible once grounding screw has been removed
If the grounding screw has been removed, the converter no longer fulfills the requirements of class C3.
- Operation not permissible
○ Converter not available
More information on removing the grounding connection in the converter:
Removing functional grounding of the converter (Page 78)
SINAMICS G120X converter
76 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
4.1.1.2 TT system
Overview
([DPSOH 7UDQVIHURI1JURXQGHGQHXWUDO
SRLQW
/
/
/
1
3(
7UDQVIRUPHURU 7RWKHV\VWHP
JHQHUDWRU
Figure 4-2 TT system
In a TT system, the transformer grounding and the installation grounding are independent of
one another.
There are TT supplies where the neutral conductor N is either transferred – or not.
Function description
Note
Operation in IEC or UL systems
For installations in compliance with IEC, operation on TT systems is permissible. For
installations in compliance with UL, operation on TT systems is not permissible.
Table 4-2 Converter operated on a TT system
Converter Line supply with grounded neutral Line supply with grounded phase conduc‐
tor and a voltage ≤ 600 V phase to phase
Frame size A B C D E F G H J A B C D E F G H J
Without line ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ○ ○ ○ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ○ ○ ○
filter
Integrated ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ○ ○ - - - - - - ✓ ○ ○
line filter C2 1)
Integrated ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - ✓ ✓ ✓
line filter C3 1) 1) 1)
✓ = Operation permissible
✓ 1) Operation permissible once grounding screw has been removed
If the grounding screw has been removed, the converter no longer fulfills the requirements of class C3.
- Operation not permissible
○ Converter not available
More information on removing the grounding connection in the converter:
Removing functional grounding of the converter (Page 78)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 77
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
4.1.1.3 IT system
Overview
([DPSOH 7UDQVIHURI1LPSHGDQFHZLWK
UHVSHFWWR3(SURWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
/
/
/
1
3(
7UDQVIRUPHURU 7RWKHV\VWHP
JHQHUDWRU
Figure 4-3 IT system
In an IT system, all of the conductors are insulated with respect to the PE protective conductor
– or connected to the PE protective conductor through an impedance.
There are IT systems with and without transfer of the neutral conductor N.
Function description
Table 4-3 Converter operated on an IT system
Converter Line supply with grounded neutral Line supply with grounded phase conduc‐
tor and a voltage ≤ 600 V phase to phase
Frame size A B C D E F G H J A B C D E F G H J
Without line ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ○ ○ ○ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ○ ○ ○
filter
Integrated - - - - - - - ○ ○ - - - - - - - ○ ○
line filter C2
Integrated ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - ✓ ✓ ✓
line filter C3 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
✓ = Operation permissible
✓ 1) Operation permissible once grounding screw has been removed
If the grounding screw has been removed, the converter no longer fulfills the requirements of class C3.
- Operation not permissible
○ Converter not available
More information on removing the grounding connection in the converter:
Removing functional grounding of the converter (Page 78)
4.1.1.4 Removing functional grounding of the converter
If you wish to use the converters with C2/C3 line filter, note the information in the following
sections:
TN system (Page 75)
SINAMICS G120X converter
78 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
TT system (Page 77)
IT system (Page 78)
Precondition
Switch off the converter power supply before removing the functional grounding.
WARNING
Electric shock as a result of a residual charge in power components
After the power supply has been switched off, it takes up to 5 minutes until the capacitors in
the converter have discharged so that the residual charge is at a non-hazardous level.
Therefore, touching the converter immediately after powering off can result in electric shock
due to residual charge in the power components.
● Check the voltage at the converter connections before you remove the functional
grounding.
Removing screw for functional grounding, FSG
Disconnecting the basic interference suppression module, FSH/FSJ
If a converter FSH or FSJ is operated from a non-grounded line supply (IT system), the
connection to the basic interference suppression module of the Power Module must be opened.
Procedure
1. Open the left-hand housing flap of the converter by rotating latch ①.
2. Release the two captive screws ③ and ④.
3. Release the screws ②, ⑤, and ⑥, but do not remove the screws.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 79
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
4. Swivel the connection clip around the axis of rotation of screw ⑤ towards the right, until the
connection clip can be fastened using screw ⑥.
5. Tighten the screws ②, ⑤, and ⑥ with 6 Nm.
&RQQHFWLRQFOLS
You have disconnect the basic interference suppression module.
❑
NOTICE
Device damage due to not removing the connection clip with a non-grounded line supply
When operating a converter FSH or FSJ on a non-grounded line supply (IT system), failure to
open the connection to the basic interference suppression module can cause significant
damage to the device.
● With a non-grounded line supply (IT system), open the connection to the basic interference
suppression module.
4.1.2 Minimum cross-section of the protective conductor
Overview
A high leakage current flows through the protective conductor in converter operation. The
protective conductor of the converter must not be interrupted for safe touch protection in
converter operation.
This primarily results in requirements for the minimum conductor cross-section of the protective
conductor.
No restriction applies to the length of the protective conductor for touch protection. However,
short protective conductors are advantageous for EMC-compliant installation.
SINAMICS G120X converter
80 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
Description
WARNING
Electric shock due to interrupted protective conductor
The drive components conduct a high leakage current via the protective conductor. Touching
conductive parts when the protective conductor is interrupted can result in death or serious
injury.
● Observe the minimum cross-section of the protective conductor.
/
/
/
3(
① Protective conductor for line feeder cables
② Protective conductor for converter line feeder cables
③ Protective conductor between PE and the control cabinet
④ Protective conductor for motor feeder cables
The minimum cross-section of the protective conductor ① … ④ depends on the cross-section
of the line or motor feeder cable:
● Line or motor feeder cable ≤ 16 mm2
⇒ Minimum cross-section of the protective conductor = cross-section of the line or motor
feeder cable
● 16 mm² < line or motor feeder cable ≤ 35 mm2
⇒ Minimum cross-section of the protective conductor = 16 mm2
● Line or motor feeder cable > 35 mm2
⇒ Minimum cross-section of the protective conductor = ½ cross-section of the line or motor
feeder cable
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 81
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
Additional requirements placed on the protective conductor ①:
● For permanent connection, the protective conductor must fulfill at least one of the following
conditions:
– The protective conductor is routed so that it is protected against damage along its
complete length.
Cables routed inside switch cabinets or enclosed machine housings are considered to
be adequately protected against mechanical damage.
– As a conductor of a multi-conductor cable, the protective conductor has a cross-section
≥ 2.5 mm² Cu.
– For an individual conductor, the protective conductor has a cross-section ≥ 10 mm² Cu.
– The protective conductor consists of 2 individual conductors with the same cross-section.
● When connecting a multi-core cable using an industrial plug connector according to EN
60309, the protective conductor must have a cross-section of ≥ 2.5 mm² Cu.
● Observe the local regulations for protective conductors subject to a high leakage current at
the installation site.
4.1.3 Maximum permissible motor cable length
Overview
The longer the motor cable of the converter, the higher the line capacitances of the motor cable.
Line capacitances cause an additive current in converter operation and present an additional
load to the converter.
Therefore, a maximum admissible motor cable length is specified for each converter.
Options between converter and motor, e.g. output reactors, partially compensate for the line
capacitances. Certain options make the use of longer motor cables possible.
If you must achieve compliance with an EMC category, additional restrictions apply to the motor
cable length in order to control conducted emissions.
400 V converter
EMC category according to EN 61800‑3
Shielded motor cables and EMC-compliant installation are required in order to satisfy an EMC
category.
SINAMICS G120X converter
82 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
EMC-compliant setup of the machine or plant (Page 52)
Table 4-4 Maximum permissible motor cable length depending on EMC category 1)
Converter Maximum motor cable length
frame size
400 V
First C1 Converters FSA … 50 m
envi‐ with exter‐ FSC
ron‐ nal C1 filter FSD 10
ment m 4)
FSE 20
m 4)
FSF 10
m 4)
Sec‐ C2 Converters FSA 150 m 5)
ond en‐ with integra‐ FSB … 150 m
viron‐ ted C2 filter FSC
ment
FSD … 150 m 2)
FSG
C3 Converters FSA … 150 m
with integra‐ FSC
ted C2 filter FSD … 200 m
FSG
Converters FSG 200 m
with integra‐ FSH … 150 m 3)
ted C3 filter FSJ
Converters FSA … 50 m
without line FSG
filters with
external C3
filter
1)
The values apply to a pulse frequency at the factory setting. If you set other pulse frequencies, you
must ensure that the EMC category is complied with on the plant or system side.
2)
2 kHz pulse frequency for FSF, 75 kW and 90 kW
3)
For motor cable lengths of 100 m … 150 m with additional basic interference suppression module
(available on request)
4)
Additional installation of ferrite sleeves required
5)
With Siemens MOTION-CONNECT cables.
With CY cables or equivalent cables: The converter only complies with the limit values of the EMC
category with a cable length ≤ 100 m
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 83
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
To meet the requirements of conducted emissions in accordance with C1, you must observe
the maximum motor cable length and also install ferrite sleeves on the FSD … FSF converter.
Converter frame Ferrite sleeve Installation
size
400 V
FSD Schaffner RU41572-1 1 ferrite sleeve per line terminal L1, L2 and L3
FSE Schaffner VAC 1 ferrite sleeve per motor terminal U2, V2 and W2
W517-02
FSF Schaffner RU41572-2 2 ferrite sleeves per line terminal L1, L2 and L3 and
2 ferrite sleeves per motor terminal U2, V2 and W2
Install the ferrite sleeves as closely as possible to the converter terminals on the connecting
cables.
Figure 4-4 Ferrite sleeves on the connecting cables
SINAMICS G120X converter
84 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
Without EMC category
Table 4-5 Maximum permissible motor cable length 1)
Converter frame Maximum motor cable length
size
400 V
With shiel‐ Without output FSA … FSC 150 m
ded motor reactor or dv/dt FSD … FSE 200 m
cable filter
FSF … FSG 300 m
FSH … FSJ 150 m
With 2 output FSD … FSE 350 m
reactors in ser‐ FSF … FSG 525 m
ies
With 1 output FSH … FSJ 300 m
reactor
With dv/dt filter FSD … FSE 350 m
FSF … FSG 650 m
FSH … FSJ 300 m
With sine-wave FSA … FSF 200 m
filter FSG 300 m
With un‐ Without output FSA … FSC 300 m
shielded reactor or dv/dt FSD … FSE 300 m
motor cable filter
FSF … FSG 450 m
FSH … FSJ 200 m
With 2 output FSD … FSE 525 m
reactors in ser‐ FSF … FSG 800 m
ies or dv/dt filter
With 1 output FSH … FSJ 450 m
reactor or dv/dt
filter
With sine-wave FSA … FSF 300 m
filter FSG 450 m
1)
The values are valid for a pulse frequency set at the factory
690 V converter
EMC category according to EN 61800‑3
Shielded motor cables and EMC-compliant installation are required in order to satisfy an EMC
category.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 85
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
EMC-compliant setup of the machine or plant (Page 52)
Table 4-6 Maximum permissible motor cable length depending on EMC category 1)
Converter Maximum motor cable length
frame size
690 V
Second C2 Converters with FSD … FSE 100 m
environ‐ integrated filter
ment C3 Converters with FSD … FSE 150 m
integrated filter FSF … FSG 150 m
FSH … FSJ 150 m 3)
Converters with‐ FSD … FSG 50 m
out line filters with
external C3 filter
1)
The values are valid for a pulse frequency set at the factory
2)
Operation in first environment, C2 only with external C2 line filter plus line reactor
3)
For motor cable lengths of 100 m ... 150 m, an additional basic interference suppression module shall
be provided on the line side (available on request).
Without EMC category
Table 4-7 Maximum permissible motor cable length 1)
Converter frame Maximum motor cable length
size
690 V
With shiel‐ Without output FSD 18.5 kW … 200 m
ded motor reactor or dv/dt 30 kW
cable filter FSD 37 kW … 300 m
FSG
FSH … FSJ 150 m
With 2 output FSD 18.5 kW … 350 m
reactors in ser‐ 30 kW
ies FSD 37 kW … 525 m
FSG
With 1 output FSH … FSJ 300 m
reactor
With dv/dt filter FSD 18.5 kW … 350 m
30 kW
FSD 37 kW … 450 m 2) 650 m 3)
FSG
FSH … FSJ 300 m
SINAMICS G120X converter
86 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
Converter frame Maximum motor cable length
size
690 V
With un‐ Without output FSD 18.5 kW … 300 m
shielded reactor or dv/dt 30 kW
motor cable filter FSD 37 kW … 450 m
FSG
FSH … FSJ 200 m
With 2 output FSD 18.5 kW … 525 m
reactors in ser‐ 30 kW
ies FSD 37 kW … 800 m
FSG
With 1 output FSH … FSJ 450 m
reactor
With dv/dt filter FSD 18.5 kW … 525 m
30 kW
FSD 37 kW … 625 m 2) 800 m 3)
FSG
FSH … FSJ 450 m
1)
The values are valid for a pulse frequency set at the factory
2)
At a maximum voltage of 1350 V at the motor terminals
3)
At a maximum voltage of 1500 V at the motor terminals
More information
The permissible length of the motor cable also depends on the quality of the motor cable and
the pulse frequency. The above values apply to high-quality cables, e.g. CY100.
Dimension the motor cable such that the resistance losses are less than 5% of the rated
converter power.
4.1.4 Connecting the converter and converter components
WARNING
Electric shock when the motor terminal box is open
As soon as the converter is connected to the line supply, the motor connections of the
converter may carry dangerous voltages. When the motor is connected to the converter, there
is danger to life through contact with the motor terminals if the motor terminal box is open.
● Close the motor terminal box before connecting the converter to the line supply.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 87
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
4.1.4.1 Connection overview
Note
Available options
For information about available options, see Chapter "Optional components (Page 32)".
/LQHVLGHRSWLRQ &RQYHUWHU 0RWRUVLGHRSWLRQ
/ / / 8 8 8
/ / / 9 9 9
/ / / : : :
3( 3( 3( 3( 3(
/ 5 )
'&16 8
/
'&36 9
/ 3( :
3( 9ROWDJH3HDN/LPLWHU
Figure 4-5 Connecting converters FSA … FSG and their optional components
Converter Line side option 1) Motor side option 2)
Line harmonics filter Line filter Output reactor Sine-wave filter dv/dt filter + VPL
400 V
FSA ... FSC √ 3) √ -- -- --
FSD...FSG √ √ √ √ √
690 V
FSD ... FSG -- √ √ -- √
1)
If you choose to use line harmonics filter and line filter simultaneously, the order of connection should be: Line -> Line
harmonics filter -> Line filter -> Converter.
2)
If you choose to use the motor side option, it is enough to use only one of the options.
3)
Line harmonics filter is not provided for 400 V converters FSA.
SINAMICS G120X converter
88 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
/LQHILOWHU /LQHUHDFWRU &RQYHUWHU 2XWSXWUHDFWRURU
GYGWILOWHU
/ / 8 8 8 8 8 8
/ / 9 9 9 9 9 9
/ / : : : : : :
3( 3( 3( 3( 3(
'&3 '&1
/ '&16 8
'&36 9
/
3( :
/
3( 9ROWDJH3HDN/LPLWHU
Figure 4-6 Connecting converters FSH/FSJ and their optional components
4.1.4.2 Connnecting converters
Connecting converters, FSA ... FSC
)
/LQN
5
/ 8
/ 9
672
/
:
/LQHVXSSO\ 0RWRU
Figure 4-7 Connections for the line supply, motor and DC link terminals
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 89
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
Connecting converters, FSD ... FSG
You must remove the connection cover from the converter in order to connect the line supply
and motor to the converter.
● For FSD/FSE, remove the connection cover as shown below:
1 2
Figure 4-8 Removing the connection cover, FSD/FSE
● For FSF/FSG, remove the two screws from the cover and then remove it. In addition, you
must make openings on the connection cover for the line supply and power cables. Use side
cutters or a fine saw blade.
1 2 3
Figure 4-9 Removing the connection cover and making openings, FSF/FSG
After the cables are connected, you must re-attach the cover in order to re-establish the touch
protection of the converter.
SINAMICS G120X converter
90 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
)
5
)
5
)
672
5
)6*
/ 672
/ / 8
/ 8 / 9
9 / :
:
/ 672
/
/ 8
9
:
/LQHVXSSO\ 0RWRU /LQHVXSSO\ 0RWRU /LQHVXSSO\ 0RWRU
Figure 4-10 Connections for the line supply and motor
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 91
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
Additional information when connecting FSG converters
Remove the plastic insulating plate as shown below to gain better access to the terminals for
the power connections.
WARNING
Damage to converter as a result of operation without insulating plates
Without the insulating plates, voltage flashovers may occur between the phases.
● Replace the insulating plates after connecting the cables.
Connecting converters, FSH/FSJ
To access the line and motor terminals, release the screws (three screws on FSH, and four
screws on FSJ) from the front cover, and remove the cover towards the front.
7; 7;
1P
7;
Figure 4-11 Removing the front cover
SINAMICS G120X converter
92 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
The diagram shows the layout of line and motor terminals and DC link terminals. For converter
FSH, you must make openings on the cable entry protection cover for the line and motor
connections according to the diameter of the cable to be introduced.
/LQHVXSSO\ /LQHVXSSO\
3( 3( 3(
3(
9 9
8 :
8 :
)6+ )6-
:
:
9 '&3
9 '&3
8
8 '&1 '&1
3(
3(
3( 3(
0RWRU 0RWRU
Figure 4-12 Connections for the line supply, motor and DC link terminals
Rules for connecting the line:
● Only use the front connections.
● You may connect 1 or 2 cables to each of the screws of the line connections.
Rules for connecting the motor:
● First use the front connections.
● If you use more than one cable per connection: Distribute the cables per connection evenly
on the left and right side of the connection.
● Only use the rear connections when the front connections are occupied.
After the cables are connected, you must re-attach the covers in order to re-establish the touch
protection of the converter (screw tightening torque: 6 Nm/53 lbf.in).
WARNING
Electric shock if the cable entry protection cover is not cut correctly
A cable entry protection cover which is not cut correctly may lead to dangerous touch voltage
which can result in serious injury or death.
● Make proper openings on the cover according to the required cable diameter in order to
ensure degree of protection IP20.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 93
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
4.1.4.3 Cable cross-sections and screw tightening torques
Converter Terminal/ Terminal/connector Cable cross-section Screw tightening Stripped insula‐
connector type torque tion length
type
FSA Line, motor, Line, mo‐ Screw- 1.5 ... 2.5 mm2, 16 ... 14 AWG 0.5 Nm, 4.4 lbf.in 9 ... 10 mm
FSB PE and DC tor, PE type ter‐ 1.5 ... 6 mm2, 16 ... 10 AWG 1.3 Nm, 11.5 12 ... 13 mm
link and DC minal lbf.in
link
FSC 1.5 ... 16 mm2 , 16 ... 6 AWG 1.3 Nm, 11.5 12 ... 13 mm
lbf.in
FSD Line, motor, 10 ... 35 mm2 , 8 ... 2 AWG 4.5 Nm, 39.8 18 mm
and PE lbf.in
DC Link 16 mm2 , 6 AWG 1.7 Nm, 15 lbf.in
FSE Line, motor, 25 ... 70 mm , 4 ... 3/0 AWG
2
10 Nm, 88.5 lbf.in 25 mm
and PE
DC Link 26.7 ... 35 mm2 , 3 ... 2 AWG 3.7 Nm, 33
lbf.in 1)
1) For converters FSE 690 V, the tightening torque is 4.5 Nm (40 lbf.in).
Convert‐ Terminal/connector type Terminal/connector type Cable cross-section Screw tighten‐
er ing torque
FSF Line, motor, Line, motor and 35 mm² ... 2 × 120 mm2 22 ... 25 Nm
and PE PE 2 … 2 × 4/0 AWG 194.7 ...
Cable lug ac‐ Cable lug ac‐ 221.3 lbf.in
cording to cording to
DC link SN71322 for SN71322 for
FSG Line, motor, M10 bolts M10 bolts 35 mm² ... 2 × 185 mm2 50 Nm
and PE 2 ... 2 × 350 MCM 442.5 lbf.in
Convert‐ Terminal/connector type Cable cross-section Screw tighten‐
er ing torque
FSH Line, mo‐ Max. 4 × 240 mm2 , 4 × 500 MCM 50 Nm
tor and DC @ 400 V @ 480 V 442.5 lbf.in
Cable lug ac‐
cording to Recommen‐ 315 kW Line 2 × 240 mm² 2 ×185 mm²
DIN 46234 ded Motor 2 × 185 mm² 2 × 150 mm²
for M12 DC 2 × 185 mm 2
2 × 150 mm²
screws1)
355 kW Line 3 × 150 mm² 2 × 240 mm²
Motor 2 × 240 mm² 2 × 185 mm²
DC 2 × 240 mm 2
2 × 185 mm²
400 kW Line 3 × 185 mm² 2 × 240 mm²
Motor 2 × 240 mm² 2 × 240 mm²
DC 3 × 150 mm2 2 × 240 mm²
SINAMICS G120X converter
94 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
Convert‐ Terminal/connector type Cable cross-section Screw tighten‐
er ing torque
FSJ Line, mo‐ Max. 450 kW Line 6 × 240 mm2 , 6 × 500 MCM 50 Nm
tor and DC … 442.5 lbf.in
Cable lug ac‐ 560 kW
cording to
450 kW Motor, DC 4 × 240 mm2 , 4 × 500 MCM
DIN 46234
for M12 500 kW, Motor 8 × 240 mm2 , 8 × 500 MCM
screws1) 560 kW DC 4 × 240 mm2 , 4 × 500 MCM
@ 400 V @ 480 V
Recommen‐ 450 kW Line 4 × 185 mm² 4 × 120 mm²
ded Motor 4 × 150 mm² 4 × 120 mm²
DC 4 × 120 mm 2
3 × 120 mm²
500 kW Line 4 × 185 mm² 4 × 150 mm²
Motor 4 × 185 mm² 4 × 150 mm²
DC 4 × 150 mm 2
3 × 150 mm²
560 kW Line 4 × 240 mm² 4 × 185 mm²
Motor 4 × 240 mm² 4 × 150 mm²
DC 4 × 185 mm2 3 × 185 mm²
1)
Alternative copper busbars can be used for line and motor connections. Make sure that you use copper busbars of the same
cross-sections as the connecting busbars of the converter itself (FSH: 64 mm × 8 mm; FSJ: 80 mm × 8 mm).
4.1.4.4 Cable lug
For cable connections using cable lugs, the maximum dimensions of the cable lugs are listed
in the table below. These cable lugs are not to exceed these dimensions, as mechanical
fastening and adherence to the voltage distances is not guaranteed otherwise.
G
G
Converter Screw/bolt Cable cross-sec‐ a (mm) c (mm) d1 (mm) d (mm) l (mm)
frame size tion (mm2)
FSF M10 120 26 22 10.5 32 59.5
FSG 185 30 27 10.5 39 72.5
FSH/FSJ M12 240 32 23.5 13 42 92
The cable lugs can be attached as shown in the following diagram if, at one connection per
phase, two cable lugs can be connected.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 95
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
4.1.4.5 Connecting the cable shields (FSA ... FSG only)
For EMC-compliant wiring, you must connect the cable shields to the shield plate of the
converter.
Use shielded cables for the following connection:
● Communication cable
● Control cable
● Motor cable
Before connecting the cable shields, you need to strip the cable insulation.
The following illustrations take converters with PROFINET interfaces as examples.
Connecting the cable shields, FSA ... FSC converters
The shield support for converter FSB is displayed as
an example.
① Unshielded line cable
② Cable tie
③ Unshielded communication cable
④ Unlacquered, good electrically conducting
mounting plate
⑤ Shielded control cable
⑥ Toothed tape
⑦ Shielded motor cable
SINAMICS G120X converter
96 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
Connecting the cable shields, FSD ... FSG converters
The shield support for converter FSD is displayed as an example.
① Unshielded line cable ④ Toothes tape
② Shielded motor cable ⑤ Shielded control cable
③ Hose clamp ⑥ Unshielded communication cable
Note
Unshielded communcation cable
It is unnecessary to connect the cable shields if you use Siemens PROFINET cables for
communication. When using communication cables from other manufacturers, make sure that
you connect the cable shields with toothed tapes.
Note
Recommended connecters for PROFIBUS DP cable
We recommend Siemens connectors with the following article numbers for connecting the
PROFIBUS DP cable:
● 6GK1500-0FC10
● 6GK1500-0EA02
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 97
Wiring
4.1 Line supply and motor
4.1.5 Connecting the motor to the converter in a star or delta connection
Overview
Standard induction motors up to a rated power of approximately 3 kW are usually connected in
star/delta connection (Y/Δ) at 400 V/230 V. For a 400‑V line supply, you can connect the motor
to the converter either in a star or in a delta connection.
Function description
Operating the motor in a star connection
: 8 9 8
9
In a star connection, the motor can provide its
81 rated torque MN in the range 0 … rated fre‐
+] quency fN.
8 9 : I1 I
0 Rated voltage UN = 400 V is available at a rat‐
01 ed frequency fN = 50 Hz.
8 The motor goes into field weakening above
3 I the rated frequency. In field weakening, the
8
available motor torque decreases proportion‐
31
9 ally with 1/f. In field weakening, the available
: I power remains constant.
Operating the motor in a delta connection with 87 Hz characteristic
: 8 9 8
9
In a delta connection, the motor is oper‐
෭෪8 1 ated with a voltage and frequency above
81 9
+] +] its rated values. As a consequence, the
8 9 : 0 I1 ෭෪I1 I motor power is increased by a factor
01 √3 ≈ 1.73.
In the range f = 0 … 87 Hz, the motor can
8
3 I output its rated torque MN.
8 ෭෪31 The maximum voltage U = 400 V is avail‐
9 31
able at a frequency of f = √3 × 50 Hz ≈
:
I 87 Hz.
The motor only goes into field weakening above 87 Hz.
The higher motor power when operated with an 87 Hz characteristic has the following
disadvantages:
● The converter must supply approximately 1.73x current. Select a converter based on its
rated current - and not its rated power.
● The motor temperature increases more significantly than when operated with f ≤ 50 Hz.
● The motor must have windings that are approved for a voltage > rated voltage UN.
● As the fan impeller rotates faster, the motor has a higher noise level than operation with
f ≤ 50 Hz.
SINAMICS G120X converter
98 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
4.2 Control interfaces
4.2.1 Overview of the interfaces
Interfaces at the front of the Control Unit
To access the interfaces at the front of the Control Unit, you must open the front door.
;
;
;
;
;;;
① Terminal strip ⑤ Memory card slot
② Switch for AI 0 and AI 1 $, ⑥ To secure the I/O Extension Module
(U/I) $,
, 8
⑦⑧ Terminal strips
③ Status LED ⑨ Fieldbus interfaces at the lower side
④ Connection to the Operator Panel, Smart Access or I/O Extension Module
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 99
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Table 4-8 Number of inputs and outputs
Digital inputs DI Digital outputs DO Analog inputs AI Analog outputs AO Input for motor
temperature sen‐
sor
6 2 2 1 1
Converter with 3C3 certification
To meet the requirements of environmental class 3C3, you can only remove the following parts
when you use the appropriate interfaces:
● Dummy for memory card slot
● Cover for fieldbus interface
4.2.2 Fieldbus interface allocation
Interfaces at the lower side of the Control Unit
352),1(7
5;UHFHLYHGDWD
5;UHFHLYHGDWD
7;WUDQVPLWGDWD
7;WUDQVPLWGDWD
; ;
3 3
352),%86
6KLHOGJURXQG
5['7['3UHFHLYHDQGWUDQVPLW %%
&1753FRQWUROVLJQDO
'*1'UHIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDOIRUGDWD &&
93VXSSO\YROWDJH
; 5['7['1UHFHLYHDQGWUDQVPLW $$
56
9UHIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDO
56b3UHFHLYHDQGWUDQVPLW
56b1UHFHLYHDQGWUDQVPLW
6KLHOG
;
SINAMICS G120X converter
100 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
4.2.3 Terminal strips
Terminal strips with wiring example
;
9,1 99RSWLRQDOSRZHUVXSSO\
9H[W
*1',1 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDO
ุN˖ $, $QDORJLQSXW 99P$P$
*1' H[W $, 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDO
9RXW 9RXWSXWPD[P$
9H[W
*1' 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOV DQG
ุN˖ $, $QDORJLQSXW 99P$P$
*1' H[W $, 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOb
9RXW 9RXWSXWPD[P$
*1' 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOV DQG
',&20 5HIHUHQFHIRUGLJLWDOLQSXWV
; ;
'21& ',
'212 ', 'LJLWDOLQSXWV
'2&20 ', &RQQHFWLRQFRQWDFWVVZLWFKLQJWRSRUPSRWHQWLDO
'21& ', ORZ b9KLJK!b9PD[b9
'212 ',
'2&20 ',
'LJLWDORXWSXWV $2 $QDORJRXWSXW 9ಹ9P$ಹP$
PD[$9'& *1' 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOV DQG
702725
PD[$9$& 702725 7HPSHUDWXUHVHQVRU 37&.7<3WELPHWDO
1)
The digital outputs are designed for low voltage systems of overvoltage category II. In installations of overvoltage category
III, galvanic isolation is required between the supply network and the digital output.
Restriction for FSB and FSC in installations compliant with UL: max. 0.5 A
Figure 4-13 Wiring the digital inputs with p-switching contacts and an internal 24 V power supply (terminal 9)
*1' All terminals with the "GND" reference potential are internally connected with one another.
',&20 The reference potential "DI COM" is not internally connected with "GND".
→ If, as shown above, you wish to use the 24 V supply from terminal 9 as supply for the digital
inputs, a jumper is required between terminals 28 and 69.
9,1 When an optional 24 V power supply is connected at terminals 31, 32, even when the Power
*1',1 Module is disconnected from the line supply, the Control Unit remains in operation. The Control
Unit thus maintains fieldbus communication, for example.
→ for terminals 31, 32, only use a 24 VDC power supply according to SELV (Safety Extra Low
Voltage) or PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage).
→ if you also wish to use the power supply at terminals 31, 32 for the digital inputs, then you must
connect "DI COM" and "GND IN" with one another at the terminals.
$, You may use the internal 10 V power supply or an external power supply for the analog inputs.
$, → When you use the internal 10 V power supply, you must connect AI 0 or AI 1 with "GND".
$,
$,
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 101
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Additional options for wiring the digital inputs
The following diagram shows how you supply the digital inputs and digital outputs with an
external voltage.
If you wish to connect an external power supply with the GND potential of the converter, then
you must connect terminals 28 and 69 together.
;
9RXW
9H[W *1'
*1' H[W ',&20
; ;
'21& ',
'212 ',
'2&20 ',
'21& ',
'212 ',
'2&20 ',
Figure 4-14 Connecting contacts switching to p potential with an external power supply
The following diagram shows how you use the digital inputs for the contacts that switch to m
potential.
;
9RXW
*1' H[W *1'
9H[W ',&20
; ;
'21& ',
'212 ',
'2&20 ',
'21& ',
'212 ',
'2&20 ',
Figure 4-15 Connecting contacts switching to m potential with an external power supply
WARNING
Electric shock due to unsuitable power supply
When equipment is connected to an unsuitable power supply, exposed components may
carry a hazardous voltage that might result in serious injury or death.
● Only use power supplies that provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV-
(Protective Extra Low Voltage) output voltages (maximum 60 V DC briefly) for all
connections and terminals of the electronics modules.
SINAMICS G120X converter
102 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
NOTICE
Damage when the 24V output voltage is short-circuited
If the following conditions occur simultaneously, the Control Unit with PROFINET interface
can be damaged:
1. The converter is operational.
2. The 24V output voltage develops a short-circuit at terminal 9.
3. The ambient temperature reaches the maximum permissible value.
4. The external 24V power supply voltage at terminals 31 and 32 reaches the maximum
permissible value.
● Ensure that not all of these conditions are simultaneously satisfied.
4.2.4 Terminals strips for I/O Extension Module
Wiring I/O Extension Module
The optional I/O Extension Module expands the number of G120X I/O terminals. See the
following for the wiring diagram of the I/O Extension Module:
;
$,7(03 6HQVRU3W/*1L',11LRUDQDORJLQSXW P$P$
$,7(03 6HQVRU3W/*1L',11L
*1' 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDO
$2 $QDORJRXWSXW 9ಹ9P$ಹP$
*1' 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDO
$2 $QDORJRXWSXW 9ಹ9P$ಹP$
*1' 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOVDQG
;
', &RQQHFWLRQ3RU0VZLWFKLQJFRQWDFW
', ORZ b9KLJK!b9PD[b9
',&20 5HIHUHQFHIRUGLJLWDOLQSXWV
;
'2&20 'LJLWDORXWSXWV
'212
PD[$9'&
'2&20
'212 PD[$9$&
'2&20
'212 ; &8LQWHUIDFH
'LJLWDORXWSXWV
'21&
'2&20 PD[$9'& 9RXW 9RXWSXWPD[P$
'212 PD[$9$& *1' 5HIHUHQFHWHUPLQDO
'21& ',&20 5HIHUHQFHIRUGLJLWDOLQSXWV
The following diagram shows you how to connect the digital inputs and digital outputs of the I/
O Extension Module with an external power supply.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 103
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
;
9H[W ',
',
*1' H[W ',&20
; &8LQWHUIDFH
',&20
Figure 4-16 Connecting P-switching contacts
;
*1' H[W ',
',
9H[W ',&20
; &8LQWHUIDFH
',&20
Figure 4-17 Connecting M-switching contacts
Note
In the above wiring diagram, the DIs of the I/O Extension Module and those of the converter are
used as one group, because the DI COM of the module and that of the converter are connected.
You can choose not to connect the two DI COMs so that the DIs of the module and the converter
can be used in two separate groups.
WARNING
Electric shock due to DO connection to dual power supply
When connecting the digital outputs of the I/O Extension Module to DC and AC power supplies
at the same time, exposed components may carry a hazardous voltage that might result in
serious injury or death.
● Do not mix live parts with control signals (PELV/SELV) when connecting the DO terminals
of the I/O Extension Module; for example, it is not allowed to connect DO 2 to an AC 220
V power supply while connecting DO 3 to a DC 24 V power supply at the same time.
SINAMICS G120X converter
104 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
4.2.5 Factory interface settings
Function description
Converters with PROFINET or PROFIBUS interfaces:
In the factory setting, the converter switches over the following functions depending on the state
of digital input DI 4:
● Fieldbus interface
● Digital input DI 0
● Digital input DI 1
● Speed setpoint
;
+LJKHUOHYHOFRQWURO 9,1
*1',1
$, 1RIXQFWLRQ
$,
9RXW
*1'
$, 1RIXQFWLRQ
$,
9RXW
*1'
',&20
', &RQWUROYLD352),GULYHWHOHJUDP
352),1(7352),%86 ', &RQWUROYLDWHUPLQDOVWULS
',
7HOHJUDP3='
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
-RJJLQJRU ',
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
; ;
', 1RIXQFWLRQ
'21& )DXOW ',
', -RJJLQJ
'212 ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
'2&20 ',
', -RJJLQJ
'21& 2SHUDWLRQ ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
'212 ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
'2&20 ', 6ZLWFKRYHUFRQWURODQGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH P$P$
*1'
702725
1RIXQFWLRQ
702725
Figure 4-18 Factory setting for converters with PROFINET or PROFIBUS interfaces
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 105
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Converters with RS 485 fieldbus interfaces
;
9,1
*1',1
$,
1RIXQFWLRQ
$,
9RXW
*1'
$, 6HWSRLQW 99
$,
9RXW
*1'
',&20
; ;
'21& )DXOW ', 212))
'212 ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
'2&20 ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
'21& 2SHUDWLRQ ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
'212 ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
'2&20 ', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH P$P$
*1'
702725
1RIXQFWLRQ
702725
Figure 4-19 Factory setting for converters with RS 485 fieldbus interfaces
SINAMICS G120X converter
106 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
4.2.6 Default setting of the interfaces (macros)
Overview
The function of most of the converter terminals can be set.
In order to avoid having to successively change terminal for terminal, multiple terminals can be
set jointly for quick commissioning. Parameter p0015 for quick commissioning initiates a macro
that adopts the setting of the terminals.
Table 4-9 Overview of default settings, Part 1/2
Default setting (macro)
Terminal 41 42 43 44 45 46 1) 47
AI 0 Setpoint Setpoint Setpoint Setpoint Setpoint Setpoint local -
AI 1 - PID actual PID actual PID actual - Setpoint re‐ PID actual
value value value mote value
AO 0 Speed actual Speed actual Speed actual Speed actual Speed actual Speed actual Speed actual
value value value value value value value
AO 1 2) Current ac‐ Current ac‐ Current ac‐ Current ac‐ Current ac‐ Current ac‐ Current ac‐
tual value tual value tual value tual value tual value tual value tual value
DI 0 ON/OFF2 ON/OFF2 ON/OFF2 ON/OFF2 ON/OFF2 ON/OFF2 lo‐ ON/OFF2
cal
DI 1 - - Service pump Service pump Fixed set‐ ON/OFF2 re‐ -
1 1 point 1 mote
DI 2 - - Service pump Service pump Fixed set‐ - -
2 2 point 2
DI 3 - - - Service pump Fixed set‐ - -
3 point 3
DI 4 - manual ↔ au‐ manual ↔ au‐ manual ↔ au‐ - local ↔ remote -
to to to
DI 5 Acknowledge Acknowledge Acknowledge Acknowledge Acknowledge Acknowledge Acknowledge
fault fault fault fault fault fault fault
DO 0 Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault
DO 1 Operation Operation Operation Pump 1 Operation Operation Operation
DO 2 2) Ready for op‐ Ready for op‐ Pump 1 Pump 2 Ready for op‐ Ready for op‐ Ready for op‐
eration eration eration eration eration
DO 3 2) Alarm Alarm Pump 2 Pump 3 Alarm Alarm Alarm
Fieldbus - - - - - - -
1)
For converters with USS fieldbus interfaces
2)
With I/O Extension Module
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 107
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Table 4-10 Overview of default settings, Part 2/2
Default setting (macro)
Terminal 48 49 51 1) 52 1) 54 1) 55 1) 57 3)
AI 0 - - - Setpoint local - Setpoint local -
AI 1 PID actual PID actual - - - - -
value value
AO 0 Speed actual Speed actual Speed actual Speed actual Speed actual Speed actual Speed actual
value value value value value value value
AO 1 2) Current ac‐ Current ac‐ Current ac‐ Current ac‐ Current ac‐ Current ac‐ Current ac‐
tual value tual value tual value tual value tual value tual value tual value
DI 0 ON/OFF2 ON/OFF2 ON/OFF2 ON/OFF2 lo‐ ON/OFF2 ON/OFF2 lo‐ Jogging 1
cal cal
DI 1 Service pump Service pump - ON/OFF2 re‐ - ON/OFF2 re‐ Jogging 2
1 1 mote mote
DI 2 Service pump Service pump - - - - -
2 2
DI 3 - Service pump - - - - -
3
DI 4 manual ↔ au‐ manual ↔ au‐ - local ↔ remote - local ↔ remote local ↔ remote
to to
DI 5 Acknowledge Acknowledge Acknowledge Acknowledge Acknowledge Acknowledge Acknowledge
fault fault fault fault fault fault fault
DO 0 Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault
DO 1 Operation Pump 1 Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation
DO 2 2) Pump 1 Pump 2 Ready for op‐ Ready for op‐ Ready for op‐ Ready for op‐ Ready for op‐
eration eration eration eration eration
DO 3 2) Pump 2 Pump 3 Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm
Fieldbus - - Modbus RTU Modbus RTU USS USS PROFINET
or PROFIBUS
1)
For converters with USS fieldbus interfaces
2)
With I/O Extension Module
3)
For converters with PROFIBUS or PROFINET interfaces
Function description
Default setting (macro) 41: "Analog control"
"Analog control" is the factory setting for converters with RS 485 fieldbus interfaces.
SINAMICS G120X converter
108 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
9RXW
*1'
$, 6HWSRLQW
$,*1'
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
9RXW
*1'
',&20
', 212))
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
'21& )DXOW
'212
'2&20
'21& 2SHUDWLRQ
'212
'2&20
'2&20 5HDG\IRURSHUDWLRQ
'212
'21&
'2&20 $ODUP
'212
'21&
1)
With I/O Extension Module
Setting Parameter Characteristics Setting Parameter
Default setting p0015 = 41 Q DI 0 p29652[0] = 722.0
41 PLQ p29650[0] = 0
AI 0 p1070[0] = ON/OFF1 p0840[0] = 29659.0
PLQ OFF2 p0844[0] = 29659.1
755[0] 9 9 9 $,
DI 5 p2104[0] = 722.5
AO 0 p0771[0] = 21 $2 DO 0 p0730 = 52.3
P$ DO 1 p0731 = 52.2
AO 1 p0771[1] = 27
DO 2 p0732 = 52.1
P$ DO 3 p0733 = 52.7
PLQ Q
PLQ
$2
P$
P$
$ $ ,
Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP-2 operator panel:
→ SETUP → … → MAc PAr → P15 = X AI → … → FINISH
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 109
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Default setting (macro) 42: "PID controller with analog control"
9RXW
*1' 0DQXDO ',
(QDEOH $XWR ', 6HWSRLQW
$, 3,'
$,*1'
$, $FWXDOYDOXHIRU3,'WHFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
$,*1'
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
9RXW
*1'
',&20
', 212))
', 6ZLWFKRYHUPDQXDOർDXWR
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
'21& )DXOW
'212
'2&20
'21& 2SHUDWLRQ
'212
'2&20
'2&20 5HDG\IRURSHUDWLRQ
'212
'21&
'2&20 $ODUP
'212
'21&
1)
With I/O Extension Module
SINAMICS G120X converter
110 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Setting Parameter Characteristics Setting Parameter
Default setting p0015 = 42 Q DI 0 p29652[0] = 722.0
42 PLQ p29650[0] = 0
AI 0 p2253[0] = ON/OFF1 p0840[0] = 29659.0
PLQ OFF2 p0844[0] = 29659.1
755[0] 9 9 9 $,
p1070[0] = DI 4 p2200 = 722.4
755[0] Q
DI 5 p2104[0] = 722.5
AI 1 p2264[0] =
755[1]
AO 0 p0771[0] = 21 9 9 9 $,
AO 1 p0771[1] = 27 DO 0 p0730 = 52.3
$2
P$ DO 1 p0731 = 52.2
DO 2 p0732 = 52.1
P$ DO 3 p0733 = 52.7
PLQ Q
PLQ
$2
P$
P$
$ $ ,
Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP-2 operator panel:
→ SETUP → … → MAc PAr → P15 = X AI PID → … → FINISH
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 111
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Default setting (macro) 43: "2 pumps with analog control"
9RXW
*1' 0DQXDO ',
(QDEOH 6HWSRLQW
$XWR ',
$, 3,'
$,*1'
$, $FWXDOYDOXHIRU3,'WHFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
$,*1'
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
9RXW
*1'
',&20
', 212))
', 6HUYLFHSXPS
', 6HUYLFHSXPS
', 6ZLWFKRYHUPDQXDOർDXWR
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
'21& )DXOW
'212
'2&20
'21& 2SHUDWLRQ
'212
'2&20
'2&20 3XPS
'212
'21&
'2&20 3XPS
'212
'21&
1)
With I/O Extension Module
SINAMICS G120X converter
112 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Setting Parameter Characteristics Setting Parameter
Default setting p0015 = 43 Q DI 0 p29652[0] = 722.0
43 PLQ p29650[0] = 0
AI 0 p2253[0] = ON/OFF1 p0840[0] = 29659.0
PLQ OFF2 p0844[0] = 29659.1
755[0] 9 9 9 $,
p1070[0] = DI 1 p29543[0] = 722.1
755[0] Q
DI 2 p29543[1] = 722.2
DI 4 p2200 = 722.4
AI 1 p2264[0] = DI 5 p2104[0] = 722.5
755[1]
AO 0 p0771[0] = 21 9 9 9 $,
AO 1 p0771[1] = 27 Multi-pump con‐ p29520 = 1
$2
P$ trol p29521 = 2
p29539 = 1
P$ p29540 = 1
PLQ Q
DO 0 p0730 = 52.3
PLQ
DO 1 p0731 = 52.2
DO 2 p0732 = 29529.0
$2
P$ DO 3 p0733 = 29529.1
P$
$ $ ,
Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP-2 operator panel:
→ SETUP → … → MAc PAr → P15 = X AI 2XP → … → FINISH
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 113
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Default setting (macro) 44: "3 pumps with analog setpoint"
9RXW
*1' 0DQXDO ',
(QDEOH 6HWSRLQW
$XWR ',
$, 3,'
$,*1'
$, $FWXDOYDOXHIRU3,'WHFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
$,*1'
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
9RXW
*1'
',&20
', 212))
', 6HUYLFHSXPS
', 6HUYLFHSXPS
', 6HUYLFHSXPS
', 6ZLWFKRYHUPDQXDOർDXWR
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
'21& )DXOW
'212
'2&20
'21& 3XPS
'212
'2&20
'2&20 3XPS
'212
'21&
'2&20 3XPS
'212
'21&
SINAMICS G120X converter
114 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Setting Parameter Characteristics Setting Parameter
Default setting p0015 = 44 Q DI 0 p29652[0] = 722.0
44 PLQ p29650[0] = 0
AI 0 p2253[0] = ON/OFF1 p0840[0] = 29659.0
PLQ OFF2 p0844[0] = 29659.1
755[0] 9 9 9 $,
p1070[0] = DI 1 p29543[0] = 722.1
755[0] Q
DI 2 p29543[1] = 722.2
DI 3 p29543[2] = 722.3
AI 1 p2264[0] = DI 4 p2200 = 722.4
755[1] DI 5 p2104[0] = 722.5
AO 0 p0771[0] = 21 9 9 9 $,
AO 1 p0771[1] = 27
$2
Multi-pump p29520 = 1 P$ DO 0 p0730 = 52.3
control p29521 = 3 DO 1 p0731 = 29529.0
p29539 = 1 P$ DO 2 p0732 = 29529.1
PLQ Q
p29540 = 1 DO 3 p0733 = 29529.2
PLQ
$2
P$
P$
$ $ ,
Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP-2 operator panel:
→ SETUP → … → MAc PAr → P15 = X AI 3XP → … → FINISH
Default setting (macro) 45: "Fixed setpoint control"
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
9RXW
*1'
',&20
', 212))
', )L[HGVHWSRLQW
', )L[HGVHWSRLQW
', )L[HGVHWSRLQW
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
'21& )DXOW
'212
'2&20
'21& 2SHUDWLRQ
'212
'2&20
'2&20 5HDG\IRURSHUDWLRQ
'212
'21&
'2&20 $ODUP
'212
'21&
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 115
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Setting Parameter Characteristics Setting Parameter
Default setting p0015 = 45 $2 DI 0 p29652[0] = 722.0
45 P$ p29650[0] = 0
AO 0 p0771[0] = 21 ON/OFF1 p0840[0] = 29659.0
P$ OFF2 p0844[0] = 29659.1
AO 1 p0771[1] = 27 PLQ Q
PLQ DI 1 p1020[0] = 722.1
Fixed setpoint p1070 = 1024 DI 2 p1021[0] = 722.2
p1016 = 2 $2 DI 3 p1022[0] = 722.3
P$ DI 5 p2104[0] = 722.5
DO 0 p0730 = 52.3
P$
DO 1 p0731 = 52.2
$ $ ,
DO 2 p0732 = 52.1
DO 3 p0733 = 52.7
Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP-2 operator panel:
→ SETUP → … → MAc PAr → P15 = X FIX → … → FINISH
Default setting (macro) 46: "AI control local/remote"
ORFDO ',
9RXW 6HWSRLQW
UHPRWH ',
*1'
$, 6HWSRLQWORFDO
$,*1'
$, 6HWSRLQWUHPRWH
$,*1'
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1' ORFDO ',
9RXW
*1' UHPRWH ', 212))
',&20
', 212))ORFDO
', 212))UHPRWH
', 6ZLWFKRYHUORFDOUHPRWH
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
'21& )DXOW
'212
'2&20
'21& 2SHUDWLRQ
'212
'2&20
'2&20 5HDG\IRURSHUDWLRQ
'212
'21&
'2&20 $ODUP
'212
'21&
SINAMICS G120X converter
116 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Setting Parameter Characteristics Setting Parameter
Default setting p0015 = 46 Q DI 0 p29652[1] = 722.0
46 PLQ p29650[0] = 1
AI 0 p1070[1] = ON/OFF1 p0840[0] = 29659.0
PLQ OFF2 p0844[0] = 29659.1
755[0] 9 9 9 $,
DI 1 p29652[0] = 722.1
AI 1 p1070[0] = DI 4 p0810 = 722.4
755[1] Q
DI 5 p2104[0…1] = 722.5
AO 0 p0771[0] = 21
AO 1 p0771[1] = 27 DO 0 p0730 = 52.3
9 9 9 $, DO 1 p0731 = 52.2
DO 2 p0732 = 52.1
$2
P$ DO 3 p0733 = 52.7
P$
PLQ Q
PLQ
$2
P$
P$
$ $ ,
Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP-2 operator panel:
→ SETUP → … → MAc PAr → P15 = X AI I-r → … → FINISH
Default setting (macro) 47: "PID controller with internal fixed setpoint"
9RXW )L[HGVHWSRLQW 3,' 6HWSRLQW
*1'
$, $FWXDOYDOXHIRU3,'WHFKQRORJ\
$,*1' FRQWUROOHU
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
9RXW
*1'
',&20
', 212))
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
'21& )DXOW
'212
'2&20
'21& 2SHUDWLRQ
'212
'2&20
'2&20 5HDG\IRURSHUDWLRQ
'212
'21&
'2&20 $ODUP
'212
'21&
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 117
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Setting Parameter Characteristics Setting Parameter
Default setting p0015 = 47 Q DI 0 p29652[0] = 722.0
47 p29650[0] = 0
AI 1 p2264[0] = ON/OFF1 p0840[0] = 29659.0
OFF2 p0844[0] = 29659.1
755[1] 9 9 9 $,
DI 5 p2104[0] = 722.5
AO 0 p0771[0] = 21
$2
AO 1 p0771[1] = 27 P$
Setpoint p2253[0] = 2224 DO 0 p0730 = 52.3
p2220[0] = 1 P$ DO 1 p0731 = 52.2
PLQ Q
p2200 = 65536 DO 2 p0732 = 52.1
PLQ
DO 3 p0733 = 52.7
$2
P$
P$
$ $ ,
Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP-2 operator panel:
→ SETUP → … → MAc PAr → P15 = X FIXPId → … → FINISH
Default setting (macro) 48: "2 pumps and internal fixed setpoint"
(QDEOH
)L[HG 0DQXDO ',
VHWSRLQW
$XWR ', 6HWSRLQW
9RXW 3,'
*1'
$, $FWXDOYDOXHIRU3,'WHFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
$,*1'
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
9RXW
*1'
',&20
', 212))
', 6HUYLFHSXPS
', 6HUYLFHSXPS
', 6ZLWFKRYHUPDQXDOർDXWR
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
'21& )DXOW
'212
'2&20
'21& 2SHUDWLRQ
'212
'2&20
'2&20 3XPS
'212
'21&
'2&20 3XPS
'212
'21&
SINAMICS G120X converter
118 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Setting Parameter Characteristics Setting Parameter
Default setting p0015 = 48 Q DI 0 p29652[0] = 722.0
48 p29650[0] = 0
AI 1 p2264[0] = ON/OFF1 p0840[0] = 29659.0
OFF2 p0844[0] = 29659.1
755[1] 9 9 9 $,
DI 1 p29543[0] = 722.1
AO 0 p0771[0] = 21 DI 2 p29543[1] = 722.2
$2
AO 1 p0771[1] = 27 P$ DI 4 p2200[0] = 722.4
DI 5 p2104[0] = 722.5
Setpoint p1070[0] = 1024 P$ DO 0 p0730 = 52.3
PLQ Q
p2253[0] = 2224 PLQ
DO 1 p0731 = 52.2
p1020[0] = DO 2 p0732 = 29529.0
65536 $2 DO 3 p0733 = 29529.1
Multi-pump p29520 = 1 P$
control p29521 = 2
P$
p29539 = 1
$ $ ,
p29540 = 1
Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP-2 operator panel:
→ SETUP → … → MAc PAr → P15 = X In 2XP → … → FINISH
Default setting (macro) 49: "3 pumps and internal fixed setpoint"
(QDEOH
)L[HG 0DQXDO ',
VHWSRLQW
$XWR ', 6HWSRLQW
9RXW 3,'
*1'
$, $FWXDOYDOXHIRU3,'WHFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
$,*1'
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
9RXW
*1'
',&20
', 212))
', 6HUYLFHSXPS
', 6HUYLFHSXPS
', 6HUYLFHSXPS
', 6ZLWFKRYHUPDQXDOർDXWR
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
'21& )DXOW
'212
'2&20
'21& 3XPS
'212
'2&20
'2&20 3XPS
'212
'21&
'2&20 3XPS
'212
'21&
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 119
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Setting Parameter Characteristics Setting Parameter
Default setting p0015 = 49 Q DI 0 p29652[0] = 722.0
49 p29650[0] = 0
AI 1 p2264[0] = ON/OFF1 p0840[0] = 29659.0
OFF2 p0844[0] = 29659.1
755[1] 9 9 9 $,
DI 1 p29543[0] = 722.1
AO 0 p0771[0] = 21 DI 2 p29543[1] = 722.2
$2
AO 1 p0771[1] = 27 P$ DI 3 p29543[2] = 722.3
Setpoint p1070[0] = 1024 DI 4 p2200 = 722.4
p2253[0] = 2224 P$ DI 5 p2104[0] = 722.5
PLQ Q
p1020[0] = DO 0 p0730 = 52.3
PLQ
65536 DO 1 p0731 = 29529.0
Multi-pump p29520 = 1 $2 DO 2 p0732 = 29529.1
control p29521 = 3 P$ DO 3 p0733 = 29529.2
p29539 = 1
p29540 = 1 P$
$ $ ,
Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP-2 operator panel:
→ SETUP → … → MAc PAr → P15 = X In 3XP → … → FINISH
Default setting (macro) 51: "Modbus RTU control"
&RQWUROYLD0RGEXV578 bEDXG
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
9RXW
*1'
',&20
', 212))
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
'21& )DXOW
'212
'2&20
'21& 2SHUDWLRQ
'212
'2&20
'2&20 5HDG\IRURSHUDWLRQ
'212
'21&
'2&20 $ODUP
'212
'21&
SINAMICS G120X converter
120 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Setting Parameter Characteristics Setting Parameter
Default setting p0015 = 51 $2 DI 0 p29652[0] = 722.0
51 P$ p29650[0] = 0
AO 0 p0771[0] = 21 ON/OFF1 p0840[0] = 29659.0
P$ OFF2 p0844[0] = 29659.1
AO 1 p0771[1] = 27 PLQ Q
PLQ DI 5 p2104[0] = 722.5
Setpoint p1070[0] =
2050[1] $2
P$
Modbus RTU p2020 = 8 DO 0 p0730 = 52.3
p2030 = 2 DO 1 p0731 = 52.2
P$
p2040 = 65000 DO 2 p0732 = 52.1
$ $ ,
DO 3 p0733 = 52.7
Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP-2 operator panel:
→ SETUP → … → MAc PAr → P15 = X Fb mod → … → FINISH
Default setting (macro) 52: "Modbus RTU control local/remote"
&RQWUROYLD0RGEXV578 bEDXG
UHPRWH ',
9RXW ORFDO ', 6HWSRLQW
*1'
$, 6HWSRLQWORFDO
$,*1'
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1' ORFDO ',
9RXW
*1' UHPRWH ', 212))
',&20
', 212))ORFDO
', 212))UHPRWH
', 6ZLWFKRYHUORFDOർUHPRWH
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
'21& )DXOW
'212
'2&20
'21& 2SHUDWLRQ
'212
'2&20
'2&20 5HDG\IRURSHUDWLRQ
'212
'21&
'2&20 $ODUP
'212
'21&
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 121
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Setting Parameter Characteristics Setting Parameter
Default setting p0015 = 52 Q DI 0 p29652[1] = 722.0
52 PLQ p29650[1] = 0
AI 0 p1070[1] = ON/OFF1 p0840[0...1] =
PLQ OFF2 29659.0
755[0] 9 9 9 $,
DI 1 p0844[0...1] =
AO 0 p0771[0] = 21 29659.1
$2
AO 1 p0771[1] = 27 P$ DI 4 p29652[0] = 722.1
DI 5 p29650[0] = 1
P$ p0810 = 722.4
PLQ Q p2104[0...1] = 722.5
PLQ
Modbus RTU p2020 = 8 DO 0 p0730 = 52.3
p2030 = 2 $2 DO 1 p0731 = 52.2
p2040 = 65000 P$ DO 2 p0732 = 52.1
p0854[0] = DO 3 p0733 = 52.7
2090.10 P$
p1070[0] = $ $ ,
2050[1]
Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP-2 operator panel:
→ SETUP → … → MAc PAr → P15 = X modl-r → … → FINISH
Default setting (macro) 54: "USS control"
&RQWUROYLD866 %DXG3='3.:
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
9RXW
*1'
',&20
', 212))
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
'21& )DXOW
'212
'2&20
'21& 2SHUDWLRQ
'212
'2&20
'2&20 5HDG\IRURSHUDWLRQ
'212
'21&
'2&20 $ODUP
'212
'21&
SINAMICS G120X converter
122 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Setting Parameter Characteristics Setting Parameter
Default setting p0015 = 54 $2 DI 0 p29652[0] = 722.0
54 P$ p29650[0] = 0
AO 0 p0771[0] = 21 ON/OFF1 p0840[0] = 29659.0
P$ OFF2 p0844[0] = 29659.1
AO 1 p0771[1] = 27 PLQ Q
PLQ DI 5 p2104[0] = 722.5
USS p2020 = 8 DO 0 p0730 = 52.3
p2023 = 4 $2 DO 1 p0731 = 52.2
P$
p2030 = 1 DO 2 p0732 = r2.1
p2040 = 65000 DO 3 p0733 = 52.7
P$
p1070[0] =
$ $ ,
2050[1]
Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP-2 operator panel:
→ SETUP → … → MAc PAr → P15 = X fb USS → … → FINISH
Default setting (macro) 55: "USS control local/remote"
&RQWUROYLD866 bEDXG3='3.:
UHPRWH ',
9RXW ORFDO ', 6HWSRLQW
*1'
$, 6HWSRLQWORFDO
$,*1'
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1' ORFDO ',
9RXW
*1' UHPRWH ', 212))
',&20
', 212))ORFDO
', 212))UHPRWH
', 6ZLWFKRYHUORFDOർUHPRWH
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
'21& )DXOW
'212
'2&20
'21& 2SHUDWLRQ
'212
'2&20
'2&20 5HDG\IRURSHUDWLRQ
'212
'21&
'2&20 $ODUP
'212
'21&
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 123
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Setting Parameter Characteristics Setting Parameter
Default setting p0015 = 55 Q DI 0 p29652[1] = 722.0
55 PLQ p29650[1] = 0
AI 0 p1070[1] = ON/OFF1 p0840[0...1] =
PLQ OFF2 29659.0
755[0] 9 9 9 $,
DI 1 p0844[0...1] =
AO 0 p0771[0] = 21 29659.1
$2
AO 1 p0771[1] = 27 P$ DI 4 p29652[0] = 722.1
DI 5 p29650[0] = 1
P$ p0810 = 722.4
PLQ Q p2104[0...1] = 722.5
PLQ
USS p2020 = 8 DO 0 p0730 = 52.3
p2023 = 4 $2 DO 1 p0731 = 52.2
p2030 = 1 P$ DO 2 p0732 = 52.1
p2040 = 65000 DO 3 p0733 = 52.7
p1070[0] = P$
2050[1] $ $ ,
p0854[0] =
2090.10
Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP-2 operator panel:
→ SETUP → … → MAc PAr → P15 = X USSl-r → … → FINISH
Default setting (macro) 57: "PROFINET control"
"PROFINET control" is the factory setting for converters with PROFINET or PROFIBUS
interfaces.
SINAMICS G120X converter
124 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
', &RQWUROYLD352),GULYHWHOHJUDP
', &RQWUROYLDWHUPLQDOVWULS
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2*1'
9RXW
*1'
',&20 ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
',
', -RJJLQJ
', 1RIXQFWLRQ
',
', -RJJLQJ
', 6ZLWFKRYHUFRQWURODQGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
',
7HOHJUDP3='
', 6SHHGVHWSRLQW
-RJJLQJRU
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
'21& )DXOW
'212
'2&20
'21& 2SHUDWLRQ
'212
'2&20
'2&20 5HDG\IRURSHUDWLRQ
'212
'21&
'2&20 $ODUP
'212
'21&
Setting Parameter Characteristic Setting Parameter
Default setting p0015 = 57 $2 DI 0 p29652[1] = 722.0
57 P$ p29650[1] = 0
AO 0 p0771[0] = 21 ON/OFF1 p0840[0...1] =
P$ OFF2 29659.0
PLQ Q
PLQ DI 1 p0844[0...1] =
29659.1
DI 4 p29652[0] = 722.1
DI 5 p29650[0] = 1
p0810 = 722.4
p2104[0...1] = 722.5
PROFINET p0922 = 1 DO 0 p0730 = 52.3
p1070[0] = DO 1 p0731 = 52.2
2050[1]
Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP-2 operator panel:
→ SETUP → … → MAc PAr → P15 = X PN 1 → … → FINISH
More information
The default terminal settings can be adjusted to suit your requirements.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 125
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Adapt the default setting of the terminal strips (Page 186)
4.2.7 Additional digital inputs and digital outputs on converters FSH and FSJ
Overview
Converters FSH and FSJ have 4 additional digital inputs and 2 digital outputs at terminal
strip X9.
7HUPLQDOVWULS;
Figure 4-20 Terminal strip X9
SINAMICS G120X converter
126 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Function description
;
9H[W 3 ([WHUQDOVXSSO\99PD[$
*1'H[W 0 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOVDQG
([WHUQDO$OHUW ([WHUQDODODUP 'LJLWDOLQSXWV
([WHUQDOIDXOW ([WHUQDOIDXOW ORZ 9KLJK!9PD[9
6WRS 2)) LQSXWFXUUHQWP$DW9
6WRS 2))
0 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOVDQG
'&/LQN&KDUJHG 0HVVDJH8'&OLQNLVORDGHG9'&PD[P$
$&9 1& 1RWFRQQHFWHG
1&
$FWLYDWLRQ/LQH&RQWDFWRU 0DLQFRQWDFWRUFRQWURO9$&FRV˳ LQGPD[
$FWLYDWLRQ/LQH&RQWDFWRU $
Connection cross-section: 0.2 mm² … 2.5 mm², tightening torque: 0.5 Nm (5 lb.in)
Use insulated end sleeves according to DIN 46228-4.
Terminals Remark
1 You may either connect an external 24 V supply or use the internal 24 V supply.
3…6 The function of the digital inputs is shown in the factory setting.
You can change the function of the digital inputs subsequently.
The digital inputs are low-active in the factory setting. If you do not use one of the digital inputs, you must
connect the digital input with 24 V.
8, 11, 12 The function of the digital outputs cannot be changed.
8 The digital output signals a fully charged DC link of the converter. A charged DC link is the prerequisite for the
"operation" converter state.
11, 12 A device to protect against overload and short-circuit is required for the power supply to the line contactor
control, e.g. a 4 A / 250 V fuse.
Connect the excitation coil of the line contactor to a surge suppressor, e.g. an RC element.
Figure 4-21 Terminal strip X9 with external 24 V supply
;
3
0
([WHUQDO$OHUW
([WHUQDOIDXOW 6XPPDWLRQRIWKHORDGRQ; DQG; PD[bP$
6WRS
6WRS
0
'&/LQN&KDUJHG
1&
1&
$FWLYDWLRQ/LQH&RQWDFWRU
$FWLYDWLRQ/LQH&RQWDFWRU
Figure 4-22 Terminal strip X9 with internal 24 V supply
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 127
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
4.2.8 "Safe Torque Off" safety function
Overview
The "Safe Torque Off" (STO) safety function can be implemented using a failsafe digital input
of the converter.
Requirements
● Both switches on the converter for enabling/disabling STO are in the ON position.
● The higher-level control system monitors the selection of STO and the feedback from the
converter.
Application examples for "Safe Torque Off" (Page 132)
Function description
Use an SELV or PELV power supply with 24 V DC (20.4 V … 28.8 V, maximum 60 V briefly).
Use a shielded cable with the following properties:
● Cable length ≤ 30 m
● Cross section 0.5 mm2 … + 1.5 mm2 (20 … 16 AWG)
● Insulated for 600 V
● Conductor end sleeves, stripping length 7 mm
Tightening torque: 0.2 Nm (2 lbf in)
SINAMICS G120X converter
128 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Procedure for converters in frame sizes FSA ... FSC
6ZLWFKHVWRHQDEOHRUGLVDEOH672
&RQQHFWLRQ$IRUVHOHFWLRQRI672
&RQQHFWLRQ%IRUVHOHFWLRQRI672
Both switches = ON: STO is enabled
Both switches = OFF: STO is locked
Two switches different: not permissible
Figure 4-23 Terminals and switches for the "STO" function, frame sizes FSA ... FSC
1. Connect the cables for selecting STO to terminals STO_A and STO_B.
2. Connect the cables for STO feedback to 2 digital outputs of terminal block X134.
;
3. Attach the shield to the shield plate of the converter through the largest possible surface
area.
You have connected all cables for the STO safety function.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 129
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Procedure for converters in frame sizes FSD ... FSG
&RQQHFWLRQ$IRUVHOHFWLRQRI672
6ZLWFKHVWRHQDEOHRUGLVDEOH672
&RQQHFWLRQ%IRUVHOHFWLRQRI672
1RWXVHG
Both switches = ON: STO is enabled
Both switches = OFF: STO is locked
Two switches different: not permissible
Figure 4-24 Terminals and switches for the "STO" function, frame sizes FSD ... FSG
1. Remove the Control Unit.
2. Connect the cable for selecting STO to terminals STO_A and STO_B.
3. Plug in the Control Unit.
SINAMICS G120X converter
130 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
4. Connect the cables for STO feedback to 2 digital outputs of terminal block X134.
;
5. Attach the shield to the shield plate of the Control Unit through the largest possible surface
area.
You have connected all cables for the STO safety function.
❒
Procedure for converters in frame sizes FSH ... FSJ
6ZLWFKHVWRHQDEOHRUGLVDEOH672
&RQQHFWLRQ$WRVHOHFW672
&RQQHFWLRQ%WRVHOHFW672
)HHGEDFNVLJQDO$WRVHOHFW672
)HHGEDFNVLJQDO%WRVHOHFW672
Both switches = ON: STO is enabled
Both switches = OFF: STO is locked
Two switches different: not permissible
Figure 4-25 Terminals and switches for the "STO" function, frame sizes FSH and FSJ
1. Connect the cable for selecting STO to terminals X41:STO_A and X41:STO_B.
2. Connect the cables for STO feedback to terminals X41:FB_A and X41:FB_B.
3. Attach the shield to the shield plate through the largest possible surface area.
You have connected all cables for the STO safety function.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 131
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Further information
In order to prevent inadvertent inhibition of the "STO" function in the FSA ... FSC converter, we
recommend protecting the associated switch with a cable tie.
Figure 4-26 Protection against inadvertent inhibition of the "STO" function, FSA … FSC
4.2.9 Application examples for "Safe Torque Off"
Overview
A higher-level control system is required to select the STO safety function.
Preconditions
Basic prerequisites
● The digital outputs for the feedback of STO are correctly parameterized.
Setting the feedback signal for Safe Torque Off (Page 298)
● The higher-level control system monitors the selection of the STO safety function and the
feedback from the converter.
● Forced checking procedure (test stop):
The higher-level control system regularly selects the STO safety function and evaluates the
converter feedback signal.
We recommend that you implement a time monitoring function in the higher-level control
system, which issues an alarm if a test stop is overdue.
SINAMICS G120X converter
132 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Prerequisites for SIL 2/PL d
● Suitable higher-level controllers
– SIRIUS 3SK1: Single-channel static feedback circuit
– SIRIUS 3SK2: Two-channel dynamic feedback circuit
– MSS 3RK3: Two-channel dynamic feedback circuit
– SIMATIC: Feedback circuit monitoring in the safety program
● Forced checking procedure (test stop) once per year
Prerequisites for SIL 3/PL e
● Suitable higher-level controllers
– SIRIUS 3SK1: Single-channel static feedback circuit
Permissible for converters FSH and FSJ, not permissible for FSA … FSG
– SIRIUS 3SK2: Two-channel dynamic feedback circuit
– MSS 3RK3: Two-channel dynamic feedback circuit
– SIMATIC: Feedback circuit monitoring in the safety program
● Forced checking procedure (test stop) every 3 months
Function description
SIRIUS 3SK1 safety relay
9'&
6WDUW
'21&
$ ,1 7 ,1 7 ,1 7 7 ,1 '2&20
)6 '21&
/RJLF '2&20
$XWRVWDUW
9
0RQLWRUHG6WDUW 672B$
9
9
672B%
9
$ 6.$%
Figure 4-27 Connection 3SK1 inside a control cabinet for FSA … FSG
You can achieve SIL 2/PL d with a SIRIUS 3SK1 safety relay and the converter FSA … FSG.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 133
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
9'&
;
6WDUW
672B$
$ ,1 7 ,1 7 ,1 7 7 ,1
672B%
)6
/RJLF
)%B$
$XWRVWDUW
0RQLWRUHG6WDUW
)%B%
$ 6.$%
Figure 4-28 Connection 3SK1 inside a control cabinet for FSH, FSJ
You can achieve SIL 3/PL e with a SIRIUS 3SK1 safety relay and the converter FSH or FSJ.
SIRIUS 3SK2 safety relay
The wiring examples are implemented using safety relays with relay enable circuits. Safety
relays with semiconductor enable circuits can also be used.
6,1$0,&6*;
'212
9'&
'2&20
'212
'2&20
9
672B$
6WDUW 9
9
672B%
$ 7 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 9
/RJLF
$ )4 )4 40 6,5,866.
Figure 4-29 Connection 3SK2 inside a control cabinet for FSA … FSG
SINAMICS G120X converter
134 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
)4
W
,1
7 W
)4
W
,1
7 7 W
672GHVHOHFWHG 672VHOHFWHG 672
GHVHOHFWHG
T1 ≥ 30 ms In case of deviating feedback, the safety relay must select the STO function
T2 ≥ 20 ms and indicate an error.
Figure 4-30 Dynamic monitoring of STO feedback for FSA … FSG
;
672B$
672B%
)%B$
9'& )%B%
6WDUW
$ 7 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1
/RJLF
$ )4 )4 40 6,5,866.
Figure 4-31 Connection 3SK2 inside a control cabinet for FSH and FSJ
Static monitoring of STO feedback at start-up is sufficient for the converters FSH and FSJ.
Modular 3RK3 safety system
You can use the following outputs to control the failsafe digital inputs in the converter:
● The failsafe digital outputs in the central units of the 3RK3 modular safety system
● The failsafe digital outputs in the EM 2/4F-DI 2F-DO expansion module
● The failsafe digital outputs in the EM 4F-DO expansion module.
● The failsafe relay outputs in the EM 4/8F-RO expansion module
● 2 individual relay contacts of the EM 2/4F-DI 1/2F-RO expansion module
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 135
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
6,1$0,&6*;
6WDUW
'212
7 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 '2&20
'212
'2&20
9
672B$
9
/RJLF
9
672B%
9
5.
4 4 4 / 0 $$
9'&
0
Figure 4-32 Connection 3RK3 inside a control cabinet for FSA … FSG
4
W
,1
7 W
4
W
,1
7 7 W
672GHVHOHFWHG 672VHOHFWHG 672
GHVHOHFWHG
T1 ≥ 30 ms In case of deviating feedback, the Modular Safety System must select the
T2 ≥ 20 ms STO function and indicate an error.
Figure 4-33 Dynamic monitoring of STO feedback for FSA … FSG
SINAMICS G120X converter
136 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
6WDUW
;
7 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 672B$
672B%
)%B$
/RJLF
)%B%
5. $
4 4 4 / 0 $
9'&
0
Figure 4-34 Connection 3RK3 inside a control cabinet for FSH and FSJ
Static monitoring of STO feedback at start-up is sufficient for the converters FSH and FSJ.
SIMATIC I/O modules
9'& 6,1$0,&6*;
)',[9'&
'212
6 '2&20
'212
'2&20
9
672B$
9
9
672B%
9
0
)'4[9'&$330
Figure 4-35 Connecting the SIMATIC S7-1500 in a control cabinet for FSA … FSG
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 137
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
)'4
W
)',
7 W
)'4
W
)',
7 7 W
672GHVHOHFWHG 672VHOHFWHG 672
GHVHOHFWHG
T1 ≥ 30 ms In case of deviating feedback, the SIMATIC must select the STO function and
T2 ≥ 20 ms indicate an error.
Figure 4-36 Dynamic monitoring of STO feedback for FSA … FSG
)'4[9'&$330 9'&
;
672B$
672B%
)%B$
6
)%B%
)',[9'& 0
Figure 4-37 Connection of the SIMATIC S7-1500 inside a control cabinet for FSH and FSJ
Static monitoring of STO feedback for STO selection is sufficient for the converters FSH and
FSJ.
More information
Further information is provided on the Internet:
SIRIUS 3SK1 safety relays (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16381/
man)
SIRIUS 3SK2 Safety Relays (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109444336)
SIRIUS 3RK3 modular safety system manual (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/26493228)
SINAMICS G120X converter
138 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
S7-1500 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384)
ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/84133942)
ET 200pro (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/22098524)
ET 200S (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/12490437)
S7-300 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/19026151)
4.2.10 Wiring the terminal strips
WARNING
Electric shock due to unsuitable motor temperature evaluation system
Voltage flashovers to the electronics of the converter can occur in motors without safe
electrical separation of the temperature sensors in accordance with IEC 61800‑5‑1 when the
motor develops a fault.
● Install a temperature monitoring relay 3RS1… or 3RS2…
● Evaluate the temperature monitoring relay output using a digital input of the converter, e.g.
using the "External fault" function.
You can find additional information about the temperature monitoring relay on the Internet:
Manual 3RS1 / 3RS2 temperature monitoring relays (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/54999309)
Note
Malfunction caused by incorrect switching states as the result of diagnostic flows in the off state
(logical state "0")
In contrast to mechanical switching contacts, e.g. emergency stop switches, diagnostic flows
can also flow with semiconductor switches in the off state. If interconnection with digital inputs
is faulty, the diagnostic flows can lead to incorrect switching states and thus to a malfunction of
the drive.
● Observe the conditions for digital inputs and digital outputs specified in the relevant
manufacturers documentation.
● Check the conditions of the digital inputs and digital outputs in regard to the flows in off state.
If applicable, connect the digital inputs with suitably dimensioned, external resistors to
protect against the reference potential of the digital inputs.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 139
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
WARNING
Electric shock due to damaged insulation
Damaged insulation of cables carrying hazardous voltages can cause a short circuit with
cables carrying non-hazardous voltages. This can have the effect that parts of the converter
or the installation carry an unexpectedly high voltage.
● Use only cables with double insulation for 230 V cables which you connect to the digital
outputs of the converter.
NOTICE
Overvoltages for long signal cables
Using > 30 m long cables at the converter's digital inputs and 24 V power supply or inductive
circuits at the digital inputs can lead to overvoltage. Overvoltages can damage the converter.
● Connect an overvoltage protection device between the terminal and the associated
reference potential.
We recommend using the Weidmüller overvoltage protection terminal with designation
MCZ OVP TAZ DIODE 24VDC.
Table 4-11 Permissible cable and wiring options
Solid or finely-stranded Finely stranded conduc‐ Finely stranded conduc‐ Two finely-stranded
conductor tor with non-insulated tor with partially insula‐ conductors with the
end sleeve ted end sleeve same cross-section
with partially insulated
twin end sleeves
PP PP PP PP
PP PP PP ෪PP
Wiring the terminal strip in compliance with EMC
● If you use shielded cables, then you must connect the shield to the mounting plate of the
control cabinet or with the shield support of the converter through a good electrical
connection and a large surface area.
Further information about EMC-compliant wiring is available on the Internet:
EMC installation guideline (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
60612658)
● Use the shield connection plate of the Control Unit as strain relief.
Mounting the shield connection kits (Page 67)
SINAMICS G120X converter
140 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
4.2.11 Connecting to PROFINET and Ethernet
4.2.11.1 Communication via PROFINET IO and Ethernet
You can either integrate the converter in a PROFINET network or communicate with the
converter via Ethernet.
The converter in PROFINET IO operation
6,0$7,&6 3& 6XSHUYLVRU
&RQWUROOHU
352),1(7
6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6*
*' 6,1$0,&6*&
6,1$0,&6
6,1$0,&6*;
*0
Figure 4-38 The converter in PROFINET IO operation
The converter supports the following functions:
● RT
● IRT: The converter forwards the clock synchronism, but does not support clock
synchronism.
● MRP: Media redundancy, impulsed with 200 ms. Precondition: Ring topology
With MRP, you get an uninterrupted switchover if you set the failure monitoring time to a
value > 200 ms.
● MRPD: Media redundancy, bumpless. Precondition: IRT and the ring topology created in
the control
● Diagnostic alarms in accordance with the error classes specified in the PROFIdrive profile.
● Device replacement without removable data storage medium: The replacement converter
is assigned the device name from the IO controller, not from its memory card or from the
programming device.
● Shared Device for converters that support PROFIsafe.
The converter as Ethernet node
3&
(WKHUQHW
6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6*
*' 6,1$0,&6*&
6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6*;
*0
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 141
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Figure 4-39 The converter as Ethernet node
Further information on PROFINET
Further information on PROFINET can be found on the Internet:
● PROFINET system description (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
19292127)
● PROFINET – the Ethernet standard for automation (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/
automation/en/industrial-communications/profinet/Pages/Default.aspx)
4.2.11.2 Protocols used
The converter supports the protocols listed in the following tables. The address parameters, the
relevant communication layer as well as the communication role and the communication
direction are specified for each protocol.
You require this information to set the appropriate safety measures to protect the automation
system, e.g. in the firewall.
As the security measures are limited to Ethernet and PROFINET networks, no PROFIBUS
protocols are listed in the table.
Table 4-12 PROFINET protocols
Protocol Port Layer Function/description
number (2) Link layer
(4) Transport layer
DCP: Not rele‐ (2) Ethernet II and Accessible stations, PROFINET Discovery and configuration
Discovery and vant IEEE 802.1Q and DCP is used by PROFINET to determine PROFINET devices and to
configuration Ethertype 0x8892 make basic settings.
protocol (PROFINET)
DCP uses the special multicast MAC address:
xx-xx-xx-01-0E-CF,
xx-xx-xx = Organizationally Unique Identifier
LLDP: Not rele‐ (2) Ethernet II and PROFINET Link Layer Discovery protocol
Link Layer Dis‐ vant IEEE 802.1Q and LLDP is used by PROFINET to determine and manage neighborhood
covery Protocol Ethertype 0x88CC relationships between PROFINET devices.
(PROFINET)
LLDP uses the special multicast MAC address:
01-80-C2-00-00-0E
MRP: Not rele‐ (2) Ethernet II and PROFINET medium redundancy
Media Redun‐ vant IEEE 802.1Q and MRP enables the control of redundant routes through a ring topology.
dancy Protocol Ethertype 0x88E3
MRP uses the special multicast MAC address:
(PROFINET)
xx-xx-xx-01-15-4E,
xx-xx-xx = Organizationally Unique Identifier
SINAMICS G120X converter
142 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Protocol Port Layer Function/description
number (2) Link layer
(4) Transport layer
PTCP Not rele‐ (2) Ethernet II and PROFINET send clock and time synchronization, based on IEEE 1588
Precision vant IEEE 802.1Q and PTC is used to implement send clock synchronization and time syn‐
Transparent Ethertype 0x8892 chronization between RJ45 ports, which are required for IRT opera‐
Clock Protocol (PROFINET) tion.
PTCP uses the special multicast MAC address:
xx-xx-xx-01-0E-CF,
xx-xx-xx = Organizationally Unique Identifier
PROFINET IO Not rele‐ (2) Ethernet II and PROFINET Cyclic IO data transfer
data vant IEEE 802.1Q and The PROFINET IO telegrams are used to transfer IO data cyclically
Ethertype 0x8892 between the PROFINET IO controller and IO devices via Ethernet.
(PROFINET)
PROFINET 34964 (4) UDP PROFINET connection less RPC
Context Man‐ The PROFINET context manager provides an endpoint mapper in or‐
ager der to establish an application relationship (PROFINET AR).
Table 4-13 EtherNet/IP protocols
Protocol Port Layer Function/description
number (2) Link layer
(4) Transport layer
Implicit mes‐ 2222 (4) UDP Used for exchanging I/O data.
saging This is inactive when delivered. Is activated when selecting EtherNet/
IP.
Explicit mes‐ 44818 (4) TCP Used for parameter access (writing, reading).
saging (4) UDP This is inactive when delivered. Is activated when selecting EtherNet/
IP.
Table 4-14 Connection-oriented communication protocols
Protocol Port Layer Function/description
number (2) Link layer
(4) Transport layer
ISO on TCP 102 (4) TCP ISO-on-TCP protocol
(according to ISO on TCP (according to RFC 1006) is used for the message-orien‐
RFC 1006) ted data exchange to a remote CPU, WinAC or devices of other sup‐
pliers.
Communication with ES, HMI, etc. is activated in the factory setting,
and is always required.
SNMP 161 (4) UDP Simple network management protocol
Simple Net‐ SNMP enables network management data to be read out and set
work Manage‐ (SNMP managed objects) by the SNMP manager.
ment Protocol It is activated in the factory setting, and is always required
Reserved 49152 ... (4) TCP Dynamic port area that is used for the active connection endpoint if the
65535 (4) UDP application does not specify the local port.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 143
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
4.2.11.3 Connecting the PROFINET cable to the converter
Procedure
1. Integrate the converter in the bus system (e.g. ring topology) of the control using PROFINET
cables and the two PROFINET sockets X150-P1 and X150-P2.
Overview of the interfaces (Page 99)
The maximum permitted cable length from the previous station and to the next one is 100 m.
2. Externally supply the converter with 24 VDC through terminals 31 and 32.
The external 24 V supply is only required if communications with the control should also run
when the line voltage is switched off.
You have connected the converter to the control system via PROFINET.
❒
4.2.11.4 What do you have to set for communication via PROFINET?
Configuring PROFINET communication in the I/O controller
You require the appropriate engineering system for the IO controller to configure PROFINET
communication in the IO controller.
If required, load the GSDML file of the converter into the engineering software.
Installing GSDML (Page 145)
Device name
In addition to the MAC address and IP address, PROFINET also uses the device name to
identify PROFINET devices (Device name). The device name must be unique across the
PROFINET network.
You assign the device name with the IO controller engineering software.
The converter saves the device name on the memory card plugged into the converter.
IP address
In addition to the device name, PROFINET also uses an IP address.
The IO Controller assigns an IP address to the converter.
Telegram
Set the same telegram in the converter as in the IO Controller. Interconnect the telegrams in the
control program of the IO Controller with the signals of your choosing.
Drive control via PROFINET or PROFIBUS (Page 206)
Application examples
You can find application examples for PROFINET communication on the Internet:
SINAMICS G120X converter
144 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Controlling the speed of a SINAMICS G110M/G120/G120C/G120D with S7-300/400F via
PROFINET or PROFIBUS, with Safety Integrated (via terminal) and HMI (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/60441457)
Controlling the speed of a SINAMICS G110M / G120 (Startdrive) with S7-1500 (TO) via
PROFINET or PROFIBUS, with Safety Integrated (via terminal) and HMI (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/78788716)
4.2.11.5 Installing GSDML
Procedure
1. Save the GSDML to your PC.
– With Internet access:
GSDML (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109763250)
– Without Internet access:
Insert a memory card into the converter.
Set p0804 = 12.
The converter writes the GSDML as a zipped file (*.zip) into directory /SIEMENS/
SINAMICS/DATA/CFG on the memory card.
2. Unzip the GSDML file on your computer.
3. Import the GSDML into the engineering system of the controller.
You have now installed the GSDML in the engineering system of the controller.
4.2.11.6 Connect converter to EtherNet/IP
Overview
To connect the converter to a control system via Ethernet, proceed as follows:
Procedure
1. Connect the converter to the control system via an Ethernet cable.
2. Create an object for data exchange.
You have the following options:
– Load the EDS file into your controller if you want to use the ODVA profile.
You can find the EDS file on the Internet:
EDS (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/view/78026217)
– If your controller does not accept the EDS file, or if you wish to use the SINAMICS profile,
you must create a generic module in your controller:
Create generic I/O module (Page 240)
You have connected the converter to the control system via EtherNet/IP.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 145
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Example
You can find an example showing how to connect a converter to the control system via Ethernet/
IP on the Internet:
Application example (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/82843076)
Further information
You can find information on routing and shielding Ethernet cables on the Internet:
EtherNet/IP (http://www.odva.org/Home/ODVATECHNOLOGIES/EtherNetIP/
EtherNetIPLibrary/tabid/76/lng/en-US/Default.aspx)
4.2.11.7 What do you need for communication via EtherNet/IP?
Check the communication settings using the following questions. If you answer "Yes" to the
questions, you have correctly set the communication settings and can control the converter via
the fieldbus.
● Is the converter correctly connected to the EtherNet/IP?
● Is the EDS file installed in your control system?
● Have the bus interface and IP address been correctly set?
● Have the signals that the converter and the control system exchange been correctly
interconnected?
4.2.12 RS485 interface for the fieldbus
Function description
%XVWHUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRU
0DVWHU
2)) 2)) 21
21
Figure 4-40 Connection with the fieldbus via RS485
The RS485 ports of the converter are short-circuit proof and isolated.
You must switch-in the bus-terminating resistor for the first and last nodes.
SINAMICS G120X converter
146 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Overview of the interfaces (Page 99)
Table 4-15 Maximum cable length
Modbus RTU USS BACnet MS/TP
1200 m 1200 m for a baud rate up to 1200 m
38400 bit/s and maximum of 32
nodes
1000 m for a baud rate of 187500
bit/s and a maximum of 30 nodes
Further information
The precondition for error-free communications is that the first and last station are supplied with
power.
Communication is maintained if you withdraw individual slaves from the fieldbus without
interrupting the cable.
4.2.13 Connecting to PROFIBUS
3& &ODVV0DVWHU
6,0$7,&6
&ODVVPDVWHU
352),%86'3
6,1$0,&6*
6,1$0,&6*' 6ODYH
6ODYH
The PROFIBUS DP interface has the following functions:
● Cyclic communication
● Acyclic communication
● Diagnostic alarms
General information on PROFIBUS DP can be found in the Internet:
● PROFIBUS user organization (http://www.profibus.com/downloads/installation-guide/)
● Information about PROFIBUS DP (http://www.automation.siemens.com/net/html_76/
support/printkatalog.htm)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 147
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
4.2.13.1 Connecting the PROFIBUS cable to the converter
Procedure
1. Connect the converter to socket X126 via a PROFIBUS cable with the higher-level control.
Overview of the interfaces (Page 99)
The maximum permitted cable length to the previous station or the subsequent one is 100 m
at a baud rate of 12 Mbit/s.
Recommended PROFIBUS connectors:
– 6GK1500-0FC10
– 6KG1500-0EA02
2. If necessary, connect a 24 V supply voltage to terminals 31 and 32.
The external 24 V supply is only required if communication with the control may not be
interrupted even if the line voltage is switched off.
You connected the converter with the control via PROFIBUS.
❒
4.2.13.2 What do you have to set for communication via PROFIBUS?
Configuring PROFIBUS communication
You require the appropriate engineering system to configure PROFIBUS communication in the
PROFIBUS master.
If required, load the GSD file of the converter into the engineering system.
Installing the GSD (Page 149)
Setting the address
Set the address of the PROFIBUS slave.
Setting the address (Page 206)
Setting the telegram
Set the same telegram in the converter as in the PROFIBUS master. Interconnect the
telegrams in the control program of the PROFIBUS master with the signals of your choosing.
Drive control via PROFINET or PROFIBUS (Page 206)
Application examples
You can find application examples for PROFIBUS communication on the Internet:
Controlling the speed of a SINAMICS G110M/G120/G120C/G120D with S7-300/400F via
PROFINET or PROFIBUS, with Safety Integrated (via terminal) and HMI (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/60441457)
SINAMICS G120X converter
148 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
Controlling the speed of a SINAMICS G110M / G120 (Startdrive) with S7-1500 (TO) via
PROFINET or PROFIBUS, with Safety Integrated (via terminal) and HMI (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/78788716)
Communication with the control system even if the line voltage is switched off
You must supply the converter with 24 V DC at terminals 31 and 32 if you wish to maintain
communication with the control system when the line voltage is switched off.
In the case of brief interruptions of the 24 V power supply, the converter may signal a fault
without communications with the control system being interrupted.
4.2.13.3 Installing the GSD
Procedure
1. Save the GSD on your PC via one of the following methods.
– With Internet access:
GSD (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22339653/133100)
– Without Internet access:
Insert a memory card into the converter.
Set p0804 to 12.
The converter writes the GSD as zipped file (*.zip) into directory /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/
DATA/CFG on the memory card.
2. Unzip the GSD file on your computer.
3. Import the GSD in the engineering system of the controller.
You have now installed the GSD file in the engineering system of the controller.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 149
Wiring
4.2 Control interfaces
SINAMICS G120X converter
150 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Commissioning 5
5.1 Commissioning guidelines
Overview
7KHLQYHUWHULV 1. Define the requirements to be
LQVWDOOHG met by the drive for your
application.
(Page 153)
3UHSDUHIRU 2. Restore the factory settings of
FRPPLVVLRQLQJ
the converter if necessary.
(Page 173)
3. Check if the factory setting of the
'RHVWKH
LQYHUWHUKDYHWKH 1RRUXQNQRZQ converter is sufficient for your
IDFWRU\VHWWLQJ" application.
(Page 157)
5HVWRUHWKHIDFWRU\
<HV VHWWLQJVIRUWKHLQYHUWHU 4. Set the following for quick
commissioning of the drive:
– The closed-loop motor control
,VWKH
– The inputs and outputs
IDFWRU\VHWWLQJ 1R – The fieldbus interface
VXIILFLHQW"
(Page 159)
3HUIRUPTXLFN 5. Check if additional converter
<HV FRPPLVVLRQLQJ
functions are required for the
application.
(Page 153)
,VTXLFN
1R
6. If necessary, adapt the drive.
FRPPLVVLRQLQJ
VXIILFLHQW" (Page 179)
7. Save your settings.
3HUIRUPH[WHQGHG
<HV FRPPLVVLRQLQJ (Page 939)
%DFNLQJXSGDWD
&RPPLVVLRQLQJLV
FRPSOHWHG
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 151
Commissioning
5.2 Tools
5.2 Tools
Operator panel
An operator panel is used to commission, troubleshoot and control the converter, as well as to
back up and transfer the converter settings.
The Intelligent Operator Panel (IOP‑2) can either be snapped onto a converter, or is available
as handheld device with a connecting cable to the converter. The graphics-capable plain text
display of the IOP‑2 enables intuitive converter operation.
Additional information on the IOP‑2 is available in the Internet:
SINAMICS IOP-2 release for sale (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109747625)
The Operator Panel BOP‑2 for snapping onto the converter has a two-line display for
diagnostics and operating the converter.
Operating Instructions of the BOP-2 and IOP-2 operator panels:
Manuals and technical support (Page 1109)
SINAMICS G120 Smart Access
The SINAMICS G120 Smart Access is a Web server module and an engineering tool that
provides wireless connection to a PC, a tablet, or a smartphone. It is designed for quick
commissioning, parameterization, and maintenance of the converters. SINAMICS G120 Smart
Access are only for commissioning and thus cannot be used with the converter permanently.
Operating instructions of the SINAMICS G120 Smart Access:
Overview of the manuals (Page 1109)
Preventing misuse of the operator panel
The operator panel does not provide protection against unauthorized access. To protect the
converter against unauthorized operation or changes to the settings, you need to prevent
access to the operator panel:
● Remove the operator panel after commissioning
● Install the converter in a control cabinet that can be locked and lock the control cabinet after
commissioning.
Compliance with the General Data Protection Regulation
Siemens respects the principles of data protection, in particular the data minimization rules
(privacy by design).
For this product, this means:
The product does not process neither store any person-related data, only technical function
data (e.g. time stamps). If the user links these data with other data (e.g. shift plans) or if he
stores person-related data on the same data medium (e.g. hard disk), thus personalizing these
data, he has to ensure compliance with the applicable data protection stipulations.
SINAMICS G120X converter
152 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Commissioning
5.3 Preparing for commissioning
5.3 Preparing for commissioning
5.3.1 Collecting motor data
Data for a standard induction motor
Before starting commissioning, you must know the following data:
● Which motor is connected to the converter?
Note down the Article No. of the motor and the motor’s nameplate data.
If available, note down the motor code on the motor’s nameplate.
$UWLFOH1R
,(&
,(&
1(0$
1(0$
6SHHG
3RZHU
&XUUHQW
9ROWDJH
Figure 5-1 Example of the rating plate for a standard induction motor
● In which region of the world is the motor to be used?
- Europe IEC: 50 Hz [kW]
- North America NEMA: 60 Hz [hp] or 60 Hz [kW]
● How is the motor connected?
Pay attention to the connection of the motor (star connection [Y] or delta connection [Δ]).
Note the appropriate motor data for connecting.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 153
Commissioning
5.3 Preparing for commissioning
Data for a synchronous reluctance motor
Before starting commissioning, you must know the following data:
● Which motor is connected to the converter?
Note down the motor code on the type plate of the motor.
Figure 5-2 Example of a type plate for a reluctance motor
● In which region of the world is the motor to be used?
- Europe IEC: 50 Hz [kW]
- North America NEMA: 60 Hz [hp] or 60 Hz [kW]
● How is the motor connected?
Pay attention to the connection of the motor (star connection [Y] or delta connection [Δ]).
Note the appropriate motor data for connecting.
SINAMICS G120X converter
154 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Commissioning
5.3 Preparing for commissioning
5.3.2 Forming DC link capacitors
Overview
You have to reform the DC link capacitors if the converter has been stored for more than one
year. Non-formed DC link capacitors can damage the converter in operation.
Precondition
The converter has not yet been used, and according to the production date it was made over
a year ago.
The production date of the converter is coded in the 3rd and 4th digit of the serial number on the
rating plate: S . . ③④…
● Example: Serial number S ZVK5375000118 → Production date May 2018
Table 5-1 Production year and month
Digit ③ Production year Digit ④ Production month
K 2018 1 ... 9 January ... September
L 2019 0 October
M 2020 N November
… … D December
Function description
Procedure for FSA … FSG
You form the DC link capacitors by supplying the converter with a line voltage of ≤ 100% of the
rated voltage for a defined time.
)RUPLQJIRUVWRUDJHWLPHVRI\HDUV
8>@
)RUPLQJIRUVWRUDJHWLPHVRI\HDUV
)RUPLQJIRUVWRUDJHWLPHVRIDQGPRUH\HDUV
W>K@
Figure 5-3 Forming the DC link capacitors
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 155
Commissioning
5.3 Preparing for commissioning
Procedure for FSH and FSJ
1. Set p0010 = 2.
2. Set the forming duration p3380.
Storage time from the production date Recommended forming duration
1 ... 2 years 1 hour
2 ... 3 years 2 hours
> 3 years 8 hours
For p3380 > 0, with alarm A07391, the converter signals that at the next ON command, DC
link forming starts.
3. Switch on the motor, e.g. from an inserted operator panel.
4. Wait for the forming time to elapse. r3381 indicates the remaining time.
If the line voltage is switched off before forming has been completed, then you have to form
the DC link again.
5. The converter sets p3380 = 0.
6. Set p0010 = 0.
You have formed the DC link.
❒
Parameter
Parameter Description Factory setting
p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter 0
p3380 Forming activation/duration 0h
r3381 Remaining forming time -h
r3382 Forming status word -
SINAMICS G120X converter
156 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Commissioning
5.3 Preparing for commissioning
5.3.3 Converter factory setting
Motor
In the factory, the converter is set for an induction motor with 2 pole pairs that matches the rated
power of the converter.
Converter interfaces
The inputs and outputs and the fieldbus interface of the converter have specific functions when
set to the factory settings.
Factory interface settings (Page 105)
Switching the motor on and off
The converter is set in the factory as follows:
● After the ON command, the motor accelerates within the ramp-up time (referred to
1500 rpm) to its speed setpoint.
● After the OFF1 command, the motor brakes down to standstill with the ramp-down time.
● The negative direction of rotation is inhibited
212))
W
0RWRUVSHHG
PLQ
6HWSRLQW
5DPSXS 5DPSGRZQWLPH W
WLPH
Ramp-up time10 s
Figure 5-4 Switch motor on and off in the factory setting
The ramp-up and ramp-down times define the maximum motor acceleration when the speed
setpoint changes. The ramp-up and ramp-down times are derived from the time between motor
standstill and the maximum speed, or between the maximum speed and motor standstill.
Traverse the motor in the jog mode
For a converter with PROFINET interface, operation can be switched over using digital input
DI 4. The motor is either switched on and off via the fieldbus – or operated in the jog mode via
its digital inputs.
For a control command at the respective digital input, the motor rotates with ±150 rpm. The
same ramp-up and ramp-down times as described above apply.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 157
Commissioning
5.3 Preparing for commissioning
-RJ
-RJ W
W
0RWRUVSHHG
USP
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVHLVLQKLELWHG W
Figure 5-5 Jogging the motor in the factory setting
Minimum and maximum speed
● Minimum speed - factory setting 0 [rpm]
After the selection of a motor, during the quick commissioning, the converter sets the
minimum speed to 20% of the rated speed.
The minimum speed is the lowest speed of the motor independent of the speed setpoint.
● Maximum speed - factory setting 1500 [rpm]
The converter limits the motor speed to this value.
Operate the motor in the factory setting
We recommend that you execute quick commissioning. For quick commissioning, you must
adapt the converter to the connected motor by setting the motor data in the converter.
For basic applications, you can try to operate the drive with a rated power < 18.5 kW without any
other commissioning steps. Check whether the control quality of the drive without
commissioning is adequate for the requirements of the application.
SINAMICS G120X converter
158 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning using the BOP-2 operator panel
5.4 Quick commissioning using the BOP-2 operator panel
5.4.1 Fitting the BOP-2 to the converter
Fitting the BOP-2 to the converter
Procedure
1. Open the cover of the interface X21 on the front of the Control Unit.
2. Locate the lower edge of the Operator Panel into the matching recess of the Control Unit.
3. Plug the operator panel BOP-2 onto the converter until the latch audibly engages.
You have plugged the BOP-2 onto the converter.
❒
The operator panel BOP-2 is ready for operation when you connect the converter to the power
supply.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 159
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning using the BOP-2 operator panel
5.4.2 Overview of quick commissioning
6WDUWTXLFNFRPPLVVLRQLQJ
3DUDPHWHUVWREH
VHW
6HOHFWWKH
DSSOLFDWLRQFODVV S
6WDQGDUG'ULYH '\QDPLF'ULYH ([SHUW
&RQWURO &RQWURO
7KHLQYHUWHUVHOHFWVWKHDSSURSULDWHPRWRUFRQWUROPRGH
DQGGHILQHVWKHGHIDXOWVHWWLQJVIRUWKHPRWRUFRQWURO
PRGH
N: 9 (QWHUWKHGULYHGDWD S S S
$ PLQ S S S
S S S
S S S
6HOHFWWKHDSSOLFDWLRQ ([SHUW S
6WDQGDUGGULYHFRQWURO S
'\QDPLFGULYHFRQWURO S
6WDQGDUG'ULYH&RQWURO ([SHUW
'\QDPLF'ULYH&RQWURO 6HOHFWWKHPRWRUFRQWUROPRGH
S
6HOHFWWKHGHIDXOWVHWWLQJRIWKH
LQYHUWHULQWHUIDFHV S
6HWPLQLPXPDQGPD[LPXP S S
VSHHGVUDPSXSDQGUDPSGRZQ S S
WLPHV S
6HOHFWWKHPRWRUGDWDLGHQWLILFDWLRQ
" PHWKRG S
6WDUWPRWRUGDWDLGHQWLILFDWLRQ
7KHLQYHUWHURSWLPL]HVWKHFORVHG
ORRSPRWRUFRQWURO
4XLFNFRPPLVVLRQLQJKDVEHHQ
FRPSOHWHG
Figure 5-6 Quick commissioning using the BOP-2 operator panel
SINAMICS G120X converter
160 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning using the BOP-2 operator panel
5.4.3 Start quick commissioning and select the application class
Starting quick commissioning
Requirements
63
● The power supply is switched on.
● The operator panel displays setpoints and actual values.
Procedure
Press the ESC key.
Press one of the arrow keys until the BOP-2 displays the "SETUP" menu.
6(783 To start quick commissioning, in the "SETUP" menu, press the OK key.
5(6(7 We recommend resetting the converter to the factory setting before commencing quick
commissioning.
Should you wish to change the default setting of the interfaces, the converter must be reset to
the factory settings now.
Proceed as follows:
1. Press the OK key.
2. Switchover the display using an arrow key: nO → YES
3. Press the OK key.
'59$33/ When selecting an application class, the converter assigns the motor control with the
3
appropriate default settings:
● Standard Drive Control (Page 163)
● Dynamic Drive Control (Page 165)
● Expert (Page 167)
Depending on the particular Power Module, the converter skips selecting the application
class. If the BOP-2 does not display step DRV APPL, then continue commissioning as
described under "Expert".
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 161
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning using the BOP-2 operator panel
5.4.4 Selecting an application class
Application class Standard Drive Control Dynamic Drive Control
Properties ● Typical settling time after a speed change: ● Typical settling time after a speed change:
100 ms … 200 ms < 100 ms
● Typical settling time after a load surge: 500 ms ● Typical settling time after a load surge: 200 ms
/RDG /RDG
6SHHG W 6SHHG W
0RWRU W 0RWRU W
WRUTXH WRUTXH
PV W
PV
● Standard Drive Control is suitable for the
● Dynamic Drive Control controls and limits the
following requirements:
motor torque
– Motor power ratings < 45 kW
● Torque accuracy that can be achieved: ± 5% for
– Ramp-up time 0 → rated speed (depending 15% … 100% of the rated speed
on the motor power rating):
● We recommend Dynamic Drive Control for the
1 s (0.1 kW) … 10 s (45 kW)
following applications:
– Applications with steady load torque without
– Motor power ratings > 11 kW
load surges
– For load surges of 10% … >100% of the
● Standard Drive Control is insensitive with
rated motor torque
respect to imprecise setting of the motor data
● Dynamic Drive Control is necessary for a ramp-
up time 0 → rated speed (dependent on the rated
motor power): < 1 s (0.1 kW) … < 10 s (132 kW).
Application ex‐ ● Pumps, fans, and compressors with flow ● Pumps and compressors with displacement
amples characteristic machines
Motors that can Induction motors Induction and synchronous motors
be operated
Max. output fre‐ 550 Hz 240 Hz
quency
Torque control Without torque control Speed control with lower-level torque control
Commissioning ● Unlike "Dynamic Drive Control," no speed ● Fewer parameters compared with the
controller needs to be set "EXPERT" setting
● Compared with the "EXPERT" setting: ● Dynamic Drive Control is preset for converters
– Simplified commissioning using predefined of frame size D … frame size J
motor data
– Reduced number of parameters
● Standard Drive Control is preset for converters
of frame size A … frame size C
SINAMICS G120X converter
162 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning using the BOP-2 operator panel
5.4.5 Standard Drive Control
(8586$ Select the motor standard:
3
● KW / 50HZ: IEC
● HP / 60HZ: NEMA, US units
● KW / 60HZ: NEMA, SI units
,1992/7 Set the converter supply voltage.
3
0277<3( Select the motor type. If a 5-digit motor code is stamped on the motor rating plate, select the
3
corresponding motor type with motor code.
Motors without motor code stamped on the rating plate:
● INDUCT: Third-party induction motor
● 1L… IND: 1LE1, 1LG6, 1LA7, 1LA9 induction motors
Motors with motor code stamped on the rating plate:
● 1LE1 IND 100: 1LE1 . 9
● 1PC1 IND: 1PC1
Depending on the converter, the motor list in BOP‑2 can deviate from the list shown above.
027&2'( If you have selected a motor type with motor code, you must now enter the motor code. The
3
converter assigns the following motor data corresponding to the motor code.
If you do not know the motor code, then you must set the motor code = 0, and enter motor data
from p0304 and higher from the rating plate.
+= 87 Hz motor operation The BOP‑2 only indicates this step if you selected IEC as the motor
standard (EUR/USA, P100 = kW 50 Hz).
02792/7 Rated motor voltage
3
027&855 Rated motor current
3
02732: Rated motor power
3
027)5(4 Rated motor frequency
3
027530 Rated motor speed
3
027&22/ Motor cooling:
3
● SELF: Natural cooling
● FORCED: Forced-air cooling
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 163
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning using the BOP-2 operator panel
● LIQUID: Liquid cooling
● NO FAN: Without fan
7(&$33/ Select the basic setting for the motor control:
3
● VEC STD: Constant load
● PUMP FAN: Speed-dependent load
0$F3$U Select the default setting for the interfaces of the converter that is suitable for your application.
3
Factory interface settings (Page 105)
0,1530
Q
3 S
0$;530
3 S
6HWSRLQW
Figure 5-7 Minimum and maximum motor speed
5$0383
Q
3
QPD[ S
5$03':1 6HWSRLQW
3
S S W
Figure 5-8 Ramp-up and ramp-down time of the motor
2))53 Ramp-down time after the OFF3 command
3
027,' Motor data identification Select the method which the converter uses to measure the data of the
3
connected motor:
● OFF: No motor data identification
● STIL ROT: Measure the motor data at standstill and with the motor rotating.
The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed.
● STILL: Recommended setting: Measure the motor data at standstill.
The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed.
Select this setting if the motor cannot rotate freely.
● ROT: Measure the motor data while the motor is rotating.
The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed.
● ST RT OP: setting same as STIL ROT.
After the motor data identification, the motor accelerates to the current setpoint.
● STILL OP: setting same as STILL.
After the motor data identification, the motor accelerates to the current setpoint.
),1,6+ Complete quick commissioning as follows:
1. Switchover the display using an arrow key: nO → YES
2. Press the OK key.
SINAMICS G120X converter
164 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning using the BOP-2 operator panel
You have completed quick commissioning.
❒
5.4.6 Dynamic Drive Control
(8586$ Select the motor standard:
3
● KW / 50HZ: IEC
● HP / 60HZ: NEMA, US units
● KW / 60HZ: NEMA, SI units
,1992/7 Set the converter supply voltage.
3
0277<3( Select the motor type. If a 5-digit motor code is stamped on the motor rating plate, select the
3
corresponding motor type with motor code.
Motors without motor code stamped on the rating plate:
● INDUCT: Third-party induction motor
● 1L… IND: 1LE1, 1LG6, 1LA7, 1LA9 induction motors
Motors with motor code stamped on the rating plate:
● 1LE1 IND 100: 1LE1 . 9
● 1PC1 IND: 1PC1
Depending on the converter, the motor list in BOP‑2 can deviate from the list shown above.
027&2'( If you have selected a motor type with motor code, you must now enter the motor code. The
3
converter assigns the following motor data corresponding to the motor code.
If you do not know the motor code, then you must set the motor code = 0, and enter motor data
from p0304 and higher from the rating plate.
+= 87 Hz motor operation The BOP‑2 only indicates this step if you selected IEC as the motor
standard (EUR/USA, P100 = kW 50 Hz).
02792/7 Rated motor voltage
3
027&855 Rated motor current
3
02732: Rated motor power
3
027)5(4 Rated motor frequency
3
027530 Rated motor speed
3
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 165
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning using the BOP-2 operator panel
027&22/ Motor cooling:
3
● SELF: Natural cooling
● FORCED: Forced-air cooling
● LIQUID: Liquid cooling
● NO FAN: Without fan
7(&$33/ Select the basic setting for the motor control:
3
● OP LOOP: Recommended setting for standard applications
● CL LOOP: Recommended setting for applications with short ramp-up and ramp-down times.
● HVY LOAD: Recommended setting for applications with a high break loose torque.
0$F3$U Select the default setting for the interfaces of the converter that is suitable for your application.
3
Factory interface settings (Page 105)
0,1530
Q
3 S
0$;530
3 S
6HWSRLQW
Figure 5-9 Minimum and maximum motor speed
5$0383
Q
3
QPD[ S
5$03':1 6HWSRLQW
3
S S W
Figure 5-10 Ramp-up and ramp-down time of the motor
2))53 Ramp-down time after the OFF3 command
3
027,' Motor data identification: Select the method which the converter uses to measure the data of
3
the connected motor:
● OFF: Motor data is not measured.
STIL ROT: Recommended setting: Measure the motor data at standstill and with the motor
rotating.
The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed.
● STILL: Default setting: Measure the motor data at standstill.
The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed.
Select this setting if the motor cannot rotate freely.
● ROT: Measure the motor data while the motor is rotating.
The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed.
SINAMICS G120X converter
166 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning using the BOP-2 operator panel
● ST RT OP: setting same as STIL ROT.
After the motor data identification, the motor accelerates to the current setpoint.
● STILL OP: setting same as STILL.
After the motor data identification, the motor accelerates to the current setpoint.
),1,6+ Complete quick commissioning:
● Switch over the display using an arrow key: nO → YES
● Press the OK key.
You have completed quick commissioning.
❒
5.4.7 Expert
(8586$ Select the motor standard:
3
● KW / 50HZ: IEC
● HP / 60HZ: NEMA, US units
● KW / 60HZ: NEMA, SI units
/2$'7<3 Specify the overload capability of the converter:
3
● HIGH OVL: Duty cycle with "High Overload"
● LOW OVL: Duty cycle with "Low Overload"
Load cycles and overload capability (Page 1084)
,1992/7 Set the converter supply voltage.
3
0277<3( Select the motor type. If a 5-digit motor code is stamped on the motor rating plate, select the
3
corresponding motor type with motor code.
Motors without motor code stamped on the rating plate:
● INDUCT: Third-party induction motor
● 1L… IND: 1LE1, 1LG6, 1LA7, 1LA9 induction motors
Motors with motor code stamped on the rating plate:
● 1LE1 IND 100: 1LE1 . 9
● 1PC1 IND: 1PC1
Depending on the converter, the motor list in BOP‑2 can deviate from the list shown above.
027&2'( If you have selected a motor type with motor code, you must now enter the motor code. The
3
converter assigns the following motor data corresponding to the motor code.
If you do not know the motor code, then you must set the motor code = 0, and enter motor data
from p0304 and higher from the rating plate.
+= 87 Hz motor operation The BOP‑2 only indicates this step if you selected IEC as the motor
standard (EUR/USA, P100 = kW 50 Hz).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 167
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning using the BOP-2 operator panel
02792/7 Rated motor voltage
3
027&855 Rated motor current
3
02732: Rated motor power
3
027)5(4 Rated motor frequency
3
027530 Rated motor speed
3
027&22/ Motor cooling:
3
● SELF: Natural cooling
● FORCED: Forced-air cooling
● LIQUID: Liquid cooling
● NO FAN: Without fan
7(&$33/ Select the appropriate application:
3
● VEC STD: In all applications, which do not fit the other setting options.
● PUMP FAN: Applications involving pumps and fans
● SLVC 0HZ: Applications with short ramp-up and ramp-down times.
● PUMP 0HZ: Applications involving pumps and fans with optimized efficiency. The setting
only makes sense for steady-state operation with slow speed changes. We recommend
setting VEC STD if load surges in operation cannot be ruled out.
● V LOAD: Applications with high breakaway torque
&75/02' Select the control mode:
3
● VF LIN: U/f control with linear characteristic
● VF LIN F: Flux current control (FCC)
● VF QUAD: U/f control with square-law characteristic
● SPD N EN: Sensorless vector control
SINAMICS G120X converter
168 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning using the BOP-2 operator panel
Control mode U/f control or flux current control (FCC) Sensorless vector control
Properties ● Typical settling time after a speed change: ● Typical settling time after a speed change:
100 ms … 200 ms < 100 ms
● Typical settling time after a load surge: 500 ms ● Typical settling time after a load surge: 200 ms
/RDG /RDG
6SHHG W 6SHHG W
0RWRU W 0RWRU W
WRUTXH WRUTXH
PV W
PV
● The control mode is suitable to address the
● The control mode controls and limits the motor
following requirements:
torque
– Motor power ratings < 45 kW
● Torque accuracy that can be achieved: ± 5% for
– Ramp-up time 0 → rated speed (depending 15% … 100% of the rated speed
on the motor power rating):
● We recommend the control mode for the
1 s (0.1 kW) … 10 s (45 kW)
following applications:
– Applications with steady load torque without
– Motor power ratings > 11 kW
load surges
– For load surges of 10% … >100% of the
● The control mode is insensitive with respect to
rated motor torque
imprecise setting of the motor data
● The control mode is necessary for a ramp-up
time 0 → Rated speed (dependent on the rated
motor power): < 1 s (0.1 kW) … < 10 s (250 kW).
Application ex‐ ● Pumps, fans, and compressors with flow ● Pumps and compressors with displacement
amples characteristic machines
Motors that can Induction motors Induction and synchronous motors
be operated
Max. output fre‐ 550 Hz 240 Hz
quency
Torque control Without torque control Torque control with and without higher-level speed
control
Commissioning ● In contrast to sensorless vector control, the
speed controller does not have to be set
0$F3$U Select the default setting for the interfaces of the converter that is suitable for your application.
3
Factory interface settings (Page 105)
0,1530
Q
3 S
0$;530
3 S
6HWSRLQW
Figure 5-11 Minimum and maximum motor speed
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 169
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning using the BOP-2 operator panel
Q
5$0383 QPD[ S
3
6HWSRLQW
5$03':1
3
S S W
Figure 5-12 Ramp-up and ramp-down time of the motor
2))53 Ramp-down time for the OFF3 command
3
027,' Motor data identification: Select the method which the converter uses to measure the data of
3
the connected motor:
● OFF: Motor data is not measured.
● STIL ROT: Recommended setting: Measure the motor data at standstill and with the motor
rotating. The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been
completed.
● STILL: Measure the motor data at standstill. The converter switches off the motor after the
motor data identification has been completed.
Select this setting if one of the following cases is applicable:
– You have selected control mode "SPD N EN", but the motor cannot rotate freely.
– You have selected U/f control as control mode, e.g. "VF LIN" or "VF QUAD".
● ROT: Measure the motor data while the motor is rotating. The converter switches off the
motor after the motor data identification has been completed.
● ST RT OP: setting same as STIL ROT.
After the motor data identification, the motor accelerates to the current setpoint.
● STILL OP: setting same as STILL.
After the motor data identification, the motor accelerates to the current setpoint.
),1,6+ Complete quick commissioning:
Switchover the display using an arrow key: nO → YES
Press the OK key.
You have completed quick commissioning.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
170 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning using the BOP-2 operator panel
5.4.8 Identifying the motor data and optimizing the closed-loop control
Overview
Using the motor data identification, the converter measures the data of the stationary motor. In
addition, based on the response of the rotating motor, the converter can determine a suitable
setting for the vector control.
To start the motor data identification routine, you must switch-on the motor via the terminal strip,
fieldbus or from the operator panel.
Identifying the motor data and optimizing the closed-loop control
Requirements
● You have selected a method of motor data identification during quick commissioning, e.g.
measuring motor data while the motor is stationary.
When quick commissioning is complete, the converter issues alarm A07991.
● The motor has cooled down to the ambient temperature.
An excessively high motor temperature falsifies the motor data identification results.
WARNING
Unexpected machine motion while the motor data identification is in progress
For the stationary measurement, the motor can make several rotations. The rotating
measurement accelerates the motor up to the rated speed. Secure dangerous machine parts
before starting motor data identification:
● Before switching on, ensure that nobody is working on the machine or located within its
working area.
● Secure the machine's work area against unintended access.
● Lower suspended loads to the floor.
Procedure
Press the HAND/AUTO key.
The BOP-2 displays the symbol indicating manual operation.
Switch on the motor.
027,' During motor data identification, "MOT-ID" flashes on the BOP‑2.
If the converter again outputs alarm A07991, then it waits for a new ON command to start the
rotating measurement.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 171
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning using the BOP-2 operator panel
If the converter does not output alarm A07991, switch off the motor as described below, and
switch over the converter control from HAND to AUTO.
Switch on the motor to start the rotating measurement.
027,' During motor data identification, "MOT-ID" flashes on the BOP‑2.
The motor data identification can take up to 2 minutes depending on the rated motor power.
Depending on the setting, after motor data identification has been completed, the converter
switches off the motor - or it accelerates it to the setpoint.
If required, switch off the motor.
Switch the converter control from HAND to AUTO.
You have completed the motor data identification.
❒
Quick commissioning has been completed once the motor data identification has been
successfully completed.
SINAMICS G120X converter
172 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Commissioning
5.5 Restoring the factory settings
5.5 Restoring the factory settings
Why restore the factory settings?
Reset the converter to the factory settings in the following cases:
● You do not know the converter settings.
● The line voltage was interrupted during commissioning and you were not able to complete
commissioning.
Resetting to factory setting with the BOP-2 operator panel
Procedure
1. Select the "DRVRESET" command from the "EXTRAS" menu
2. Confirm the reset using the OK key.
3. Wait until the converter has been reset to the factory setting.
You have reset the converter to the factory settings.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 173
Commissioning
5.6 Handling the BOP-2 operator panel
5.6 Handling the BOP-2 operator panel
6HOHFW &RQWUROPRWRU 'LDJQRVWLFV &KDQJH %DVLF 5HVHW
GLVSOD\ DFNQRZOHGJH VHWWLQJV FRPPLVVLR EDFNXS
YDOXHV IDXOW QLQJ
021,725 &21752/ ',$*126 3$5$06 6(783 237,216
6HWSRLQW 63 >PLQ@
$&.1$// 67$1'$5' 5(6(7 '595(6(7
6SHHG >PLQ@ ),/7(5
63>PLQ@
>PLQ@
2XWSXWYROWDJH 92/7287 )$8/76 (;3(57 '59$33/ 5$0520
>9@ ,QFUHDVH ),/7(5
GHFUHDVH
'&OLQNYROWDJH '&/1.9
VSHHG +,6725< 0DF3$U 72%23
>9@
2XWSXWFXUUHQW &855287 67$786 )520%23
U31111 5$03':1
>$@ ;;;;
2XWSXW 72&$5'
)5(4 6(732,17 ),1,6+
IUHTXHQF\ >+]@
)520&5'
6SHHG >PLQ@
&XUUHQW >$@
9ROWDJH >9@ -2*
&XUUHQW >$@
5(9(56(
9ROWDJH >9@
6SHHG >PLQ@
1)
Status display once the power supply for the converter has been switched on.
Figure 5-13 Menu of the BOP-2
7KHPRWRULVVZLWFKHGRQ 3URFHGXUHIRUVZLWFKLQJWKHPRWRURQDQGRIIYLDWKH
RSHUDWRUSDQHO
3UHVV0$18$/$872
-RJLVDFWLYH
-2*
0DVWHUFRQWURORIWKHLQYHUWHULVUHOHDVHG
$QDODUPLVDFWLYH YLDWKH%23
6ZLWFKRQPRWRU
)ODVKLQJV\PERO 6ZLWFKRIIWKHPRWRU
$IDXOWLVDFWLYH
Figure 5-14 Other keys and symbols of the BOP-2
SINAMICS G120X converter
174 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Commissioning
5.6 Handling the BOP-2 operator panel
5.6.1 Changing settings using BOP-2
Changing settings using BOP-2
You can modify the settings of your converter by changing the values of the its parameters. The
converter only permits changes to "write" parameters. Write parameters begin with a "P", e.g.
P45.
The value of a read-only parameter cannot be changed. Read-only parameters begin with an
"r", for example: r2.
The converter retentively saves all the changes made using the BOP-2 so that they are
protected against power failure.
Procedure
3$5$06
2.
67$1'$5' (;3(57
),/7(5 ),/7(5
2. 2. (6&
U 3 3
2.
3
2.
1. Select the menu to display and change parameters.
Press the OK key.
2. Select the parameter filter using the arrow keys.
Press the OK key.
– STANDARD: The converter only displays the most important parameters.
– EXPERT: The converter displays all of the parameters.
3. Select the required number of a write parameter using the arrow keys.
Press the OK key.
4. Select the value of the write parameter using the arrow keys.
Accept the value with the OK key.
You have now changed a write parameter using the BOP-2.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 175
Commissioning
5.6 Handling the BOP-2 operator panel
5.6.2 Changing indexed parameters
Changing indexed parameters
For indexed parameters, several parameter values are assigned to a parameter number. Each
of the parameter values has its own index.
Procedure
3 >@
U
2.
3 >@
U
2.
3 >
U
1. Select the parameter number.
2. Press the OK key.
3. Set the parameter index.
4. Press the OK key.
5. Set the parameter value for the selected index.
You have now changed an indexed parameter.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
176 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Commissioning
5.6 Handling the BOP-2 operator panel
5.6.3 Directly entering the parameter number and value
Directly select the parameter number
The BOP‑2 offers the possibility of setting the parameter number digit by digit.
Precondition
The parameter number is flashing in the BOP-2 display.
Procedure
3
2.
V
(6&
3
2.
1. Press the OK button for longer than five seconds.
2. Change the parameter number digit-by-digit.
If you press the OK button then the BOP‑2 jumps to the next digit.
3. If you have entered all of the digits of the parameter number, press the OK button.
You have now entered the parameter number directly.
❒
Entering the parameter value directly
The BOP‑2 offers the option of setting the parameter value digit by digit.
Precondition
The parameter value flashes in the BOP-2 display.
Procedure
3
2.
V
(6&
2.
1. Press the OK button for longer than five seconds.
2. Change the parameter value digit-by-digit.
If you press the OK button then the BOP‑2 jumps to the next digit.
3. If you have entered all of the digits of the parameter value, press the OK button.
You have now entered the parameter value directly.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 177
Commissioning
5.6 Handling the BOP-2 operator panel
5.6.4 A parameter cannot be changed
When cannot you change a parameter?
The converter indicates why it currently does not permit a parameter to be changed:
Read parameters cannot The parameter can only be adjusted A parameter can only be adjusted
be adjusted during quick commissioning. when the motor is switched off
U 3 3
9 9
2. V 2. V 2. V
5($'21/< 3 5811,1*
For each parameter, the parameter list contains the operating state in which the parameter can
be changed.
SINAMICS G120X converter
178 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning 6
6.1 Overview of the converter functions
+LJKHUOHYHOFRQWURO
)LHOGEXV
6HWSRLQWV 6,1$0,&6*;
6HWSRLQW 0RWRUFRQWURO 0
SURFHVVLQJ
7HFKQRORJ\ 3,'
FRQWUROOHU
&RPPDQGV 'ULYHFRQWURO 3XPSFRQWURO
6WDWXV
3URWHFWLRQ $YDLODELOLW\ (QHUJ\VDYLQJ
6DIHW\IXQFWLRQ
)DLOVDIHFRPPDQG
6DIH7RUTXH2II
Drive control
The converter receives its commands from the higher-level control via the terminal strip or the
fieldbus interface of the Control Unit. The drive control defines how the converter responds to
the commands.
Drive control (Page 182)
The converter can switch between different settings of the drive control.
Switching over the drive control (command data set) (Page 292)
Safety functions
The safety functions fulfill increased requirements regarding the functional safety of the drive.
Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function (Page 296)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 179
Advanced commissioning
6.1 Overview of the converter functions
Setpoints and setpoint conditioning
The setpoint generally determines the motor speed.
Setpoints (Page 327)
The setpoint processing uses a ramp-function generator to prevent speed steps occurring and
to limit the speed to a permissible maximum value.
Setpoint processing (Page 338)
Technology controller
3,' The technology controller controls process variables, e.g. pressure, temperature, level or flow.
The motor closed-loop control either receives its setpoint from the higher-level control - or from
the technology controller.
Technology controller (Page 350)
Motor control
The motor closed-loop control ensures that the motor follows the speed setpoint. You can
choose between various control modes.
Motor control (Page 376)
Drive protection
The protection functions prevent damage to the motor, converter and driven load.
Drive protection (Page 404)
Increasing the drive availability
The drive can bridge temporary power failures or be switched on while the motor is rotating.
Drive availability (Page 423)
Saving energy
$
%
The converter enhances the efficiency optimization of the standard induction motor or
& disconnects the power module from the system, if necessary.
Energy saving (Page 434)
SINAMICS G120X converter
180 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.2 Brief description of the parameters
6.2 Brief description of the parameters
Overview
The brief parameter description provides the most important information for all of the
parameters that are assigned to a certain converter function.
If the number of parameter indices depends on the data sets, then the parameter index is
shown in an abbreviated form.
1XPEHURILQGLFHV QXPEHURIFRPPDQGGDWDVHWV &'6
1XPEHURILQGLFHV QXPEHURIGULYHGDWDVHWV ''6
1XPEHURILQGLFHV QXPEHURIPRWRUGDWDVHWV 0'6
3DUDPHWHUVZLWKLQGLFHV
3DUDPHWHUVZLWKELWV
1XPEHU 1DPH )DFWRU\VHWWLQJ
S>&@
S>'@
S>0@
S>@
S
Figure 6-1 Brief parameter description
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 181
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3 Drive control
6.3.1 Sequence control when switching the motor on and off
Overview
The sequence control defines the rules for switching the motor on and off.
5HDG\WRVZLWFKRQ
21 2))
2SHUDWLRQ
Figure 6-2 Simplified representation of the sequence control
After switching the supply voltage on, the converter normally goes into the "ready to start" state.
In this state, the converter waits for the command to switch on the motor.
The converter switches on the motor with the ON command. The converter changes to the
"Operation" state.
After the OFF1 command, the converter brakes the motor down to standstill. The converter
switches off the motor once standstill has been reached. The converter is again "ready to start".
Precondition
Functions
In order to be able to respond to external commands, you must set the command interface so
that it fits your specific application.
Tools
One of the commissioning tools is needed to change the function settings.
SINAMICS G120X converter
182 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Function description
6ZLWFKRQWKHSRZHUVXSSO\RIWKHLQYHUWHU
6
6ZLWFKLQJRQLQKLELWHG
2))
DQGQRW 2)) 2)) 2)) 2)) 2)) 0RWRU 2))
DQGQRW 2)) VWDWLRQDU\
2)) 6
5HDG\IRUVZLWFKLQJRQ
21
2)) RU -RJJLQJ 2)) 6E
RU -RJJLQJ 4XLFNVWRS
0RWRU 2)) 2)) 0RWRU 2))
6 VWDWLRQDU\ VWDWLRQDU\
5HDG\ 2))
6D 6F
,QKLELW (QDEOH 5DPSVWRS -RJJLQJGRZQUDPS
RSHUDWLRQ RSHUDWLRQ
2)) 21 1HLWKHUMRJJLQJ -RJJLQJ
QRUMRJJLQJ RU -RJJLQJ
6
2SHUDWLRQ
Figure 6-3 Sequence control of the converter when the motor is switched on and off
Converter states S1 … S5c are defined in the PROFIdrive profile. The sequence control defines
the transition from one state to another.
Table 6-1 Converter states
The motor is switched off The motor is switched on
Current does not flow in the motor and the motor Current flows in the motor and the motor generates
does not generate any torque a torque
S1 The ON command and an OFF command S4 The motor is switched on.
are active at the same time.
In order for the converter to exit the state,
you must deactivate OFF2 and OFF3 and
activate the ON command again.
S2 The converter waits for a new command S5a, The motor is still switched on. The con‐
to switch on the motor. S5c verter brakes the motor with the ramp-
down time of the ramp-function generator.
S3 The converter waits for "Enable opera‐ S5b The motor is still switched on. The con‐
tion". The "Enable operation" command is verter brakes the motor with the OFF3
always active in the converter factory set‐ ramp-down time.
ting.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 183
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Table 6-2 Commands for switching the motor on and off
ON The converter switches the motor on.
Jogging 1
Jogging 2
Enable opera‐
tion
OFF1, OFF3 1. The converter brakes the motor.
2. The converter switches off the motor once it comes to a standstill.
The converter identifies that the motor is at a standstill when at least one of the following
conditions is satisfied:
● The speed actual value falls below the threshold in p1226, and the time started in
p1228 has expired.
● The speed setpoint falls below the threshold in p1226, and the time subsequently
started in p1227 has expired.
OFF2 The converter switches off the motor immediately without first braking it.
Inhibit opera‐
tion
SINAMICS G120X converter
184 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
SಹS 32:(521 !
! +DUGZDUH )DXOWZLWK wV
! 2))RU2))
HQDEOH
6 6ZLWFKLQJRQLQKLELWHG 0RWRUDWVWDQGVWLOO UHVSRQVH
Figure 6-4
=6:$ =6:$ )URPDOOVWDWHV
2)) 67:$ =6:$
'ULYHDWVWDQGVWLOO
0RWRUVZLWFKHGRII &RDVW6WRS 67:$
! ! &RDVW6WRS 67:$ ! ! +DUGZDUH
ุ
4XLFN6WRS 67:$ ! UVDIHW\HQDEOH HQDEOH
Function diagram
! &RDVW6WRS 67:$ >@ PLVVLQJ
FP 2610
! UVDIHW\HQDEOHPLVVLQJ
>@ ! 4XLFN6WRS 67:$ ุ
SINAMICS G120X converter
&RPPLVVLRQLQJFRPSOHWHG ! UVDIHW\HQDEOHPLVVLQJ !
S >@ !
4XLFN6WRS 6E 4XLFN6WRS
!
67:$ =6:$
6 5HDG\IRUVZLWFKLQJRQ =6:$
! !
=6:$ =6:$ =6:$
0DLQFRQWDFWRULV23(1 6WRSWKHPRWRUDORQJWKH
+DUGZDUH UDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
:DLWIRUSRZHUXSRUMRJ
HQDEOH WKHQVZLWFKRIIWKHPRWRU
! ! &RDVW6WRS 2))
67:$ -RJ ุ
4XLFN6WRS 2)) 0RWRUDW
! ! ุ -RJ -RJ
67:$ -RJ VWDQGVWLOO
! 6F -RJJLQJGRZQ
! UVDIHW\HQDEOH
>@ 6 5HDG\IRURSHUDWLRQ UDPS
PLVVLQJ =6:$
=6:$ =6:$ =6:$ !
&ORVHPDLQFRQW =6:$ =6:$
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
&ORVHPDLQ &ORVHGORRS !
S :DLWIRU(QDEOHRSHUDWLRQ 6WRSWKHPRWRUDORQJWKH
FRQWDFWRU FRQWURORSHUDWLRQ
ุ 6D 5DPSVWRS UDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
U U =6:$ WKHQVZLWFKRIIWKHPRWRU
9'&FKDUJHG =6:$
=6:$ !
1R30BIDXOW ! (QDEOHRSHUDWLRQ (QDEOH 6WRSWKHPRWRUDORQJWKH
67:$
RSHUDWLRQ UDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
'HPDJQHWL]DWLRQ 67:$ &RQWUROOHU
WKHQVZLWFKRIIWKHPRWRU
! &RDVW6WRS FRPSOHWHG HQDEOH
!
! 67:$ U 1RMRJJLQJ -RJ ุ U
ุ 6 2SHUDWLRQ -RJ >@
! UVDIHW\ =6:$ ุ -RJ
>@ HQDEOHPLVVLQJ =6:$ 2)) -RJ -RJJLQJ
2)) KDVSULRULW\RYHUMRJJLQJ
=6:$
3XOVHVHQDEOHG
! 32:(521 9HOHFWURQLFVVXSSO\2))!21RU5(6(7EXWWRQ &RQWUROOHUHQDEOHG
! 7KHVHTXHQFHFRQWUROLVLPSOHPHQWHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKH352),GULYHSURILOH1RMRJRSHUDWLRQ 6HWSRLQWV
! 7KHVHFRQWUROFRPPDQGVFDQDOVREHWULJJHUHGE\DIDXOWUHVSRQVH HQDEOHG 2)) KDVSULRULW\RYHUMRJJLQJ
)DXOWV 0LVVLQJHQDEOH
! 67:$[[ FRQWUROZRUGVHTXHQFHFRQWUROELW[[ U >@ =6:$[[ VWDWXVZRUGVHTXHQFHFRQWUROELW[[ U >@ )) VLJQDOV >@
! 7KHSDUDPHWHUVSSDQGSLQIOXHQFHWKLVVWDWXV ) U
! 672YLDWHUPLQDORQ3RZHU0RGXOH
,QWHUQDOFRQWUROVWDWXVZRUGV
6HTXHQFHFRQWURO6HTXHQFHU
Advanced commissioning
185
6.3 Drive control
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Parameter
Number Name Factory setting
r0046.0…31 CO/BO: Missing enable signals -
p0857 Power unit monitoring time 10000 ms
p0858[C] BI: Unconditionally close holding brake 0
p0860 BI: Line contactor feedback signal 863.1
p0861 Line contactor monitoring time 100 ms
p1226[D] Speed threshold for standstill detection 20 rpm
p1227 Standstill detection monitoring time 300 s
p1228 Pulse suppression delay time 0.01 s
For additional information on parameters, please refer to the parameter list.
6.3.2 Adapt the default setting of the terminal strips
Overview
In the converter, the input and output signals are interconnected with specific converter
functions using special parameters. The following parameters are available to interconnect
signals:
● Binectors BI and BO are parameters to interconnect binary signals.
● Connectors CI and CO are parameters to interconnect analog signals.
The following chapters describe how you adapt the function of individual converter inputs and
outputs using binectors and connectors.
SINAMICS G120X converter
186 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
%, S[[[[ 6,1$0,&6*;
, 8
', U $, &, S\\\\
%, S[[[[ U>@
$,
', U
, 8
%, S[[[[ $, &, S\\\\
', U U>@
$,
%, S[[[[
', U , 7(03
$, &, S\\\\
˽
%, S[[[[ U>@
', U
%, S[[[[ 7(03
$, &, S\\\\
', U ˽
U>@
%, S[[[[ *1'
', U
%, S[[[[ S>@
', U $2 &2 U[[\\
*1'
S S>@
'21& %2 U\\[[Q $2 &2 U[[\\
'212 *1'
'2&20 S>@
S $2 &2 U[[\\
'21& %2 U\\[[Q *1'
'212
'2&20
S
'2&20 %2 U\\[[Q
'212
S
'2&20 %2 U\\[[Q
'212
S
'2&20 %2 U\\[[Q
'212
'21&
S
'2&20 %2 U\\[[Q
'212
'21&
1)
with I/O Extension Module
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 187
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.2.1 Digital inputs
Function description
%, S[[[[
', U
', U
', U
', U
', U
', U
', U
', U
1)
with I/O Extension Module
To change the function of a digital input, you must interconnect the status parameter of the
digital input with a binector input of your choice.
Binector inputs are designated in the parameter list with the prefix "BI".
Example
S
', U
To acknowledge converter fault messages using digital input DI 1, you must interconnect DI 1
with the command to acknowledge faults (p2103).
Set p2103 = 722.1.
Parameters
Parameter Description Factory setting
r0721 CU digital inputs, terminal actual value -
r0722 CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status -
r0723 CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status inverted --
p0724 CU digital inputs debounce time 4 ms
p0810 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 0 Dependent on the converter
p0840[C] BI: ON/OFF (OFF1) Dependent on the converter
p0844[C] BI: No coast down/coast down (OFF2) signal Dependent on the converter
source 1
p0848[C] BI: No quick stop/quick stop (OFF3) signal source 1
1
p0852[C] BI: Enable operation/inhibit operation Dependent on the converter
p1020[C] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection, bit 0 0
p1021[C] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection, bit 1 0
p1022[C] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection, bit 2 0
p1023[C] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection, bit 3 0
p1035[C] BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint higher Dependent on the converter
SINAMICS G120X converter
188 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Parameter Description Factory setting
p1036[C] BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint lower Dependent on the converter
p1055[C] BI: Jogging bit 0 Dependent on the converter
p1056[C] BI: Jogging bit 1 Dependent on the converter
p1113[C] BI: Setpoint inversion Dependent on the converter
p2103[C] BI: 1. Acknowledge faults Dependent on the converter
p2106[C] BI: External fault 1 1
p2112[C] BI: External alarm 1 1
For further binector inputs and additional information on parameters, please refer to the
parameter list.
Parameter list (Page 470)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 189
6LPXODWLRQRQ 'HERXQFLQJ
190
U S S U
U
Figure 6-5
7
S U
U
',
U S S U
6.3 Drive control
U
Function diagram
9 7
FP 2221
', S U
U
S
Advanced commissioning
U S U
U
', 7
S U
U
U S S U
',
U
7
S U
U
', S
U S U
U
7
S U
', U
U S S U
U
9 7
', ! U
S U
U S S U
U
', !
7
S U
U
U S S U
U
7
!PLW,2([WHQVLRQ0RGXOH S U
U
,QSXWRXWSXWWHUPLQDOV
'LJLWDOLQSXWVHOHFWULFDOO\LVRODWHG
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
SINAMICS G120X converter
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.2.2 Analog input as digital input
Function description
$,
$,
9RXW
9RXW , 8
*1' %, S[[[[
',
$, U
$,
',
$, U
$,
To use an analog input as additional digital input, you must interconnect the corresponding
status parameter r0722.11 or r0722.12 with a binector input of your choice.
You may operate the analog input as a digital input with 10 V or with 24 V.
NOTICE
Defective analog input due to overcurrent
If the analog input switch is set to "Current input" (I), a 10 V or 24 V voltage source results in
an overcurrent at the analog input. An overcurrent condition destroys the analog input.
● If you use an analog input as a digital input, then you must set the analog input switch to
"Voltage" (U).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 191
192
Figure 6-6
6.3 Drive control
Function diagram
, &XUUHQW
FP 2256
$, ', 8 9ROWDJH 6LPXODWLRQRQ
7HUPLQDO 'HERXQFH
9 9 S
Advanced commissioning
U S
8
U
7 U
ದ U
S
U
7HUPLQDO $,
, &XUUHQW
$, ', 8 9ROWDJH 6LPXODWLRQRQ
7HUPLQDO 'HERXQFH
9 9 S
U S
8
U
7 U
ದ U
S
U
7HUPLQDO $,
,QSXW2XWSXW7HUPLQDOV
$QDORJLQSXWVDV'LJLWDOLQSXWV ',ಹ',
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
SINAMICS G120X converter
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.2.3 Digital outputs
Function description
S
'21& %2 U\\[[Q
'212
'2&20
S
'21& %2 U\\[[Q
'212
'2&20
S
'21& %2 U\\[[Q
'212
'2&20
S
'21& %2 U\\[[Q
'212
'2&20
S
'2&20 %2 U\\[[Q
'212
S
'2&20 %2 U\\[[Q
'212
1)
with I/O Extension Module
To change the function of a digital output, you must interconnect the digital output with a
binector output of your choice.
Binector outputs are designated in the parameter list with the prefix "BO".
Example
S
'21& U
'212
'2&20
To output converter fault messages via digital output DO 1, you must interconnect DO 1 with
these fault messages.
Set p0731 = 52.3
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 193
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Parameters
Table 6-3 Frequently used binector outputs (BO) of the converter
Parameter Description Factory setting
r0052[0...15] CO/BO: Status word 1 -
.00 1 signal: Ready for switching on
.01 1 signal: Ready for operation
.02 1 signal: Operation enabled
.03 1 signal: Fault active
The converter inverts signal r0052.03 if it is inter‐
connected to a digital output.
.04 0 signal: OFF2 active
.05 0 signal: OFF3 active
.06 1 signal: Switching on inhibited active
.07 1 signal: Alarm active
.08 0 signal: Deviation, setpoint/actual speed
.09 1 signal: Control request
.10 1 signal: Maximum speed (p1082) reached
.11 0 signal: I, M, P limit reached
.13 0 signal: Alarm, motor overtemperature
.14 1 signal: Motor clockwise rotation
.15 0 signal: Alarm, converter overload
r0053[0...11] CO/BO: Status word 2 -
.00 1 signal: DC braking active
.02 1 signal: Speed > minimum speed (p1080)
.06 1 signal: Speed ≥ setpoint speed (r1119)
p0730 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 0 52.3
p0731 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 1 52.2
p0732 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 2 52.0
p0733 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 3 52.7
p0734 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 4 0
p0735 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 5 0
Further information is provided in the parameter list.
Parameter list (Page 470)
SINAMICS G120X converter
194 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
S
U
Figure 6-7
S '2
1&
7HUPLQDO
12
7HUPLQDO
S
&20 7HUPLQDO
U
Function diagram
FP 2244
S '2
1&
SINAMICS G120X converter
7HUPLQDO
12
7HUPLQDO
&20 7HUPLQDO
S
U
S
'2 !
1& 7HUPLQDO
12
7HUPLQDO
S
&20 7HUPLQDO
U
S '2 !
1& 7HUPLQDO
12
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
7HUPLQDO
S
&20 7HUPLQDO
U
S
'2 !
12
7HUPLQDO
S
&20
U 7HUPLQDO
S
'2 !
12
7HUPLQDO
&20
7HUPLQDO
!PLW,2([WHQVLRQ0RGXOH
,QSXWRXWSXWWHUPLQDOV
'LJLWDORXWSXWV
Advanced commissioning
195
6.3 Drive control
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.2.4 Analog inputs
Function description
S>@
, 8 &, S\\\\
$,
U>@
$,
S>@
, 8 &, S\\\\
$,
U>@
$,
S>@
, 7(03 &, S\\\\
˽ $,
U>@
S>@
7(03 &, S\\\\
˽ $,
U>@
*1'
1)
with I/O Extension Module
Define the analog input type
The parameter p0756[x] and the switch on the converter specify the analog input type.
Table 6-4 Default settings via parameter p0756
AI 0 Unipolar voltage input 0 V … +10 V p0756[0] = 0
Unipolar voltage input monitored +2 V … +10 V 1
Unipolar current input 0 mA … +20 mA 2
Unipolar current input monitored +4 mA … +20 mA 3
Bipolar voltage input (factory setting) ‑10 V … +10 V 4
AI 1 Unipolar voltage input 0 V … +10 V p0756[1] = 0
Unipolar voltage input monitored +2 V … +10 V 1
Unipolar current input 0 mA … +20 mA 2
Unipolar current input monitored +4 mA … +20 mA 3
Bipolar voltage input (factory setting) ‑10 V … +10 V 4
AI 2 Unipolar current input (factory setting) 0 mA … +20 mA p0756[2] = 2
Unipolar current input monitored +4 mA … +20 mA 3
LG-Ni1000 temperature sensor 6
Pt1000 temperature sensor 7
No sensor connected 8
DIN-Ni1000 temperature sensor (6180 ppm / K) 10
AI 3 LG-Ni1000 temperature sensor p0756[3] = 6
Pt1000 temperature sensor 7
No sensor connected (factory setting) 8
DIN-Ni1000 temperature sensor (6180 ppm / K) 10
SINAMICS G120X converter
196 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
The switch that belongs to the analog input is located behind the front door of the , 8
converter. $,
$,
The switch for AI 2 (temperature/current) is on the I/O Extension Module.
7HPS,
$,
Defining the function of an analog input
You define the analog input function by interconnecting a connector input of your choice with
parameter p0755. Parameter p0755 is assigned to the particular analog input via its index, e.g.
parameter p0755[0] is assigned to analog input 0.
Connector inputs are designated in the parameter list with the prefix "CI".
Example
S
$, U>@ >@
In order to enter the supplementary setpoint via analog input AI 0, you must interconnect AI 0
with the signal source for the supplementary setpoint.
Set p1075 = 755[0].
Parameters
Table 6-5 Frequently used connector inputs (CI) of the converter
Parameter Description Factory setting
p1070[C] CI: Main setpoint Dependent on the converter
p1075[C] CI: Supplementary setpoint 0
p2253[C] CI: Technology controller setpoint 1 0
p2264[C] CI: Technology controller actual value 0
You can find additional connector inputs in the parameter list.
Parameter list (Page 470)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 197
198
! ! !
Figure 6-8
7\SH
:LUHEUHDNDJH :LUHEUHDNDJH
S>@
WKUHVKROG GHOD\
6LPXODWLRQ >PV@ &8$,VWDWXVZRUG
6.3 Drive control
S>@ S>@ U
S >@
Function diagram
FP 2251
P$ ำ 7
P$ )
:LUHEUHDNDJH
Advanced commissioning
!
U !
, &XUUHQW
6LPXODWLRQ S>@ S >@
7HUPLQDO 8 9ROWDJH >PV@
+DUGZDUHVPRRWKLQJ S >@ S>@
7HUPLQDO wV \ >@
8 , $ >@
! $, S>@ \
$, 7\SHVZLWFKLQJ [ \ >@
ದ ' [ [ [
7HUPLQDO >@ \
7HUPLQDO S>@
6FDOLQJ
S >@
!
5HIHUHQFHTXDQWLWLHV [
&8$,YDOXHLQ>@ SಹU [
U>@ \
[
[y[
6DPSOLQJWLPHRIWKH$, PV
! )RUDQLQSXWVLJQDOUHIHUUHGWRJURXQG.O .O PXVWEHFRQQHFWHGWRUHIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDO0 ! 3RVVLEOHVHWWLQJVS>@DQGS>@
7KHYROWDJHEHWZHHQLQSXWVDQGEHWZHHQLQSXWDQGWKHJURXQGSRLQWPXVWQRWH[FHHG9 99
99ZLWKPRQLWRULQJ
:KHQWKH',3VZLWFKLVLQSRVLWLRQ,WKHLQSXWYROWDJHPXVWQRWH[FHHG9RUWKHLPSUHVVHG P$P$
FXUUHQWP$,IWKLVLVQRWREVHUYHGWKHLQSXWZLOOEHGDPDJHG P$P$ZLWKPRQLWRULQJ
99 'HIDXOWIRU$,DQG$,
! )RUS WKHXQLWVDUHP$
)RUS WKHXQLWVDUH9 ! :LUHEUHDNDJHVHQVLQJRQO\DFWLYDWHGZKHQS
,QSXW2XWSXW7HUPLQDOV
$QDORJLQSXWV $,$,
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
SINAMICS G120X converter
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
More information
Using an analog input as a digital input
Some analog inputs can also be operated as digital input.
Digital inputs (Page 188)
6.3.2.5 Adjusting characteristics for analog input
Function description
If you change the analog input type using p0756, then the converter automatically selects the
appropriate scaling of the analog input. The linear scaling characteristic is defined using two
points (p0757, p0758) and (p0759, p0760). Parameters p0757 … p0760 are assigned to an
analog input via their index, e.g. parameters p0757[0] … p0760[0] belong to analog input 0.
S S
9ROWDJHLQSXW99 &XUUHQWLQSXWP$P$
\ \
S S
\ \
S S
[ [ 9 [ [ P$
S S S S
You must define your own characteristic if none of the default types match your particular
application.
Example
The converter should convert a 6 mA … 12 mA signal into the value range ‑100% … 100% via
analog input 0. The wire-break monitoring of the converter should respond when 6 mA is fallen
below.
&XUUHQWLQSXWP$P$
\
S
[
S
[ P$
S
\
S
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 199
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Procedure
1. Set the DIP switch for analog input 0 on the Control Unit to current input ("I").
, 8
2. set p0756[0] = 3
You have defined analog input 0 as a current input with wire-break monitoring.
3. Set p0757[0] = 6.0 (x1)
4. Set p0758[0] = -100.0 (y1)
5. Set p0759[0] = 12.0 (x2)
6. Set p0760[0] = 100.0 (y2)
7. Set p0761[0] = 6
An input current < 6 mA results in fault F03505.
The characteristic for the application example is set.
❒
Parameters
Parameter Description Factory setting
p0757[0…n] CU analog inputs characteristic value x1 0
p0758[0…n] CU analog inputs characteristic value y1 0%
p0759[0…n] CU analog inputs characteristic value x2 10
p0760[0…n] CU analog inputs characteristic value y2 100%
p0761[0…n] CU analog inputs wire-break monitoring, response 2
threshold
p0762[0…n] CU analog inputs wire breakage monitoring time 100 ms
6.3.2.6 Setting the deadband
Function description
9P$ 9P$
'HDGEDQG 'HDGEDQG
With the control enabled, electromagnetic interference on the signal cable can cause the motor
to slowly rotate in one direction in spite of a speed setpoint = 0.
The deadband acts on the zero crossover of the analog input characteristic. Internally, the
converter sets its speed setpoint = 0, even if the signal at the analog input terminals is slightly
SINAMICS G120X converter
200 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
positive or negative. This prevents the converter from rotating the motor when the speed
setpoint = 0.
Parameters
Parameter Description Factory setting
p0764[0] Analog inputs deadband, AI 0 0
p0764[1] Analog inputs deadband, AI 1 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 201
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.2.7 Analog outputs
Function description
S>@
S>@
$2 &2 U[[\\
*1'
S>@
S>@
$2 &2 U[[\\
*1'
S>@
S>@
$2 &2 U[[\\
*1'
1)
with I/O Extension Module
Defining the analog output type
Define the analog output type using parameter p0776.
The converter offers a series of default settings, which you can select using parameter p0776:
Current output (factory setting) 0 mA … +20 mA p0776 = 0
Voltage output 0 V … +10 V 1
Current output +4 mA … +20 mA 2
Defining the function of an analog output
Connector outputs are designated with "CO".
You define the analog output function by interconnecting parameter p0771 with a connector
output of your choice. Parameter p0771 is assigned to the particular analog output via its index,
e.g. parameter p0771[0] is assigned to analog output 0.
Example
S>@
$2 U
To output the converter output current via analog output 0, you must interconnect AO 0 with the
signal for the output current.
Set p0771 = 27.
Parameters
Table 6-6 Frequently used connector outputs (CO) of the converter
Parameter Description Factory setting
r0021 CO: Speed actual value, smoothed - rpm
r0025 CO: Output voltage, smoothed - Vrms
SINAMICS G120X converter
202 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Parameter Description Factory setting
r0026 CO: DC link voltage, smoothed -V
r0027 CO: Absolute actual current, smoothed - Arms
r0063 CO: Speed actual value - rpm
You can find additional connector outputs in the parameter list.
Parameter list (Page 470)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 203
!
204
U>@ >@ >@ 7\SH
S>@ S >@
>PV@ S>@
S>@ S>@ ! !
Figure 6-9
>9@ \
U>@
S>@ \
S>@ [ \ ' $2 7HUPLQDO
>@
6.3 Drive control
[ [ [ $
\ ! >9@ >@ P$
\ *1'
Function diagram
6PRRWKLQJ S>@
FP 2261
7HUPLQDO
! 6FDOLQJ
!
Advanced commissioning
U>@ >@ >@ 7\SH
S>@ S >@
>PV@ S>@
S>@ S>@ ! !
>9@ \
U>@
S>@ \
S>@ [ \ ' $2 7HUPLQDO !
\ >@
[ [ [ $
! >9@ >@ P$
\ *1'
6PRRWKLQJ S>@
7HUPLQDO
! 6FDOLQJ
!
U>@ >@ >@ 7\SH
S>@ S >@
>PV@ S>@
S>@ S>@ ! !
>9@ \
U>@
S>@ \
S>@ [ \ ' $2 7HUPLQDO !
\
[ [ [ $
! >9@ >@ P$
\ *1'
6PRRWKLQJ S>@
7HUPLQDO
! 6FDOLQJ
! :KHQS WKHXQLWLVP$
:KHQS WKHXQLWLV9
! 7KHLQSXWVLJQDOVDUHUHODWHGWRUHIHUHQFHYDULDEOHSU S[
! 3RVVLEOHVHWWLQJVS>@ [
P$P$ \
>@
99
P$P$ [
[y
! )RUS WKHDQDORJRXWSXWVDUHFRQWUROOHGYLDILHOGEXV
5HIHUHQFHYDULDEOHV [
! ZLWK,2([WHQVLRQ0RGXOH
!
,QSXWRXWSXWWHUPLQDOV
$QDORJRXWSXWV
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
SINAMICS G120X converter
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.2.8 Adjusting characteristics for analog output
Function description
If you change the analog output type, then the converter automatically selects the appropriate
scaling of the analog output. The linear scaling characteristic is defined using two points
(p0777, p0778) and (p0779, p0780).
S S
9ROWDJHRXWSXW99 &XUUHQWRXWSXWP$P$
9 P$
\ \
S S
\ \
S S
[ [ [ [
S S S S
Parameters p0777 … p0780 are assigned to an analog output via their index, e.g. parameters
p0777[0] … p0770[0] belong to analog output 0.
You must define your own characteristic if none of the default types match your particular
application.
Example
Via analog output 0, the converter should convert a signal in the value range 0% … 100% into
an output signal 6 mA … 12 mA.
&XUUHQWRXWSXWP$P$
P$
\
S
\
S
[ [
S S
Procedure
1. Set p0776[0] = 2
This defines analog output 0 as a current output.
2. Set p0777[0] = 0.0 (x1)
3. Set p0778[0] = 6.0 (y1)
4. Set p0779[0] = 100.0 (x2)
5. Set p0780[0] = 12.0 (y2)
The characteristic for the application example is set.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 205
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Parameters
Table 6-7 Parameters for the scaling characteristic
Parameter Description Factory setting
p0777[0…1] CU analog outputs characteristic value x1 -
p0778[0…1] CU analog outputs characteristic value y1 0V
p0779[0…1] CU analog outputs characteristic value x2 100%
p0780[0…1] CU analog outputs characteristic value y2 20 V
6.3.3 Drive control via PROFINET or PROFIBUS
6.3.3.1 Setting the address
Function description
Procedure
1. Set the address with a commissioning tool via p0918
2. Switch off the converter power supply.
3. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
4. Switch on the converter power supply again.
Your settings become effective after switching on.
The PROFIBUS address is set.
❒
6.3.3.2 Receive data and send data
Overview
Cyclic data exchange
The converter receives cyclic data from the higher-level control - and returns cyclic data to the
control.
5HFHLYHGDWD 6HQGGDWD
Figure 6-10 Cyclic data exchange
SINAMICS G120X converter
206 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Converter and higher-level control system package their data in the form of telegrams.
)UDPH
+HDGHU 3.: 3=' 7UDLOHU
8VHUGDWD
Figure 6-11 Telegram structure
A telegram has the following structure:
● Header and trailer form the protocol frame.
● User data is located within the frame:
– PKW: The control system can read or change the parameters in the converter via "PKW
data".
Not every telegram has a "PKW range".
– PZD: The converter receives control commands and setpoints from the higher-level
control - and sends status messages and actual values via "PZD data".
PROFIdrive and telegram numbers
For typical applications, certain telegrams are defined in the PROFIdrive profile and are
assigned a fixed PROFIdrive telegram number. As a consequence, behind a PROFIdrive
telegram number, there is a defined signal composition. As a consequence, a telegram number
uniquely describes cyclic data exchange.
The telegrams are identical for PROFIBUS and PROFINET.
6.3.3.3 Telegrams
Overview
The user data of the telegrams that are available are described in the following.
7HOHJUDP
3=' 3='
162//
67: 5HFHLYHXVHUGDWD
B$
=6: 1,67B$ 6HQGXVHUGDWD
16-bit speed setpoint
7HOHJUDP
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
162//B
67:
$
1,67B$ ,$,67B 0,67B 3,67B 0(/'B
=6:
*/$77 */$77 */$77 */$77 1$085
16-bit speed setpoint for VIK-Namur
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 207
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
7HOHJUDP
3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
162//
67: 0B/,0 67:
B$
1,67B$ ,$,67B
=6: =6:
*/$77 */$77
16-bit speed setpoint with torque limiting
7HOHJUDP
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
162//
67: )UHHO\DVVLJQDEOH
B$
1,67B$ ,$,67B 0,67B :$51B )$8/7B
=6:
*/$77 */$77 */$77 &2'( &2'(
16-bit speed setpoint for PCS7
7HOHJUDP
3=' 3='
162//
67:
B$
3.:
1,67B$
=6:
*/$77
16-bit speed setpoint with reading and writing to parameters
7HOHJUDP
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
162//
67: )UHHO\DVVLJQDEOH
B$
3.:
1,67B$ ,$,67B 0,67B :$51B )$8/7B
=6:
*/$77 */$77 */$77 &2'( &2'(
16-bit speed setpoint for PCS7 with reading and writing to parameters
7HOHJUDP
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
67: 7HOHJUDPOHQJWKIRUWKHUHFHLYHGDWD
=6: 7HOHJUDPOHQJWKIRUWKHWUDQVPLWGDWD
Unassigned interconnection and length
Table 6-8 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Explanation Abbreviation Explanation
PZD Process data PKW Parameter channel
STW Control word MIST_GLATT Actual smoothed torque
ZSW Status word PIST_GLATT Actual smoothed active power
NSOLL_A Speed setpoint M_LIM Torque limit value
NIST_A Speed actual value FAULT_CODE Fault code
NIST_A_GLATT Smoothed actual speed val‐ WARN_CODE Alarm code
ue
IAIST_GLATT Smoothed current actual val‐ MELD_NAMUR Message according to the VIK-NA‐
ue MUR definition
SINAMICS G120X converter
208 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Function description
Control word 1 (STW1)
Bit Significance Explanation Signal inter‐
Telegram 20 All other tele‐ connection
grams in the con‐
verter
0 0 = OFF1 The motor brakes with the ramp-down time p0840[0] =
p1121 of the ramp-function generator. The con‐ r2090.0
verter switches off the motor at standstill.
0 → 1 = ON The converter goes into the "ready" state. If, in
addition bit 3 = 1, then the converter switches
on the motor.
1 0 = OFF2 Switch off the motor immediately, the motor p0844[0] =
then coasts down to a standstill. r2090.1
1 = No OFF2 The motor can be switched on (ON command).
2 0 = Quick stop (OFF3) Quick stop: The motor brakes to a standstill p0848[0] =
with the OFF3 ramp-down time p1135. r2090.2
1 = No quick stop (OFF3) The motor can be switched on (ON command).
3 0 = Inhibit operation Immediately switch-off motor (cancel pulses). p0852[0] =
1 = Enable operation Switch-on motor (pulses can be enabled). r2090.3
4 0 = Disable RFG The converter immediately sets its ramp-func‐ p1140[0] =
tion generator output to 0. r2090.4
1 = Do not disable RFG The ramp-function generator can be enabled.
5 0 = Stop RFG The output of the ramp-function generator p1141[0] =
stops at the actual value. r2090.5
1 = Enable RFG The output of the ramp-function generator fol‐
lows the setpoint.
6 0 = Inhibit setpoint The converter brakes the motor with the ramp- p1142[0] =
down time p1121 of the ramp-function genera‐ r2090.6
tor.
1 = Enable setpoint Motor accelerates to the setpoint with the ramp-
up time p1120.
7 0 → 1 = Acknowledge faults Acknowledge fault. If the ON command is still p2103[0] =
active, the converter switches to the "switching r2090.7
on inhibited" state.
8, 9 Reserved
10 0 = No control via PLC Converter ignores the process data from the p0854[0] =
fieldbus. r2090.10
1 = Control via PLC Control via fieldbus, converter accepts the proc‐
ess data from the fieldbus.
11 1 = Direction reversal Invert setpoint in the converter. p1113[0] =
r2090.11
12 Not used
13 ---1) 1 = MOP up Increase the setpoint saved in the motorized p1035[0] =
potentiometer. r2090.13
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 209
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Bit Significance Explanation Signal inter‐
Telegram 20 All other tele‐ connection
grams in the con‐
verter
14 ---1) 1 = MOP down Reduce the setpoint saved in the motorized po‐ p1036[0] =
tentiometer. r2090.14
15 CDS bit 0 Reserved Changes over between settings for different p0810 =
operation interfaces (command data sets). r2090.15
1)
If you change over from another telegram to telegram 20, then the assignment of the previous
telegram is kept.
Status word 1 (ZSW1)
Bit Significance Remarks Signal inter‐
Telegram 20 All other tele‐ connection
grams in the con‐
verter
0 1 = Ready for switching on Power supply switched on; electronics initial‐ p2080[0] =
ized; pulses locked. r0899.0
1 1 = Ready Motor is switched on (ON/OFF1 = 1), no fault p2080[1] =
is active. With the command "Enable opera‐ r0899.1
tion" (STW1.3), the converter switches on the
motor.
2 1 = Operation enabled Motor follows setpoint. See control word 1, p2080[2] =
bit 3. r0899.2
3 1 = Fault active The converter has a fault. Acknowledge fault p2080[3] =
using STW1.7. r2139.3
4 1 = OFF2 inactive Coast down to standstill is not active. p2080[4] =
r0899.4
5 1 = OFF3 inactive Quick stop is not active. p2080[5] =
r0899.5
6 1 = Switching on inhibited active It is only possible to switch on the motor after p2080[6] =
an OFF1 followed by ON. r0899.6
7 1 = Alarm active Motor remains switched on; no acknowledge‐ p2080[7] =
ment is necessary. r2139.7
8 1 = Speed deviation within the tol‐ Setpoint / actual value deviation within the tol‐ p2080[8] =
erance range erance range. r2197.7
9 1 = Master control requested The automation system is requested to accept p2080[9] =
the converter control. r0899.9
10 1 = Comparison speed reached or Speed is greater than or equal to the corre‐ p2080[10] =
exceeded sponding maximum speed. r2199.1
11 1 = current or 1 = torque limit Comparison value for current or torque has p2080[11] =
torque limit reached been reached or exceeded. r0056.13 /
reached r1407.7
12 ---1) 1 = Holding Signal to open and close a motor holding p2080[12] =
brake open brake. r0899.12
13 0 = Alarm, motor overtemperature -- p2080[13] =
r2135.14
SINAMICS G120X converter
210 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Bit Significance Remarks Signal inter‐
Telegram 20 All other tele‐ connection
grams in the con‐
verter
14 1 = Motor rotates clockwise Internal converter actual value > 0. p2080[14] =
0 = Motor rotates counter-clock‐ Internal converter actual value < 0. r2197.3
wise
15 1 = CDS display 0 = Alarm, con‐ p2080[15] =
verter thermal r0836.0 /
overload r2135.15
1)
If you change over from another telegram to telegram 20, then the assignment of the previous
telegram is kept.
Control word 3 (STW3)
Bit Significance Explanation Signal interconnection
Telegram 350 in the converter 1)
0 1 = fixed setpoint bit 0 Selects up to 16 different fixed p1020[0] = r2093.0
1 1 = fixed setpoint bit 1 setpoints. p1021[0] = r2093.1
2 1 = fixed setpoint bit 2 p1022[0] = r2093.2
3 1 = fixed setpoint bit 3 p1023[0] = r2093.3
4 1 = DDS selection bit 0 Changes over between settings p0820 = r2093.4
5 1 = DDS selection bit 1 for different motors (drive data p0821 = r2093.5
sets).
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 1 = technology controller enable -- p2200[0] = r2093.8
9 1 = enable DC braking -- p1230[0] = r2093.9
10 Not used
11 1 = Enable droop Enable or inhibit speed control‐ p1492[0] = r2093.11
ler droop.
12 1 = torque control active Changes over the control mode p1501[0] = r2093.12
0 = speed control active for vector control.
13 1 = no external fault -- p2106[0] = r2093.13
0 = external fault is active (F07860)
14 Not used
15 1 = CDS bit 1 Changes over between settings p0811[0] = r2093.15
for different operation interfaces
(command data sets).
1)
If you switch from telegram 350 to a different one, then the converter sets all interconnections p1020,
… to "0". Exception: p2106 = 1.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 211
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Status word 3 (ZSW3)
Bit Significance Description Signal intercon‐
nection in the con‐
verter
0 1 = DC braking active -- p2051[3] = r0053
1 1 = |n_act | > p1226 Absolute current speed > stationary
state detection
2 1 = |n_act | > p1080 Absolute actual speed > minimum
speed
3 1 = i_act ≧ p2170 Actual current ≥ current threshold
value
4 1 = |n_act | > p2155 Absolute actual speed > speed
threshold value 2
5 1 = |n_act | ≦ p2155 Absolute actual speed < speed
threshold value 2
6 1 = |n_act | ≧ r1119 Speed setpoint reached
7 1 = DC link voltage ≦ p2172 Actual DC link voltage ≦ threshold
value
8 1 = DC link voltage > p2172 Actual DC link voltage > threshold
value
9 1 = ramp-up or ramp-down completed Ramp-function generator is not ac‐
tive.
10 1 = technology controller output at the Technology controller output ≦
lower limit p2292
11 1 = technology controller output at the Technology controller out‐
upper limit put > p2291
12 Not used
13 Not used
14 Not used
15 Not used
Fault word according to the VIK-NAMUR definition (MELD_NAMUR)
Bit Significance P no.
0 1 = Control Unit signals a fault p2051[5] = r3113
1 1 = line fault: Phase failure or inadmissible voltage
2 1 = DC link overvoltage
3 1 = Power Module fault, e.g. overcurrent or overtemperature
4 1 = converter overtemperature
5 1 = ground fault/phase fault in the motor cable or in the motor
6 1 = motor overload
7 1 = communication error to the higher-level control system
8 1 = fault in a safety-relevant monitoring channel
10 1 = fault in the internal converter communication
11 1 = line fault
15 1 = other fault
SINAMICS G120X converter
212 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.3.4 Parameter channel
Overview
The parameter channel allows parameter values to be cyclically read and written to.
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.( VWZRUG ,1' QGZRUG 3:( UGDQGWKZRUGV
$. 6 318 6XELQGH[ 3DJHLQGH[ 3:( 3:(
3
0
Structure of the parameter channel:
● PKE (1st word)
– Type of task (read or write).
– Bit 11 is reserved and is always assigned 0.
– Parameter number
● IND (2nd word)
– Parameter index
● PWE (3rd and 4th word)
– Parameter value
Function description
AK: Request and response ID
Table 6-9 Request identifiers, control → converter
AK Description Response identifier
positive negative
0 No request 0 7/8
1 Request parameter value 1/2 7/8
2 Change parameter value (word) 1 7/8
3 Change parameter value (double word) 2 7/8
4 Request descriptive element 1) 3 7/8
6 2)
Request parameter value (field) 1)
4/5 7/8
7 2)
Change parameter value (field, word) 1)
4 7/8
8 2) Change parameter value (field, double word) 1) 5 7/8
9 Request number of field elements 6 7/8
1)
The required element of the parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
2)
The following request IDs are identical: 1 ≡ 6, 2 ≡ 7 and 3 ≡ 8.
We recommend that you use identifiers 6, 7 and 8.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 213
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Table 6-10 Response identifiers, converter → control
AK Description
0 No response
1 Transfer parameter value (word)
2 Transfer parameter value (double word)
3 Transfer descriptive element 1)
4 Transfer parameter value (field, word) 2)
5 Transfer parameter value (field, double word) 2)
6 Transfer number of field elements
7 Converter cannot process the request.
In the most significant word of the parameter channel, the converter sends an error number
to the control, refer to the following table.
8 No master controller status / no authorization to change parameters of the parameter channel
interface
1)
The required element of the parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
2)
The required element of the indexed parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
Table 6-11 Error numbers for response identifier 7
No. Description
00 hex Illegal parameter number (access to a parameter that does not exist)
01 hex Parameter value cannot be changed (change request for a parameter value that cannot be
changed)
02 hex Lower or upper value limit exceeded (change request with a value outside the value limits)
03 hex Incorrect subindex (access to a subindex that does not exist)
04 hex No array (access with a subindex to non-indexed parameters)
05 hex Incorrect data type (change request with a value that does not match the data type of the
parameter)
06 hex Setting not permitted, only resetting (change request with a value not equal to 0 without
permission)
07 hex Descriptive element cannot be changed (change request to a descriptive element error value
that cannot be changed)
0B hex No master control (change request but with no master control, see also p0927)
0C hex Keyword missing
11 hex Request cannot be executed due to the operating state (access is not possible for temporary
reasons that are not specified)
14 hex Inadmissible value (change request with a value that is within the limits but which is illegal for
other permanent reasons, i.e. a parameter with defined individual values)
65 hex Parameter number is currently deactivated (depending on the mode of the converter)
66 hex Channel width is insufficient (communication channel is too small for response)
68 hex Illegal parameter value (parameter can only assume certain values)
6A hex Request not included / task is not supported (the valid request identifications can be found
in table "Request identifications controller → converter")
6B hex No change access for a controller that is enabled. (The operating state of the converter
prevents a parameter change)
SINAMICS G120X converter
214 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
No. Description
86 hex Write access only for commissioning (p0010 = 15) (operating state of the converter prevents
a parameter change)
87 hex Know-how protection active, access locked
C8 hex Change request below the currently valid limit (change request to a value that lies within the
"absolute" limits, but is however below the currently valid lower limit)
C9 hex Change request above the currently valid limit (example: a parameter value is too large for
the converter power)
CC hex Change request not permitted (change is not permitted as the access code is not available)
PNU (parameter number) and page index
Parameter number PNU Page index
0000 … 1999 0000 … 1999 0 hex
2000 … 3999 0000 … 1999 80 hex
6000 … 7999 0000 … 1999 90 hex
8000 … 9999 0000 … 1999 20 hex
10000 … 11999 0000 … 1999 A0 hex
20000 … 21999 0000 … 1999 50 hex
30000 … 31999 0000 … 1999 F0 hex
60000 … 61999 0000 … 1999 74 hex
Subindex
For indexed parameters, the parameter index is located in subindex as hexadecimal value.
PWE: Parameter value or connector
Parameter values or connectors can be located in the PWE.
Table 6-12 Parameter value or connector
PWE 1 PWE 2
Parameter value Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 8 Bit 7 … 0
0 0 8-bit value
0 16-bit value
32-bit value
Connector Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 10 Bit 9 … 0
Number of the connector 3F hex The index or bit field
number of the connec‐
tor
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 215
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Examples
Read request: Read out serial number of the Power Module (p7841[2])
To obtain the value of indexed parameter p7841, you must fill the parameter channel with the
following data:
● PKE, Bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 6 (request parameter value (field))
● PKE, Bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 1841 (parameter number without offset)
Parameter number = PNU + offset (page index)
(7841 = 1841 + 6000)
● IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 2 (index of parameter)
● IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 90 hex (offset 6000 corresponds to 90 hex)
● Because you want to read the parameter value, words 3 and 4 in the parameter channel for
requesting the parameter value are irrelevant. They should be assigned a value of 0, for
example.
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.(VWZRUG ,1'QGZRUG 3:(KLJKUGZRUG 3:(ORZWKZRUG
$. 3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU 6XELQGH[ 3DJHLQGH[ 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH 'ULYHREMHFW ,QGH[
Figure 6-12 Parameter channel for read request from p7841[2]
Write request: Change restart mode (p1210)
The restart mode is inhibited in the factory setting (p1210 = 0). In order to activate the automatic
restart with "acknowledge all faults and restart for an ON command", p1210 must be set to 26:
● PKE, bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 7 (change parameter value (field, word))
● PKE, bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 4BA hex (1210 = 4BA hex, no offset, as 1210 < 1999)
● IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 0 hex (parameter is not indexed)
● IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 0 hex (offset 0 corresponds to 0 hex)
● PWE1, bit 0 … 15: = 0 hex
● PWE2, Bit 0 … 15: = 1A hex (26 = 1A hex)
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.(VWZRUG ,1'QGZRUG 3:(KLJKUGZRUG 3:(ORZWKZRUG
$. 3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU 6XELQGH[ 3DJHLQGH[ 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH ELW 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH ELW
Figure 6-13 A parameter channel to activate the automatic restart with p1210 = 26
Write request: Assign digital input 2 with the function ON/OFF1 (p0840[1] = 722.2)
In order to link digital input 2 with ON/OFF1, you must assign parameter p0840[1] (source, ON/
OFF1) the value 722.2 (DI 2). To do this, you must fill the parameter channel as follows:
● PKE, bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 7 hex (change parameter value (field, word))
● PKE, bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 348 hex (840 = 348 hex, no offset, as 840 < 1999)
● IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 1 hex (CDS1 = Index 1)
SINAMICS G120X converter
216 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
● IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 0 hex (offset 0 corresponds to 0 hex)
● PWE1, Bit 0 … 15: = 2D2 hex (722 = 2D2 hex)
● PWE2, Bit 10 … 15: = 3F hex (drive object - for SINAMICS G120, always 63 = 3f hex)
● PWE2, Bit 0 … 9: = 2 hex (Index of Parameter (DI 2 = 2))
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.(VWZRUG ,1'QGZRUG 3:(KLJKUGZRUG 3:(ORZWKZRUG
$. 3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU 6XELQGH[ 3DJHLQGH[ 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH 'ULYH2EMHFW ,QGH[
Figure 6-14 Parameter channel to assign digital input 2 with ON/OFF1
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 217
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.3.5 Expanding or freely interconnecting telegrams
Overview
When you have selected a telegram, the converter interconnects the corresponding signals
with the fieldbus interface. Generally, these interconnections are locked so that they cannot be
changed. However, with the appropriate setting in the converter, the telegram can be extended
or even freely interconnected.
Precondition
Expanding a telegram: Procedure
1. Set p0922 = 999.
2. Set parameter p2079 to the value of the corresponding telegram.
You have created the preconditions to expand a telegram.
Freely interconnecting signals in the telegram: Procedure
1. Set p0922 = 999.
2. Set p2079 = 999.
You have created the precondition to freely interconnect the signals transferred in the telegram.
Function description
Interconnection of the process data
S>@ U>@
S>@ U>@ 31R 3='VHQGZRUG
31R
S>@ U>@
S>@ U>@ 31R 3='VHQGZRUG
31R
S>@ U>@
S>@ U>@ 31R 3='VHQGZRUG
31R
S>@ U>@
S>@ U>@ 31R 3='VHQGZRUG
31R
S>@ U>@
31R
S>@ U>@
31R 3='VHQGZRUG
6HQGZRUGSDUDPHWHUQXPEHUGRXEOHZRUG 6HQGZRUGSDUDPHWHUQXPEHUZRUG
6HQGZRUGYDOXHGRXEOHZRUG 6HQGZRUGYDOXHZRUG
Figure 6-15 Interconnection of the send data
In the converter, the send data are available in the "Word" format (p2051) - and in the "Double
word" format (p2061). If you set a specific telegram, or you change the telegram, then the
converter automatically interconnects parameters p2051 and p2061 with the appropriate
signals.
SINAMICS G120X converter
218 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
U
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@ U
U>@ U
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@ U
U>@ U
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@ U
U>@ U
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@ U
U>@
U>@
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@
9DOXHUHFHLYHZRUG
9DOXHUHFHLYHZRUG
9DOXHUHFHLYHZRUG
GRXEOHZRUG ZRUG ELWE\ELW
Figure 6-16 Interconnection of the receive data
The converter saves the receive data as follows:
● "Word" format in r2050
● "Double word" format in r2060
● Bit-by-bit in r2090 …r2093)
Extending the telegram
Extend the telegram by "attaching" additional signals.
Interconnect additional PZD send words and PZD receive words with signals of your choice via
parameters r2050 and p2051.
Freely interconnecting signals in the telegram
Interconnect additional PZD send words and PZD receive words with signals of your choice via
parameters r2050 and p2051.
Parameter
Number Name Factory setting
p0922 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection 1
r2050[0…11] CO: PROFIdrive PZD receive word -
p2051[0…16] CI: PROFIdrive PZD send word 0 or dependent on
the converter
r2053[0…16] PROFIdrive diagnostics send PZD word -
r2060[0…10] CO: PROFIdrive PZD receive double word -
p2061[0…15] CI: PROFIdrive PZD send double word 0
r2063[0…15] PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send double word -
p2079 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended 1
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 219
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Number Name Factory setting
p2080[0…15] BI: Binector-connector converter, status word 1 [0] 899
[1] 899.1
[2] 899.2
[3] 2139.3
[4] 899.4
[5] 899.5
[6] 899.6
[7] 2139.7
[8] 2197.7
[9] 899.9
[10] 2199.1
[11] 1407.7
[12] 0
[13] 2135.14
[14] 2197.3
[15] 2135.15
r2090.0…15 BO: PROFIdrive receive PZD1 bit by bit -
r2091.0…15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD2 receive bit-serial -
r2092.0…15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD3 receive bit-serial -
r2093.0…15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD4 receive bit-serial -
6.3.3.6 Acyclically reading and writing converter parameters
Overview
The converter supports the writing and reading of parameters via acyclic communication.
6.3.3.7 Reading and changing parameters via data set 47
Note
Values in italics
Values in italics in the following tables mean that you have to adjust these values for a specific
request.
Reading parameter values
Table 6-13 Request to read parameters
Data block Byte n Bytes n + 1 n
Header Reference 01 hex ... FF hex 01 hex: Read job 0
01 hex (ID of drive objects, at G120 always = 1) Number of parameters (m) 2
SINAMICS G120X converter
220 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Data block Byte n Bytes n + 1 n
Address, parameter 1 Attribute Number of the indices 4
10 hex: Parameter value 00 hex ... EA hex
20 hex: Parameter description (For parameters without index: 00 hex)
Parameter number 0001 hex ... FFFE hex 6
Number of the 1st index 0000 hex ... FFFF hex 8
(for parameters without index: 0000 hex)
… …
Address, parameter 2 … …
… … …
Address, parameter m … …
Table 6-14 Converter response to a read request
Data block Byte n Bytes n + 1 n
Header Reference (identical to a read request) 01 hex: Converter has executed the read re‐ 0
quest.
81 hex: Converter was not able to completely
execute the read request.
01 hex (ID of drive objects, at G120 always = 1) Number of parameters (m) 2
(identical to the read request)
Values, parameter 1 Format Number of index values or - for a negative re‐ 4
02 hex: Integer8 sponse - number of error values
03 hex: Integer16
04 hex: Integer32
05 hex: Unsigned8
06 hex: Unsigned16
07 hex: Unsigned32
08 hex: FloatingPoint
0A hex: OctetString
0D hex: TimeDifference
34 hex: TimeOfDay without date indication
35 hex: TimeDifference with date indication
36 hex: TimeDifference without date indication
41 hex: Byte
42 hex: Word
43 hex: Double word
44 hex: Error
Value of the 1st index or - for a negative response - error value 1 6
You can find the error values in a table at the end of this section.
… …
Values, parameter 2 …
… …
Values, parameter m …
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 221
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Changing parameter values
Table 6-15 Request to change parameters
Data block Byte n Bytes n + 1 n
Header Reference 01 hex ... FF hex 02 hex: Change request 0
01 hex (ID of drive objects, at G120 always = 1) Number of parameters (m) 01 hex ... 27 hex 2
Address, parameter 1 10 hex: Parameter value Number of indices 4
00 hex ... EA hex
(00 hex and 01 hex are equivalents)
Parameter number 0001 hex ... FFFF hex 6
Number of the 1st index 0001 hex ... FFFE hex 8
… …
Address, parameter 2 …
… … …
Address, parameter m …
Values, parameter 1 Format Number of index values
02 hex: Integer 8 00 hex ... EA hex
03 hex: Integer 16
04 hex: Integer 32
05 hex: Unsigned 8
06 hex: Unsigned 16
07 hex: Unsigned 32
08 hex: Floating Point
0A hex: Octet String
0D hex: Time Difference
34 hex: TimeOfDay without date indication
35 hex: TimeDifference with date indication
36 hex: TimeDifference without date indication
41 hex: Byte
42 hex: Word
43 hex: Double word
Value of the 1st index
…
Values, parameter 2 …
… …
Values, parameter m …
Table 6-16 Response, if the converter has executed the change request
Data block Byte n Bytes n + 1 n
Header Reference (identical to a change request) 02 hex (change request successful) 0
01 hex (ID of drive objects, at G120 always = 1) Number of parameters (identical to a change 2
request)
SINAMICS G120X converter
222 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Table 6-17 Response if the converter was not able to completely execute the change request
Data block Byte n Bytes n + 1 n
Header Reference (identical to a change request) 82 hex: (Converter was not able to completely 0
execute the write request)
01 hex (ID of drive objects, at G120 always = 1) Number of parameters (identical to a change 2
request)
Values, parameter 1 Format Number of error values 4
40 hex: Zero (change request for this data block 00 hex
executed)
44 hex: Error (change request for this data 01 hex or 02 hex
block not executed)
Only for "Error" - error value 1 6
You can find the error values in the table at the end of this section.
Only for "Error" - error value 2 8
Error value 2 is either zero, or it contains the number of the first index where the error occurred.
Values, parameter 2 ...
... … …
Values, parameter m ...
Error values
Table 6-18 Error value in the parameter response
Error val‐ Significance
ue 1
00 hex Illegal parameter number (access to a parameter that does not exist)
01 hex Parameter value cannot be changed (change request for a parameter value that cannot be changed)
02 hex Lower or upper value limit exceeded (change request with a value outside the value limits)
03 hex Incorrect subindex (access to a parameter index that does not exist)
04 hex No array (access with a subindex to non-indexed parameters)
05 hex Incorrect data type (change request with a value that does not match the data type of the parameter)
06 hex Setting not permitted, only resetting (change request with a value not equal to 0 without permission)
07 hex Descriptive element cannot be changed (change request to a descriptive element that cannot be changed)
09 hex Description data not available (access to a description that does not exist, parameter value is available)
0B hex No master control (change request but with no master control)
0F hex Text array does not exist (although the parameter value is available, the request is made to a text array that does
not exist)
11 hex Request cannot be executed due to the operating state (access is not possible for temporary reasons that are not
specified)
14 hex Inadmissible value (change request with a value that is within the limits but which is illegal for other permanent
reasons, i.e. a parameter with defined individual values)
15 hex Response too long (the length of the actual response exceeds the maximum transfer length)
16 hex Illegal parameter address (illegal or unsupported value for attribute, number of elements, parameter number,
subindex or a combination of these)
17 hex Illegal format (change request for an illegal or unsupported format)
18 hex Number of values not consistent (number of values of the parameter data to not match the number of elements in
the parameter address)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 223
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Error val‐ Significance
ue 1
19 hex Drive object does not exist (access to a drive object that does not exist)
20 hex Parameter text cannot be changed
21 hex Service is not supported (illegal or not support request ID).
6B hex A change request for a controller that has been enabled is not possible. (The converter rejects the change request
because the motor is switched on. Observe the "Can be changed" parameter attribute (C1, C2, U, T) in the
parameter list.
Parameters (Page 467)
6C hex Unknown unit.
6E hex Change request is only possible when the motor is being commissioned (p0010 = 3).
6F hex Change request is only possible when the power unit is being commissioned (p0010 = 2).
70 hex Change request is only possible for quick commissioning (basic commissioning) (p0010 = 1).
71 hex Change request is only possible if the converter is ready (p0010 = 0).
72 hex Change request is only possible for a parameter reset (restore to factory setting) (p0010 = 30).
73 hex Change request possible only during commissioning of the safety functions (p0010 = 95).
74 hex Change request is only possible when a technological application/unit is being commissioned (p0010 = 5).
75 hex Change request is only possible in a commissioning state (p0010 ≠ 0).
76 hex Change request is not possible for internal reasons (p0010 = 29).
77 hex Change request is not possible during download.
81 hex Change request is not possible during download.
82 hex Accepting the master control is inhibited via BI: p0806.
83 hex Desired interconnection is not possible(the connector output does not supply a float value although the connector
input requires a float value)
84 hex Converter does not accept a change request (converter is busy with internal calculations. See parameter r3996 in
the parameter list.
Parameters (Page 467)
85 hex No access methods defined.
86 hex Write access only during commissioning of the data records (p0010 = 15) (operating status of the converter
prevents a parameter change.)
87 hex Know-how protection active, access locked
C8 hex Change request below the currently valid limit (change request to a value that lies within the "absolute" limits, but
is however below the currently valid lower limit)
C9 hex Change request above the currently valid limit (example: a parameter value is too large for the converter power)
CC hex Change request not permitted (change is not permitted as the access code is not available)
6.3.4 Drive control via EtherNet/IP
Overview
EtherNet/IP is real-time Ethernet, and is mainly used in automation technology.
SINAMICS G120X converter
224 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
You have the following options for integrating SINAMICS G120 frequency converters into
EtherNet/IP:
● You use the SINAMICS profile
● You use the ODVA AC/DC drive profile
● You define the assemblies for the process data using the objects that are supported by the
converter
6.3.4.1 Configuring communication via EtherNet/IP
Precondition
You have connected the converter with a commissioning tool e.g. an operator panel
Basic settings
Make the following settings in order to communicate with a higher-level control via EtherNet/IP:
Procedure
1. Set the following parameters:
– p2030 = 10: Protocol selection Ethernet/IP
If p2030 = 10, the following parameters apply for EtherNet/IP, even if the parameter
names seem to indicate PROFINET.
– p8921 = IP address
You can find the currently valid address in r8931.
– p8923 = subnet mask
You can find the currently valid subnet mask in r8933.
– p8922 = default gateway
You can find the currently valid default gateway in r8932.
– p8920 = name of station
– p8925 = 2: Save and activate interface configuration
2. Switch off the converter power supply.
3. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
4. Switch on the converter power supply again.
You have now configured the converter for communication via EtherNet/IP.
❒
Communication settings
You set the communication using parameter p8980. You have the following options
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 225
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Communication via the SINAMICS profile
The SINAMICS profile is a drive profile for EtherNet/IP defined by Siemens, based on
PROFIdrive, and is factory set in the converters.
Setting: p8980 = 0
With the SINAMICS profile, you can use each of the telegrams listed in parameter p0922
Communication via the ODVA AC/DC drive profile
The ODVA AC/DC drive profile is a drive profile defined by the ODVA organization
Setting: p8980 = 1
With the AC/DC profile of ODVA, you select the standard telegram, p0922 = 1
Communication settings via EtherNet/IP objects and assemblies
If you are using assemblies, which are described in the "Supported objects" ( Supported
objects (Page 226)), then you must integrate the converter yourself into the control system.
Details on this topic can be found in the documentation of your control system.
Special issues if you wish to use the ODVA AC/DC Drive profile
You must switch the converter power supply off and switch it on again if you wish to change the
following parameters so that the changes become effective.
Setting the off response for the motor
You set the standard off response for the converter using parameter p8981:
● p8981 = 0: OFF1 (factory setting), also corresponds to the setting in the SINAMICS profile
● p8981 = 1: OFF2
Setting the speed and torque scaling
You scale the speed and torque display using parameter p8982 or p8983. Setting range: 25 to
2-5.
Displaying the maximum process data that can be transferred (PZD)
● r2067[0] maximum interconnected PZD length - receiving
● r2067[1] maximum interconnected PZD length - sending
6.3.4.2 Supported objects
Overview
Object class Object name Objects re‐ ODVA objects SINAMICS
hex dec quired objects
1 hex 1 Identity object x
4 hex 4 Assembly Object x
6 hex 6 Connection Manager Object x
28 hex 40 Motor Data Object x
SINAMICS G120X converter
226 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Object class Object name Objects re‐ ODVA objects SINAMICS
hex dec quired objects
29 hex 41 Supervisor Object x
2A hex 42 Drive Object x
32C hex 812 Siemens Drive Object x
32D hex 813 Siemens Motor Data Object x
F5 hex 245 TCP/IP Interface Object 1) x
F6 hex 246 Ethernet Link Object 1) x
300 hex 768 Stack Diagnostic Object x x
302 hex 770 Adapter Diagnostic Object x x
303 hex 771 Explicit Messages Diagnostic Object x x
304 hex 772 Explicit Message Diagnostic List Object x x
401 hex 1025 Parameter object x x
1)
These objects are part of the EtherNet/IP system management.
Identity Object, Instance Number: 1 hex
Supported services
Class ● Get Attribute all Instance ● Get Attribute all
● Get Attribute single ● Get Attribute single
● Reset
Table 6-19 Class Attribute
No. Service Type Name
1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances
Table 6-20 Instance Attribute
No. Service Type Name Value/explanation
1 get UINT16 Vendor ID 1251
2 get UINT16 Device Type
- ODVA AC Drive 02 hex
- Siemens Drive 12 hex
3 get UINT16 Product code r0964[1]
4 get UINT16 Revision The versions should match the EDS file
5 get UINT16 Status See the following table
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 227
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
No. Service Type Name Value/explanation
6 get UINT32 Serial number bits 0 … 19: consecutive number;
bits 20 … 23: Production identifier
bits 24 … 27: Month of manufacture (0 = Jan, B =
Dec)
Bits 28 … 31: Year of manufacture (0 = 2002)
7 get Short Product name Max. length 32 bytes
String
Table 6-21 Explanation of No. 5 of the previous table
Byte Bit Name Description
1 0 Owned 0: Converter is not assigned to any master
1: Converter is assigned to a master
1 Reserved
2 Configured 0: Ethernet/IP basic settings
1: Modified Ethernet/IP settings
For G120, always = 1
3 Reserved
4…7 Extended De‐ 0: Self-test or status not known
vice Status 1: Firmware update active
2: At least one I/O connection with error
3: No I/O connections
4: Incorrect configuration in the ROM
5: Fatal fault
6: At least one I/O connection is active
7: All I/O connections in the quiescent state
8 … 15: Reserved
2 8 … 11 Not used
12 … 15 Reserved
Assembly Object, Instance Number: 4 hex
Supported services
Class ● Get Attribute single Instance ● Get Attribute single
● Set Attribute single
Table 6-22 Class Attribute
No. Service Type Name
1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances
SINAMICS G120X converter
228 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Table 6-23 Instance Attribute
No. Service Type Name Value/explanation
3 set Array of Assembly 1 byte array
UINT8 Supported ODVA AC/DC assemblies
(Page 239)
Connection Manager Object, Instance Number: 6 hex
Supported services
Class ● Get Attribute all Instance ● Forward open
● Get Attribute single ● Forward close
● Get Attribute single
● Set Attribute single
Table 6-24 Class Attribute
No. Service Type Name
1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances
Table 6-25 Instance Attribute
No. Service Type Name Value/explanation
1 get UINT16 OpenReqs Counters
2 get UINT16 OpenFormat Re‐ Counters
jects
3 get UINT16 OpenResource Counters
Rejects
4 get UINT16 OpenOther Re‐ Counters
jects
5 get UINT16 CloseReqs Counters
6 get UINT16 CloseFormat Re‐ Counters
jects
7 get UINT16 CloseOther Re‐ Counters
jects
8 get UINT16 ConnTimeouts Counters
Number of bus errors
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 229
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Motor Data Object, Instance Number 28 hex
Supported services
Class ● Get Attribute single Instance ● Get Attribute single
● Set Attribute single
Table 6-26 Class Attribute
No Serv‐ Type Name
. ice
1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances
Table 6-27 Instance Attribute
No Service Type Name Value/explanation
.
3 get, set USINT Motor Type p0300 motor type, see the following table
6 get, set UINT16 Rated Current p0305 rated motor current
7 get, set UINT16 Rated Voltage p0304 rated motor voltage
8 get, set UINT32 Rated Power p0307 rated motor power
9 get, set UINT16 Rated Frequency p0310 rated motor frequency
10 get, set UINT16 Rated Tempera‐ p0605 motor temperature threshold
ture
11 get, set UINT16 Max Speed p0322 maximum motor speed
12 get, set UINT16 Pole Count p0314 value of p0314*2
13 get, set UINT32 Torque Constant p0316 motor torque constant
14 get, set UINT32 Inertia p0341 motor moment of inertia
15 get, set UINT16 Base Speed p0311 motor rated speed
SINAMICS G120X converter
230 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Value in p0300 Ethernet/IP motor data object,
0 No motor 0 Non-standard motor
1 induction motor 7 squirrel cage induction motor
2 synchronous motor 3 PM synchronous motor
10 1LE1 induction motor 7 squirrel cage induction motor
13 1LG6 induction motor 7 squirrel cage induction motor
17 1LA7 induction motor 7 squirrel cage induction motor
19 1LA9 induction motor 7 squirrel cage induction motor
100 1LE1 induction motor 7 squirrel cage induction motor
104 1PH4 induction motor 3 PM synchronous motor
107 1PH7 induction motor 0 non-standard motor
108 1PH8 induction motor 5 switched reluctance motor
200 1PH8 synchronous motor 0 non-standard motor
204 1LE4 synchronous motor 3 PM synchronous motor
237 1FK7 synchronous motor 0 non-standard motor
10000 motor with DRIVE-CLiQ 0 non-standard motor
10001 motor with DRIVE-CLiQ 2. D 0 non-standard motor
Supervisor Object, Instance Number: 29 hex
Supported services
Class ● Get Attribute single Instance ● Get Attribute single
● Set Attribute single
Table 6-28 Class Attribute
No Serv‐ Type Name
. ice
1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances
Table 6-29 Instance Attribute
No Serv‐ Type Name Value/explanation
. ice
3 get, set Bool Run1 STW.0 operation, clockwise rotation
5 get, set Bool Net Control Internal
0: Local
1: Network
6 get UINT8 State 0: Vendor Specific
1: Startup
2: Not_Ready
3: Ready
4: Enabled
5: Stopping
6: Fault_Stop
7: Faulted
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 231
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
No Serv‐ Type Name Value/explanation
. ice
7 get Bool Running1 ZSW1:2
1: - (Enabled and Run1) or
- (Stopping and Running1) or
- (Fault_Stop and Running1)
0 = Other state
9 get Bool Ready ZSW1:0
1: - Ready or
- Enabled or
- Stopping
0 = Other state
10 get Bool Fault ZSW1:3 drive fault
11 get Bool Warning ZSW1:7 alarm active
12 get, set Bool Fault reset STW.7 acknowledge fault
13 get UINT16 Fault Code r945[0] error code
14 get UINT16 Warning Code r2122[0] alarm code
15 get Bool CtlFromNet Display from Net Control
1: Control from network
0: Local control
Drive Object, Instance Number: 2A hex
Supported services
Class ● Get Attribute single Instance ● Get Attribute single
● Set Attribute single
Table 6-30 Class Attribute
No Serv‐ Type Name
. ice
1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances
Table 6-31 Instance Attribute
No Serv‐ Type Name Value/explanation
. ice
3 get Bool At reference r2197.4
1: |n_act | ≥ n_set
0: Otherwise
4 get, set Bool Net_reference Internal
0: Local
1: Network
6 get UINT8 Drive_Mode p1300 manufacturer-specific, see following table
SINAMICS G120X converter
232 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
No Serv‐ Type Name Value/explanation
. ice
7 get INT Speed Actual Main actual value, see speed units
8 get, set INT Speed Ref Main setpoint, see speed units
9 get INT Current Actual r0027 absolute current actual value, smoothed
10 get, set INT Current limit p0323 maximum motor current
15 get INT Power Actual r0032 actual active power smoothed
16 get INT Output voltage r0025 output voltage smoothed
17 get INT Output voltage r0072 output voltage
18 get, set UINT16 AccelTime p1120 ramp-function generator ramp-up time
19 get, set UINT16 DecelTime p1121 ramp-function generator, ramp-down time
20 get, set UINT16 Low Speed Lim p1080 minimum speed
21 get, set UINT16 High Speed Lim p1082 maximum speed
22 get, set SINT Speed Scale p8982 Ethernet/IP ODVA speed scaling
29 get Bool Ref From Net Internal - display of Net_Reference
0: Local
1: Network
Value in p1300 Ethernet/IP motor data object
0 V/f with linear characteristic 1 Open loop speed (frequency)
1 V/f with linear characteristic and FCC 0 Vendor-specific mode
2 V/f with parabolic characteristic
4 V/f with linear characteristic and ECO
7 V/f for parabolic characteristic and ECO
20 Speed control (without encoder) 2 Closed-loop speed control
Siemens Drive Object, Instance Number: 32C hex
Supported services
Class ● Get Attribute single Instance ● Get Attribute single
● Set Attribute single
Table 6-32 Class Attribute
No. Service Type Name
1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 233
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Table 6-33 Instance Attribute
No. Type Service Name Value/explanation
2 INT16 get, set Commissioning state p0010 commissioning parameter filter
3 … 18 WORD get STW1 STW1 bit-by-bit access:
Attr.3 = STW1.0
Attr.18 = STW1.15
19 WORD get Main setpoint Main setpoint
20 … 35 WORD get ZSW1 ZSW1 bit-by-bit access:
Attr.20 = ZSW1.0
Attr.35 = ZSW1.15
36 WORD get Actual Frequency Main actual value (actual frequency)
37 REAL get, set Ramp Up Time p1120[0] ramp-function generator ramp-
up time
38 REAL get, set Ramp Down Time p1121[0] ramp-function generator ramp-
down time
39 REAL get, set Current Limit p0640[0] current limit
40 REAL get, set Frequency MAX Limit p1082[0] maximum speed
41 REAL get, set Frequency MIN Limit p1080[0] minimum speed
42 REAL get, set OFF3 Ramp Down Time p1135[0] OFF3 ramp-down time
43 UINT32 get, set PID Enable p2200[0] technology controller enable
/ BOOL
44 REAL get, set PID Filter Time Con‐ p2265 technology controller actual val‐
stant ue filter time constant
45 REAL get, set PID D Gain p2274 technology controller differentia‐
tion time constant
46 REAL get, set PID P Gain p2280 technology controller proportion‐
al gain
47 REAL get, set PID I Gain p2285 technology controller integral
time
48 REAL get, set PID Up Limit p2291 technology controller maximum
limiting
49 REAL get, set PID Down Limit p2292 technology controller minimum
limiting
50 REAL get Speed setpoint r0020 speed setpoint
51 REAL get Output Frequency r0024 output frequency
52 REAL get Output Voltage r0025 output voltage
53 REAL get DC Link Voltage r0026[0] DC link voltage
54 REAL get Actual Current r0027 current actual value
55 REAL get Actual Torque r0031 torque actual value
56 REAL get Output power r0032 actual active power value
57 REAL get Motor Temperature r0035[0] motor temperature
58 REAL get Power Unit Tempera‐ r0037[0] power unit temperature
ture
59 REAL get Energy kWh r0039 energy display
60 UINT8 get CDS Eff (Local Mode) r0050 active command data set
61 WORD get Status Word 2 r0053 status word 2
62 WORD get Control Word 1 r0054 control word 1
SINAMICS G120X converter
234 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
No. Type Service Name Value/explanation
63 REAL get Motor Speed (Encoder) r0061 speed actual value
64 UINT32 get Digital Inputs r0722 digital inputs status
65 UINT32 get Digital Outputs r0747 digital outputs status
66 REAL get Analog Input 1 r0752[0] analog input 1
67 REAL get Analog Input 2 r0752[1] analog input 2
68 REAL get Analog Output 1 r0774[0] analog output 1
69 REAL get Analog Output 2 r0774[1] analog output 2
70 UINT16 get Fault Code 1 r0947[0] fault number 1
71 UINT16 get Fault Code 2 r0947[1] fault number 2
72 UINT16 get Fault Code 3 r0947[2] fault number 3
73 UINT16 get Fault Code 4 r0947[3] fault number 4
74 UINT16 get Fault Code 5 r0947[4] fault number 5
75 UINT16 get Fault Code 6 r0947[5] fault number 6
76 UINT16 get Fault Code 7 r0947[6] fault number 7
77 UINT16 get Fault Code 8 r0947[7] fault number 8
78 REAL get Pulse Frequency r1801 pulse frequency
79 UINT16 get Alarm Code 1 r2110[0] alarm number 1
80 UINT16 get Alarm Code 2 r2110[1] alarm number 2
81 UINT16 get Alarm Code 3 r2110[2] alarm number 3
82 UINT16 get Alarm Code 4 r2110[3] alarm number 4
83 REAL get PID setpoint Output r2260 technology controller setpoint af‐
ter the ramp-function generator
84 REAL get PID Feedback r2266 technology controller actual value
after the filter
85 REAL get PID Output r2294 technology controller output sig‐
nal
Siemens Motor Data Object, Instance Number: 32D hex
Supported services
Class ● Get Attribute single Instance ● Get Attribute single
● Set Attribute single
Table 6-34 Class Attribute
No. Service Type Name
1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 235
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Table 6-35 Instance Attribute
No. Service Type Name Value/explanation
2 get, set UINT16 Commissioning p0010
state
3 get INT16 Motor Type p0300
6 get, set REAL Rated Current p0305
7 get, set REAL Rated Voltage p0304
8 get, set REAL Rated Power p0307
9 get, set REAL Rated Frequency p0310
10 get, set REAL Rated Tempera‐ p0605
ture
11 get, set REAL Max Speed p0322
12 get, set UINT16 Pole pair number p0314
13 get, set REAL Torque Constant p0316
14 get, set REAL Inertia p0341
15 get, set REAL Base Speed p0311
19 get, set REAL Cos Phi p0308
TCP/IP Interface Object, Instance Number: F5 hex
Supported services
Class ● Get Attribute all Instance ● Get Attribute all
● Get Attribute single ● Get Attribute single
● Set Attribute single
Table 6-36 Class Attribute
No. Service Type Name
1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances
Table 6-37 Instance Attribute
No. Service Type Name Value/explanation
1 get UNIT32 Status Fixed value: 1 hex
1: Configuration acknowledged, by DHCP or saved
values
2 get UNIT32 Configuration Ca‐ Fixed value: 94 hex
pability 4 hex: DHCP supported,
10 hex: Configuration can be adjusted,
80 hex: ACD-capable
SINAMICS G120X converter
236 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
No. Service Type Name Value/explanation
3 get, set UNIT32 Configuration 1 hex: Saved values
Control 3 hex: DHCP
4 get UNIT16 Path Size (in Fixed value: 2 hex
WORDs)
UNIT8 Path 20 hex,
F6 hex,
24 hex,
05 hex, where 5 hex is the number of instances of F6
hex (four physical ports plus one internal port).
5 get, set STRING Interface Configu‐ r61000 Name of Station
UNIT32 ration r61001 IP address
6 get, set UNIT16 Host Name Host Name Length
STRING
10 get, set UNIT8 Select ACD local OM flash:
0: Disabled,
1: Enabled
11 get, set UNIT8 Last Conflict De‐ local OM flash ACD Activity
UNIT8 tected local OM flash Remote MAC
UNIT8 local OM flash ARP PDU
Link Object, Instance Number: F6 hex
Supported services
Class ● Get Attribute all Instance ● Get Attribute all
● Get Attribute single ● Get Attribute single
● Set Attribute single
Table 6-38 Class Attribute
No. Service Type Name
1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances
Table 6-39 Instance Attribute
No. Service Type Name Value/explanation
1 get UINT32 Interface Speed 0: link down,
10: 10 Mbps,
100: 100 Mbps
2 get Interface Flags Bit 1: Link-Status
Bit 2: Duplex Mode (0: halb duplex, 1 duplex
Bit 3 … 5: Automatic state identification
Bit 6: Reset required
Bit 7: Local hardware fault (0 = ok)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 237
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
No. Service Type Name Value/explanation
3 get ARRAY Physical Address r8935 Ethernet MAC address
4 get_and_ Struct of Interface Coun‐ Optional, required if the "Media Counters Attribute" is
clear ters implemented.
UINT32 In Octets Received octets
UINT32 In Ucast Packets Received Unicast packets
UINT32 In NUcast Pack‐ Received non-Unicast packets
ets
UINT32 In Discards Incoming packets, not processed
UINT32 In Errors Incoming packets with errors
UINT32 In Unknown Pro‐ Incoming packets with unknown protocol
tos
UINT32 Out Octets Sent octets
UINT32 Out Ucast Pack‐ Sent Unicast packets
ets
UINT32 Out NUcast pack‐ Sent non-Unicast packets
ets
UINT32 Out Discards Outgoing packets, not processed
UINT32 Out Errors Outgoing packets, with errors
5 get_and_ Struct of Media Counters Media-specific counters
clear UINT32 Alignment Errors Structure received, which does not match the num‐
ber of octets
UINT32 FCS Errors Structure received, which does not pass the FCS
check
UINT32 Single Collisions Structure successfully transmitted, precisely one col‐
lision
UINT32 Multiple Colli‐ Structure successfully transmitted, several collisions
sions
UINT32 SQE Test Errors Number of SQE errors
UINT32 Deferred Trans‐ First transmission attempt delayed
missions
UINT32 Late Collisions Number of collisions that occurred delayed by 512 bit
timers to the request
UINT32 Excessive Colli‐ Transmission unsuccessful as a result of intensive
sions collisions
UINT32 MAC Transmit Er‐ Transmission unsuccessful as a result of an internal
rors MAC sublayer transmission error.
UINT32 Carrier Sense Er‐ Times that the carrier sense condition was lost or
rors never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame
UINT32 Frame Too Long Structure too large
UINT32 MAC Receive Er‐ Transmission unsuccessful as a result of an internal
rors MAC sublayer receive error.
6 get, set Struct of Interface Control
UINT16 Control Bits
UINT16 Forced Interface
Speed
10 get String Interface_Label Interface-Label
SINAMICS G120X converter
238 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Parameter Object, Instance Number: 401 hex
Supported services
Class ● Get Attribute all Instance ● Get Attribute all
● Set Attribute single
Table 6-40 Class Attribute
No. Service Type Name
1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances
Cyclic communication is established via parameter object 401.
Example: Read parameter 2050[10] (connector output to interconnect the PZD received from
the fieldbus controller)
Get Attribute single function with the following values:
● Class = 401 hex
● Instance = 2050 = 802 hex corresponds to the parameter number
● Attribute = 10 = A hex corresponds to index 10
Example: Parameter 1520[0] writing (upper torque limit)
Set Attribute single function with the following values:
● Class = 401 hex
● Instance = 1520 = 5F0 hex corresponds to the parameter number
● Attribute = 0 = 0 hex corresponds to index 0
● Data = 500.0 (value)
Supported ODVA AC/DC assemblies
Overview
Number required/ Type Name
hex dec optional
14 hex 20 Required Sending Basic Speed Control Output
46 hex 70 Required Receiving Basic Speed Control Input
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 239
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Assembly Basic Speed Control, Instance Number: 20, type: Output
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 Fault RUN
Reset Forward
1
2 Speed Reference (Low Byte)
3 Speed Reference (High Byte)
Assembly Basic Speed Control, Instance Number: 70, type: Input
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 Running Faulted
Forward
1
2 Speed Actual (Low Byte)
3 Speed Actual (High Byte)
6.3.4.3 Create generic I/O module
Overview
For certain controllers, or if you wish to use the SINAMICS profile, you cannot use the EDS file
provided by Siemens. In these cases, you must create a generic I/O module in the control
system for the cyclic communication.
Function description
Procedure
1. In your control, create a generic device with Ethernet/IP functionality.
2. In the control, enter the lengths for the process data for cyclic communication in the new
device which you set in the converter, r2067[0] (input), r2067[1] (output), for example:
Standard telegram 2/2 .
4 ms is supported as the minimum value for RPI (Requested Packet Interval).
3. In the converter, set the same values for IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and
name of the station as in the control.
Configuring communication via EtherNet/IP (Page 225)
You have created a generic I/O module for cyclic communication with the converter.
❒
Further information
You can find a detailed description of how to create a generic I/O module on the Internet:
Application example (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/82843076)
SINAMICS G120X converter
240 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.4.4 The converter as Ethernet node
Integrating a converter into an Ethernet network (assigning an IP address)
Procedure
1. Set p8924 (PN DHCP mode) = 2 or 3
– p8924 = 2: The DHCP server assigns the IP address based on the MAC address of the
converter.
– p8924 = 3: The DHCP server assigns the IP address based on the device name of the
converter.
2. Save the settings with p8925 = 2. The next time that the converter switches on, it retrieves
the IP address, and you can address the converter as Ethernet node.
Note
Immediate switchover without restart
The switchover to DHCP is performed immediately and without a restart if the change is
carried out with the EtherNet/IP command "Set Attribute Single" (class F5 hex, attribute 3).
The following options are available:
● via an EtherNet/IP controller
● via an EtherNet/IP commissioning tool
You have now integrated the converter into Ethernet
Displays
r8930: Device name of the converter
r8934: Operating mode, PN or DHCP
r8935: MAC address
Additional information
You can find information about parameters and messages (A08565) in the parameter list.
Parameters (Page 467)
Additional options of integrating converters into Ethernet
You also have the option of integrating the converter into Ethernet using Proneta or STEP 7, for
example.
Here is the example of the "Edit Ethernet station" screen form from Step 7, which you can use
to make the required settings.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 241
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.5 Drive control via Modbus RTU
6.3.5.1 Activating communication via fieldbus
Function description
Procedure
Proceed as follows to activate communication via Modbus RTU:
1. Start quick commissioning.
2. In the first steps of the quick commissioning, confirm all of the values that have already been
set.
3. Select one of the following default settings:
– 51: "Modbus RTU control"
– 52: "Modbus RTU control local/remote"
Default setting of the interfaces (macros) (Page 107)
SINAMICS G120X converter
242 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
4. In the next steps of the quick commissioning, confirm all additional values that have already
been set.
5. Exit quick commissioning.
You have activated communication via Modbus RTU.
❒
ON/OFF commands via Modbus RTU
Selecting the macros 51 and 52 has the following effect:
● Only the ON/OFF2 command is possible via the terminal strip.
● The higher-level controller cannot turn the motor on or off.
To turn the motor on and off via the higher-level controller, you need to manually interconnect
the ON/OFF1 and OFF2 commands with the PROFIdrive control word:
● Set p0840[0] = r2090.0
● Set p0844[0] = r2090.1
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 243
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.5.2 Setting the address
Function description
Procedure
1. Using parameter p2021, set the address using an operator panel or SINAMICS G120 Smart
Access.
Permissible addresses: 0 … 31.
2. Switch off the converter power supply.
3. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
4. Switch on the converter power supply again.
Your settings become active after switching on.
You have set the bus address.
❒
Parameters
Parameter Description Factory setting
p2021 Fieldbus interface address 0
6.3.5.3 Parameters for setting communication via Modbus RTU
General settings
Fieldbus protocol selection p2030 = 2 (Modbus RTU)
Baud rate p2020 = 7, 19200 bit/s
Setting range: 4800 bit/s … 187500 bit/s
Parity
In the factory, the Control Unit is set for controllers with even parity You can adapt the parity at
your controller using p2031:
● p2031 = 0: No parity, 1 stop bit or 2 stop bits
● p2031 = 1: Odd parity, 1 stop bit
● p2031 = 2: Even parity, 1 stop bit
SINAMICS G120X converter
244 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Modbus timing p2024[0 … 2]
● p2024[0]: Maximum slave telegram processing time:
The time after which the slave must have sent a response to the master. 0 ms … 10000 ms,
factory setting = 6000 ms.
● p2024[1]: Character delay time:
Character delay time: Maximum permissible time between the individual characters in the
Modbus frame. (Modbus standard processing time for 1.5 bytes).
● p2024 [2]: Inter-telegram delay:
maximum permissible time between Modbus telegrams. (Modbus standard processing time
for 3.5 bytes).
Values for p2024 [1] and p2024 [2]
Table 6-41 Baud rates, transmission times, and delays (Page 248).
Fieldbus monitoring time p2040 = 1000 ms
Setting range: 0 ms … 1999999 ms
The more slaves that are connected in the network, the longer the fieldbus monitoring time must
be.
If process data is not transferred within one cycle of the fieldbus monitoring time, then the
converter shuts down with fault F01910.
p2040 = 0 ⇒ bus monitoring deactivated.
Fieldbus error statistics r2029
Displaying receive errors at the fieldbus interface
Interconnecting analog outputs
If you set communication via Modbus (p2030 = 2), then the analog outputs of the converter are
internally interconnected with the fieldbus analog outputs:
● p0771[0] = 791[0]
● p0771[1] = 791[1].
The values for p0791[0] and p0791[1] are written via registers 40523 and 40524.
Interconnections between parameter p0791 and other sources are rejected.
This means that the control outputs system-specific values via the analog outputs of the
converter.
However, if you still wish to display a converter-specific value, you must adapt the appropriate
wiring.
Example
● AO 0 should display the value written via the control with register 40523. In this particular
case, no other settings are required in the converter.
● AO 1 should display the smoothed current actual value. To do this, you must set
p0771[1] = 27 (r0027 smoothed current actual value).
In this case, a write access via register 40524 to p0791[1] results in a fault message in the
control.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 245
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Note
Reset to the factory setting for Modbus
If you have set communication via Modbus (p2030 = 2), when restoring the factory settings, the
analog outputs are again interconnected with p0771[0] = 791[0] and p0771[1] = 791[1].
SINAMICS G120X converter
246 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.5.4 Modbus RTU telegram
Description
For Modbus, there is precisely one master and up to 247 slaves. The master always starts the
communication. Slaves send data when requested to do so by the master. Slave-to-slave
communication is not possible. The converter always operates as slave.
The following figure shows the structure of a Modbus RTU telegram.
0RGEXV578WHOHJUDP
6WDUW $SSOLNDWLRQ'DWD8QLW ,QWHU ,QWHU $SSOLNDWLRQ'DWD8QLW (QGH
GHOD\ 0RGEXVIUDPH IUDPH IUDPH 0RGEXVIUDPH GHOD\
GHOD\ GHOD\
3URWRFRO'DWD8QLW 3'8
6ODYH &5&
)XQFWLRQ 'DWD
&RGH
E\WH
ุE\WH E\WH E\WH E\WHV
&5&ORZ &5&KLJK
ุE\WH E\WH E\WH E\WH E\WH E\WH E\WH
W]
W]
W]
W]
W]
W]
W] FKDUDFWHUGHOD\WLPH
Figure 6-17 Modbus with delay times
The data area of the telegram is structured according to the mapping tables.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 247
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.5.5 Baud rates and mapping tables
Permissible baud rates and telegram delay
The Modbus RTU telegram requires pauses for the following situations:
● for the start identifier
● for separating the individual frames
● for the end identifier
Minimum duration: Processing time for 3.5 bytes (can be set via p2024[2]).
A character delay time is also permitted between the individual bytes of a frame. Maximum
duration: Processing time for 1.5 bytes (can be set via p2024[1]).
Table 6-41 Baud rates, transmission times, and delays
Baud rate in bit/s (p2020) Transmission time per Minimum pause be‐ Maximum pause be‐
character (11 bits) tween two telegrams tween two bytes
(p2024[2]) (p2024[1])
4800 2.292 ms ≥ 8.021 ms ≤ 3.438 ms
9600 1.146 ms ≥ 4.010 ms ≤ 1.719 ms
19200 (factory setting) 0.573 ms ≥ 1.75 ms ≤ 0.859 ms
38400 0.286 ms ≥ 1.75 ms ≤ 0.75 ms
57600 0.191 ms ≥ 1.75 ms ≤ 0.556 ms
76800 0.143 ms ≥ 1.75 ms ≤ 0.417 ms
93750 0.117 ms ≥ 1.75 ms ≤ 0.341 ms
115200 0.095 ms ≥ 1.75 ms ≤ 0.278 ms
187500 0.059 ms ≥ 1.75 ms ≤ 0.171 ms
Note
The factory setting for p2024[1] and p2024[2] is 0. The converter defines the particular values
depending on the protocol selection (p2030) or the baud rate.
Modbus register and Control Unit parameters
The converter supports the subsequently listed registers. Error "Exception Code" is output if an
attempt is made to access other registers.
Note
Read and write access to converter data
R: read via FC03; W: write via FC06; R/W: read via FC03 or write via FC06
SINAMICS G120X converter
248 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Table 6-42 Assigning the Modbus register to the parameters - process data
Regis‐ Description Access Scaling Data / parameter
ter
40100 Control word R/W 1 Process data 1
40101 Main setpoint R/W 1 Process data 2
40110 Status word R 1 Process data 1
40111 Main actual value R 1 Process data 2
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 249
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.5.6 Mapping tables - converter data
Table 6-43 Assigning the Modbus registers to the parameters - inputs and outputs
Regis‐ Description Ac‐ Unit Scaling ON/OFF text/ Data / parameter
ter cess value range
Digital outputs
40200 DO 0 R/W -- 1 HIGH LOW p0730, r747.0, p748.0
40201 DO 1 R/W -- 1 HIGH LOW p0731, r747.1, p748.1
40202 DO 2 R/W -- 1 HIGH LOW p0732, r747.2, p748.2
40203 DO 3 R/W -- 1 HIGH LOW p0733, r747.3, p748.3
Analog outputs
40220 AO 0 R % 100 -100.0 … 100.0 r0774.0
40221 AO 1 R % 100 -100.0 … 100.0 r0774.1
40523 AO 0 R/W % 100 -199.99 … 199.99 p0791.0
40524 AO 1 R/W % 100 -199.99 … 199.99 p0791.1
Digital inputs
40240 DI 0 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.0
40241 DI 1 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.1
40242 DI 2 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.2
40243 DI 3 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.3
40244 DI 4 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.4
40245 DI 5 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.5
Analog inputs
40260 AI 0 R % 100 -300.0 … 300.0 r0755 [0]
40261 AI 1 R % 100 -300.0 … 300.0 r0755 [1]
Table 6-44 Assigning the Modbus registers to the parameters - converter data
Regis‐ Description Ac‐ Unit Scaling ON/OFF text/ Data / parameter
ter cess value range
40300 Powerstack number R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0200
40301 Converter firmware R -- 1 e.g. 470 r0018 / 10000
40320 Rated power R kW 100 0 … 327.67 r0206
40321 Current limit R/W A 10 10.0 … 400.0 p0640
40322 Ramp-up time R/W s 100 0.00 … 650.0 p1120
40323 Ramp-down time R/W s 100 0.00 … 650.0 p1121
40324 Reference speed R/W RPM 1 6 … 32767 p2000
Converter diagnostics
40340 Speed setpoint R RPM 1 -16250 … 16250 r0020
40341 Actual speed value R RPM 1 -16250 … 16250 r0022
40342 Output frequency R Hz 100 - 327.68 … 327.67 r0024
40343 Output voltage R V 1 0 … 32767 r0025
40344 DC-link voltage R V 1 0 … 32767 r0026
SINAMICS G120X converter
250 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Regis‐ Description Ac‐ Unit Scaling ON/OFF text/ Data / parameter
ter cess value range
40345 Current actual value R A 100 0 … 163.83 r0027
40346 Actual torque value R Nm 100 - 325.00 … 325.00 r0031
40347 Actual active power R kW 100 0 … 327.67 r0032
40348 Energy consumption R kWh 1 0 … 32767 r0039
40349 Control priority R -- 1 HAND AUTO r0807
Table 6-45 Assigning the Modbus registers to the parameters - fault diagnostics
Regis‐ Description Ac‐ Unit Scaling ON/OFF text/ Data / parameter
ter cess value range
40400 Failure number, index 0 R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0947 [0]
40401 Failure number, index 1 R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0947 [1]
40402 Failure number, index 2 R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0947 [2]
40403 Fault number, index 3 R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0947 [3]
40404 Fault number, index 4 R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0947 [4]
40405 Fault number, index 5 R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0947 [5]
40406 Fault number, index 6 R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0947 [6]
40407 Fault number, index 7 R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0947 [7]
40408 Alarm number R -- 1 0 … 32767 r2110 [0]
40409 Actual alarm code R -- 1 0 … 32767 r2132
40499 PRM ERROR code R -- 1 0 … 255 --
Table 6-46 Assigning the Modbus registers to the parameters - technology controller
Regis‐ Description Ac‐ Unit Scaling ON/OFF text/ Data / parameter
ter cess value range
40500 Technology controller enable R/W -- 1 0…1 p2200, r2349.0
40501 Technology controller MOP R/W % 100 -200.0 … 200.0 p2240
Technology controller adjustment
40510 Time constant for actual-value filters of R/W -- 100 0.00 … 60.0 p2265
the technology controller
40511 Scaling factor for actual value of the R/W % 100 0.00 … 500.00 p2269
technology controller
40512 Proportional amplification of the technol‐ R/W -- 1000 0.000 … 65.000 p2280
ogy controller
40513 Integral time of the technology controller R/W s 1 0 … 60 p2285
40514 Time constant D-component of the tech‐ R/W -- 1 0 … 60 p2274
nology controller
40515 Max. limit of technology controller R/W % 100 -200.0 … 200.0 p2291
40516 Min. limit technology controller R/W % 100 -200.0 … 200.0 p2292
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 251
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Table 6-47 Assigning the Modbus registers to the parameters - PID diagnostics
Regis‐ Description Ac‐ Unit Scaling ON/OFF text/ Data / parameter
ter cess value range
40520 Effective setpoint acc. to internal tech‐ R % 100 -100.0 … 100.0 r2250
nology controller MOP ramp-function
generator
40521 Actual value of technology controller af‐ R % 100 -100.0 … 100.0 r2266
ter filter
40522 Output signal technology controller R % 100 -100.0 … 100.0 r2294
Table 6-48 Modbus registers for communication via DS47
Regis‐ Description Ac‐ Unit Scaling Data / parameter
ter cess
40601 DS47 Control R/W -- -- --
40602 DS47 header R/W -- -- --
40603 DS47 data 1 R/W -- -- --
… … …
40722 DS47 data 120 R/W -- -- --
Table 6-49 Modbus registers for multi-pump control
Register Last reg‐ Description Ac‐ Unit Scaling ON/OFF text/value Data / parameter
ister cess range
40800 Status word R -- 1 0 … 65535 p29529
40801 Motor index speed control R -- 1 0…3 p29538
40802 Status word, service mode R -- 1 0 … 65535 p29544
40804 40805 Motor 1 operating hours R/W h 10 0 … 429496729.5 p29530[0]
40806 40807 Motor 2 operating hours R/W h 10 0 … 429496729.5 p29530[1]
40808 40809 Motor 3 operating hours R/W h 10 0 … 429496729.5 p29530[2]
40810 40811 Motor 4 operating hours R/W h 10 0 … 429496729.5 p29530[3]
SINAMICS G120X converter
252 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.5.7 Acyclic communication via Modbus RTU
Acyclic communication or general parameter access is realized using the Modbus registers
40601 … 40722.
Acyclic communication is controlled using 40601. 40602 contains the function code (always =
47 = 2F hex) and the number of the following user data. User data are contained in registers
40603 … 40722.
Overview of acyclic communication
Value in the register Explanation
40601 40602 40603 … 40722
0 47 … … Write values for acyclic access
1 47 Request Request data Activate acyclic access
length
[bytes]
2 47 Response Response data Response for a successful request
length
[bytes]
2 47 0 Error code Response for an erronous request
Error codes
1 hex: Invalid Length (invalid length)
2 hex: Invalid State (in the current converter state, this action is not permitted)
3 hex: Invalid function code (FC ≠ 2F hex)
4 hex: Response not ready (the response has still not been issued)
5 hex: Internal Error (general system error)
Incorrect access operations to parameters via data set 47 are logged in registers
40603 … 40722.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 253
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.5.8 Write and read access using function codes
Basic structure of read and write access using function codes
6ODYH 3URWRFRO'DWD8QLW 3'8 &5&
,' )& 'DWD ORZ KLJK
%\WH %\WH %\WHV %\WH
Function codes used
For data exchange between the master and slave, predefined function codes are used for
communication via Modbus.
The Control Unit uses the following Modbus function codes:
FC 03: Holding register to read data from the converter
FC 06: Write single register to write to individual register
FC 16: Write to multiple registers to write to several registers
Structure of a read request via Modbus function code 03 (FC 03)
Any valid register address is permitted as the start address.
Via FC 03, the control can address more than one register with one request. The number of
addressed registers is contained in bytes 4 and 5 of the read request.
Table 6-50 Structure of a read request via slave number 17, example
Value Byte Description
11 h 0 Slave address
03 h 1 Function code
00 h 2 Register start address "High" (register 40110)
6D h 3 Register start address "Low"
00 h 4 Number of registers "High" (2 registers: 40110; 40111)
02 h 5 number of registers "Low"
xx h 6 CRC "Low"
xx h 7 CRC "High"
SINAMICS G120X converter
254 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
The response returns the corresponding data set:
Table 6-51 Slave response to the read request, example
Value Byte Description
11 h 0 Slave address
03 h 1 Function code
04 h 2 Number of bytes (4 bytes are returned)
11 h 3 Data first register "High"
22 h 4 Data first register "Low"
33 h 5 Data second register "High"
44 h 6 Data second register "Low"
xx h 7 CRC "Low"
xx h 8 CRC "High"
Table 6-52 Invalid read request
Read request Converter response
Invalid register address Exception code 02 (invalid data address)
Read a write-only register Telegram in which all values are set to 0.
Read a reserved register
Controller addresses more than 125 registers Exception code 03 (invalid data value)
The start address and the number of registers of an Exception code 02 (invalid data address)
address are located outside of a defined register block
Structure of a write request via Modbus function code 06 (FC 06)
Start address is the holding register address.
Via FC 06, with one request, only precisely one register can be addressed. The value, which is
written to the addressed register, is contained in bytes 4 and 5 of the write request.
Table 6-53 Structure of a write request for slave number 17, example
Value Byte Description
11 h 0 Slave address
06 h 1 Function code
00 h 2 Register start address "High" (write register 40100)
63 h 3 Register start address "Low"
55 h 4 Register data "High"
66 h 5 Register data "Low"
xx h 6 CRC "Low"
xx h 7 CRC "High"
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 255
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
The response returns register address (bytes 2 and 3) and the value (bytes 4 and 5), which the
higher-level control had written to the register.
Table 6-54 Slave response to the write request
Value Byte Description
11 h 0 Slave address
06 h 1 Function code
00 h 2 Register start address "High"
63 h 3 Register start address "Low"
55 h 4 Register data "High"
66 h 5 Register data "Low"
xx h 6 CRC "Low"
xx h 7 CRC "High"
Table 6-55 Invalid write request
Write request Converter response
Incorrect address (a holding register address does not exist) Exception Code 02 - invalid data ad‐
dress
Write to a "read-only" register Exception Code 04 - device failure
Write to a reserved register
For Exception Code 4, via the holding register 40499, you can read out the internal drive error
code, which has occurred for the last parameter access via the holding register.
6.3.5.9 Reading and writing parameters acyclically via FC 16
Via FC 16, with one request, up to 122 registers can be written to directly one after the other,
while for Write Single Register (FC 06) you must individually write the header data for each
register.
Header
In addition to the slave address, enter the transfer type, the start address and the number of the
following registers in the header.
User data
You control the access in the user data via register 40601.
In register 40602, you define the acyclic access as well as the length of the request data.
Register 40603 contains the request reference - it is defined by the user - and the access type
-reading or writing.
Register 40604 contains the number of the drive object (always 1) and the number of
parameters that are read or written.
Register 40605 contains the attribute that you use to control whether you read out the
parameter value or the parameter attribute. In the number of elements you specify how many
indices are read.
SINAMICS G120X converter
256 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Example: r0002 read acyclically
Table 6-56 Write parameter request: Reading the parameter value of r0002 from slave number 17
Value Byte Description
11 h 0 Slave address
10 h 1 Function code (write multiple)
0258 h 2,3 Register start address
0007 h 4,5 Number of registers to be read (40601 … 40607)
0E h 6 Number of data bytes (7 registers, each 2 bytes = 14 bytes)
0001 h 7,8 40601: DS47 Control = 1 (activate request)
2F0A h 9,10 40602: Function 2F h (47), request length 10 bytes (0A h)
8001 h 11,12 40603: Request reference = 80 h, request identifier = 1 h
0101 h 13,14 40604: DO-Id = 1, number of parameters = 1
1001 h 15,16 40605: Attribute, number of elements = 1
0002 h 17,18 40606: Parameter number = 2
0000 h 19,20 40607: Subindex = 0
xx h 21 CRC "Low"
xx h 22 CRC "High"
Table 6-57 Start parameter request: Reading the parameter value of r0002 from slave number 17
Value Byte Description
11 h 0 Slave address
03 h 1 Function code (read)
0258 h 2,3 Register start address
0007 h 4,5 Number of registers to be read (40601 … 40607)
0010 h 6,7 Number of registers
xx h 8 CRC "Low"
xx h 9 CRC "High"
Table 6-58 Response for successful read operation
Value Byte Description
11 h 0 Slave address
03 h 1 Function code (read)
20 h 2 Number of following data bytes (20 h: 32 bytes corresponds to 16 registers)
0002 h 3,4 40601: DS47 Control = 2 (the request was executed)
2F08 h 5,6 40602: Function code 2F h (47), response lengths 8 bytes
8001 h 7,8 40603: Request reference mirrored = 80 h,
response identifier = 1 (request parameter)
0101 h 9,10 40604: DO-ID = 1, number of parameters = 1
0301 h 11,12 40605: Format, number of elements = 1
001F h 13,14 40606: Parameter value = 1F h (31)
xx h 15 CRC "Low"
xx h 16 CRC "High"
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 257
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Table 6-59 Response for unsuccessful read operation - read request still not completed
Value Byte Description
11 h 0 Slave address
03 h 1 Function code (read)
20 h 2 Number of following data bytes (20 h: 32 bytes corresponds to 16 registers)
0001 h 3,4 40601: Check value 1 = request is processed
2F00 h 5,6 40602: Function 2F h(47), response length 0 (fault)
0004 h 7,8 40603: Error code: 0004 Response Not Ready (response has still not been
issued)
xx h 9 CRC "Low"
xx h 10 CRC "High"
Example: Set p1121 = 12.15
Table 6-60 Write parameter request: Writing the parameter value of p1121 from slave number 17
Value Byte Description
11 h 0 Slave address
10 h 1 Function code (write multiple)
0258 h 2,3 Register start address
000A h 4,5 Number of registers to be written to (40601 … 40610)
14 h 6 Number of data bytes (10 registers, each 2 bytes = 20 bytes)
0001 h 7,8 40601: C1 (activate request)
2F10 h 9,10 40602: Function 2F h (47), request length 16 bytes (10 h)
8002 h 11,12 40603: Request reference = 80 h, request identifier = 2 h (write)
0101 h 13,14 40604: DO-Id = 1, number of parameters = 1
1001 h 15,16 40605: Attribute, number of elements = 1
0461 h 17,18 40606: Parameter number = 1121
0000 h 19,20 40607: Subindex = 0
0801 h 21,22 40608: Format + number of values
4142 h 23,24 40609: Parameter value 12,15
6666 h 25,26 40610: Parameter value
xx h 27 CRC "Low"
xx h 28 CRC "High"
Table 6-61 Start parameter request: Writing the parameter value of p1121 from slave number 17
Value Byte Description
11 h 0 Slave address
06 h 1 Function code (write)
0258 h 2,3 Register start address
0007 h 4,5 Number of registers to be written to (40601 … 40610)
0010 h 6,7 Number of registers
xx h 8 CRC "Low"
xx h 9 CRC "High"
SINAMICS G120X converter
258 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Table 6-62 Response for successful write operation
Value Byte Description
11 h 0 Slave address
06 h 1 Function code (write)
20 h 2 Number of following data bytes (20 h: 32 bytes corresponds to 16 registers)
0002 h 3,4 40601: DS47 Control = 2 (request was executed)
2F04 h 5,6 40602: Function code 2F h (47), response length 4 bytes
8002 h 7,8 40603: Request reference mirrored = 80 h,
response identifier = 2 (change parameter)
0101 h 9,10 40604: DO-ID = 1, number of parameters = 1
xx h 11 CRC "Low"
xx h 12 CRC "High"
Table 6-63 Response for unsuccessful write operation - write request still not completed
Value Byte Description
11 h 0 Slave address
06 h 1 Function code (write)
20 h 2 Number of following data bytes (20 h: 32 bytes corresponds to 16 registers)
0001 h 3,4 40601: DS47 Control = 1 (request is processed)
2F00 h 5,6 40602: Function 2F h(47), response length 0 (fault)
0004 h 7,8 40603: Error code: 0004 Response Not Ready (response has still not been
issued)
xx h 9 CRC "Low"
xx h 10 CRC "High"
6.3.5.10 Communication procedure
Procedure for communication in a normal case
Normally, the master sends a telegram to a slave (address range 1 ... 247). The slave sends a
response telegram to the master. This response telegram mirrors the function code; the slave
enters its own address in the telegram and so the slave identifies itself with the master.
The slave only processes orders and telegrams which are directly addressed to it.
Communication error
If the slave detects a communication error on receipt (parity, CRC), it does not send a response
to the master (this can lead to "setpoint timeout").
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 259
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Logical error
If the slave detects a logical error within a request, it responds to the master with an "exception
response". In the response, the slave sets the highest bit in the function code to 1. If the slave
receives, for example, an unsupported function code from the master, the slave responds with
an "exception response" with code 01 (Illegal function code).
Table 6-64 Overview of exception codes
Exception Modbus name Remark
code
01 Illegal function code An unknown (unsupported) function code was sent to the
slave.
02 Illegal Data Address An invalid address was requested.
03 Illegal data value An invalid data value was detected.
04 Server failure Slave has terminated during processing.
Maximum processing time, p2024[0]
The slave-response time is the time in which the Modbus master expects a response to a
request. Set the same slave-response time (p2024 [0] in the converter) in the master and slave.
Process data monitoring time (setpoint timeout), p2040
"Setpoint timeout" (F1910) is issued by the Modbus if p2040 is set to a value > 0 ms and no
process data is requested within this time period.
The "Setpoint timeout" only applies for access to process data (40100, 40101, 40110, 40111).
The "Setpoint timeout" is not generated for parameter data (40200 … 40522).
Note
Adjust the time (factory setting = 100 ms) depending on the number of slaves and the baud rate
set on the bus.
6.3.5.11 Application example
An application example for MODBUS RTU is provided on the Internet:
Communication via the MODBUS interface (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/35928944)
SINAMICS G120X converter
260 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.6 Drive control via USS
6.3.6.1 Activating communication via fieldbus
Function description
Procedure
Proceed as follows to activate communication via USS:
1. Start quick commissioning.
2. In the first steps of the quick commissioning, confirm all of the values that have already been
set.
3. Select one of the following default settings:
– 54: "USS control"
– 55: "USS control local/remote"
Default setting of the interfaces (macros) (Page 107)
4. In the next steps of the quick commissioning, confirm all additional values that have already
been set.
5. Exit quick commissioning.
You have activated communication via USS.
❒
ON/OFF commands via USS
Selecting the macros 54 and 55 has the following effect:
● Only the ON/OFF2 command is possible via the terminal strip.
● The higher-level controller cannot turn the motor on or off.
To turn the motor on and off via the higher-level controller, you need to manually interconnect
the ON/OFF1 and OFF2 commands with the PROFIdrive control word:
● Set p0840[0] = r2090.0
● Set p0844[0] = r2090.1
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 261
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.6.2 Setting the address
Function description
Procedure
1. Using parameter p2021, set the address using an operator panel or SINAMICS G120 Smart
Access.
Permissible addresses: 1 … 247.
2. Switch off the converter power supply.
3. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
4. Switch on the converter power supply again.
Your settings become active after switching on.
You have set the bus address.
❒
Parameters
Parameter Description Factory setting
p2021 Fieldbus interface address 0
6.3.6.3 Telegram structure
Overview
A USS telegram comprises a series of elements with a defined sequence. Each element
contains 11 bits.
+HDGHULQIRUPDWLRQ QQHWGDWD )LQDOLQIRUPDWLRQ
67; /*( $'5 Q %&&
6WDUWGHOD\ 866IUDPH
%LW %LW %LW
ELWGDWD
6WDUW 3HYHQ 6WRS
Figure 6-18 Structure of a USS telegram
Telegram part Description
Start delay / re‐ There is always a start and/or response delay between two telegrams.
sponse delay Telegram monitoring (Page 267)
STX An ASCII character (02 hex) indicates the beginning of the message.
LGE The telegram length "LGE" is calculated as follows:
LGE = user data (n bytes) + ADR (1 byte) + BCC (1 byte)
SINAMICS G120X converter
262 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Telegram part Description
ADR
6SHFLDO 0LUURU %URDGFDVW
WHOHJUDP WHOHJUDP ELW $GGUHVV
● Bit 7 = 0: Normal data exchange.
Bit 7 =1, to transfer telegrams that require a net data structure different from
the device profile.
● Bit 6 = 0: Normal data exchange.
Bit 6 = 1: Testing the bus connection: The converter returns the telegram
unchanged to the master.
● Bit 5 = 0: Normal data exchange.
(Bit 5 = 1: Not supported in the converter.)
● Bits 0 ... 4: Address of the converter.
User data Specify user data of telegram (Page 263).
BCC Checksum (exclusive or) across all telegram bytes – with the exception of BCC.
6.3.6.4 Specify user data of telegram
Overview
The user data of the telegram consist of the following elements:
● Parameter channel (PIV) for writing and reading parameter values
● Process data (PZD) for controlling the drive
/RJGDWD 3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO 3,9 3URFHVVGDWD 3='
/RJZRUGV 3.: 3.: 3.: 3.: 3.:P 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
3,93='VWUXFWXUH 3.( ,1' 3:( 3:( 3:(P 67: +6: 67:
=6: +,: =6:
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
'DWDE\WH
S S
S S
S YDULDEOHOHQJWK S
Figure 6-19 USS telegram - user data structure
Function description
Parameter channel
You specify the length of the parameter channel in parameter p2023:
● p2023 = 0
With this setting, no parameter values are transferred.
● p2023 = 3
You can select this setting if you only want to read or write 16-bit data or alarm signals.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 263
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
● p2023 = 4:
If you want to read or write 32-bit values (for example indexed parameters or bit parameters,
e.g. r0722.2), then this setting is required. In this case, the send or receive telegram always
contains four words, even if only three would be required. The values are right-justified in the
4th word.
● p2023 = 127:
If you set p2023 = 27 (variable length), the send and response telegrams are as long as the
task actually requires.
Process data
Parameter p2022 defines the length for the process data. You can transfer up to eight process
data items in one telegram (p2022 = 0 … 8). For p2022 = 0, no process data is transferred.
Parameters
Parameter Description Factory setting
p2022 Fieldbus interface USS PZD number 2
p2023 Fieldbus interface USS PKW number 127
6.3.6.5 USS process data channel (PZD)
Function description
The process data channel (PZD) contains the following data depending on the transmission
direction:
● Control words and setpoints for the slave
● Status words and actual values for the master.
67: +6: 67:
5HTXLUHPHQW
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
WR866VODYH
S
=6: +,: =6:
$QVZHU
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
WR866PDVWHU
S
S
Figure 6-20 Process data channel
The first two words are:
● Control 1 (STW1) and main setpoint (HSW)
● Status word 1 (ZSW1) and main actual value (HIW)
If p2022 is greater than or equal to 4, then the converter receives the additional control word
(STW2).
SINAMICS G120X converter
264 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Control word 1 (STW1)
Bit Significance Explanation Signal inter‐
connection in
the converter
0 0 = OFF1 The motor brakes with the ramp-down time p1121 of p0840[0] =
the ramp-function generator. The converter switches r2090.0
off the motor at standstill.
0 → 1 = ON The converter goes into the "ready" state. If, in addition
bit 3 = 1, then the converter switches on the motor.
1 0 = OFF2 Switch off the motor immediately, the motor then p0844[0] =
coasts down to a standstill. r2090.1
1 = No OFF2 The motor can be switched on (ON command).
2 0 = Quick stop (OFF3) Quick stop: The motor brakes to a standstill with the p0848[0] =
OFF3 ramp-down time p1135. r2090.2
1 = No quick stop (OFF3) The motor can be switched on (ON command).
3 0 = Inhibit operation Immediately switch-off motor (cancel pulses). p0852[0] =
1 = Enable operation Switch-on motor (pulses can be enabled). r2090.3
4 0 = Disable RFG The converter immediately sets its ramp-function gen‐ p1140[0] =
erator output to 0. r2090.4
1 = Do not disable RFG The ramp-function generator can be enabled.
5 0 = Stop RFG The output of the ramp-function generator stops at the p1141[0] =
actual value. r2090.5
1 = Enable RFG The output of the ramp-function generator follows the
setpoint.
6 0 = Inhibit setpoint The converter brakes the motor with the ramp-down p1142[0] =
time p1121 of the ramp-function generator. r2090.6
1 = Enable setpoint Motor accelerates to the setpoint with the ramp-up
time p1120.
7 0 → 1 = Acknowledge Acknowledge fault. If the ON command is still active, p2103[0] =
faults the converter switches to the "switching on inhibited" r2090.7
state.
8, 9 Reserved
10 0 = No control via PLC Converter ignores the process data from the fieldbus. p0854[0] =
1 = Control via PLC Control via fieldbus, converter accepts the process r2090.10
data from the fieldbus.
11 1 = Direction reversal Invert setpoint in the converter. p1113[0] =
r2090.11
12 Reserved
13 1 = MOP up Increase the setpoint saved in the motorized potenti‐ p1035[0] =
ometer. r2090.13
14 1 = MOP down Reduce the setpoint saved in the motorized potenti‐ p1036[0] =
ometer. r2090.14
15 Reserved
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 265
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Status word 1 (ZSW1)
Bit Significance Remarks Signal inter‐
connection in
the converter
0 1 = Ready for switching Power supply switched on; electronics initialized; pul‐ p2080[0] =
on ses locked. r0899.0
1 1 = Ready Motor is switched on (ON/OFF1 = 1), no fault is active. p2080[1] =
With the command "Enable operation" (STW1.3), the r0899.1
converter switches on the motor.
2 1 = Operation enabled Motor follows setpoint. See control word 1, bit 3. p2080[2] =
r0899.2
3 1 = Fault active The converter has a fault. Acknowledge fault using p2080[3] =
STW1.7. r2139.3
4 1 = OFF2 inactive Coast down to standstill is not active. p2080[4] =
r0899.4
5 1 = OFF3 inactive Quick stop is not active. p2080[5] =
r0899.5
6 1 = Switching on inhibi‐ It is only possible to switch on the motor after an OFF1 p2080[6] =
ted active followed by ON. r0899.6
7 1 = Alarm active Motor remains switched on; no acknowledgement is p2080[7] =
necessary. r2139.7
8 1 = Speed deviation Setpoint / actual value deviation within the tolerance p2080[8] =
within the tolerance range. r2197.7
range
9 1 = Master control re‐ The automation system is requested to accept the p2080[9] =
quested converter control. r0899.9
10 1 = Comparison speed Speed is greater than or equal to the corresponding p2080[10] =
reached or exceeded maximum speed. r2199.1
11 1 = Torque limit not Fallen below comparison value for current or torque. p2080[11] =
reached r0056.13 /
r1407.7
12 Reserved p2080[12] =
r0899.12
13 0 = Alarm, motor over‐ -- p2080[13] =
temperature r2135.14
14 1 = Motor rotates clock‐ Internal converter actual value > 0. p2080[14] =
wise r2197.3
0 = Motor rotates coun‐ Internal converter actual value < 0.
ter-clockwise
15 0 = Alarm, converter p2080[15] =
thermal overload r2135.15
SINAMICS G120X converter
266 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.6.6 Telegram monitoring
Function description
You require the telegram runtimes in order to set the telegram monitoring. The character
runtime is the basis of the telegram runtime:
Table 6-65 Character runtime
Baud rate in bit/s Transmission time per bit Character run time (= 11 bits)
9600 104.170 µs 1.146 ms
19200 52.084 µs 0.573 ms
38400 26.042 µs 0.286 ms
57600 17.361 µs 0.191 ms
115200 8.681 µs 0.095 ms
The telegram runtime is longer than just purely adding all of the character runtimes (=residual
runtime). You must also take into consideration the character delay time between the individual
characters of the telegram.
5HVLGXDOUXQWLPH RIFRPSUHVVHGWHOHJUDP
FRPSUHVVHGWHOHJUDP UHVLGXDOUXQWLPH
67; /*( $'5 Q %&&
67; /*( $'5 Q %&&
&KDUDFWHUGHOD\WLPH &KDUDFWHUUXQWLPH
0D[LPXPUHPDLQLQJWHOHJUDPUXQWLPH
Figure 6-21 Telegram runtime as the sum of the residual runtime and character delay times
The total telegram runtime is always less than 150% of the pure residual runtime.
Before each request telegram, the master must maintain the start delay. The start delay must
be > 2 × character runtime.
The slave only responds after the response delay has expired.
67; /*( $'5 Q %&& 67; /*(
5HTXHVWIURPPDVWHU 6ODYHUHVSRQVH 5HTXHVWIURP
WKHPDVWHU
%&& 67; /*( $'5 Q %&&
6WDUWGHOD\ 5HVSRQVHGHOD\ 6WDUWGHOD\
Figure 6-22 Start delay and response delay
Table 6-66 Start delay
Baud rate in bit/s Transmission time per character (= 11 bits) Min. start delay
9600 1.146 ms > 2.291 ms
19200 0.573 ms > 1.146 ms
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 267
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Baud rate in bit/s Transmission time per character (= 11 bits) Min. start delay
38400 0.286 ms > 0.573 ms
57600 0.191 ms > 0.382 ms
115200 0.095 ms > 0.191 ms
The character delay time must be shorter than the start delay.
Telegram monitoring of the master
With your USS master, we recommend that the following times are monitored:
● Response delay:
Response time of the slave to a request from the master
The response delay must be < 20 ms, but longer than the start delay
● Telegram runtime:
Transmission time of the response telegram sent from the slave
Telegram monitoring of the converter
The converter monitors the time between two requests of the master. Parameter p2040 defines
the permissible time in ms. If a time p2040 ≠ 0 is exceeded, then the converter interprets this
as telegram failure and responds with fault F01910.
150% of the residual runtime is the guide value for the setting of p2040, i.e. the telegram
runtime without taking into account the character delay times.
For communication via USS, the converter checks bit 10 of the received control word 1. If the
bit is not set when the motor is switched on ("Operation"), the converter responds with fault
F07220.
Parameters
Parameter Description Factory setting
p2040 Fieldbus interface monitoring time 1 000 ms
6.3.6.7 USS parameter channel
Structure of the parameter channel
Depending on the setting in p2023, the parameter channel has a fixed length of three or four
words, or a variable length, depending on the length of the data to be transferred.
1. and 2nd word contain the parameter number and index as well as the type of job (read or
write). The other words of the parameter channel contain parameter contents. The parameter
contents can be 8-bit values, 16-bit values (such as baud rate) or 32-bit values (e.g. CO
parameters). The parameter contents are entered right justified in the word with the highest
number. Words that are not required are assigned 0.
Bit 11 in the 1st word is reserved and is always assigned 0.
The diagram shows a parameter channel that is four words long.
SINAMICS G120X converter
268 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.( VWZRUG ,1' QGZRUG 3:( UGDQGWKZRUG
$. 6 318 3DJHLQGH[ 6XELQGH[ 3:(+LJK:RUG 3:(/RZ:RUG
3
0
You can find examples of telegrams at the end of this section.
Function description
AK: Request and response ID
Table 6-67 Request identifiers, control → converter
AK Description Response identifier
positive negative
0 No request 0 7/8
1 Request parameter value 1/2 7/8
2 Change parameter value (word) 1 7/8
3 Change parameter value (double word) 2 7/8
4 Request descriptive element 1) 3 7/8
6 2) Request parameter value (field) 1) 4/5 7/8
7 2) Change parameter value (field, word) 1) 4 7/8
8 2)
Change parameter value (field, double word) 1)
5 7/8
9 Request number of field elements 6 7/8
1)
The required element of the parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
2)
The following request IDs are identical: 1 ≡ 6, 2 ≡ 7 and 3 ≡ 8.
We recommend that you use identifiers 6, 7 and 8.
Table 6-68 Response identifiers, converter → control
AK Description
0 No response
1 Transfer parameter value (word)
2 Transfer parameter value (double word)
3 Transfer descriptive element 1)
4 Transfer parameter value (field, word) 2)
5 Transfer parameter value (field, double word) 2)
6 Transfer number of field elements
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 269
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
AK Description
7 Converter cannot process the request.
In the most significant word of the parameter channel, the converter sends an error number
to the control, refer to the following table.
8 No master controller status / no authorization to change parameters of the parameter channel
interface
1)
The required element of the parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
2)
The required element of the indexed parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
Table 6-69 Error numbers for response identifier 7
No. Description
00 hex Illegal parameter number (access to a parameter that does not exist)
01 hex Parameter value cannot be changed (change request for a parameter value that cannot be
changed)
02 hex Lower or upper value limit exceeded (change request with a value outside the value limits)
03 hex Incorrect subindex (access to a subindex that does not exist)
04 hex No array (access with a subindex to non-indexed parameters)
05 hex Incorrect data type (change request with a value that does not match the data type of the
parameter)
06 hex Setting not permitted, only resetting (change request with a value not equal to 0 without
permission)
07 hex Descriptive element cannot be changed (change request to a descriptive element error value
that cannot be changed)
0B hex No master control (change request but with no master control, see also p0927.)
0C hex Keyword missing
11 hex Request cannot be executed due to the operating state (access is not possible for temporary
reasons that are not specified)
14 hex Inadmissible value (change request with a value that is within the limits but which is illegal for
other permanent reasons, i.e. a parameter with defined individual values)
65 hex Parameter number is currently deactivated (depending on the mode of the converter)
66 hex Channel width is insufficient (communication channel is too small for response)
68 hex Illegal parameter value (parameter can only assume certain values)
6A hex Request not included / task is not supported (the valid request identifications can be found
in table "Request identifications controller → converter")
6B hex No change access for a controller that is enabled. (The operating state of the conerter
prevents a parameter change)
86 hex Write access only for commissioning (p0010 = 15) (operating state of the converter prevents
a parameter change)
87 hex Know-how protection active, access locked
C8 hex Change request below the currently valid limit (change request to a value that lies within the
"absolute" limits, but is however below the currently valid lower limit)
C9 hex Change request above the currently valid limit (example: a parameter value is too large for
the converter power)
CC hex Change request not permitted (change is not permitted as the access code is not available)
SINAMICS G120X converter
270 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
PNU (parameter number) and page index
Parameter number PNU Page index
0000 … 1999 0000 … 1999 0 hex
2000 … 3999 0000 … 1999 80 hex
6000 … 7999 0000 … 1999 90 hex
8000 … 9999 0000 … 1999 20 hex
10000 … 11999 0000 … 1999 A0 hex
20000 … 21999 0000 … 1999 50 hex
30000 … 31999 0000 … 1999 F0 hex
60000 … 61999 0000 … 1999 74 hex
Subindex
For indexed parameters, the parameter index is located in subindex as hexadecimal value.
PWE: Parameter value or connector
Parameter values or connectors can be located in the PWE.
Table 6-70 Parameter value or connector
PWE 1 PWE 2
Parameter value Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 8 Bit 7 … 0
0 0 8-bit value
0 16-bit value
32-bit value
Connector Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 10 Bit 9 … 0
Number of the connector 3F hex The index or bit field
number of the connec‐
tor
Examples
Read request: Read out serial number of the Power Module (p7841[2])
To obtain the value of the indexed parameter p7841, you must fill the telegram of the parameter
channel with the following data:
● PKE, Bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 6 (request parameter value (field))
● PKE, Bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 1841 (parameter number without offset)
Parameter number = PNU + offset (page index)
(7841 = 1841 + 6000)
● IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 2 (index of parameter)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 271
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
● IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 90 hex (offset 6000 corresponds to 90 hex)
● Because you want to read the parameter value, words 3 and 4 in the parameter channel for
requesting the parameter value are irrelevant. They should be assigned a value of 0, for
example.
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.(VWZRUG ,1'QGZRUG 3:(KLJKUGZRUG 3:(ORZWKZRUG
$. 3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU 6XELQGH[ 3DJHLQGH[ 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH 'ULYHREMHFW ,QGH[
Figure 6-23 Telegram for a read request from p7841[2]
Parameter number
Parameter numbers < 2000 PNU = parameter number.
Write the parameter number into the PNU (PKE bit 10 ... 0).
Parameter numbers ≥ 2000 PNU = parameter number - offset.
Write the parameter number minus the offset into the PNU
(PKE bit 10 … 0).
Write the offset in the page index (IND bit 15 … 8).
Table 6-71 Offset and page index of the parameter numbers
Parameter number Offset Page index
Hex Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
0000 … 1999 0 0 hex 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2000 … 3999 2000 80 hex 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6000 … 7999 6000 90 hex 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
8000 … 9999 8000 20 hex 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
10000 … 11999 10000 A0 hex 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
20000 … 21999 20000 50 hex 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
30000 … 31999 30000 F0 hex 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
60000 … 61999 60000 74 hex 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0
Indexed parameters
For indexed parameters, you must write the index as hex value into the subindex (IND
bit 7 … 0).
SINAMICS G120X converter
272 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Parameter contents
Parameter contents can be parameter values or connector parameters. You require two words
for connector parameters. You can find more information on interconnecting connector
parameters in the operating instructions of the Control Unit in the section "Interconnecting
signals in the converter".
Enter the parameter value in the parameter channel right-justified as follows:
● 8-bit values: Low word, bits bits 8 … 15 are zero.
0 … 7,
● 16-bit values: Low word, bits 0 … 15,
● 32-bit values: Low word and high word
Enter a connector parameter right-justified as follows:
● Number of the connector parameter: High word
● Drive object of the connector parameter: Low word, bits 10 … 15
● The index or bit field number of the connector parameter: Low word, bits 0 … 9
Telegram examples, length of the parameter channel = 4
Read request: Read out serial number of the Power Module (p7841[2])
To obtain the value of the indexed parameter p7841, you must fill the telegram of the parameter
channel with the following data:
● PKE, bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 6 (request parameter value (field))
● PKE, bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 1841 (parameter number without offset)
Parameter number = PNU + offset (page index)
(7841 = 1841 + 6000)
● IND, bit 8 … 15 (page index): = 90 hex (offset 6000 corresponds to 90 hex)
● IND, bit 0 … 7 (subindex): = 2 (index of parameter)
● Because you want to read the parameter value, words 3 and 4 in the parameter channel for
requesting the parameter value are irrelevant. They should be assigned a value of 0, for
example.
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.( VWZRUG ,1'QGZRUG 3:(KLJKUGZRUG 3:(ORZWKZRUG
$. 3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU 3DJHLQGH[ 6XELQGH[ 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH 'ULYH2EMHFW ,QGH[
Figure 6-24 Telegram for a read request from p7841[2]
Write request: Changing the automatic restart mode (p1210)
Parameter p1210 defines the automatic restart mode:
● PKE, bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 7 (change parameter value (field, word))
● PKE, bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 4BA hex (1210 = 4BA hex, no offset, as 1210 < 1999)
● IND, bit 8 … 15 (page index): = 0 hex (offset 0 corresponds to 0 hex)
● IND, bit 0 … 7 (subindex): = 0 hex (parameter is not indexed)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 273
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
● PWE1, bit 0 … 15: = 0 hex
● PWE2, bit 0 … 15: = 1A hex (26 = 1A hex)
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.(VWZRUG ,1'QGZRUG 3:(KLJKUGZRUG 3:(ORZWKZRUG
$. 3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU 3DJHLQGH[ 6XELQGH[ 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH ELW 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH ELW
Figure 6-25 Telegram, to activate the automatic restart with p1210 = 26
Write request: Assign digital input 2 with the function ON/OFF1 (p0840[1] = 722.2)
In order to link digital input 2 with ON/OFF1, you must assign parameter p0840[1] (source, ON/
OFF1) the value 722.2 (DI 2). To do this, you must fill the telegram of the parameter channel as
follows:
● PKE, bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 7 hex (change parameter value (field, word))
● PKE, bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 348 hex (840 = 348 hex, no offset, as 840 < 1999)
● IND, bit 8 … 15 (page index): = 0 hex (offset 0 corresponds to 0 hex)
● IND, bit 0 … 7 (subindex): = 1 hex (command data set CDS1 = index1)
● PWE1, bit 0 … 15: = 2D2 hex (722 = 2D2 hex)
● PWE2, bit 10 … 15: = 3f hex (drive object - for SINAMICS G120 always 63 = 3f hex)
● PWE2, bit 0 … 9: = 2 hex (index or bit number of the parameter: DI 2 = r0722.2)
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.(VWZRUG ,1'QGZRUG 3:(KLJKUGZRUG 3:(ORZWKZRUG
$. 3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU 3DJHLQGH[ 6XELQGH[ 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH 'ULYH2EMHFW ,QGH[
Figure 6-26 Telegram, to assign DI 2 with ON/OFF1
6.3.7 Drive control via BACnet MS/TP
6.3.7.1 BACnet properties
Function description
In BACnet, components and systems are considered to be black boxes which contain a number
of objects. BACnet objects only stipulate the behavior outside the device, BACnet sets no
internal functions.
A range of object types and their instances represent one component.
Each BACnet device has precisely one BACnet device object. An NSAP (Network Service
Access Point - comprising network number and MAC address; MAC: Medium Access Control)
uniquely identifies a BACnet device. This address is BACnet-specific and must not be confused
with the Ethernet MAC address.
SINAMICS G120X converter
274 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Data exchange with the client
The converter receives control commands and setpoints via service instructions from the
control and transmits its status back to the control. The converter can also send telegrams
automatically itself, respectively execute services, e.g. COV_Notification.
The converter supports Unicode, coded with character set UTF-8
Further information
The Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) is available on the Internet:
PICS (http://www.big-eu.org/uploads/tx_teproddb/catalog_pdf/
PICS_CU230P-2_HVAC_v47_SP3.docx)
6.3.7.2 Activating communication via fieldbus
Function description
Procedure
Proceed as follows to activate communication via BACnet MS/TP:
1. Start quick commissioning.
Quick commissioning using the BOP-2 operator panel (Page 159)
2. In the first steps of the quick commissioning, confirm all of the values that have already been
set.
3. Select the default setting 54: "USS control".
Default setting of the interfaces (macros) (Page 107)
4. In the next steps of the quick commissioning, confirm all additional values that have already
been set.
5. Exit quick commissioning.
6. Set p2030 = 5
You have activated communication via BACnet MS/TP.
❒
ON/OFF commands via BACnet
Selecting the macro 54 has the following effect:
● Only the ON/OFF2 command is possible via the terminal strip.
● The higher-level controller cannot turn the motor on or off.
To turn the motor on and off via the higher-level controller, you need to manually interconnect
the ON/OFF1 and OFF2 commands with the PROFIdrive control word:
● Set p0840[0] = r2090.0
● Set p0844[0] = r2090.1
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 275
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.7.3 Setting the address
Function description
Procedure
1. Using parameter p2021, set the address using an operator panel or SINAMICS G120 Smart
Access.
Permissible addresses: 0 … 127.
2. Switch off the converter power supply.
3. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
4. Switch on the converter power supply again.
Your settings become active after switching on.
You have set the bus address.
❒
Parameters
Parameter Description Factory setting
p2021 Fieldbus interface address 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
276 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.7.4 Parameters for setting communication via BACnet
General settings
Processing times p2024[0 … 2]
p2024[0]: 0 ms … 10000 ms, maximum processing time (APDU timeout), factory setting =
6000 ms,
p2024 [1 … 2]: Irrelevant
BACnet communication parameter p2025[0 … 3]
● p2025 [0]: 0 … 4194303: Device object instance number,
Factory setting = 1
● p2025 [1]: 1 … 10: Maximum Info Frames, factory setting = 5
● p2025 [2]: 0 … 39: Number of APDU Retries (repeated attempts after fault telegrams),
factory setting = 3
● p2025 [3]: 1 … 127: maximum master address, factory setting = 32
Setting the COV_Increments p2026[0 … 74]
(COV = change of values) 0 … 4194303.000, factory setting = 1. A maximum of 32 COVs are
permissible.
COV_Increment: Changes the value of the "present value" of an object instance for which the
server transfers an UnConfirmedCOV_Notification or ConfirmedCOV_Notification.
You can use these parameters to set the converter value changes for which an
UnConfirmedCOV_Notification or ConfirmedCOV_Notification result is sent.
The factory setting 1 means that the converter sends an UnConfirmedCOV_Notification or
ConfirmedCOV_Notification if the considered value, e.g. for a range of 0 … 10 V, changes by
an absolute value ≥ 1.
This requires an active SubscribeCOV_Service to send the relevant object instance.
You can also set the COV_Increment via the object property "COV_Increment" of the relevant
analog input, analog output or analog value.
BACnet language selection p2027
German/English - only becomes effective after power off/on
Fieldbus error statistics r2029
Displaying receive errors at the fieldbus interface
Device name - default setting, change, restore factory setting
The converter has a device name in BACnet that uniquely identifies the converter.
The device name is preset at initial power up. It has the following structure:
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 277
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6,1$0,&6* ;$%
1DPHRIWKH&RQWURO8QLW 6HULDOQXPEHURIWKH
&RQWURO8QLW
p7610[0…79] contains the device names in ASCII format.
Changing device names - procedure
1. Change the device name either in the converter or via the controller:
– Converter: Change p7610
– Controller: Change the "object-name" property via the Write Property Service
2. Switch off the converter power supply to activate the name.
3. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
4. Switch on the converter power supply again.
Your settings become active after switching on.
The device name is now changed.
❒
Restoring factory settings
The device name is retained when the factory settings are restored.
If you wish to reset the name to the factory setting, original value, proceed as described above
and set p7610[0] = 0.
Interconnecting analog outputs, restoring factory settings
If you set communication via BACnet, the converter switches its analog outputs with the
fieldbus.
The control then specifies the values which the converter outputs via its analog outputs.
To display a converter-specific value, you must change the interconnection of the analog
output.
Examples:
● AO 0 should display the value which the control specifies in the ANALOG OUTPUT 0 object.
In this particular case, no other settings are required in the converter.
● AO 1 should display the smoothed current actual value of the converter (r0027 smoothed
current actual value).
Interconnect p0771[1] with r0027: p0771[1] = 27
In this case, write access via the object ANALOG OUTPUT 1 results in an error message in
the control.
Reset to the factory setting for BACnet
When restoring the factory setting, the converter again uses the fieldbus to switch its analog
outputs.
SINAMICS G120X converter
278 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.7.5 Supported services and objects
BIBBs used by the converter
The BIBBs (BIBB: BACnet Interoperability Building Block) are a collection of one or several
BACnet services. BACnet services are subdivided into A and B devices. An A device operates
as client and a B device as server.
The converter is a server and therefore operates as B device, as "BACnet Application Specific
Controller" (B-ASC).
It uses the following executed BIBBs.
Overview of the BIBB used and the associated services
Short designation BIBB Service
DS-RP-B Data Sharing-ReadProperty-B ReadProperty
DS-RPM-B Data Sharing-ReadMultipleProperty-B ReadPropertyMultiple
DS-WP-B Data Sharing-WriteProperty-B WriteProperty
DM-DDB-B Device Management-Dynamic Device ● Who-Is
Binding-B ● I-Am
DM-DOB-B Device Management-Dynamic Object ● Who-Has
Binding-B ● I-Have
DM-DCC-B Device Management-DeviceCommuni‐ DeviceCommunicationControl
cationControl-B
DS-COV-B Data Sharing-COV-B ● SubscribeCOV,
● ConfirmedCOVNotification,
● UnConfirmedCOVNotification
The converter can simultaneously process up to 32 SubscribeCOV services. These can all
refer to the same object instances - or different object instances.
SubscribeCOV monitors the property changes of the following objects:
● Analog Input AI…
● Analog Output AO…
● Analog Value AV…
● Binary Value BV…
● Multi-State Input MSI…
Note
SubscribeCOV services are not retentive; i.e. the master must re-initiate the SubscribeCOV
services when restarting the converter.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 279
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Object types in BACnet
Object type Code digit Object type Code digit
Device Object 8 Analog Output AO… 1
Binary Input BI… 3 Analog Value AV… 2
Binary Output BO… 4 Multi-State Input MSI… 13
Binary Value BV… 5 Octet String Values 47
Analog Input AI… 0
Object properties of the "Device" object type
● Object_Identifier ● Application_Software_Version ● APDU_Timeout
● Object_Name ● Protocol_Version ● Number_Of_APDU_Retries
● Object_Type ● Protocol_Revision ● Max Master
● System_Status ● Protocol_Services_Supported ● Max Info Frames
● Vendor_Name ● Protocol_Object_Types_Supported ● Device Address Binding
● Vendor_Identifier ● Object_List ● Database Revision
● Model_Name ● Max_APDU_Length_Accepted 1)
● Firmware_Revision ● Segmentation_Supported 2)
1)
Length = 480, 2) not supported
Properties of the other object types
Property Object type
Binary In‐ Binary Out‐ Binary Val‐ Analog In‐ Analog Analog Multi-State Octet
put BI… put BO… ue BV… put AI… Output Value Input String val‐
AO… AV… MSI… ues
Object_Identifier X X X X X X X X
Object_Name X X X X X X X X
Object_Type X X X X X X X X
Present_Value X X X X X X X X
Description X X X X X X X
Status_Flags X X X X X X X X
Event_State X X X X X X X
Out_Of_Service X X X X X X X
Units X X X
Priority_Array X X 1) X X 1)
Relinquish_De‐ X X 1) X X 1)
fault
Polarity X X
Active_Text X X X
Inactive_Text X X X
COV_Increment X X X
SINAMICS G120X converter
280 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Property Object type
Binary In‐ Binary Out‐ Binary Val‐ Analog In‐ Analog Analog Multi-State Octet
put BI… put BO… ue BV… put AI… Output Value Input String val‐
AO… AV… MSI… ues
State_Text X
Num‐ X
ber_of_States
1)
Only for access type C: Commandable
Binary Input BI…
In‐ Object name Description Possible val‐ Text active / Access Parameter
stance ues text inactive type 1)
ID
BI0 DI0 ACT Status DI 0 ON/OFF ON/OFF R r0722.0
BI1 DI1 ACT Status DI 1 ON/OFF ON/OFF R r0722.1
BI2 DI2 ACT Status DI 2 ON/OFF ON/OFF R r0722.2
BI3 DI3 ACT Status DI 3 ON/OFF ON/OFF R r0722.3
BI4 DI4 ACT Status DI 4 ON/OFF ON/OFF R r0722.4
BI5 DI5 ACT Status DI 5 ON/OFF ON/OFF R r0722.5
BI6 DI6 ACT Status DI 6 ON/OFF ON/OFF R r0722.6
BI7 DI7 ACT Status DI 7 ON/OFF ON/OFF R r0722.7
BI8 DI7 ACT Status AI 0 - used as DI 11 ON/OFF ON/OFF R r0722.11
BI9 DI8 ACT Status AI 1 - used as DI 12 ON/OFF ON/OFF R r0722.12
BI10 DO0 ACT Status DO 0 (relay 1) ON/OFF ON/OFF R read r747.0
BI11 DO1 ACT Status DO 1 (relay 2) ON/OFF ON/OFF R read r747.1
BI12 DO2 ACT Status DO 2 (relay 3) ON/OFF ON/OFF R read r747.2
BI13 DO3 ACT Status DO 3 (relay 2) ON/OFF ON/OFF R read r747.3
BI14 DO4 ACT Status DO 4 (relay 3) ON/OFF ON/OFF R read r747.4
1)
R: Readable
Binary Output BO…
Instance Object name Description Possible val‐ Text active / Access Parameter
ID ues text inactive type 1)
BO0 DO0 CMD Controls DO 0 (relay 1) ON/OFF ON/OFF C p0730
BO1 DO1 CMD Controls DO 1 (relay 2) ON/OFF ON/OFF C p0731
BO2 DO2 CMD Controls DO 2 (relay 3) ON/OFF ON/OFF C p0732
BO3 DO3 CMD Controls DO 3 (relay 4) ON/OFF ON/OFF C p0733
BO4 DO4 CMD Controls DO 4 (relay 5) ON/OFF ON/OFF C p0734
BO5 DO5 CMD Controls DO 5 (relay 6) ON/OFF ON/OFF C p0735
1)
C: Commandable
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 281
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Analog Input AI…
In‐ Object name Description Unit Range Access Parameter
stance type 1)
ID
AI0 ANALOG IN 0 Input signal AI0 V/mA converter-depend‐ R r0752[0]
ent
AI1 ANALOG IN 1 Input signal AI1 V/mA converter-depend‐ R r0752[1]
ent
AI2 ANALOG IN 2 Input signal AI2 V/mA converter-depend‐ R r0752[2]
ent
AI3 ANALOG IN 3 Input signal AI3 V/mA converter-depend‐ R r0752[3]
ent
AI10 AI 0 SCALED Scaled AI 0 input signal % converter-depend‐ R r0755[0]
ent
AI11 AIN 1 SCALED Scaled AI 1 input signal % converter-depend‐ R r0755[1]
ent
AI12 AIN 2 SCALED Scaled AI 2 input signal % converter-depend‐ R r0755[2]
ent
AI13 AIN 3 SCALED Scaled AI 3 input signal % converter-depend‐ R r0755[3]
ent
1)
R: Readable
Analog Output AO…
In‐ Object name Description Unit Range Access Parameter
stance type 1)
ID
AO0 ANALOG OUTPUT 0 Output signal AO 0 % converter-depend‐ C p0791[0]
ent
AO1 ANALOG OUTPUT 1 Output signal AO 1 % converter-depend‐ C p0791[1]
ent
AO2 ANALOG OUTPUT 2 Output signal AO 2 % converter-depend‐ C p0791[2]
ent
1)
C: Commandable
Binary Value BV…
Instance Object name Description Possible values Text ac‐ Text in‐ Ac‐ Parameter
ID tive active cess
type 1)
BV0 RUN / STOP Converter status regardless of com‐ RUN / STOP STOP RUN R r0052.2
ACT mand source
BV1 FWD / REV Direction of rotation regardless of REV / FWD FWD REV R r0052.14
command source
BV2 FAULT ACT Converter fault FAULT / OK FAULT OK R r0052.3
BV3 WARN ACT Converter warning WARN / OK WARN OK R r0052.7
SINAMICS G120X converter
282 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Instance Object name Description Possible values Text ac‐ Text in‐ Ac‐ Parameter
ID tive active cess
type 1)
BV4 MANUAL / Source of Manual/Auto converter AUTO / MAN‐ AUTO LOCAL R r0052.9
AUTO ACT control UAL
BV6 1) MAINT REQ Maintenance required MAINT/OK MAINT OK R reserved
BV7 CTL OVER‐ Control of the converter from the ON/OFF 0 1 R r2032[10]
RIDE ACT BACnet override control via BV93
The "Manual" mode of the operator
panel has a higher priority than the
BACnet override control.
BV8 AT SET- Setpoint reached YES / NO YES NO R r0052.8
POINT
BV9 AT MAX Maximum speed reached YES / NO YES NO R r0052.10
FREQ
BV10 DRIVE Converter ready YES / NO YES NO R r0052.1
READY
BV15 RUN COM Status of the ON command, regard‐ YES / NO 0 1 R r2032[0]
ACT less of the source
BV16 HIB MOD Energy saving mode is active ON/OFF 0 1 R r2399[1]
ACT
BV17 ESM MOD Essential service mode is active ON/OFF 0 1 R r3889[0]
BV20 RUN / STOP ON command for the converter RUN / STOP 0 1 C r0054.0
CMD (when controlling via BACnet)
BV21 FWD / REV Reverse direction of rotation (when REV / FWD 0 1 C r0054.11
CMD controlling via BACnet)
BV22 FAULT RE‐ Acknowledge fault (when controlling RESET / NO 0 1 C r0054.7
SET via BACnet)
BV24 CDS Changeover drive control Local / Remote YES NO C r0054.15
BV26 RUN ENA Enable converter operation ENA‐ DISA‐ C r0054.3
CMD BLED BLED
BV27 OFF2 Status OFF2 RUN / STOP 0 1 C r0054.1
BV28 OFF3 Status OFF3 RUN / STOP 0 1 C r0054.2
BV28 sets the r0054.4, r0054.5, and
r0054.6 bits
BV50 ENABLE PID Enable technology controller ENABLED / DIS‐ ENA‐ DISA‐ C p2200
ABLED BLED BLED
BV51 ENABLE Enable technology controller 0 ENABLED / DIS‐ ENA‐ DISA‐ C p11000
PID 0 ABLED BLED BLED
BV52 ENABLE Enable technology controller 1 ENABLED / DIS‐ ENA‐ DISA‐ C p11100
PID 1 ABLED BLED BLED
BV53 ENABLE Enable technology controller 2 ENABLED / DIS‐ ENA‐ DISA‐ C p11200
PID 2 ABLED BLED BLED
BV90 LOCAL Use MANUAL (operator panel) to LOCK UN‐ C p0806
LOCK lock converter control LOCK
BV91 2) LOCK PAN‐ Interlocking for operator panel and LOCK/UNLO 0 1 W reserved
EL parameter changes
BV93 CTL OVER‐ Converter control using BACnet ON/OFF 0 1 C r0054.10
RIDE CMD override control
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 283
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
1)
C: Commandable, R: Readable, W: Writable
2)
reserved for future functional expansions
Analog Value AV…
In‐ Object name Description Unit Range Access Parameter
stance type 1)
ID
AV0 Output frequency (Hz) Hz converter-depend‐ R r0024
OUT FREQ HZ ent
AV1 OUT FREQ PCT Output frequency (%) % converter-depend‐ R HIW
ent
AV2 OUTPUT SPEED Motor speed RPM converter-depend‐ R r0022
ent
AV3 DC BUS VOLT DC-link voltage. V converter-depend‐ R r0026
ent
AV4 OUTPUT VOLT Output voltage V converter-depend‐ R r0025
ent
AV5 CURRENT Motor current A converter-depend‐ R r0027
ent
AV6 TORQUE Motor torque Nm converter-depend‐ R r0031
ent
AV7 POWER Motor power kW converter-depend‐ R r0032
ent
AV8 DRIVE TEMP Heat sink temperature °C converter-depend‐ R r0037
ent
AV9 Measured or calculated motor °C converter-depend‐ R r0035
MOTOR TEMP temperature ent
AV10 Cumulative converter energy kWh converter-depend‐ R r0039
KWH NR consumption (cannot be reset!) ent
AV12 Motor's operating hours (is reset h 0 … 4294967295 W p0650
INV RUN TIME by entering "0")
AV13 Code number of Power Module --- converter-depend‐ R r0200
INV Model ent
AV14 Firmware version --- converter-depend‐ R r0018
INV FW VER ent
AV15 INV POWER Rated power of the converter kW converter-depend‐ R r0206
ent
AV16 SPEED Reference speed of the convert‐ RPM 6.0 … 210000 W p2000
STPT 1 er
AV17 FREQ SP PCT Setpoint 1 (when controlling via % -199.99 … 199.99 C HSW
BACnet)
AV18 ACT FAULT Number of the fault due to be --- converter-depend‐ R r0947[0]
dealt with ent
AV19 PREV FAULT 1 Number of the last fault --- converter-depend‐ R r0947[1]
ent
AV20 PREV FAULT 2 Number of the fault before last --- converter-depend‐ R r0947[2]
ent
SINAMICS G120X converter
284 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
In‐ Object name Description Unit Range Access Parameter
stance type 1)
ID
AV21 PREV FAULT 3 Number of the fault third from last --- converter-depend‐ R r0947[3]
ent
AV22 PREV FAULT 4 Number of the fault fourth from --- converter-depend‐ R r0947[4]
last ent
AV25 SEL STPT Command to select the setpoint --- 0 … 32767 W p1000
source
AV28 AO1 ACT Signal from AO 1 mA converter-depend‐ R r0774.0
ent
AV29 AO2 ACT Signal from AO 1 mA converter-depend‐ R r0774.1
ent
AV30 MIN Speed Minimum speed RPM 0.000 – 19500.000 W p1080
AV31 MAX Speed Maximum speed RPM 0.000 … 210000.00 W p1082
0
AV32 ACCEL TIME Ramp-up time s 0.00 … 999999.0 W p1120
AV33 DECEL TIME Ramp-down time s 0.00 … 999999.0 W p1121
AV34 Current limit A converter-depend‐ R p0640
CUR LIM ent
AV39 ACT WARN Indication of a pending alarm --- converter-depend‐ R r2110[0]
ent
AV40 PREV WARN 1 Indication of the last alarm --- converter-depend‐ R r2110[1]
ent
AV41 PREV WARN 2 Indication of the last but one --- converter-depend‐ R r2110[2]
alarm ent
AV5000 RAMP UP TIME Technology controller ramp-up s 0 … 650 W p2257
time
AV5001 RAMP DOWN TIME Technology controller ramp- s 0 … 650 W p2258
down time
AV5002 Technology controller actual val‐ s 0 … 60 W p2265
FILTER TIME ue filter time constant
AV5003 DIFF TIME Technology controller differentia‐ s 0 … 60 W p2274
tion time constant
AV5004 PROP GAIN Technology controller propor‐ s 0 … 1000 W p2280
tional gain
AV5005 INTEG TIME Technology controller integral s 0 … 1000 W p2285
time
AV5006 OUTPUT MAX Technology controller maximum % - 200 … 200 W p2291
limiting
AV5007 OUTPUT MIN Technology controller minimum % - 200 … 200 W p2292
limiting
AV5100 RAMP UP TIME 0 Technology controller 0 ramp-up s 0 … 650 W p11057
time
AV5101 RAMP DOWN TIME 0 Technology controller 0 ramp- s 0 … 650 W p11058
down time
AV5102 FILTER TIME 0 Technology controller 0 actual s 0 … 60 W p11065
value filter time constant
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 285
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
In‐ Object name Description Unit Range Access Parameter
stance type 1)
ID
AV5103 DIFF TIME 0 Technology controller 0 differen‐ s 0 … 60 W p11074
tiation time constant
AV5104 Technology controller 0 propor‐ s 0 … 1000 W p11080
PROP GAIN 0 tional gain
AV5105 INTEG TIME 0 Technology controller 0 integral s 0 … 1000 W p11085
time
AV5106 OUTPUT MAX 0 Technology controller 0 maxi‐ % - 200 … 200 W p11091
mum limiting
AV5107 OUTPUT MIN 0 Technology controller 0 mini‐ % - 200 … 200 W p11092
mum limiting
AV5200 RAMP UP TIME 1 Technology controller 1 ramp-up s 0 … 650 W p11157
time
AV5201 RAMP DOWN TIME 1 Technology controller 1 ramp- s 0 … 650 W p11158
down time
AV5202 FILTER TIME 1 Technology controller 1 actual s 0 … 60 W p11165
value filter time constant
AV5203 DIFF TIME 1 Technology controller 1 differen‐ s 0 … 60 W p11174
tiation time constant
AV5204 PROP GAIN 1 Technology controller 1 propor‐ s 0 … 1000 W p11180
tional gain
AV5205 INTEG TIME 1 Technology controller integral s 0 … 1000 W p11185
time
AV5206 OUTPUT MAX 1 Technology controller 1 maxi‐ % - 200 … 200 W p11191
mum limiting
AV5207 Technology controller 1 mini‐ % - 200 … 200 W p11192
OUTPUT MIN 1 mum limiting
AV5300 RAMP UP TIME 2 Technology controller 2 ramp-up s 0 … 650 W p11257
time
AV5301 RAMP DOWN TIME 2 Technology controller 2 ramp- s 0 … 650 W p11258
down time
AV5302 FILTER TIME 2 Technology controller 2 actual s 0 … 60 W p11265
value filter time constant
AV5303 DIFF TIME 2 Technology controller 2 differen‐ s 0 … 60 W p11274
tiation time constants
AV5304 PROP GAIN 2 Technology controller 2 propor‐ s 0 … 1000 W p11280
tional gain
AV5305 INTEG TIME 2 Technology controller 2 integral s 0 … 1000 W p11285
time
AV5306 OUTPUT MAX 2 Technology controller 2 maxi‐ % - 200 … 200 W p11291
mum limiting
AV5307 Technology controller 2 mini‐ % - 200 … 200 W p11292
OUTPUT MIN 2 mum limiting
1)
C: Commandable, R: Readable, W: Writable
SINAMICS G120X converter
286 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Multi-State Input MSI…
Instance Object name Description Possible values Access type Parameter
ID
MSI0 FAULT_1 Fault number 1 See "List of fault codes R r0947[0]
MSI1 FAULT_2 Fault number 2 and alarm codes" R r0947[1]
MSI2 FAULT_3 Fault number 3 R r0947[2]
MSI3 FAULT_4 Fault number 4 R r0947[3]
MSI4 FAULT_5 Fault number 5 R r0947[4]
MSI5 FAULT_6 Fault number 6 R r0947[5]
MSI6 FAULT_7 Fault number 7 R r0947[6]
MSI7 FAULT_8 Fault number 8 R r0947[7]
MSI8 WARNING_1 Warning number 1 R r2110[0]
MS9 WARNING_2 Warning number 2 R r2110[1]
MSI10 WARNING_3 Warning number 3 R r2110[2]
MSI11 WARNING_4 Warning number 4 R r2110[3]
MSI12 WARNING_5 Warning number 5 R r2110[4]
MSI13 WARNING_6 Warning number 6 R r2110[5]
MSI14 WARNING_7 Warning number 7 R r2110[6]
MSI15 WARNING_8 Warning number 8 R r2110[7]
1)
R: Readable
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 287
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.7.6 Acyclic communication (general parameter access) via BACnet
Acyclic communication or general parameter access is realized via BACnet objects DS47IN
and DS47OUT.
Acyclic communication uses the octet string value objects OSV0 and OSV1.
Instance ID Object name Description Access type
OSV0 DS47IN Maximum length 242, of which two bytes header, 240 bytes W
OSV1 DS47OUT user data R
The OSV are structured as follows:
Function Request length User data
Code
2F (1 Byte) (1 byte) Maximum 240 bytes
Write parameter request with OSV0 and read with OSV1
To read parameter r0002 write the following values into the present value window of OSV0
Table 6-72 Write parameter request via OSV0
Byte Description
2F h 1 Function code 2F h (47),
0A h 2 Request length 10 bytes (0A h)
80 h 3 Request reference = 80 h
01 h 4 Request identifier = 1 h
01 h 5 DO-Id = 1
01 h 6 Number of parameters = 1
10 h 7 Attribute
01 h 8 Number of elements = 1
0002 h 9,10 Parameter number = 2
0000 h 11,12 Subindex = 0
If the request was successfully processed, then you can read out the response precisely once
from the present value window of the OSV1:
Table 6-73 Read parameter content via OSV1
Byte Description
2F h 1 Function code 2F h (47)
08 h 2 Response length 8 bytes
80 h 3 Request reference = 80 h
01 h 4 Request identifier = 1 h
01 h 5 DO-Id = 1
01 h 6 Number of parameters = 1
10 h 7 Format
01 h 8 Number of elements = 1
001F h 9,10 Parameter value 1F h = 31
SINAMICS G120X converter
288 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
If the response is still not available, then you receive the following message via the present
value window of the OSV1:
Table 6-74 Read parameter content via OSV1
Byte Description
2F h 1 Function code 2F h (47)
00 h 2 Response length 0 (error)
0004 h 3,4 Error code 4 h (response still not available)
If you wish to read the response once more, then you obtain the following message via the
present value window of the OSV1:
Table 6-75 Read parameter content again via OSV1
Byte Description
2F h 1 Function code 2F h (47)
00 h 2 response length 0 (error)
0002 h 3,4 Error code 2 h (Invalid State)
Overview of the error codes
1 h: Invalid Length (invalid length)
2 h: Invalid State (action is not permitted in the actual converter state)
3 h: Invalid function Code (FC = 2 hex)
4 h: Response not ready (the response has still not been issued)
5 h: Internal Error (general system error)
Incorrect access operations to parameters via data set 47 are logged in objects OSV0 and
OSV1.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 289
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.8 Jogging
Overview
The "Jog" function is typically used to temporarily move a motor using local control commands.
Requirement
The OFF1 command must be active. With an active ON command, the converter ignores the
commands "Jogging 1" and "Jogging 2".
Function description
5HDG\WRVZLWFKRQ
-RJJLQJ QRMRJJLQJ
2SHUDWLRQ
Commands "Jog 1" or "Jog 2" switch the motor on and off.
The commands are only active when the converter is in the "Ready for switching on" state.
-RJJLQJ
W
-RJJLQJ
W
0RWRUVSHHG
0D[LPXPVSHHG
S
6HWSRLQWMRJJLQJ
S
S S W
6HWSRLQWMRJJLQJ
S
Figure 6-27 Behavior of the motor when "jogging"
After switching on, the motor accelerates to the setpoint, jog 1 or setpoint, jog 2. The two
different setpoints can, for example, be assigned to motor clockwise and counter-clockwise
rotation.
When jogging, the same ramp-function generator is active as for the ON/OFF1 command.
Example
Parameter Description
p1055 = 722.0 Jogging bit 0: Select jogging 1 via digital input 0
p1056 = 722.1 Jogging bit 1: Select jogging 2 via digital input 1
SINAMICS G120X converter
290 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Parameter
Number Name Factory setting
p1055[C] BI: Jogging bit 0 Depending on the
converter
p1056[C] BI: Jogging bit 1 Depending on the
converter
p1058[D] Jogging 1 speed setpoint 150 rpm
p1059[D] Jogging 2 speed setpoint -150 rpm
p1082[D] Maximum speed 1500 rpm
p1110[C] BI: Inhibit negative direction Depending on the
converter
p1111[C] BI: Inhibit positive direction 0
p1113[C] BI: Setpoint inversion 0
p1120[D] Ramp-function generator ramp-up time Depending on the
converter
p1121[D] Ramp-function generator ramp-down time Depending on the
converter
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 291
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.9 Switching over the drive control (command data set)
Overview
Several applications require the option of switching over the master control to operate the
converter.
Example: The motor is to be operable either from a central control via the fieldbus or via the
local digital inputs of the converter.
Function description
Command data set (CDS)
This means that you can set the converter control in
various ways and toggle between the settings. For in‐
stance, as described above, the converter can either be
operated via a fieldbus or via its digital inputs.
&'6 The settings in the converter, which are assigned to a
specific master control, are called the command data
set.
&'6
You select the command data set using parameter p0810. To do this, you must interconnect
parameter p0810 with a control command of your choice, e.g. a digital input.
Changing the number of command data sets
1. Set p0010 = 15.
2. The number of command data sets is configured with p0170.
3. Set p0010 = 0.
You have changed the number of command data sets.
❒
Copying command data sets
1. Set p0809[0] to the number of the command data set whose settings you wish to copy
(source).
2. Set p0809[1] to the number of the command data set into which you wish to copy the
settings.
3. Set p0809[2] = 1
4. The converter sets p0809[2] = 0.
You have copied the settings of a command data set into another command data set.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
292 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Example
&RPPDQGGDWDVHW
'DWDIURP 3DUDPHWHULQGH[>@
WKH S>@
ILHOGEXV 212))
U
S>@
$FNQRZOHGJH
3=' U
3=' S>@
3=' &RQWUROE\
3=' U
3='
3/&
3=' S>@ 023ORZHU &'6
3='
3=' U
S &RQWUROOLQJ
6HOHFWFRPPDQGGDWDVHW
', U LQYHUWHU
&'6
IXQFWLRQV
&RPPDQGGDWDVHW
3DUDPHWHULQGH[>@
S>@
-RJ
', U
S>@
-RJ
', U
S>@
$FNQRZOHGJH
', U
&'6
The converter evaluates its control commands depending on digital input DI 3:
● Via a fieldbus from a central control system
● Via the converter digital inputs at the installation.
Note
The converter requires approx. 4 ms to switch over the command data set.
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter 1
r0050 CO/BO: Command data set CDS effective -
p0170 Number of command data sets (CDS) 2
p0809[0 … 2] Copy command data set CDS 0
p0810 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 0 Dependent on the
converter
p0811 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 1 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 293
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
6.3.10 Selecting physical units
6.3.10.1 Motor standard
Selection options and parameters involved
The converter represents the motor data corresponding to motor standard IEC or NEMA in
different system units: SI units or US units.
Table 6-76 Parameters involved when selecting the motor standard
Parame‐ Designation Motor standard IEC/NEMA, p0100 =
ter 01)
1 2
IEC motor NEMA motor NEMA motor
50 Hz, SI units 60 Hz, US units 60 Hz, SI units
r0206 Power Module rated power kW hp kW
p0307 Rated motor power kW hp kW
p0316 Motor torque constant Nm/A lbf ft/A Nm/A
r0333 Rated motor torque Nm lbf ft Nm
p0341 Motor moment of inertia kgm 2
lb ft 2
kgm2
p0344 Motor weight kg Lb kg
r0394 Rated motor power kW hp kW
r1493 Total moment of inertia, scaled kgm 2
lb ft 2
kgm2
1)
Factory setting
It is only possible to change the motor standard during quick commissioning.
6.3.10.2 Unit system
Some physical units depend on the system of units selected (SI or US), for example the power
[kW or hp] or the torque [Nm or lbf ft]. You can select in which system of units the converter
represents its physical values.
Options when selecting the system of units
The following options apply when selecting the system of units:
● p0505 = 1: System of units SI (factory setting)
Torque [Nm], power [kW], temperature [°C or K]
● p0505 = 2: Referred system of units/SI
Represented as [%]
● p0505 = 3: US system of units
Torque [lbf ft], power [hp], temperature [°F]
● p0505 = 4: System of units, referred/US
Represented as [%]
SINAMICS G120X converter
294 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Special features
The values for p0505 = 2 and for p0505 = 4 - represented in the converter - are identical.
However, the reference to SI or US units is required for internal calculations and to output
physical variables.
For variables, which cannot be represented as [%], then the following applies:
● p0505 = 1 corresponds to setting p0505 = 2
● p0505 = 3 corresponds to setting p0505 = 4
In the case of variables whose units are identical in the SI system and US system, and which
can be displayed as a percentage, the following applies:
● p0505 = 1 corresponds to setting p0505 = 3
● p0505 = 2 corresponds to setting p0505 = 4
Reference variables
There is a reference variable in the converter for most parameters with physical units. When the
referred representation [%] is set, then the converter scales the physical variables based on the
particular reference variable.
When the reference variable changes, then the significance of the scaled value also changes.
Example:
● Reference speed = 1500 rpm → fixed speed = 80 % corresponds to the speed = 1200 rpm
● Reference speed = 3000 rpm → fixed speed = 80 % corresponds to the speed = 2400 rpm
For each parameter you can find the associated reference variable for scaling in the parameter
list. Example: r0065 is scaled with reference variable p2000.
If scaling is not specified in the parameter list, then the converter always shows/displays the
parameter unscaled.
Groups of units
The parameters associated with the selection of a physical unit, belong to different groups of
units.
For each parameter you can find the associated unit group for scaling in the parameter list.
Example: r0333 belongs to unit group 7_4.
An overview of the unit groups and the possible physical units can also be found in the
parameter list.
6.3.10.3 Technological unit of the technology controller
Options when selecting the technological unit
p0595 defines in which technological unit the input and output variables of the technology
controller are calculated, e.g. [bar], [m³/min] or [kg/h].
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 295
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Reference variable
p0596 defines the reference variable of the technological unit for the technology controller.
Unit group
Parameters involved with p0595 belong to unit group 9_1.
Additional information is provided in the parameter list.
Parameters (Page 467)
Special features
You must optimize the technology controller after changing p0595 or p0596.
Additional technology controllers
You can set the technological unit for each additional technology controller.
Technological Reference variable for the Unit group
unit technological unit
Additional technology controller 0 p11026 p11027 9_2
Additional technology controller 1 p11126 p11127 9_3
Additional technology controller 2 p11226 p11227 9_4
Additional information is provided in the parameter list.
6.3.11 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function
6.3.11.1 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function
Overview
6HOHFW
672
672LV
DFWLYH
The converter with active STO function prevents energy supply to the motor. The motor can no
longer generate torque on the motor shaft.
Consequently, the STO function prevents the starting of an electrically-driven machine
component.
SINAMICS G120X converter
296 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
The STO safety function conforms to IEC/EN 61800-5-2.
The STO function is defined in IEC/EN 61800-5-2:
"[…] [The converter] does not supply the motor with power that can generate a torque (or for a
linear motor, a force)".
Precondition
The machine manufacturer has already performed a risk assessment, e.g. in compliance with
EN ISO 1050, "Safety of machinery - Principles of risk assessment".
Function description
Safe Torque Off (STO) Standard converter functions linked with STO
1. The converter detects that STO has been selec‐ ---
ted via the failsafe digital input.
2. The converter prevents the energy supply to the If you use a motor holding brake, the converter
motor. closes the motor holding brake.
If you use a line contactor, the converter opens
the line contactor.
6HOHFW672 6HOHFW672
W W
6SHHG 6SHHG
W W
672LVDFWLYH 672LVDFWLYH
W W
$ %
Figure 6-28 Functionality of STO when the motor is at standstill (A) and rotating (B)
(A): When selecting STO, if the motor is already stationary (zero speed), then STO prevents the
motor from starting.
(B): If the motor is still rotating (B) when STO is selected, it coasts down to standstill.
Example
The STO function is suitable for applications where the motor is already at a standstill or will
come to a standstill in a short, safe period of time through friction.
When STO is active, the converter can no longer electrically brake the motor, so that STO does
not shorten the time that it takes for machine components to coast down to zero speed.
Application example Possible solution
When the EMERGENCY STOP button ● Connect the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton with the
is pressed, it is not permissible for a sta‐ failsafe converter digital input.
tionary motor to inadvertently acceler‐
● Select STO via the failsafe digital input.
ate.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 297
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
More information
EN 60204‑1 defines "EMERGENCY SWITCHING OFF" and "EMERGENCY STOP" as actions
taken in an emergency. Further, it defines various stop categories for EMERGENCY STOP.
"EMERGENCY SWITCHING OFF" and "EMERGENCY STOP" minimize different risks in the
system or machine.
Table 6-77 The distinction between EMERGENCY OFF and EMERGENCY STOP
Action: EMERGENCY SWITCHING OFF EMERGENCY STOP
Stop Category 0 according to
EN 60204‑1
Risk:
Electric shock Unexpected movement
Measure to minimize Switch off Prevent movement
risk: Either completely or partially switch off Prevent hazardous movement.
hazardous voltages.
Classic solution:
Switch off the drive power supply
Solution with the STO Not possible.
safety function inte‐ STO is not suitable for switching off a
grated in the drive: voltage.
Select STO
It is not necessary to switch off the
voltage to minimize risk.
6.3.11.2 Setting the feedback signal for Safe Torque Off
Overview
The converter signals that the STO safety function is controlled to the higher-level control
system using two digital outputs.
SINAMICS G120X converter
298 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.3 Drive control
Function description
6,1$0,&6*;
)6$)6*
S
'21& U
'212
'2&20
S
'21& U
'212
'2&20
Figure 6-29 Feedback signal "STO is active" via digital outputs
For converters FSA…FSG, you must interconnect the feedback signals "STO is active" with
two digital outputs.
Procedure
1. Set p0730 = 1838.3
2. Set p0731 = 1838.4
You have interconnected the feedback signal for safety function STO with the digital outputs of
the converter.
❒
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p0730 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 0 52.3
p0731 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 1 52.7
r1838 CO/BO: Gating unit status word 1 ---
.03 1 signal: Shutdown path STO_B is inactive
.04 1 signal: Shutdown path STO_A is inactive
Further information is provided in the parameter list.
Parameters (Page 467)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 299
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
6.4 Pump control
6.4.1 Multi-pump control
Overview
Multi-pump control is suitable for applications that require simultaneous operation of up to six
pumps, for example, equalizing significantly fluctuating water pressures or flow rates. After the
function is enabled, you can configure the following four sub-functions based on your particular
requirements:
● Pump switch-in/switch-out (Page 303)
● Stop mode (Page 308)
● Pump switchover (Page 311)
● Service mode (Page 313)
Multi-pump control provides a flexible and cost-effective solution for the following:
● Smoothly start and stop every pump to ensure the best performance of the water supply
system
● Simplify the control system
Note
The multi-pump control function is not supported on G120X converter variants of power rating
30 kW or above.
Note
When using the multi-pump function, I/O Extension Module is required to support more than
two pumps. For information about how to wiring the I/O Extension Module, see Section
"Terminal strips (Page 101)".
Precondition
Before using the multi-pump control function, make sure that you have connected pumps of the
same power rating.
Function description
The converter uses six relays (KP1 to KP6), which are connected to digital outputs DO 0 to DO
5, to switch pumps in and out according to the technology controller deviation (r2273). In
addition, two groups of contactors, KDs and KMs, are designed to switch the pumps between
converter operation and line operation. Soft pump switching can be realized as all motors start/
stop with ramp speeds, so as to minimize the shock to the pipes.
Parameter p29520 is used to enable the multi-pump control.
SINAMICS G120X converter
300 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
S
'2 U %
S
4 '2 U
S
'2 U
S
'2 U
S
'2 U
S
'2 U
.3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3
*1'
.0 .' .0 .' .0 .' .0 .' .0 .' .0 .'
4 4 4 4 4 4
0 0 0 0 0 0
Q/Q1 ... Q6 Low-voltage circuit breakers
M1 … M6 Motors
B0 Pressure sensor. Interconnect the signal of the pressure sensor with the actual-value input of the
technology controller.
Figure 6-30 Mains circuit
.3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3
.' .' .' .' .' .'
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.'
.' .' .' .' .' .'
.' .' .' .' .' .'
.' .' .' .' .' .'
.' .' .' .' .' .'
.0 .' .0 .' .0 .' .0 .' .0 .' .0 .'
.' .0 .' .0 .' .0 .' .0 .' .0 .' .0
Figure 6-31 External relay control circuit
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 301
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
Depending on the parameter p29521, the DO configuration about multi-pump control is as
follows:
Parameters p29521 = 0 p29521 = 1 p29521 = 2 p29521 = 3 p29521 = 4 p29521 = 5 p29521 = 6
p0730 52.3 52.3 52.3 52.3 r29529.0 r29529.0 r29529.0
p0731 52.2 52.2 52.2 r29529.0 r29529.1 r29529.1 r29529.1
p0732 52.0 52.0 r29529.0 r29529.1 r29529.2 r29529.2 r29529.2
p0733 52.7 r29529.0 r29529.1 r29529.2 r29529.3 r29529.3 r29529.3
p0734 -- -- -- -- -- r29529.4 r29529.4
p0735 -- -- -- -- -- -- r29529.5
Note
When using the multi-pump control for the first time, make sure that the circuit breakers are
disconnected until the relevant parameters are configured.
Note
Multi-pump control motor quantity not matched
● When you configure the multi-pump control function, make sure that the motor quantity set
in p29521 matches with the quantity of digital outputs (mapped in r29529). Otherwise, there
will be fault F52966 and alarm A07929.
● When using the multi-pump control function for more than two pumps, check r0719 = 1 to
ensure that the I/O Extension Module is recognized after installing the module.
Note
When the multi-pump control is enabled (p29520=1), the values of p1274 and p1264 are set to
0 automatically and you can modify the values if required.
Note
Motor current peaks when switching the motor from converter operation to line operation
If the motor is switched from converter operation to the line supply, this can result in a high
surge current > 10 x I_rated in the motor, depending on the random phase shift between
converter and line voltage.
Further information
Interaction with other functions:
● When activating the essential service mode, if the multi-pump control is active, the motor
connection status remains unchanged and the converter-controlled motor switches the
speed setpoint to "ESM setpoint source".
● When activating the hibernation mode, if the multi-pump control is active, the hibernation
mode only works when there is only one operating motor and the conditions for hibernation
are satisfied.
SINAMICS G120X converter
302 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
6.4.1.1 Pump switch-in/switch-out
Pump switch-in
If the pump controlled by the converter runs at the maximum speed (p1082) and the technology
controller deviation (r2273) exceeds the switch-in threshold (p29523) but is lower than the
overcontrol threshold (p29526) for a specified time (p29524), the converter first switches the
pump from converter operation to line operation, and then switches on an idle pump. This pump
is softly started with a ramp-up speed and runs in converter operation mode.
Note
If the technology controller deviation rises above the overcontrol threshold (p29526), the
converter skips the delay time (p29524) and performs the switch-in operation immediately.
Parameter p29522 is used to define the selection mode for switching in motors.
● p29522 = 0: Selecting the next pump according to the fixed sequence. The converter
switches in the pump by following the sequence M1 → M2 → M3 → M4 → M5 → M6.
● p29522 = 1: Selecting the next pump according to the operating hours. The converter
switches in the pump with the least absolute operating hours (p29530[0...5]).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 303
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
3,'HUURU ˂3,'
2YHUFRQWUROWKUHVKROG S
E
6ZLWFKLQWKUHVKROG S F
S
0XOWLSXPSFRQWUROVZLWFKLQGHOD\
I W
D
0D[LPXPVSHHG S
0RWRU
0RWRU
W
%\SDVVFRQWURO S
FRPPDQG
W
%\SDVVFRQWUROVWDWXV SS>@
ZRUG U
S 'HE\SDVVGHOD\WLPH W
U SS>@
W
0XOWLSXPSFRQWUROVWDWXV U
ZRUG
%LW
%LW
%LW
%LW
%LW &RQYHUWHU
%LW
&RQYHUWHU /LQH
W
&RQGLWLRQVIRUSXPSVZLWFKLQ
D IBDFW S
E S ุ˂3,'ุS
F W᧺S
Figure 6-32 Pump switch-in
SINAMICS G120X converter
304 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
Pump switch-out
If the pump controlled by the converter runs at a speed lower than the switch-out threshold
(p29528 + p1080) and the technology controller deviation is lower than the switch-out threshold
(-p29523) for a specified time (p29525), the converter switches off a pump based on the
selection mode.
Note
If the technology controller deviation drops below the overcontrol threshold (-p29526), the
converter skips the delay time (p29525) and performs the switch-out operation immediately.
Parameter p29522 is used to define the selection mode for switching out motors. Bits 00 to 05
of r29529 indicate the motor which is stopped depending on p29522.
● p29522 = 0: Selecting the next pump according to the fixed sequence. The converters first
switches off a pump (OFF2) which runs in converter operation (following the sequence M6
→ M5 →M4 → M3 → M2 → M1), and then captures a running pump and switches it from line
operation to converter operation.
● p29522 = 1: Selecting the next pump according to the operating hours. The converter first
switches out the pump with the most absolute operating hours (p29530[0...5]).
– If the pump with the most absolute operating hours is controlled by the converter, the
converter first switches off this pump, and then captures a running pump in line operation
and switches it to converter operation.
– If the pump with the most absolute operating hours is connected to the line supply, the
converter directly switches off this pump.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 305
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
3,'HUURU ˂3,'
E W
6ZLWFKLQWKUHVKROG S
F
S
0XOWLSXPSFRQWUROVZLWFKRXWGHOD\
2YHUFRQWUROWKUHVKROG S
)O\LQJUHVWDUW
I
0RWRU
0D[LPXPVSHHG S
S S
0LQLPXPVSHHG S
D 0RWRU
W
%\SDVVFRQWURO S
FRPPDQG
%\SDVVFRQWUROVWDWXV U SS>@
ZRUG
W
S 'HE\SDVVGHOD\WLPH
U SS>@
0XOWLSXPSFRQWUROVWDWXV W
U
ZRUG
%LW
%LW
%LW
%LW
%LW &RQYHUWHU
%LW
/LQH &RQYHUWHU
W
&RQGLWLRQVIRUSXPSVZLWFKRXW
D IBDFW S S
E S ื˂3,'ืS
F W!S
Figure 6-33 Pump switch-out based on the fixed sequence (p29522 = 0)
SINAMICS G120X converter
306 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
3,'HUURU ˂3,'
W
E
6ZLWFKLQWKUHVKROG S
F
S
0XOWLSXPSFRQWUROVZLWFKRXWGHOD\
2YHUFRQWUROWKUHVKROG S
I
0RWRU
0D[LPXPVSHHG S
0RWRU
S S
0LQLPXPVSHHG S
D
W
%\SDVVFRQWUROVWDWXVZRUG U
%LW
%LW
%LW
%LW
%LW &RQYHUWHU
%LW /LQH
W
&RQGLWLRQVIRUSXPSVZLWFKRXW
D IBDFW S S
E S ื˂3,'ืS
F W!S
Figure 6-34 Pump switch-out based on the absolute operating hours (p29522 = 1)
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p0730 ... p0735 BI: Signal source for digital outputs DO0 ... DO6 -
p1080[0...n] Minimum speed 0 rpm 1)
p1082[0...n] Maximum speed 1500 rpm
p1262[0...n] Bypass dead time 1s
p1263 Debypass delay time 1s
p1264 Bypass delay time 1s
p1274[0...1] Bypass switch monitoring time 1000 ms
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 307
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
Number Name Factory setting
p29520 Multi-pump control enable 0
p29521 Multi-pump control motor configuration 0
p29522 Multi-pump control motor selection mode 0
p29523 Multi-pump control switch-in threshold 20%
p29524 Multi-pump control switch-in delay 30 s
p29525 Multi-pump control switch-out delay 30 s
p29526 Multi-pump control overcontrol threshold 25%
p29527 Multi-pump control interlocking time 0s
p29528 Multi-pump control switch-out speed offset 100 rpm
r29529 BO/CO: Multi-pump control status word -
p29530[0...5] Multi-pump control absolute operating hours 0h
r29538 Multi-pump control variable-speed motor -
p29546 Multi-pump control deviation threshold 20%
1)
For converters FSA and converters with PROFINET fieldbus, the factory setting for p1080 is 300 rpm.
For more information about the parameters, see Chapter "Parameters (Page 467)".
6.4.1.2 Stop mode
Function description
Two stop modes are available as follows:
● Normal stop: All pumps running in line operation are switched off simultaneously as soon as
the stop command is received. The pump in converter operation stops under the control of
the converter. Normal stop aims to quickly stop all the pumps under emergency situations
such as pipe cracks or leakages.
● Sequence stop: The pumps running in line operation stop one by one in the reverse
sequence in which they are switched on. There is a delay time (p29537) between every
pump stop. The pump in converter operation stops under the control of the converter after
the first pump in line operation is switched off. Sequence stop aims to reduce the water
hammer effect to pipes especially in systems with high power range.
After the OFF command is received, the pumps are switched off in either of the two stop modes:
● With OFF1 command received, the pump stop mode is selected in parameter p29533 as
follows:
– p29533 = 0: normal stop
– p29533 = 1: sequence stop
● With OFF2/OFF3 command received, the pumps are switched off with normal stop.
SINAMICS G120X converter
308 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
Note
Sequence stop
During sequence stop, the motors are switched off in the reverse sequence in which they are
switched on. It is therefore important that the motor configuration parameter p29521 is not
changed while the converter is running. Otherwise, the parameter value may no longer
correspond to the mapping of the motors connected.
S
0RWRUVWRSPRGHVHOHFWLRQ %LW
S %LW
%LW
%LW
U
2)) %LW
U SS
%LW
6HTXHQFHVWRS
2))
! U
2))
'LVSOD\VZKLFKPRWRU
%LW
LVFRQWUROOHGE\WKH
%LW
LQYHUWHU
%LW
%LW
%LW
%LW
1RUPDOVWRS
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 309
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
U
2))DQGS
%LW &RQYHUWHU
%LW /LQH
S
%LW /LQH
S
%LW /LQH
S
%LW /LQH
S
%LW
/LQH
6HTXHQFHVWRS W
U
2))DQGS 2))2))
%LW &RQYHUWHU
%LW /LQH
%LW /LQH
%LW /LQH
%LW /LQH
%LW
/LQH
1RUPDOVWRS W
Figure 6-35 Stop mode
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p29533 Multi-pump control switch-off sequence 0
p29537 Multi-pump control disconnection lockout time 0s
r29538 Multi-pump control variable-speed motor -
For more information about the parameters, see Chapter "Parameters (Page 467)".
SINAMICS G120X converter
310 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
6.4.1.3 Pump switchover
Function description
With pump switchover enabled (with p29539), the converter monitors the operation status of all
running pumps.
● If the continuous operating hours (p29547) of the pump in converter operation exceed the
threshold (p29531), the converter switches off the pump and then switches in an idle pump
to keep constant output power.
● If the continuous operating hours (p29547) of a pump in line operation exceed the threshold
(p29531), the converter first switches off the pump, switches out the converter-controlled
pump to line operation, and then switches in an idle pump to run in converter operation to
keep constant output power.
You can use parameter p29522 to define the selection mode for the next pump. The internal
counters (p29530[0...5] and p29547[0...5]) are used to calculate the operating hours of the
pumps.
● p29522 = 0: Selecting the next pump according to the fixed sequence.
The converter first switches out the pump with the most continuous operating hours
(p29547[0...5]) and then switches in a pump following the sequence of M1 → M2 → M3 → M4
→ M5 → M6.
● p29522 = 1: Selecting the next pump according to the operating hours.
The converter switches out the pump with the most continuous operating hours
(p29547[0...5]) and then switches in the pump with the least absolute operating hours
(p29530[0...5]).
When a pump is switched off, the continuous operating hours (p29547) of this pump reset to 0
automatically.
This function balances the operation time of each pump, extends the lifetime expectancy of the
system and reduces downtime.
S 0XOWLSXPSFRQWUROPRWRUVHOHFWLRQ
PRGH
(QDEOHVSXPSVZLWFKRYHU
S
%LW
U
U %LW
U SS
U
%LW
0XOLWSXPSFRQWURO
%LW U
VWDWXVZRUG
%LW
'LVSOD\VZKLFKPRWRULV
%LW FRQWUROOHGE\WKHLQYHUWHU
S
S
0D[LPXPWLPHIRUFRQWLQXRXVRSHUDWLRQ
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 311
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
S
U SS>@
W
S 'HE\SDVVGHOD\WLPH
U SS>@
W
U
%LW /LQH
/LQH
%LW
%LW /LQH
%LW
%LW
&RQYHUWHU
%LW
&RQYHUWHU 6ZLWFKRYHU
W
U
6ZLWFKRYHU
%LW /LQH
%LW
%LW
%LW
%LW
&RQYHUWHU
%LW
&RQYHUWHU /LQH
W
Figure 6-36 Pump switchover
Note
Possible alarms and faults
With pump switchover enabled, if the continuous operating hours (p29547) of the pump exceed
the threshold (p29531) while the pump switchover is not possible (r29529.18 = 1), alarm
A52962 appears. In this case, increase p29531 or reset p29547 to clear the alarm.
SINAMICS G120X converter
312 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p29522 Multi-pump control motor selection mode 0
r29529.18 CO/BO: Multi-pump control status word: pump switchover is -
not possible
p29530[0...5] Multi-pump control motors absolute operating hours -
p29531 Multi-pump control maximum time for continuous operation 24 h
p29539 Multi-pump control switchover enable 0
p29547[0...5] Multi-pump control motors continuous operating hours -
r29538 Multi-pump control variable-speed motor -
For more information about the parameters, see Chapter "Parameters (Page 467)".
6.4.1.4 Service mode
Function description
When a pump is in the service mode, the converter locks the corresponding relay. Then you can
perform troubleshooting of this pump without interrupting the operation of other pumps. You
can use parameters p29540 to p29543 to set the pumps to work in service mode respectively.
Pumps set to service mode are skipped in further multi-pump control process.
WARNING
Risk of electric shock due to incorrectly connected low-voltage circuit breakers
If a low-voltage circuit breaker is not connected correctly to a pump set in service mode,
hazardous voltages can be present at the pump when the converter relay malfunctions.
Troubleshooting the service pump can result in serious personal injury or death.
● Make sure that all pumps are connected correctly to the mains and converter through low-
voltage circuit breakers.
● After a pump is set in service mode, make sure that its low-voltage circuit breaker is open
before performing any troubleshooting operation.
6HUYLFHPRGHVWDWXVRIPRWRUV
6LJQDOVRXUFH U 0XOWLSXPSFRQWUROPRWRUVHOHFWLRQPRGH
S
U
/RFNVPRWRU S
PDQXDOO\ U
%LW
S U SS
%LW
U
%LW
U
%LW
'LJLWDOLQSXWV
S %LW
U
%LW
(QDEOHVVHUYLFHPRGH 'LVSOD\VZKLFKPRWRULV
FRQWUROOHGE\WKHLQYHUWHU
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 313
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
%\SDVVFRQWURO S ,QWHUORFNRFFXUV
FRPPDQG
W
%\SDVVFRQWUROVWDWXV U SS>@ %\SDVVGHDGWLPH
ZRUG
S W
'HE\SDVVGHOD\WLPH
U SS>@
U W
%LW /LQH
%LW
%LW
%LW
%LW
&RQYHUWHU
%LW &RQYHUWHU 6HUYLFH
U W
6HUYLFH
%LW /LQH
%LW
%LW
%LW
%LW &RQYHUWHU
%LW
&RQYHUWHU /LQH
U W
6HUYLFH
%LW /LQH
%LW /LQH
%LW /LQH
%LW /LQH
%LW
/LQH
%LW
&RQYHUWHU
U W
6HUYLFH
%LW &RQYHUWHU
%LW /LQH
%LW /LQH
%LW /LQH
%LW
/LQH
%LW
/LQH &RQYHUWHU
W
Figure 6-37 Service mode
SINAMICS G120X converter
314 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
Note
Possible alarms and faults
● If the technology controller deviation r2273 exceeds the threshold p29546 and no pump is
available for switch-in, alarm A52963 appears.
● If there is only one pump that is not under service or locked manually, alarm A52964
appears.
● If all motors are under service or locked manually, fault F52965 appears.
For more information about the causes and remedies of the possible alarms and faults, see
Section "Warnings, faults and system messages (Page 959)".
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p29540 Multi-pump control service mode enable 0
p29542 BO/CO: Multi-pump control service mode interlock manually -
p29543[0...5] BI: Multi-pump control motor under repair [0] p29542.0
[1] p29542.1
[2] p29542.2
[3] p29542.3
[4] p29542.4
[5] p29542.5
r29544 Multi-pump control index of motors under repair -
For more information about the parameters, see Chapter "Parameters (Page 467)".
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 315
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
6.4.2 Frost protection
Overview
The freezing water inside of the pump will damage the pump. With the frost protection enabled,
if the surrounding temperature falls below a given threshold, the motor turns automatically to
prevent freezing.
Precondition
Before enabling the frost protection, make sure that p0840 = r29659.0, p0844 = r29659.1,
p1143 = r29640.0 and p1144 = r29641.
Note
For converters with PROFINET and PROFIBUS DP interfaces, set p29651 = 2090.0 and
p29652 = 2090.1.
Function description
● OFF1/OFF3: OFF3 disables frost protection function while OFF1 enables this function
again.
● OFF2/fault: The motor stops and the frost protection function is deactivated.
S
212))2))
2)) 2)) 2)) 2))
2))
)DXOW
6SHHG
S
W
Note
If you want to run frost protection, make sure that Operator Panels (BOP-2 or IOP-2) or G120
Smart Access does not get control of the motor in the JOG/Hand mode.
SINAMICS G120X converter
316 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p29622 BI: Frost protection enable 0
p29623 Frost protection speed 0 rpm
For more information about the parameters, see Chapter "Parameters (Page 467)".
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 317
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
6.4.3 Condensation protection
Overview
Condensation is a serious problem for motors in the humid and cold environment, resulting in
motor failure. This problem can be avoided by slightly increasing the surface temperature of the
motor during work break. If an external condensation sensor detects excessive condensation,
the converter applies a DC current to keep the motor warm to prevent condensation.
Precondition
Before enabling the condensation protection, make sure that p0840 = r29659.0, p0844 =
r29659.1, p1143 = r29640.0 and p1144 = r29641.
Note
For converters with PROFINET and PROFIBUS DP interfaces, set p29651 = 2090.0 and
p29652 = 2090.1.
Function description
● OFF1/OFF3: OFF3 disables the condensation protection function while OFF1 enables this
function again.
● OFF2/fault: The motor stops and the condensation protection function is deactivated.
S
212))2))
2)) 2)) 2)) 2))
2))
)DXOW
, RXW
S
6SHHG
SINAMICS G120X converter
318 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
If the converter is not running and the protection signal becomes active, protection measure is
applied as follows:
● If frost protection speed p29623 ≠ 0 (default 0), frost protection is activated by applying the
specified speed to the motor.
● If frost protection speed p29623 = 0 and condensation protection current p29624 ≠ 0,
condensation protection is activated by applying the specified current to the motor.
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p29622 BI: Frost protection enable 0
p29624 Condensation protection current 30%
For more information about the parameters, see Chapter "Parameters (Page 467)".
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 319
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
6.4.4 Cavitation protection
Overview
Cavitation occurs when air bubbles are generated around the surface of the impeller, resulting
in pump damage, unexpected noise, and decreased flow or pressure of the pipe system. The
cavitation protection will generate a fault/warning when cavitation conditions are deemed to be
present. If the converter gets no feedback from the pump transducer, it will trip to prevent
cavitation damage. This function saves the maintenance efforts and extends the lifetime
expectancy of the system.
Function description
To use cavitation protection, a sensor is required to monitor the actual flow or pressure and
feedback value. You can use parameter p29625 to enable/disable cavitation protection:
● p29625 = 0: cavitation protection is disabled
● p29625 = 1: cavitation protection triggers fault F52960
● p29625 = 2: cavitation protection triggers warning A52961
To enable cavitation protetion, set p29625 = 1 or 2.
After you have enabled cavitation protection, the following preconditions should also be met to
activate cavitation protection:
● Cavitation protection threshold p29626 is set according to experience (The value is lower
than the normal actual flow or pressure).
p29626 is a percentage of feedback output for triggering a fault or warning. r2272 is the
scaled actual value of technology controller. For example, if the maximum range for the
pressure sensor is 20 mA/25 bar and the actual sensor value is 12 mA/12.5 bar, then r2272
is 50%. If r2272 < p29626, cavitation protection can be triggered after delay time p29627.
The range of delay time is 1 s to 65500 s.
● The technology controller has reached the minimum limit (status of r53.10 is 1) or the
maximum limit (status of r53.11 is 1).
● The converter operation is enabled (status of r52.2 is 1).
● The technology controller is enabled (p2200 = 1).
SINAMICS G120X converter
320 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
&DYLWDWLRQSURWHFWLRQWKUHVKROG
>@
S
3,'6FDOHG
IHHGEDFN>@ U
&DYLWDWLRQSURWHFWLRQGHOD\
6WDWXVZRUGELW3,'PLQLPXPOLPLWUHDFKHG >V@
S
&DYLWDWLRQSURWHFWLRQGLVDEOHG
U
6WDWXVZRUGELW3,'PD[LPXP
OLPLWUHDFKHG ุ 7
7ULJJHUIDXOW)
U
7ULJJHUZDUQLQJ$
6WDWXVZRUGELW3,'LQYHUWHUUXQQLQJ
U
3,'HQDEOHGLVDEOH
S
&DYLWDWLRQSURWHFWLRQHQDEOH
S
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p29625 Cavitation protection enable 0
p29626 Cavitation protection threshold 40%
p29627 Cavitation protection time 30 s
For more information about the parameters, see Chapter "Parameters (Page 467)".
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 321
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
6.4.5 Deragging
Overview
Blockage in the wastewater pumps can reduce the efficiency of the system. With the deragging
function, any clogs on the pump impellers, pipes or valves can be cleared automatically. This
function saves the maintenance efforts for manually cleaning the pumps.
Precondition
Before enabling the deragging, make sure that p1143 = r29640.0 and p1144 = r29641.
Function description
The deragging mode consists of forward and reverse runs of the motors. Parameter p29590
is used to select the deragging mode.
● p29590 = 1: enabled on first run after power-up
● p29590 = 2: enabled on every run
● p29590 = 3: enabled with a Binector input (p29591)
6SHHG
5DPSXSWLPH 5DPSGRZQWLPH
)RUZDUGVHWSRLQW
S S
S 5DPSXSWLPH
S
W
5HYHUVHVHWSRLQW
S
S
S S
5DPSGRZQWLPH
)RUZDUGWLPH 5HYHUVHWLPH
1XPEHURIGHUDJJLQJF\FOHV
S
212))
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p29590 Deragging mode 0
p29591 BI: Deragging enable 0
p29592 Deragging forward speed 500 rpm
p29593 Deragging reverse speed 500 rpm
SINAMICS G120X converter
322 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
Number Name Factory setting
p29594 Ramp-up time 5s
p29595 Ramp-down time 5s
p29596 Deragging forward time 5s
p29597 Deragging reverse time 5s
p29598 Deragging cycle 1
Note: Before enabling the deragging via p29590, make sure the converter is in OFF status.
For more information about the parameters, see Chapter "Parameters (Page 467)".
Interaction with other functions
● Deragging signal is ignored if the converter is restarted under the command of essential
service mode, bypass operation, automatic restart, hibernation mode or multi-pump
switching-in.
● Deragging is interrupted if essential service mode, bypass, or hibernation mode is activated.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 323
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
6.4.6 Pipe filling
Overview
In the water supply systems, the rapid inrush of water into an empty pipe can cause hammer
effect and thus damage the pipe or the valve. With the pipe filling function enabled, the
converter fills the pipe slowly and smoothly after each power-up to avoid hammer effect to the
pipe. If the pipe filling is interrupted (for example, fault occurs), the function continues after the
converter is recovered. This function is used in horizontal, vertical, and mixed piping systems.
Precondition
Before enabling the pipe filling, make sure that p1143 = r29640.0 and p1144 = r29641.
SINAMICS G120X converter
324 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
Function description
After the pipe filling is enabled, you can select from the following two filling modes:
● Time mode: p29611 = 0
The converter fills the pipe with a low speed for a specified time (p29613) and then changes
the speed to the setpoint.
6SHHG
3LSHILOOLQJ 2SHUDWLRQ
VSHHG 3LSHILOOLQJWLPH
S
S
W
● Pressure mode: p29611 = 1
The converter fills the pipe according to the PID feedback from the pressure sensor. The
filling stops when the actual pressure (r2272) ≥ the threshold (p29614) for a specified time
(p29615).
3UHVVXUH
3LSHILOOLQJ
WKUHVKROG 3LSHILOOLQJPRQLWRULQJWLPH
S S
W
6SHHG
3LSHILOOLQJ 2SHUDWLRQ
VSHHG
S
W
Note
Priority of deragging and pipe filling
The priority of functions is as follows: deragging > pipe filling.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 325
Advanced commissioning
6.4 Pump control
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p29610 Pipe filling enable 0
p29611 Pipe filling mode 0
p29612 Pipe filling speed 900 rpm
p29613 Pipe filling time 50 s
p29614 Pipe filling threshold 10%
p29615 Pipe filling monitoring time 0s
For more information about the parameters, see Chapter "Parameters (Page 467)".
SINAMICS G120X converter
326 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
6.5.1 Setpoints
Overview
The converter receives its main setpoint from the setpoint source. The main setpoint generally
specifies the motor speed.
6HWSRLQWV 6HWSRLQWIURPWKH
RSHUDWRUSDQHORU
6,1$0,&6*
6PDUW$FFHVV
0DLQVHWSRLQW
6HWSRLQWSURFHVVLQJ
0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU 6XSSOHPHQ
WDU\VHWSRLQW
+LJKHU
/RZHU 7HFKQRORJ\
FRQWUROOHU
3,'
-RJJLQJ
)L[HGVHWSRLQWV VHWSRLQW
,QYHUWHUFRQWURO
Figure 6-38 Setpoint sources for the converter
You have the following options when selecting the source of the main setpoint:
● Converter fieldbus interface
● Analog input of the converter
● Motorized potentiometer emulated in the converter
● Fixed setpoints saved in the converter
You have the same selection options when selecting the source of the supplementary setpoint.
Under the following conditions, the converter switches from the main setpoint to other setpoints:
● When the technology controller is active and appropriately interconnected, its output
specifies the motor speed.
● When jogging is active
● When controlling from an operator panel
● When controlling from SINAMICS G120 Smart Access
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 327
Advanced commissioning
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
6.5.1.1 Analog input as setpoint source
Function description
6FDOLQJ
S U
0DLQVHWSRLQW
$, S
U>@
$,
$QDORJLQSXWDFWXDOYDOXH
S
6FDOLQJ U
S 6XSSOHPHQWDU\VHWSRLQW
Figure 6-39 Example: Analog input 0 as setpoint source
In the quick commissioning, you define the preassignment for the converter interfaces.
Depending on what has been preassigned, after quick commissioning, the analog input can be
interconnected with the main setpoint.
Example
Setting with analog input 0 as setpoint source:
Parameter Description
p1070 = 755[0] Interconnects main setpoint with analog input 0
p1075 = 755[0] Interconnects supplementary setpoint with analog input 0
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
r0755[0 … 1] CO: CU analog inputs, actual value in percent -%
p1070[C] CI: Main setpoint Dependent on the
converter
p1071[C] CI: Main setpoint scaling 1
r1073 CO: Main setpoint active - rpm
p1075[C] CI: Supplementary setpoint 0
p1076[C] CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling 1
r1077 CO: Supplementary setpoint effective - rpm
SINAMICS G120X converter
328 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
6.5.1.2 Specifying the setpoint via the fieldbus
Function description
6FDOLQJ
S U
0DLQVHWSRLQW
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' S
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@
S
6FDOLQJ U
S 6XSSOHPHQWDU\VHWSRLQW
Figure 6-40 Fieldbus as setpoint source
In the quick commissioning, you define the preassignment for the converter interfaces.
Depending on what has been preassigned, after quick commissioning, the receive word PZD02
can be interconnected with the main setpoint.
Example
Setting with receive word PZD02 as setpoint source:
Parameter Description
p1070 = 2050[1] Interconnects the main setpoint with the receive word PZD02 from the fieldbus.
p1075 = 2050[1] Interconnects the supplementary setpoint with receive word PZD02 from the field‐
bus.
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p1070[C] CI: Main setpoint Dependent on the
converter
p1071[C] CI: Main setpoint scaling 1
r1073 CO: Main setpoint active - rpm
p1075[C] CI: Supplementary setpoint 0
p1076[C] CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling 1
r1077 CO: Supplementary setpoint effective - rpm
r2050[0…11] CO: PROFIdrive PZD receive word -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 329
Advanced commissioning
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
6.5.1.3 Motorized potentiometer as setpoint source
Function description
The "Motorized potentiometer" function emulates an electromechanical potentiometer. The
output value of the motorized potentiometer can be set with the "higher" and "lower" control
signals.
S 6FDOLQJ
5DLVH S U
S 0DLQVHWSRLQW
/RZHU S
U
0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU
VHWSRLQWDIWHUWKHUDPS
IXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
S
6FDOLQJ U
S 6XSSOHPHQWDU\VHWSRLQW
Figure 6-41 Motorized potentiometer as setpoint source
21
2))
W
023UDLVH
S
W
023ORZHU
S
W
6HWSRLQW
U
QPD[
S
W
S S
QPD[
Figure 6-42 Function chart of the motorized potentiometer
Example
Setting with the motorized potentiometer as setpoint source:
Parameter Description
p1070 = 1050 Interconnects the main setpoint with the motorized potentiometer output.
SINAMICS G120X converter
330 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
'DWDVDYHDFWLYH 7KHVHWSRLQWIRUWKHPRWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHULVQRWVDYHGDQGDIWHU21LVHQWHUHGXVLQJS
7KHVHWSRLQWIRUWKHPRWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHULVVDYHGLQDDVKLRQDIWHU2))DQGDIWHU21VHWWRWKHVDYHGYDOXH
$XWRPDWLFPRGH5DPSIXQFWLRQ :LWKRXWUDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRULQDXWRPDWLFPRGH UDPSXSUDPSGRZQWLPH
JHQHUDWRUDFWLYH :LWKUDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRULQDXWRPDWLFPRGH
0RSFRQILJXUDWLRQ
,QLWLDOURXQGLQJRIIDFWLYH :LWKRXWLQLWLDOURXQGLQJ
Figure 6-43
S>'@ :LWKLQLWLDOURXQGLQJ7KHUDPSXSGRZQWLPHVHWLVH[FHHGHGDFFRUGLQJO\
ELQ 6DYHLQ195$0DFWLYH 1RWVDYHGLQWKH195$0 195$0 1RQ9RODWLOH5DQGRP$FFHVV0HPRU\
6DYHLQ195$0DFWLYH
5DPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRULVDOZD\V 5DPSXSHQFRGHULQDFWLYHZLWKSXOVHLQKLELW
DFWLYH 7KHUDPSXSHQFRGHULVFDOFXODWHGLQGHSHQGHQWO\RIWKHSXOVHHQDEOH
Function diagram
FP 3020
67:VHWSRLQW
SINAMICS G120X converter
2OGYDOXHLVNHSW
FKDQ 0RWRUL]HG
S U
SRWHQWLRPHWHU
>@ U VHWSRLQWUDLVH ! !
0RSUDPSXS 0RSUDPS
67:VHWSRLQW 0RS
WLPH GRZQWLPH
FKDQ 0RWRUL]HG PDQXDODXWR S
S U SRWHQWLRPHWHU S>&@
>@ U VHWSRLQWORZHU >V@ >V@
S>'@ S>'@
0RSQBVHWEHI
5)*>USP@
U
0RW3QBPD[ \
S>'@ ! S
0RWSRWLVHWSRLQW
0RW3QBPLQ
>USP@
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
S>'@ ! [ \
[ U
5HIHUHQFHYDOXHIRU
S
0RW3LQY WKHUDPSIXQFWLRQ
S >&@ JHQHUDWRU \
>@
0RSVWDUWYDOXH
0RSVHWYDO
0RSDXWRVHWSRLQW S>&@ >PLQ@
S>&@ S>'@
0RW3DFFVHWYDO !
S>&@
! )RUDXWRPDWLFFRPPLVVLRQLQJSDQGSDUHVHWWRWKHPD[LPXPPRWRU
VSHHG S RUWRWKHUDWHGPRWRUVSHHG S SURYLGHGWKDWWKHPD[LPXP S
PRWRUVSHHGKDVQRWEHHQVSHFLILHG 2))HQDEOH
! ,ILQLWLDOURXQGLQJRIILVDFWLYH S WKHVHOHFWHGUDPSXSGRZQWLPHV >@ PLVVLQJ U
DUHH[FHHGHG
! 2QO\HIIHFWLYHLIS
6HWSRLQWFKDQQHO
0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
Advanced commissioning
331
Advanced commissioning
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
Parameters
Table 6-78 Basic setup of motorized potentiometer
Number Name Factory setting
p1035[C] BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint higher 0
p1036[C] BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint lower Dependent on the
converter
p1040[D] Motorized potentiometer start value 0 rpm
p1047[D] Motorized potentiometer, ramp-up time 10 s
p1048[D] Motorized potentiometer, ramp-down time 10 s
r1050 Motorized potentiometer, setpoint after the ramp-function - rpm
generator
p1070[C] CI: Main setpoint Dependent on the
converter
p1071[C] CI: Main setpoint scaling 1
r1073 CO: Main setpoint active - rpm
p1075[C] CI: Supplementary setpoint 0
p1076[C] CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling 1
Table 6-79 Extended setup of motorized potentiometer
Number Name Factory setting
p1030[D] Motorized potentiometer configuration 0000 0110 bin
p1037[D] Motorized potentiometer, maximum speed 0 rpm
p1038[D] Motorized potentiometer, minimum speed 0 rpm
p1043[C] BI: Motorized potentiometer, accept setting value 0
p1044[C] CI: Motorized potentiometer, setting value 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
332 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
6.5.1.4 Fixed speed setpoint as setpoint source
Function description
6HOHFWLRQ
6FDOLQJ
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW S U
0DLQVHWSRLQW
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW S
U
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
DFWLYH
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
S
6FDOLQJ U
S 6XSSOHPHQWDU\VHWSRLQW
Figure 6-44 Fixed speed setpoint as setpoint source
The converter makes a distinction between two methods when selecting the fixed speed
setpoints:
● Direct selection (p1016 = 1)
● Binary selection (p1016 = 2)
Directly selecting a fixed speed setpoint
)L[HGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S
)L[HGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S
)L[HGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S
)L[HGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S
)L[HGVHWSRLQW S
)L[HGVHWSRLQW S
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
)L[HGVHWSRLQW S HIIHFWLYH
)L[HGVHWSRLQW S U
Figure 6-45 Direct selection of the fixed speed setpoint
Table 6-80 Resulting setpoint
p1023 p1022 p1021 p1020 Resulting setpoint
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 p1001
0 0 1 0 p1002
0 0 1 1 p1001 + p1002
0 1 0 0 p1003
0 1 0 1 p1001 + p1003
0 1 1 0 p1002 + p1003
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 333
Advanced commissioning
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
p1023 p1022 p1021 p1020 Resulting setpoint
0 1 1 1 p1001 + p1002 + p1003
1 0 0 0 p1004
1 0 0 1 p1001 + p1004
1 0 1 0 p1002 + p1004
1 0 1 1 p1001 + p1002 + p1004
1 1 0 0 p1003 + p1004
1 1 0 1 p1001 + p1003 + p1004
1 1 1 0 p1002 + p1003 + p1004
1 1 1 1 p1001 + p1002 + p1003 + p1004
Selecting the fixed speed setpoint, binary
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW S
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW S
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW S U
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQWHIIHFWLYH
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW S
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW S
Figure 6-46 Binary selection of the fixed speed setpoint
Table 6-81 Resulting setpoint
p1023 p1022 p1021 p1020 Resulting setpoint
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 p1001
0 0 1 0 p1002
0 0 1 1 p1003
0 1 0 0 p1004
0 1 0 1 p1005
0 1 1 0 p1006
0 1 1 1 p1007
1 0 0 0 p1008
1 0 0 1 p1009
1 0 1 0 p1010
1 0 1 1 p1011
1 1 0 0 p1012
1 1 0 1 p1013
1 1 1 0 p1014
1 1 1 1 p1015
SINAMICS G120X converter
334 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
QBVHWBIL[VHOHFW
S
Figure 6-47
)L[HGVHWSRLQWELW
S U
>@ U >@
Function diagrams
)L[HGVHWSRLQWELW
FP 3011
S U
SINAMICS G120X converter
>@ U >@ QBVHWSBIL[VWDWXV
)L[HGVHWSRLQWELW U
S U
>@ U >@
)L[HGVHWSRLQWELW
S U
>@ U >@
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
QBVHWBIL[HG>USP@
S>'@
QBVHWBIL[HG>USP@
S>'@
QBVHWBIL[HG>USP@
S>'@
6SHHGIL[HGVHWS>USP@
QBVHWBIL[HG>USP@
U
S>'@
6HWSRLQWFKDQQHO
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQWVGLUHFWVHOHFWLRQ S
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
Advanced commissioning
335
336
6HOHFWLRQ
S
Figure 6-48
U
)L[HGVHWSRLQWELW
S U >@ )L[HGVHWSRLQWV>USP@
>@ U S>'@
)L[HGVHWSRLQWELW
S U >@ S>'@
FP 3010
>@ U
)L[HGVHWSRLQWELW S>'@
Advanced commissioning
S U >@
>@ U
S>'@
)L[HGVHWSRLQWELW
S U >@
>@ U S>'@
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
S>'@
S>'@ 6SHHGIL[HGVHWSRLQW>USP@
U
S>'@
S >'@
S>'@
S>'@
S>'@
S>'@
S>'@
S>'@
6HWSRLQWFKDQQHO
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQWVELQDU\VHOHFWLRQ S
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
SINAMICS G120X converter
Advanced commissioning
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
Parameter
Number Name Factory setting
p1001[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 1 0 rpm
p1002[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 2 0 rpm
p1003[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 3 0 rpm
p1004[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 4 0 rpm
p1005[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 5 0 rpm
p1006[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 6 0 rpm
p1007[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 7 0 rpm
p1008[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 8 0 rpm
p1009[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 9 0 rpm
p1010[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 10 0 rpm
p1011[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 11 0 rpm
p1012[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 12 0 rpm
p1013[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 13 0 rpm
p1014[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 14 0 rpm
p1015[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 15 0 rpm
p1016 Fixed speed setpoint selection mode 1
p1020[C] Fixed speed setpoint selection, bit 0 0
p1021[C] Fixed speed setpoint selection, bit 1 0
p1022[C] Fixed speed setpoint selection, bit 2 0
p1023[C] Fixed speed setpoint selection, bit 3 0
r1024 Fixed speed setpoint active - rpm
r1025.0 Fixed speed setpoint status -
p1070[C] CI: Main setpoint Dependent on the
converter
p1071[C] CI: Main setpoint scaling 1
r1073 CO: Main setpoint active - rpm
p1075[C] CI: Supplementary setpoint 0
p1076 CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling 1
r1077 CO: Supplementary setpoint effective - rpm
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 337
Advanced commissioning
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
6.5.2 Setpoint processing
6.5.2.1 Overview
Overview
Setpoint processing influences the setpoint using the following functions:
● "Invert" inverts the motor direction of rotation.
● The "direction of rotation deactivate" function prevents the motor rotating in the incorrect
direction.
● The "Skip frequency bands" prevent the motor from being continuously operated within
these skip bands. This function avoids mechanical resonance effects by only permitting the
motor to operate briefly at specific speeds.
● The "Speed limitation" function protects the motor and the driven load against excessively
high speeds.
● The "Ramp-function generator" function prevents the setpoint from suddenly changing. As
a consequence, the motor accelerates and brakes with a reduced torque.
,QKLELWGLUHFWLRQ 6NLSIUHTXHQF\ 6SHHG 5DPSIXQFWLRQ
,QYHUW RIURWDWLRQ EDQGV OLPLWLQJ JHQHUDWRU
\ [
)URP 6HWSRLQWIRU
[ \ [ \ PRWRUFRQWURO
VHWSRLQW \
[
VRXUFH
W
Figure 6-49 Setpoint processing in the converter
SINAMICS G120X converter
338 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
6.5.2.2 Invert setpoint
Function description
\ [
[ \ [ \
[ \
W
S
The function inverts the sign of the setpoint using a binary signal.
Example
To invert the setpoint via an external signal, interconnect parameter p1113 with a binary signal
of your choice.
Table 6-82 Application examples showing how a setpoint is inverted
Parameter Description
p1113 = 722.1 Digital input 1 = 0: Setpoint remains unchanged.
Digital input 1 = 1: Converter inverts the setpoint.
p1113 = 2090.11 Inverts the setpoint via the fieldbus (control word 1, bit 11).
Parameter
Number Name Factory setting
p1113[C] BI: Setpoint inversion Dependent on the
converter
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 339
Advanced commissioning
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
6.5.2.3 Enable direction of rotation
Function description
\ [
[ \ [ \
[ \
W
S
S
In the factory setting of the converter, the negative direction of rotation of the motor is inhibited.
Set parameter p1110 = 0 to permanently enable the negative direction of rotation.
Set parameter p1111 = 1 to permanently inhibit the positive direction of rotation.
Parameters
Table 6-83 Application examples for inhibiting and enabling the direction of rotation
Number Name Factory setting
p1110 BI: Inhibit negative direction 1
p1111 BI: Inhibit positive direction 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
340 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
6.5.2.4 Skip frequency bands and minimum speed
Overview
The converter has a minimum speed and four skip frequency bands:
● The minimum speed prevents continuous motor operation at speeds less than the minimum
speed.
● Each skip frequency band prevents continuous motor operation within a specific speed
range.
Function description
Minimum speed
\ [
[ \ [ \
[ \
W
S
\
0$;
0LQLPXP
VSHHG
[ \
[
Speeds where the absolute value is less than the minimum speed are only possible when the
motor is accelerating or braking.
Skip frequency bands
Further information on the skip frequency bands is provided in the function block diagram.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 341
QBVNLS>USP@ QBVNLS>USP@ QBVNLS>USP@ QBVNLS>USP@ QBOLPLWSRV
342
S >'@ S >'@ S >'@ S >'@
S>&@
! ! ! ! >@ QBOLPLWSRVHII>USP@
QBVNLSVFDO 0LQ U
Figure 6-50
S >&@ >@>@
QBOLPLWSRV>USP@ >@>@
S>'@ > @>@
QBPLQVBVUF
Function diagram
S>&@
5HIHUHQFHYDOXHIRUWKH
FD 3050
QBPLQ>USP@ QBPD[>USP@ UDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
\ S>'@ >@
Advanced commissioning
S>'@
! >@
Z 0D[LPXP
QBOLPLW5)*SRV
0D[ OLPLWLQJ
S>&@
Z >@ DFWLYH
HIIHFWLYH ุ
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
PLQLPXPVSHHG ! >@
Z QBVHWDIWPLQBOLP>USP@
Z S>'@ U
6HWSDIWHU 5)*VHWSDW
6NLSVSHHG
OLPLW>USP@ \ LQSXW>USP@
Z EDQGZLGWK
U U
>@ [ >@
>@
Z
QBOLPLW5)*QHJ
Z S>&@
>@
Z QBOLPLWQHJ
QBOLPLWQHJHII>USP@
S>&@
>@ 0D[ U
6SHHGVHWSRLQW Z UZLWKLQ /LPLWLQJWR >@>@
VXP>USP@ WKHVNLSEDQG QHJDWLYHYDOXHV >@>@
U U > @>@
>@ QBOLPLWQHJ>USP@
S>'@
! $VNLSVSHHGRIGHDFWLYDWHVWKHVNLSEDQG
! 9DOXHRISLVOLPLWHGWRPD[LPXPPRWRUVSHHG S
! ,IWKHGULYHLVQRWVWRSSHGYLDWKHLQSXWVHWSRLQWEXWYLDFRQWUROOHGLQWHUYHQWLRQWKHORZHU
K\VWHUHVLVEUDQFKLVUHOHYDQWDIWHUDVXEVHTXHQWUXQXS
6HWSRLQWFKDQQHO
6NLSIUHTXHQF\EDQGVDQGVSHHGOLPLWDWLRQV
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
SINAMICS G120X converter
Advanced commissioning
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
Parameters
Table 6-84 Minimum speed
Number Name Factory setting
p1051[C] CI: Speed limit of ramp-function generator, positive direction 9733
of rotation
p1052[C] CI: Speed limit of ramp-function generator, negative direction 1086
of rotation
p1080[D] Minimum speed 0 rpm
p1083[D] CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation 210000 rpm
r1084 CO: Speed limit positive active - rpm
p1085[C] CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation 1083
p1091[D] Skip speed 1 0 rpm
p1092[D] Skip speed 2 0 rpm
p1093[D] Skip speed 3 0 rpm
p1094[D] Skip speed 4 0 rpm
p1098[C] CI: Skip speed scaling 1
r1099 CO/BO: Skip frequency band of status word -
p1106 CI: Minimum speed signal source 0
r1112 CO: Speed setpoint according to minimum limit - rpm
r1114 CO: Setpoint after direction limiting - rpm
r1119 CO: Ramp-function generator setpoint at the input - rpm
r1170 CO: Speed controller setpoint sum - rpm
Further information is provided in the parameter list.
Parameters (Page 467)
NOTICE
Incorrect direction of motor rotation if the parameterization is not suitable
If you are using an analog input as speed setpoint source, then for a setpoint = 0 V, noise
voltages can be superimposed on the analog input signal. After the on command, the motor
accelerates up to the minimum frequency in the direction of the random polarity of the noise
voltage. A motor rotating in the wrong direction can cause significant material damage to the
machine or system.
● Inhibit the motor direction of rotation that is not permissible.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 343
Advanced commissioning
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
6.5.2.5 Speed limitation
The maximum speed limits the speed setpoint range for both directions of rotation.
\ [
[ \ [ \
[ \
W
S
0LQ
0D[LPXPVSHHG
S 0D[
The converter generates a message (fault or alarm) when the maximum speed is exceeded.
If you must limit the speed depending on the direction of rotation, then you can define speed
limits for each direction.
Parameters
Table 6-85 Parameters for the speed limitation
Number Name Factory setting
p1082[D] Maximum speed 1500 rpm
p1083[D] CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation 210000 rpm
p1085[C] CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation 1083
p1086[D] CO: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation -210000 rpm
p1088[C] CI: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation 1086
SINAMICS G120X converter
344 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
6.5.2.6 Ramp-function generator
The ramp-function generator in the setpoint channel limits the rate change of the speed setpoint
(acceleration). A reduced acceleration reduces the accelerating torque of the motor. As a
consequence, the motor reduces the stress on the mechanical system of the driven machine.
The extended ramp-function generator not only limits the acceleration, but by rounding the
setpoint, also acceleration changes (jerk). This means that the motor does not suddenly
generate a torque.
Extended ramp-function generator
The ramp-up and ramp-down times of the extended ramp-function generator can be set
independently of each other. The optimal times depend on the application, and can lie in the
range from a few 100 ms to several minutes.
\ [
[ \ [ \
[ \
W
[
[
\ W
0D[LPXP
[ VSHHG \
[
W
5DPSXSWLPH 5DPS
GRZQWLPH
(IIHFWLYHUDPSXS (IIHFWLYHUDPSGRZQ
WLPH WLPH
Initial and final rounding permit smooth, jerk-free acceleration and braking.
The ramp-up and ramp-down times of the motor are increased by the rounding times:
● Effective ramp-up time = p1120 + 0.5 × (p1130 + p1131).
● Effective ramp-down time = p1121 + 0.5 × (p1130 + p1131).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 345
5DPSGRZQWLPH 2))5DPSGRZQWLPH
346
>V@ >V@ 6WDUWURXQGLQJ 2))VWDUW (QGURXQGLQJ 2))HQGURXQGLQJ
S>'@ URXQGLQJ
6FDOLQJ ! S>'@
5DPSXSWLPH ! >V@ >V@ >V@ >V@
>V@ S >&@ S>'@ S>'@ S>'@ S>'@
Figure 6-51
S>'@
! ! !
6FDOLQJ ,QWHUQDOTXLFNVWRS
S>&@ >@
Function diagram
!
FP 3070
S U %\SDVVUDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
>@ U
Advanced commissioning
6SHHGVHWSRLQWHQDEOH 5DPSIODWWHQLQJRII
>@
S U
>@ U )UHH]HUDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
6HWSRLQW>USP@ \ 7L7I
U [ 7XS 7GQ
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
>@ S ([WHQGHGUDPSIXQFWLRQ
[ \
JHQHUDWRU
!
\
S U )UHH]HUDPS ุ >@
>@ U IXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
>@ ,QWHUQDO5)*HQDEOH S U
,QWHUQDOTXLFNVWRS >@ U
>@ ! (QDEOHUDPSIXQFWLRQ
S
5RXQGRIIW\SH JHQHUDWRU
$FFHSWVHWLQJYDOXH G\GW 7L 7I 7L 7I 7L 7I 7L 7I
S>&@ S>'@ 5)*DFFHOHUDWLRQ>UHYVt@
6HWWLQJYDOXH W U
S>&@
! ,QKLELWHGGXULQJMRJJLQJ 2WKHUVWDWXVELWV
! (IIHFWLYHUDPSXSWLPH 7XSBHII 7XS 7L7I 7XSBHII ! 7GQBHII !
5DPSXSDFWLYH
(IIHFWLYHUDPSGRZQWLPH 7GQBHII 7GQ 7L7I
[ 5DPSGRZQ
! S 5RXQGLQJRIILVDOZD\VDFWLYH
2YHUVKRRWVFDQRFFXU \ ದ DFWLYH
S )LQDOURXQGLQJRIILVQRWHIIHFWLYH S
W
ZKHQWKHVHWSRLQWLVVXGGHQO\
>@ >@
UHGXFHGGXULQJUDPSXS QVROO W 5HIHUHQFHYDOXHIRUWKH >PLQ@
W UDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU S>'@ 5DPSIXQFWLRQ
! 9DOXHUDQJHDQGRUIDFWRU\VHWWLQJGHSHQGRQ3RZHU0RGXOH
! :LWKDFWLYDWHG7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU S!S WKHUDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRULVE\SDVVHG U JHQHUDWRUVWDWXVELWV
6HWSRLQWFKDQQHO
([WHQGHGUDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
SINAMICS G120X converter
Advanced commissioning
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
Parameters
Table 6-86 Additional parameters to set the extended ramp-function generator
Number Name Factory setting
p1120[D] Ramp-function generator ramp-up time Dependent on the
p1121[D] Ramp-function generator ramp-down time converter
p1130[D] Ramp-function generator initial rounding time
p1131[D] Ramp-function generator final rounding time
p1134[D] Ramp-function generator rounding type 0 (continuous
smoothing)
p1135[D] OFF3 ramp-down time Dependent on the
p1136[D] OFF3 initial rounding time converter
p1137[D] OFF3 final rounding time 0s
p1138[C] CI: Ramp-function generator ramp-up time scaling 1
p1139[C] CI: Ramp-function generator ramp-down time scaling 1
p1140[C] BI: Enable ramp-function generator/disable ramp-function Dependent on the
generator converter
p1141[C] BI: Continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function
generator
p1142[C] BI: Enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint 1
p1143[C] BI: Accept ramp-function generator setting value 0
p1144[C] CI: Ramp-function generator setting value 0
p1148[D] Ramp-function generator tolerance for ramp-up and ramp- 19.8 rpm
down active
r1149 CO: Ramp-function generator acceleration -
Further information is provided in the parameter list.
Setting the extended ramp-function generator
Procedure
1. Enter the highest possible speed setpoint.
2. Switch on the motor.
3. Evaluate your drive response.
– If the motor accelerates too slowly, then reduce the ramp-up time.
An excessively short ramp-up time means that the motor will reach its current limiting
when accelerating, and will temporarily not be able to follow the speed setpoint. In this
case, the drive exceeds the set time.
– If the motor accelerates too fast, then extend the ramp-up time.
– Increase the initial rounding if the acceleration is jerky.
– In most applications, it is sufficient when the final rounding is set to the same value as the
initial rounding.
4. Switch off the motor.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 347
Advanced commissioning
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
5. Evaluate your drive response.
– If the motor decelerates too slowly, then reduce the ramp-down time.
The minimum ramp-down time that makes sense depends on your particular application.
Depending on the Power Module used, for an excessively short ramp-down time, the
converter either reaches the motor current, or the DC link voltage in the converter
becomes too high.
– Extend the ramp-down time if the motor is braked too quickly or the converter goes into
a fault condition when braking.
6. Repeat steps 1 … 5 until the drive behavior meets the requirements of the machine or plant.
You have set the extended ramp-function generator.
❒
6.5.2.7 Dual ramp function
Overview
When operating at low speeds, pumps, e.g. submersible pumps, cannot be adequately
lubricated or cooled. This causes the pump to wear out more quickly.
To reduce wear, you can use the "dual ramp function". The "dual ramp function" shortens the
time it takes for the pump to operate below a critical speed.
Precondition
Before enabling the dual ramp function, adjust the ramp function generator.
Function description
Enabling
Connect the outputs of the dual ramp function with the scaling inputs of the ramp-function
generator
● Set p1138 = r29576
● Set p1139 = r29577
● Set p29580 = 1
Ramp up
● Converter starts ramp-up using ramp time from p1120 · p29570.
● When the actual speed r0063 > p29571, switch to ramp time from p1120 · p29572.
Ramp down
● Converter starts ramp-down using ramp time from p1121 · p29573.
● When the actual speed r0063 < p29574, switch to ramp time from p1121 · p29575.
SINAMICS G120X converter
348 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.5 Setpoints and setpoint processing
(,1
$86
S
6SHHG
5DPSXSWLPH 5DPSGRZQWLPH
S
S
W
SS SS
SS SS
Parameters
Parameter Description Factory setting
p29570[D] Ramp-up scaling 1 100%
p29571[D] Threshold speed 2 30 rmp
p29572[D] Ramp-up scaling 2 100%
p29573[D] Ramp-down scaling 1 100%
p29574[D] Threshold speed 3 30 rmp
p29575[D] Ramp-down scaling 2 100%
r29576 CO: Ramp-up scaling output -
r29577 CO: Ramp-down scaling output -
p29578[C] CI: Ramp-up scaling input 1
p29579[C] CI: Ramp-down scaling input 1
p29580 BI: Dual ramp enable 0
For more information about the parameters, see Chapter "Parameters (Page 467)".
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 349
Advanced commissioning
6.6 Technology controller
6.6 Technology controller
6.6.1 PID technology controller
Overview
3,' The technology controller controls process variables, e.g. pressure, temperature, level or flow.
3,' 6SHHGVHWSRLQW 0RWRUFRQWURO
/HYHOVHWSRLQW
7HFKQRORJ\
FRQWUROOHU
$FWXDOYDOXH
3XPS
Figure 6-52 Example: Technology controller as a level controller
Precondition
Additional functions
The U/f control or the vector control have been set.
Tools
To change the function settings, you can use an operator panel, for example.
Function description
Function diagram
The technology controller is implemented as a PID controller (controller with proportional,
integral, and derivative action).
SINAMICS G120X converter
350 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.6 Technology controller
5DPSXSWLPH S S
S 6WDUWLQJYDOXH
6FDOLQJ
6HWSRLQW .3 7, 2XWSXW
S VLJQDO
U
2XWSXWVLJQDOZLWK
6HWSRLQW &RQWUROOHU HUURU
5DPSGRZQWLPH
HQDEOH
5HVSRQVHWR
S
6PRRWKLQJ HUURUV
S
S
3UHSDUDWLRQ
$FWXDOYDOXH
/LPLWDWLRQ 7G
S
6FDOLQJ 5DPSXSUDPS
,QYHUVLRQ GRZQWLPH
)XQFWLRQI [
(QDEOH 2SHUDWLRQLVHQDEOHG
WKHPRWRULVVZLWFKHGRQ
S
① The converter uses the start value when all the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied:
● The technology controller supplies the main setpoint (p2251 = 0).
● The ramp-function generator output of the technology controller has not yet reached the start value.
Figure 6-53 Simplified representation of the technology controller
Basic settings
The settings required as a minimum are marked in gray in the function diagram:
● Interconnect setpoint and actual values with signals of your choice
● Set ramp-function generator and controller parameters KP, TI and Td.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 351
Advanced commissioning
6.6 Technology controller
Set controller parameters KP, TI and Td.
Procedure
1. Temporarily set the ramp-up and ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator (p2257
and p2258) to zero.
2. Enter a setpoint step and monitor the associated actual value.
The slower the response of the process to be controlled, the longer you must monitor the
controller response. Under certain circumstances (e.g. for a temperature control), you need
to wait several minutes until you can evaluate the controller response.
Optimum controller response for applications that do not permit
any overshoot.
The actual value approaches the setpoint without any significant
overshoot.
W
Optimum controller behavior for fast correction and quick com‐
pensation of disturbance components.
The actual value approaches the setpoint and slightly over‐
shoots, maximum 10 % of the setpoint step.
W
The actual value only slowly approaches the setpoint.
● Increase the proportional component KP (p2280) and reduce
the integration time TI (p2285).
The actual value only slowly approaches the setpoint with slight
oscillation.
● Increase the proportional component KP (p2280) and reduce
the rate time Td (p2274)
W
The actual value quickly approaches the setpoint, but over‐
shoots too much.
● Decrease the proportional component KP (p2280) and
increase the integration time TI (p2285).
W
3. Set the ramp-up and ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator back to their original
value.
You have manually set the technology controller.
❒
Limiting the output of the technology controller
In the factory setting, the output of the technology controller is limited to ± maximum speed. You
must change this limit, depending on your particular application.
Example: The output of the technology controller supplies the speed setpoint for a pump. The
pump should only run in the positive direction.
SINAMICS G120X converter
352 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
7HFBFWU)L[9DOVHO
S>'@
7HFBFWUOVHOELW
Figure 6-54
7HFBFWUO1RDFW
S>&@ > @ U
7HFBFWUOIL[YDO>@
7HFBFWUOVHOELW
S>'@
S>&@ > @
7HFBFWUIL[YDO>@
Function diagrams
FP 7950
S>'@
7HFBFWUOVHOELW
SINAMICS G120X converter
S>&@ > @ 7HFBFWUIL[YDO>@ 7HFBFWU)L[9DO=6:
S>'@ U
U
7HFBFWUOVHOELW 7HFBFWUIL[YDO>@
S>&@ > @ S>'@
7HFBFWUIL[YDO>@
S>'@
7HFBFWUIL[YDO>@
S>'@
7HFBFWUIL[YDO>@
7HFBFWU)L[9DOHII>@
S>'@
U
7HFBFWUIL[YDO>@
S>'@
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
7HFBFWUIL[YDO >@
S >'@
7HFBFWUIL[YDO>@
S>'@
7HFBFWUIL[YDO>@
S>'@
7HFBFWUIL[YDO>@
S>'@
7HFBFWUIL[YDO>@
S>'@
7HFBFWUIL[YDO>@
S>'@
7HFBFWUIL[YDO>@
S>'@
7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
)L[HGYDOXHVHOHFWLRQELQDU\ S
6.6 Technology controller
Advanced commissioning
353
7HFBFWU)L[9DOVHO
354
S>'@
Figure 6-55
7HFBFWUOVHOELW S>&@
> @
7HFBFWUOVHOELW S>&@
7HFBFWU)L[9DO=6:
> @
FP 7951
U
U
7HFBFWUOVHOELW S>&@
6.6 Technology controller
Advanced commissioning
> @
7HFBFWUOVHOELW S>&@
> @
7HFBFWUOIL[YDO>@
S>'@
7HFBFWUIL[YDO>@
S>'@
7HFBFWUIL[YDO>@
S>'@
7HFBFWU)L[9DOHII>@
7HFBFWUIL[YDO>@ U
S>'@
7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
)L[HGYDOXHVHOHFWLRQGLUHFW S
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
SINAMICS G120X converter
7HFBFWUPRSFRQILJ
S>'@ ELQ
'DWDVDYHDFWLYH 7KHVHWSRLQWIRUWKHPRWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHULVQRWVDYHGDQGDIWHU21LVHQWHUHGXVLQJS
Figure 6-56
7KHVHWSRLQWIRUWKHPRWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHULVVDYHGDIWHU2))DQGDIWHU21LVHQWHUHGXVLQJU
,QLWLDOURXQGLQJRIIDFWLYH :LWKRXWLQLWLDOURXQGLQJ
:LWKLQLWLDOURXQGLQJ7KHUDPSXSGRZQWLPHVHWLVH[FHHGHGDFFRUGLQJO\
1RQYRODWLOHGDWDVDYHDFWLYH 1RQYRODWLOHGDWDVDYHQRWDFWLYDWHG
7KHVHWSRLQWIRUWKHPRWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHULVVDYHGLQDQRQYRODWLOHIDVKLRQ IRUS
FP 7954
5DPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRULVDOZD\VDFWLYH 5DPSXSHQFRGHULQDFWLYHZLWKSXOVHLQKLELW
SINAMICS G120X converter
7KHUDPSXSHQFRGHULVFDOFXODWHGLQGHSHQGHQWO\RIWKHSXOVHHQDEOH
7HFBFWUOPRSUDLVH 2OGYDOXHLVNHSW
S>&@
7HFBFWUOPRSORZHU ! !
S>&@ 7HFBFWUPRSWBUXS 7HFBFWU0RSWBUGRZQ
>V@ >V@
S>'@ S>'@
\
7HFBFWUOPRSPD[ S
>@ 7HFBFWUPRSEHI5)*>@
S>'@ U
7HFBFWUPRSDIW5)*>@
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
[ \
7HFBFWUOPRSPLQ [ U
>@
S>'@
S
\
7HFBFWUOPRSVWDUW
0LVVLQJHQDEOHVLJ
>@
U 2))HQDEOHPLVVLQJ
U S>'@
!
7HFBFWUOPRSPHP>@
U
! )RUS WKLVVHWSRLQWLVHQWHUHGDIWHU21
! ,ILQLWLDOURXQGLQJRIILVDFWLYH S WKHVHOHFWHGUDPSXSGRZQWLPHVDUHH[FHHGHGDFFRUGLQJO\
7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU
6.6 Technology controller
Advanced commissioning
355
7HFBFWUOFRQILJ 7HFBFWUOFRQILJ
356
S S S
> @.S$GDSW 7Q$GDSW> @
7HFBFWUVHWDIW5)*>@ 7HFBFWUVHWDIW)OW>@ 7HFBFWUO.S 7HFBFWUO7Q 7HFBFWUORXWSVFDO
7HFBFWUOVHWVFDO U U
Figure 6-57
S ! ! S
S >&@
S 7HFBFWUORXWSVFDO>@
7HFBFWUOVHWS 7HFBFWULQWHJKROG >@
S
S>&@ U S>&@ !
U 7HFBFWUOOLPHQDE 7HFBFWUOVWDWXV
S >&@ U
>@ 7HFBFWUOVHWVFDO 7HFBFWUOWBUDPSXS 7HFBFWUOVHW7 7HFBFWU6\V'HYLQY 7HFBFWUOWKUBVNLS U
S S S !
S S 7HFBFWUOVWDWXV
FP 7958
7HFBFWUOVHWS 7HFBFWUOV\VBGHY>@ .S 7Q
U 7HFBFWUVWDUWYDO
S>&@ U S
S U
6.6 Technology controller
Advanced commissioning
(60VHWSWHFKBFWUO
S 7HFBFWUOVWDWXV
S 7HFBFWU
! U
(60=6: U SUHFWUBVLJ U
7HFBFWUOWBUDPSGQ
U S 7HFBFWUO S >&@ U
!
U V\VBGHY>@
7HFKBFWUOIOWUHVS
7HFBFWUOXBOLPDFW 7HFBFWUOW\SH S
S 7HFKBFWUODFWLQY 7HFBFWUOQBVHWSBVP>@ 7HFBFWUORXWS
S S
7HFBFWUODFW7 U BVLJ>@
7HFKBFWUOJDLQDFW 7HFBFWU$FW9DOIFW QBVHWB
S 7HFKBFWUO V U
S S >@
DFWVFDO>@ 7HFBFWUIL[YDO>@
7HFBFWUODFWYDO \
S>&@ U S>'@
U
[ 7HFBFWUOVWDWXV U
>@
) 7HFBFWUO'FRPS7
7HFBFWUOOBOLPDFW S
S 7HFBFWUOVWDWXV QBOLPLWSRVHII>USP@ 7HFBFWU0D[/LP6BVUF
!
U U S >&@
7HFBFWUDFW U
DIW)OW>@ G >@
U GW 7HFBFWUOPD[BOLP>@
(60=6: S ದ
U U
U
U
>@ U ! 7HFKBFWUOOLPRIIV
(60=6: S >&@
! 'HSHQGLQJRQWKHVHWWLQJRISDGLIIHUHQWHTXDWLRQZLOOEHXVHGWRFDOFXODWHWKH U >@
7HFBFWUOVWDWXV
HQGYDOXHVRISSDQGS)RUS DQGGHDFWLYDWHGDGDSWDWLRQWKH U
3,DQG'FRPSRQHQWFDQEHGLVDEOHGE\HQWHULQJD]HUR U
7HFBFWUOHQDEOH U ದ
! $IWHUHQDEOHRIWHFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHUWKHVWDUWYDOXHLVSUHVHQWDVORQJDV S>&@
WKH5)*RXWSXWUHDFKHVWKLVYDOXH
QBOLPLWQHJHII>USP@ 7HFBFWUOPLQBOVBV
! ,FRPSRQHQWVWRSRQO\ZKHQUDQGU LQVDPHGLUHFWLRQ U S >&@
! 6LJQDO !IDFWRU ZKHQVHWSRLQWIURPH[WHUQDORSHUDWLQJWRRORURSHUDWRUSDQHO >@
7HFBFWUOPLQBOLP>@ 7HFBFWUWB585'
! &KDQJHRYHURQO\LIS 7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHUDVVSHHGPDLQVHWSRLQW
S S
! )RUS ,FRPSRQHQWLVVWRSSHGZKHQU LVEHORZWKHPLQLPXPVSHHGRUZLWKLQDVXSSUHVVLRQEDQGZLGWK
7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
&ORVHGORRSFRQWURO
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
SINAMICS G120X converter
Advanced commissioning
6.6 Technology controller
Parameters
Table 6-87 Basic settings
Number Name Factory setting
r0046[0…31] CO/BO: Missing enable signals -
r0052[0…15] CO/BO: Status word 1 -
r0056[0…15] CO/BO: Status word, closed-loop control -
r1084 CO: Speed limit positive active -
r1087 CO: Speed limit negative active - rpm
p2200[C] BI: Technology controller enable 0
p2252 Technology controller configuration See parameter list
p2253[C] CI: Technology controller setpoint 1 0
p2254[C] CI: Technology controller setpoint 2 0
p2255 Technology controller setpoint 1 scaling 100%
p2256 Technology controller setpoint 2 scaling 100%
p2257 Technology controller ramp-up time 1s
p2258 Technology controller ramp-down time 1s
r2260 CO: Technology controller setpoint after ramp-function gen‐ -%
erator
p2261 Technology controller setpoint filter time constant 0s
r2262 CO: Technology controller setpoint after filter -%
p2263 Technology controller type 0
r2273 CO: Technology controller system deviation -%
p2274 Technology controller differentiation time constant 0s
p2280 Technology controller proportional gain See parameter list
p2285 Technology controller integral time See parameter list
p2286 BI: Hold technology controller integrator 56.13
p2289[C] CI: Technology controller precontrol signal 0
p2306 Technology controller system deviation inversion 0
p2339 Technology controller threshold value for I proportion stop at -s
skip speed
r2344 CO: Technology controller last speed setpoint (smoothed) -%
p2345 Technology controller fault response 0
r2349[0…13] CO/BO: Technology controller status word -
r3889[0…10] CO/BO: ESM status word -
Table 6-88 Limiting the output of the technology controller
Number Name Factory setting
p2290[C] BI: Technology controller limitation enable 1
p2291 CO: Technology controller maximum limiting 100%
p2292 CO: Technology controller minimum limiting 0%
p2293 Technology controller ramp-up/ramp-down time 1s
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 357
Advanced commissioning
6.6 Technology controller
Number Name Factory setting
r2294 CO: Technology controller output signal -%
p2295 CO: Technology controller output scaling 100%
p2296[C] CI: Technology controller output scaling 2295
p2297[C] CI: Technology controller maximum limiting signal source 1084
p2298[C] CI: Technology controller minimum limiting signal source 1087
p2299[C] CI: Technology controller limitation offset 0
p2302 Technology controller output signal start value 0%
Table 6-89 Adapting the actual value of the technology controller
Number Name Factory setting
p2264[C] CI: Technology controller actual value 0
p2265 Technology controller actual value filter time constant 0s
p2266 CO: Technology controller actual value after filter -%
p2267 Technology controller upper limit actual value 100%
p2268 Technology controller lower limit actual value -100 %
p2269 Technology controller gain actual value 100%
p2270 Technology controller actual value function 0
p2271 Technology controller actual value inversion 0
r2272 CO: Technology controller actual value scaled -%
Table 6-90 PID technology controller, fixed values (binary selection)
Number Name Factory setting
p2201[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 1 10 %
p2202[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 2 20%
p2203[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 3 30%
p2204[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 4 40%
p2205[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 5 50%
p2206[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 6 60%
p2207[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 7 70%
p2208[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 8 80%
p2209[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 9 90%
p2210[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 10 100%
p2211[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 11 110 %
p2212[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 12 120 %
p2213[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 13 130 %
p2214[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 14 140 %
p2215[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 15 150 %
p2216[D] Technology controller fixed value selection method 1
r2224 CO: Technology controller fixed value active -%
SINAMICS G120X converter
358 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.6 Technology controller
Number Name Factory setting
r2225 CO/BO: Technology controller fixed value selection status -%
word
r2229 Technology controller number actual -
Table 6-91 PID technology controller, fixed values (direct selection)
Number Name Factory setting
p2216[D] Technology controller fixed value selection method 1
p2220[C] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 0 0
p2221[C] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 1 0
p2222[C] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 2 0
p2223[C] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 3 0
r2224 CO: Technology controller fixed value active -%
r2225 CO/BO: Technology controller fixed value selection status -%
word
r2229 Technology controller number actual -
Table 6-92 PID technology controller, motorized potentiometer
Number Name Factory setting
r2231 Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint -%
memory
p2235[C] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer, setpoint, 0
raise
p2236[C] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer, setpoint, 0
lower
p2237[D] Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum 100%
value
p2238[D] Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum val‐ -100 %
ue
p2240[D] Technology controller motorized potentiometer start value 0%
r2245 CO: Technology controller motorized potentiometer, setpoint -%
before RFG
p2247[D] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-up time 10 s
p2248[D] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-down 10 s
time
r2250 CO: Technology controller motorized potentiometer, setpoint -%
after RFG
Further information
You will find additional information on the following PID controller components in the Internet at:
● Setpoint input: Analog value or fixed setpoint
● Setpoint channel: Scaling, ramp-function generator and filter
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 359
Advanced commissioning
6.6 Technology controller
● Actual value channel: Filter, limiting and signal processing
● PID controller: Principle of operation of the D component, inhibiting the I component and the
control sense
● Enable, limiting the controller output and fault response
FAQ (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/92556266)
SINAMICS G120X converter
360 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.6 Technology controller
6.6.1.1 Autotuning the PID technology controller
Overview
Autotuning is a converter function for the automatic optimization of the PID technology
controller.
Precondition
Additional functions
● The motor closed-loop control is set
● The PID technology controller must be set the same as when used in subsequent operation:
– The actual value is interconnected.
– Scalings, filter and ramp-function generator have been set.
– The PID technology controller is enabled (p2200 = 1 signal).
Tools
One of the commissioning tools is needed to change the function settings.
Function description
For active autotuning, the converter interrupts the connection between the PID technology
controller and the speed controller. Instead of the PID technology controller output, the
autotuning function specifies the speed setpoint.
3,'DXWRWXQLQJ
6SHHG 0RWRUFRQWURO
)LOOLQJOHYHO
3,' VHWSRLQW
VHWSRLQW
7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
$FWXDOYDOXH
3XPS
Figure 6-58 Autotuning using closed-loop level control as example
The speed setpoint results from the technology setpoint and a superimposed rectangular signal
with amplitude p2355. If actual value = technology setpoint ± p2355, the autotuning function
switches the polarity of the superimposed signal. This causes the converter to excite the
process variable for an oscillation.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 361
Advanced commissioning
6.6 Technology controller
$FWXDOYDOXH
W
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
)LOOLQJOHYHOVHWSRLQW S
S W
Figure 6-59 Example for speed setpoint and actual process value for autotuning
The converter calculates the parameters of the PID controller from the determined oscillation
frequency.
Executing autotuning
1. Select with p2350 the appropriate controller setting.
2. Switch on the motor.
The converter signals Alarm A07444.
3. Wait until alarm A07444 goes away.
The converter has recalculated parameters p2280, p2274 and p2285.
If the converter signals fault F07445:
– If possible, double p2354 and p2355.
– Repeat the autotuning with the changed parameters.
4. Back up the calculated values so that they are protected against power failure, e.g. using the
BOP‑2: OPTIONS → RAM‑ROM.
You have auto tuned the PID controller.
❒
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p2274 Technology controller differentiation time constant 0.0 s
p2280 Technology controller proportional gain See parameter list
p2285 Technology controller integral time See parameter list
SINAMICS G120X converter
362 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.6 Technology controller
Number Name Factory setting
p2350 Enable PID autotuning 0
Automatic controller setting based on the "Ziegler Nichols"
method.
After completion of the autotuning, the converter sets
p2350 = 0.
0: No function
1: The process variable follows the setpoint after a sudden
setpoint change (step function) relatively quickly, however
with an overshoot.
2: Faster controller setting than for p2350 = 1 with larger
overshoot of the controlled variable.
3: Slower controller setting than for p2350 = 1. Overshoot of
the controlled variable is, to a large extent, avoided.
4: Controller setting after completion of the autotuning as for
p2350 = 1. Optimize only the P and I action of the PID con‐
troller.
p2354 PID autotuning monitoring time 240 s
p2355 PID autotuning offset 5%
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 363
Advanced commissioning
6.6 Technology controller
6.6.1.2 Adapting Kp and Tn
Overview
The function adapts the PID technology controller to the process, e.g. depending on the system
deviation.
Function description
6FDOLQJ
7,DGDSWDWLRQ
S S
S
S
S S
6FDOLQJ &RQILJXUDWLRQ
6FDOLQJ S S S
.3DGDSWDWLRQ
S S
S
S S S
S S .3 7,
3,FRPSRQHQWRIWKH
WHFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
Figure 6-60 Controller adaptation
SINAMICS G120X converter
364 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Figure 6-61
.SDGDSWVFDOVBV
Function diagram
S
FP 7959
SINAMICS G120X converter
.SDGDSWRXWS
.SDGDSWLQSVBVUF .SDGDSWXSSHUYDO U
S S
.S$GDSW > @
.SDGDSWORZHUYDO
S
.SDGDSWORZHUSW .SDGDSWXSSHUSW
S S
7QDGDSWRXWSXW>V@
7QDGDSWLQSVBVUF 7QDGDSWXSSHUYDO U
S S
7Q$GDSW > @
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
7QDGDSWORZHUYDO
S
7QDGDSWORZHUSW 7QDGDSWXSSHUSW
S S
7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
.S7QDGDSWDWLRQ
6.6 Technology controller
Advanced commissioning
365
Advanced commissioning
6.6 Technology controller
Parameter
Number Name Factory setting
p2252 Technology controller configuration 0000 0000 0000
0000 bin
p2280 Technology controller proportional gain see parameter list
p2285 Technology controller integral time see parameter list
p2310 CI: Technology controller Kp adaptation input value signal 0
source
p2311 Technology controller, lower Kp adaptation value 1
p2312 Technology controller, upper Kp adaptation value 10
p2313 Technology controller lower Kp adaptation transition point 0%
p2314 Technology controller upper Kp adaptation transition point 100%
p2315 CI: Technology controller Kp adaptation scaling signal source 1
r2316 CO: Technology controller Kp adaptation output -
p2317 CI: Technology controller Tn adaptation input value signal 0
source
p2318 Technology controller, lower Tn adaptation value 3s
p2319 Technology controller, upper Tn adaptation value 10 s
p2320 Technology controller lower Tn adaptation transition point 0%
p2321 Technology controller upper Tn adaptation transition point 100%
r2322 CO: Technology controller Tn adaptation output -s
SINAMICS G120X converter
366 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.6 Technology controller
6.6.2 Free technology controllers
Overview
3,' The converter has three additional technology controllers.
The three "free technology controllers" have fewer setting options compared with the PID
technology controller described above.
PID technology controller (Page 350)
Function description
SQ SQ SQ SQ SQ
SQ
SQ
UQ
6HWSRLQW
SQ SQ
SQ
SQ
SQ G SQ
GW
$FWXDO (QDEOH
YDOXH SQ
n = 0 Free technology controller 0
n = 1 Free technology controller 1
n = 2 Free technology controller 2
Figure 6-62 Simplified function chart of the additional PID technology controllers, n = 0 … 2
The additional technology controllers allow several process variables to be simultaneously
controlled using one converter.
Example
An HVAC system with heating and cooling valves to process the air:
● The main controller controls the speed of the fan drive.
● The additional technology controllers control the cooling and heating via the two analog
outputs.
Parameters
Table 6-93 Parameters for the free technology controller 0
Number Name Factory setting
p11000 BI: Free tec_ctrl 0 enable 0
p11026 Free tec_ctrl 0 unit selection 1 (%)
p11027 Free tec_ctrl 0 unit reference variable 1.00
p11028 Free tec_ctrl 0 sampling time 2 (256 ms)
r11049.0...11 CO/BO: Free tec_ctrl 0 status word -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 367
Advanced commissioning
6.6 Technology controller
Number Name Factory setting
p11053 CI: Free tec_ctrl 0 setpoint signal source 0
p11057 Free tec_ctrl 0 setpoint ramp-up time 1s
p11058 Free tec_ctrl 0 setpoint ramp-down time 1s
p11063 Free tec_ctrl 0 error signal inversion 0
p11064 CI: Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value signal source 0
p11065 Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value smoothing time constant 0s
p11067 Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value upper limit 100%
p11068 Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value lower limit -100 %
p11071 Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value inversion 0
r11072 CO: Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value after limiter -
r11073 CO: Free tec_ctrl 0 control deviation -
p11074 Free tec_ctrl 0 differentiation time constant (Td) 0s
p11080 Free tec_ctrl 0 proportional gain (KP) 1
p11085 Free tec_ctrl 0 integral time (TI) 30 s
p11091 CO: Free tec_ctrl 0 maximum limit 100%
p11092 CO: Free tec_ctrl 0 minimum limit 0%
p11093 Free tec_ctrl 0 ramp-up/ramp-down time limit 1s
r11094 CO: Free tec_ctrl 0 output signal -
p11097 CI: Free tec_ctrl 0 maximum limit signal source 11091[0]
p11098 CI: Free tec_ctrl 0 minimum limit signal source 11092[0]
p11099 CI: Free tec_ctrl 0 offset limit signal source 0
Further information is provided in the parameter list.
Parameters (Page 467)
6.6.3 Cascade control
Overview
3,' The cascade control is ideal for applications in which, for example, significantly fluctuating
pressures or flow rates are equalized.
SINAMICS G120X converter
368 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.6 Technology controller
$, %
$,*1'
9287
'21&
'212 S
'2&20 U
'21&
'212 S
'2&20 U
. .
*1'
. .
0 0 0'
MD Speed-controlled motor
M1 … M2 Uncontrolled motors
B0 Pressure sensor. Interconnect the signal of the pressure sensor with the actual-value input
of the technology controller.
Figure 6-63 Example: Cascade control for the pressure in a liquid pipe
Depending on the set-actual variance of the technology controller, the cascade control of the
converter switches a maximum of three additional motors directly to the line supply via
contactors.
Precondition
To deploy the cascade control, you must activate the technology controller.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 369
Advanced commissioning
6.6 Technology controller
Function description
Activate uncontrolled motors M1 … M2
0RWRU0'VSHHG S
S
S
S෪
S
S W
&RQWUROGHYLDWLRQ
S
S
S W
0RWRU0QLVFRQQHFWHG
U Q
U Q
S W
Figure 6-64 Activate uncontrolled motors M1 … M2
Procedure for connecting an uncontrolled motor:
1. The speed-controlled motor turns with maximum speed p1082.
2. The control deviation of the technology controller is greater than p2373.
3. Time p2374 has expired.
The converter brakes the speed-controlled motor with ramp-down time p1121 to the
activation/deactivation speed p2378. Until the activation/deactivation speed p2378 is
attained, the converter deactivates the technology controller temporarily.
4. After switch-on delay p2384, the converter connects an uncontrolled motor.
Deactivate uncontrolled motors M1 … M2
0RWRU0'VSHHG S
S
S
S෪
S
S W
&RQWUROGHYLDWLRQ
S W
S
S
0RWRU0QLVFRQQHFWHG
U Q
U Q
S W
SINAMICS G120X converter
370 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.6 Technology controller
Figure 6-65 Deactivate uncontrolled motors M1 … M2
Procedure for switching off an uncontrolled motor:
1. The speed-controlled motor turns with minimum speed p1080.
2. The control deviation of the technology controller is less than -p2373.
3. Time p2375 has expired.
The converter accelerates the speed-controlled motor with ramp-up time p1120 to the
activation/deactivation speed p2378. Until the activation/deactivation speed p2378 is
attained, the converter deactivates the technology controller temporarily.
4. After shutdown delay p2386, the converter disconnects an uncontrolled motor.
Sequence for activating and deactivating the M1 … M2 motors
Table 6-94 p2371 specifies the sequence for activating and deactivating the motors
p2371 → → → Sequence for activating motors → → → Power of the activated M1 … M3 motors compared
→ → → Sequence for deactivating motors → → → with the speed-controlled DM motor
Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 1 × MD 2 × MD
1 M1 M1 ---
2 M1 M1+M2 M1, M2 ---
3 M1 M2 M1+M2 M1 M2
Parameter
Number Name Factory setting
p2200 Technology controller enable 0
p2251 Technology controller mode 0
p2370 Cascade control enable 0
p2371 Cascade control configuration 0
p2372 Cascade control motor selection mode 0
p2373 Cascade control activation threshold 20%
p2374 Cascade control activation delay 30 s
p2375 Cascade control deactivation delay 30 s
p2376 Cascade control overload threshold 25%
p2377 Cascade control interlock time 0s
p2378 Cascade control activation/deactivation speed 50%
r2379 Cascade control status word ---
p2380 Cascade control operating hours 0h
p2381 Cascade control maximum time for continuous mode 24 h
p2382 Cascade control absolute operating time limit 24 h
p2383 Cascade control deactivation sequence 0
p2384 Cascade control motor switch-on delay 0s
p2385 Cascade control stop time activation speed 0s
p2386 Cascade control motor switch-off delay 0s
p2387 Cascade control stop time deactivation speed 0s
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 371
Advanced commissioning
6.6 Technology controller
Additional information is provided in the parameter list and in function diagram 7036.
More information
Interaction with the "Hibernation mode" function
In order that the "Cascade control" and "Hibernation mode" functions do not influence each
other, you must make the following settings in the cascade control:
● p2392 < p2373
The restart value of the hibernation mode p2392 must be lower than the activation threshold
for the cascade control p2373.
● p2373 < p2376
The activation threshold for the cascade control p2373 must be lower than the overload
threshold for the cascade control p2376.
● It is not permissible for the main drive to be in the hibernation mode.
● The actual speed must be higher than the restart speed for hibernation mode
(p1080 + p2390) × 1.05.
● The value for the activation delay of the cascade control p2374 must be higher than the
ramp-up time ty from hibernation mode.
ty = (p1080 + p2390) × 1.05 × p1120 × p1139/p1082
SINAMICS G120X converter
372 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.6 Technology controller
6.6.4 Real time clock (RTC)
3,' The real-time clock is the basis for time-dependent process controls, e.g.:
● To reduce the temperature of a heating control during the night
● To increase the pressure of a water supply at certain times during the day
Accept the real-time clock in the alarm and fault buffer
Using the real-time clock, you can track the sequence of alarms and faults over time. When an
appropriate message occurs, the converter converts the real-time clock into the UTC time
format (Universal Time Coordinated):
Date, time ⇒ 01.01.1970, 0:00 + d (days) + m (milliseconds)
The converter takes the number "d" of the days and the number "m" of the milliseconds in the
alarm and fault times of the alarm and/or fault buffer.
Warnings, faults and system messages (Page 959)
Converting UTC to RTC
An RTC can again be calculated in the UTC format from the saved fault or alarm time. In the
Internet, you will find programs to convert from UTC to RTC, e.g.
UTC to RTC (http://unixtime-converter.com/)
Example:
Saved as alarm time in the alarm buffer:
r2123[0] = 2345 [ms]
r2145[0] = 14580 [days]
Number of seconds = 2345 / 1000 + 14580 × 86400 = 1259712002
Converting this number of seconds to RTC provides the date: 02.12.2009, 01:00:02.
The times specified for alarms and faults always refer to standard time.
Function and settings
The real-time clock starts as soon as the Control Unit power supply is switched on for the first
time. The real-time clock comprises the time in a 24 hour format and the date in the "day, month,
year" format.
After a Control Unit power supply interruption, the real-time clock continues to run for approx.
five days.
If you wish to use the real-time clock, you must set the time and date once when commissioning.
If you restore the converter factory setting, the converter only resets parameters p8402 and
p8405 of the real-time clock. P8400 and p8401 are not reset.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 373
Advanced commissioning
6.6 Technology controller
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p8400[0 … 2] RTC time 0
p8401[0 … 2] RTC date 1.1.1970
p8402[0 … 8] RTC daylight saving time setting 0
r8403 RTC daylight saving time actual difference -
r8404 RTC weekday -
p8405 Activate/deactivate RTC alarm A01098 1
SINAMICS G120X converter
374 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.6 Technology controller
6.6.5 Time switch (DTC)
3,' The "time switch" (DTC) function, along with the real-time clock in the converter, offers the
option of controlling when signals are switched on and off.
Examples:
● Switching temperature control from day to night mode.
● Switching a process control from weekday to weekend.
Principle of operation of the time switch (DTC)
The converter has three independently adjustable time switches. The time switch output can be
interconnected with every binector input of your converter, e.g. with a digital output or a
technology controller's enable signal.
'7&ZHHNGD\ 0RQGD\ 7XHVGD\ :HGQHVGD\ 7KXUVGD\ )ULGD\
DFWLYDWLRQ
GHDFWLYDWHG DFWLYDWHG DFWLYDWHG GHDFWLYDWHG DFWLYDWHG
57&
SSU
21 21 21 21 21 W
'7&VZLWFKLQJWLPHV
6LJQDODWWKHRXWSXW
W
Figure 6-66 Example of the response of the time switch.
Settings for the example with DTC1
● Enable parameterization of the DTC: p8409 = 0.
As long as the parameterization of the DTC is enabled, the converter holds the output of all
three DTC (r84x3, x = 1, 2, 3; r84x3.0 normal, r84x3.1 inverted status message) at LOW.
● Activate/deactivate the weekday
- p8410[0] = 0 Monday
- p8410[1] = 1 Tuesday
- p8410[2] = 1 Wednesday
- p8410[3] = 0 Thursday
- p8410[4] = 1 Friday
- p8410[5] = 1 Saturday
- p8410[6] = 0 Sunday
● Setting switching times:
– ON: p8411[0] = 20 (hh), p8411[1] = 0 (MM)
– OFF: p8412[0] = 10 (hh), p4812[1] = 0 (MM)
● Enable the setting: p8409 = 1.
The converter re-enables the DTC output.
Further information is provided in the parameter list.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 375
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
6.7 Motor control
Overview
The converter has two alternative methods to ensure the motor speed follows the configured
speed setpoint:
● U/f control
● Vector control
6.7.1 Reactor, filter and cable resistance at the converter output
Overview
Components between the converter and the motor influence the closed-loop control quality of
the converter:
● Output reactor
In the factory setting, the converter assumes for the motor data identification that no output
reactor is connected at the converter output.
● Motor cable with unusually high cable resistance.
For the motor data identification, the converter assumes a cable resistance = 20 % of the
stator resistance of the cold motor.
Function description
You must correctly set the components between the converter and motor to achieve an
optimum closed-loop control quality
Procedure
1. Set p0010 = 2.
2. Set the cable resistance in p0352.
3. Set p0230 to the appropriate value.
4. Set p0235 to the appropriate value.
5. Set p0010 = 0.
6. Carry out the quick commissioning and the motor identification again.
Quick commissioning using the BOP-2 operator panel (Page 159)
You have set the reactor, filter and cable resistance between the converter and motor.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
376 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter 1
p0230 Drive filter type, motor side 0
p0235 Number of motor reactors in series 1
p0350[M] Motor stator resistance, cold 0Ω
p0352[M] Cable resistance 0Ω
For additional information on parameters, please refer to the parameter list.
6.7.2 V/f control
6.7.2.1 U/f control
Overview
6SHHGVHWSRLQW 2XWSXWIUHTXHQF\
QൺI
U U
6RIWVWDUW
0 8
IVHW 8VHW 2XWSXWYROWDJH
Q I U
6OLSFRPSHQVD ,
TBVHW
9IFKDUDFWHUL
WLRQ VWLF
&XUUHQWVHWSRLQW,TBVHW 9ROWDJHERRVW
U
1)
In the "Flux Current Control (FCC)" U/f version, the converter controls the motor current (starting
current) at low speeds.
Figure 6-67 Simplified function diagram of the U/f control
The U/f control is a speed feedforward control with the following properties:
● The converter sets the output voltage on the basis of the U/f characteristic.
● The output frequency is essentially calculated from the speed setpoint and the number of
pole pairs of the motor.
● The slip compensation corrects the output frequency depending on the load and thus
increases the speed accuracy.
● The omission of a control loop means that the U/f control is stable in all cases.
● In applications with higher speed accuracy requirements, a load-dependent voltage boost
can be selected (flux current control, FCC)
For operation of the motor with U/f control, you must set at least the following subfunctions
appropriate for your application:
● V/f characteristic
● Voltage boost
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 377
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
Function description
The converter has different U/f characteristics.
0D[LPXPRXWSXW /LQHDU
YROWDJH
U
S
5DWHGPRWRUIUHTXHQF\
(&2
PRGH 6HOHFWLRQRIWKH
FKDUDFWHULVWLF
)&& S
U
2
,TBVHW
IVHW 8VHW
1
S
3DUDEROLF
U
1
S
① The voltage boost of the characteristic optimizes motor start-up
② With flux current control (FCC), the converter compensates the voltage drop across the stator re‐
sistance of the motor
Figure 6-68 U/f characteristics of the converter
With increasing speed or output frequency, the converter increases its output voltage U. The
maximum possible output voltage of the converter depends on the line voltage.
The converter can increase the output frequency even at the maximum output voltage. The
motor is then operated with field weakening.
The value of the output voltage at the rated motor frequency also depends on the following
variables:
The value of the output voltage at the rated motor frequency p0310 also depends on the
following variables:
● Ratio between the converter size and the motor size
● Line voltage
● Line impedance
● Actual motor torque
The maximum possible output voltage as a function of the input voltage is stated in the technical
data.
SINAMICS G120X converter
378 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
General converter technical data (Page 1086)
Table 6-95 Linear and parabolic characteristics
Requirement Application examples Remark Characteristic Parameter
The required tor‐ Eccentric-worm pump, - Linear p1300 = 0
que is independ‐ compressor The converter compensates for the voltage Linear with Flux p1300 = 1
ent of the speed drops across the stator resistance. Recom‐ Current Control
mended for motors of less than 7.5 kW. (FCC)
Precondition: The motor data has been set
according to the rating plate and the motor
has been identified after the basic commis‐
sioning.
The required tor‐ Centrifugal pumps, radi‐ Lower losses in the motor and converter Parabolic p1300 = 2
que increases with al fans, axial fans, com‐ than with the linear characteristic.
the speed pressors
Table 6-96 Characteristics for special applications
Requirement Application examples Remark Characteristic Parameter
Applications with a Centrifugal pumps, radi‐ The ECO mode saves more energy than ECO mode p1300 = 4
low dynamic re‐ al fans, axial fans the parabolic characteristic. (linear char‐
sponse and con‐ If the speed setpoint is reached and re‐ acteristic
stant speed mains unchanged for 5 seconds, the con‐ ECO)
verter reduces its output voltage again. or
p1300 = 7
(parabolic
characteris‐
tic ECO)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 379
380
U
Figure 6-69
)O\LQJUHVWDUW 6OLS 8I5HVBGDPS
9GFBFWUO 6SHHGDFWXDO
PRGH FRPSHQVDWLRQ JDLQ
FRQILJ YDOXH
S S SS S
FDOFXODWLRQ
>@ >@
6.7 Motor control
>@ 6SHHGVHWSRLQW >@
VXP>USP@
Function diagram
>@
5)*VHWSDW U
FP 6300
LQS>USP@ IBRXWS>+]@
5DPS
>@ U IXQFWLRQ U
Advanced commissioning
>@
JHQHUDWRU 0RW3ROH3DLU1RDFW
U>0@
,BPD[BFWUOIBRXWS>USP@ 2XWSXWIUHTXHQF\>+]@
U PV U
,BPD[UHGXFWLRQ 7UDQVIRUPDWLRQ
>@ ,PD[FORVHGORRS DQJOH
&XUUHQWPD[>$UPV@
IUHTXHQF\
U
,BPD[30 FRQWURO =6:FOORRSFWUO
>@
SS U ,BPD[BFWUO8BRXWS>9UPV@ 8BDQJOH
3BDFW>N:@ 0,1
ದ U U >@
> @ U>@ ,PD[FORVHGORRS
! YROWDJHFRQWURO
383BUDWHG>N:@
U>@ SS
,BDFWDEVYDO>$UPV@
>@ U>@
&RQWUROPRGH 8BRXWSXW>9UPV@
,TBVHW>$UPV@ S U
U 9BERRVWSHUP
S
IBVHW 9BVHW
9BERRVWDFFHOHUDWH >@
S
9BERRVWVWDUWLQJ 2XWSXWYROWDJH>9UPV@
S 8I(FRIDFDFWY>@
PV U
(FRPRGH U
>@
! 30 7KHLQYHUWHUFDOFXODWHVWKHFXUUHQWOLPLWRXWRIU>@LQJHQHUDWLYHRSHUDWLRQ
9HFWRUFRQWURO8IFRQWURO
8IFRQWURORYHUYLHZ
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
SINAMICS G120X converter
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
r0025 CO: Output voltage, smoothed - Vrms
r0066 CO: Output frequency - Hz
r0071 Output voltage, maximum - Vrms
p0304[M] Rated motor voltage 0 Vrms
p0310[M] Rated motor frequency 0 Hz
p1300[D] Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode See parameter list
p1333[D] U/f control FCC starting frequency 0 Hz
p1334[D] U/f control slip compensation starting frequency 0 Hz
p1335[D] Slip compensation scaling 0%
p1338[D] U/f mode resonance damping gain 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 381
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
6.7.2.2 Optimizing motor starting
Overview
After selection of the U/f characteristic, no further settings are required in most applications.
In the following circumstances, the motor cannot accelerate to its speed setpoint after it has
been switched on:
● Load moment of inertia too high
● Load torque too large
● Ramp-up time p1120 too short
To improve the starting behavior of the motor, a voltage boost can be set for the U/f
characteristic at low speeds.
Precondition
The ramp-up time of the ramp-function generator is, depending on the motor rated power, 1 s
(< 1 kW) … 10 s (> 10 kW).
Function description
Setting the voltage boost for U/f control
The converter boosts the voltage corresponding to the starting currents p1310 … p1312.
8
0D[LPXPRXWSXW
YROWDJH
U
S
S
S
S I
5DWHGPRWRU
IUHTXHQF\
Figure 6-70 The resulting voltage boost using a linear characteristic as example
Increase parameter values p1310 … p1312 in steps of ≤ 5 %. Excessively high values in
p1310 ... p1312 can cause the motor to overheat and switch off (trip) the converter due to
overcurrent.
If message A07409 appears, it is not permissible that you further increase the value of any of
the parameters.
Procedure
1. Switch on the motor with a setpoint of a few revolutions per minute.
2. Check whether the motor rotates smoothly.
SINAMICS G120X converter
382 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
3. If the motor does not rotate smoothly, or even remains stationary, increase the voltage boost
p1310 until the motor runs smoothly.
4. Accelerate the motor to the maximum speed with maximum load.
5. Check that the motor follows the setpoint.
6. If necessary, increase the voltage boost p1311 until the motor accelerates without problem.
In applications with a high break loose torque, you must also increase parameter p1312 in order
to achieve a satisfactory motor response.
You have set the voltage boost.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 383
384
/LQHDU
9ROWDJHPD[>9UPV@
9ROWDJHPD[U
U
0RW8BUDWHGS
Figure 6-71
'HSHQGHQWRQ
6.7 Motor control
2SFOOSFWUOBPRGH
WKHORDGFXUUHQW (&20RGH U
)OX[FXUUHQWFRQWURO 8I(FRIDFDFWY>@ S>'@
Function diagrams
0RWIBUDWHG
FP 6301
)&&
S>0@
9ROWDJHPD[>9UPV@
9ROWDJHPD[U
U
Advanced commissioning
0RW8BUDWHGS
>@
U
,TBVHW>$UPV@
0RWIBUDWHG
8I)&&IBVWDUW 0RWIBUDWHG S
S>'@ S>0@
9ROWDJHPD[U
0RW8BUDWHGS
IBVHW
>@
3DUDEROLF
,BVWDUW 8D SHUP
5BVWDWRUDFW
S>'@ &XUUHQWPD[>$UPV@
U 8BERRVWWRWDO>9UPV@
=6:FOORRSFWUO U
5)*=6: U U
U U 0RW,BUDWHG
U S
,BVWDUWDFFHO
S>'@
,BVWDUWVWDUW =6:FOORRSFWUO
S>'@ ! U
U
! SLVRQO\DFWLYHDWWKHILUVWDFFHOHUDWLRQDIWHUWKHPRWRULVVZLWFKHGRQ
9HFWRUFRQWURO8IFRQWURO
8IFRQWUROFKDUDFWHULVWLFDQGYROWDJHERRVW
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
SINAMICS G120X converter
8IUHVRQDQFHGDPSLQJ 8IVOLSFRPSHQVDWLRQ
Figure 6-72
8I5HVBGDPSJDLQ
S>'@
FP 6310
SINAMICS G120X converter
>@
ದ
8I5HVBGDPS7
>PV@
S >'@
6OLSFRPSVFDO 6OLSFRPSOLPYDO
,TBDFW>$UPV@ >@ >@
S>'@ S>'@
U
0RWVOLSBUDWHG>+]@
>@
U>0@
IB6OLS>+]@ >@
U PV
>@
6OLSFRPSDFWYDO>@
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
U
II0RW1 0RWVOLSBUDWHG>+]@
U>0@
!
IBRXWS>+]@ 8IUHVBGDPSIBPD[ =6:FOORRSFWUO
U >+]@ U
>@ S >'@ U
>@
S II0RW1
S
! ,IS WKHOLPLWLV yI0RW1ื+]
9HFWRUFRQWURO8IFRQWURO
8IFRQWURO5HVRQDQFHGDPSLQJDQGVOLSFRPSHQVDWLRQ
Advanced commissioning
385
6.7 Motor control
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
Parameter
Number Name Factory setting
r0071 Output voltage, maximum Vrms
p0310[M] Rated motor frequency 0 Hz
p1310[D] Starting current (voltage boost) permanent 50%
p1311[D] Starting current (voltage boost) when accelerating 0%
p1312[D] Starting current (voltage boost) when starting 0%
Further information is provided in the parameter list.
SINAMICS G120X converter
386 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
6.7.2.3 U/f control with Standard Drive Control
Overview
6SHHGVHWSRLQW 2XWSXWIUHTXHQF\
QൺI
U U
0 8
IVHW 8VHW 2XWSXWYROWDJH
Q I U
6OLSFRPSHQVD ,TBVHW 8IFKDUDFWHUL
WLRQ VWLF
&XUUHQWVHWSRLQW,TBVHW 9ROWDJHERRVW
U
Figure 6-73 Default setting of the U/f control after selecting Standard Drive Control
Selecting application class Standard Drive Control in the quick commissioning adapts the
structure and the setting options of the U/f control as follows:
● Starting current closed-loop control: At low speeds, a controlled motor current reduces the
tendency of the motor to oscillate.
● With increasing speed, the converter changes from closed-loop starting current control to U/
f control with load-dependent voltage boost.
● The slip compensation is activated.
● Soft starting is not possible.
● Reduced setting options
Function description
Characteristics after selecting the application class Standard Drive Control
0D[LPXPRXWSXW /LQHDU
YROWDJH
U
IVHW
7HFKQRORJLFDODSSOLFDWLRQ
,TBVHW
S S
5DWHGPRWRUIUHTXHQF\
8VHW
3DUDEROLF
U
IVHW
,TBVHW
S
① The closed-loop starting current control optimizes the speed control at low speeds
② The converter compensates the voltage drop across the motor stator resistance
Figure 6-74 Characteristics after selecting Standard Drive Control
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 387
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
The application class Standard Drive Control reduces the number of characteristics and setting
options:
● A linear and a parabolic characteristic are available.
● Selecting a technological application defines the characteristics.
Table 6-97 Linear and parabolic characteristics
Requirement Application exam‐ Remark Charac‐ Parameter
ples teristic
The required Eccentric-worm - Linear p0501 = 0
torque is inde‐ pump, compressor
pendent of the
speed
The required Centrifugal Lower losses in the motor and con‐ Parabol‐ p0501 = 1
torque increa‐ pumps, radial verter than with the linear charac‐ ic
ses with the fans, axial fans teristic.
speed
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
r0025 CO: Output voltage, smoothed - Vrms
r0066 CO: Output frequency - Hz
r0071 Output voltage, maximum - Vrms
p0310[M] Rated motor frequency 0 Hz
p501 Technology application 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
388 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
6.7.2.4 Optimizing the motor start-up for application class Standard Drive Control
Overview
After selecting application class Standard Drive Control, in most applications no additional
settings need to be made.
At standstill, the converter ensures that at least the rated motor magnetizing current flows.
Magnetizing current p0320 approximately corresponds to the no-load current at 50% … 80%
of the rated motor speed.
In the following circumstances, the motor cannot accelerate to its speed setpoint after it has
been switched on:
● Load moment of inertia too high
● Load torque too large
● Ramp-up time p1120 too short
The current can be increased at low speeds to improve the starting behavior of the motor.
Precondition
The ramp-up time of the ramp-function generator is, depending on the motor rated power, 1 s
(< 1 kW) … 10 s (> 10 kW).
Function description
Starting current (boost) after selecting the application class Standard Drive Control
8
0D[LPXPRXWSXW
YROWDJH
U
S
S
S
S
S I
5DWHGPRWRU
IUHTXHQF\
Figure 6-75 The resulting voltage boost using a linear characteristic as example
The converter boosts the voltage corresponding to the starting currents p1310 … p1312.
Increase parameter values p1310 … p1312 in steps of ≤ 5 %. Excessively high values in
p1310 ... p1312 can cause the motor to overheat and switch off (trip) the converter due to
overcurrent.
If message A07409 appears, it is not permissible that you further increase the value of any of
the parameters.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 389
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
Procedure
1. Switch on the motor with a setpoint of a few revolutions per minute.
2. Check whether the motor rotates smoothly.
3. If the motor does not rotate smoothly, or even remains stationary, increase the voltage boost
p1310 until the motor runs smoothly.
4. Accelerate the motor with the maximum load.
5. Check that the motor follows the setpoint.
6. If necessary, increase the voltage boost p1311 until the motor accelerates without problem.
In applications with a high break loose torque, you must also increase parameter p1312 in order
to achieve a satisfactory motor response.
You have set the voltage boost.
❒
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
r0071 Output voltage, maximum Vrms
p0310[M] Rated motor frequency 0 Hz
p0320[M] Rated motor magnetizing current / short-circuit current 0 Arms
p1310[D] Starting current (voltage boost) permanent 50%
p1311[D] Starting current (voltage boost) when accelerating 0%
p1312[D] Starting current (voltage boost) when starting 0%
SINAMICS G120X converter
390 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
6.7.3 Encoderless vector control
6.7.3.1 Structure of vector control without encoder (sensorless)
Overview
The vector control comprises closed-loop current control and a higher-level closed-loop speed
control.
2XWSXWIUHTXHQF\
0D[LPXPVSHHG
&DOFXODWHDFFHOHUD 6OLS
S 0HDVXUHG
WLRQWRUTXH 7RUTXH YROWDJH
&DOFXODWH SUHFRQWURO 0RWRUDQGFXUUHQWPRGHO
VSHHGOLPLWV
0HDVXUHG
7UDQVIRU FXUUHQW
7, PDWLRQ
.3 7RUTXH 2XWSXWYROWDJH
6SHHGVHWSRLQW VHWSRLQW
7UDQVIRU
PDWLRQ
6SHHGFRQWUROOHU
,TFRQWUROOHU 9ROWDJHDQJOH
&DOFXODWHGVSHHG
DFWXDOYDOXH
&XUUHQWOLPLW
S )OX[VHWSRLQW ,GFRQWUROOHU
8SSHUWRUTXHOLPLW &DOFXODWH 6WDWLFWRUTXHVHWSRLQW
S WRUTXHOLPLWV S
/RZHUWRUTXHOLPLW 6XSSOHPHQWDU\DFFHOHUDWLRQWRUTXH
S S
3RZHUOLPLWZKHQPRWRULQJ 3RZHUOLPLWZKHQJHQHUDWLQJ
S S
1)
for induction motors
2)
Settings that are required
Figure 6-76 Simplified function diagram for sensorless vector control with speed controller
Using the motor model, the converter calculates the following closed-loop control signals from
the measured phase currents and the output voltage:
● Current component Iq
● Current component Iq
● Speed actual value
The setpoint of the current component Id (flux setpoint) is obtained from the motor data. For
speeds above the rated speed, the converter reduces the flux setpoint along the field
weakening characteristic.
When the speed setpoint is increased, the speed controller responds with a higher setpoint for
current component Iq (torque setpoint). The closed-loop control responds to a higher torque
setpoint by adding a higher slip frequency to the output frequency. The higher output frequency
also results in a higher motor slip, which is proportional to the accelerating torque. Iq and
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 391
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
Idcontrollers keep the motor flux constant using the output voltage, and adjust the matching
current component Iq in the motor.
Settings that are required
Restart quick commissioning and select the vector control in quick commissioning.
Commissioning (Page 151)
In order to achieve a satisfactory control response, as a minimum you must set the partial
functions – shown with gray background in the diagram above – to match your particular
application:
● Motor and current model: In the quick commissioning, correctly set the motor data on the
rating plate corresponding to the connection type (Y/Δ), and carry out the motor data
identification routine at standstill.
● Speed limits and torque limits: In the quick commissioning, set the maximum speed (p1082)
and current limit (p0640) to match your particular application. When exiting quick
commissioning, the converter calculates the torque and power limits corresponding to the
current limit. The actual torque limits are obtained from the converted current and power
limits and the set torque limits.
● Speed controller: Start the rotating measurement of the motor data identification. You must
manually optimize the controller if the rotating measurement is not possible.
SINAMICS G120X converter
392 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
QBFWUO6/.S QBFWUO6/7Q
>PV@
S>'@ S>'@
! .SBQBEDVLF
Figure 6-77
)URP.S7QDGDSWDWLRQ 7QBQBEDVLF 7R.S7QDGDSWDWLRQ
7QBQBDGDSW
>@ .SBQBDGDSW >@
> @
QBFWUOFRQILJ .S7QDGDSWDWLRQDFWLYH
S
Function diagrams
QBFWU7QHII>PV@
FP 6040
QBFWUOFRQILJ '\QDPLFUHGXFWLRQILHOG U
SINAMICS G120X converter
S ZHDNHQLQJ
> @ QBFWU.SHII
$XWRPDWLF.S7QDGDSWDWLRQDFWLYH
U
6SHHGFRQWUROOHU
QBFWUOV\VGHY>USP@
.S .S 7Q
U
QBFWUOQBVHW>USP@ .S 0BVHWIURPVSHHGFRQWUROOHU
>@ U >@
QB&QBDFW7BV6/
>PV@ ದ 0BPD[XSSHUHII>1P@
S>'@ >@ U
$FWXDOVSHHG>USP@ QBDFWVPRRWK>USP@ 0BPD[ORZHUHII>1P@
U U >@ U
.S 7Q
ದ QBFWUO,0BRXWS>1P@
QBVHW,BFRPS
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
>@ U
6HW
(QDEOHVSHHGFRQWUROOHU +ROG 6HW 9DO =6:QBFWUO
IURPVHTXHQFHFRQWURO6 2SHUDWLRQ U
U >@
6SHHGFRQWUROOHUDFWLYH
=6:QBFWUO
U
U >@
,QWHJUDWRUFRQWURO 6SHHGFRQWUROOHU,FRPSRQHQWKHOG
=6:QBFWUO
U
U >@
>@ 7RUTXHVHWWLQJYDOXHVSHHGFRQWUROOHU 6SHHGFRQWUROOHU,FRPSRQHQWVHW
> @
=6:QBFWUO
>@ U 7RUTXHOLPLWUHDFKHG
U
! )RUS VRUVWKHFRQYHUWHUGLVDEOHVWKH,FRPSRQHQW LQWHJUDODFWLRQWLPH LQILQLWH
9HFWRUFRQWURO8IFRQWURO
6SHHGFRQWUROOHU
Advanced commissioning
393
6.7 Motor control
394
Figure 6-78
6.7 Motor control
FP 6050
6SHHGGHSHQGHQW.SBQ7QBQDGDSWDWLRQ
Advanced commissioning
.SBQBEDVLF .S
>@
$FWXDOVSHHG>USP@ .S .SBQBDGDSW
Q 7RWKHVSHHGFRQWUROOHU>@
U>@
QBFWU.SQXSVFDO
>@ Q
S>'@
QBFWUOQXSSHU !
>PLQ@
S>'@
QBFWUOQORZHU !
>PLQ@
S>'@
QBFWU7QQXSVFDO \
>@
S>'@ Q 7Q 7QBQBDGDSW
[ 7RWKHVSHHGFRQWUROOHU>@
>@
7QBQBEDVLF
! ,IWKHORZHUWUDQVLWLRQSRLQWH[FHHGVWKHXSSHUWUDQVLWLRQSRLQWWKH.SDGDSWDWLRQDOVRFKDQJHVRYHU
9HFWRUFRQWURO8IFRQWURO
.SBQ7QBQDGDSWDWLRQ
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
SINAMICS G120X converter
0BDFFHO7BVPRRWK
>PV@
! ! S>'@ ! !
0BDFFHO>1P@ 0BDFFHO>1P@
Figure 6-79
!
U>@ U>@
&DOFXODWHGDFFHOHUDWLQJWRUTXH
>@
FP 6060
0BPD[XSSHUHII>1P@ =6:FOORRSFWUO
SINAMICS G120X converter
>@ U U
0BPD[XSZRRIIV U
S>&@ >@
=6:QBFWUO
0BPD[XSZRRIIV>1P@ 0BPD[RXWSQBFWUO>1P@ ุ U
>@ U U
U>@
>@
=6:QBFWUO
U
U =6:QBFWUO
>@ U
U
0BVHWEHI0BVXSSO>1P@
>@
U
>@ !
0BVHW>1P@
0BVHWIURPWKHVSHHGFRQWUROOHU
>@ U
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
=6:QBFWUO >@
7RUTXH
U > @
U OLPLWLQJ
>@ =6:QBFWUO
0BPD[ORZZRRIIV =6:QBFWUO U
S>&@ U U
U >@
>@
0BPD[ORZZRRIIV>1P@ 0BPD[RXWSQBFWUO>1P@
>@ U U>@
0BPD[ORZHUHII>1P@
>@ U
! 7KHVLJQDOLVRQO\HIIHFWLYHDIWHUPDJQHWL]DWLRQKDVEHHQFRPSOHWHG U
! 1RSUHFRQWUROLIWKH9GFFRQWUROOHULVDFWLYH>@
! $FFHOHUDWLRQFRQWUROLVLQKLELWHGIRUS PV
! 0BVHWLVDOVRLQIOXHQFHGE\WKHVSHHGOLPLWFRQWUROOHU
9HFWRUFRQWURO8IFRQWURO
7RUTXHVHWSRLQW
Advanced commissioning
395
6.7 Motor control
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
Default settings after selecting the application class Dynamic Drive Control
Selecting application class Dynamic Drive Control adapts the structure of the vector control and
reduces the setting options:
Vector control after se‐ Vector control without select‐
lecting the application ing an application class
class Dynamic Drive
Control
Hold or set the integral component of the Not possible Possible
speed controller
Acceleration model for precontrol Default setting Can be activated
Motor data identification at standstill or with ro‐ Shortened, with option‐ Complete
tating measurement al transition into opera‐
tion
6.7.3.2 Optimizing the speed controller
Optimum control response - post optimization not required
Preconditions for assessing the controller response:
● The moment of inertia of the load is constant and does not depend on the speed
● The converter does not reach the set torque limits during acceleration
● You operate the motor in the range 40 % … 60 % of its rated speed
If the motor exhibits the following response, the speed control is well set and you do not have
to adapt the speed controller manually:
The speed setpoint (broken line) increases with the set ramp-
up time and rounding.
The speed actual value follows the setpoint without any over‐
shoot.
W
SINAMICS G120X converter
396 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
Control optimization required
In some cases, the self optimization result is not satisfactory, or self optimization is not possible
as the motor cannot freely rotate.
Initially, the speed actual value follows the speed setpoint with
some delay, and then overshoots the speed setpoint.
First, the actual speed value increases faster than the speed
setpoint. Before the setpoint reaches its final value, it passes
the actual value. Finally, the actual value approaches the set‐
point without any significant overshoot.
W
In the two cases describe above, we recommend that you manually optimize the speed control.
Optimizing the speed controller
Requirements
● Torque precontrol is active: p1496 = 100 %.
● The load moment of inertia is constant and independent of the speed.
● The converter requires 10 % … 50 % of the rated torque to accelerate.
When necessary, adapt the ramp-up and ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator
(p1120 and p1121).
Procedure
1. Switch on the motor.
2. Enter a speed setpoint of approximately 40 % of the rated speed.
3. Wait until the actual speed has stabilized.
4. Increase the setpoint up to a maximum of 60% of the rated speed.
5. Monitor the associated characteristic of the setpoint and actual speed.
6. Optimize the controller by adapting the ratio of the moments of inertia of the load and motor
(p0342):
Initially, the speed actual value follows the speed setpoint with
some delay, and then overshoots the speed setpoint.
● Increase p0342
Initially, the speed actual value increases faster than the speed
setpoint. The setpoint passes the actual value before reaching its
final value. Finally, the actual value approaches the setpoint with‐
out any overshoot.
W ● Reduce p0342
7. Switch off the motor.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 397
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
8. Set p0340 = 4. The converter again calculates the speed controller parameters.
9. Switch on the motor.
10.Over the complete speed range check as to whether the speed control operates
satisfactorily with the optimized settings.
You have optimized the speed controller.
❒
When necessary, set the ramp-up and ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator
(p1120 and p1121) back to the value before optimization.
Mastering critical applications
The drive control can become unstable for drives with a high load moment of inertia and
gearbox backlash or a coupling between the motor and load that can possibly oscillate. In this
case, we recommend the following settings:
● Increase p1452 (smoothing the speed actual value).
● Increase p1472 (integral time TI): TI ≥ 4 · p1452
● If, after these measures, the speed controller does not operate with an adequate dynamic
performance, then increase p1470 (gain KP) step-by-step.
Parameters
Table 6-98 Encoderless speed control
Number Name Factory setting
p0342[M] Ratio between the total and motor moments of inertia 1
p1452 Speed controller actual speed value smoothing time (enco‐ 10 ms
derless)
p1470[D] Speed controller encoderless operation P gain 0.3
p1472[D] Speed controller encoderless operation integral time 20 ms
p1496[D] Acceleration precontrol scaling 0%
6.7.4 Electrically braking the motor
Overview
Braking with the motor in generator operation
If the motor brakes the connected load electrically, it converts the kinetic energy of the motor
into electrical energy. The electrical energy E released on braking the load is proportional to the
moment of inertia J of the motor and load and to the square of the speed n. The motor attempts
to pass the energy on to the converter.
SINAMICS G120X converter
398 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
Main features of the braking functions
DC braking
DC braking prevents the motor from transferring the braking en‐
ergy to the converter. The converter impresses a DC current into
the motor, which brakes the motor. The motor converts the brak‐
ing energy E of the load into heat.
● Advantage: The motor brakes the load without the converter Q
having to process regenerative power.
● Disadvantages: significant increase in the motor temperature;
no defined braking characteristics; no constant braking Q
torque; no braking torque at standstill; braking energy E is lost
as heat; does not function when the power fails ( ˭-Q
Compound braking W
One version of DC braking. The converter brakes the motor with
a defined ramp-down time and superimposes a DC current on the
output current.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 399
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
6.7.4.1 DC braking
Function description
NOTICE
Motor overheating as a result of DC braking
The motor will overheat if you use DC braking too frequently or use it for too long. This may
damage the motor.
● Monitor the motor temperature.
● Allow the motor to adequately cool down between braking operations.
● If necessary, select another motor braking method.
With DC braking, the converter outputs an internal OFF2 command for the time that it takes to
de-energize the motor p0347 - and then impresses the braking current for the duration of the
DC braking.
The DC-braking function is possible only for induction motors.
4 different events initiate DC braking
DC braking when falling below a starting speed
Q Precondition:
2))
p1230 = 1 and p1231 = 14
6WDUWVSHHG
Function:
W 1. The motor speed has exceeded the
S 7LPH starting speed.
'&EUDNLQJ LQWHUYDO 2. The converter activates the DC braking as
DFWLYH soon as the motor speed falls below the
W
starting speed.
DC braking when a fault occurs
)DXOWDFWLYH Precondition:
W Fault number and fault response are assigned
Q 2)) via p2100 and p2101.
2))
Function:
6WDUWVSHHG
1. A fault occurs, which initiates DC braking
W as response.
S 7LPH 2. The motor brakes along the down ramp to
LQWHUYDO the speed for the start of DC braking.
'&EUDNLQJ
DFWLYH 3. DC braking starts.
W
SINAMICS G120X converter
400 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
DC braking initiated by a control command
'&EUDNLQJ Precondition:
VHOHFWHG
W p1231 = 4 and p1230 = control command, e.g.
Q 2))
p1230 = 722.3 (control command via DI 3)
Function:
1. The higher-level control issues the
W command for DC braking, e.g. using DI3:
S p1230 = 722.3.
'&EUDNLQJ
DFWLYH 2. DC braking starts.
W
If the higher-level control withdraws the com‐
mand during DC braking, the converter inter‐
rupts DC braking and the motor accelerates to
its setpoint.
DC braking when the motor is switched off
'&EUDNLQJIRU Precondition:
2))2))
p1231 = 5 or p1230 = 1 and p1231 = 14
W
Q 2)) Function:
2))
1. The higher-level control switches off the
6WDUWVSHHG motor (OFF1 or OFF3).
2. The motor brakes along the down ramp to
W
the speed for the start of DC braking.
S 7LPH
'&EUDNLQJ LQWHUYDO 3. DC braking starts.
DFWLYH
W
Parameters
Settings for DC braking
Number Name Factory setting
p0347[M] Motor de-excitation time 0s
p1230[C] BI: DC braking activation 0
p1231[M] Configuring DC braking 0
p1232[M] DC braking, braking current 0 Arms
p1233[M] DC braking duration 1s
p1234[M] Speed at the start of DC braking 210000 rpm
r1239[8…13] CO/BO: DC braking status word -
Table 6-99 Configuring DC braking as a response to faults
Number Name Factory setting
p2100[0…19] Changing the fault reaction, fault number 0
p2101[0…19] Changing the fault reaction, reaction 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 401
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
6.7.4.2 Compound braking
Function description
:LWKRXWFRPSRXQGEUDNLQJ :LWKFRPSRXQGEUDNLQJ
6SHHG
W W $GGLWLYH'&
0RWRUFXUUHQW
W W
'&OLQNYROWDJH
U
W W
Figure 6-80 Motor brakes with and without active compound braking
Compound braking prevents the DC-link voltage increasing above a critical value. The
converter activates compound braking depending on the DC-link voltage. Above a DC-link
voltage threshold (r1282), the converter adds a DC current to the motor current. The DC current
brakes the motor and prevents an excessive increase in the DC-link voltage.
Note
Compound braking is possible only with the U/f control.
Compound braking does not operate in the following cases:
● The "flying restart" function is active
● DC braking is active
● Vector control is selected
NOTICE
Overheating of the motor due to compound braking
The motor will overheat if you use compound braking too frequently or for too long. This may
damage the motor.
● Monitor the motor temperature.
● Allow the motor to adequately cool down between braking operations.
● If necessary, select another motor braking method.
SINAMICS G120X converter
402 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.7 Motor control
Parameter
Table 6-100 Setting and enabling compound braking
Number Name Factory setting
r1282 Vdc_max controller, switch-on level (U/f) -V
p3856[D] Compound braking current (%) 0%
r3859.0 CO/BO: Compound braking/DC quantity control status word -
6.7.5 Pulse frequency wobbling
Note
This function is only available for the converters of frame sizes FSH and FSJ.
Overview
Pulse frequency wobbling damps the spectral components, which can generate unwanted
noise in the motor. Wobbling is activated by default for the converters of frame sizes FSH and
FSJ.
Wobbling causes the pulse frequency in a modulation interval to deviate from the setpoint
frequency. This means that the actual pulse frequency might be higher than the average pulse
frequency required.
A noise generator can be used to vary the pulse frequency around an average value. In this
case, the average pulse frequency is equal to the setpoint pulse frequency. The pulse
frequency can be varied in every current controller cycle if the cycle is constant. Current
measurement errors resulting from asynchronous pulse and control intervals are compensated
by a correction in the actual current value.
Parameter p1811[0...n] can be set to adjust the magnitude of variation in the pulse frequency
wobble between 0 and 20%. The factory setting is 10%. For a wobble amplitude of p1811 = 0%,
the maximum possible pulse frequency is p1800 = 2 × 1/current controller cycle (4 kHz). With
a wobble amplitude setting of p1811 > 0, the maximum possible pulse frequency is p1800 = 1/
current controller cycle (2 kHz). These conditions apply to all indices.
Parameters
Parameter Description Factory setting
p1811 Pulse frequency wobbulation amplitude 10%
For more information about the parameters, see Chapter "Parameter list (Page 470)".
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 403
Advanced commissioning
6.8 Drive protection
6.8 Drive protection
6.8.1 Overcurrent protection
Overview
The U/f control prevents too high a motor current by influencing the output frequency and the
motor voltage (I-max controller).
Requirement
You have selected U/f control.
The application must allow the motor torque to decrease at a lower speed.
Function description
The I-max controller influences the output frequency and the motor voltage.
If the motor current reaches the current limit during acceleration, the I-max controller extends
the acceleration operation.
If the motor load is so high during steady-state operation that the motor current reaches the
current limit, then the I-max controller reduces the speed and the motor voltage until the motor
current returns to the permissible range again.
If the motor current reaches the current limit during deceleration, the I-max controller extends
the deceleration operation.
Parameter
The factory setting for proportional gain and the integral time of the I-max controller ensures
faultless operation in the vast majority of cases.
The factory setting of the I-max controller must only be changed in the following exceptional
cases:
● Speed or torque of the motor tend to cause vibrations upon reaching the current limit.
● The converter goes into the fault state with an overcurrent message.
Table 6-101 I-max controller parameters
Number Name Factory setting
r0056.0 … 13 CO/BO: Status word, closed-loop control -
p0305[M] Rated motor current 0 Arms
p0640[D] Current limit 0 Arms
p1340[D] I_max frequency controller proportional gain 0
p1341[D] I_max frequency controller integral time 0.300 s
r1343 CO: I_max controller frequency output - rpm
SINAMICS G120X converter
404 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.8 Drive protection
You will find more information about this function in function diagram 6300 and in the parameter
list.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 405
Advanced commissioning
6.8 Drive protection
6.8.2 Converter protection using temperature monitoring
Overview
The converter temperature is essentially defined by the following effects:
● The ambient temperature
● The ohmic losses increasing with the output current
● Switching losses increasing with the pulse frequency
Monitoring types
The converter monitors its temperature using the following monitoring types:
● I2t monitoring (alarm A07805, fault F30005)
● Measuring the chip temperature of the Power Module (alarm A05006, fault F30024)
● Measuring the heat sink temperature of the Power Module (alarm A05000, fault F30004)
Function description
Overload response for p0290 = 0
The converter responds depending on the control mode that has been set:
● In vector control, the converter reduces the output current.
● In U/f control, the converter reduces the speed.
Once the overload condition has been removed, the converter re-enables the output current or
speed.
If the measure cannot prevent a converter thermal overload, then the converter switches off the
motor with fault F30024.
Overload response for p0290 = 1
The converter immediately switches off the motor with fault F30024.
Overload response for p0290 = 2
We recommend this setting for drives with square-law torque characteristic, e.g. fans.
SINAMICS G120X converter
406 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.8 Drive protection
The converter responds in 2 stages:
1. If you operate the converter with increased pulse frequency setpoint p1800, then the
converter reduces its pulse frequency starting at p1800.
In spite of the temporarily reduced pulse frequency, the base-load output current remains
unchanged at the value that is assigned to parameter p1800.
%DVHORDGRXWSXWFXUUHQW
%DVHORDGRXWSXWFXUUHQWIRUD
WHPSRUDULO\UHGXFHGSXOVHIUHTXHQF\
S 3XOVHIUHTXHQF\
Figure 6-81 Derating characteristic and base load output current for overload
Once the overload condition has been removed, the converter increases the pulse
frequency back to the pulse frequency setpoint p1800.
2. If it is not possible to temporarily reduce the pulse frequency, or the risk of thermal overload
cannot be prevented, then stage 2 follows:
– In vector control, the converter reduces its output current.
– In U/f control, the converter reduces the speed.
Once the overload condition has been removed, the converter re-enables the output current
or speed.
If both measures cannot prevent a power unit thermal overload, then the converter switches off
the motor with fault F30024.
Overload response for p0290 = 3
If you operate the converter with increased pulse frequency, then the converter reduces its
pulse frequency starting at the pulse frequency setpoint p1800.
In spite of the temporarily reduced pulse frequency, the maximum output current remains
unchanged at the value that is assigned to the pulse frequency setpoint. Also see p0290 = 2.
Once the overload condition has been removed, the converter increases the pulse frequency
back to the pulse frequency setpoint p1800.
If it is not possible to temporarily reduce the pulse frequency, or the measure cannot prevent a
power unit thermal overload, then the converter switches off the motor with fault F30024.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 407
Advanced commissioning
6.8 Drive protection
Overload response for p0290 = 12
The converter responds in 2 stages:
1. If you operate the converter with increased pulse frequency setpoint p1800, then the
converter reduces its pulse frequency starting at p1800.
There is no current derating as a result of the higher pulse frequency setpoint.
Once the overload condition has been removed, the converter increases the pulse
frequency back to the pulse frequency setpoint p1800.
2. If it is not possible to temporarily reduce the pulse frequency, or the risk of converter thermal
overload cannot be prevented, then stage 2 follows:
– In vector control, the converter reduces the output current.
– In U/f control, the converter reduces the speed.
Once the overload condition has been removed, the converter re-enables the output current
or speed.
If both measures cannot prevent a power unit thermal overload, then the converter switches off
the motor with fault F30024.
Overload response for p0290 = 13
We recommend this setting for drives with a high starting torque.
If you operate the converter with increased pulse frequency, then the converter reduces its
pulse frequency starting at the pulse frequency setpoint p1800.
There is no current derating as a result of the higher pulse frequency setpoint.
Once the overload condition has been removed, the converter increases the pulse frequency
back to the pulse frequency setpoint p1800.
If it is not possible to temporarily reduce the pulse frequency, or the measure cannot prevent a
power unit thermal overload, then the converter switches off the motor with fault F30024.
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
r0036 CO: Power unit overload I2t %
r0037[0…19] Power unit temperatures °C
p0290 Power unit overload response 2
p0292[0…1] Power unit temperature alarm threshold [0] 5 °C, [1] 15 °C
p0294 Power Module alarm for I2t overload 95%
SINAMICS G120X converter
408 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.8 Drive protection
6.8.3 Motor protection with temperature sensor
Overview
The converter can evaluate one of the following sensors to protect the motor against
overtemperature:
702725 ● KTY84
702725
● Temperature switch (e.g. bimetallic switch)
702725 ● PTC
702725
˽
● Pt1000
702725
702725
˽
$, ● Pt100
$, Evaluated via a converter analog input
Function description
KTY84 sensor
Using a KTY sensor, the converter monitors the motor temperature in the range -48 °C ...
+248 °C and the sensor itself for wire breakage or short-circuit.
NOTICE
Overheating of the motor due to KTY sensor connected with the incorrect polarity
If a KTY sensor is connected with incorrect polarity, the motor can be damaged by
overheating, as the converter cannot detect a motor overtemperature condition.
● Connect the KTY sensor with the correct polarity.
Settings:
● Temperature monitoring:
– Overtemperature alarm (A07910):
- motor temperature > p0604 and p0610 = 0
– Overtemperature fault (F07011):
The converter responds with a fault in the following cases:
- motor temperature > p0605
- motor temperature > p0604 and p0610 > 0
● Sensor monitoring (A07015 or F07016):
– Wire-break:
The converter interprets a resistance > 2120 Ω as a wire-break and outputs the alarm
A07015. After 100 milliseconds, the converter changes to the fault state with F07016.
– Short-circuit:
The converter interprets a resistance < 50 Ω as a short-circuit and outputs the alarm
A07015. After 100 milliseconds, the converter changes to the fault state with F07016.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 409
Advanced commissioning
6.8 Drive protection
Bimetallic switch
The converter interprets a resistance ≥ 100 Ω as an opened bimetallic switch and responds
according to the setting for p0610.
PTC sensor
˽ The converter interprets a resistance > 1650 Ω as being an overtemperature and responds
according to the setting for p0610.
The converter interprets a resistance < 20 Ω as being a short-circuit and responds with alarm
A07015. If the alarm is present for longer than 100 milliseconds, the converter shuts down with
fault F07016.
Pt1000 sensor
˽ Using a Pt1000 sensor, the converter monitors the motor temperature in the range -48 °C ...
+248 °C and the sensor itself for wire breakage or short-circuit.
Settings:
● Temperature monitoring:
– Overtemperature alarm (A07910):
- motor temperature > p0604 and p0610 = 0
– Overtemperature fault (F07011):
The converter responds with a fault in the following cases:
- motor temperature > p0605
- motor temperature > p0604 and p0610 > 0
● Sensor monitoring (A07015 or F07016):
– Wire-break:
The converter interprets a resistance > 2120 Ω as a wire-break and outputs the alarm
A07015. After 100 milliseconds, the converter changes to the fault state with F07016.
– Short-circuit:
The converter interprets a resistance < 603 Ω as a short-circuit and outputs the alarm
A07015. After 100 milliseconds, the converter changes to the fault state with F07016.
Pt100 sensor
˽ Using a Pt100 sensor, the converter monitors the motor temperature.
When using a Pt100 sensor, you require a free analog output and a free analog input of the
converter.
You can connect the sensor at analog input AI 0 (terminals 3 and 4) as well as at analog input
AI 1 (terminals 11 and 12).
$, $, $, $, $, $,
˽ $, $, ˽ $, $, ˽ $, $,
$2 $2
$2 $2 $2
$2
Figure 6-82 Two-wire connection, three-wire connection and four-wire connection
SINAMICS G120X converter
410 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.8 Drive protection
Settings:
● Analog output AO and analog input AI:
p0776[0] = 0: AO is current output 0 mA … 20 mA, corresponding to the factory setting 0 %
… 100 %
p0756[x] = 0: AI x is voltage input 0 V … 10 V, corresponding to the factory setting 0 % …
100 %. Also set the associated switch on the converter to "U".
p29701 = r0755[x]. x is the number of the analog input where the Pt100 is connected.
p771[0] = r29706.
● Temperature monitoring: The converter evaluates the motor temperature in the range from
-48 °C ... +248 °C.
– Number of Pt100 connected in series: p29700
– Overtemperature alarm (A07910):
- motor temperature > p0604 and p0610 = 0
– Overtemperature fault (F07011):
The converter responds with a fault in the following cases:
- motor temperature > p0605
- motor temperature > p0604 and p0610 > 0
● The converter does not monitor the sensor.
Parameters
Table 6-102 General parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p0335[M] Type of motor cooling 0
p0601[M] Motor temperature sensor type 0
p0604[M] Mot_temp_mod 2/sensor alarm threshold 130 °C
p0605[M] Mot_temp_mod 1/2/sensor threshold and temperature value 145 °C
p0610[M] Motor overtemperature response 12
p0640[D] Current limit 0 Arms
Table 6-103 Additional parameters for Pt100
Number Name Factory setting
p29700[D] Temperature sensor type 0
p29701 CI: Temperature sensor voltage source 0
p29704 Cable resistance 0Ω
r29705 CO: actual temperature sensor value [°C]
r29706 CO: temperature sensor excitation current [%]
r29707 CO: temperature sensor resistance value [Ω]
p29708 Set temperature sensor excitation current 50 %
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 411
Advanced commissioning
6.8 Drive protection
6.8.4 Motor protection by calculating the temperature
Overview
The converter calculates the motor temperature based on a thermal motor model.
The thermal motor model responds far faster to temperature increases than a temperature
sensor.
If the thermal motor model is used together with a temperature sensor, e.g. a Pt1000, then the
converter corrects the model according to the measured temperature.
Function description
Thermal motor model 2 for induction motors
The thermal motor model 2 for induction motors is a thermal 3-mass model, consisting of stator
core, stator winding and rotor. Thermal motor model 2 calculates the temperatures - both in the
rotor as well as in the stator winding.
S S S S S S!
˽ U
L U ˽ U
$
)
ุ
W
Figure 6-83 Thermal motor model 2 for induction motors
Parameters
Table 6-104 Thermal motor model 2 for induction motors
Number Name Factory setting
r0034 CO: Thermal motor load -%
r0068[0 … 1] CO: Absolute actual current value - Arms
p0344[M] Motor weight (for thermal motor model) 0 kg
p0604[M] Mot_temp_mod 2/KTY alarm threshold 130 °C
p0605[M] Mot_temp_mod 1/2/sensor threshold and temperature value 145 °C
p0610[M] Motor overtemperature response 12
p0612[M] Mot_temp_mod activation 0000 0010 0000
0010 bin
p0625[M] Motor ambient temperature during commissioning 20 °C
p0627[M] Motor overtemperature, stator winding 80 K
r0632[M] Mot_temp_mod stator winding temperature - °C
p0640[D] Current limit 0 Arms
Further information is provided in the parameter list.
SINAMICS G120X converter
412 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.8 Drive protection
Thermal motor model 1 for synchronous reluctance motors
Thermal motor model 1 calculates the temperature of the stator winding from the motor current
and the thermal time constant of the motor model.
S S S S S S S
˽
U U
L
˽ U
$
Q U
)
W
Figure 6-84 Thermal motor model 1 for reluctance motors
Parameters
Table 6-105 Thermal motor model 1 for reluctance motors
Number Name Factory setting
r0034 CO: Thermal motor load -%
r0068[0 … 1] CO: Absolute actual current value - Arms
p0318[M] Motor stall current 0 Arms
p0610[M] Motor overtemperature response 12
p0611[M] I2t thermal motor model time constant 0s
p0612[M] Mot_temp_mod activation 0000 0010 0000
0010 bin
p0613[M] Mot_temp_mod 1/3 ambient temperature 20 °C
p0625[M] Motor ambient temperature during commissioning 20 °C
p0627[M] Motor overtemperature, stator winding 80 K
r0632[M] Mot_temp_mod stator winding temperature - °C
p5390[M] Mot_temp_mod 1/3 alarm threshold 110 °C
p5391[M] Mot_temp_mod 1/3 fault threshold 120 °C
Further information is provided in the parameter list.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 413
Advanced commissioning
6.8 Drive protection
6.8.5 Motor and converter protection by limiting the voltage
Overview
An electric motor converts electrical energy into mechanical energy to drive the load. If the
motor is driven by its load, e.g. by the inertia of the load during braking, the energy flow
reverses: The motor operates temporarily as a generator, and converts mechanical energy into
electrical energy. The electrical energy flows from the motor to the converter. The converter
stores the energy in its DC-link capacitors. The DC-link voltage Vdc is consequently higher in
the converter.
An excessively high DC-link voltage damages both the converter and the motor. The converter
therefore monitors its DC-link voltage and, when necessary, switches off the connected motor
and outputs the fault "DC-link overvoltage".
Function description
Protecting the motor and converter against overvoltage
6SHHG
U
'&OLQNYROWDJH U
9GFBPD[
6ZLWFKLQOHYHO9GFBPD[
FRQWUROOHU
W
9GFBPD[FRQWUROOHUDFWLYH
Q Q Q
PRWRULQJ JHQHUDWLQJ PRWRULQJ
Figure 6-85 Simplified representation of the Vdc_max control
The Vdc_max control lengthens the motor ramp-down time when braking. Consequently, the
motor feeds only so much energy back into the converter to cover the losses in the converter.
The DC-link voltage remains within the permissible range.
Electrically braking the motor (Page 398)
SINAMICS G120X converter
414 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.8 Drive protection
Parameters
The parameters differ depending on the motor control mode.
Table 6-106 Parameters for U/f control
Number Name Factory setting
p0210 Device supply voltage 400 V
p1280[D] Vdc controller configuration (U/f) 1
r1282 Vdc_max controller, switch-on level (U/f) -V
p1283[D] Vdc_max controller, dynamic factor (U/f) 100%
p1284[D] Vdc_max controller, time threshold (U/f) 4s
p1290[D] Vdc controller proportional gain (U/f) 1
p1291[D] Vdc controller integral time (U/f) 40 ms
p1292[D] Vdc controller derivative-action time (U/f) 10 ms
p1294 Vdc_max controller ON level for automatic detection (U/f) 0
Table 6-107 Parameters for vector control
Number Name Factory setting
p0210 Device supply voltage 400 V
p1240[D] Vdc controller configuration (vector control) 1
r1242 Vdc_max controller, switch-on level -V
p1243[D] Vdc_max controller, dynamic factor 100%
p1250[D] Vdc controller proportional gain 1
p1251[D] Vdc controller integral time 0 ms
p1252[D] Vdc controller derivative-action time 0 ms
p1254 Vdc_max controller ON level for automatic detection 0
Further information is provided in the parameter list.
6.8.6 Monitoring the driven load
In many applications, the speed and the torque of the motor can be used to determine whether
the driven load is in an impermissible operating state. The use of an appropriate monitoring
function in the converter prevents failures and damage to the machine or plant.
Examples:
● For fans, an excessively low torque indicates a torn drive belt.
● For pumps, insufficient torque can indicate a leakage or dry-running.
● The motor can be blocked by an excessively high torque at a low speed.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 415
Advanced commissioning
6.8 Drive protection
Functions for monitoring the driven load
The converter provides the following means to monitor the driven load via the torque of the
motor:
0 The stall protection recognizes a stalled asynchronous motor.
The no-load monitoring evaluates the motor current. Insufficient current indicates
that the motor and the load are no longer mechanically connected with each other.
The blocking protection triggers for a motor current that corresponds to the set
current limit coupled with motor standstill.
The torque monitoring assumes that a specific torque is associated with each
speed for pumps and fans. Insufficient torque indicates that the motor and the load
are no longer mechanically connected.
An excessive torque can indicate problems in the mechanical system of the driven
load, e.g. a mechanically blocked load.
Blocking protection, leakage protection and dry-running protection are a monitor‐
ing method for pumps or fans. The monitoring combines a torque monitoring with
a blocking protection.
Monitoring the driven load with a binary signal:
The speed monitoring evaluates a periodic binary signal. A signal failure indicates
that the motor and the load are no longer mechanically connected with each other.
SINAMICS G120X converter
416 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.8 Drive protection
6.8.6.1 Stall protection
Function description
0 If the load of a standard induction motor exceeds the stall torque of the motor, the motor can
also stall during operation on the converter. A stalled motor is stationary and does not develop
Q sufficient torque to accelerate the load.
If the "Motor model fault signal stall detection" r1746 for the time p2178 is present via the "Motor
model error threshold stall detection" p1745, the converter signals "Motor stalled" and fault
F07902.
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
r1408[0 … 14] CO/BO: Status word, current controller -
p1745[D] Motor model error threshold stall detection 5%
r1746 Motor model fault signal stall detection -%
p2178[D] Motor stalled delay time 0.01 s
r2198 CO/BO: Status word monitoring functions 2 -
6.8.6.2 No-load monitoring
Function description
An inadequate motor current indicates an interruption in the power transmission from the motor
to the load.
If the motor current for the time p2180 lies below the current level p2179, the converter signals
"output load not available" and alarm A07929.
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
r0068[0 … 1] CO: Absolute actual current value - Arms
p2179[D] Output load detection current limit 0 Arms
p2180[D] Output load detection delay time 2000 ms
r2197[0 … 13] CO/BO: Status word monitoring functions 1 -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 417
Advanced commissioning
6.8 Drive protection
6.8.6.3 Blocking protection
Function description
If the mechanical load is too high, the motor may block. For a blocked motor, the motor current
corresponds to the set current limit without the speed reaching the specified setpoint.
If the speed lies below the speed threshold p2175 for the time p2177 while the motor current
reaches the current limit, the converter signals "Motor blocked" and fault F07900.
Parameters
Number Name Factory settings
p0045 Display values of smoothing time constant 4 ms
r0063 CO: Speed actual value - rpm
p2175[D] Motor blocked speed threshold 120 rpm
p2177[D] Motor blocked delay time 3s
r2198 Status word monitoring functions 2 -
SINAMICS G120X converter
418 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.8 Drive protection
6.8.6.4 Torque monitoring
Function description
In applications with fans, pumps or compressors with the flow characteristic, the torque follows
the speed according to a specific characteristic. An insufficient torque for fans indicates that the
power transmission from the motor to the load is interrupted. For pumps, insufficient torque can
indicate a leakage or dry-running.
The converter monitors the torque based on the envelope curve depending on the speed
against a lower and upper torque.
7RUTXH>1P@
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGXSSHUS
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGORZHUS
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGXSSHUS
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGORZHUS
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGXSSHUS
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGORZHUS
6SHHG>USP@
6SHHGWKUHVKROGS SPD[LPXPVSHHG
6SHHGWKUHVKROGS SVSHHGWKUHVKROG
If the torque lies in the impermissible range longer than time p2192, the converter reacts as
specified in p2181.
The monitoring is not active below speed threshold 1 and above speed threshold 3.
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p2181[D] Load monitoring, response 0
p2182[D] Load monitoring, speed threshold 1 150 rpm
p2183[D] Load monitoring, speed threshold 2 900 rpm
p2184[D] Load monitoring, speed threshold 3 1500 rpm
p2185[D] Load monitoring, torque threshold 1, upper 10000000 Nm
p2186[D] Load monitoring torque threshold 1, lower 0 Nm
p2187[D] Load monitoring torque threshold 2, upper 10000000 Nm
p2188[D] Load monitoring torque threshold 2, lower 0 Nm
p2189[D] Load monitoring torque threshold 3, upper 10000000 Nm
p2190[D] Load monitoring torque threshold 3, lower 0 Nm
p2191[D] Load monitoring torque threshold, no load 0 Nm
p2192[D] Load monitoring, delay time 10 s
p2193[D] Load monitoring configuration 1
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 419
Advanced commissioning
6.8 Drive protection
6.8.6.5 Blocking protection, leakage protection and dry-running protection
Overview
In applications with fans, pumps or compressors with the flow characteristic, the torque follows
the speed according to a specific characteristic. An insufficient torque for fans indicates that the
power transmission from the motor to the load is interrupted. For pumps, insufficient torque can
indicate a leakage or dry-running.
Function description
7RUTXH>1P@
%ORFNHG
%ORFNLQJPRQLWRULQJWKUHVKROGS
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGORZHUS
/HDNDJH SXPSV
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGORZHUS
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGORZHUS
'U\UXQQLQJSURWHFWLRQRU
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGQRORDGS
EURNHQEHOW
6SHHGWKUHVKROGS 6SHHG>USP@
%ORFNLQJPRQLWRULQJS SPD[LPXPVSHHG
6SHHGWKUHVKROGS SVSHHGWKUHVKROG
If the torque and speed lie in the impermissible range longer than time p2192, the converter
reacts as specified in p2181.
For applications with pumps (p2193 = 4), the converter detects the following states of the driven
load:
● Blocked
● Leakage
● Dry running
For applications with fans or compressors (p2193 = 5), the converter detects the following
states of the driven load:
● Blocked
● Torn belt
The monitoring is not active below speed threshold 1 and above speed threshold 3.
When using the control mode "U/f control" (p1300 < 10), the "Blocking protection" function
becomes active when the current limit is reached.
Blocking protection (Page 418)
SINAMICS G120X converter
420 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.8 Drive protection
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p1082[D] Maximum speed 1500 rpm
p1300[D] Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode See parameter list
p2165[D] Load monitoring blocking monitoring threshold, upper 0 rpm
p2168[D] Load monitoring blocking monitoring torque threshold 10000000 Nm
p2181[D] Load monitoring, response 0
p2182[D] Load monitoring, speed threshold 1 150 rpm
p2183[D] Load monitoring, speed threshold 2 900 rpm
p2184[D] Load monitoring, speed threshold 3 1500 rpm
p2186[D] Load monitoring torque threshold 1, lower 0 Nm
p2188[D] Load monitoring torque threshold 2, lower 0 Nm
p2190[D] Load monitoring torque threshold 3, lower 0 Nm
p2191[D] Load monitoring torque threshold, no load 0 Nm
p2192[D] Load monitoring, delay time 10 s
p2193[D] Load monitoring configuration 1
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 421
Advanced commissioning
6.8 Drive protection
6.8.6.6 Rotation monitoring
Function description
The converter monitors the speed or velocity of a machine component via an electromechanic
or electronic encoder, e.g. a proximity switch. Examples of how the function can be used:
● Drive belt monitoring for fans
● Blocking protection for pumps
The converter checks whether the encoder consistently supplies a 24 V signal during motor
operation. If the encoder signal fails for time p2192, the converter signals fault F07936.
S ',[
9
S W
U[ [ 7 ) S
',[
)
W
Figure 6-86 Function plan and time response of the speed monitoring
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
r0722 CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status -
p2192[D] Load monitoring, delay time 10 s
p2193[D] Load monitoring configuration 1
p3232[C] BI: Load monitoring, failure detection 1
Further information is provided in the parameter list.
SINAMICS G120X converter
422 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.9 Drive availability
6.9 Drive availability
6.9.1 Flying restart – switching on while the motor is running
Overview
If you switch on the motor while it is still rotating, without the "Flying restart" function, there is
a high probability that a fault will occur as a result of overcurrent (F30001 or F07801). Examples
of applications involving an unintentionally rotating motor directly before switching on:
● The motor rotates after a brief line interruption.
● A flow of air turns the fan impeller.
● A load with a high moment of inertia drives the motor.
Requirement
The converter may operate precisely one motor only.
It is not permissible that you enable the "Flying restart" function if the converter is
simultaneously driving several motors. Exception: a mechanical coupling ensures that all of the
motors always operate with the same speed.
Function description
The "Flying restart" function comprises the following steps:
1. After the on command, the converter impresses the search current in the motor and
increases the output frequency.
2. When the output frequency reaches the actual motor speed, the converter waits for the
motor excitation build up time.
3. The converter accelerates the motor to the actual speed setpoint.
212))
W
6SHHG 7KHFRQYHUWHUPDJQHWL]HVWKH
PRWRU
&RQYHUWHURXWSXW
IUHTXHQF\
W
Figure 6-87 Principle of operation of the "flying restart" function
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 423
Advanced commissioning
6.9 Drive availability
Parameter
Number Name Factory setting
p1200[D] Flying restart operating mode 0
r0331[M] Actual motor magnetizing current / short-circuit current - Arms
p0346[M] Motor excitation build-up time 0s
p0347[M] Motor de-excitation time 0s
p1201[C] BI: Flying restart enable signal source 1
p1202[D] Flying restart detection current 90% … 100%
p1203[D] Flying restart search rate factor 150% … 100%
SINAMICS G120X converter
424 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.9 Drive availability
6.9.2 Automatic restart
Overview
The automatic restart includes two different functions:
● The converter automatically acknowledges faults.
● After a fault occurs or after a power failure, the converter automatically switches-on the
motor again.
The converter interprets the following events as power failure:
● The converter signals fault F30003 (undervoltage in the DC link), after the converter line
voltage has been briefly interrupted.
● All the converter power supplies have been interrupted and all the energy storage devices
in the converter have discharged to such a level that the converter electronics fail.
Function description
Setting the automatic restart function
WARNING
Unexpected machine motion caused by the active automatic restart function
When the "automatic restart" function is active (p1210 > 1), the motor automatically starts after
a line supply phase. Unexpected movement of machine parts can result in serious injury and
material damage.
● Block off hazardous areas within the machine to prevent inadvertent access.
If it is possible that the motor is still rotating for a longer period of time after a power failure or
after a fault, then you must also activate the "flying restart" function.
Flying restart – switching on while the motor is running (Page 423)
Using p1210, select the automatic restart mode that best suits your application.
$XWRPDWLFUHVWDUWPRGH $5
1R$5 $XWRPDWLFDOO\DFNQRZOHGJH $XWRPDWLFDOO\DFNQRZOHGJH 'RQRWDXWRPDWLFDOO\ $XWRPDWLFDOO\DFNQRZOHGJH
IDXOWV IDXOWV DFNQRZOHGJHIDXOWV IDXOWV
LI212))
'RQRWDXWRPDWLFDOO\VZLWFK $XWRPDWLFDOO\VZLWFKRQ $XWRPDWLFDOO\VZLWFKRQ $XWRPDWLFDOO\VZLWFKRQ
RQPRWRU PRWRU PRWRU PRWRU
$IWHUSRZHU $IWHUSRZHU $IWHUSRZHU $IWHUSRZHU
IDLOXUH IDLOXUHDQG IDLOXUH IDLOXUHDQG
IDXOWV IDXOWV
S S S S S S S
Figure 6-88 Automatic restart modes
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 425
Advanced commissioning
6.9 Drive availability
The principle of operation of the other parameters is explained in the following diagram and in
the table below.
VWVWDUWDWWHPSW QGVWDUWDWWHPSWLV
XQVXFFHVVIXOGXH VXFFHVVIXO
)DXOWDIWHUSRZHUIDLOXUHRU WRDQHZIDXOW
LQRSHUDWLRQ
&RXQWHUVWDUWDWWHPSWV W
S ,IVWDUWDWWHPSWFRXQWHU WKHQIDXOW
S )LVRXWSXW
S
$IWHUS>@WKHLQYHUWHUUHVHWV W
WKHVWDUWDWWHPSWFRXQWHU
$XWRPDWLFDFNQRZOHGJPHQW
W
$XWRPDWLF21FRPPDQG S S
W
6SHHG
W: VXPRIWKHWLPHVIRUDIO\LQJ
W: V W: V UHVWDUWDQGPDJQHWL]LQJWKH
PRWRU
$VWDUWDWWHPSWPXVWKDYHEHHQVXFFHVVIXOZLWKLQ W
S>@,IQRWWKHQIDXOW)LVRXWSXW
1)
The converter automatically acknowledges faults under the following conditions:
● p1210 = 1 or 26: Always.
● p1210 = 4 or 6: If the command to switch-on the motor is available at a digital input or via the
fieldbus (ON/OFF1 = 1).
● p1210 = 14 or 16: Never.
2)
The converter attempts to automatically switch the motor on under the following conditions:
● p1210 = 1: Never.
● p1210 = 4, 6, 14, 16, or 26: If the command to switch-on the motor is available at a digital input or
via the fieldbus (ON/OFF1 = 1).
3)
If, after a flying restart and magnetization (r0056.4 = 1) no fault occurs within one second, then the
start attempt was successful.
Figure 6-89 Time response of the automatic restart
Further information is provided in the parameter list.
Advanced settings
If you with to suppress the automatic restart function for certain faults, then you must enter the
appropriate fault numbers in p1206[0 … 9].
Example: p1206[0] = 07331 ⇒ No restart for fault F07331.
SINAMICS G120X converter
426 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.9 Drive availability
Suppressing the automatic restart only functions for the setting p1210 = 6, 16 or 26.
Note
Motor starts in spite of an OFF command via the fieldbus
The converter responds with a fault if fieldbus communication is interrupted. For one of the
settings p1210 = 6, 16 or 26, the converter automatically acknowledges the fault and the motor
restarts, even if the higher-level control attempts to send an OFF command to the converter.
● In order to prevent the motor automatically starting when the fieldbus communication fails,
you must enter the fault number of the communication error in parameter p1206.
Parameter
Number Name Factory setting
p1206 Automatic restart faults not active 0
p1210 Automatic restart mode 0
p1211 Automatic restart, start attempts 3
p1212 Automatic restart, wait time start attempts 1s
p1213[0] Automatic restart monitoring time 60 s
for restart
p1213[1] Reset automatic restart monitoring time for 0s
start-up counter
p29630 Activate continuous operation 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 427
Advanced commissioning
6.9 Drive availability
6.9.3 Kinetic buffering (Vdc min control)
Overview
Kinetic buffering increases the drive availability. The kinetic buffering utilizes the kinetic energy
of the load to buffer line dips and failures. During a line dip, the converter keeps the motor in the
switched-on state for as long as possible. One second is a typical maximum buffer time.
Precondition
The following conditions have to be fulfilled to use the "kinetic buffering" function
advantageously:
● The driven machine has a sufficiently high inertia.
● The application allows a motor to be braked during a power failure.
Function description
When the line supply dips, the DC-link voltage in the converter decreases. The kinetic buffering
(VDC min control) intervenes at an adjustable threshold. The VDC min control forces the load to go
into slightly regenerative operation. As a consequence, the converter covers its power loss and
the losses in the motor with the kinetic energy of the load. The load speed decreases, but the
DC-link voltage remains constant during the kinetic buffering. After the line supply returns, the
converter immediately resumes normal operation.
'&OLQNYROWDJH
U
W
9'&PLQFRQWUROOHULV
DFWLYH
W
6SHHG
S
W
2SHUDWLRQ
0RWRULQJ
*HQHUDWLQJ W
3RZHUIDLOXUH
Figure 6-90 Principle mode of operation of kinetic buffering
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
r0056[0…15] CO/BO: Status word, closed-loop control -
p0210 Device supply voltage 400 V
p1240[D] Vdc controller configuration (vector control) 1
SINAMICS G120X converter
428 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.9 Drive availability
Number Name Factory setting
p1245[D] Vdc_min controller, switch-on level (kinetic buffering) See parameter list
r1246 Vdc_min controller, switch-on level (kinetic buffering) -V
p1247[D] Vdc_min controller, dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) 300%
p1255[D] Vdc_min controller, time threshold 0s
p1257[D] Vdc_min controller, speed threshold 50 rpm
6.9.4 Essential service mode
Overview
In essential service mode (ESM), the converter attempts to operate the motor for as long as
possible despite irregular ambient conditions.
The converter logs the essential service mode and any faults that occur during essential service
mode. The log is accessible only for the service and repair organization.
Note
Warranty is lost in the essential service mode
When the essential service mode is active, and faults occur in the converter , all warranty claims
associated with the converter become null and void. The faults can have the following causes:
● Exceptionally high temperatures inside and outside the converter
● Open fire inside and outside the converter
● Emissions of light, noise, particles or gases
Function description
Activating and terminating essential service mode
Signal p3880 = 1 activates the essential service mode.
Signal p3880 = 0 deactivates the essential service mode.
Switching the motor on and off during active essential service mode
The OFF1, OFF2 and OFF3 commands for switching off the motor have no effect.
The converter blocks all functions that switch off the motor to save energy, e.g. PROFIenergy
or hibernation mode.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 429
Advanced commissioning
6.9 Drive availability
The "Safe Torque Off" safety function terminates the essential service mode.
WARNING
Unexpected exiting of the essential service mode by selecting "Safe Torque Off"
An active Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function switches the motor off, thus terminating the
essential service mode. The termination of essential service mode can cause severe injury or
death, e.g. for the failure of a flue gas extraction.
● Prevent the STO safety function from being selected in essential service mode by
controlling the converter appropriately.
● Take the unintentional selection of the STO safety function into account in the risk analysis
of the system.
Setpoint during active essential service mode
The converter changes the speed setpoint to the ESM setpoint source.
P3881 determines the ESM setpoint source. If you have defined an analog input as setpoint
source using p3881, the converter can switch over to setpoint p3882 in case of wire breakage.
Reaction to faults during active essential service mode
In "essential service mode", the converter does not switch off the motor when faults develop,
but rather reacts differently depending on the fault type:
● The converter ignores faults, which do not directly result in the destruction of the converter
or the motor.
● Faults with the reaction "OFF2" switch the motor off immediately.
In this case, the converter attempts to automatically acknowledge the faults using the
automatic restart function.
● For faults that cannot be acknowledged, it is possible to switch over the motor to line
operation using the bypass function.
Automatic restart during active essential service mode
The converter ignores the settings in p1206 (faults without automatic restart) and works with the
setting "restart after a fault with further start attempts" (p1210 = 6).
The converter carries out the maximum number of restart attempts set in p1211 corresponding
to the settings in p1212 and p1213. The converter outputs fault F07320 if the restart attempts
are not successful.
Interaction for bypass and essential service mode
● If the bypass mode is active when the essential service mode is activated, the converter
changes to converter mode. This ensures that the converter uses the ESM setpoint source.
● If faults are still present after the number of start attempts parameterized in p1211, then the
converter goes into a fault condition with F07320. In this case, there is an option of switching
over to bypass operation and then directly connecting the motor to the line supply.
SINAMICS G120X converter
430 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.9 Drive availability
Procedure: Commissioning the essential service mode
1. Interconnect a free digital input as signal source for the ESM activation.
You must use a negated digital input if the essential service mode should also be active for
a ground fault – or if the control cable is interrupted.
Example for negated digital input DI 3: Set p3880 = 723.3.
It is not permissible to interconnect the digital input for ESM activation with other functions.
2. Set the ESM setpoint source via p3881.
3. Set the alternative ESM setpoint source via p3882.
4. Set the source to select the direction of rotation.
– p3881 = 0, 1, 2, 3:
When you interconnect p3883 with a free digital input of your choice, p3883 inverts the
direction of rotation during essential service mode.
For example, to interconnect p3883 with DI 4, set p3883 = 722.4.
– p3881 = 4:
The technology setpoint direction of rotation is valid.
5. Optional switching to bypass mode
If the converter is not able to acknowledge pending faults with automatic restart, it signals
fault F07320 and does not make any other attempts to restart.
If the motor still continues to operate in this case, you must set the following:
– Set p1266 = 3889.10. The converter switches the motor to bypass mode with
r3889.10 = 1.
– Ensure that the direction of rotation does not change when switching over to bypass
operation.
– Set p1267.0 = 1. The converter switches the motor to bypass mode independent of the
speed with control signal p1266.
– Commission the "Bypass" function.
Bypass (Page 439)
You have commissioned the essential service mode.
❒
Example
To improve the air circulation in the stairwells, the ventilation control creates an underpressure
in the building. With this control, a fire would mean that flue gases enter into the stairwell. This
would then mean that the stairs would be blocked as escape or evacuation route.
Using the essential service mode function, the ventilation switches over to the control of an
overpressure. The essential service mode prevents the propagation of flue gas in the stairwell,
thereby keeping the stairs free as an evacuation route as long as possible.
An application example for the essential service mode can be found on the Internet:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63969509 (http://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63969509)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 431
(60URWGLUVV
432
S 'LUHFWLRQRIURWDWLRQLQYHUWHG
(60DFWVV U
S ([WHQGHGVHUYLFHPRGH (60 DFWLYDWHG (60VHWSBVUF
Figure 6-91
U >@
> @ S
Function diagram
6.9 Drive availability
6HWSRLQWVLJQDOORVW >@
FP 7033
7RWDOVHWSRLQWHII>USP@ QBVHWBIL[HG
U /DVWNQRZQ (60VHWSBVUFDOW U
S>'@
>@ VHWSRLQW )FDXVHGE\ZLUHEUHDNDJHLQ$,
Advanced commissioning
S
QBUHIIBUHI [
>@ S [
U>@ [ [ y[
&8$,YDOXHLQ>@ >@
QBVHWBIL[HG
S>'@ 6SHHGVHWSRLQW
6HWSRLQWIDLOXUH
>@ LQ([WHQGHG
U S
QBPD[ 6HUYLFH0RGH
KH[
S
3='UHFYZRUG
>@
U>@
>@
7HFBFWUOVWDWXV !
U 7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHUGXULQJ
U HVVHQWLDOVHUYLFHPRGHDFWLYH
U U
)FDXVHGE\ZLUHEUHDNDJHLQVLJQDO
VRXUFHRIS 7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHUDFWXDOYDOXHORVW S
>@
U
212))
5HVSRQVH2))2))DFWLYDWHG 212)) 2)) U
ุ U S>&@
2))6BVUF 2&2))
S>&@ 2))6BVUF U
S>&@
7HFKQRORJ\IXQFWLRQV
(VVHQWLDO6HUYLFH0RGH (60
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
SINAMICS G120X converter
Advanced commissioning
6.9 Drive availability
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p1206[0…9] Automatic restart faults not active 0
p1210 Automatic restart mode 0
p1211 Automatic restart, start attempts 3
p1212 Automatic restart, wait time start attempts 1s
p1213 Automatic restart monitoring time for restart 60 s
p1213 Automatic restart reset monitoring time for start counter 0s
p1266 BI: Bypass control command 0
p1267 Bypass changeover source configuration 0000 bin
p3880 BI: ESM activation signal source 0
p3881 ESM setpoint source 0
p3882 ESM alternative setpoint source 0
p3883 BI: ESM direction of rotation signal source 0
p3884 CI: ESM technology controller setpoint 0
r3889[0…10] CO/BO: ESM status word -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 433
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
6.10 Energy saving
6.10.1 Efficiency optimization
Overview
$
%
The efficiency optimization reduces the motor losses as far as possible.
&
Active efficiency optimization has the following advantages:
● Lower energy costs
● Lower motor temperature rise
● Lower motor noise levels
Active efficiency optimization has the following disadvantage:
● Longer acceleration times and more significant speed dips during torque surges.
The disadvantage is only relevant when the motor must satisfy high requirements relating to the
dynamic performance. Even when efficiency optimization is active, the converter closed-loop
motor control prevents the motor from stalling.
Precondition
Efficiency optimization functions under the following preconditions:
● Operation with an induction motor
● Vector control is set in the converter.
Function description
,QYHUWHU
'ULYHQPDFKLQH
9DULDEOH VSHFLILHG
)OX[ 7RUTXH
6SHHG 6SHHG
Figure 6-92 Efficiency optimization by changing the motor flux
The three variables that the converter can directly set, which define efficiency of an induction
motor, are speed, torque and flux.
SINAMICS G120X converter
434 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
However, in all applications, speed and torque are specified by the driven machine. As a
consequence, the remaining variable for the efficiency optimization is the flux.
The converter has two different methods of optimizing the efficiency.
Efficiency optimization, method 2
Generally, energy efficiency optimization method 2 achieves a better efficiency than method 1.
We recommend that you set method 2.
,QYHUWHU
7KHUPDOPRWRU
PRGHO
(IILFLHQF\
GHSHQGHQWRQWKH
IOX[
2SWLPXPIOX[
Figure 6-93 Determining the optimum flux from the motor thermal model
Based on its thermal motor model, the converter continually determines - for the actual
operating point of the motor - the interdependency between efficiency and flux. The converter
then sets the flux to achieve the optimum efficiency.
)OX[ )OX[
(IILFLHQF\ (IILFLHQF\
(IILFLHQF\RSWLPL]DWLRQLVQRWDFWLYH
(IILFLHQF\RSWLPL]DWLRQLVDFWLYH
Figure 6-94 Qualitative result of efficiency optimization, method 2
Depending on the motor operating point, the converter either decreases or increases the flux
in partial load operation of the motor.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 435
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
Efficiency optimization, method 1
)OX[VHWSRLQW
S S
S
Sy
S
Sy
3DUWLDOORDGRSHUDWLRQ
1RORDG 7RUTXH
RSHUDWLRQ 5DWHGWRUTXH
Figure 6-95 Reduce the flux setpoint in the partial load range of the motor
The motor operates in partial load mode between no-load operation and the rated motor torque.
Depending on p1580, in the partial load range, the converter reduces the flux setpoint linearly
with the torque.
)OX[
S
S
(IILFLHQF\
S
Figure 6-96 Qualitative result of efficiency optimization, method 1
The reduced flux in the motor partial load range results in higher efficiency.
Parameters
The converter calculates the parameters for the thermal motor model based on the motor data
that has been set – and the motor data identification.
Table 6-108 Efficiency optimization, method 2
Number Name Factory setting
p1401[D] Flux control configuration 0000 0000 0000
0110 bin
p1570[D] CO: Flux setpoint 100%
p3315[D] Efficiency optimization 2 minimum flux limit value 50%
p3316[D] Efficiency optimization 2 maximum flux limit value 110 %
Table 6-109 Efficiency optimization, method 1
Number Name Factory setting
p1570[D] CO: Flux setpoint 100%
p1580[D] Efficiency optimization 80%
SINAMICS G120X converter
436 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
6.10.2 ECO mode
Overview
$
%
ECO mode works by slightly changing the output voltage either up or down in order to find the
& minimum input power. It is suitable for applications with a low dynamic response and constant
speed setpoint, and allows energy savings of up to 40% in the ideal case.
Precondition
The ECO mode can only work under conditions when the load characteristic is low dynamic.
The ECO mode works only in U/f control mode.
In the ECO mode, active slip compensation is necessary. Set the slip compensation (p1335) to
100 %. In the event of minor fluctuations in the setpoint, you have to raise the ramp-function
generator tolerance using p1148.
Function description
ECO mode activation:
When the speed setpoint is reached and remains unchanged for 5 s, the converter
automatically reduces its output voltage to optimize the motor's operating point.
ECO mode deactivation:
ECO mode is deactivated when the setpoint changes or if the converter’s DC-link voltage is too
high or too low.
9 9
(&2 (&2
IDFWRU IDFWRU
I I
(&2OLQHDU (&2TXDGUDWLF
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p1300 Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode 20: Speed control
(encoderless)
r1348 CO: U/f control Eco factor actual value --
For more information about the parameters, see Chapter "Parameters (Page 467)".
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 437
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
Further information
For information about energy saving in vector control mode, see section "Efficiency
optimization (Page 434)".
SINAMICS G120X converter
438 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
6.10.3 Bypass
Overview
$
%
The "Bypass" function switches the motor between converter and line operation.
&
9287
. . %, S >@
', U
%, S >@
', U
'212 S
'2&20 U
'212 S
'2&20 U
. .
. .
*1'
. .
Figure 6-97 Bypass control via converter
Requirements
● The "Bypass" function is supported only for induction motors.
● The K1 converter contactor and K2 line contactor are designed for switching under load.
● The K2 line contactor is designed for switching under inductive load.
● The K1 converter contactor and K2 line contactor are interlocked against closing at the
same time.
● The "flying restart" function must be activated (p1200 = 1 or 4).
Flying restart – switching on while the motor is running (Page 423)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 439
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
Function description
Switching from converter operation to line operation
1. The converter switches the motor OFF.
2. The converter opens the K1 converter contactor via a digital output.
3. The converter waits for the unlocking time of the motor.
4. The converter waits for the feedback that the K1 converter contactor is open.
5. The converter closes the K2 line contactor via a digital output.
The motor is now operated directly on the line supply.
Note
Current surge when switching from converter operation to line operation
When switching from converter operation to line operation, a current > 10 × rated motor current
can flow temporarily. The current depends on the random phase shift between the converter
voltage and the line voltage.
Switching from line operation to converter operation
1. The converter opens the K2 line contactor via a digital output.
2. The converter waits for the unlocking time of the motor.
3. The converter waits for the feedback that the K2 line contactor is open.
4. The converter closes the K1 converter contactor via a digital output.
5. The converter switches the motor on.
6. The converter adjusts with the "Flying restart" function its output frequency to the speed of
the motor.
The motor is now operated on the converter.
SINAMICS G120X converter
440 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
How is the changeover triggered?
The following options are provided to switch between converter operation and line operation:
● Changeover for activation via a control command
&RQYHUWHU 6ZLWFKRYHUSKDVH /LQHRSHUDWLRQ 6ZLWFKRYHUSKDVH &RQYHUWHU
RSHUDWLRQ RSHUDWLRQ
S%\SDVVFRPPDQG
W
0RWRUUDWHGVSHHG 6WDUWXS
)O\LQJUHVWDUW
0RWRUVSHHG
S
W
U6LJQDOIRU.
&RQYHUWHURSHUDWLRQ
S >@)HHGEDFNIURP. W
&RQYHUWHURSHUDWLRQ
U6LJQDOIRU. /LQH W
RSHUDWLRQ
S >@)HHGEDFNIURP. W
/LQHRSHUDWLRQ
W
S S>@ S S>@
S>@ S>@
SS>@ SS>@
Figure 6-98 Changeover when activating via a control signal (p1267.0 = 1)
The converter switches the motor between converter operation and line operation
depending on the bypass control command p1266.
● Changeover depending on the speed
,QYHUWHU 6ZLWFKRYHUSKDVH /LQHVXSSO\ 6ZLWFKRYHUSKDVH ,QYHUWHU
RSHUDWLRQ RSHUDWLRQ RSHUDWLRQ
0RWRUUDWHGVSHHG
U VHWSRLQW5)*
SE\SDVVWKUHVKROG
W
UVLJQDOIRU.
,QYHUWHURSHUDWLRQ
S >@IHHGEDFNVLJQDO W
RI. ,QYHUWHURSHUDWLRQ
UVLJQDOIRU. /LQH W
RSHUDWLRQ
S >@IHHGEDFNVLJQDO W
RI. /LQHRSHUDWLRQ
W
S S>@ S S>@
S>@ S>@
SS>@ SS>@
%\SDVVVSHHGWKUHVKROG %\SDVVVSHHGWKUHVKROGKDV
UHDFKHG EHHQIDOOHQEHORZ
Figure 6-99 Changeover depending on the speed (p1267.1 = 1)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 441
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
If the speed setpoint r1119 lies above the bypass speed threshold p1265, the converter
switches the motor to line operation.
If the speed setpoint falls below the bypass speed threshold, the converter switches the
motor to converter operation.
SINAMICS G120X converter
442 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
/LQH %\SDVV&RQILJ 6ZLWFKWBPRQLW
S S
! %\SDVV67:=6:
&RQYHUWHU U
6ZLWFKWBPRQLW 'HE\SDVVWBLQWHUORFN
U
Figure 6-100
6ZLWFKBVUF&RQILJ S>@ S
S
%\SDVVFRPPDQG %\SDVVWBLQWHUORFN
!
S S
%\SDVVWBGHDG !
Function diagram
([DPSOH $FWLYDWLRQYLDDFRQWUROVLJQDO S
S>'@ 7 7 '2 .
FP 7035
SINAMICS G120X converter
. &RQYHUWHU 6ZLWFKRYHU /LQH 6ZLWFKRYHU &RQYHUWHU
%\SDVVQBWKUHVKROG ุ ',
9287 RSHUDWLRQ SKDVH RSHUDWLRQ SKDVH RSHUDWLRQ
S 0RWRUUDWHG
', 3RZHUXS
7 7 VSHHG
%\SDVVWBGHDG . )O\LQJUHVWDUW
'2 .
QBVHW S>'@ $FWXDOVSHHG
'HE\SDVVWBLQWHUORFN IURP
! S FRQYHUWHU S
6ZLWFKBVUF&RQILJ 6ZLWFKWBPRQLW %\SDVVWBLQWHUORFN
S %\SDVVFRPPDQG W
S>@ S S
. . %\SDVV67:=6:
U 6LJQDOIRUFRQWDFWRU. S W
U &RQYHUWHURSHUDWLRQ
%\SDVV)HHGEDFN
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
S >@ )HHGEDFNIURP. S W
&RQYHUWHURSHUDWLRQ S>@
%\SDVV67:=6:
U 6LJQDOIRUFRQWDFWRU. S W
%\SDVV)HHGEDFN
U /LQHRSHUDWLRQ
S >@ )HHGEDFNIURP. S W
/LQHRSHUDWLRQ S>@
6ZLWFKWBPRQLW 0RQLWRULQJWLPHIRU. W
>PV@
S>@ &RQYHUWHURSHUDWLRQ
6ZLWFKWBPRQLW W
! )O\LQJUHVWDUWPXVWEHDFWLYDWHGIRUWKH >PV@ 0RQLWRULQJWLPHIRU. S>@ S>@
E\SDVVIXQFWLRQ Sb bbRUb S>@ /LQHRSHUDWLRQ
! 7KHIROORZLQJE\SDVVIXQFWLRQVDUHDYDLODEOH W
S>@ S>@
%\SDVVIXQFWLRQZKHQDFWLYDWLQJYLDDFRQWUROVLJQDO Sb b
%\SDVVIXQFWLRQLVGHSHQGHQWRQWKHVSHHG Sb b
! &RQWDFWRUV.DQG.PXVWEHLQWHUORFNHGDJDLQVWFORVLQJDWWKHVDPHWLPH
7HFKQRORJ\IXQFWLRQV
%\SDVV
6.10 Energy saving
Advanced commissioning
443
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p0347[M] Motor de-excitation time 0s
p1260 Bypass configuration (factory setting: 0) 0
0: Bypass is deactivated
3: Bypass without synchronization
r1261.0…11 Bypass control/status word -
.00 1 signal: Close converter - motor contactor
.01 1 signal: Close line - motor contactor
p1262[D] Bypass dead time 1s
p1263 Debypass (revert to drive) delay time 1s
p1264 Bypass delay time 1s
p1265 Bypass speed threshold 1480 rpm
p1266 BI: Bypass control command 0
p1267 Bypass changeover source configuration 0000 bin
p1269[0…1] BI: Bypass switch feedback signal [0] 1261.0
[0] 1 signal: Converter - motor contactor is closed [1] 1261.1
[1] 1 signal: Line - motor contactor is closed
p1274[0...1] Bypass switch monitoring time 1000 ms
More information is provided in the parameter list.
Parameters (Page 467)
More information
Interaction with other functions:
● Essential service mode
The activated "Essential service mode" function influences the "Bypass" function.
Essential service mode (Page 429)
● Converter control
For operation of the motor on the line supply, the converter no longer responds to the OFF1
command, but rather only to OFF2 and OFF3.
● Temperature monitoring for the motor
The converter evaluates the temperature sensor in the motor, also for line operation of the
motor.
Motor protection with temperature sensor (Page 409)
● Disconnecting the converter from the line supply
If for line operation of the motor, you disconnect the converter from the line supply, the
converter opens the K2 contactor and the motor coasts down.
To operate the motor on the line supply also for deactivated converter, the higher-level
control must supply the signal for the K2 line contactor.
SINAMICS G120X converter
444 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
6.10.4 Hibernation mode
$
%
The hibernation mode saves energy, reduces mechanical wear and noise.
&
Pressure and temperature controls involving pumps and fans are typical applications for the
hibernation mode.
Function
If the plant/system conditions permit it, the converter switches off the motor and switches it on
again when there is a demand from the process.
The hibernation mode starts as soon as the motor speed drops below the hibernation mode
start speed. The converter switches off the motor after an adjustable time. If, during this time,
the speed setpoint increases above the hibernation mode start speed due to pressure or
temperature changes, the converter exits the hibernation mode.
In the hibernation mode the motor is switched off, but the converter continues to monitor the
speed setpoint or technology controller deviation.
● For an external setpoint input (without technology controller), the converter monitors the
speed setpoint and switches on the motor again as soon as the setpoint increases above the
restart speed.
In the factory setting, the converter monitors the positive speed setpoint. The converter
switches on the motor as soon as the setpoint exceeds the restart speed.
If you also want to monitor the negative speed setpoint, you have to monitor the setpoint
amount. To do this, set p1110 = 0.
● When the setpoint is input from the technology controller, the converter monitors the
technology controller deviation (r2273) and switches on the motor again if the deviation of
the technology controller exceeds the hibernation mode restart value (p2392).
In the factory setting, the converter monitors the positive deviation of the technology
controller. The converter switches on the motor as soon as the technology controller
deviation is higher than the hibernation mode restart value (p2392).
You must monitor the absolute value of the deviation to switch on the motor again for a
negative technology controller deviation.
Set p2298 = 2292 and set the minimum threshold in p2292.
Note
Hibernation mode after switching on the converter
After switching the converter on, a wait time starts in the converter. The longest wait time is at
the following times:
● p1120 (ramp-up time)
● p2391 (hibernation mode delay time)
● 20 s
If the motor does not reach the hibernation mode start speed within this wait time, the converter
activates the hibernation mode and switches off the motor.
If you want to prevent frequent activation and deactivation, before deactivation you still have to
set a short speed boost. The boost is deactivated with p2394 = 0.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 445
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
To avoid tank deposits, particularly where liquids are involved, it is possible to exit the
hibernation mode after an adjustable time (p2396) has expired and switch to normal operation.
The settings required for the respective variant can be found in the following tables.
Interaction of the function with the cascade control
It is not possible to activate the hibernation mode as long as a motor is directly operated from
the line supply using the cascade control function.
Cascade control (Page 368)
Activating the hibernation mode with setpoint input via the internal technology controller
With this operating mode you have to set the technology controller as the setpoint source
(p2200) and use the output of the technology controller as the main setpoint (p2251). The boost
can be deactivated.
1RUPDORSHUDWLRQ +LEHUQDWLRQPRGHDFWLYH 1RUPDORSHUDWLRQ
7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHUGHYLDWLRQ
U
5HVWDUWYDOXHS
W
S
6SHHG
6HWSRLQWWHFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHUDV
PDLQVHWSRLQW
%RRVWVSHHGS
5HVWDUWVSHHG
6WDUWVSHHG
+LEHUQDWLRQ
S
PRGHRIIVHW
0LQLPXPVSHHGS
S S W[ W\ W
5HVWDUWVSHHG SS W[ S SyS
6WDUWVSHHG SS W\ SSyUHVWDUWVSHHG
Figure 6-101 Hibernation mode using the technology setpoint as main setpoint with boost
SINAMICS G120X converter
446 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
Activating the hibernation mode with external setpoint input
With this operating mode, an external source – e.g. a temperature sensor – inputs the main
setpoint.
1RUPDORSHUDWLRQ +LEHUQDWLRQPRGHDFWLYH 1RUPDORSHUDWLRQ
Pressure
$FWXDOYDOXH
6HWSRLQW
W
Speed 6HWSRLQW
%RRVWVSHHGS
5HVWDUWVSHHG
5HVWDUWRIIVHW
S S
6WDUWVSHHG
+LEHUQDWLRQ
PRGHRIIVHW
0LQLPXPVSHHGS
S S W [ W\ W
5HVWDUWVSHHG SS S W [ S S෪S
6WDUWVSHHG SS W\ UHVWDUWVSHHGS෪S
Figure 6-102 Hibernation mode using an external setpoint with boost
1RUPDORSHUDWLRQ +LEHUQDWLRQPRGHDFWLYH 1RUPDORSHUDWLRQ
Pressure
$FWXDOYDOXH
6HWSRLQW
W
Speed 6HWSRLQW
5HVWDUWVSHHG
5HVWDUWRIIVHW
S S
6WDUWVSHHG
+LEHUQDWLRQ
PRGHRIIVHW
0LQLPXPVSHHGS
S S W [ W\ W
5HVWDUWVSHHG SS S W [ S S෪S
6WDUWVSHHG SS W\ UHVWDUWVSHHGS෪S
Figure 6-103 Hibernation mode using an external setpoint without boost
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 447
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
Setting the hibernation mode
Number Name Via Via ex‐
tech. ternal
setpoint setpoint
p1080 Minimum speed ✓ ✓
0 (factory setting) … 19,500 rpm. Lower limit of the motor
speed, independently of the speed target value.
p1110 Block negative direction - ✓
Parameter to block the negative direction
p2200 Technology controller enable ✓ -
0: Technology controller deactivated (factory setting),
1: Technology controller activated
p2251 = 1 Technology controller mode ✓ -
0: Technology controller as main setpoint (factory setting),
1: Technology controller as supplementary setpoint
p2298 Technology controller minimum limiting ✓ -
Parameter for the minimum limiting of the technology con‐
troller
p2398 Hibernation mode ✓ ✓
0: Hibernation mode inhibited (factory setting)
1: Hibernation mode enabled
p2390 Hibernation mode start speed ✓ ✓
0 (factory setting) … 21,000 rpm. As soon as this speed is
fallen below, the hibernation mode delay time starts and
switches off the motor once it expires. The hibernation mode
start speed is calculated as follows:
Start speed = p1080 + p2390
p1080 = minimum speed
p2390 = hibernation mode start speed
p2391 Hibernation mode delay time ✓ ✓
0 ... 3599 s (factory setting 120). The hibernation mode delay
time starts as soon as the output frequency of the converter
drops below the hibernation mode start speed p2390. If the
output frequency increases above this threshold during the
delay time, the hibernation mode delay time is interrupted.
Otherwise, the motor is switched off after the delay time has
expired (if necessary, after a short boost).
p2392 Hibernation mode restart value (as a %) ✓ -
Is required if the technology controller is used as the main
setpoint.
As soon as the technology controller deviation (r2273) ex‐
ceeds the hibernation restart value, the converter switches to
normal operation and the motor starts up with a setpoint of
1.05 * (p1080 + p2390). As soon as this value is reached, the
motor continues to operate with the setpoint of the technology
controller (r2260).
SINAMICS G120X converter
448 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
Number Name Via Via ex‐
tech. ternal
setpoint setpoint
p2393 Hibernation mode restart speed (rpm) - ✓
Required for external setpoint input. The motor starts as soon
as the setpoint exceeds the restart speed. The restart speed
is calculated as follows:
Restart speed = p1080 + p2390 + p2393
p1080 = minimum speed
p2390 = hibernation mode start speed
p2393 = hibernation mode restart speed
p2394 Hibernation mode boost duration ✓ ✓
0 (factory setting) … 3599 s. Before the converter switches
over into the hibernation mode, the motor is accelerated for
the time set in p2394 according to the acceleration ramp,
however, as a maximum to the speed set in p2395.
p2395 Hibernation mode boost speed ✓ ✓
0 (factory setting) … 21,000 rpm. Before the converter
switches over to hibernation mode, the motor is accelerated
for the time set in p2394 along the acceleration ramp, but not
to more than the speed set in p2395.
Caution:
The boost may not result in any overpressure or overrun.
p2396 Maximum hibernation mode shutdown time ✓ ✓
0 (factory setting) to 863,999 s. At the latest when this time
expires, the converter switches to normal operation and ac‐
celerates up to the start speed (p1080 + p2390). If the con‐
verter is switched to normal operation in advance, the shut‐
down time is reset to the value set in this parameter.
With p2396 = 0, automatic changeover to normal operation
after a certain time is deactivated.
Note
Activate the motorized potentiometer as ramp-function generator to use the motorized
potentiometer of the converter as setpoint for the hibernation mode.
● Motorized potentiometer: p1030.4 = 1
● Technology motorized potentiometer: p2230. = 1.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 449
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
Status of the hibernation mode
Number Name
r2273 Display of the setpoint/actual value deviation of the technology controller
r2397 Actual hibernation mode output speed
Actual boost speed before the pulses are inhibited or the actual start speed after restart.
r2399 Hibernation mode status word
00 Hibernation mode enabled (p2398 <> 0)
01 Hibernation mode active
02 Hibernation mode delay time active
03 Hibernation mode boost active
04 Hibernation mode motor switched off
05 Hibernation mode motor switched off, cyclic restart active
06 Energy-saving mode motor restarts
07 Hibernation mode supplies the total setpoint of the ramp-function generator
08 Hibernation mode bypasses the ramp-function generator in the setpoint channel
SINAMICS G120X converter
450 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
6.10.5 Line contactor control
Overview
$
%
A line contactor disconnects the converter from the line supply, and therefore reduces the
& converter losses when the motor is not operational.
Function description
The converter controls its own line contactor using a digital output. The line contactor control
requires a 24 V power supply from the converter. The 24 V power supply must be maintained
even when the line contactor is open.
'&9 9,1
9 *1',1
.
%, S
', U
. .
'212 S
'2&20 U
Figure 6-104 Line contactor control via DO 0 with feedback signal via DI 3
Activating the line contactor control
In order for the converter to control line contactor K1 using one of its own digital outputs, you
must interconnect the digital output with signal r0863.1, e.g. for DO 0: p0730 = 863.1.
Line contactor control with feedback signal
Interconnect p0860 with the signal of the corresponding digital input:
● p0860 = 722.x: Feedback signal of an NO contact via DIx
● p0860 = 723.x: Feedback signal of an NC contact via DIx
'2
&RQWUROOLQHFRQWDFWRU
W
',
/LQHFRQWDFWRUIHHGEDFNVLJQDO
W
S S
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 451
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
Figure 6-105 Line contactor control via DO 2 with feedback signal via DI 3
If the line contactor feedback signal is not available for longer than the time set in p0861, the
converter signals fault F07300.
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
r0046.0…n CO/BO: Missing enable signals -
p0860 BI: Line contactor feedback signal 863.1
p0861 Line contactor monitoring time 100 ms
r0863.0…1 CO/BO: Drive coupling status word / control word -
p0867 Power unit main contactor hold time after OFF1 50 ms
p0869 Configuration sequence control 0000 bin
p0870 BI: close main contactor 0
More information is provided in the parameter list.
SINAMICS G120X converter
452 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
6.10.6 Calculating the energy saving for fluid flow machines
Overview
$
%
Fluid flow machines, which mechanically control the flow rate using valves or throttle flaps,
& operate with a constant speed corresponding to the line frequency.
/LQHVXSSO\ /LQHVXSSO\
+] +]
3XPS
Figure 6-106 Flow control with pump and throttle connected to a 50 Hz line supply
The lower the flow rate, the poorer the efficiency of the fluid flow machine (pump). The fluid flow
machine (pump) has the poorest efficiency when the throttle or valve is completely closed.
Further, undesirable effects can occur, for example the formation of vapor bubbles in liquids
(cavitation) or the temperature of the medium being pumped can increase.
The converter controls the flow rate by appropriately varying the speed of the fluid flow
machine. By controlling the flow rate, the fluid flow machine operates at the optimum efficiency
for each flow rate. This situation means that in the partial load range less electric power is
required than when controlling the flow rate using valves and throttles.
/LQHVXSSO\ /LQHVXSSO\
,QYHUWHU ,QYHUWHU
+] +]
Figure 6-107 Flow control with pump and converter
Function description
5HTXLUHG
)ORZUDWHFRQWUROXVLQJ The converter calculates the en‐
HOHFWULF ergy saving from the flow charac‐
DWKURWWOHIODS
SRZHU
teristic associated with a me‐
chanical flow control and the
LQ J measured electric power that is
DY
UJ \V drawn.
H
(Q
&RQWUROOLQJWKHIORZUDWH
The calculation is suitable for
XVLQJDQLQYHUWHU centrifugal pumps, fans, radial
and axial compressors, for in‐
)ORZUDWH
stance.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 453
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
Flow characteristic
3RZHULQ
6SHHG SRZHU
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
6SHHGLQ
Figure 6-108 Factory setting of the flow characteristic
To set the characteristic, you require the following data from the machine manufacturer for each
speed interpolation point:
● The flow rate of the fluid-flow machine associated with the 5 selected converter speeds
● At constant speed, the power drawn which is associated with the 5 flow rates corresponds
to the line frequency and mechanical throttling of the flow rate.
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
r0039[0...n] CO: Energy display -
p0040 Reset energy consumption display 0
r0041 Energy saved -
r0042[0...n] CO: Process energy display -
p0043 BI: Energy consumption display enabled. 0
p3320[0…n] Fluid flow machine power, point 1 25
p3321[0…n] Fluid flow machine speed, point 1 0
p3322[0…n] Fluid flow machine power, point 2 50
p3323[0…n] Fluid flow machine speed, point 2 25
p3324[0…n] Fluid flow machine power, point 3 77
p3325[0…n] Fluid flow machine speed, point 3 50
p3326[0…n] Fluid flow machine power, point 4 92
p3327[0…n] Fluid flow machine speed, point 4 75
p3328[0…n] Fluid flow machine power, point 5 100
p3329[0…n] Fluid flow machine speed, point 5 100
SINAMICS G120X converter
454 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
6.10.7 Flow meter
Overview
$
%
With the flow meter function configured with parameters p29631 and p29632, the converter
& estimates the real-time flow of the pumps and fans based on the defined characteristic, so as
to realize effective flow control and reduces the system power loss.
Function description
The converter calculates the real-time flow according to the flow characteristic derived from the
values entered in p29631[0...4] and p29632[0...4]. You can acquire these values from the
machine manufacturer.
● p29631[0...4]: five power interpolation points in kW, which should spread across the
converter power range;
Make sure that p29631[0] ≤ p29631[1] ≤ p29631[2] ≤ p29631[3] ≤ p29631[4], or otherwise,
the flow calculation result (r29633) is zero.
● p29632[0...4]: five flow values corresponding to the power interpolation points.
The calculation result associated with the output power then displays in parameter r29633. It
should be noted that if the power is higher than the value entered in p29631[4], r29633 always
displays the flow value entered in p29632[4].
)ORZ
PK
S >@
S >@
S >@
S >@
S >@
3RZHU
S >@
S >@
S >@
S >@
S >@
N:
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 455
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p29631[0...4] Flow meter pump power 0.00 kW
p29632[0...4] Flow meter pump flow 0.00 m3/h
r29633 Flow meter calculated flow - m3/h
For more information about the parameters, see Chapter "Parameter list (Page 470)".
6.10.8 PROFIenergy
Overview
PROFIenergy is a standard based on PROFINET. PROFIenergy is certified and described in
the PROFIenergy profile of the PNO.
The higher-level controller transfers the control commands and status queries in acyclic
operation via data record 80A0 hex.
The converter supports the PROFIenergy profile V1.1 and the function unit class 3.
The converter supports PROFIenergy energy-saving mode 2.
Function description
Behavior of the converter with active energy-saving mode 2:
● The converter outputs alarm A08800.
● The RDY LED flashes green: 500 ms on, 3000 ms off.
● The converter does not send any diagnostic interrupts.
● If the higher-level controller goes to stop or the bus connection to the higher-level controller
is interrupted, the converter exits the energy-saving mode and resumes normal operation.
Example
You can find an application example for PROFIenergy on the Internet:
PROFIenergy - saving energy with SIMATIC S7 (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/41986454)
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
r5600 Pe energy-saving mode ID -
r5613 CO/BO: Pe energy-saving active/inactive -
SINAMICS G120X converter
456 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
6.10.8.1 Control commands
Function description
Command Explanation
Start_Pause Switches to the energy-saving mode depending on the pause dura‐
tion.
Start_Pause_with_time_re‐ Switches to the energy-saving mode depending on the pause dura‐
sponse tion and also specifies the transition times in the command response
End_Pause Switches from the energy-saving mode to the operating state.
Cancels switching from the operating state to energy-saving mode.
Settings
● Minimum pause time p5602
– When the pause time sent using the command "Start_Pause" is equal to or greater than
the value in p5602[1], the converter goes to energy-saving mode.
– If the pause time is less than p5602[1], the converter rejects the command "Start_Pause"
with 50 hex (no appropriate pause mode).
If the controller sends the command "End_Pause" or "Start_Pause" with a pause time of 0,
the motor cannot be switched on. An OFF1/ON command is required to switch the motor on
again.
● Maximum pause time p5606
● Disable PROFIenergy
If you set p5611.0 = 1, you disable the response of the converter to PROFIenergy control
commands. In this case, the converter rejects the "Start_Pause" command with 50 hex (no
appropriate pause mode).
● Transition to energy-saving mode
– With p5611.2 = 0, you enable the transition to energy-saving mode from operating states
S1 (switching on inhibited) or S2 (ready to switch on)
– With p5611.2 = 1, you enable the transition to energy-saving mode from operating states
S3 (ready for operation) and S4 (operation).
To do this, you must also set the following:
– p5611.1 = 1: With the transition to energy-saving mode, the converter triggers an OFF1
command and enters the Switching On Inhibited state (S1).
– p5611.1 = 0: You use p5614 to interconnect a signal source that you use to switch off the
converter and place it in Switching On Inhibited state (S1).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 457
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
6.10.8.2 Status queries
Function description
Command Explanation
List_Energy_Saving_Modes Returns all supported energy-saving modes
Get_Mode Returns information about the selected energy-saving mode
PEM_Status Returns the current PROFIenergy status
PEM_Status_with_CTTO Returns the current PROFIenergy status together with the regular
transition time to the operating state
PE_ldentify Returns the supported PROFIenergy commands
Query_Version Returns the implemented PROFIenergy profile
Get_Measurement_List Returns the measured value IDs that can be accessed using the
"Get_Measurement_Values" command
Get_Measure‐ Returns the measured value IDs and the associated object number
ment_List_with_object_number that can be accessed using the "Get_Measurement_Values_with_ob‐
ject_number" command.
Get_Measurement_Values Returns the measured values requested via the measured value ID
Get_Measurement_Val‐ Returns the measured values requested via the measured value ID
ues_with_object_number and the object number. The object number corresponds to the drive
object ID.
6.10.8.3 Error values and measured values
Function description
Table 6-110 Error values in the parameter response
Error val‐ Meaning
ue 1
001 hex Invalid Service_Request_ID
03 hex Invalid Modifier
04 hex Invalid Data_Structure_Identifier_RQ
06 hex No PE energy-saving mode supported
07 hex Response too long
08 hex Invalid block header
50 hex No suitable energy-saving mode available
51 hex Time is not supported
52 hex Impermissible PE_Mode_ID
53 hex No switch to energy saving mode because of state operate
54 hex Service or function temporarily not available
SINAMICS G120X converter
458 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.10 Energy saving
Table 6-111 Measured values
PROFIenergy SINAMICS source parameters Value
Measured value Accuracy Unit range
ID Name Do‐ Class Num‐ Name
main ber
34 Active power 1 12 W r0032 Active power smoothed r2004
166 Power factor 1 12 1 r0038 Power factor smoothed 0…1
200 Active energy im‐ 2 11 Wh r0039[ Energy drawn -
port 1]
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 459
Advanced commissioning
6.11 Switchover between different settings
6.11 Switchover between different settings
Overview
There are applications that require different converter settings.
Example:
Different motors are operated on one converter. The converter must operate with the motor
data of the particular motor and the appropriate ramp-function generator.
Function description
Drive Data Sets (DDS)
Some converter functions can be set differently, and there can be a switch between the different
settings.
Note
You can only switch over the motor data of the drive data sets in the "ready for operation" state
with the motor switched off. The switchover time is approx. 50 ms.
If you do not switch over the motor data together with the drive data sets (i.e. same motor
number in p0826), then the drive data sets can also be switched over in operation.
The associated parameters are indexed (index 0, 1, 2, or 3). One of the four indexes is selected
with control commands, and thereby one of the four saved settings.
The settings in the converter with the same index are called a drive data set.
6HWSRLQWV 6HWSRLQWSURFHVVLQJ 0RWRUFRQWURO
0
IL[HGVHWSRLQWV
PRWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU
MRJJLQJ
3URWHFWLRQ $GGLWLRQDOIXQFWLRQV
RYHUFXUUHQW HQHUJ\VDYLQJPRGH
RYHUYROWDJH IO\LQJUHVWDUW
RYHUWHPSHUDWXUH FDVFDGHFRQWURO
ORDGPRQLWRULQJ ''6
''6
''6
''6
SINAMICS G120X converter
460 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.11 Switchover between different settings
Selecting the number of drive data sets
Parameter p0180 defines the number of drive data sets (1 ... 4).
Parameter Description
p0010 = 0 Drive commissioning: Ready
p0010 = 15 Drive commissioning: Data sets
p0180 Drive data set (DDS) number
Copying the drive data sets
Parameter Description
p0819[0] Source drive data set
p0819[1] Target drive data set
p0819[2] = 1 Starts the copy operation
Parameters
Number Name Factory setting
p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter 1
r0051 CO/BO: Drive data set DDS effective -
p0180 Drive data set (DDS) number 1
p0819[0 … 2] Copy drive data set DDS 0
p0820[C] BI: Drive data set DDS selection, bit 0 0
p0821[C] BI: Drive data set DDS selection, bit 1 0
p0826[M] Motor changeover, motor number 0
More information
The converter switches the motor data set (MDS) and the power unit data set (PDS) together
with the drive data set (DDS).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 461
Advanced commissioning
6.12 Explanations of the function diagrams
6.12 Explanations of the function diagrams
6.12.1 Symbols in the function diagrams
Function description
The symbols used in the function diagrams are explained below.
>8QLW@ 8QLWRIPHDVXUHPHQW
U[[[[ 'LVSOD\SDUDPHWHUV
S[[[[ $GMXVWDEOHSDUDPHWHUV
[[[[ 3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU
YRQELV 9DOXHUDQJH
>@ ,QGH[
3DUDPHWHUQDPH>XQLW@ >@ ,QGH[DUHD
U[[[[>\@] >&@ 3DUDPHWHUSHUWDLQVWRWKH&RPPDQG'DWD6HW
&'6
>'@ 3DUDPHWHUSHUWDLQVWR'ULYH'DWD6HW ''6
>\@
3DUDPHWHUQDPH >(@ 3DUDPHWHUSHUWDLQVWR(QFRGHU'DWD6HW
IURPWR>XQLW@ ('6
S[[[[>\@] 'HI
>0@ 3DUDPHWHUSHUWDLQVWR0RWRU'DWD6HW
0'6
>3@ 3DUDPHWHUSHUWDLQVWRWKH3RZHUXQLW'DWD6HW
3'6
] %LWQXPEHU
'HI )DFWRU\VHWWLQJ
)RUVRPHSDUDPHWHUVWKHFRQYHUWHUFDOFXODWHVWKHIDFWRU\VHWWLQJRQO\
GXULQJFRPPLVVLRQLQJ
'HIZ )DFWRU\VHWWLQJZLWKSUHVHWELWQXPEHU
S[[[[>\@ &RQQHFWRULQSXW&,
'HI
U[[[[>\@ &RQQHFWRURXWSXW&2
3UHDVVLJQHGFRQQHFWRURXWSXW&2
S[[[[>\@ %LQHFWRULQSXW%,
'HIZ
U[[[[ %LQHFWRURXWSXW%2
U[[[[ &RPELQHGFRQQHFWRURXWSXWDQGELQHFWRURXWSXW&2%2
U[[[[
7H[W 7H[W 8QLTXHVLJQDOGHVLJQDWLRQ
>DDDDE@
DDDDE &URVVUHIHUHQFHIRUIXQFWLRQSODQDDDDFROXPQE
7H[W
>DDDDE@
S[[[[ S[[[[ 6RXUFHSDUDPHWHURIVLJQDO
>DDDDE@ DDDDE &URVVUHIHUHQFHIRUIXQFWLRQSODQDDDDFROXPQE
Figure 6-109 Parameter
SINAMICS G120X converter
462 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.12 Explanations of the function diagrams
127 /8 0/8 /LPLWHU
/RJLFDOLQYHUVLRQ 7KHEORFNOLPLWV[WRWKHXSSHUOLPLW/8DQG
[ \ WKHORZHUOLPLW//
$1'
:LWKORJLFDOLQYHUVLRQRIDQLQSXW
// 0// 0/8 LIWKHXSSHUOLPLWLVDFWLYH
25
RU 0// LIWKHORZHUOLPLWLVDFWLYH
[ \ ([FOXVLYH25;25
[ \ LI[ำ[
[ \ &RPSDUDWRU 6(7 6DPSOH +ROG
\ LI[ [ [ 6 + \ 6DPSOLQJDQGKROGLQJHOHPHQW
[ \ [LI6(7
56PHPRU\
64 6 ,QSXWIRUVHWWLQJ S[[[[
5 ,QSXWIRUUHVHWWLQJ &KDQJHRYHUVZLWFK
54 4 1RQLQYHUWHGRXWSXW 'HSHQGLQJRQS[[[[WKHEORFNVZLWFKHVRQH
4 ,QYHUWHGRXWSXW RIVHYHUDOLQSXWVLJQDOVWRWKHRXWSXW
[ \
6LJQUHYHUVDO
\ [
[ \ 6ZLWFKRQGHOD\
$EVROXWHYDOXHJHQHUDWRU S[[[[
[PXVWKDYHWKHYDOXHZLWKRXWLQWHUUXSWL
\ _[_
RQGXULQJWKHWLPH7EHIRUHWKHRXWSXW\
[ \ 'LYLGHU FKDQJHVWR
[ 7 \
[
[ \
[ 7 7 7 7
[ \ 0XOWLSOLHU
[ \ [y[ [
[
!
\ &RPSDUDWRUJUHDWHUWKDQ
\ LI[! \
'LIIHUHQWLDWRU
[ G \ S[[[[ 2))GHOD\
GW \ G[
GW [PXVWKDYHWKHYDOXHZLWKRXWLQWHUUXSWL
6 RQGXULQJWKHWLPH7EHIRUHWKHRXWSXW\
[ 7 \
FKDQJHVWR
[ \
7KUHVKROGVZLWFK 7 7 7 7
\ LI[ 6
[
6
\
[ \ 7KUHVKROGVZLWFK
\ LI[!6
6 S[[[[ S\\\\ 21GHOD\DQG2))GHOD\
[ \ 7KUHVKROGYDOXHZLWKK\VWHUHVLV [ 7 7 \ %LQDU\VLJQDO[PXVWKDYHWKHYDOXH
\ LI[ 6
GXULQJWKHWLPH7RUWKHYDOXHGXULQJWKH
,I[ุ6+\FKDQJHVIURPWR
WLPH7ZLWKRXWLQWHUUXSWLRQEHIRUHWKHRXWSXW
\FKDQJHVLWVVLJQDOVWDWXV
+
6
7 7 7 7
[ \ 7KUHVKROGYDOXHZLWKK\VWHUHVLV
\ LI[!6
,I[ื6+\FKDQJHVIURPWR [
+ \
Figure 6-110 Binary and analog blocks
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 463
Advanced commissioning
6.12 Explanations of the function diagrams
S[[[[ 37HOHPHQW
)LUVWRUGHUGHOD\HOHPHQW
\ S[[[[ WLPHFRQVWDQW
[ \
S[[[[ S\\\\
37ORZSDVVILOWHU
S[[[[ 1DWXUDOIUHTXHQF\GHQRPLQDWRU
_\_ S\\\\ $WWHQXDWLRQGHQRPLQDWRU
[ ' \
IQ
I
S]]]] SZZZZ )LOWHUQGRUGHU EDQGVWRSJHQHUDOILOWHU
S[[[[ 1DWXUDOIUHTXHQF\GHQRPLQDWRU
_\_ S\\\\ $WWHQXDWLRQGHQRPLQDWRU
IV
S]]]] 1DWXUDOIUHTXHQF\FRXQWHU
[ \
IB% SZZZZ $WWHQXDWLRQFRXQWHU
I
8VHDVEDQGILOWHU
&HQWHUIUHTXHQF\IV S]]]] IV
S[[[[ IV
S[[[[ S\\\\ %DQGZLGWKIB% SZZZZ
IB%
S\\\\
yIV
[
\ $FWLYDWDEOHDGGHU
[ :LWK, VLJQDO \ [[
:LWK, VLJQDO \ [
,
Figure 6-111 Analog blocks
6.12.2 Interconnecting signals in the converter
The following functions are implemented in the converter:
● Open-loop and closed-loop control functions
● Communication functions
● Diagnosis and operating functions
Every function comprises one or several blocks that are interconnected with one another.
,QSXWV 3DUDPHWHU 2XWSXW
0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU
S VHWSRLQWKLJKHU 0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHUVHWSRLQW
DIWHUWKHUDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU 023 U
S VHWSRLQWORZHU
Figure 6-112 Example of a block: Motorized potentiometer (MOP)
Most of the blocks can be adapted to specific applications using parameters.
SINAMICS G120X converter
464 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Advanced commissioning
6.12 Explanations of the function diagrams
You cannot change the signal interconnection within the block. However, the interconnection
between blocks can be changed by interconnecting the inputs of a block with the appropriate
outputs of another block.
The signal interconnection of the blocks is realized, contrary to electric circuitry, not using
cables, but in the software.
352),GULYH
UHFHLYH3='
ELWE\ELW
0RWRUL]HG
SRWHQWLRPHWHU 0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU 0DLQVHWSRLQW
S VHWSRLQWDIWHUWKH
VHWSRLQWKLJKHU
U UDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU S
0RWRUL]HG
SRWHQWLRPHWHU
023 U
S VHWSRLQWORZHU
U
Figure 6-113 Example: Signal interconnection of two blocks for digital input 0
Binectors and connectors
Connectors and binectors are used to exchange signals between the individual blocks:
● Connectors are used to interconnect "analog" signals (e.g. MOP output speed)
● Binectors are used to interconnect digital signals (e.g. "Enable MOP up" command)
S[[[[
%LQHFWRULQSXW U[[[[ %LQHFWRURXWSXW
%, %2
%,&2EORFN U[[[[ %LQHFWRUFRQQHFWRURXWSXW
U[[[[ &2%2
S[[[[
&RQQHFWRULQSXW U[[[[ &RQQHFWRURXWSXW
&, &2
Figure 6-114 Symbols for binector and connector inputs and outputs
Binector/connector outputs (CO/BO) are parameters that combine more than one binector
output in a single word (e.g. r0052 CO/BO: status word 1). Each bit in the word represents a
digital (binary) signal. This summary reduces the number of parameters and simplifies
parameter assignment.
Binector or connector outputs (CO, BO or CO/BO) can be used more than once.
Interconnecting signals
When must you interconnect signals in the converter?
If you change the signal interconnection in the converter, you can adapt the converter to a wide
range of requirements. This does not necessarily have to involve highly complex functions.
Example 1: Assign a different function to a digital input.
Example 2: Switch the speed setpoint from the fixed speed to the analog input.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 465
Advanced commissioning
6.12 Explanations of the function diagrams
Principle when connecting BICO blocks using BICO technology
When interconnecting the signal, the following principle applies: Where does the signal come
from?
An interconnection between two BICO blocks consists of a connector or a binector and a BICO
parameter. The input of a block must be assigned the output of a different block: In the BICO
parameters, enter the parameter numbers of the connector/binector that should supply its
output signal to the BICO parameter.
How much care is required when you change the signal interconnection?
Note which changes you make. A subsequent analysis of the set signal interconnections is
possible only by evaluating the parameter list.
Where can you find additional information?
● All the binectors and connectors are located in the Parameter list.
● The function diagrams provide a complete overview of the factory setting for the signal
interconnections and the setting options.
SINAMICS G120X converter
466 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters 7
7.1 Explanation of the detailed parameter list
Overview
7KHSDUDPHWHUGHVFULSWLRQRQO\DSSOLHVWR)6+DQG)6-
7KHLQYHUWHUFDOFXODWHVWKH 'DWDW\SHHJELWVZLWKRXW
3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU 3DUDPHWHUQDPH SDUDPHWHU VLJQ
S 'HYLFHVXSSO\YROWDJH
*; 30 $FFHVVOHYHO &DOFXODWHG 'DWDW\SH 8QVLJQHG
&DQEHFKDQJHG & 7 6FDOLQJ '\QDPLFLQGH[
8QLWJURXS 8QLWVHOHFWLRQ )XQFWLRQGLDJUDP
0LQ 0D[ )DFWRU\VHWWLQJ
>9@ >9@ >9@
0LQLPXPSHUPLVVLEOHYDOXH 0D[LPXPSHUPLVVLEOH 9DOXHVHWLQWKHIDFWRU\
YDOXH
6WDWHLQZKLFKWKHLQYHUWHUPXVWEHLQ
3DUDPHWHUZKHUHWKH
RUGHUWKDWWKHSDUDPHWHUYDOXHFDQ 7KHSDUDPHWHULVOLVWHGLQDIXQFWLRQ
XQLWFDQEHVZLWFKHG
EHFKDQJHG GLDJUDPZLWKWKHVSHFLILHGQXPEHU
RYHU
5HIHUHQFHYDULDEOH
6WDQGDUG 7KHQXPEHURIGDWDVHWV HJ&'6
([WHQGHG GHILQHVWKHQXPEHURILQGLFHV
([SHUW
6HUYLFH SDVVZRUGSURWHFWHG
Figure 7-1 Parameter description
Function description
Parameter number
The parameter number is made up of a "p" or "r", followed by a number and optionally the index
or bit array.
● p1234 Adjustable parameters (read and write)
● r1234 Display parameters (read-only)
● p1234[0...2] Adjustable parameters with index 0 to 2
● p1234.0 … 15 Adjustable parameters with bit 0 to bit 15
● p1234[1] Adjustable parameter index 1
● p1234.1 Adjustable parameter bit 1
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 467
Parameters
7.1 Explanation of the detailed parameter list
Parameter name
The following abbreviations can appear in front of the names:
BI Binector input
BO Binector output
CI Connector input
CO Connector output
CO/BO Connector/binector output
Interconnecting signals in the converter (Page 464)
Can be changed
"-" The parameter can be changed in any state, and the change becomes imme‐
diately effective.
C(x) The parameter can only be changed for the following settings:
C: p0010 > 0
C(x): p0010 = x
U The motor is switched on
T The motor is switched off and p0010 = 0
Unit group and unit selection
For parameters where the unit can be switched over.
"Unit group": to which group does the parameter belong?
"Unit selection": with which parameter do you switch over the unit?
Data type
● Integer8 I8 8-bit integer
● Integer16 I16 16-bit integer
● Integer32 I32 32-bit integer
● Unsigned8 U8 8-bit without sign
● Unsigned16 U16 16-bit without sign
● Unsigned32 U32 32-bit without sign
● FloatingPoint32 Float 32-bit floating-point number
Scaling
Specification of the reference variable with which a signal value is automatically converted with
a BICO interconnection.
The following reference variables are available:
● p2000 … p2003: Reference speed, reference voltage, etc.
● PERCENT: 1.0 = 100%
● 4000H: 4000 hex = 100 % (word) or 4000 0000 hex = 100 % (double word)
SINAMICS G120X converter
468 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.1 Explanation of the detailed parameter list
Further information
This parameter list is based on the following firmware:
● Firmware version: V1.01
● Firmware version of the basic system V04712708_1000102
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 469
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
7.2 Parameter list
All objects: G120X_DP, G120X_PN, G120X_USS
r0002 Drive operating display / Drv op_display
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 200 -
Description: Operating display for the drive.
Value: 0: Operation - everything enabled
10: Operation - set "enable setpoint" = "1" (p1142)
12: Operation - RFG frozen, set "RFG start" = "1" (p1141)
13: Operation - set "enable RFG" = "1" (p1140)
14: Operation - MotID, excitation running
16: Operation - withdraw braking with OFF1 using "ON/OFF1" = "1"
17: Operation - braking with OFF3 can only be interrupted with OFF2
18: Operation - brake on fault, remove fault, acknowledge
19: Operation - DC braking active (p1230, p1231)
21: Ready for operation - set "Enable operation" = "1" (p0852)
22: Ready for operation - de-magnetizing running (p0347)
31: Ready for switching on - set "ON/OFF1" = "0/1" (p0840)
35: Switching on inhibited - carry out first commissioning (p0010)
41: Switching on inhibited - set "ON/OFF1" = "0" (p0840)
42: Switching on inhibited - set "OC/OFF2" = "1" (p0844, p0845)
43: Switching on inhibited - set "OC/OFF3" = "1" (p0848, p0849)
44: Switching on inhibited - supply STO terminal w/ 24 V (hardware)
45: Switching on inhibited - remove fault, acknowledge fault
46: Switching on inhibited - exit commissioning mode (p0010)
70: Initialization
200: Wait for booting/partial booting
Dependency: See also: r0046
NOTICE
For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed.
Note
OC: Operating condition
RFG: Ramp-function generator
COMM: Commissioning
MotID: Motor data identification
p0003 Access level / Acc_level
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C1, T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
3 4 3
Description: Sets the access level to read and write parameters.
Value: 3: Expert
SINAMICS G120X converter
470 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
4: Service
Note
A higher set access level also includes the lower one.
Access level 3 (experts):
Expert know-how is required for these parameters (e.g. BICO parameterization).
Access level 4 (service):
For these parameters, it is necessary that authorized service personnel enter the appropriate password (p3950).
p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter / Drv comm. par_filt
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C2(1), T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2800, 2818
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 49 1
Description: Sets the parameter filter to commission a drive.
Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
Value: 0: Ready
1: Quick commissioning
2: Power unit commissioning
3: Motor commissioning
5: Technological application/units
15: Data sets
29: Only Siemens internal
30: Parameter reset
39: Only Siemens internal
49: Only Siemens internal
Dependency: See also: r3996
NOTICE
When the parameter is reset to a value of 0, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note
The drive can only be switched on outside the drive commissioning (inverter enable). To realize this, this parameter
must be set to 0.
By setting p3900 to a value other than 0, the quick commissioning is completed, and this parameter is automatically
reset to 0.
Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1.
Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time, the motor parameters suitable for the power unit have been
defined, and the control parameters have been calculated accordingly, p0010 is automatically reset to 0 if application
class is SDC as default(p96=1), or set as 1 if DDC as default(p96=2), depending on the power unit that is connected.
p0010 = 3 is used for the subsequent commissioning of additional drive data sets (creating data sets: see p0010 = 15).
p0010 = 29, 39, 49: Only for internal Siemens use!
p0015 Macro drive unit / Macro drv unit
G120X_DP, Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
G120X_PN Can be changed: C1, C2(1) Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 999999 57
Description: Runs the corresponding macro files(41/42/43/44/45/47/48/49/57).
Dependency: See also: p1000, r8570
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 471
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
NOTICE
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active.
Note
Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product.
p0015 Macro drive unit / Macro drv unit
G120X_USS Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: C1, C2(1) Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 999999 41
Description: Runs the corresponding macro files(41/42/43/44/45/46/47/48/49/51/52/54/55).
Dependency: See also: p1000, r8570
NOTICE
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active.
Note
Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product.
r0018 Control Unit firmware version / Firmware version
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4294967295 -
Description: Displays the firmware version of the Control Unit.
Dependency: See also: r0197, r0198
Note
Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
r0020 Speed setpoint smoothed / Speed setpoint
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 5020, 6799
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the currently smoothed speed setpoint at the input of the speed controller or U/f characteristic (after the
interpolator).
Dependency: See also: r0060
Note
Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The speed setpoint is available smoothed (r0020) and unsmoothed (r0060).
SINAMICS G120X converter
472 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0021 CO: Actual speed smoothed / Actual speed
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6799
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the calculated and smoothed rotor speed.
Frequency components from the slip compensation (for induction motors) are not included.
Dependency: See also: r0022, r0063
Note
Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The speed actual value is available smoothed (r0021, r0022) and unsmoothed (r0063).
r0022 Actual speed rpm smoothed / Actual speed
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6799
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the calculated and smoothed rotor speed.
Frequency components from the slip compensation (for induction motors) are not included.
r0022 is identical to r0021, however, it always has units of rpm and contrary to r0021 cannot be changed over.
Dependency: See also: r0021, r0063
Note
Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The speed actual value is available smoothed (r0021, r0022) and unsmoothed (r0063).
r0024 Output frequency smoothed / Output frequency
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6300, 6799
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Displays the smoothed output frequency.
Frequency components from the slip compensation (for induction motors) are included.
Dependency: See also: r0066
Note
Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The output frequency is available smoothed (r0024) and unsmoothed (r0066).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 473
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0025 CO: Output voltage smoothed / Output voltage
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 5730, 6300,
6799
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the smoothed output voltage of the power unit.
Dependency: See also: r0072
Note
Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The output voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072).
r0026 CO: DC link voltage smoothed / DC link voltage
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6799
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the DC link voltage.
Dependency: See also: r0070
NOTICE
When measuring a DC link voltage < 200 V, for the Power Module (e.g. PM240) a valid measured value is not supplied.
In this case, when an external 24 V power supply is connected, a value of approx. 24 V is displayed in the display
parameter.
Note
Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070).
r0026 sets itself to the lower value of the pulsating DC link voltage.
r0027 CO: Absolute actual current smoothed / Motor current
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 5730, 6799,
8850, 8950
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the smoothed absolute actual current value.
Dependency: See also: r0068
NOTICE
This smoothed signal is not suitable for diagnostics or evaluation of dynamic operations. In this case, the unsmoothed
value should be used.
Note
Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The absolute current actual value is available smoothed (r0027) and unsmoothed (r0068).
SINAMICS G120X converter
474 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0028 Modulation depth smoothed / Mod_depth smth
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 5730, 6799,
8950
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the modulation depth.
Dependency: See also: r0074
Note
Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The modulation depth is available smoothed (r0028) and unsmoothed (r0074).
r0029 Current actual value field-generating smoothed / Id_act smooth
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6799
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the smoothed field-generating actual current.
Dependency: See also: r0076
Note
Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The field-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076).
r0030 Current actual value torque-generating smoothed / Iq_act smooth
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6799
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the smoothed torque-generating actual current.
Dependency: See also: r0078
Note
Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030) and unsmoothed (r0078).
r0031 Actual torque smoothed / Actual torque
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 5730, 6799
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the smoothed torque actual value.
Dependency: See also: r0080
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 475
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The torque actual value is available smoothed (r0031) and unsmoothed (r0080).
r0032 CO: Active power actual value smoothed / Power
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: r2004 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 14_10 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 5730, 6799,
8750, 8850, 8950
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the active power.
Dependency: See also: r0082
NOTICE
This smoothed signal is not suitable for diagnostics or evaluation of dynamic operations. In this case, the unsmoothed
value should be used.
Note
Power delivered at the motor shaft.
The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms) and unsmoothed (r0082).
r0034 CO: Motor utilization thermal / Mot_util therm
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8017
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the motor utilization from motor temperature model 1 (I2t).
For firmware version < 4.7 SP6 or p0612.12 = 0:
- r0034 = (motor model temperature - 40 K) / (p0605 - 40 K) * 100 %
From firmware version 4.7 SP6 and p0612.12 = 1:
- r0034 = (motor model temperature - p0613) / (p0605 - p0613) * 100 %
Dependency: The thermal motor utilization is only determined when the motor temperature model 1 (I2t) is activated.
The following conditions are a prerequisite for additional information.
- a temperature sensor has not been parameterized (p0600, p0601).
- the current corresponds to the stall current (p0318).
- speed n > 1 [rpm].
For firmware version < 4.7 SP6 or p0612.12 = 0, the following applies:
- the temperature model operates with an ambient temperature of 20 °C.
A motor utilization of 100% is displayed (r0034 = 100 %) when the following conditions are permanently fulfilled:
- the ambient temperature is 40 °C (model 1: p0625 = 40 °C, model 3: p0613 = 40 °C).
From firmware version 4.7 SP6 and p0612.12 = 1, the following applies:
- the ambient temperature can be adapted to the conditions using p0613.
See also: p0605, p0611, p0612, p0613, p0627, r0632
See also: F07011, A07012
NOTICE
After the drive is switched on, the system starts to determine the motor temperature with an assumed model value.
This means that the value for the motor utilization is only valid after a stabilization time.
SINAMICS G120X converter
476 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
For r0034 = -200.0 %, the following applies:
The value is invalid (e.g. the motor temperature model is not activated or has been incorrectly parameterized).
r0035 CO: Motor temperature / Mot temp
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2006 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8016, 8017
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Display and connector output for the actual temperature in the motor.
Note
For r0035 not equal to -200.0 °C, the following applies:
- this temperature display is valid.
- a KTY/PT1000 temperature sensor is connected.
- the thermal model for the induction motor is activated (p0612 bit 1 = 1 and temperature sensor deactivated: p0600 =
0 or p0601 = 0).
For r0035 equal to -200.0 °C, the following applies:
- this temperature display is not valid (temperature sensor error).
- a PTC sensor or bimetallic NC contact is connected.
- the temperature sensor of the synchronous motor is deactivated (p0600 = 0 or p0601 = 0).
r0036 CO: Power unit overload I2t / PM overload I2t
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8021
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the power unit overload determined using the I2t calculation.
A current reference value is defined for the I2t monitoring of the power unit. It represents the current that can be
conducted by the power unit without any influence of the switching losses (e.g. the continuously permissible current
of the capacitors, inductances, busbars, etc.).
If the I2t reference current of the power unit is not exceeded, then an overload (0 %) is not displayed.
In the other case, the degree of thermal overload is calculated, whereby 100% results in a trip.
Dependency: See also: p0290, p0294
See also: F30005
r0037[0...19] CO: Power unit temperatures / PM temperatures
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2006 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8021
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Display and connector output for the temperature in the power unit.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 477
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Index: [0] = Inverter maximum value
[1] = Depletion layer maximum value
[2] = Rectifier maximum value
[3] = Air intake
[4] = Interior of power unit
[5] = Inverter 1
[6] = Inverter 2
[7...10] = Reserved
[11] = Rectifier 1
[12] = Reserved
[13] = Depletion layer 1
[14] = Depletion layer 2
[15] = Depletion layer 3
[16] = Depletion layer 4
[17] = Depletion layer 5
[18] = Depletion layer 6
[19] = Reserved
NOTICE
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Note
The value of -200 indicates that there is no measuring signal.
r0037[0]: Maximum value of the inverter temperatures (r0037[5...10]).
r0037[1]: Maximum value of the depletion layer temperatures (r0037[13...18]).
r0037[2]: Maximum value of the rectifier temperatures (r0037[11...12]).
The maximum value is the temperature of the hottest inverter, depletion layer, or rectifier.
r0037[2, 3, 6, 11, 14...18] is only relevant for chassis power units.
In the case of a fault, the particular shutdown threshold depends on the power unit, and cannot be read out.
r0037[0...19] CO: Power unit temperatures / PM temperatures
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: - Scaling: p2006 Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8021
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Display and connector output for the temperature in the power unit.
SINAMICS G120X converter
478 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Index: [0] = Inverter maximum value
[1] = Depletion layer maximum value
[2] = Rectifier maximum value
[3] = Air intake
[4] = Interior of power unit
[5] = Inverter 1
[6] = Inverter 2
[7] = Inverter 3
[8] = Reserved
[9] = Reserved
[10] = Reserved
[11] = Rectifier 1
[12] = Reserved
[13] = Depletion layer 1
[14] = Depletion layer 2
[15] = Depletion layer 3
[16] = Depletion layer 4
[17] = Depletion layer 5
[18] = Depletion layer 6
[19] = Reserved
NOTICE
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Note
The value of -200 indicates that there is no measuring signal.
r0037[0]: Maximum value of the inverter temperatures (r0037[5...10]).
r0037[1]: Maximum value of the depletion layer temperatures (r0037[13...18]).
r0037[2]: Maximum value of the rectifier temperatures (r0037[11...12]).
The maximum value is the temperature of the hottest inverter, depletion layer, or rectifier.
In the case of a fault, the particular shutdown threshold depends on the power unit, and cannot be read out.
r0038 Power factor smoothed / Cos phi smooth
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6799, 8850,
8950
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the smoothed actual power factor. This refers to the electrical power of the basic fundamental signals at the
converter output terminals.
NOTICE
For infeed units, the following applies:
For active powers < 25 % of the rated power, this does not provide any useful information.
Note
Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 479
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0039[0...2] CO: Energy display / Energy display
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [kWh] - [kWh] - [kWh]
Description: Displays the energy values at the output terminals of the power unit.
Recommendation: r0042 should be used as process energy display. R0039 supplies as Bico source floating point values in Ws.
Index: [0] = Energy balance (sum)
[1] = Energy drawn
[2] = Energy fed back
Dependency: See also: p0040
Note
For index 0:
Difference between the energy drawn and energy that is fed back.
p0040 Reset energy consumption display / Energy usage reset
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Setting to reset the display in r0039 and r0041.
Procedure:
Set p0040 = 0 --> 1
The displays are reset and the parameter is automatically set to zero.
Dependency: See also: r0039
Note
When this display is reset (p0040), then the process energy display (r0042) is also reset.
r0041 Energy consumption saved / Energy cons saved
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [kWh] - [kWh] - [kWh]
Description: Displays the saved energy referred to 100 operating hours.
Dependency: See also: p0040
Note
This display is used for a fluid-flow machine.
The flow characteristic is entered into p3320 ... p3329.
For an operating time of below 100 hours, the display is interpolated up to 100 hours.
r0042[0...2] CO: Process energy display / Proc energy disp
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Wh] - [Wh] - [Wh]
SINAMICS G120X converter
480 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Display and connector output for the energy values at the output terminals of the power unit.
Index: [0] = Energy balance (sum)
[1] = Energy drawn
[2] = Energy fed back
Dependency: See also: p0043
Note
The signal can be displayed as process variable (scaling: 1 = 1 Wh).
This is enabled in p0043.
The display is also reset with p0040 = 1.
If an enable is present in r0043 when the Control Unit powers up, then the value from r0039 is transferred into r0042.
As r0039 serves as a reference signal for r0042, due to format reasons, the process energy display can only process
values of r0039 up to 2147483 kWh. r0039 should also be reset using this value.
p0043 BI: Enable energy usage display / Enab energy usage
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to enable/reset the process energy display in r0042.
BI: p0043 = 1 signal:
The process energy display is enabled in r0042.
Dependency: See also: r0042
p0045 Display values smoothing time constant / Disp_val T_smooth
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6799
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [ms] 10000.00 [ms] 4.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant for the following display values:
r0063[1], r0068[1], r0080[1], r0082[1].
r0046.0...31 CO/BO: Missing enable signal / Missing enable sig
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2634
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for missing enable signals that are preventing the closed-loop drive control from being
commissioned.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 OFF1 enable missing Yes No 7954
01 OFF2 enable missing Yes No -
02 OFF3 enable missing Yes No -
03 Operation enable missing Yes No -
04 DC braking enable missing Yes No -
08 Safety enable missing Yes No -
10 Ramp-function generator enable missing Yes No -
11 Ramp-function generator start missing Yes No -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 481
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
12 Setpoint enable missing Yes No -
16 OFF1 enable internal missing Yes No -
17 OFF2 enable internal missing Yes No -
18 OFF3 enable internal missing Yes No -
19 Pulse enable internal missing Yes No -
20 DC braking internal enable missing Yes No -
21 Power unit enable missing Yes No -
25 Function bypass active Yes No -
26 Drive inactive or not operational Yes No -
27 De-magnetizing not completed Yes No -
30 Speed controller inhibited Yes No -
31 Jog setpoint active Yes No -
Dependency: See also: r0002
SINAMICS G120X converter
482 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The value r0046 = 0 indicates that all enable signals for this drive are present.
Bit 00 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0840 is a 0 signal.
- there is a "switching on inhibited".
Bit 01 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0844 or p0845 is a 0 signal.
Bit 02 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0848 or p0849 is a 0 signal.
Bit 03 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0852 is a 0 signal.
Bit 04 =1 (DC brake active) when:
- the signal source in p1230 has a 1 signal.
Bit 08 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the "STO via terminals at the Power Module" function is selected.
Bit 10 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p1140 is a 0 signal.
Bit 11 = 1 (enable signal missing) if the speed setpoint is frozen, because:
- the signal source in p1141 is a 0 signal.
- the speed setpoint is entered from jogging and the two signal sources for jogging, bit 0 (p1055) and bit 1 (p1056) have
a 1 signal.
Bit 12 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p1142 is a 0 signal.
Bit 16 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- there is an OFF1 fault response. The system is only enabled if the fault is removed and was acknowledged and the
"switching on inhibited" withdrawn with OFF1 = 0.
Bit 17 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- commissioning mode is selected (p0010 > 0).
- there is an OFF2 fault response.
- the drive is not operational.
Bit 18 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- OFF3 has still not been completed or an OFF3 fault response is present.
Bit 19 = 1 (internal pulse enable missing), if:
- sequence control does not have a finished message.
Bit 20 = 1 (internal DC brake active), if:
- the drive is not in the state "Operation" or in "OFF1/OFF3".
- the internal pulse enable is missing (r0046.19 = 0).
Bit 21 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the power unit does not issue an enable signal (e.g. because DC link voltage is too low).
- the hibernation mode is active.
Bit 25 = 1 (function bypass active) if:
- the bypass function is active.
Bit 26 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the drive is not operational.
Bit 27 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- de-magnetization not completed.
Bit 30 = 1 (speed controller inhibited), if one of the following reasons is present:
- the pole position identification is active.
- motor data identification is active (only certain steps).
Bit 31 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the speed setpoint from jog 1 or 2 is entered.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 483
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0047 Motor data identification and speed controller optimization / MotID and n_opt
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 300 -
Description: Displays the actual status for the motor data identification (stationary measurement) and the speed controller
optimization (rotating measurement).
Value: 0: No measurement
115: Measurement q leakage inductance (part 2)
120: Speed controller optimization (vibration test)
140: Calculate speed controller setting
150: Measurement moment of inertia
170: Measurement magnetizing current and saturation characteristic
195: Measurement q leakage inductance (part 1)
200: Rotating measurement selected
220: identification leakage inductance
230: Identification rotor time constant
240: Identification stator inductance
250: Identification stator inductance LQLD
260: Identification circuit
270: Identification stator resistance
290: Identification valve lockout time
300: Stationary measurement selected
r0047 Motor data identification and speed controller optimization / MotID and n_opt
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 300 -
Description: Displays the actual status for the motor data identification (stationary measurement) and the speed controller
optimization (rotating measurement).
Value: 0: No measurement
115: Measurement q leakage inductance (part 2)
120: Speed controller optimization (vibration test)
140: Calculate speed controller setting
150: Measurement moment of inertia
170: Measurement magnetizing current and saturation characteristic
195: Measurement q leakage inductance (part 1)
200: Rotating measurement selected
220: identification leakage inductance
230: Identification rotor time constant
240: Identification stator inductance
250: Identification stator inductance LQLD
270: Identification stator resistance
290: Identification valve lockout time
295: Calibration output voltage measurement
300: Stationary measurement selected
SINAMICS G120X converter
484 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0050.0...1 CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS effective / CDS effective
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8560
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the effective Command Data Set (CDS).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 CDS effective bit 0 ON OFF -
01 CDS effective bit 1 ON OFF -
Dependency: See also: p0810, p0811, r0836
Note
The Command Data Set selected using a binector input (e.g. p0810) is displayed using r0836.
r0051.0...1 CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS effective / DDS effective
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8565
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the effective Drive Data Set (DDS).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DDS effective bit 0 ON OFF -
01 DDS effective bit 1 ON OFF -
Dependency: See also: p0820, p0821, r0837
Note
When selecting the motor data identification routine and the rotating measurement, the drive data set changeover is
suppressed.
r0052.0...15 CO/BO: Status word 1 / ZSW 1
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and connector output for status word 1.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Ready for switching on Yes No -
01 Ready Yes No -
02 Operation enabled Yes No -
03 Fault present Yes No -
04 Coast down active (OFF2) No Yes -
05 Quick Stop active (OFF3) No Yes -
06 Switching on inhibited active Yes No -
07 Alarm present Yes No -
08 Deviation setpoint/actual speed No Yes -
09 Control request Yes No -
10 Maximum speed reached Yes No -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 485
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
11 I, M, P limit reached No Yes -
13 Alarm motor overtemperature No Yes -
14 Motor rotates forwards Yes No -
15 Alarm drive converter overload No Yes -
NOTICE
p2080 is used to define the signal sources of the PROFIdrive status word interconnection.
Note
For bit 03:
This signal is inverted if it is interconnected to a digital output.
For r0052:
The status bits have the following sources:
Bit 00: r0899 Bit 0
Bit 01: r0899 Bit 1
Bit 02: r0899 Bit 2
Bit 03: r2139 Bit 3 (or r1214.10 for p1210 > 0)
Bit 04: r0899 Bit 4
Bit 05: r0899 Bit 5
Bit 06: r0899 Bit 6
Bit 07: r2139 Bit 7
Bit 08: r2197 Bit 7
Bit 09: r0899 Bit 7
Bit 10: r2197 Bit 6
Bit 11: r0056 Bit 13 (negated)
Bit 13: r2135 Bit 14 (negated)
Bit 14: r2197 Bit 3
Bit 15: r2135 Bit 15 (negated)
r0053.0...11 CO/BO: Status word 2 / ZSW 2
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for status word 2.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DC braking active Yes No -
01 |n_act| > p1226 (n_standstill) Yes No -
02 |n_act| > p1080 (n_min) Yes No -
03 I_act >= p2170 Yes No -
04 |n_act| > p2155 Yes No -
05 |n_act| <= p2155 Yes No -
06 |n_act| >= r1119 (n_set) Yes No -
07 Vdc <= p2172 Yes No -
08 Vdc > p2172 Yes No -
09 Ramp-up/ramp-down completed Yes No -
10 Technology controller output at the lower limit Yes No -
11 Technology controller output at the upper limit Yes No -
NOTICE
p2081 is used to define the signal sources of the PROFIdrive status word interconnection.
SINAMICS G120X converter
486 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The following status bits are displayed in r0053:
Bit 01: r2197 Bit 5 (negated)
Bit 02: r2197 Bit 0 (negated)
Bit 03: r2197 Bit 8
Bit 04: r2197 Bit 2
Bit 05: r2197 Bit 1
Bit 06: r2197 Bit 4
Bit 07: r2197 Bit 9
Bit 08: r2197 Bit 10
Bit 09: r1199 Bit 2 (negated)
Bit 10: r2349 Bit 10
Bit 11: r2349 Bit 11
r0053.0...11 CO/BO: Status word 2 / ZSW 2
G120X_DP (DC Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
braking), G120X_PN Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
(DC braking),
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
G120X_USS (DC
braking) Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for status word 2.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DC braking active Yes No -
01 |n_act| > p1226 (n_standstill) Yes No -
02 |n_act| > p1080 (n_min) Yes No -
03 I_act >= p2170 Yes No -
04 |n_act| > p2155 Yes No -
05 |n_act| <= p2155 Yes No -
06 |n_act| >= r1119 (n_set) Yes No -
07 Vdc <= p2172 Yes No -
08 Vdc > p2172 Yes No -
09 Ramp-up/ramp-down completed Yes No -
10 Technology controller output at the lower limit Yes No -
11 Technology controller output at the upper limit Yes No -
NOTICE
p2081 is used to define the signal sources of the PROFIdrive status word interconnection.
Note
The following status bits are displayed in r0053:
Bit 00: r1239 Bit 8
Bit 01: r2197 Bit 5 (negated)
Bit 02: r2197 Bit 0 (negated)
Bit 03: r2197 Bit 8
Bit 04: r2197 Bit 2
Bit 05: r2197 Bit 1
Bit 06: r2197 Bit 4
Bit 07: r2197 Bit 9
Bit 08: r2197 Bit 10
Bit 09: r1199 Bit 2 (negated)
Bit 10: r2349 Bit 10
Bit 11: r2349 Bit 11
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 487
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0054.0...15 CO/BO: Control word 1 / STW 1
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays control word 1.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No -
01 OC / OFF2 No Yes -
02 OC / OFF3 No Yes -
03 Enable operation Yes No -
04 Enable ramp-function generator Yes No -
05 Continue ramp-function generator Yes No -
06 Enable speed setpoint Yes No -
07 Acknowledge fault Yes No -
08 Jog bit 0 Yes No 3030
09 Jog bit 1 Yes No 3030
10 Master control by PLC Yes No -
11 Direction reversal (setpoint) Yes No -
13 Motorized potentiometer raise Yes No -
14 Motorized potentiometer lower Yes No -
15 CDS bit 0 Yes No -
Note
The following control bits are displayed in r0054:
Bit 00: r0898 Bit 0
Bit 01: r0898 Bit 1
Bit 02: r0898 Bit 2
Bit 03: r0898 Bit 3
Bit 04: r0898 Bit 4
Bit 05: r0898 Bit 5
Bit 06: r0898 Bit 6
Bit 07: r2138 Bit 7
Bit 08: r0898 Bit 8
Bit 09: r0898 Bit 9
Bit 10: r0898 Bit 10
Bit 11: r1198 Bit 11
Bit 13: r1198 Bit 13
Bit 14: r1198 Bit 14
Bit 15: r0836 Bit 0
r0055.0...15 CO/BO: Supplementary control word / Suppl STW
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2513
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for supplementary control word.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fixed setpoint bit 0 Yes No -
01 Fixed setpoint bit 1 Yes No -
SINAMICS G120X converter
488 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
02 Fixed setpoint bit 2 Yes No -
03 Fixed setpoint bit 3 Yes No -
04 DDS selection bit 0 Yes No -
05 DDS selection bit 1 Yes No -
08 Technology controller enable Yes No -
09 DC braking enable Yes No -
11 Reserved - - -
12 Reserved - - -
13 External fault 1 (F07860) No Yes -
15 CDS bit 1 Yes No -
Note
CDS: Command Data Set
DDS: Drive Data Set
The following control bits are displayed in r0055:
Bit 00: r1198.0
Bit 01: r1198.1
Bit 02: r1198.2
Bit 03: r1198.3
Bit 04: r0837.0
Bit 05: r0837.1
Bit 08: r2349.0 (negated)
Bit 13: r2138.13 (negated)
Bit 15: r0836.1
r0055.0...15 CO/BO: Supplementary control word / Suppl STW
G120X_DP (DC Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
braking), G120X_PN Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
(DC braking),
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2513
G120X_USS (DC
braking) Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for supplementary control word.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fixed setpoint bit 0 Yes No -
01 Fixed setpoint bit 1 Yes No -
02 Fixed setpoint bit 2 Yes No -
03 Fixed setpoint bit 3 Yes No -
04 DDS selection bit 0 Yes No -
05 DDS selection bit 1 Yes No -
08 Technology controller enable Yes No -
09 DC braking enable Yes No -
11 Reserved - - -
12 Reserved - - -
13 External fault 1 (F07860) No Yes -
15 CDS bit 1 Yes No -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 489
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
CDS: Command Data Set
DDS: Drive Data Set
The following control bits are displayed in r0055:
Bit 00: r1198.0
Bit 01: r1198.1
Bit 02: r1198.2
Bit 03: r1198.3
Bit 04: r0837.0
Bit 05: r0837.1
Bit 08: r2349.0 (negated)
Bit 09: r1239.11
Bit 13: r2138.13 (negated)
Bit 15: r0836.1
r0056.0...15 CO/BO: Status word, closed-loop control / ZSW cl-loop ctrl
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2526
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the status word of the closed-loop control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Initialization completed Yes No -
01 De-magnetizing completed Yes No -
02 Pulse enable available Yes No -
04 Magnetizing completed Yes No -
05 Voltage boost when starting Active Inactive 6301
06 Acceleration voltage Active Inactive 6301
07 Frequency negative Yes No -
08 Field weakening active Yes No -
09 Voltage limit active Yes No 6714
10 Slip limit active Yes No 6310
11 Frequency limit active Yes No -
12 Current limiting controller voltage output active Yes No -
13 Current/torque limiting Active Inactive 6060
14 Vdc_max controller active Yes No 6220,
6320
15 Vdc_min controller active Yes No 6220,
6320
r0060 CO: Speed setpoint before the setpoint filter / n_set before filt.
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 2701, 6030,
6799, 6822
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the actual speed setpoint at the input of the speed controller or U/f characteristic (after the interpolator).
Dependency: See also: r0020
SINAMICS G120X converter
490 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The speed setpoint is available smoothed (r0020) and unsmoothed (r0060).
r0062 CO: Speed setpoint after the filter / n_set after filter
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6020, 6030,
6031, 6822
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display and connector output for the speed setpoint after the setpoint filters.
r0063[0...2] CO: Actual speed / Actual speed
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6020, 6730,
6799, 6841
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display and connector output for the speed actual value.
Frequency components from the slip compensation (for induction motors) are not included.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
[2] = Calculated from f_set - f_slip (unsmoothed)
Dependency: See also: r0021, r0022
Note
The speed actual value r0063[0] – smoothed with p0045 – is additionally displayed in r0063[1]. r0063[1] can be used
as process variable for the appropriate smoothing time constant p0045.
The speed (r0063[2]) calculated from the output frequency and slip can only be compared with the speed actual value
(r0063[0]) in the steady-state.
For U/f control, the mechanical speed calculated from the output frequency and the slip is shown in r0063[2] even if slip
compensation is deactivated.
r0064 CO: Speed controller system deviation / n_ctrl sys dev
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6040, 6824
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the actual system deviation of the speed controller.
r0065 Slip frequency / f_Slip
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 2_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6310, 6700,
6727, 6730, 6732
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Displays the slip frequency for induction motors (ASM).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 491
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0066 CO: Output frequency / f_outp
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 2_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6730, 6731,
6792, 6799, 6841, 6842, 6843
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Display and connector output for the unsmoothed output frequency of the power unit.
Frequency components from the slip compensation (induction motor) are included.
Dependency: See also: r0024
Note
The output frequency is available smoothed (r0024) and unsmoothed (r0066).
r0067 CO: Output current maximum / Current max
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6300, 6640,
6724, 6828, 6850
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Display and connector output for the maximum output current of the power unit.
Dependency: The maximum output current is determined by the parameterized current limit and the motor and converter thermal
protection.
See also: p0290, p0640
r0068[0...1] CO: Absolute current actual value / I_act abs val
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6300, 6714,
6799, 7017, 8017, 8021, 8022
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays actual absolute current.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
Dependency: See also: r0027
NOTICE
The value is updated with the current controller sampling time.
Note
Absolute current value = sqrt(Iq^2 + Id^2)
The absolute value of the current actual value is available smoothed (r0027 with 300 ms, r0068[1] with p0045) and
unsmoothed (r0068[0]).
r0069[0...8] CO: Phase current actual value / I_phase act val
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6730
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [A] - [A] - [A]
SINAMICS G120X converter
492 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Display and connector output for the measured actual phase currents as peak value.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
[3] = Phase U offset
[4] = Phase V offset
[5] = Phase W offset
[6] = Total U, V, W
[7] = Alpha component
[8] = Beta component
Note
In indices 3 ... 5, the offset currents of the 3 phases, which are added to correct the phase currents, are displayed.
The sum of the 3 corrected phase currents is displayed in index 6.
r0070 CO: Actual DC link voltage / Vdc act val
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 5_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6723, 6724,
6730, 6731, 6799
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Display and connector output for the measured actual value of the DC link voltage.
Dependency: See also: r0026
NOTICE
When measuring a DC link voltage < 200 V, for the Power Module (e.g. PM240) a valid measured value is not supplied.
In this case, when an external 24 V power supply is connected, a value of approx. 24 V is displayed in the display
parameter.
Note
The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070).
r0071 Maximum output voltage / Voltage max
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6301, 6640,
6700, 6722, 6723, 6724, 6725,
6727
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the maximum output voltage.
Dependency: The maximum output voltage depends on the actual DC link voltage (r0070) and the maximum modulation depth
(p1803).
Note
As the (driven) motor load increases, the maximum output voltage drops as a result of the reduction in DC link voltage.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 493
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0072 CO: Output voltage / U_output
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 5700, 6730,
6731, 6799
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Display and connector output for the actual output voltage of the power unit.
Dependency: See also: r0025
Note
The output voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072).
r0073 Maximum modulation depth / Modulat_depth max
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6723, 6724
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the maximum modulation depth.
Dependency: See also: p1803
r0074 CO: Modulat_depth / Mod_depth
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 5730, 6730,
6731, 6799, 8940, 8950
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the actual modulation depth.
Dependency: See also: r0028
Note
For space vector modulation, 100% corresponds to the maximum output voltage without overcontrol.
Values above 100 % indicate an overcontrol condition - values below 100% have no overcontrol.
The phase voltage (phase-to-phase, rms) is calculated as follows:(r0074 x r0070) / (sqrt(2) x 100 %).
The modulation depth is available smoothed (r0028) and unsmoothed (r0074).
r0075 CO: Current setpoint field-generating / Id_set
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6700, 6714,
6725
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Display and connector output for the field-generating current setpoint (Id_set).
Note
This value is irrelevant for the U/f control mode.
SINAMICS G120X converter
494 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0076 CO: Current actual value field-generating / Id_act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 5700, 5714,
5730, 6700, 6714, 6799
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Display and connector output for the field-generating current actual value (Id_act).
Dependency: See also: r0029
Note
This value is irrelevant for the U/f control mode.
The field-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076).
r0077 CO: Current setpoint torque-generating / Iq_set
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6700, 6710
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Display and connector output for the torque-generating current setpoint.
Note
This value is irrelevant for the U/f control mode.
r0078 CO: Current actual value torque-generating / Iq_act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6310, 6700,
6714, 6799
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Display and connector output for the torque-generating current actual value (Iq_act).
Dependency: See also: r0030
Note
This value is irrelevant for the U/f control mode.
The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030 with 300 ms) and unsmoothed (r0078).
r0079 CO: Torque setpoint / M_set
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6020, 6060,
6710
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Display and connector output for the torque setpoint at the output of the speed controller.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 495
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0080[0...1] CO: Torque actual value / Actual torque
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6714, 6799
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Display and connector output for actual torque value.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
Dependency: See also: r0031, p0045
Note
The value is available smoothed (r0031 with 100 ms, r0080[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed (r0080[0]).
r0082[0...2] CO: Active power actual value / P_act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: r2004 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 14_5 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6714, 6799
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]
Description: Displays the instantaneous active power.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
[2] = Electric power
Dependency: See also: r0032
Note
The mechanical active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms, r0082[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed
(r0082[0]).
r0083 CO: Flux setpoint / Flex setp
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 5722
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the flux setpoint.
r0084[0...1] CO: Flux actual value / Actual flux
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6730, 6731
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the flux actual value.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed
SINAMICS G120X converter
496 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0087 CO: Actual power factor / Cos phi act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the actual active power factor.
This value refers to the electrical power of the basic fundamental signals at the output terminals of the converter.
r0089[0...2] Actual phase voltage / U_phase act val
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 5_3 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6730
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the actual phase voltage.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
Note
The values are determined from the transistor switch-on duration.
p0096 Application class / Appl_class
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C2(1) Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6019
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 2 0
Description: Setting the commissioning and control view for various application classes.
Value: 0: Expert
1: Standard Drive Control (SDC)
2: Dynamic Drive Control (DDC)
Dependency: The parameter is preset when commissioning the system for the first time and for the factory setting, depending on the
power unit that is connected (Power unit is more than 18KW, p0096=2. Power unit is less than 18KW, p0096=1).
Depending on the setting, the ability to see control parameters is restricted depending on the particular application.
The following applies for p0096 > 0:
The motor data identification routine is preset (p1900 = 2).
The following applies for p0096 = 1:
The motor type (p0300) synchronous or reluctance motor is not possible.
Note
When changing p0096 to 1 or 2, when completing commissioning, fast parameterization should be executed (p3900
> 0).
Depending on the setting, after quick commissioning and/or automatic parameterization, the procedure for motor data
identification as well as the setting of the operating mode and parameterization of the closed-loop control must be
appropriately adapted.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 497
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0096 Application class / Appl_class
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: C2(1) Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6019
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 2 0
Description: Setting the commissioning and control view for various application classes.
Value: 0: Expert
2: Dynamic Drive Control (DDC)
Dependency: The parameter is preset when commissioning the system for the first time and for the factory setting, depending on the
power unit that is connected (Power unit is more than 18KW, p0096=2. Power unit is less than 18KW, p0096=1).
Depending on the setting, the ability to see control parameters is restricted depending on the particular application.
The following applies for p0096 > 0:
The motor data identification routine is preset (p1900 = 2).
Note
When changing p0096 to 1 or 2, when completing commissioning, fast parameterization should be executed (p3900
> 0).
Depending on the setting, after quick commissioning and/or automatic parameterization, the procedure for motor data
identification as well as the setting of the operating mode and parameterization of the closed-loop control must be
appropriately adapted.
p0100 IEC/NEMA Standards / IEC/NEMA Standards
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C2(1, 2) Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 2 0
Description: Defines whether the motor and drive converter power settings (e.g. rated motor power, p0307) are expressed in [kW]
or [hp].
Depending on the selection, the rated motor frequency (p0310) is either set to 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
For p0100 = 0, 2, the following applies: The power factor (p0308) should be parameterized.
For p0100 = 1, the following applies: The efficiency (p0309) should be parameterized.
Value: 0: IEC (50 Hz line, SI units)
1: NEMA (60 Hz line, US units)
2: NEMA (60 Hz line, SI units)
Dependency: If p0100 is changed, all of the rated motor parameters are reset. Only then are possible unit changeovers made.
The units of all motor parameters are changed that are involved in the selection of IEC or NEMA (e.g. r0206, p0307,
r0333, r0334, p0341, p0344, r1969).
See also: r0206, p0210, p0300, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0308, p0309, p0310, p0311, p0314, p0320, p0322, p0323,
p0335, r0337, p1800
Note
The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (p0010 = 30, p0970).
p0124[0...n] CU detection via LED / CU detection LED
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: PDS, p0120
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Identification of the Control Unit using an LED.
SINAMICS G120X converter
498 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
While p0124 = 1, the READY LED flashes green/orange or red/orange with 2 Hz at the appropriate Control Unit.
p0133[0...n] Motor configuration / Motor config
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 bin
Description: Configuration of the motor when commissioning the motor.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Motor connection type Delta Star -
01 Motor 87 Hz operation Yes No -
Dependency: For standard induction motors (p0301 > 10000), bit 0 is automatically pre-assigned the connection type of the selected
data set.
For p0100 > 0 (60 Hz rated motor frequency), it is not possible to select bit 1.
See also: p0304, p0305, p1082
Note
For bit 00:
When changing the bits, the rated motor voltage p0304 and the rated motor current p0305 are automatically converted
to the selected connection type (star/delta).
For bit 01:
87 Hz operation is only possible in the delta connection type. When selected, the maximum speed p1082 is
automatically pre-assigned for a maximum output frequency of 87 Hz.
p0170 Number of Command Data Sets (CDS) / CDS count
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: C2(15) Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8560
Min: Max: Factory setting:
2 4 2
Description: Sets the number of Command Data Sets (CDS).
Dependency: See also: p0010, r3996
NOTICE
When the data sets are created, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note
It is possible to toggle between command parameters (BICO parameters) using this data set changeover.
p0180 Number of Drive Data Sets (DDS) / DDS count
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: C2(15) Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8565
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 4 1
Description: Sets the number of Drive Data Sets (DDS).
Dependency: See also: p0010, r3996
NOTICE
When the data sets are created, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 499
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0197[0...1] Bootloader version / Bootloader vers
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the bootloader version.
Index 0:
Displays the bootloader version.
Index 1:
Displays the bootloader version 3 (for CU320-2 and CU310-2)
Value 0 means that boot loader 3 is not available.
Dependency: See also: r0018, r0198
Note
Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
r0198[0...2] BIOS/EEPROM data version / BIOS/EEPROM vers
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the BIOS and EEPROM data version.
r0198[0]: BIOS version
r0198[1]: EEPROM data version EEPROM 0
r0198[2]: EEPROM data version EEPROM 1
Dependency: See also: r0018, r0197
Note
Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
r0200[0...n] Power unit code number actual / PU code no. act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: PDS, p0120
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the unique code number of the power unit.
Note
r0200 = 0: No power unit data found
p0201[0...n] Power unit code number / PU code no
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: C2(2) Scaling: - Dynamic index: PDS, p0120
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 65535 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
500 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the actual code number from r0200 to acknowledge the power unit being used.
When commissioned for the first time, the code number is automatically transferred from r0200 into p0201.
Note
The parameter is used to identify when the drive is being commissioned for the first time.
The power unit commissioning can only be exited (p0201 = r0200), if the actual and acknowledged code numbers are
identical (p0010 = 2).
When the code number is changed, the connection voltage (p0210) is checked and, if necessary, adjusted.
r0203[0...n] Actual power unit type / PU actual type
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: PDS, p0120
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
2 400 -
Description: Displays the type of power unit found.
Value: 2: MICROMASTER 440
3: MICROMASTER 411
4: MICROMASTER 410
5: MICROMASTER 436
6: MICROMASTER 440 PX
7: MICROMASTER 430
100: SINAMICS S
101: SINAMICS S (value)
102: SINAMICS S (combi)
103: SINAMICS S120M (distributed)
112: PM220 (SINAMICS G120)
113: PM230 (SINAMICS G120)
114: PM240 (SINAMICS G120 / S120)
115: PM250 (SINAMICS G120 / S120)
116: PM260 (SINAMICS G120)
118: SINAMICS G120 Px
120: PM340 (SINAMICS S120 / G120)
126: SINAMICS ET200PRO
130: PM250D (SINAMICS G120D)
133: SINAMICS G120C
135: SINAMICS PMV40
136: SINAMICS PMV60
137: SINAMICS PMV80
138: SINAMICS G110M
140: SINAMICS G120X/G120XA
150: SINAMICS G
151: PM330 (SINAMICS G120)
200: SINAMICS GM
250: SINAMICS SM
260: SINAMICS MC
300: SINAMICS GL
350: SINAMICS SL
400: SINAMICS DCM
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 501
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit.
r0204[0...n] Power unit hardware properties / PU HW property
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: PDS, p0120
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the properties supported by the power unit hardware.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
01 RFI filter available Yes No -
07 F3E regenerative feedback into the line supply Yes No -
08 Internal Braking Module Yes No -
12 Safe Brake Control (SBC) supported No Yes -
14 Internal LC output filter Yes No -
15 Line voltage 1-phase 3-phase -
p0205 Power unit application / PU application
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C2(1, 2) Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 7 0
Description: The duty cycles can be overloaded provided that the drive converter is operated with its base load current before and
after the overload. This is based on a load duty cycle of 300 s.
Value: 0: Load duty cycle with high overload for vector drives
1: Load duty cycle with low overload for vector drives
6: S1 duty cycle (for internal use)
7: S6 duty cycle (for internal use)
Dependency: See also: r3996
NOTICE
The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (see p0010 = 30, p0970).
When the power unit use is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note
When the parameter is changed, all of the motor parameters (p0305 ... p0311), the technological application (p0500)
and the control mode (p1300) are pre-assigned according to the selected application. The parameter has no influence
when calculating the thermal overload.
p0205 can only be changed to the settings that are saved in the power unit EEPROM.
p0205 Power unit application / PU application
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: C2(1, 2) Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 1
Description: The duty cycles can be overloaded provided that the drive converter is operated with its base load current before and
after the overload. This is based on a load duty cycle of 300 s.
Value: 0: Load duty cycle with high overload for vector drives
SINAMICS G120X converter
502 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
1: Load duty cycle with low overload for vector drives
Dependency: See also: r3996
NOTICE
The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (see p0010 = 30, p0970).
When the power unit use is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note
When the parameter is changed, all of the motor parameters (p0305 ... p0311), the technological application (p0500)
and the control mode (p1300) are pre-assigned according to the selected application. The parameter has no influence
when calculating the thermal overload.
p0205 can only be changed to the settings that are saved in the power unit EEPROM.
r0206[0...4] Rated power unit power / PU P_rated
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 14_6 Unit selection: p0100 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]
Description: Displays the rated power unit power for various load duty cycles.
Index: [0] = Rated value
[1] = Load duty cycle with low overload
[2] = Load duty cycle with high overload
[3] = S1 cont duty cyc
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency: IECdrives (p0100 = 0): Units kW
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): Units hp
See also: p0100, p0205
r0207[0...4] Rated power unit current / PU PI_rated
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8021
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the rated power unit power for various load duty cycles.
Index: [0] = Rated value
[1] = Load duty cycle with low overload
[2] = Load duty cycle with high overload
[3] = S1 cont duty cyc
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency: See also: p0205
r0207[0...4] Rated power unit current / PU PI_rated
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8021
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the rated power unit power for various load duty cycles.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 503
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Index: [0] = Rated value
[1] = Load duty cycle with low overload
[2] = Load duty cycle with high overload
[3] = S1 cont duty cyc
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency: See also: p0205
Note
Wide voltage range device 500 V - 690 V:
The rated current displayed refers to a supply voltage of 500 V.
r0208 Rated power unit line supply voltage / PU U_rated
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the rated line supply voltage of the power unit.
r0208 = 400: 380 - 480 V +/-10 %
r0208 = 500: 500 - 600 V +/-10 %
r0208 = 690: 660 - 690 V +/-10 %
r0209[0...4] Power unit maximum current / PU I_max
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8750, 8850,
8950
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the maximum output current of the power unit.
Index: [0] = Catalog
[1] = Load duty cycle with low overload
[2] = Load duty cycle with high overload
[3] = S1 load duty cycle
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency: See also: p0205
p0210 Drive unit line supply voltage / U_connect
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 [V] 63000 [V] 400 [V]
Description: Sets the drive unit supply voltage (rms value of the phase-to-phase line supply voltage).
Dependency: Set p1254, p1294 (automatic detection of the Vdc switch-on levels) = 0.
The switch-in thresholds of the Vdc_max controller (r1242, r1282) are then directly determined using p0210.
NOTICE
If, in the switched-off state (pulse inhibit), the supply voltage is higher than the entered value, the Vdc controller may
be automatically deactivated in some cases to prevent the motor from accelerating the next time the system is
switched on. In this case, an appropriate alarm A07401 is output.
SINAMICS G120X converter
504 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
Setting ranges for p0210 as a function of the rated power unit voltage:
U_rated = 230 V:
- p0210 = 200 ... 240 V
U_rated = 400 V:
- p0210 = 380 ... 480 V
U_rated = 690 V:
- p0210 = 500 ... 690 V
p0230 Drive filter type motor side / Drv filt type mot
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C2(1, 2) Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4 0
Description: Sets the type of the filter at the motor side.
Value: 0: No filter
1: Motor reactor
2: dv/dt filter
3: Sine-wave filter Siemens
4: Sine-wave filter third-party
Dependency: The following parameters are influenced using p0230:
p0230 = 1:
--> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance
p0230 = 3:
--> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance
--> p0234 (power unit sine-wave filter capacitance) = filter capacitance
--> p0290 (power unit overload response) = inhibit pulse frequency reduction
--> p1082 (maximum speed) = Fmax filter / pole pair number
--> p1800 (pulse frequency) >= nominal pulse frequency of the filter
--> p1802 (modulator modes) = space vector modulation without overcontrol
p0230 = 4:
--> p0290 (power unit overload response) = inhibit pulse frequency reduction
--> p1802 (modulator modes) = space vector modulation without overcontrol
The user must set the following parameters according to the data sheet of the sine-wave filter and also the user must
check whether they are permitted.
--> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance
--> p0234 (power unit sine-wave filter capacitance) = filter capacitance
--> p1082 (maximum speed) = Fmax filter / pole pair number
--> p1800 (pulse frequency) >= nominal pulse frequency of the filter
See also: p0233, p0234, p0290, p1082, p1800, p1802
Note
The parameter cannot be changed if the power unit (e.g. PM260) is equipped with an internal sine-wave filter.
For sine-wave filters, the test pulse evaluation to detect short-circuits is always deactivated.
Only motor reactor filter type can be selected for a synchronous reluctance motor (RESM).
If a filter type cannot be selected, then this filter type is not permitted for the power unit.
p0230 = 1:
Power units with output reactor are limited to output frequencies of 150 Hz.
p0230 = 3:
Power units with sine-wave filter are limited to output frequencies of 200 Hz.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 505
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0230 Drive filter type motor side / Drv filt type mot
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: C2(1, 2) Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 2 0
Description: Sets the type of the filter at the motor side.
Value: 0: No filter
1: Motor reactor
2: dv/dt filter
Dependency: The following parameters are influenced using p0230:
p0230 = 1:
--> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance
See also: p0233, p0234, p0290, p1082, p1800, p1802
Note
If a filter type cannot be selected, then this filter type is not permitted for the power unit.
p0230 = 1:
Power units with output reactor are limited to output frequencies of 150 Hz.
r0231[0...1] Power cable length maximum / Cable length max
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [m] - [m] - [m]
Description: Displays the maximum permissible cable lengths between the drive unit and motor.
Index: [0] = Unshielded
[1] = Shielded
Note
The display value is used to provide information for service and maintenance.
p0233 Power unit motor reactor / PU mot reactor
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C2(1), T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [mH] 1000.000 [mH] 0.000 [mH]
Description: Enter the inductance of a filter connected at the power unit output.
Dependency: This parameter is automatically pre-set when you select a filter via p0230 if a SIEMENS filter is defined for the power
unit.
See also: p0230
Note
When exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 = 1, the parameter value is set to the value of the defined SIEMENS
filter or to zero. For this reason, the parameter value of a third-party filter only has to be entered outside the
commissioning phase (p0010 = 0) and then the controller calculation (p0340 = 3) is carried out.
The parameter cannot be changed if the power unit (e.g. PM260) is equipped with an internal sine-wave filter.
SINAMICS G120X converter
506 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0234 Power unit sine-wave filter capacitance / PU sine filter C
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C2(1), T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [µF] 1000.000 [µF] 0.000 [µF]
Description: Enters the capacitance of a sine-wave filter connected at the power unit output.
Dependency: This parameter is automatically pre-set when you select a filter via p0230 if a SIEMENS filter is defined for the power
unit.
See also: p0230
Note
The parameter value includes the sum of all of the capacitances of a phase connected in series (phase - ground).
When exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 = 1, the parameter value is set to the value of the defined SIEMENS
filter or to zero. For this reason, the parameter value of a third-party filter only has to be entered outside the
commissioning phase (p0010 = 0).
The parameter cannot be changed if the power unit (e.g. PM260) is equipped with an internal sine-wave filter.
p0235 Motor reactor in series number / L_mot in SeriesQty
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: C2(1, 2) Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 3 1
Description: Sets the number of reactors connected in series at the power unit output.
Dependency: See also: p0230
NOTICE
The reactor inductances should be the same.
If the number of motor reactors connected in series does not correspond to this parameter value, then this can result
in an unfavorable control behavior.
r0238 Internal power unit resistance / PU R internal
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the internal resistance of the power unit (IGBT and line resistance).
p0247 Voltage measurement configuring / U_mes config
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0000 0010 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the output voltage measurement of the power unit.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Activate voltage measurement Yes No -
01 Siemens internal Yes No -
02 Siemens internal Yes No -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 507
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
05 Use voltage measured values for flying restart Yes No -
07 Voltage calibration when switching on Yes No -
08 Voltage monitoring when switching on Yes No -
09 Voltage monitoring cyclic Yes No -
Note
The motor data identification must be executed when using the voltage measurement.
p0251[0...n] Operating hours counter power unit fan / PU fan t_oper
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: PDS, p0120
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [h] 4294967295 [h] 0 [h]
Description: Displays the power unit fan operating hours.
The number of hours operated can only be reset to 0 in this parameter (e.g. after a fan has been replaced).
Dependency: See also: p0252
See also: A30042
Note
For liquid-cooled chassis power units, the operating hours of the inner fan are displayed in p0251 and not in p0254.
p0252 Maximum operating time power unit fan / PU fan t_oper max
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [h] 100000 [h] 40000 [h]
Description: Sets the maximum operating time of the power unit fan.
The prealarm (warning) is output 500 hours before this set value.
The monitoring is deactivated with p0252 = 0.
Dependency: See also: p0251
See also: A30042
Note
For PM330 power units, the maximum operating time of the fan on the power unit is saved and displayed in p0252. The
"Restore factory setting" function or a project download does not influence p0252. Users can manually change the
maximum operating time of the fan. The modified value is also saved to the power unit.
p0254[0...n] Operating hours counter power unit fan inside the converter / PU inner fan t_op
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: PDS, p0120
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [h] 4294967295 [h] 0 [h]
Description: Displays the power unit fan operating hours of the internal fan in the power unit.
The number of hours operated can only be reset to 0 in this parameter (e.g. after a fan has been replaced).
Dependency: See also: A30042
Note
For liquid-cooled chassis power units, the operating hours of the inner fan are displayed in p0251 and not in p0254.
SINAMICS G120X converter
508 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0287[0...1] Ground fault monitoring thresholds / Gnd flt threshold
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 100.0 [%] [0] 6.0 [%]
[1] 16.0 [%]
Description: Sets the shutdown thresholds for the ground fault monitoring.
The setting is made as a percentage of the maximum current of the power unit (r0209).
Index: [0] = Threshold at which precharging starts
[1] = Threshold at which precharging stops
Dependency: See also: p1901
See also: F30021
Note
This parameter is only relevant for chassis power units.
r0289 CO: Maximum power unit output current / PU I_outp max
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the actual maximum output current of the power unit taking into account derating factors.
p0290 Power unit overload response / PU overld response
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8021
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 13 2
Description: Sets the response to a thermal overload condition of the power unit.
The following quantities can result in a response to thermal overload:
- heat sink temperature (r0037[0]).
- chip temperature (r0037[1]).
- power unit overload I2t (r0036).
Possible measures to avoid thermal overload:
- reduce the output current limit r0289 and r0067 (for closed-loop speed control) or the output frequency (for U/f control
indirectly via the output current limit and the intervention of the current limiting controller).
- reduce the pulse frequency.
A reduction, if parameterized, is always realized after an appropriate alarm is output.
Value: 0: Reduce output current or output frequency
1: No reduction shutdown when overload threshold is reached
2: Reduce I_output or f_output and f_pulse (not using I2t)
3: Reduce the pulse frequency (not using I2t)
12: I_output or f_output and automatic pulse frequency reduction
13: Automatic pulse frequency reduction
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 509
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Dependency: If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), then only responses can be selected without pulse
frequency reduction (p0290 = 0, 1).
For a thermal power unit overload, an appropriate alarm or fault is output, and r2135.15 or r2135.13 set.
See also: r0036, r0037, p0230, r2135
See also: A05000, A05001, A07805
NOTICE
If the thermal overload of the power unit is not sufficiently reduced by the actions taken, the drive is always shut down.
This means that the power unit is always protected irrespective of the setting of this parameter.
Note
The setting p0290 = 0, 2 is only practical if the load decreases with decreasing speed (e.g. for applications with variable
torque such as for pumps and fans).
Under overload conditions, the current and torque limit are reduced, and therefore the motor is braked and forbidden
speed ranges (e.g. minimum speed p1080 and suppression [skip] speeds p1091 ... p1094) can be passed through.
For p0290 = 2, 3, 12, 13, the I2t overload detection of the power unit does not influence the response "Reduce pulse
frequency".
When the motor data identification routine is selected, p0290 cannot be changed.
For short-circuit/ground fault detection, when the test pulse evaluation is active via p1901 "Test pulse evaluation
configuration", the pulse frequency at the instant of switch on is briefly reduced.
p0290 Power unit overload response / PU overld response
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8021
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 3 2
Description: Sets the response to a thermal overload condition of the power unit.
The following quantities can result in a response to thermal overload:
- heat sink temperature (r0037[0]).
- chip temperature (r0037[1]).
- power unit overload I2t (r0036).
Possible measures to avoid thermal overload:
- reduce the output current limit r0289 and r0067 (for closed-loop speed control) or the output frequency (for U/f control
indirectly via the output current limit and the intervention of the current limiting controller).
- reduce the pulse frequency.
A reduction, if parameterized, is always realized after an appropriate alarm is output.
Value: 0: Reduce output current or output frequency
1: No reduction shutdown when overload threshold is reached
2: Reduce I_output or f_output and f_pulse (not using I2t)
3: Reduce the pulse frequency (not using I2t)
Dependency: If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), then only responses can be selected without pulse
frequency reduction (p0290 = 0, 1).
For a thermal power unit overload, an appropriate alarm or fault is output, and r2135.15 or r2135.13 set.
See also: r0036, r0037, p0230, r2135
See also: A05000, A05001, A07805
NOTICE
If the thermal overload of the power unit is not sufficiently reduced by the actions taken, the drive is always shut down.
This means that the power unit is always protected irrespective of the setting of this parameter.
SINAMICS G120X converter
510 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The setting p0290 = 0, 2 is only practical if the load decreases with decreasing speed (e.g. for applications with variable
torque such as for pumps and fans).
Under overload conditions, the current and torque limit are reduced, and therefore the motor is braked and forbidden
speed ranges (e.g. minimum speed p1080 and suppression [skip] speeds p1091 ... p1094) can be passed through.
For p0290 = 2, 3, the I2t overload detection of the power unit does not influence the response "Reduce pulse frequency".
When the motor data identification routine is selected, p0290 cannot be changed.
For short-circuit/ground fault detection, when the test pulse evaluation is active via p1901 "Test pulse evaluation
configuration", the pulse frequency at the instant of switch on is briefly reduced.
p0292[0...1] Power unit temperature alarm threshold / PU T_alrm thresh
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8021
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [°C] 25 [°C] [0] 5 [°C]
[1] 15 [°C]
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for power unit overtemperatures. The value is set as a difference to the tripping (shutdown)
temperature.
Drive:
If this threshold is exceeded, an overload alarm is generated and the system responds as parameterized in p0290.
Infeed:
When the threshold value is exceeded, only an overload alarm is output.
Index: [0] = Overtemperature heat sink
[1] = Temperature rise power semiconductor (chip)
Dependency: See also: r0037, p0290
See also: A05000, A05001
p0294 Power unit alarm with I2t overload / PU I2t alrm thresh
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8021
Min: Max: Factory setting:
10.0 [%] 100.0 [%] 95.0 [%]
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for the I2t power unit overload.
If this threshold is exceeded, an overload alarm is generated and the system responds as parameterized in p0290.
Dependency: See also: r0036, p0290
See also: A07805
Note
The I2t fault threshold is 100 %. If this value is exceeded, fault F30005 is output.
p0295 Fan run-on time / Fan run-on time
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [s] 600 [s] 0 [s]
Description: Sets the fan run-on time after the pulses for the power unit have been canceled.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 511
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
- Under certain circumstances, the fan can continue to run for longer than was set (e.g. as a result of the excessively
high heat sink temperature).
- For values less than 1 s, a 1 s run on time for the fan is active.
- for a PM230 power unit, sizes D - F the parameter is ineffective.
r0296 DC link voltage undervoltage threshold / Vdc U_lower_thresh
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Threshold to detect a DC link undervoltage.
If the DC link voltage falls below this threshold, the drive unit is tripped due to a DC link undervoltage condition.
Dependency: See also: F30003
r0297 DC link voltage overvoltage threshold / Vdc U_upper_thresh
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8750, 8760,
8850, 8864, 8950, 8964
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Threshold to detect a DC link overvoltage.
If the DC link voltage exceeds the threshold specified here, the drive unit is tripped due to DC link overvoltage.
Dependency: See also: F30002
p0300[0...n] Motor type selection / Mot type sel
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6310
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 603 0
Description: Selecting the motor type.
The first digit of the parameter value always defines the general motor type and corresponds to the third-party motor
belonging to a motor list:
1 = induction motor
2 = synchronous motor
6 = synchronous reluctance motor
xx = motor without code number
xxx = motor with code number
The type information must be entered to filter motor-specific parameters and to optimize the operating characteristics
and behavior. For example, for synchronous motors, power factor (p0308) is neither used nor displayed (in the BOP/
IOP).
The following applies for values < 100:
Motor data must be manually entered.
The following applies for values >= 100:
Motor data are automatically loaded from an internal list.
Value: 0: No motor
1: Induction motor
2: Synchronous motor
SINAMICS G120X converter
512 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
6: Reluctance motor
10: 1LE1 induction motor (not a code number)
13: 1LG6 induction motor (not a code number)
17: 1LA7 induction motor (not a code number)
19: 1LA9 induction motor (not a code number)
100: 1LE1 induction motor
101: 1PC1 induction motor
105: 1LE5 induction motor
108: 1PH8 induction motor
600: 1FP1 synchronous reluctance motor
603: 1FP3 synchronous reluctance motor OEM
Dependency: When selecting p0300 = 10 ... 19, parameters p0335, p0626, p0627, and p0628 of the thermal motor model are pre-
assigned as a function of p0307 and p0311.
For p0096 = 1 (Standard Drive Control) synchronous motor types cannot be selected.
CAUTION
If a motor is selected, which is not contained in the motor lists (p0300 < 100), then the motor code number must be
reset (p0301 = 0), if previously a motor was parameterized from the motor list.
NOTICE
If a catalog motor is selected (p0300 >= 100) and an associated motor code number (p0301), then the parameters that
are associated with this list cannot be changed (write protection). The write protection is canceled if the motor type
p0300 is set to a non-Siemens motor that matches p0301 (e.g. p0300 = 1 for p0301 = 1xxxx). Write protection is
automatically canceled when the results of motor data identification are copied to the motor parameters.
The motor type of a catalog motor corresponds to the upper three digits of the code number or the following
assignment (if the particular motor type is listed):
Type/code number ranges
100 / 100xx, 110xx, 120xx, 130xx, 140xx, 150xx
108 / 108xx, 118xx, 128xx, 138xx, 148xx, 158xx
Note
Once the Control Unit has been switched on for the first time or if the factory settings have been defined accordingly,
the motor type is preconfigured to induction motor (p0300 = 1).
If a motor type has not been selected (p0300 = 0), then the drive commissioning routine cannot be exited.
A motor type with a value above p0300 >= 100 describes motors for which a motor parameter list exists.
p0300[0...n] Motor type selection / Mot type sel
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6310
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 105 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 513
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Selecting the motor type.
The first digit of the parameter value always defines the general motor type and corresponds to the third-party motor
belonging to a motor list:
1 = induction motor
2 = synchronous motor
xx = motor without code number
xxx = motor with code number
The type information must be entered to filter motor-specific parameters and to optimize the operating characteristics
and behavior. For example, for synchronous motors, power factor (p0308) is neither used nor displayed (in the BOP/
IOP).
The following applies for values < 100:
Motor data must be manually entered.
The following applies for values >= 100:
Motor data are automatically loaded from an internal list.
Value: 0: No motor
1: Induction motor
2: Synchronous motor
10: 1LE1 induction motor (not a code number)
13: 1LG6 induction motor (not a code number)
14: 1xx1 SIMOTICS FD induction motor (not a code number)
17: 1LA7 induction motor (not a code number)
18: 1LA8 / 1PQ8 standard induction motor series
19: 1LA9 induction motor (not a code number)
100: 1LE1 induction motor
105: 1LE5 induction motor
Dependency: When the motor type is changed, the code number in p0301 may be reset to 0.
When selecting p0300 = 10 ... 19, parameters p0335, p0626, p0627, and p0628 of the thermal motor model are pre-
assigned as a function of p0307 and p0311.
CAUTION
If a motor is selected, which is not contained in the motor lists (p0300 < 100), then the motor code number must be
reset (p0301 = 0), if previously a motor was parameterized from the motor list.
NOTICE
If a catalog motor is selected (p0300 >= 100) and an associated motor code number (p0301), then the parameters that
are associated with this list cannot be changed (write protection). The write protection is canceled if the motor type
p0300 is set to a non-Siemens motor that matches p0301 (e.g. p0300 = 1 for p0301 = 1xxxx). Write protection is
automatically canceled when the results of motor data identification are copied to the motor parameters.
The motor type of a catalog motor corresponds to the upper three digits of the code number or the following
assignment (if the particular motor type is listed):
Type/code number ranges
100 / 100xx, 110xx, 120xx, 130xx, 140xx, 150xx
Note
Once the Control Unit has been switched on for the first time or if the factory settings have been defined accordingly,
the motor type is preconfigured to induction motor (p0300 = 1).
If a motor type has not been selected (p0300 = 0), then the drive commissioning routine cannot be exited.
A motor type with a value above p0300 >= 100 describes motors for which a motor parameter list exists.
SINAMICS G120X converter
514 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0301[0...n] Motor code number selection / Mot code No. sel
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 65535 0
Description: The parameter is used to select a motor from a motor parameter list.
When changing the code number (with the exception to the value 0), all of the motor parameters are pre-assigned from
the internally available parameter lists.
Dependency: Code numbers can only be selected for motor types that correspond to the motor type selected in p0300.
See also: p0300
Note
The motor code number can only be changed if the matching catalog motor was first selected in p0300.
When selecting a catalog motor (p0300 >= 100), drive commissioning can only be exited if a code number is selected.
If a change is made to a non-catalog motor, then the motor code number should be reset (p0301 = 0).
p0304[0...n] Rated motor voltage / Mot U_rated
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6301, 6724
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [Vrms] 20000 [Vrms] 0 [Vrms]
Description: Sets the rated motor voltage (rating plate).
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note
When the parameter value is entered the connection type of the motor (star-delta) must be taken into account.
Once the Control Unit has booted for the first time or if the factory settings have been restored, the parameter is pre-
assigned to match the power unit.
p0305[0...n] Rated motor current / Mot I_rated
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6301
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the rated motor current (rating plate).
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
If p0305 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is pre-assigned
accordingly.
Note
When the parameter value is entered the connection type of the motor (star-delta) must be taken into account.
Once the Control Unit has booted for the first time or if the factory settings have been restored, the parameter is pre-
assigned to match the power unit.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 515
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0306[0...n] Number of motors connected in parallel / Motor qty
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 50 1
Description: Sets the number (count) of motors that can be operated in parallel using one motor data set.
Depending on the motor number entered, internally an equivalent motor is calculated.
The following should be observed in motors connected in parallel:
Rating plate data should only be entered for one motor: p0305, p0307
The following parameters are also only valid for one motor: p0320, p0341, p0344, p0350 ... p0361
All other motor parameters take into account the replacement/equivalent motor (e.g. r0331, r0333).
Recommendation: For motors connected in parallel, external thermal protection should be provided for each individual motor.
Dependency: See also: r0331, r0370, r0373, r0374, r0376, r0377, r0382
CAUTION
The motors to be connected in parallel must be of the same type and size (same order no. (MLFB)).
The mounting regulations when connecting motors in parallel must be carefully maintained!
The number of motors set must correspond to the number of motors that are actually connected in parallel.
After changing p0306, it is imperative that the control parameters are adapted (e.g. using automatic calculation with
p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0).
For induction motors that are connected in parallel, but which are not mechanically coupled with one another, then the
following applies:
- an individual motor must not be loaded beyond its stall point.
NOTICE
If p0306 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is appropriately pre-
assigned.
Note
Only operation with U/f characteristic makes sense if more than 10 identical motors are connected in parallel.
p0307[0...n] Rated motor power / Mot P_rated
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: 14_6 Unit selection: p0100 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [kW] 100000.00 [kW] 0.00 [kW]
Description: Sets the rated motor power (rating plate).
Dependency: IECdrives (p0100 = 0): Units kW
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): Units hp
NEMA drives (p0100 = 2): Unit kW
See also: p0100
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note
Once the Control Unit has booted for the first time or if the factory settings have been restored, the parameter is pre-
assigned to match the power unit.
SINAMICS G120X converter
516 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0308[0...n] Rated motor power factor / Mot cos phi rated
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 1.000 0.000
Description: Sets the rated motor power factor (cos phi, rating plate).
For a parameter value of 0.000, the power factor is internally calculated and displayed in r0332.
Dependency: This parameter is only available for p0100 = 0, 2.
See also: p0100, p0309, r0332
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Once the Control Unit has booted for the first time or if the factory settings have been restored, the parameter is pre-
assigned to match the power unit.
p0309[0...n] Rated motor efficiency / Mot eta_rated
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 99.9 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Sets the rated motor efficiency (rating plate).
For a parameter value of 0.0, the power factor is internally calculated and displayed in r0332.
Dependency: This parameter is only visible for NEMA motors (p0100 = 1, 2).
See also: p0100, p0308, r0332
Note
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors.
p0310[0...n] Rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6301
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets the rated motor frequency (rating plate).
Dependency: The number of pole pairs (r0313) is automatically re-calculated when the parameter is changed (together with p0311),
if p0314 = 0.
The rated frequency is restricted to values between 1.00 Hz and 650.00 Hz.
See also: p0311, r0313, p0314
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
If p0310 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated
with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. The pre-assignment has been completed if the status display
r3996 returns to zero.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 517
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time or if the factory settings have been defined accordingly, the
parameter is defined in accordance with the power unit.
p0310[0...n] Rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6301
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Hz] 103.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets the rated motor frequency (rating plate).
Dependency: The number of pole pairs (r0313) is automatically re-calculated when the parameter is changed (together with p0311),
if p0314 = 0.
The rated frequency is restricted to values between 1.00 Hz and 100.00 Hz.
See also: p0311, r0313, p0314
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
If p0310 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated
with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. The pre-assignment has been completed if the status display
r3996 returns to zero.
Note
Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time or if the factory settings have been defined accordingly, the
parameter is defined in accordance with the power unit.
p0311[0...n] Rated motor speed / Mot n_rated
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [rpm] 210000.0 [rpm] 0.0 [rpm]
Description: Sets the rated motor speed (rating plate).
For p0311 = 0, the rated motor slip of induction motors is internally calculated and displayed in r0330.
It is especially important to correctly enter the rated motor speed for vector control and slip compensation for U/f
control.
Dependency: If p0311 is changed and for p0314 = 0, the pole pair (r0313) is re-calculated automatically.
See also: p0310, r0313, p0314
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
If p0311 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated
with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. The pre-assignment has been completed if the status display
r3996 returns to zero.
Note
Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time or if the factory settings have been defined accordingly, the
parameter is defined in accordance with the power unit.
SINAMICS G120X converter
518 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0313[0...n] Motor pole pair number, actual (or calculated) / Mot PolePairNo act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 5300
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the number of motor pole pairs. The value is used for internal calculations.
r0313 = 1: 2-pole motor
r0313 = 2: 4-pole motor, etc.
Dependency: For p0314 > 0, the entered value is displayed in r0313.
For p0314 = 0, the pole pair number (r0313) is automatically calculated from the rated power (p0307), rated frequency
(p0310) and rated speed (p0311).
See also: p0307, p0310, p0311, p0314
Note
For the automatic calculation, the pole pair number is set to the value of 2 if the rated speed or the rated frequency is
zero.
p0314[0...n] Motor pole pair number / Mot pole pair No.
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 255 0
Description: Sets the motor pole pair number.
p0314 = 1: 2-pole motor
p0314 = 2: 4-pole motor, etc.
Dependency: For p0314 = 0, the pole pair number is automatically calculated from the rated frequency (p0310) and the rated speed
(p0311) and displayed in r0313.
NOTICE
If p0314 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated
with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly.
For induction motors, it is only necessary to enter the value if the rated motor slip is so high that the pole pair number
r0313, obtained when making the calculation based on the rated frequency and rated speed, is too low.
p0316[0...n] Motor torque constant / Mot kT
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C2(1), T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: 28_1 Unit selection: p0100 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Nm/A] 400.00 [Nm/A] 0.00 [Nm/A]
Description: Sets the torque constant of the synchronous motor.
p0316 = 0:
The torque constant is calculated from the motor data.
p0316 > 0:
The selected value is used as torque constant.
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note
This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 519
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0318[0...n] Motor stall current / Mot I_standstill
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C2(3) Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8017
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the stall current for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx), as well as for synchronous reluctance motors (p0300 =
6xx).
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note
The parameter is used for the I2t monitoring of the motor (refer to p0611).
This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx).
p0320[0...n] Motor rated magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rated
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [Arms] 5000.000 [Arms] 0.000 [Arms]
Description: Induction motors:
Sets the rated motor magnetizing current.
For p0320 = 0.000 the magnetizing current is internally calculated and displayed in r0331.
Synchronous motors:
Sets the rated motor short-circuit current.
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note
The magnetizing current p0320 for induction motors is reset when quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0.
If, for induction motors, the magnetizing current p0320 is changed outside the commissioning phase (p0010 > 0), then
the magnetizing inductance p0360 is changed so that the EMF r0337 remains constant.
p0322[0...n] Maximum motor speed / Mot n_max
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [rpm] 210000.0 [rpm] 0.0 [rpm]
Description: Sets the maximum motor speed.
Dependency: See also: p1082
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
If p0322 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated
with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly.
Note
The parameter has no significance for a value of p0322 = 0.
SINAMICS G120X converter
520 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0323[0...n] Maximum motor current / Mot I_max
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Arms] 20000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the maximum permissible motor current (e.g. de-magnetizing current for synchronous motors).
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
If p0323 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is pre-assigned
accordingly.
Note
The parameter has no effect for induction motors.
The parameter has not effect for synchronous motors if a value of 0.0 is entered. The user-selectable current limit is
entered into p0640.
p0325[0...n] Motor pole position identification current 1st phase / Mot PolID I 1st Ph
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [Arms] 10000.000 [Arms] 0.000 [Arms]
Description: Sets the current for the 1st phase of the two-stage technique for pole position identification routine.
The current of the 2nd phase is set in p0329.
The two-stage technique is selected with p1980 = 4.
Dependency: See also: p0329, p1980, r1992
NOTICE
When the motor code (p0301) is changed, it is possible that p0325 is not pre-assigned.
p0325 can be pre-assigned using p0340 = 3.
Note
The value is automatically pre-assigned for the following events:
- For p0325 = 0 and automatic calculation of the closed-loop control parameters (p0340 = 1, 2, 3).
- for quick commissioning (p3900 = 1, 2, 3).
p0327[0...n] Optimum motor load angle / Mot phi_load opt
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6721, 6838
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [°] 135.0 [°] 90.0 [°]
Description: Sets the optimum load angle for synchronous motors with reluctance torque.
The load angle is measured at the rated motor current.
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 521
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
This parameter has no significance for induction motors.
For synchronous motors without reluctance torque, a angle of 90 degrees must be set.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).
p0328[0...n] Motor reluctance torque constant / Mot kT_reluctance
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6721, 6836
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-1000.00 [mH] 1000.00 [mH] 0.00 [mH]
Description: Sets the reluctance torque constant for synchronous motors with reluctance torque (e.g. 1FE ... motors).
This parameter has no significance for induction motors.
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note
For synchronous motors without reluctance torque, the value 0 must be set.
p0329[0...n] Motor pole position identification current / Mot PolID current
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0000 [Arms] 10000.0000 [Arms] 0.0000 [Arms]
Description: Sets the current for the pole position identification routine (p1980 = 1).
For a two-stage technique (p1980 = 4), the current is set for the 2nd phase.
The current for the 1st phase is set in p0325.
Dependency: The following applies for vector drives:
If a maximum current (p0323) was not parameterized, then p0329 is limited to the rated motor current.
See also: p0325, p1980, r1992
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
r0330[0...n] Rated motor slip / Mot slip_rated
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Displays the rated motor slip.
Dependency: The rated slip is calculated from the rated frequency, rated speed and number of pole pairs.
See also: p0310, p0311, r0313
Note
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
SINAMICS G120X converter
522 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0331[0...n] Actual motor magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rtd act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6722
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Induction motor:
Displays the rated magnetizing current from p0320.
For p0320 = 0, the internally calculated magnetizing current is displayed.
Synchronous motor:
Displays the rated short-circuit current from p0320.
Dependency: If p0320 was not entered, then the parameter is calculated from the rating plate parameters.
r0332[0...n] Rated motor power factor / Mot cos phi rated
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the rated power factor for induction motors.
For IEC motors, the following applies (p0100 = 0):
For p0308 = 0, the internally calculated power factor is displayed.
For p0308 > 0, this value is displayed.
For NEMA motors, the following applies (p0100 = 1, 2):
For p0309 = 0, the internally calculated power factor is displayed.
For p0309 > 0, this value is converted into the power factor and displayed.
Dependency: If p0308 is not entered, the parameter is calculated from the rating plate parameters.
Note
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
r0333[0...n] Rated motor torque / Mot M_rated
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: 7_4 Unit selection: p0100 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the rated motor torque.
Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit Nm
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lbf ft
Note
For induction motors, r0333 is calculated from p0307 and p0311.
For synchronous motors, r0333 is calculated from p0305, p0316, p0327 and p0328.
p0335[0...n] Motor cooling type / Mot cool type
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C2(1), T Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 128 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 523
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the motor cooling system used.
Value: 0: Natural ventilation
1: Forced cooling
2: Liquid cooling
128: No fan
Dependency: For 1LA7 motors (p0300), the parameter is pre-set as a function of p0307 and p0311.
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note
The parameter influences the thermal 3-mass motor model.
1LA7 motors, frame size 56 are operated without fan.
r0337[0...n] Rated motor EMF / Mot EMF_rated
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the rated EMF of the motor.
Note
EMF: Electromotive force
p0340[0...n] Automatic calculation motor/control parameters / Calc auto par
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 5 0
Description: Setting to automatically calculate motor parameters and U/f open-loop and closed-loop control parameters from the
rating plate data.
Value: 0: No calculation
1: Complete calculation
2: Calculation of equivalent circuit diagram parameters
3: Calculation of closed-loop control parameters
4: Calculation of controller parameters
5: Calculation of technological limits and threshold values
SINAMICS G120X converter
524 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
NOTICE
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
The following parameters are influenced using p0340:
p0340 = 1:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5
--> p0341, p0342, p0344, p0612, p0640, p1082, p1231, p1232, p1333, p1349, p1611, p1654, p1726, p1825, p1828 ...
p1832, p1909, p1959, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, p3927, p3928
p0340 = 2:
--> p0350, p0354 ... p0360
--> p0625 (matching p0350), p0626 ... p0628
p0340 = 3:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 4, 5
--> p0346, p0347, p0622, p1320 ... p1327, p1582, p1584, p1616, p1755, p1756, p2178
p0340 = 4:
--> p1290, p1292, p1293, p1338, p1339, p1340, p1341, p1345, p1346, p1461, p1463, p1464, p1465, p1470, p1472,
p1703, p1715, p1717, p1740, p1756, p1764, p1767, p1780, p1781, p1783, p1785, p1786, p1795
p0340 = 5:
--> p1037, p1038, p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531, p1570, p1580, p1574, p1750, p1759, p1802, p1803, p2140, p2142,
p2148, p2150, p2161, p2162, p2163, p2164, p2170, p2175, p2177, p2194, p2390, p2392, p2393
Note
p0340 = 1 contains the calculations of p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5.
p0340 = 2 calculates the motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360).
p0340 = 3 contains the calculations of p0340 = 4, 5.
p0340 = 4 only calculates the controller parameters.
p0340 = 5 only calculates the controller limits.
When quick commissioning is exited using p3900 > 0, p0340 is automatically set to 1.
At the end of the calculations, p0340 is automatically set to 0.
p0341[0...n] Motor moment of inertia / Mot M_mom of inert
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: 25_1 Unit selection: p0100 Function diagram: 6020, 6030,
6031, 6822
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000000 [kgm²] 100000.000000 [kgm²] 0.000000 [kgm²]
Description: Sets the motor moment of inertia (without load).
Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg m^2
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb ft^2
The parameter value is included, together with p0342, in the rated starting time of the motor.
See also: p0342, r0345
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note
The product of p0341 * p0342 is used when the speed controller (p0340 = 4) is calculated automatically.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 525
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0342[0...n] Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia / Mot MomInert Ratio
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6020, 6030,
6031, 6822
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1.000 10000.000 1.000
Description: Sets the ratio between the total moment of inertia/mass (load + motor) and the intrinsic motor moment of inertia/mass
(no load).
Dependency: This means that together with p0341, the rated starting (accelerating time) of the motor is calculated for a vector drive.
See also: p0341, r0345
Note
The product of p0341 * p0342 is used when the speed controller (p0340 = 4) is calculated automatically.
r0343[0...n] Rated motor current identified / Mot I_rated ident
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the identified rated motor current.
p0344[0...n] Motor weight (for the thermal motor model) / Mot weight th mod
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: 27_1 Unit selection: p0100 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [kg] 50000.0 [kg] 0.0 [kg]
Description: Sets the motor weight.
Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note
The parameter influences the thermal 3 mass model of the induction motor.
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
r0345[0...n] Nominal motor starting time / Mot t_start_rated
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [s] - [s] - [s]
Description: Displays the rated motor starting time.
This time corresponds to the time from standstill up to reaching the motor rated speed and the acceleration with motor
rated torque (r0333).
Dependency: See also: r0313, r0333, p0341, p0342
SINAMICS G120X converter
526 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0346[0...n] Motor excitation build-up time / Mot t_excitation
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 20.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the excitation build-up time of the motor.
This involves the delay time between enabling the pulses and enabling the ramp-function generator. The induction
motor is magnetized during this time.
CAUTION
If there is insufficient magnetization under load or if the acceleration rate is too high, then an induction motor can stall
(refer to the note).
Note
The parameter is calculated using p0340 = 1, 3.
For induction motors, the result depends on the rotor time constant (r0384). If this time is excessively reduced, this can
result in an inadequate magnetizing of the induction motor. This is the case if the current limit is reached while building
up magnetizing. For induction motors, the parameter cannot be set to 0 s (internal limit: 0.1 * r0384).
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors and vector control, the value depends on the stator time constant (r0386).
Here, it defines the time to establish the current for encoderless operation immediately after the pulses have been
enabled.
p0347[0...n] Motor de-excitation time / Mot t_de-excitat
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 20.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the de-magnetizing time (for induction motors) after the inverter pulses have been canceled.
The inverter pulses cannot be switched in (enabled) within this delay time.
Note
The parameter is calculated using p0340 = 1, 3.
For induction motors, the result depends on the rotor time constant (r0384).
if this time is shortened too much, then this can result in an inadequate de-magnetizing of the induction motor and in
an overcurrent condition when the pulses are subsequently enabled (only when the flying restart function is activated
and the motor is rotating).
p0350[0...n] Motor stator resistance cold / Mot R_stator cold
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00000 [ohm] 2000.00000 [ohm] 0.00000 [ohm]
Description: Sets the stator resistance of the motor at ambient temperature p0625 (phase value).
Dependency: See also: p0625, r1912
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note
The motor identification routine determines the stator resistance from the total stator resistance minus the cable
resistance (p0352).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 527
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0352[0...n] Cable resistance / R_cable
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00000 [ohm] 120.00000 [ohm] 0.00000 [ohm]
Description: Resistance of the power cable between the power unit and motor.
CAUTION
The cable resistance should be entered prior to motor data identification. If it is used subsequently, the difference by
which p0352 was changed must be subtracted from the stator resistance p0350 or motor data identification must be
repeated.
Note
The parameter influences the temperature adaptation of the stator resistance.
The motor identification sets the cable resistance to 20% of the measured total resistance if p0352 is zero at the time
that the measurement is made. If p0352 is not zero, then the value is subtracted from the measured total stator
resistance to calculate stator resistance p0350. In this case, p0350 is a minimum of 10% of the measured value.
The cable resistance is reset when quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0.
p0352[0...n] Cable resistance / R_cable
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00000 [ohm] 120.00000 [ohm] 0.00000 [ohm]
Description: Resistance of the power cable between the power unit and motor.
CAUTION
The cable resistance should be entered prior to motor data identification. If it is used subsequently, the difference by
which p0352 was changed must be subtracted from the stator resistance p0350 or motor data identification must be
repeated.
The difference with which p0352 was manually changed, must also be subtracted from reference parameter p0629 of
the Rs measurement.
Note
The parameter influences the temperature adaptation of the stator resistance.
The motor identification sets the cable resistance to 20% of the measured total resistance if p0352 is zero at the time
that the measurement is made. If p0352 is not zero, then the value is subtracted from the measured total stator
resistance to calculate stator resistance p0350. In this case, p0350 is a minimum of 10% of the measured value.
The cable resistance is reset when quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0.
p0354[0...n] Motor rotor resistance cold / Mot R_r cold
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6727
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00000 [ohm] 300.00000 [ohm] 0.00000 [ohm]
Description: Sets the rotor/secondary section resistance of the motor at the ambient temperature p0625.
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor data
identification routine (p1910).
Dependency: See also: p0625
SINAMICS G120X converter
528 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2).
p0356[0...n] Motor stator leakage inductance / Mot L_stator leak.
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00000 [mH] 1000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]
Description: Induction machine: sets the stator leakage inductance of the motor.
Synchronous motor: Sets the stator quadrature axis inductance of the motor.
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification
routine (p1910).
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note
If the stator leakage inductance (p0356) for induction motors is changed outside the commissioning phase (p0010 >
0), the magnetizing inductance (p0360) is automatically adapted to the new EMF (r0337). You are then advised to
repeat the measurement for the saturation characteristic (p1960).
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2), this is the non-saturated value and is, therefore, ideal for a
low current.
For a controlled reluctance motor (p0300 = 6), this is the direct axis stator inductance at the rated operating point.
p0357[0...n] Motor stator inductance d axis / Mot L_stator d
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00000 [mH] 1000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]
Description: Sets the stator direct-axis inductance of the synchronous motor.
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification
routine (p1910).
Note
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2), this is the non-saturated value and is ideal for a low current.
For a controlled reluctance motor (p0300 = 6), this is the direct axis stator inductance at the rated operating point.
p0358[0...n] Motor rotor leakage inductance / Mot L_rot leak
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6727
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00000 [mH] 1000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]
Description: Sets the rotor/secondary section leakage inductance of the motor.
The value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine
(p1910).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 529
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note
If the rotor leakage inductance (p0358) for induction motors is changed outside the commissioning phase (p0010 > 0),
then the magnetizing inductance (p0360) is automatically adapted to the new EMF (r0337). You are then advised to
repeat the measurement for the saturation characteristic (p1960).
p0360[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance / Mot Lh
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6727
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00000 [mH] 10000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]
Description: Sets the magnetizing inductance of the motor.
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification
routine (p1910).
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2).
p0362[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic flux 1 / Mot saturat.flux 1
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6723, 6838
Min: Max: Factory setting:
10.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 60.0 [%]
Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the first flux value of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux (100 %).
Dependency: The following applies for the flux values:
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
See also: p0366
Note
For induction motors, p0362 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).
p0363[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic flux 2 / Mot saturat.flux 2
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6723, 6838
Min: Max: Factory setting:
10.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 85.0 [%]
Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the second flux value of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux (100 %).
SINAMICS G120X converter
530 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Dependency: The following applies for the flux values:
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
See also: p0367
Note
For induction motors, p0363 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).
p0364[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic flux 3 / Mot saturat.flux 3
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6723, 6838
Min: Max: Factory setting:
10.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 115.0 [%]
Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 3rd value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the third flux value of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux (100 %).
Dependency: The following applies for the flux values:
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
See also: p0368
Note
For induction motors, p0364 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).
p0365[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic flux 4 / Mot saturat.flux 4
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6723, 6838
Min: Max: Factory setting:
10.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 125.0 [%]
Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 4th value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the fourth flux value of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux (100 %).
Dependency: The following applies for the flux values:
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
See also: p0369
Note
For induction motors, p0365 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).
p0366[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 1 / Mot sat. I_mag 1
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6723, 6838
Min: Max: Factory setting:
5.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 531
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the first magnetization current of the saturation characteristic in [%] with reference to the rated magnetization
current (r0331).
Dependency: The following applies for the magnetizing currents:
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
See also: p0362
Note
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).
p0367[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 2 / Mot sat. I_mag 2
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6723, 6838
Min: Max: Factory setting:
5.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 75.0 [%]
Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the second magnetization current of the saturation characteristic in [%] with reference to the rated magnetization
current (r0331).
Dependency: The following applies for the magnetizing currents:
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
See also: p0363
Note
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).
p0368[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 3 / Mot sat. I_mag 3
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6723, 6838
Min: Max: Factory setting:
5.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 150.0 [%]
Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the 3rd value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the third magnetization current of the saturation characteristic in [%] with reference to the rated magnetization
current (r0331).
Dependency: The following applies for the magnetizing currents:
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
See also: p0364
Note
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).
SINAMICS G120X converter
532 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0369[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 4 / Mot sat. I_mag 4
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6723, 6838
Min: Max: Factory setting:
5.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 210.0 [%]
Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the 4th value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the fourth magnetization current of the saturation characteristic in [%] with reference to the rated magnetization
current (r0331).
Dependency: The following applies for the magnetizing currents:
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
See also: p0365
Note
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).
r0370[0...n] Motor stator resistance cold / Mot R_stator cold
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the motor stator resistance at an ambient temperature (p0625).
The value does not include the cable resistance.
Dependency: See also: p0625
r0372[0...n] Cable resistance / Mot R_cable
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the total cable resistance between power unit and motor, as well as the internal converter resistance.
Dependency: See also: r0238, p0352
r0373[0...n] Motor rated stator resistance / Mot R_stator rated
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the rated motor stator resistance at rated temperature (total of p0625 and p0627).
Dependency: See also: p0627
Note
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 533
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0374[0...n] Motor rotor resistance cold / Mot R_r cold
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the motor rotor resistance at an ambient temperature p0625.
Dependency: See also: p0625
Note
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
r0376[0...n] Rated motor rotor resistance / Mot rated R_rotor
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the nominal rotor resistance of the motor at the rated temperature.
The rated temperature is the sum of p0625 and p0628.
Dependency: See also: p0628
Note
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
r0377[0...n] Motor leakage inductance total / Mot L_leak total
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6640, 6714,
6721, 6828, 6834, 6836
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the stator leakage inductance of the motor including the motor reactor (p0233).
r0382[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance transformed / Mot L_magn transf
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the magnetizing inductance of the motor.
Note
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
r0384[0...n] Motor rotor time constant / damping time constant d axis / Mot T_rotor/T_Dd
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6722, 6837
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
SINAMICS G120X converter
534 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Displays the rotor time constant.
Note
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors.
The value is calculated from the total of the inductances on the rotor side (p0358, p0360) divided by the rotor resistance
(p0354). The temperature adaptation of the rotor resistance for induction motors is not taken into account.
r0386[0...n] Motor stator leakage time constant / Mot T_stator leak
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the stator leakage time constant.
Note
The value is calculated from the total of all leakage inductances (p0233, p0356, p0358) divided by the total of all motor
resistances (p0350, p0352, p0354). The temperature adaptation of the resistances is not taken into account.
r0394[0...n] Rated motor power / Mot P_rated
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: 14_6 Unit selection: p0100 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]
Description: Displays the rated motor power.
Note
The parameter displays p0307. For p0307 = 0, r0394 is calculated from p0304 and p0305 (only for induction motors).
Depending on the actual motor type, deviations can occur from the actual rated motor power.
r0395[0...n] Actual stator resistance / R_stator act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the actual stator resistance (phase value).
The parameter value also contains the temperature-independent cable resistance.
Dependency: In the case of induction motors the parameter is also affected by the motor temperature model.
See also: p0350, p0352, p0620
Note
In each case, only the stator resistance of the active Motor Data Set is included with the stator temperature of the
thermal motor model.
r0396[0...n] Actual rotor resistance / R_rotor act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 535
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Displays the actual rotor resistance (phase value).
The parameter is affected by the motor temperature model.
Dependency: See also: p0354, p0620
Note
In each case, only the rotor resistance of the active Motor Data Set is included with the rotor temperature of the thermal
motor model.
This parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
p0500 Technology application / Tec application
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C2(1), T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 5 0
Description: Sets the technology application.
The parameter influences the calculation of open-loop and closed-loop control parameters that is e.g. initiated using
p0340 = 5.
Value: 0: Standard drive
1: Pumps and fans
2: Sensorless closed-loop control down to f = 0 (passive loads)
3: Pumps and fans, efficiency optimization
5: Starting with a high break loose torque
Dependency: For p0096 = 1, 2 (Standard, Dynamic Drive Control) p0500 cannot be changed.
NOTICE
If the technological application is set to p0500 = 0 ... 3 during commissioning (p0010 = 1, 5, 30), the operating mode
(p1300) is pre-set accordingly.
SINAMICS G120X converter
536 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The calculation of parameters dependent on the technology application can be called up as follows:
- when exiting quick commissioning using p3900 > 0
- when writing p0340 = 1, 3, 5
For p0500 = 0 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
- p1574 = 10 V
- p1750.2 = 0
- p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol) (PM240: p1802 = 0, PM260: p1802 = 2)
- p1803 = 106 % (PM260: p1803 = 103 %)
For p0500 = 1 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
- p1574 = 2 V
- p1750.2 = 0
- p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol) (PM240: p1802 = 0)
- p1803 = 106 % (PM260: p1803 = 103 %)
For p0500 = 2 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
- p1574 = 2 V (separately excited synchronous motor: 4 V)
- p1750.2 = 1
- p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol) (PM240: p1802 = 0)
- p1803 = 106 % (PM260: p1803 = 103 %)
For p0500 = 3 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
- p1574 = 2 V
- p1750.2 = 1
- p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol) (PM240: p1802 = 0)
- p1803 = 106 % (PM260: p1803 = 103 %)
For p0500 = 5:
- p1574, p1750.2, p1802, p1803 same as for p0500 = 0
- p1610 = 80 %, p1611 = 80 % (average up to higher starting torque)
- p1310 = 80 %, p1311 = 30 %
In all cases, the DC component compensation is activated (p3855 = 7).
For p1750:
The setting of p1750 is only relevant for induction motors.
p1750.2 = 1: Encoderless control of the induction motor is effective down to zero frequency.
This operating mode is possible for passive loads. These include applications where the load does not generate
regenerative torque when breaking away and the motor comes to a standstill (zero speed) itself when the pulses are
inhibited.
For p1802 / p1803:
p1802 and p1803 are only changed, in all cases, if a sine-wave output filter (p0230 = 3, 4) has not been selected.
p0500 Technology application / Tec application
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: C2(1), T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 3 3
Description: Sets the technology application.
The parameter influences the calculation of open-loop and closed-loop control parameters that is e.g. initiated using
p0340 = 5.
Value: 1: Pumps and fans
3: Pumps and fans, efficiency optimization
Dependency: For p0096 = 2 (Dynamic Drive Control) p0500 cannot be changed.
NOTICE
If the technological application is set to p0500 = 0 ... 3 during commissioning (p0010 = 1, 5, 30), the operating mode
(p1300) is pre-set accordingly.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 537
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The calculation of parameters dependent on the technology application can be called up as follows:
- when exiting quick commissioning using p3900 > 0
- when writing p0340 = 1, 3, 5
For p0500 = 1 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
- p1570 = 100 %
- p1580 = 0 % (no efficiency optimization)
- p1574 = 2 V
- p1750.2 = 0
- p1802 = 9 or 19 (optimized pulse pattern for p0300 = 14)
- p1803 = 106 %
For p0500 = 3 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
- p1570 = 103 % (flux boost for full load)
- p1580 = 100 % (efficiency optimization)
- p1574 = 2 V
- p1750.2 = 1: Encoderless control of the induction motor is effective down to zero frequency.
- p1802 = 9 or 19 (optimized pulse pattern for p0300 = 14)
- p1803 = 106 %
p0501 Technological application (Standard Drive Control) / Techn appl SDC
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C2(1), T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the technology application.
The parameter influences the calculation of open-loop and closed-loop control parameters that is e.g. initiated using
p0340 = 5.
Value: 0: Constant load (linear characteristic)
1: Speed-dependent load (parabolic characteristic)
Dependency: See also: p1300
NOTICE
If the technological application is set to p0501 = 0, 1 during commissioning (p0010 = 1, 5, 30), the operating mode
(p1300) is pre-set accordingly.
Note
The calculation of parameters dependent on the technology application can be called up as follows:
- when exiting quick commissioning using p3900 > 0
- when writing p0340 = 1, 3, 5
For p0501 = 0, 1 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
- p1802 = 0
- p1803 = 106 %
- p3855.0 = 1 (DC quantity control on)
For p1802 / p1803:
These parameters are only changed, in all cases, if a sine-wave output filter (p0230 = 3, 4) has not been selected.
p0502 Technological application (Dynamic Drive Control) / Techn appl DDC
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C2(1), T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 5 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
538 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the technology application for dynamic applications (p0096 = 2).
The parameter influences the calculation of open-loop and closed-loop control parameters that is e.g. initiated using
p0340 or p3900.
Value: 0: Standard drive (e.g. pumps, fans)
1: Dynamic starting or reversing
5: Heavy-duty starting (e.g. extruders, compressors)
Dependency: The calculation of parameters dependent on the technology application can be called up as follows:
- when exiting quick commissioning using p3900 > 0
- when writing p0340 = 1, 3 or 5
See also: p1610, p1750
Note
When entering p0502 and initiating the calculation, the following parameters are set:
p0502 = 0:
- p1750.0/1/7 = 1 (start and reverse in open-loop control with rugged switchover limits)
- p1610 = 50 %, p1611 = 30 % (low up to average starting torque)
p0502 = 1:
- p1750.0/1/7 = 0 (start and reverse in closed-loop speed control with shorter acceleration times)
- p1610 = 50 %, p1611 = 30 % (only effective, if the drive is switched-on with a speed setpoint of zero)
p0502 = 5:
- p1750.0/1/7 = 1 (start and reverse in open-loop control with rugged switchover limits)
- p1610 = 80 %, p1611 = 80 % (average up to higher starting torque)
p1750.6 = 1 is always set, p1574 (voltage reserve) is preassigned, depending on p0205 (power unit application).
p0502 Technological application (Dynamic Drive Control) / Techn appl DDC
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: C2(1), T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
3 3 3
Description: Sets the technology application for dynamic applications (p0096 = 2).
The parameter influences the calculation of open-loop and closed-loop control parameters that is e.g. initiated using
p0340 or p3900.
Value: 3: Pumps and fans, efficiency optimization
Dependency: The calculation of parameters dependent on the technology application can be called up as follows:
- when exiting quick commissioning using p3900 > 0
- when writing p0340 = 1, 3 or 5
See also: p1610, p1750
Note
The calculation of parameters dependent on the technology application can be called up as follows:
- when exiting quick commissioning using p3900 > 0
- when writing p0340 = 1, 3, 5
For p0500 = 3 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
- p1570 = 103 % (flux boost for full load)
- p1580 = 100 % (efficiency optimization)
- p1574 = 2 V
- p1750.2 = 1: Encoderless control of the induction motor is effective down to zero frequency.
- p1802 = 9 or 19 (optimized pulse pattern for p0300 = 14)
- p1803 = 106 %
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 539
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0505 Selecting the system of units / Unit sys select
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C2(5) Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 4 1
Description: Sets the actual system of units.
Value: 1: SI system of units
2: System of units referred/SI
3: US system of units
4: System of units referred/US
Dependency: The parameter can only be changed in an offline project using the commissioning software.
CAUTION
If a per unit representation is selected and if the reference parameters (e.g. p2000) are subsequently changed, then
the physical significance of several control parameters is also adapted at the same time. As a consequence, the
control behavior can change (see p1744, p1752, p1755).
Note
Reference parameter for the unit system % are, for example, p2000 ... p2004. Depending on what has been selected,
these are displayed using either SI or US units.
p0514[0...9] Scaling-specific reference values / Scal spec ref val
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000001 10000000.000000 1.000000
Description: Sets the reference values for the specific scaling of BICO parameters.
The specific scaling is active when interconnecting with other BICO parameters, and can be used in the following
cases:
1. Parameter with the marking "Scaling: p0514".
2. Changing the standard scaling for parameters with the marking "Scaling: p2000" ... "Scaling: p2007".
Relative values refer to the corresponding reference value. The reference value corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex
(word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).
To specifically scale BICO parameters, proceed as follows:
- set the reference value (p0514[0...9]).
- set the numbers of the parameters, which should be active for the scaling, corresponding to the index of p0514
(p0515[0...19] ... p0524[0...19]).
For parameters with the marking "Scaling: p0514", which are not entered in p0515[0...19] to p0524[0...19], the
reference value 1.0 (factory setting) applies.
Index: [0] = Parameters in p0515[0...19]
[1] = Parameters in p0516[0...19]
[2] = Parameters in p0517[0...19]
[3] = Parameters in p0518[0...19]
[4] = Parameters in p0519[0...19]
[5] = Parameters in p0520[0...19]
[6] = Parameters in p0521[0...19]
[7] = Parameters in p0522[0...19]
[8] = Parameters in p0523[0...19]
[9] = Parameters in p0524[0...19]
Dependency: See also: p0515, p0516, p0517, p0518, p0519, p0520, p0521, p0522, p0523, p0524
SINAMICS G120X converter
540 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0515[0...19] Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[0] / Scal spec p514[0]
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[0] for the specific scaling.
p0515[0]: parameter number
p0515[1]: parameter number
p0515[2]: parameter number
...
p0515[19]: parameter number
Dependency: See also: p0514
p0516[0...19] Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[1] / Scal spec p514[1]
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[1] for the specific scaling.
p0516[0]: parameter number
p0516[1]: parameter number
p0516[2]: parameter number
...
p0516[19]: parameter number
Dependency: See also: p0514
p0517[0...19] Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[2] / Scal spec p514[2]
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[2] for the specific scaling.
p0517[0]: parameter number
p0517[1]: parameter number
p0517[2]: parameter number
...
p0517[19]: parameter number
Dependency: See also: p0514
p0518[0...19] Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[3] / Scal spec p514[3]
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4294967295 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 541
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[3] for the specific scaling.
p0518[0]: parameter number
p0518[1]: parameter number
p0518[2]: parameter number
...
p0518[19]: parameter number
Dependency: See also: p0514
p0519[0...19] Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[4] / Scal spec p514[4]
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[4] for the specific scaling.
p0519[0]: parameter number
p0519[1]: parameter number
p0519[2]: parameter number
...
p0519[19]: parameter number
Dependency: See also: p0514
p0520[0...19] Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[5] / Scal spec p514[5]
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[5] for the specific scaling.
p0520[0]: parameter number
p0520[1]: parameter number
p0520[2]: parameter number
...
p0520[19]: parameter number
Dependency: See also: p0514
p0521[0...19] Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[6] / Scal spec p514[6]
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[6] for the specific scaling.
p0521[0]: parameter number
p0521[1]: parameter number
p0521[2]: parameter number
...
p0521[19]: parameter number
Dependency: See also: p0514
SINAMICS G120X converter
542 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0522[0...19] Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[7] / Scal spec p514[7]
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[7] for the specific scaling.
p0522[0]: parameter number
p0522[1]: parameter number
p0522[2]: parameter number
...
p0522[19]: parameter number
Dependency: See also: p0514
p0523[0...19] Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[8] / Scal spec p514[8]
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[8] for the specific scaling.
p0523[0]: parameter number
p0523[1]: parameter number
p0523[2]: parameter number
...
p0523[19]: parameter number
Dependency: See also: p0514
p0524[0...19] Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[9] / Scal spec p514[9]
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[9] for the specific scaling.
p0524[0]: parameter number
p0524[1]: parameter number
p0524[2]: parameter number
...
p0524[19]: parameter number
Dependency: See also: p0514
p0530[0...n] Bearing version selection / Bearing vers sel
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 104 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 543
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the bearing version.
Corresponding to the bearing version entered, its code number (p0531) is automatically set.
0 = No data
1 = Manual entry
101 = STANDARD
102 = PERFORMANCE
103 = HIGH PERFORMANCE
104 = ADVANCED LIFETIME
Dependency: See also: p0301, p0531, p0532, p1082
NOTICE
For p0530 = 101, 102, 103, 104, the maximum bearing speed (p0532) is write protected. Write protection is withdrawn
with p0530 = 1.
If p0530 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also
associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned appropriately. This is not the case when commissioning the
motor (p0010 = 3). The maximum speed of the bearing is factored into the limit for the maximum speed p1082.
Note
For a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, p0530 can only be set to 1.
p0531[0...n] Bearing code number selection / Bearing codeNo sel
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: C2(3) Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 65535 0
Description: Display and setting the code number of the bearing.
When setting p0301 and p0530 the code number is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. The information
in p0530 should be observed when removing write protection.
Dependency: See also: p0301, p0530, p0532, p1082
NOTICE
If p0531 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also
associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned appropriately. This is not the case when commissioning the
motor (p0010 = 3). The maximum speed of the bearing is factored into the limit for the maximum speed p1082.
Note
p0531 cannot be changed on a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ.
p0532[0...n] Bearing maximum speed / Bearing n_max
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C2(1, 3) Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [rpm] 210000.0 [rpm] 0.0 [rpm]
Description: Sets the maximum speed of the bearing.
The following applies when calculating the maximum speed (p1082):
- for p0324 = 0 or p0532 = 0, p0322 is used.
- for p0324 > 0 and p0532 > 0, the minimum value from the two parameters is used.
Dependency: See also: p0301, p0322, p0530, p1082
SINAMICS G120X converter
544 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
NOTICE
This parameter is pre-assigned in the case of motors from the motor list (p0301) if a bearing version (p0530) is
selected.
When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). The information in p0530 should
be observed when removing write protection.
If p0532 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also
associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned appropriately. This is not the case when commissioning the
motor (p0010 = 3).
p0573 Inhibit automatic reference value calculation / Inhibit calc
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Setting to inhibit the calculation of reference parameters (e.g. p2000) when automatically calculating the motor and
closed-loop control parameters (p0340, p3900).
Value: 0: No
1: Yes
NOTICE
The inhibit for the reference value calculation is canceled when new motor parameters (e.g. p0305) are entered and
only one drive data set exists (p0180 = 1). This is the case during initial commissioning.
Once the motor and control parameters have been calculated (p0340, p3900), the inhibit for the reference value
calculation is automatically re-activated.
Note
If value = 0:
The automatic calculation (p0340, p3900) overwrites the reference parameters.
If value = 1:
The automatic calculation (p0340, p3900) does not overwrite the reference parameters.
p0595 Technological unit selection / Tech unit select
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C2(5) Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 48 1
Description: Selects the units for the parameters of the technology controller.
For p0595 = 1, 2, the reference quantity set in p0596 is not active.
Value: 1: %
2: 1 referred no dimensions
3: bar
4: °C
5: Pa
6: ltr/s
7: m³/s
8: ltr/min
9: m³/min
10: ltr/h
11: m³/h
12: kg/s
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 545
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
13: kg/min
14: kg/h
15: t/min
16: t/h
17: N
18: kN
19: Nm
20: psi
21: °F
22: gallon/s
23: inch³/s
24: gallon/min
25: inch³/min
26: gallon/h
27: inch³/h
28: lb/s
29: lb/min
30: lb/h
31: lbf
32: lbf ft
33: K
34: rpm
35: parts/min
36: m/s
37: ft³/s
38: ft³/min
39: BTU/min
40: BTU/h
41: mbar
42: inch wg
43: ft wg
44: m wg
45: % r.h.
46: g/kg
47: ppm
48: kg/cm²
Dependency: Only the unit of the technology controller parameters are switched over (unit group 9_1).
See also: p0596
Note
When switching over from % into another unit, the following sequence applies:
- set p0596
- set p0595 to the required unit
p0596 Technological unit reference quantity / Tech unit ref qty
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.01 340.28235E36 1.00
SINAMICS G120X converter
546 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the reference quantity for the technological units.
When changing over using changeover parameter p0595 to absolute units, all of the parameters involved refer to the
reference quantity.
Dependency: See also: p0595
NOTICE
When changing over from one technological unit into another, or when changing the reference parameter, a
changeover is not made.
p0601[0...n] Motor temperature sensor type / Mot_temp_sens type
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8016
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 6 0
Description: Sets the sensor type for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value: 0: No sensor
1: PTC alarm & timer
2: KTY84
4: Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer
6: PT1000
Dependency: A thermal motor model is calculated corresponding to p0612.
CAUTION
For p0601 = 2, 6:
If the motor temperature sensor is not connected but another encoder, then the temperature adaptation of the motor
resistances must be switched out (p0620 = 0). Otherwise, in controlled-loop operation, torque errors will occur that will
mean that the motor will not be able to be stopped.
Note
For p0601 = 1:
Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm. Wire breakage and short-circuit monitoring.
For PT100:
When PT100 measurement is enabled(p29700 > 0), the set value of p0601 is no impact.
p0604[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 2/sensor alarm threshold / Mod 2/sens A_thr
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8016
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [°C] 240.0 [°C] 130.0 [°C]
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for monitoring the motor temperature for motor temperature model 2 or KTY/PT1000.
Alarm A07910 is output after the alarm threshold is exceeded.
Dependency: See also: p0612
See also: F07011, A07910
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note
The hysteresis is 2 K.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 547
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0605[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1/2/sensor threshold and temperature value / Mod1/2/sens T_thr
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8016, 8017
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [°C] 240.0 [°C] 145.0 [°C]
Description: Sets the threshold and temperature value to monitor the motor temperature.
Temperature model 1 (I2t, p0612.0 = 1):
The following applies for firmware version < 4.7 SP6 or p0612.8 = 0:
- sets the alarm threshold. If the model temperature (r0034) exceeds the alarm threshold, then alarm A07012 is output.
- this value is simultaneously used as rated winding temperature.
The following applies from firmware version 4.7 SP6 and p0612.8 = 1:
- p5390: when commissioning a catalog motor for the first time, p0605 is copied to p5390.
- p5390: p5390 is of significance when evaluating the alarm threshold.
- p5390: the stator winding temperature (r0632) is used to initiate the signal.
- p0627: when a catalog motor is commissioned for the first time, p0605 -40 °C is copied to p0627.
- p0627: p0627 is of significance for the rated temperature.
Motor temperature model 2 (p0612.1 = 1) or measurement:
- sets the fault threshold. If the temperature (r0035) exceeds the fault threshold, then fault F07011 is output.
Dependency: See also: r0034, p0611, p0612
See also: F07011, A07012
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Motor temperature model 1 (I2t):
The following applies for firmware version < 4.7 SP6 or p0612.8 = 0:
p0605 also defines the final temperature of the model for r0034 = 100 %. Therefore, p0605 has no influence on the
time up to alarm A07012 being issued. The time is only determined by time constant p0611, the actual current and the
reference value p0318. For p0318 = 0, the rated motor current is used as reference value.
Note
The hysteresis is 2 K.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).
p0610[0...n] Motor overtemperature response / Mot temp response
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8016, 8017,
8018
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 12 12
Description: Sets the system response when the motor temperature reaches the alarm threshold.
Value: 0: No response only alarm no reduction of I_max
1: Messages, reduction of I_max
2: Messages, no reduction of I_max
12: Messages, no reduction of I_max, temperature storage
Dependency: See also: p0601, p0604, p0605, p0614, p0615
See also: F07011, A07012, A07910
SINAMICS G120X converter
548 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The I_max reduction is not executed for PTC (p0601 = 1) or bimetallic NC contact (p0601 = 4).
The I_max reduction results in a lower output frequency.
If value = 0:
An alarm is output and I_max is not reduced.
If value = 1:
An alarm is output and a timer is started. A fault is output if the alarm is still active after this timer has expired.
- for KTY/PT1000, the following applies: I_max. is reduced
- for PTC, the following is valid: I_max. is not reduced
If value = 2:
An alarm is output and a timer is started. A fault is output if the alarm is still active after this timer has expired.
If value = 12:
Behavior is always the same as for value 2.
For motor temperature monitoring without temperature sensor, when switching off, the model temperature is saved in
a non-volatile fashion. When switching on, the same value (reduced by p0614) is taken into account in the model
calculation. As a consequence, the UL508C specification is fulfilled.
p0611[0...n] I2t motor model thermal time constant / I2t mot_mod T
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C2(1), T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8017
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [s] 20000 [s] 0 [s]
Description: Sets the winding time constant.
The time constant specifies the warm-up time of the cold stator winding when loaded with the motor standstill current
(rated motor current, if the motor standstill current is not parameterized) up until a temperature rise of 63 % of the
continuously permissible winding temperature has been reached.
Dependency: The parameter is only used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx, 4) and synchronous reluctance motors (p0300 =
6xx).
See also: r0034, p0612, p0615
See also: F07011, A07012, A07910
NOTICE
This parameter is automatically pre-set from the motor database for motors from the motor list (p0301).
When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be
carefully observed when removing write protection.
When exiting commissioning, p0612 is checked, and where relevant, is pre-assigned to a value that matches the
motor power, if a temperature sensor was not parameterized (see p0601).
Note
When parameter p0611 is reset to 0, then this switches out the thermal I2t motor model (refer to p0612).
If no temperature sensor is parameterized, then the ambient temperature for the thermal motor model is referred to
p0625.
p0612[0...n] Mot_temp_mod activation / Mot_temp_mod act
Access level: 2 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8017, 8018
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0010 0000 0010 bin
Description: Setting to activate the motor temperature model.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Activate mot_temp_mod 1 (I2t) Yes No -
01 Activate mot_temp_mod 2 Yes No -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 549
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
08 Activate mot_temp_mod 1 (I2t) extensions Yes No -
09 Activate mot_temp_mod 2 extensions Yes No -
12 Mot_temp_mod 1 (I2t) ambient temperature can be adjusted Yes (via p0613) No (fixed 20 °C) -
Dependency: For synchronous motors and synchronous reluctance motors, when exiting commissioning, temperature model 1 is
automatically activated if a time constant has been entered in p0611.
See also: r0034, p0604, p0605, p0611, p0613, p0615, p0625, p0626, p0627, p0628, r0630, r0631, r0632, r0633,
p5350, r5389, p5390, p5391
See also: F07011, A07012, F07013, A07014, A07910
NOTICE
For bit 00:
This bit is only automatically activated for permanent-magnet 1FT7 synchronous motors and synchronous reluctance
motors. For other permanent-magnet synchronous motors, the user himself must activate motor temperature model
1 (I2t).
It is only possible to activate this motor temperature model (I2t) for a time constant greater than zero (p0611 > 0).
Note
Mot_temp_mod: motor temperature model
For bit 00:
This bit is used to activate/deactivate the motor temperature model for permanent-magnet synchronous motors and
synchronous reluctance motors.
For bit 01 (see also bit 9):
This bit is used to activate/deactivate the motor temperature model for induction motors.
For bit 08:
This bit is used to extend the motor temperature model 1 (I2t).
The following applies for firmware version < 4.7 SP6 (only bit 0):
- this bit has no function. Temperature model 1 operates in the standard mode.
Overtemperature at rated load: p0605 - 40 °C
Alarm threshold: p0605
Fault threshold: p0615
The following applies from firmware version 4.7 SP6 (bits 0 and 8):
- temperature model 1 operates in the extended mode.
Overtemperature at rated load: p0627
Alarm threshold: p5390
Fault threshold: p5391
For bit 09:
This bit is used to extend the motor temperature model 2.
For firmware version < 4.7 following applies (only bit 1):
- this bit has no function. Temperature model 2 operates in the standard mode.
From firmware version 4.7 the following applies (bits 1 and 9):
- this bit should be set. Temperature model 2 then operates in the extended mode and the result of the model is more
precise.
For bit 12 (only effective if a temperature sensor has not been parameterized):
This bit is used to set the ambient temperature for the motor temperature model 1 (I2t).
The following applies for firmware version < 4.7 SP6 (only bit 0):
- this bit has no function. Temperature model 1 operates with an ambient temperature of 20 °C.
The following applies from firmware version 4.7 SP6 (bits 0 and 12):
- the ambient temperature can be adapted to the conditions using p0613.
p0613[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1/3 ambient temperature / Mod 1/3 amb_temp
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8017
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-40 [°C] 100 [°C] 20 [°C]
SINAMICS G120X converter
550 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the ambient temperature for motor temperature model 1 or 3.
- temperature model 1 (I2t, p0612.0 = 1):
For firmware version < 4.7 SP6 or p0612.12 = 0, the following applies:
The parameter is not relevant.
From firmware version 4.7 SP6 and p0612.12 = 1, the following applies:
The parameter defines the current ambient temperature.
- temperature model 3 (p0612.2 = 1):
The parameter defines the current ambient temperature.
Dependency: See also: p0612
See also: F07011, A07012
p0614[0...n] Thermal resistance adaptation reduction factor / Therm R_adapt red
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [%] 100 [%] 30 [%]
Description: Sets the reduction factor for the overtemperature of the thermal adaptation of the stator/rotor resistance.
The value is a starting value when switching on. Internally, after switch-on, the reduction factor has no effect
corresponding to the thermal time constant.
Dependency: See also: p0610
Note
The reduction factor is only effective for p0610 = 12, and refers to the overtemperature.
p0615[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1 (I2t) fault threshold / I2t F thresh
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8017
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [°C] 220.0 [°C] 180.0 [°C]
Description: Sets the fault threshold for monitoring the motor temperature for motor temperature model 1 (I2t).
The following applies for firmware version < 4.7 SP6:
- fault F07011 is output after the fault threshold is exceeded.
- fault threshold for r0034 = 100 % * (p0615 - 40) / (p0605 - 40).
The following applies from firmware version 4.7 SP6 and p0612.8 = 1:
- the fault threshold in p0615 is preset when commissioning.
- when a catalog motor with motor temperature model 1 (I2t) is being commissioned for the first time, the threshold
value is copied from p0615 to p5391.
- p5391 is of significance for evaluating the fault threshold.
Dependency: The parameter is only used for motor temperature model 1 (I2t).
See also: r0034, p0611, p0612
See also: F07011, A07012
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note
The hysteresis is 2 K.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 551
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0620[0...n] Thermal adaptation, stator and rotor resistance / Mot therm_adapt R
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 2 1
Description: Sets the thermal adaptation of the stator/primary section resistance and rotor/secondary section resistance according
to r0395 and r0396.
Value: 0: No thermal adaptation of stator and rotor resistances
1: Resistances adapted to the temperatures of the thermal model
2: Resistances adapted to the measured stator winding temperature
Note
For p0620 = 1, the following applies:
The stator resistance is adapted using the temperature in r0035 and the rotor resistance together with the model
temperature in r0633.
For p0620 = 2, the following applies:
The stator resistance is adapted using the temperature in r0035. If applicable, the rotor temperature for adapting the
rotor resistance is calculated from the stator temperature (r0035) as follows:
theta_R = (r0628 + r0625) / (r0627 + r0625) * r0035
p0621[0...n] Identification stator resistance after restart / Rst_ident Restart
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 2 0
Description: Selects the identification of the stator resistance of induction motors after the Control Unit runs-up (only for vector
control).
The identification is used to measure the actual stator resistance and from the ratio of the result of motor data
identification (p0350) to the matching ambient temperature (p0625) the actual mean temperature of the stator winding
is calculated. The result is used to initialize the thermal motor model.
p0621 = 1:
Identification of the stator resistance only when the drive is switched on for the first time (pulse enable) after booting
the Control Unit.
p0621 = 2:
Identification of the stator resistance every time the drive is switched on (pulse enable).
Value: 0: No Rs identification
1: Rs identification after switching-on again
2: Rs identification after switching-on each time
Dependency: - perform motor data identification (see p1910) with cold motor.
- enter ambient temperature at time of motor data identification in p0625.
See also: p0622, r0623
NOTICE
The determined stator temperature of the induction motor can only be compared with the measured value of a
temperature sensor (KTY/PT1000) to a certain extent, as the sensor is usually the warmest point of the stator winding,
whereas the measured value of identification reflects the mean value of the stator winding.
Furthermore this is a short-time measurement with limited accuracy that is performed during the magnetizing phase
of the induction motor.
SINAMICS G120X converter
552 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The measurement is carried out:
- For induction motors
- When vector control is active (see p1300)
- if a temperature sensor (KTY/PT1000) has not been connected
- When the motor is at a standstill when switched on
When a flying restart is performed on a rotating motor, the temperatures of the thermal motor model are set to a third
of the overtemperatures. This occurs only once, however, when the CU is booted (e.g. after a power failure).
If identification is activated, the magnetizing time is determined via p0622 and not via p0346. Quick magnetizing
(p1401.6) is de-energized internally and alarm A07416 is displayed. The speed is enabled after completion of the
measurement.
p0621[0...n] Identification stator resistance after restart / Rst_ident Restart
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 2 0
Description: Selects the identification of the stator resistance of induction motors after the Control Unit runs-up (only for vector
control).
The identification is used to measure the actual stator resistance and from the ratio of the result of motor data
identification (p0350) to the matching ambient temperature (p0625) the actual mean temperature of the stator winding
is calculated. The result is used to initialize the thermal motor model.
p0621 = 1:
Identification of the stator resistance only when the drive is switched on for the first time (pulse enable) after booting
the Control Unit.
p0621 = 2:
Identification of the stator resistance every time the drive is switched on (pulse enable).
If a reference value for the stator resistance at an ambient temperature is entered into p0629, then the setting value
for the stator temperature is generated from this value and not from p0350.
When activating the measurement (p0621 = 1, 2), p0629 is determined when first starting the drive. p0629 should be
saved for subsequent use. In order that p0629 matches the ambient temperature (p0625), the function should be
activated with the motor in the cold condition.
Value: 0: No Rs identification
1: Rs identification after switching-on again
2: Rs identification after switching-on each time
Dependency: - perform motor data identification (see p1910) with cold motor.
- enter ambient temperature at time of motor data identification in p0625.
- Reference stator resistance p0629 saved after it has been determined.
See also: p0622, r0623, p0629
NOTICE
The calculated stator temperature can only be compared with the measured value of a temperature sensor (KTY/
PT1000) to a certain extent, as the sensor is usually the warmest point of the stator winding, whereas the measured
value of identification reflects the mean value of the stator winding. The accuracy depends very heavily on how
precisely the motor feeder cable resistance is known (see p0352).
The accuracy of the measurement can be improved by entering the feeder cable resistance p0352 and by determining
the reference stator resistance p0629 for the ambient temperature. p0629 is the measured value r0623, which was
determined immediately after the first commissioning with the motor in a cold state. For p0621 = 1, p0629 is also
measured when switching on for the first time and not after the Control Unit has switched on.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 553
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The measurement is carried out:
- For induction motors
- When vector control is active (see p1300)
- if a temperature sensor (KTY/PT1000) has not been connected
- When the motor is at a standstill when switched on
When a flying restart is performed on a rotating motor, the temperatures of the thermal motor model are set to a third
of the overtemperatures. This occurs only once, however, when the CU is booted (e.g. after a power failure).
If identification is activated, the magnetizing time is determined via p0622 and not via p0346. Quick magnetizing
(p1401.6) is de-energized internally and alarm A07416 is displayed. The speed is enabled after completion of the
measurement.
p0622[0...n] Motor excitation time for Rs_ident after switching on again / t_excit Rs_id
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 20.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the excitation time of the motor for the stator resistance identification after switching on again (restart).
Dependency: See also: p0621, r0623
Note
For p0622 < p0346 the following applies:
If identification is activated, the magnetizing time is influenced by p0622. The speed is enabled after measurement is
complete, but not before the time in p0346 has elapsed (see r0056 bit 4). The time taken for measurement also depends
on the settling time of the measured current.
For p0622 >= p0346 the following applies:
Parameter p0622 is internally limited to the magnetizing time p0346, so that p0346 represents the maximum possible
magnetizing time during identification. The entire measurement period (magnetizing plus measurement settling time
plus measuring time) will always be greater than p0346.
r0623 Rs identification stator resistance after switch on again / Rs-id Rs aft sw-on
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the stator resistance determined using the Rs identification after switching on again.
Dependency: See also: p0621, p0622
p0625[0...n] Motor ambient temperature during commissioning / Mot T_ambient
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8017, 8018
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-40 [°C] 80 [°C] 20 [°C]
Description: Defines the ambient temperature of the motor for calculating the motor temperature model.
Dependency: See also: p0350, p0354
Note
The parameters for stator and rotor resistance (p0350, p0354) refer to this temperature.
If the thermal I2t motor model is activated for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (refer to p0611), p0625 is
included in the model calculation if a temperature sensor is not being used (see p0601).
SINAMICS G120X converter
554 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0626[0...n] Motor overtemperature, stator core / Mot T_over core
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: 21_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8018
Min: Max: Factory setting:
10 [K] 200 [K] 50 [K]
Description: Defines the rated overtemperature of the stator iron referred to ambient temperature in the motor temperature model
2 (p0612.1 = 1).
Dependency: For 1LA7 motors (p0300), the parameter is pre-set as a function of p0307 and p0311.
See also: p0625
NOTICE
When selecting a standard induction motor listed in the catalog (p0300 > 100, p0301 > 10000), this parameter is
automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).
p0627[0...n] Motor overtemperature, stator winding / Mot T_over stator
Access level: 2 Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: 21_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8017, 8018
Min: Max: Factory setting:
15 [K] 200 [K] 80 [K]
Description: Defines the rated overtemperature of the stator winding referred to the ambient temperature.
- motor temperature model 1 (I2t, p0612.0 = 1):
The following applies for firmware version < 4.7 SP6 or p0612.8 = 0:
p0605 is of significance for the rated temperature.
The following applies from firmware version 4.7 SP6 and p0612.8 = 1:
Overtemperature at the rated operating point.
- motor temperature model 2 (p0612.1 = 1):
Overtemperature at the rated operating point.
Dependency: For 1LA5 and 1LA7 motors (p0300 = 15, 17), the parameter is pre-set as a function of p0307 and p0311.
See also: p0625
NOTICE
When selecting a standard induction motor listed in the catalog (p0300 > 100, p0301 > 10000), this parameter is
automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
p0628[0...n] Motor overtemperature rotor / Mot T_over rotor
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: 21_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8018
Min: Max: Factory setting:
20 [K] 200 [K] 100 [K]
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 555
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Defines the rated overtemperature of the squirrel cage rotor referred to ambient temperature in the motor temperature
model 2 (p0612.1 = 1).
Dependency: For 1LA7 motors (p0300), the parameter is pre-set as a function of p0307 and p0311.
See also: p0625
NOTICE
When selecting a standard induction motor listed in the catalog (p0300 > 100, p0301 > 10000), this parameter is
automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Note
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (p0300).
p0629[0...n] Stator resistance reference / R_stator ref
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00000 [ohm] 2000.00000 [ohm] 0.00000 [ohm]
Description: Reference value for the identification of the stator resistance every time the drive is switched on.
Dependency: The measurement of the reference value is activated by the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, 2), if the following
conditions apply:
- the motor temperature is at this instant in time less than 30 °C (r0035).
- a temperature sensor is not being used (p0601).
See also: p0621, r0623
Note
The reference value to identify the stator resistance is determined at the first identification. This must be realized when
the motor is in a cold state, as the value refers to the ambient temperature p0625. The feeder cable resistance should
be entered into p0352 before the measurement.
The result must be saved after the first measurement so that the reference is available after the CU has powered up.
When changing p0350 or p0352, the reference value p0629 should be re-determined.
r0630[0...n] Mot_temp_mod ambient temperature / Mod T_ambient
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2006 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8018
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the ambient temperature of the motor temperature model (models 2 and 3).
r0631[0...n] Mot_temp_mod stator iron temperature / Mod T_stator
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2006 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8018
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the stator iron temperature of the motor temperature model (models 2 and 3).
Note
For motor temperature model 1 (p0612.0 = 1), this parameter is not valid:
SINAMICS G120X converter
556 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0632[0...n] Mot_temp_mod stator winding temperature / Mod T_winding
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2006 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8017, 8018
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the stator winding temperature of the motor temperature model.
Dependency: See also: F07011, A07012, A07910
r0633[0...n] Mot_temp_mod rotor temperature / Mod rotor temp
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2006 Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8018
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the rotor temperature of the motor temperature model (models 2 and 3).
Note
For motor temperature model 1 (p0612.0 = 1), this parameter is not valid:
p0640[0...n] Current limit / Current limit
Access level: 2 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C2(1), T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6640, 6828
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the current limit.
Dependency: See also: r0209, p0323
Note
The parameter is part of the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1); this means that it is appropriately pre-assigned when
changing p0305. The current limit p0640 is limited to r0209.
The resulting current limit is displayed in r0067 and if required, r0067 is reduced by the thermal model of the power unit.
The torque and power limits (p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531) matching the current limit are automatically calculated
when exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 > 0 or using the automatic parameterization with p0340 = 3, 5.
p0640 is limited to 4.0 x p0305.
p0640 is pre-assigned for the automatic self commissioning routine (e.g. to 1.5 x p0305, with p0305 = r0207[1]).
p0640 must be entered when commissioning the system. This is the reason that p0640 is not calculated by the
automatic parameterization when exiting the quick commissioning (p3900 > 0).
p0641[0...n] CI: Current limit, variable / Curr lim var
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6640
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the variable current limit.
The value is referred to p0640.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 557
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0644[0...n] Current limit excitation induction motor / Imax excitat ASM
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
50.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 300.0 [%]
Description: Maximum excitation current of the induction motor referred to the permissible rated current of the power unit (r0207[0]).
Dependency: Only effective for vector control.
Note
The parameter is pre-assigned in the automatic calculation for chassis power units.
p0650[0...n] Actual motor operating hours / Oper hours motor
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [h] 4294967295 [h] 0 [h]
Description: Displays the operating hours for the corresponding motor.
The motor operating time counter continues to run when the pulses are enabled. When the pulse enable is withdrawn,
the counter is held and the value saved.
Dependency: See also: p0651
See also: A01590
Note
For p0651 = 0, the operating hours counter is disabled.
The operating hours counter in p0650 can only be reset to 0.
The operating hours counter only runs with drive data set 0 and 1 (DDS).
p0651[0...n] Motor operating hours maintenance interval / Mot t_op maint
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [h] 150000 [h] 0 [h]
Description: Sets the service/maintenance intervals in hours for the appropriate motor.
An appropriate message is output when the operating hours set here are reached.
Dependency: See also: p0650
See also: A01590
Note
For p0651 = 0, the operating hours counter is disabled.
When setting p0651 to 0, then p0650 is automatically set to 0.
The operating hours counter only runs with drive data set 0 and 1 (DDS).
r0719 IO extension module status / IO module status
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: IO expansion module status
SINAMICS G120X converter
558 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
0: IO expansion module is not connected
1: IO expansion module connected
r0720[0...4] CU number of inputs and outputs / CU I/O count
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2119
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the number of inputs and outputs.
Index: [0] = Number of digital inputs
[1] = Number of digital outputs
[2] = Number of digital input/outputs bidirectional
[3] = Number of analog inputs
[4] = Number of analog outputs
NOTICE
This indicates the maximum IO number with IO expansion module(r719=1), if without that(r719=0), all expanded IOs
are unavailable.
r0721 CU digital inputs terminal actual value / CU DI term act val
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2201, 2221,
2256
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the actual value at the digital inputs.
This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x or DI/DO x prior to switching from the simulation
mode (p0795.x = 1) to terminal mode (p0795.x = 0).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X133. 5) High Low -
01 DI 1 (X133. 6) High Low -
02 DI 2 (X133. 7) High Low -
03 DI 3 (X133. 8) High Low -
04 DI 4 (X133. 16) High Low -
05 DI 5 (X133. 17) High Low -
06 DI 6 (X203. 88) High Low -
07 DI 7 (X203. 87) High Low -
11 DI 11 (X132.3, 4) AI 0 High Low -
12 DI 12 (X132. 10, 11) AI 1 High Low -
Note
AI: Analog Input
DI: Digital Input
X203: IO module terminal
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 559
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0722.0...12 CO/BO: CU digital inputs status / CU DI status
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2201, 2221,
2256
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status of the digital inputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X133. 5) High Low -
01 DI 1 (X133. 6) High Low -
02 DI 2 (X133. 7) High Low -
03 DI 3 (X133. 8) High Low -
04 DI 4 (X133. 16) High Low -
05 DI 5 (X133. 17) High Low -
06 DI 6 (X203. 88) High Low -
07 DI 7 (X203. 87) High Low -
11 DI 11 (X132.3, 4) AI 0 High Low -
12 DI 12 (X132. 10, 11) AI 1 High Low -
Dependency: See also: r0723
Note
AI: Analog Input
DI: Digital Input
X203: IO module terminal
r0723.0...12 CO/BO: CU digital inputs status inverted / CU DI status inv
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2119, 2120,
2121, 2130, 2131, 2132, 2133
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X133. 5) High Low -
01 DI 1 (X133. 6) High Low -
02 DI 2 (X133. 7) High Low -
03 DI 3 (X133. 8) High Low -
04 DI 4 (X133. 16) High Low -
05 DI 5 (X133. 17) High Low -
06 DI 6 (X203. 88) High Low -
07 DI 7 (X203. 87) High Low -
11 DI 11 (X132.3, 4) AI 0 High Low -
12 DI 12 (X132. 10, 11) AI 1 High Low -
Dependency: See also: r0722
Note
AI: Analog Input
DI: Digital Input
X203: IO module terminal
SINAMICS G120X converter
560 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0724 CU digital inputs debounce time / CU DI t_debounce
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [ms] 20.000 [ms] 4.000 [ms]
Description: Sets the debounce time for digital inputs.
Note
The digital inputs are read in cyclically every 2 ms (DI 11, DI 12 every 4 ms).
To debounce the signals, the set debounce time is converted into integer multiple debounce clock cycles Tp (Tp =
p0724 / 2 ms).
DI: Digital Input
p0730 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 0 / CU s_s DO 0
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2119, 2030,
2130
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 52.3
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 0 (NO: X134. 19 / NC: X134. 18).
Recommendation: r0052.0 Ready for switching on
r0052.1 Ready for operation
r0052.2 Operation enabled
r0052.3 Fault present
r0052.4 Coast down active (OFF2)
r0052.5 Quick stop active (OFF3)
r0052.6 Switching on inhibited active
r0052.7 Alarm present
r0052.9 Control request
r0052.14 Motor rotates forwards
r0053.0 DC braking active
r0053.1 n_act > p2167 (n_off)
r0053.2 n_act <= p1080 (n_min)
r0053.3 I_act > p2170
r0053.4 n_act > p2155
r0053.5 n_act <= p2155
r0053.6 n_act >= n_set
r0053.10 Technology controller output at the lower limit
r0053.11 Technology controller output at the upper limit
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note
DO: Digital Output
Relay output: NO = normally open, NC = normally closed
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 561
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0731 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 1 / CU s_s DO 1
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2119, 2030,
2130
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 52.2
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 1 (NO: X134. 24 / NC: X134. 23).
Recommendation: r0052.0 Ready for switching on
r0052.1 Ready for operation
r0052.2 Operation enabled
r0052.3 Fault present
r0052.4 Coast down active (OFF2)
r0052.5 Quick stop active (OFF3)
r0052.6 Switching on inhibited active
r0052.7 Alarm present
r0052.9 Control request
r0052.14 Motor rotates forwards
r0053.0 DC braking active
r0053.1 n_act > p2167 (n_off)
r0053.2 n_act <= p1080 (n_min)
r0053.3 I_act > p2170
r0053.4 n_act > p2155
r0053.5 n_act <= p2155
r0053.6 n_act >= n_set
r0053.10 Technology controller output at the lower limit
r0053.11 Technology controller output at the upper limit
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note
DO: Digital Output
Relay output: NO = normally open, NC = normally closed
p0732 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 2 / CU s_s DO 2
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2119, 2030,
2130
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 52.0
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 2 (NO: X204. 98 / NC: X204. 99).
SINAMICS G120X converter
562 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Recommendation: r0052.0 Ready for switching on
r0052.1 Ready for operation
r0052.2 Operation enabled
r0052.3 Fault present
r0052.4 Coast down active (OFF2)
r0052.5 Quick stop active (OFF3)
r0052.6 Switching on inhibited active
r0052.7 Alarm present
r0052.9 Control request
r0052.14 Motor rotates forwards
r0053.0 DC braking active
r0053.1 n_act > p2167 (n_off)
r0053.2 n_act <= p1080 (n_min)
r0053.3 I_act > p2170
r0053.4 n_act > p2155
r0053.5 n_act <= p2155
r0053.6 n_act >= n_set
r0053.10 Technology controller output at the lower limit
r0053.11 Technology controller output at the upper limit
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note
DO: Digital Output
X204: IO module terminal
Relay output: NO = normally open, NC = normally closed
p0733 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 3 / CU s_s DO 3
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 52.7
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 3 (NO: X204. 95 / NC: X204. 96).
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note
DO: Digital Output
X204: IO module terminal
Relay output: NO = normally open, NC = normally closed
p0734 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 4 / CU s_s DO 4
G120X_DP, Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 4 (NO: X204. 93).
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 563
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
DO: Digital Output
X204: IO module terminal
Relay output: NO = normally open
p0734 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 4 / CU s_s DO 4
G120X_USS Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 4(NO: X204. 93)..
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note
DO: Digital Output
X204: IO module terminal
Relay output: NO = normally open
p0735 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 5 / CU s_s DO 5
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 5 (NO: x204. 91).
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note
DO: Digital Output
X204: IO module terminal
Relay output: NO = normally open
r0747 CU digital outputs status / CU DO status
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2130, 2131,
2132, 2133
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status of digital outputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DO 0 (NO: X134. 19 / NC: X134. 18) High Low -
01 DO 1 (NO: X134. 24 / NC: X134. 23) High Low -
02 DO 2 (NO: X204. 98 / NC: X204. 99) High Low -
03 DO 3 (NO: X204. 95 / NC: X204. 96) High Low -
04 DO 4 (NO: X204. 93) High Low -
05 DO 5 (NO: X204. 91) High Low -
SINAMICS G120X converter
564 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
DO: Digital Output
X204: IO module terminal
Relay output: NO = normally open, NC = normally closed
Inversion using p0748 has been taken into account.
p0748 CU invert digital outputs / CU DO inv
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2201, 2242
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0000 bin
Description: Setting to invert the signals at the digital outputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DO 0 (NO: X134. 19 / NC: X134. 18) Inverted Not inverted -
01 DO 1 (NO: X134. 24 / NC: X134. 23) Inverted Not inverted -
02 DO 2 (NO: X204. 98 / NC: X204. 99) Inverted Not inverted -
03 DO 3 (NO: X204. 95 / NC: X204. 96) Inverted Not inverted -
04 DO 4 (NO: X204. 93) Inverted Not inverted -
05 DO 5 (NO: X204. 91) Inverted Not inverted -
Note
DO: Digital Output
X204: IO module terminal
Relay output: NO = normally open, NC = normally closed
r0751.0...11 BO: CU analog inputs status word / CU AI status word
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2251, 2252
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and binector output for the status of the analog inputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Analog input AI0 wire breakage Yes No -
01 Analog input AI1 wire breakage Yes No -
02 Analog input AI2 wire breakage Yes No -
03 Analog input AI3 wire breakage Yes No -
08 Analog input AI0 no wire breakage Yes No -
09 Analog input AI1 no wire breakage Yes No -
10 Analog input AI2 no wire breakage Yes No -
11 Analog input AI3 no wire breakage Yes No -
Note
AI: Analog Input
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 565
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0752[0...3] CO: CU analog inputs input voltage/current actual / CU AI U/I_inp act
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p0514 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9566, 9568,
9576
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the actual input voltage in V when set as voltage input.
Displays the actual input current in mA when set as current input and with the load resistor switched in.
Displays the actual temperature in °C when set as temperature sensor and the voltage divider is switched in.
Index: [0] = AI0 (X132 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (X132 10/11)
[2] = NI 1000 0 (X202 80/82)
[3] = NI 1000 1 (X202 81/82)
Dependency: The type of analog input AIx (voltage, current or temperature input) is set using p0756.
See also: p0756
Note
AI: Analog Input
X202: IO module terminal
p0753[0...3] CU analog inputs smoothing time constant / CU AI T_smooth
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9566, 9568,
9576
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st order lowpass filter for the analog inputs.
Index: [0] = AI0 (X132 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (X132 10/11)
[2] = NI 1000 0 (X202 80/82)
[3] = NI 1000 1 (X202 81/82)
Note
AI: Analog Input
X202: IO module terminal
r0755[0...3] CO: CU analog inputs actual value in percent / CU AI value in %
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9566, 9568,
9576
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the currently referred input value of the analog inputs.
When interconnected, the signals are referred to the reference quantities p200x and p205x.
Index: [0] = AI0 (X132 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (X132 10/11)
[2] = NI 1000 0 (X202 80/82)
[3] = NI 1000 1 (X202 81/82)
SINAMICS G120X converter
566 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
AI: Analog Input
X202: IO module terminal
p0756[0...3] CU analog inputs type / CU AI type
G120X_PN Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9566, 9568,
9576
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 10 [0] 4
[1] 4
[2] 8
[3] 8
Description: Sets the type of analog inputs.
p0756[0...1] = 0, 1, 4 corresponds to a voltage input (r0752, p0757, p0759 are displayed in V).
p0756[0...2] = 2, 3 corresponds to a current input (r0752, p0757, p0759 are displayed in mA).
p0756[2...3] = 6, 7, 10 corresponds to a resistor input for temperature measurement (r0752, p0757, p0759 are
displayed in °C).
p0756[2...3] = 8 No temperature sensor connected. Mode for deactivating sensor monitoring (alarm A03520).
In addition, the associated DIP switch must be set.
For the voltage input, DIP switch AI0/1 must be set to "U".
For the current input, DIP switch AI0/1 or AI2 must be set to "I".
For the temperature input, DIP switch AI2 must be set to "TEMP".
Value: 0: Unipolar voltage input (0 V ... +10 V)
1: Unipolar voltage input monitored (+2 V ... +10 V)
2: Unipolar current input (0 mA ... +20 mA)
3: Unipolar current input monitored (+4 mA to +20 mA)
4: Bipolar voltage input (-10 V ... +10 V)
6: Temperature sensor LG-Ni1000
7: Temperature sensor PT1000
8: No sensor connected
10: Temperature sensor DIN Ni 1k (6180 ppm / K)
Index: [0] = AI0 (X132 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (X132 10/11)
[2] = NI 1000 0 (X202 80/82)
[3] = NI 1000 1 (X202 81/82)
Dependency: See also: A03520
WARNING
The maximum voltage difference between analog input terminals AI+, AI-, and the ground must not exceed 35 V.
If the system is operated when the load resistor is switched on (DIP switch set to "I"), the voltage between differential
inputs AI+ and AI- must not exceed 10 V or the injected 80 mA current otherwise the input will be damaged.
NOTICE
When IO module is connected with G120X_PN, AI2 current input is not supported if EEPROM version is V1.01.03.00
or older(r198[1]<=1010300).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 567
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
When changing p0756, the parameters of the scaling characteristic (p0757, p0758, p0759, p0760) are overwritten with
the following default values:
For p0756 = 0, 4, p0757 is set to 0.0 V, p0758 = 0.0 %, p0759 = 10.0 V and p0760 = 100.0 %.
For p0756 = 1, p0757 is set to 2.0 V, p0758 = 0.0 %, p0759 = 10.0 V and p0760 = 100.0 %.
For p0756 = 2, p0757 is set to 0.0 mA, p0758 = 0.0 %, p0759 = 20.0 mA and p0760 = 100.0 %.
For p0756 = 3, p0757 is set to 4.0 mA, p0758 = 0.0 %, p0759 = 20.0 mA and p0760 = 100.0 %.
For p0756 = 6, 7, p0757 is set to 0 °C, p0758 = 0.0 %, p0759 = 100 °C and p0760 = 100.0 %.
X202: IO module terminal
p0756[0...3] CU analog inputs type / CU AI type
G120X_DP, Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
G120X_USS Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9566, 9568,
9576
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 10 [0] 4
[1] 4
[2] 8
[3] 8
Description: Sets the type of analog inputs.
p0756[0...1] = 0, 1, 4 corresponds to a voltage input (r0752, p0757, p0759 are displayed in V).
p0756[0...2] = 2, 3 corresponds to a current input (r0752, p0757, p0759 are displayed in mA).
p0756[2...3] = 6, 7, 10 corresponds to a resistor input for temperature measurement (r0752, p0757, p0759 are
displayed in °C).
p0756[2...3] = 8 No temperature sensor connected. Mode for deactivating sensor monitoring (alarm A03520).
In addition, the associated DIP switch must be set.
For the voltage input, DIP switch AI0/1 must be set to "U".
For the current input, DIP switch AI0/1 or AI2 must be set to "I".
For the temperature input, DIP switch AI2 must be set to "TEMP".
Value: 0: Unipolar voltage input (0 V ... +10 V)
1: Unipolar voltage input monitored (+2 V ... +10 V)
2: Unipolar current input (0 mA ... +20 mA)
3: Unipolar current input monitored (+4 mA to +20 mA)
4: Bipolar voltage input (-10 V ... +10 V)
6: Temperature sensor LG-Ni1000
7: Temperature sensor PT1000
8: No sensor connected
10: Temperature sensor DIN Ni 1k (6180 ppm / K)
Index: [0] = AI0 (X132 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (X132 10/11)
[2] = NI 1000 0 (X202 80/82)
[3] = NI 1000 1 (X202 81/82)
Dependency: See also: A03520
WARNING
The maximum voltage difference between analog input terminals AI+, AI-, and the ground must not exceed 35 V.
If the system is operated when the load resistor is switched on (DIP switch set to "I"), the voltage between differential
inputs AI+ and AI- must not exceed 10 V or the injected 80 mA current otherwise the input will be damaged.
SINAMICS G120X converter
568 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
When changing p0756, the parameters of the scaling characteristic (p0757, p0758, p0759, p0760) are overwritten with
the following default values:
For p0756 = 0, 4, p0757 is set to 0.0 V, p0758 = 0.0 %, p0759 = 10.0 V and p0760 = 100.0 %.
For p0756 = 1, p0757 is set to 2.0 V, p0758 = 0.0 %, p0759 = 10.0 V and p0760 = 100.0 %.
For p0756 = 2, p0757 is set to 0.0 mA, p0758 = 0.0 %, p0759 = 20.0 mA and p0760 = 100.0 %.
For p0756 = 3, p0757 is set to 4.0 mA, p0758 = 0.0 %, p0759 = 20.0 mA and p0760 = 100.0 %.
For p0756 = 6, 7, p0757 is set to 0 °C, p0758 = 0.0 %, p0759 = 100 °C and p0760 = 100.0 %.
X202: IO module terminal
p0757[0...3] CU analog inputs characteristic value x1 / CU AI char x1
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9566, 9568,
9576
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-50.000 160.000 0.000
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs.
The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (V, mA, °C) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI0 (X132 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (X132 10/11)
[2] = NI 1000 0 (X202 80/82)
[3] = NI 1000 1 (X202 81/82)
Note
The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
X202: IO module terminal
p0758[0...3] CU analog inputs characteristic value y1 / CU AI char y1
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9566, 9568,
9576
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs.
The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI0 (X132 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (X132 10/11)
[2] = NI 1000 0 (X202 80/82)
[3] = NI 1000 1 (X202 81/82)
Note
The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
X202: IO module terminal
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 569
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0759[0...3] CU analog inputs characteristic value x2 / CU AI char x2
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9566, 9568,
9576
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-50.000 160.000 [0] 10.000
[1] 10.000
[2] 20.000
[3] 100.000
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs.
The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (V, mA, °C) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI0 (X132 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (X132 10/11)
[2] = NI 1000 0 (X202 80/82)
[3] = NI 1000 1 (X202 81/82)
Note
The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
X202: IO module terminal
p0760[0...3] CU analog inputs characteristic value y2 / CU AI char y2
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9566, 9568,
9576
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs.
The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI0 (X132 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (X132 10/11)
[2] = NI 1000 0 (X202 80/82)
[3] = NI 1000 1 (X202 81/82)
Note
The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
X202: IO module terminal
p0761[0...3] CU analog inputs wire breakage monitoring response threshold / CU WireBrkThresh
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9566, 9568
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 20.00 2.00
Description: Sets the response threshold for the wire breakage monitoring of the analog inputs.
The unit for the parameter value depends on the set analog input type.
SINAMICS G120X converter
570 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Index: [0] = AI0 (X132 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (X132 10/11)
[2] = NI 1000 0 (X202 80/82)
[3] = NI 1000 1 (X202 81/82)
Dependency: For the following analog input type, the wire breakage monitoring is active:
p0756[0...1] = 1 (unipolar voltage input monitored (+2 V ... +10 V)), unit [V]
p0756[0...2] = 3 (unipolar current input monitored (+4 mA ... +20 mA)), unit [mA]
p0756[3]: Wire breakage monitoring is not supported for this analog input.
See also: p0756
Note
AI: Analog Input
When p0761 = 0, wire breakage monitoring is not carried out.
X202: IO module terminal
p0762[0...3] CU analog inputs wire breakage monitoring delay time / CU wire brk t_del
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9566, 9568
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for the wire breakage monitoring of the analog inputs.
Index: [0] = AI0 (X132 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (X132 10/11)
[2] = NI 1000 0 (X202 80/82)
[3] = NI 1000 1 (X202 81/82)
Note
AI: Analog Input
X202: IO module terminal
p0764[0...3] CU analog inputs dead zone / CU AI dead zone
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2251
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 20.000 0.000
Description: Determines the width of the dead zone at the analog input.
Analog input type unipolar (e.g. 0 ... +10 V):
The dead zone starts with the characteristic value x1/y1 (p0757/p0758).
Analog input type bipolar (e.g. -10 V ... +10 V):
The dead zone is located at the symmetrical center between characteristic value x1/y1 (p0757/p0758) and x2/y2
(p0759/p0760). The set value doubles the dead zone.
Index: [0] = AI0 (X132 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (X132 10/11)
[2] = NI 1000 0 (X202 80/82)
[3] = NI 1000 1 (X202 81/82)
Note
AI: Analog Input
X202: IO module terminal
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 571
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0771[0...2] CI: CU analog outputs signal source / CU AO s_s
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2261
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 21[0]
[1] 27[0]
[2] 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the analog outputs.
Index: [0] = AO0 (X133 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (X202 85/86)
[2] = AO2 (X202 83/84)
Note
AO: Analog Output
X202: IO module terminal
r0772[0...2] CU analog outputs output value currently referred / CU AO outp act ref
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9572
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the actual referred output value of the analog outputs.
Index: [0] = AO0 (X133 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (X202 85/86)
[2] = AO2 (X202 83/84)
Note
AO: Analog Output
X202: IO module terminal
p0773[0...2] CU analog outputs smoothing time constant / CU AO T_smooth
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9572
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st order lowpass filter for the analog outputs.
Index: [0] = AO0 (X133 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (X202 85/86)
[2] = AO2 (X202 83/84)
Note
AO: Analog Output
X202: IO module terminal
SINAMICS G120X converter
572 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0774[0...2] CU analog outputs output voltage/current actual / CU AO U/I_outp
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9572
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the actual output voltage or output current at the analog outputs.
Index: [0] = AO0 (X133 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (X202 85/86)
[2] = AO2 (X202 83/84)
Dependency: See also: p0776
Note
AO: Analog Output
X202: IO module terminal
p0775[0...2] CU analog outputs activate absolute value generation / CU AO absVal act
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9572
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Activates the absolute value generation for the analog outputs.
Value: 0: No absolute value generation
1: Absolute value generation switched in
Index: [0] = AO0 (X133 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (X202 85/86)
[2] = AO2 (X202 83/84)
Note
AO: Analog Output
X202: IO module terminal
p0776[0...2] CU analog outputs type / CU AO type
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9572
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 2 0
Description: Sets the analog output type.
p0776[x] = 1 corresponds to a voltage output (p0774, p0778, p0780 are displayed in V).
p0776[x] = 0, 2 corresponds to a current output (p0774, p0778, p0780 are displayed in mA).
Value: 0: Current output (0 mA ... +20 mA)
1: Voltage output (0 V ... +10 V)
2: Current output (+4 mA ... +20 mA)
Index: [0] = AO0 (X133 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (X202 85/86)
[2] = AO2 (X202 83/84)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 573
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
When changing p0776, the parameters of the scaling characteristic (p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780) are overwritten with
the following default values:
For p0776 = 0, p0777 is set to 0.0 %, p0778 = 0.0 mA, p0779 = 100.0 % and p0780 to 20.0 mA.
For p0776 = 1, p0777 is set to 0.0 %, p0778 = 0.0 V, p0779 = 100.0 % and p0780 to 10.0 V.
For p0776 = 2, p0777 is set to 0.0 %, p0778 = 4.0 mA, p0779 = 100.0 % and p0780 to 20.0 mA.
X202: IO module terminal
p0777[0...2] CU analog outputs characteristic value x1 / CU AO char x1
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9572
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs.
The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO0 (X133 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (X202 85/86)
[2] = AO2 (X202 83/84)
Dependency: See also: p0776
NOTICE
This parameter is automatically overwritten when changing p0776 (type of analog outputs).
Note
The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
X202: IO module terminal
p0778[0...2] CU analog outputs characteristic value y1 / CU AO char y1
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9572
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-20.000 [V] 20.000 [V] 0.000 [V]
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs.
The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V or output current in mA) of the 1st value pair of the
characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO0 (X133 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (X202 85/86)
[2] = AO2 (X202 83/84)
Dependency: The unit of this parameter (V or mA) depends on the analog output type.
See also: p0776
NOTICE
This parameter is automatically overwritten when changing p0776 (type of analog outputs).
Note
The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
X202: IO module terminal
SINAMICS G120X converter
574 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0779[0...2] CU analog outputs characteristic value x2 / CU AO char x2
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9572
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs.
The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO0 (X133 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (X202 85/86)
[2] = AO2 (X202 83/84)
Dependency: See also: p0776
NOTICE
This parameter is automatically overwritten when changing p0776 (type of analog outputs).
Note
The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
X202: IO module terminal
p0780[0...2] CU analog outputs characteristic value y2 / CU AO char y2
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9572
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-20.000 [V] 20.000 [V] 20.000 [V]
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs.
The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V or output current in mA) of the 2nd value pair of the
characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO0 (X133 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (X202 85/86)
[2] = AO2 (X202 83/84)
Dependency: The unit of this parameter (V or mA) depends on the analog output type.
See also: p0776
NOTICE
This parameter is automatically overwritten when changing p0776 (type of analog outputs).
Note
The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
X202: IO module terminal
p0782[0...2] BI: CU analog outputs invert signal source / CU AO inv s_s
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9572
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to invert the analog output signals.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 575
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Index: [0] = AO0 (X133 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (X202 85/86)
[2] = AO2 (X202 83/84)
Note
AO: Analog Output
X202: IO module terminal
r0785.0...2 BO: CU analog outputs status word / CU AO ZSW
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9572
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status of analog outputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 AO 0 negative Yes No -
01 AO 1 negative Yes No -
02 AO 2 negative Yes No -
Note
AO: Analog Output
p0791[0...2] CO: Fieldbus analog outputs / Fieldbus AO
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.000 [%] 200.000 [%] 0.000 [%]
Description: Setting and connector output to control the analog outputs via fieldbus.
Index: [0] = AO0 (X133 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (X202 85/86)
[2] = AO2 (X202 83/84)
Dependency: See also: p0771
Note
AO: Analog Output
The following interconnections must be established to control the analog outputs via fieldbus:
- AO 0: p0771[0] with p0791[0]
- AO 1: p0771[1] with p0791[1]
- AO 2: p0771[2] with p0791[2]
X202: IO module terminal
p0795 CU digital inputs simulation mode / CU DI simulation
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2201, 2221,
2256
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the simulation mode for digital inputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
SINAMICS G120X converter
576 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
00 DI 0 (X133. 5) Simulation Terminal eval -
01 DI 1 (X133. 6) Simulation Terminal eval -
02 DI 2 (X133. 7) Simulation Terminal eval -
03 DI 3 (X133. 8) Simulation Terminal eval -
04 DI 4 (X133. 16) Simulation Terminal eval -
05 DI 5 (X133. 17) Simulation Terminal eval -
06 DI 6 (X203. 88) Simulation Terminal eval -
07 DI 7 (X203. 87) Simulation Terminal eval -
11 DI 11 (X132. 3, 4) AI 0 Simulation Terminal eval -
12 DI 12 (X132.10, 11) AI 1 Simulation Terminal eval -
Dependency: The setpoint for the input signals is specified using p0796.
See also: p0796
Note
This parameter is not saved when data is backed up (p0971).
AI: Analog Input
DI: Digital Input
X203: IO module terminal
p0796 CU digital inputs simulation mode setpoint / CU DI simul setp
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2201, 2221,
2256
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the digital input simulation mode.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X133. 5) High Low -
01 DI 1 (X133. 6) High Low -
02 DI 2 (X133. 7) High Low -
03 DI 3 (X133. 8) High Low -
04 DI 4 (X133. 16) High Low -
05 DI 5 (X133. 17) High Low -
06 DI 6 (X203. 88) High Low -
07 DI 7 (X203. 87) High Low -
11 DI 11 (X132.3, 4) AI 0 High Low -
12 DI 12 (X132. 10, 11) AI 1 High Low -
Dependency: The simulation of a digital input is selected using p0795.
See also: p0795
Note
This parameter is not saved when data is backed up (p0971).
AI: Analog Input
DI: Digital Input
X203: IO module terminal
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 577
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0797[0...3] CU analog inputs simulation mode / CU AI sim_mode
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the simulation mode for the analog inputs.
Value: 0: Terminal evaluation for analog input x
1: Simulation for analog input x
Index: [0] = AI0 (X132 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (X132 10/11)
[2] = NI 1000 0 (X202 80/82)
[3] = NI 1000 1 (X202 81/82)
Dependency: The setpoint for the input voltage is specified via p0798.
See also: p0798
Note
This parameter is not saved when data is backed up (p0971).
AI: Analog Input
X202: IO module terminal
p0798[0...3] CU analog inputs simulation mode setpoint / CU AI sim setp
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-50.000 2000.000 0.000
Description: Sets the setpoint for the input value in the simulation mode of the analog inputs.
Index: [0] = AI0 (X132 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (X132 10/11)
[2] = NI 1000 0 (X202 80/82)
[3] = NI 1000 1 (X202 81/82)
Dependency: The simulation of an analog input is selected using p0797.
If AI x is parameterized as a voltage input (p0756), the setpoint is a voltage in V.
If AI x is parameterized as a current input (p0756), the setpoint is a current in mA.
See also: p0756, p0797
Note
This parameter is not saved when data is backed up (p0971).
AI: Analog Input
X202: IO module terminal
p0802 Data transfer: memory card as source/target / mem_card src/targ
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 100 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
578 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the number for data transfer of a parameter backup from/to memory card.
Transfer from memory card to device memory (p0804 = 1):
- sets the source of parameter backup (e.g. p0802 = 48 --> PS048xxx.ACX is the source).
Transfer from non-volatile device memory to memory card (p0804 = 2):
- sets the target of parameter backup (e.g. p0802 = 23 --> PS023xxx.ACX is the target).
Dependency: See also: p0803, p0804
Note
The volatile device memory is not influenced by data transfer.
p0803 Data transfer: device memory as source/target / Dev_mem src/targ
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 30 0
Description: Sets the number for data transfer of a parameter backup from/to the non-volatile device memory.
Transfer from memory card to device memory (p0804 = 1):
- sets the target of the parameter backup (e.g. p0803 = 10 --> PS010xxx.ACX is the target).
Transfer from non-volatile device memory to memory card (p0804 = 2):
- sets the source of the parameter backup (e.g. p0803 = 11 --> PS011xxx.ACX is the source).
Value: 0: Source/target standard
10: Source/target with setting 10
11: Source/target with setting 11
12: Source/target with setting 12
30: Source/target with setting 30
Dependency: See also: p0802, p0804
Note
The volatile device memory is not influenced by data transfer.
p0804 Data transfer start / Data transf start
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
G120X_PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1100 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 579
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the transfer direction and start of data transfer between the memory card and non-volatile device memory.
Example 1:
The parameter backup is to be transferred from the non-volatile device memory to the memory card with setting 0. The
parameter backup is to be stored on the memory card with setting 22.
p0802 = 22 (parameter backup stored on memory card as target with setting 22)
p0803 = 0 (parameter backup stored in device memory as source with setting 0)
p0804 = 2 (start data transfer from device memory to memory card)
--> PS000xxx.ACX is transferred from device memory to memory card and stored as PS022xxx.ACX.
--> the parameter backup PS022xxx.ACX on the memory card can be used for data backup.
Example 2:
The parameter backup is to be transferred from the memory card to the non-volatile device memory with setting 22.
The parameter backup is to be stored in the device memory as setting 10.
p0802 = 22 (parameter backup stored on memory card as source with setting 22)
p0803 = 10 (define parameter backup with setting 10 as target in the device memory)
p0804 = 1 (start data transfer from memory card to device memory)
--> PS022xxx.ACX is transferred from memory card to device memory and stored as PS010xxx.ACX.
--> this parameter backup can be loaded to the volatile device memory using p0010 = 30 and p0970 = 10.
--> to permanently save in the device memory and also on the memory card, this parameter backup should be saved
using p0971 = 1.
Example 3 (only supported for PROFIBUS/PROFINET):
The PROFIBUS or PROFINET device master data (GSD) should be transferred from the device memory to the
memory card.
p0802 = (not relevant)
p0803 = (not relevant)
p0804 = 12 (start transferring the GSD files to the memory card)
--> The GSD files are transferred from the device memory to the memory card and stored in the /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/
DATA/CFG directory.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Memory card to device memory
2: Device memory to memory card
12: Device memory (GSD files) to memory card
1001: File on memory card cannot be opened
1002: File in device memory cannot be opened
1003: Memory card not found
1100: File cannot be transferred
Recommendation: When switching off/switching on, a possibly valid parameter backup is loaded to the memory card with setting 0.
Therefore, we do not recommend parameter backup with setting 0 (p0803 = 0) in the non-volatile device memory.
Dependency: See also: p0802, p0803
NOTICE
The memory card must not be removed while data is being transferred.
SINAMICS G120X converter
580 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
If a parameter backup with setting 0 is detected on the memory card when the Control Unit is switched on
(PS000xxx.ACX), this is transferred automatically to the device memory.
When the memory card is inserted, a parameter backup with setting 0 (PS000xxx.ACX) is automatically written to the
memory card when the parameters are saved in a non-volatile memory (e.g. by means of "Copy RAM to ROM").
Once the data has been successfully transferred, this parameter is automatically reset to 0. If an error occurs, the
parameter is set to a value > 1000. Possible fault causes:
p0804 = 1001:
The parameter backup set in p0802 as the source on the memory card does not exist or there is not sufficient memory
space available on the memory card.
p0804 = 1002:
The parameter backup set in p0803 as the source in the device memory does not exist or there is not sufficient memory
space available in the device memory.
p0804 = 1003:
No memory card has been inserted.
p0804 Data transfer start / Data transf start
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1100 0
Description: Sets the transfer direction and start of data transfer between the memory card and non-volatile device memory.
Example 1:
The parameter backup is to be transferred from the non-volatile device memory to the memory card with setting 0. The
parameter backup is to be stored on the memory card with setting 22.
p0802 = 22 (parameter backup stored on memory card as target with setting 22)
p0803 = 0 (parameter backup stored in device memory as source with setting 0)
p0804 = 2 (start data transfer from device memory to memory card)
--> PS000xxx.ACX is transferred from device memory to memory card and stored as PS022xxx.ACX.
--> the parameter backup PS022xxx.ACX on the memory card can be used for data backup.
Example 2:
The parameter backup is to be transferred from the memory card to the non-volatile device memory with setting 22.
The parameter backup is to be stored in the device memory as setting 10.
p0802 = 22 (parameter backup stored on memory card as source with setting 22)
p0803 = 10 (define parameter backup with setting 10 as target in the device memory)
p0804 = 1 (start data transfer from memory card to device memory)
--> PS022xxx.ACX is transferred from memory card to device memory and stored as PS010xxx.ACX.
--> this parameter backup can be loaded to the volatile device memory using p0010 = 30 and p0970 = 10.
--> to permanently save in the device memory and also on the memory card, this parameter backup should be saved
using p0971 = 1.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Memory card to device memory
2: Device memory to memory card
1001: File on memory card cannot be opened
1002: File in device memory cannot be opened
1003: Memory card not found
1100: File cannot be transferred
Recommendation: When switching off/switching on, a possibly valid parameter backup is loaded to the memory card with setting 0.
Therefore, we do not recommend parameter backup with setting 0 (p0803 = 0) in the non-volatile device memory.
Dependency: See also: p0802, p0803
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 581
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
NOTICE
The memory card must not be removed while data is being transferred.
Note
If a parameter backup with setting 0 is detected on the memory card when the Control Unit is switched on
(PS000xxx.ACX), this is transferred automatically to the device memory.
When the memory card is inserted, a parameter backup with setting 0 (PS000xxx.ACX) is automatically written to the
memory card when the parameters are saved in a non-volatile memory (e.g. by means of "Copy RAM to ROM").
Once the data has been successfully transferred, this parameter is automatically reset to 0. If an error occurs, the
parameter is set to a value > 1000. Possible fault causes:
p0804 = 1001:
The parameter backup set in p0802 as the source on the memory card does not exist or there is not sufficient memory
space available on the memory card.
p0804 = 1002:
The parameter backup set in p0803 as the source in the device memory does not exist or there is not sufficient memory
space available in the device memory.
p0804 = 1003:
No memory card has been inserted.
p0806 BI: Inhibit master control / PcCtrl inhibit
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to block the master control.
Dependency: See also: r0807
Note
The commissioning software (drive control panel) uses the master control, for example.
r0807.0 BO: Master control active / PcCtrl active
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays what has the master control.
The drive can be controlled via the BICO interconnection or from external (e.g. the commissioning software).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Master control active Yes No 3030
Dependency: See also: p0806
NOTICE
The master control only influences control word 1 and speed setpoint 1. Other control word/setpoints can be
transferred from another automation device.
Note
Bit 0 = 0: BICO interconnection active
Bit 0 = 1: Master control for PC/AOP
The commissioning software (drive control panel) uses the master control, for example.
SINAMICS G120X converter
582 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0809[0...2] Copy Command Data Set CDS / Copy CDS
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8560
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 3 0
Description: Copies one Command Data Set (CDS) into another.
Index: [0] = Source Command Data Set
[1] = Target Command Data Set
[2] = Start copying procedure
Dependency: See also: r3996
NOTICE
When the command data sets are copied, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note
When copying a command data set (CDS), the values in p0700, p1000 and p1500 are not accepted. As a consequence,
the associated macros are not executed and inconsistencies are avoided.
Procedure:
1. In Index 0, enter which command data set should be copied.
2. In index 1, enter the command data set that is to be copied into.
3. Start copying: set index 2 from 0 to 1.
p0809[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed.
p0810 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 0 / CDS select., bit 0
G120X_DP, Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8560
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 722.4
Description: Sets the signal source to select the Command Data Set bit 0 (CDS bit 0).
Dependency: See also: r0050, p0811, r0836
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note
The Command Data Set selected using the binector inputs is displayed in r0836.
The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.
A Command Data Set can be copied using p0809.
p0810 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 0 / CDS select., bit 0
G120X_USS Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8560
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the Command Data Set bit 0 (CDS bit 0).
Dependency: See also: r0050, p0811, r0836
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 583
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The Command Data Set selected using the binector inputs is displayed in r0836.
The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.
A Command Data Set can be copied using p0809.
p0811 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 1 / CDS select., bit 1
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8560
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the Command Data Set bit 1 (CDS bit 1).
Dependency: See also: r0050, p0810, r0836
Note
The Command Data Set selected using the binector inputs is displayed in r0836.
The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.
A Command Data Set can be copied using p0809.
p0819[0...2] Copy Drive Data Set DDS / Copy DDS
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: C2(15) Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8565
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 3 0
Description: Copies one Drive Data Set (DDS) into another.
Index: [0] = Source Drive Data Set
[1] = Target Drive Data Set
[2] = Start copying procedure
Dependency: See also: r3996
NOTICE
When the drive data sets are copied, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note
Procedure:
1. In Index 0, enter which drive data set is to be copied.
2. In index 1, enter the drive data set data that is to be copied into.
3. Start copying: set index 2 from 0 to 1.
p0819[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed.
p0820[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 0 / DDS select., bit 0
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8565
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 0 (DDS, bit 0).
Dependency: See also: r0051, p0826, r0837
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
SINAMICS G120X converter
584 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0821[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 1 / DDS select., bit 1
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8565, 8570
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 1 (DDS, bit 1).
Dependency: See also: r0051, r0837
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p0826[0...n] Motor changeover motor number / Mot_chng mot No.
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 3 0
Description: Sets the freely assignable motor number for the drive data set changeover.
If the same motor is driven by different drive data sets, the same motor number must also be entered in these data sets.
If the motor is also switched with the drive data set, different motor numbers must be used. In this case, the data set
can only be switched when the pulse inhibit is set.
Note
If the motor numbers are identical, the same thermal motor model is used for calculation after data set changeover. If
different motor numbers are used, different models are also used for calculating (the inactive motor cools down in each
case).
For the same motor number, the correction values of the Rs, Lh or kT adaptation are applied for the data set
changeover (refer to r1782, r1787, r1797).
r0835.2...8 CO/BO: Data set changeover status word / DDS_ZSW
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8575
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status word for the drive data set changeover.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
02 Internal parameter calculation active Yes No -
04 Armature short circuit active Yes No -
05 Identification running Yes No -
07 Rotating measurement running Yes No -
08 Motor data identification running Yes No -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 585
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
For bit 02:
A data set changeover is delayed by the time required for the internal parameter calculation.
For bit 04:
A data set changeover is only carried out when the armature short circuit is not activated.
For bit 05:
A data set changeover is only carried out when pole position identification is not running.
For bit 07:
A data set changeover is only carried out when rotating measurement is not running.
For bit 08:
A data set changeover is only carried out when motor data identification is not running.
r0836.0...1 CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS selected / CDS selected
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8560
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the command data set (CDS) selected via the binector input.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 CDS selection bit 0 ON OFF -
01 CDS selection bit 1 ON OFF -
Dependency: See also: r0050, p0810, p0811
Note
Command data sets are selected via binector input p0810 and following.
The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.
r0837.0...1 CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS selected / DDS selected
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8565
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the drive data set (DDS) selected via the binector input.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DDS selection bit 0 ON OFF -
01 DDS selection bit 1 ON OFF -
Dependency: See also: r0051, p0820, p0821
Note
Drive data sets are selected via binector input p0820 and following.
The currently effective drive data set is displayed in r0051.
If there is only one data set, then a value of 0 is displayed in this parameter and not the selection via binector inputs.
SINAMICS G120X converter
586 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0840[0...n] BI: ON / OFF (OFF1) / ON / OFF (OFF1)
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501, 2512
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 2090.0
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "ON/OFF (OFF1)".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 0 (STW1.0).
Recommendation: When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate
signal change of the source.
Dependency: See also: p1055, p1056
CAUTION
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
NOTICE
For binector input p0840 = 0 signal, the motor can be moved, jogging using binector input p1055 or p1056.
The command "ON/OFF (OFF1)" can be issued using binector input p0840 or p1055/p1056.
For binector input p0840 = 0 signal, the switching on inhibited is acknowledged.
Only the signal source that originally switched on can also switch off again.
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note
For drives with closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20), the following applies:
- BI: p0840 = 0 signal: OFF1 (braking with the ramp-function generator, then pulse suppression and switching on
inhibited)
For drives with closed-loop torque control (p1300 = 22), the following applies:
- BI: p0840 = 0 signal: immediate pulse suppression
For drives with closed-loop torque control (activated using p1501), the following applies:
- BI: p0840 = 0 signal: No dedicated braking response, but pulse cancelation when standstill is detected (p1226, p1227)
For drives with closed-loop speed/torque control, the following applies:
- BI: p0840 = 0/1 signal: ON (pulses can be enabled)
p0840[0...n] BI: ON / OFF (OFF1) / ON / OFF (OFF1)
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501, 2512
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 29659.0
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "ON/OFF (OFF1)".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 0 (STW1.0).
Recommendation: When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate
signal change of the source.
Dependency: See also: p1055, p1056
CAUTION
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 587
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
NOTICE
For binector input p0840 = 0 signal, the motor can be moved, jogging using binector input p1055 or p1056.
The command "ON/OFF (OFF1)" can be issued using binector input p0840 or p1055/p1056.
For binector input p0840 = 0 signal, the switching on inhibited is acknowledged.
Only the signal source that originally switched on can also switch off again.
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p0844[0...n] BI: No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1 / OFF2 S_s 1
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501, 8720,
8820, 8920
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 2090.1
[1] 1
[2] 2090.1
[3] 2090.1
Description: Sets the first signal source for the command "No coast down/coast down (OFF2)".
The following signals are AND'ed:
- BI: p0844 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1"
- BI: p0845 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 2"
For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 1 (STW1.1).
BI: p0844 = 0 signal or BI: p0845 = 0 signal
- OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
BI: p0844 = 1 signal and BI: p0845 = 1 signal
- no OFF2 (enable is possible)
CAUTION
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p0844[0...n] BI: No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1 / OFF2 S_s 1
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501, 8720,
8820, 8920
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 29659.1
[1] 1
[2] 29659.1
[3] 29659.1
Description: Sets the first signal source for the command "No coast down/coast down (OFF2)".
The following signals are AND'ed:
- BI: p0844 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1"
- BI: p0845 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 2"
For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 1 (STW1.1).
BI: p0844 = 0 signal or BI: p0845 = 0 signal
- OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
BI: p0844 = 1 signal and BI: p0845 = 1 signal
- no OFF2 (enable is possible)
SINAMICS G120X converter
588 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
CAUTION
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p0845[0...n] BI: No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 2 / OFF2 S_s 2
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501, 8720,
8820, 8920
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the second signal source for the command "No coast down/coast down (OFF2)".
The following signals are AND'ed:
- BI: p0844 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1"
- BI: p0845 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 2"
For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 1 (STW1.1).
BI: p0844 = 0 signal or BI: p0845 = 0 signal
- OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
BI: p0844 = 1 signal and BI: p0845 = 1 signal
- no OFF2 (enable is possible)
CAUTION
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is effective.
p0845[0...n] BI: No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 2 / OFF2 S_s 2
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501, 8720,
8820, 8920
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 4022.3
Description: Sets the second signal source for the command "No coast down/coast down (OFF2)".
The following signals are AND'ed:
- BI: p0844 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1"
- BI: p0845 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 2"
For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 1 (STW1.1).
BI: p0844 = 0 signal or BI: p0845 = 0 signal
- OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
BI: p0844 = 1 signal and BI: p0845 = 1 signal
- no OFF2 (enable is possible)
CAUTION
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is effective.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 589
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0848[0...n] BI: No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) signal source 1 / OFF3 S_s 1
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 2090.2
[1] 1
[2] 2090.2
[3] 2090.2
Description: Sets the first signal source for the command "No quick stop/quick stop (OFF3)".
The following signals are AND'ed:
- BI: p0848 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 1"
- BI: p0849 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 2"
For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 2 (STW1.2).
BI: p0848 = 0 signal or BI: p0849 = 0 signal
- OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
BI: p0848 = 1 signal and BI: p0849 = 1 signal
- no OFF3 (enable is possible)
CAUTION
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note
For drives with closed-loop torque control (activated using p1501), the following applies:
BI: p0848 = 0 signal:
- no dedicated braking response, but pulse suppression when standstill is detected (p1226, p1227).
p0848[0...n] BI: No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) signal source 1 / OFF3 S_s 1
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the first signal source for the command "No quick stop/quick stop (OFF3)".
The following signals are AND'ed:
- BI: p0848 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 1"
- BI: p0849 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 2"
For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 2 (STW1.2).
BI: p0848 = 0 signal or BI: p0849 = 0 signal
- OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
BI: p0848 = 1 signal and BI: p0849 = 1 signal
- no OFF3 (enable is possible)
CAUTION
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
SINAMICS G120X converter
590 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0849[0...n] BI: No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) signal source 2 / OFF3 S_s 2
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the second signal source for the command "No quick stop/quick stop (OFF3)".
The following signals are AND'ed:
- BI: p0848 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 1"
- BI: p0849 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 2"
For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 2 (STW1.2).
BI: p0848 = 0 signal or BI: p0849 = 0 signal
- OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
BI: p0848 = 1 signal and BI: p0849 = 1 signal
- no OFF3 (enable is possible)
CAUTION
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is effective.
p0849[0...n] BI: No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) signal source 2 / OFF3 S_s 2
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 4022.2
Description: Sets the second signal source for the command "No quick stop/quick stop (OFF3)".
The following signals are AND'ed:
- BI: p0848 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 1"
- BI: p0849 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 2"
For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 2 (STW1.2).
BI: p0848 = 0 signal or BI: p0849 = 0 signal
- OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
BI: p0848 = 1 signal and BI: p0849 = 1 signal
- no OFF3 (enable is possible)
CAUTION
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is effective.
p0852[0...n] BI: Enable operation/inhibit operation / Enable operation
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 2090.3
[1] 1
[2] 2090.3
[3] 2090.3
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 591
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable operation/inhibit operation".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 3 (STW1.3).
BI: p0852 = 0 signal
Inhibit operation (suppress pulses).
BI: p0852 = 1 signal
Enable operation (pulses can be enabled).
CAUTION
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p0852[0...n] BI: Enable operation/inhibit operation / Enable operation
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable operation/inhibit operation".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 3 (STW1.3).
BI: p0852 = 0 signal
Inhibit operation (suppress pulses).
BI: p0852 = 1 signal
Enable operation (pulses can be enabled).
CAUTION
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p0854[0...n] BI: Control by PLC/no control by PLC / Master ctrl by PLC
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 2090.10
[1] 1
[2] 2090.10
[3] 2090.10
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "control by PLC/no control by PLC".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 10 (STW1.10).
BI: p0854 = 0 signal
No control by PLC
BI: p0854 = 1 signal
Master control by PLC.
CAUTION
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
SINAMICS G120X converter
592 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
This bit is used to initiate a response for the drives when the control fails (F07220). If there is no control available, then
binector input p0854 should be set to 1.
If a control is available, then STW1.10 must be set to 1 (PZD1) so that the received data is updated. This applies
regardless of the setting in p0854 and even in the case of free telegram configuration (p0922 = 999).
p0854[0...n] BI: Control by PLC/no control by PLC / Master ctrl by PLC
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "control by PLC/no control by PLC".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 10 (STW1.10).
BI: p0854 = 0 signal
No control by PLC
BI: p0854 = 1 signal
Master control by PLC.
CAUTION
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note
This bit is used to initiate a response for the drives when the control fails (F07220). If there is no control available, then
binector input p0854 should be set to 1.
If a control is available, then STW1.10 must be set to 1 (PZD1) so that the received data is updated. This applies
regardless of the setting in p0854 and even in the case of free telegram configuration (p0922 = 999).
p0857 Power unit monitoring time / PU t_monit
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8760, 8864,
8964
Min: Max: Factory setting:
100.0 [ms] 60000.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the monitoring time for the power unit.
The monitoring time is started after an 0/1 edge of the ON/OFF1 command. If the power unit does not return a READY
signal within the monitoring time, fault F07802 is output.
Dependency: See also: F07802, F07840, F30027
NOTICE
The maximum time to precharge the DC link is monitored in the power unit and cannot be changed. The maximum
precharging duration depends on the power unit.
The monitoring time for the precharging is started after the ON command (BI: p0840 = 0/1 signal). Fault F30027 is
output when the maximum precharging duration is exceeded.
Note
The factory setting for p0857 depends on the power unit.
The monitoring time for the ready signal of the power unit includes the time to precharge the DC link and, if relevant,
the de-bounce time of the contactors.
If an excessively low value is entered into p0857, then after enable, this results in the corresponding fault.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 593
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0860 BI: Line contactor feedback signal / Line contact feedb
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2634
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 863.1
Description: Sets the signal source for the feedback signal from the line contactor.
Recommendation: When the monitoring is activated (BI: p0860 not equal to r0863.1), then to control the line contactor, signal BO: r0863.1
of its own drive object should be used.
Dependency: See also: p0861, r0863
See also: F07300
NOTICE
The line contactor monitoring is deactivated if the control signal of the particular drive object is set as the signal source
for the feedback signal of the line contactor (BI: p0860 = r0863.1).
Note
The state of the line contactor is monitored depending on signal BO: r0863.1.
When the monitoring is activated (BI: p0860 not equal to r0863.1), fault F07300 is then also output if the contactor is
closed before it is controlled using r0863.1.
p0861 Line contactor monitoring time / LineContact t_mon
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2634
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 5000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the monitoring time of the line contactor.
This time starts each time that the line contactor switches (r0863.1). If a feedback signal is not received from the line
contactor within the time, a message is output.
Dependency: See also: p0860, r0863
See also: F07300
Note
The monitoring function is disabled for the factory setting of p0860.
r0863.0...1 CO/BO: Drive coupling status word/control word / CoupleZSW/STW
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the status word and control word of the drive coupling.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Closed-loop control operation Yes No -
01 Energize contactor Yes No 2634
Note
For bit 01:
Bit 1 is used to control an external line contactor.
SINAMICS G120X converter
594 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0867 Power unit main contactor holding time after OFF1 / PU t_MC after OFF1
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [ms] 500.0 [ms] 50.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the main contactor holding time after OFF1
Dependency: See also: p0869
Note
After withdrawing the OFF1 enable (source of p0840), the main contactor is opened after the main contactor holding
time has elapsed.
For p0869 = 1 (keep main contactor closed for STO), after withdrawing STO, the switching on inhibited must be
acknowledged via the source of p0840 = 0 (OFF1) – and before the main contactor holding time expires, should go back
to 1, otherwise the main contactor will open.
When operating a drive connected to SINUMERIK, which only closes the main contactor with the OFF1 command
(blocksize, chassis), p0867 should be set as a minimum to 50 ms.
p0868 Power unit thyristor rectifier wait time / PU thy_rect t
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 65000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the debounce time for the DC circuit breaker for power units in the "chassis" format.
Dependency: The parameter is only active for PM330 power units.
Note
The following applies if p0868 = 65000 ms:
The debounce time defined internally in the power unit's EEPROM is implemented.
p0869 Sequence control configuration / Seq_ctrl config
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the sequence control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Keep main contactor closed for STO Yes No -
Dependency: See also: p0867
Note
For bit 00:
After withdrawing the OFF1 enable (source of p0840), the main contactor is opened after the main contactor holding
time has elapsed.
For p0869.0 = 1, after withdrawing STO, the switching on inhibited must be acknowledged via the source of p0840 =
0 (OFF1) – and before the main contactor holding time expires (p0867), should go back to 1, otherwise the main
contactor will open.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 595
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p0870 BI: Close main contactor / Close main cont
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to close the main contactor.
Note
The main contactor is also closed when the converter is switched on after issuing the necessary enable signals. A
binector input p0870 = 1 signal prevents the main contactor from being opened when enable signals are withdrawn.
r0898.0...10 CO/BO: Control word sequence control / STW seq_ctrl
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and connector output for the control word of the sequence control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No -
01 OC / OFF2 Yes No -
02 OC / OFF3 Yes No -
03 Enable operation Yes No -
04 Enable ramp-function generator Yes No -
05 Continue ramp-function generator Yes No -
06 Enable speed setpoint Yes No -
08 Jog 1 Yes No 3001
09 Jog 2 Yes No 3001
10 Master control by PLC Yes No -
Note
OC: Operating condition
r0899.0...11 CO/BO: Status word sequence control / ZSW seq_ctrl
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2503
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the status word of the sequence control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Ready for switching on Yes No -
01 Ready Yes No -
02 Operation enabled Yes No -
03 Jog active Yes No -
04 No coasting active OFF2 inactive OFF2 active -
05 No Quick Stop active OFF3 inactive OFF3 active -
06 Switching on inhibited active Yes No -
07 Drive ready Yes No -
SINAMICS G120X converter
596 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
08 Controller enable Yes No -
09 Control request Yes No -
11 Pulses enabled Yes No -
Note
For bits 00, 01, 02, 04, 05, 06, 09:
For PROFIdrive, these signals are used for status word 1.
p0918 PROFIBUS address / PB address
G120X_DP Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2401, 2410
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 126 126
Description: Displays or sets the PROFIBUS address for PROFIBUS interface on the Control Unit.
The address can be set as follows:
1) Using the DIP switch on the Control Unit.
--> p0918 can then only be read and displays the selected address.
--> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
2) Using p0918
--> Only if all of the DIP switches are set to ON or OFF.
--> The address is saved in a non-volatile fashion using the function "copy from RAM to ROM".
--> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
Note
Permissible PROFIBUS addresses: 1 ... 126
Address 126 is used for commissioning.
Every PROFIBUS address change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
p0922 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection / PZD telegr_sel
G120X_DP, Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
G120X_PN Can be changed: C2(1), T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2401, 2420
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 999 1
Description: Sets the send and receive telegram.
Value: 1: Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2
20: Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6
350: SIEMENS telegram 350, PZD-4/4
352: SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6
353: SIEMENS telegram 353, PZD-2/2, PKW-4/4
354: SIEMENS telegram 354, PZD-6/6, PKW-4/4
999: Free telegram configuration with BICO
Dependency: See also: p2038
See also: F01505
Note
For p0922 = 100 ... 199, p2038 is automatically set to 1 and p2038 can no longer be changed. This means that for these
telegrams, the "SIMODRIVE 611 universal" interface mode is set and cannot be changed.
If a value is not equal to 999, a telegram is set and the automatically set interconnections in the telegram are inhibited.
The inhibited interconnections can only be changed again after setting value 999.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 597
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0944 CO: Counter for fault buffer changes / Fault buff change
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and connector output for the counter for changes of the fault buffer.
This counter is incremented every time the fault buffer changes.
Recommendation: Used to check whether the fault buffer has been read out consistently.
Dependency: See also: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109
r0945[0...63] Fault code / Fault code
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8050, 8060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the numbers of faults that have occurred.
Dependency: See also: r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3120, r3122
NOTICE
The properties of the fault buffer should be taken from the corresponding product documentation.
Note
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
Fault buffer structure (general principle):
r0945[0], r0949[0], r0948[0], r2109[0] --> actual fault case, fault 1
...
r0945[7], r0949[7], r0948[7], r2109[7] --> actual fault case, fault 8
r0945[8], r0949[8], r0948[8], r2109[8] --> 1st acknowledged fault case, fault 1
...
r0945[15], r0949[15], r0948[15], r2109[15] --> 1st acknowledged fault case, fault 8
...
r0945[56], r0949[56], r0948[56], r2109[56] --> 7th acknowledged fault case, fault 1
...
r0945[63], r0949[63], r0948[63], r2109[63] --> 7th acknowledged fault case, fault 8
r0946[0...65534] Fault code list / Fault code list
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Lists the fault codes stored in the drive unit.
The indices can only be accessed with a valid fault code.
Dependency: The parameter assigned to the fault code is entered in r0951 under the same index.
SINAMICS G120X converter
598 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0947[0...63] Fault number / Fault number
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8050, 8060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: This parameter is identical to r0945.
r0948[0...63] Fault time received in milliseconds / t_fault recv ms
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8050, 8060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the fault occurred.
Dependency: See also: r0945, r0947, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, p8400
NOTICE
The time comprises r2130 (days) and r0948 (milliseconds).
Note
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.
When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the TimeDifference data type applies.
r0949[0...63] Fault value / Fault value
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8050, 8060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays additional information about the fault that occurred (as integer number).
Dependency: See also: r0945, r0947, r0948, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3120, r3122
Note
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.
p0952 Fault cases counter / Fault cases qty
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6700, 8060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 65535 0
Description: Number of fault situations that have occurred since the last reset.
Dependency: The fault buffer is deleted (cleared) by setting p0952 to 0.
See also: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 599
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0963 PROFIBUS baud rate / PB baud rate
G120X_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 255 -
Description: Displays the corresponding value for the PROFIBUS baud rate.
Value: 0: 9.6 kbit/s
1: 19.2 kbit/s
2: 93.75 kbit/s
3: 187.5 kbit/s
4: 500 kbit/s
6: 1.5 Mbit/s
7: 3 Mbit/s
8: 6 Mbit/s
9: 12 Mbit/s
10: 31.25 kbit/s
11: 45.45 kbit/s
255: Unknown
r0964[0...6] Device identification / Device ident
G120X_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the device identification.
Index: [0] = Company (Siemens = 42)
[1] = Device type
[2] = Firmware version
[3] = Firmware date (year)
[4] = Firmware date (day/month)
[5] = Number of drive objects
[6] = Firmware patch/hot fix
Note
Example:
r0964[0] = 42 --> SIEMENS
r0964[1] = device type, see below
r0964[2] = 403 --> first part of the firmware version V04.03 (for second part, refer to index 6)
r0964[3] = 2010 --> year 2010
r0964[4] = 1705 --> 17th of May
r0964[5] = 2 --> 2 drive objects
r0964[6] = 200 --> second part, firmware version (complete version: V04.03.02.00)
Device type:
r0964[1] = 5720 --> SINAMICS G120X DP
SINAMICS G120X converter
600 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0964[0...6] Device identification / Device ident
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the device identification.
Index: [0] = Company (Siemens = 42)
[1] = Device type
[2] = Firmware version
[3] = Firmware date (year)
[4] = Firmware date (day/month)
[5] = Number of drive objects
[6] = Firmware patch/hot fix
Note
Example:
r0964[0] = 42 --> SIEMENS
r0964[1] = device type, see below
r0964[2] = 403 --> first part of the firmware version V04.03 (for second part, refer to index 6)
r0964[3] = 2010 --> year 2010
r0964[4] = 1705 --> 17th of May
r0964[5] = 2 --> 2 drive objects
r0964[6] = 200 --> second part, firmware version (complete version: V04.03.02.00)
Device type:
r0964[1] = 5721 --> SINAMICS G120X PN
r0964[0...6] Device identification / Device ident
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the device identification.
Index: [0] = Company (Siemens = 42)
[1] = Device type
[2] = Firmware version
[3] = Firmware date (year)
[4] = Firmware date (day/month)
[5] = Number of drive objects
[6] = Firmware patch/hot fix
Note
Example:
r0964[0] = 42 --> SIEMENS
r0964[1] = device type, see below
r0964[2] = 403 --> first part of the firmware version V04.03 (for second part, refer to index 6)
r0964[3] = 2010 --> year 2010
r0964[4] = 1705 --> 17th of May
r0964[5] = 2 --> 2 drive objects
r0964[6] = 200 --> second part, firmware version (complete version: V04.03.02.00)
Device type:
r0964[1] = 5723 --> SINAMICS G120X USS
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 601
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r0965 PROFIdrive profile number / PD profile number
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
G120X_PN Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the PROFIdrive profile number and profile version.
Constant value = 0329 hex.
Byte 1: Profile number = 03 hex = PROFIdrive profile
Byte 2: Profile version = 29 hex = Version 4.1
Note
When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the Octet String 2 data type applies.
p0969 System runtime relative / t_System relative
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8050, 8060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 4294967295 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Displays the system runtime in ms since the last POWER ON.
Note
The value in p0969 can only be reset to 0.
The value overflows after approx. 49 days.
When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the TimeDifference data type applies.
p0970 Reset drive parameters / Drive par reset
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: C2(1, 30) Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 300 0
Description: The parameter is used to initiate the reset of the drive parameters.
Parameters p0100, p0205 are not reset.
The following motor parameters are defined in accordance with the power unit: p0300 ... p0311.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Start a parameter reset
3: Start download of volatile parameters from RAM
10: Start loading the parameters saved with p0971=10
11: Start loading the parameters saved with p0971=11
12: Start loading the parameters saved with p0971=12
30: Start loading the delivery state saved with p0971=30
100: Start a BICO interconnection reset
300: Only Siemens internal
NOTICE
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
SINAMICS G120X converter
602 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset).
At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0.
Parameter reset is completed with p0970 = 0 and r3996[0] = 0.
The following generally applies:
One index of parameters p2100, p2101, p2118, p2119, p2126, p2127 is not reset, if a parameterized message is
precisely active in this index.
p0971 Save parameters / Save par
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 30 0
Description: Setting to save parameters in the non-volatile memory.
When saving, only the adjustable parameters intended to be saved are taken into account.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Save drive object
10: Save in non-volatile memory as setting 10
11: Save in non-volatile memory as setting 11
12: Save in non-volatile memory as setting 12
30: State when delivered, save in non-volatile memory as setting 30
Dependency: See also: p0970, p1960, r3996
CAUTION
If a memory card (optional) is inserted – and the USB interface is not used, the following applies:
The parameters are also saved on the card and therefore overwrite any existing data!
NOTICE
The Control Unit power supply may only be switched off after data has been saved (i.e. after data save has been
started, wait until the parameter again has the value 0).
Writing to parameters is inhibited while saving.
The progress while saving is displayed in r3996.
For p0971 = 30:
The original state when delivered is overwritten when executing this memory function.
Note
Parameters saved with p0971 = 10, 11, 12 can be loaded again with p0970 = 10, 11 or 12.
Identification and maintenance data (I&M data, p8806 and following) are only saved for p0971 = 1.
p0972 Drive unit reset / Drv_unit reset
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 3 0
Description: Sets the required procedure to execute a hardware reset for the drive unit.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Hardware-Reset immediate
2: Hardware reset preparation
3: Hardware reset after cyclic communication has failed
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 603
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
DANGER
It must be absolutely ensured that the system is in a safe condition.
The memory card/device memory of the Control Unit must not be accessed.
Note
If value = 1:
Reset is immediately executed and communications interrupted.
After communications have been established, check the reset operation (refer below).
If value = 2:
Help to check the reset operation.
Firstly, set p0972 = 2 and then read back. Secondly, set p0972 = 1 (it is possible that this request is possibly no longer
acknowledged). The communication is then interrupted.
After communications have been established, check the reset operation (refer below).
If value = 3:
The reset is executed after interrupting cyclic communication. This setting is used to implement a synchronized reset
by a control for several drive units.
If cyclic communication is not active, then the reset is immediately executed.
After communications have been established, check the reset operation (refer below).
To check the reset operation:
After the drive unit has been restarted and communications have been established, read p0972 and check the following:
p0972 = 0? --> the reset was successfully executed.
p0972 = 0? --> the reset was not executed.
r0980[0...299] List of existing parameters 1 / List avail par 1
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the parameters that exist for this drive.
Dependency: See also: r0981, r0989
Note
Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a long
list, index 299 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be read
from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).
r0981[0...299] List of existing parameters 2 / List avail par 2
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the parameters that exist for this drive.
Dependency: See also: r0980, r0989
SINAMICS G120X converter
604 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a long
list, index 299 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be read
from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).
r0989[0...299] List of existing parameters 10 / List avail par 10
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the parameters that exist for this drive.
Dependency: See also: r0980, r0981
Note
Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be read
from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).
r0990[0...99] List of modified parameters 1 / List chang par 1
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive.
Dependency: See also: r0991, r0999
Note
Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a long
list, index 99 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be read
from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).
r0991[0...99] List of modified parameters 2 / List chang par 2
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive.
Dependency: See also: r0990, r0999
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 605
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a long
list, index 99 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be read
from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).
r0999[0...99] List of modified parameters 10 / List chang par 10
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive.
Dependency: See also: r0990, r0991
Note
Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be read
from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).
p1000[0...n] Speed setpoint selection / n_set sel
G120X_DP, Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
G120X_PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 200 6
Description: Sets the source for the speed setpoint.
For single-digit values, the following applies:
The value specifies the main setpoint.
For double-digit values, the following applies:
The left-hand digit specifies the supplementary setpoint, the right-hand digit the main setpoint.
Example:
Value = 26
--> The analog setpoint (2) supplies the supplementary setpoint.
--> The fieldbus (6) supplies the main setpoint.
Value: 0: No main setpoint
1: Motorized potentiometer
2: Analog setpoint
3: Fixed speed setpoint
6: Fieldbus
7: Analog setpoint 2
10: Motor potentiometer + no main setpoint
11: Motor potentiometer + motor potentiometer
12: Motor potentiometer + analog setpoint
13: Motor potentiometer + fixed speed setpoint
16: Motor potentiometer + fieldbus
17: Motor potentiometer + analog setpoint 2
SINAMICS G120X converter
606 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
20: Analog setpoint + no main setpoint
21: Analog setpoint + motor potentiometer
22: Analog setpoint + analog setpoint
23: Analog setpoint + fixed speed setpoint
26: Analog setpoint + fieldbus
27: Analog setpoint + analog setpoint 2
30: Fixed speed setpoint + no main setpoint
31: Fixed speed setpoint + motor potentiometer
32: Fixed speed setpoint + analog setpoint
33: Fixed speed setpoint + fixed speed setpoint
36: Fixed speed setpoint + fieldbus
37: Fixed speed setpoint + analog setpoint 2
60: Fieldbus + no main setpoint
61: Fieldbus + motor potentiometer
62: Fieldbus + analog setpoint
63: Fieldbus + fixed speed setpoint
66: Fieldbus+fieldbus
67: Fieldbus + analog setpoint 2
70: Analog setpoint 2 + no main setpoint
71: Analog setpoint 2 + motor potentiometer
72: Analog setpoint 2 + analog setpoint
73: Analog setpoint 2 + fixed speed setpoint
76: Analog setpoint 2 + fieldbus
77: Analog setpoint 2 + analog setpoint 2
200: Analog output connection
Dependency: When changing this parameter, the following settings are influenced:
See also: p1070, p1071, p1075, p1076
CAUTION
If p1000 is selected as the main setpoint of the fieldbus, the following BICO interconnection is set automatically:
p2051[1] = r0063
NOTICE
The parameter is possibly protected as a result of p0922.
For PROFIBUS/PROFINET Control Units, the following applies: The parameter can be freely set by setting p0922 =
999.
When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active.
p1000[0...n] Speed setpoint selection / n_set sel
G120X_USS Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 200 2
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 607
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the source for the speed setpoint.
For single-digit values, the following applies:
The value specifies the main setpoint.
For double-digit values, the following applies:
The left-hand digit specifies the supplementary setpoint, the right-hand digit the main setpoint.
Example:
Value = 26
--> The analog setpoint (2) supplies the supplementary setpoint.
--> The fieldbus (6) supplies the main setpoint.
Value: 0: No main setpoint
1: Motorized potentiometer
2: Analog setpoint
3: Fixed speed setpoint
6: Fieldbus
7: Analog setpoint 2
10: Motor potentiometer + no main setpoint
11: Motor potentiometer + motor potentiometer
12: Motor potentiometer + analog setpoint
13: Motor potentiometer + fixed speed setpoint
16: Motor potentiometer + fieldbus
17: Motor potentiometer + analog setpoint 2
20: Analog setpoint + no main setpoint
21: Analog setpoint + motor potentiometer
22: Analog setpoint + analog setpoint
23: Analog setpoint + fixed speed setpoint
26: Analog setpoint + fieldbus
27: Analog setpoint + analog setpoint 2
30: Fixed speed setpoint + no main setpoint
31: Fixed speed setpoint + motor potentiometer
32: Fixed speed setpoint + analog setpoint
33: Fixed speed setpoint + fixed speed setpoint
36: Fixed speed setpoint + fieldbus
37: Fixed speed setpoint + analog setpoint 2
60: Fieldbus + no main setpoint
61: Fieldbus + motor potentiometer
62: Fieldbus + analog setpoint
63: Fieldbus + fixed speed setpoint
66: Fieldbus+fieldbus
67: Fieldbus + analog setpoint 2
70: Analog setpoint 2 + no main setpoint
71: Analog setpoint 2 + motor potentiometer
72: Analog setpoint 2 + analog setpoint
73: Analog setpoint 2 + fixed speed setpoint
76: Analog setpoint 2 + fieldbus
77: Analog setpoint 2 + analog setpoint 2
200: Analog output connection
Dependency: When changing this parameter, the following settings are influenced:
See also: p1070, p1071, p1075, p1076
SINAMICS G120X converter
608 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
CAUTION
If p1000 is selected as the main setpoint of the fieldbus, the following BICO interconnection is set automatically:
p2051[1] = r0063
p1001[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 1 / n_set_fixed 1
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 1.
Dependency: See also: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1002[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 2 / n_set_fixed 2
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 2.
Dependency: See also: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1003[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 3 / n_set_fixed 3
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 3.
Dependency: See also: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1004[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 4 / n_set_fixed 4
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 4.
Dependency: See also: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 609
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1005[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 5 / n_set_fixed 5
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 5.
Dependency: See also: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1006[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 6 / n_set_fixed 6
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 6.
Dependency: See also: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1007[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 7 / n_set_fixed 7
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 7.
Dependency: See also: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1008[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 8 / n_set_fixed 8
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 8.
Dependency: See also: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
SINAMICS G120X converter
610 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1009[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 9 / n_set_fixed 9
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 9.
Dependency: See also: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1010[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 10 / n_set_fixed 10
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 10.
Dependency: See also: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1011[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 11 / n_set_fixed 11
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 11.
Dependency: See also: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1012[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 12 / n_set_fixed 12
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 12.
Dependency: See also: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 611
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1013[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 13 / n_set_fixed 13
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 13.
Dependency: See also: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1014[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 14 / n_set_fixed 14
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 14.
Dependency: See also: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1015[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 15 / n_set_fixed 15
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 15.
Dependency: See also: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1016 Fixed speed setpoint select mode / n_set_fix select
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3010, 3011
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 2 1
Description: Sets the mode to select the fixed speed setpoint.
Value: 1: Direct
2: Binary
Note
For p1016 = 1:
In this mode, the setpoint is entered via the fixed speed setpoints p1001 ... p1004.
Up to 16 different setpoints are obtained by adding the individual fixed speed setpoints.
For p1016 = 2:
In this mode, the setpoint is entered via the fixed speed setpoints p1001 ... p1015.
SINAMICS G120X converter
612 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1020[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 0 / n_set_fixed Bit 0
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2505, 3010,
3011
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint.
Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
See also: p1021, p1022, p1023, r1197
Note
If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).
p1021[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 1 / n_set_fixed Bit 1
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2505, 3010,
3011
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint.
Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
See also: p1020, p1022, p1023, r1197
Note
If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).
p1022[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 2 / n_set_fixed Bit 2
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2505, 3010,
3011
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint.
Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
See also: p1020, p1021, p1023, r1197
Note
If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 613
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1023[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 3 / n_set_fixed Bit 3
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2505, 3010,
3011
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint.
Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
See also: p1020, p1021, p1022, r1197
Note
If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).
r1024 CO: Fixed speed setpoint effective / Speed fixed setp
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3001, 3010,
3011
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display and connector output for the selected and active fixed speed setpoint.
This setpoint is the output value for the fixed speed setpoints and must be appropriately interconnected (e.g. with the
main setpoint).
Recommendation: Interconnect the signal with the main setpoint (CI: p1070 = r1024).
Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
See also: p1070, r1197
Note
If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).
r1025.0 BO: Fixed speed setpoint status / n_setp_fix status
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and binector output for the status when selecting the fixed speed setpoints.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fixed speed setpoint selected Yes No 3011
Dependency: See also: p1016
Note
For bit 00:
When the fixed speed setpoints are directly selected (p1016 = 1), this bit is set if at least 1 fixed speed setpoint is
selected.
SINAMICS G120X converter
614 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1030[0...n] Motorized potentiometer configuration / Mop configuration
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3020
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0110 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the motorized potentiometer.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Data save active Yes No -
01 Automatic mode ramp-function generator active Yes No -
02 Initial rounding-off active Yes No -
03 Save in NVRAM active Yes No -
04 Ramp-function generator always active Yes No -
Note
For bit 00:
0: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p1040.
1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved after OFF and after ON set to the saved value. In order to save
in a non-volatile fashion, bit 03 should be set to 1.
For bit 01:
0: Without ramp-function generator in the automatic mode (ramp-up/ramp-down time = 0).
1: With ramp-function generator in the automatic mode.
For manual operation (0 signal via BI: p1041), the ramp-function generator is always active.
For bit 02:
0: Without initial rounding-off
1: With initial rounding-off. The selected ramp-up/down time is correspondingly exceeded. The initial rounding-off is a
sensitive way of specifying small changes (progressive reaction when keys are pressed).
The jerk for the initial rounding-off is independent of the ramp-up time and only depends on the selected maximum
speed (p1082). It is calculated as follows:
r = 0.01 % * p1082 [1/s] / 0.13^2 [s^2]
The jerk acts up until the maximum acceleration is reached (a_max = p1082 [1/s] / p1047 [s]), and then the drive
continues to run linearly with a constant rate of acceleration. The higher the maximum acceleration (the lower that
p1047 is), the longer the ramp-up time increases with respect to the set ramp-up time.
For bit 03:
0: Non-volatile data save deactivated.
1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a non-volatile fashion (for bit 00 = 1).
For bit 04:
When the bit is set, the ramp-function generator is computed independent of the pulse enable. The actual output value
of the motorized potentiometer is always in r1050.
p1035[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint raise / Mop raise
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2505, 3020
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 2090.13
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source to continually increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint change (CO: r1050) depends on the set ramp-up time (p1047) and the duration of the signal that is
present (BI: p1035).
Dependency: See also: p1036
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 615
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p1035[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint raise / Mop raise
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2505, 3020
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to continually increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint change (CO: r1050) depends on the set ramp-up time (p1047) and the duration of the signal that is
present (BI: p1035).
Dependency: See also: p1036
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p1036[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Mop lower
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2505, 3020
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 2090.14
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source to continuously lower the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint change (CO: r1050) depends on the set ramp-down time (p1048) and the duration of the signal that is
present (BI: p1036).
Dependency: See also: p1035
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p1036[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Mop lower
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2505, 3020
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to continuously lower the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint change (CO: r1050) depends on the set ramp-down time (p1048) and the duration of the signal that is
present (BI: p1036).
Dependency: See also: p1035
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
SINAMICS G120X converter
616 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1037[0...n] Motorized potentiometer maximum speed / MotP n_max
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3020
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the maximum speed/velocity for the motorized potentiometer.
Note
This parameter is automatically pre-assigned in the commissioning phase.
The setpoint output from the motorized potentiometer is limited to this value (see function diagram 3020).
p1038[0...n] Motorized potentiometer minimum speed / MotP n_min
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3020
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the minimum speed/velocity for the motorized potentiometer.
Note
This parameter is automatically pre-assigned in the commissioning phase.
The setpoint output from the motorized potentiometer is limited to this value (see function diagram 3020).
p1039[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer inversion / MotP inv
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3020
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to invert the minimum speed/velocity or the maximum speed/velocity for the motorized
potentiometer.
Dependency: See also: p1037, p1038
Note
The inversion is only active during "motorized potentiometer raise" or "motorized potentiometer lower".
p1040[0...n] Motorized potentiometer starting value / Mop start value
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3020
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the starting value for the motorized potentiometer. This starting value becomes effective after the drive has been
switched on.
Dependency: Only effective if p1030.0 = 0.
See also: p1030
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 617
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1041[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer manual/automatic / Mop manual/auto
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3020
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to change over from manual to automatic when using a motorized potentiometer.
In the manual mode, the setpoint is changed using two signals - raise and lower. In the automatic mode, the setpoint
must be interconnected via a connector input.
Dependency: See also: p1030, p1035, p1036, p1042
Note
The effectiveness of the internal ramp-function generator can be set in automatic mode.
p1042[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer automatic setpoint / Mop auto setpoint
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3020
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint of the motorized potentiometer in the automatic mode.
Dependency: See also: p1041
p1043[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer accept setting value / MotP acc set val
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3020
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to accept the setting value for the motorized potentiometer.
Dependency: See also: p1044
Note
The setting value (CI: p1044) becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command (BI: p1043).
p1044[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer setting value / Mop set val
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3020
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setting value for the motorized potentiometer.
Dependency: See also: p1043
Note
The setting value (CI: p1044) becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command (BI: p1043).
SINAMICS G120X converter
618 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r1045 CO: Mot. potentiometer speed setp. in front of ramp-fct. gen. / Mop n_set bef RFG
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3020
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Sets the effective setpoint in front of the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator.
p1047[0...n] Motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Mop ramp-up time
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3020
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 1000.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-up time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint is changed from zero up to the speed/velocity limit (p1082) within this time (if no initial rounding-off has
been activated).
Dependency: See also: p1030, p1048, p1082
Note
When the initial rounding-off is activated (p1030.2) the ramp-up time is correspondingly extended.
p1048[0...n] Motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Mop ramp-down time
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3020
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 1000.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint is changed from the speed/velocity limit (p1082) to zero within this time (if no initial rounding-off has been
activated).
Dependency: See also: p1030, p1047, p1082
Note
The deceleration time is extended corresponding to the activated initial rounding-off (p1030.2).
r1050 CO: Motorized potentiometer setpoint after ramp-function generator / Mot poti setpoint
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3001, 3020
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Sets the effective setpoint after the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator.
This setpoint is the output value of the motorized potentiometer and must be appropriately interconnected onwards
(e.g. with the main setpoint).
Recommendation: Interconnect the signal with main setpoint (p1070).
Dependency: See also: p1070
Note
For "With ramp-function generator", after an OFF1, OFF2, OFF3 or for a 0 signal via BI: p0852 (inhibit operation,
suppress pulses) the ramp-function generator output (r1050) is set to the starting value (configuration via p1030.0).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 619
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1051[0...n] CI: Speed limit RFG positive direction of rotation / n_limit RFG pos
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3050
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1083[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the positive direction on the ramp-function generator input.
Note
The OFF3 ramp-down time (p1135) is effective when the limit is reduced.
p1052[0...n] CI: Speed limit RFG negative direction of rotation / n_limit RFG neg
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3050
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1086[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the negative direction on the ramp-function generator input.
Note
The OFF3 ramp-down time (p1135) is effective when the limit is reduced.
p1055[0...n] BI: Jog bit 0 / Jog bit 0
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501, 3030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 0
[1] 722.0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source for jog 1.
Recommendation: When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate
signal change of the source.
Dependency: See also: p0840, p1058
NOTICE
The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056.
The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056.
Only the signal source that was used to switch on can also be used to switch off again.
p1055[0...n] BI: Jog bit 0 / Jog bit 0
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501, 3030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for jog 1.
Recommendation: When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate
signal change of the source.
SINAMICS G120X converter
620 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Dependency: See also: p0840, p1058
NOTICE
The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056.
The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056.
Only the signal source that was used to switch on can also be used to switch off again.
p1056[0...n] BI: Jog bit 1 / Jog bit 1
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501, 3030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 0
[1] 722.1
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source for jog 2.
Recommendation: When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate
signal change of the source.
Dependency: See also: p0840, p1059
NOTICE
The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056.
The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056.
Only the signal source that was used to switch on can also be used to switch off again.
p1056[0...n] BI: Jog bit 1 / Jog bit 1
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501, 3030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for jog 2.
Recommendation: When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate
signal change of the source.
Dependency: See also: p0840, p1059
NOTICE
The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056.
The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056.
Only the signal source that was used to switch on can also be used to switch off again.
p1058[0...n] Jog 1 speed setpoint / Jog 1 n_set
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3001, 3030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 150.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed for jog 1.
Jogging (JOG) is level-triggered, and allows the motor to be incrementally traversed.
Dependency: See also: p1055, p1056
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 621
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1059[0...n] Jog 2 speed setpoint / Jog 2 n_set
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3001, 3030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] -150.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed for jog 2.
Jogging (JOG) is level-triggered, and allows the motor to be incrementally traversed.
Dependency: See also: p1055, p1056
p1063[0...n] Setpoint channel speed limit / Setp_chan n_lim
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3040
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed limit effective in the setpoint channel.
Dependency: See also: p1082, p1083, p1085, p1086, p1088
p1070[0...n] CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
G120X_PN FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3001, 3030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 2050[1]
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the main setpoint.
Examples:
r1024: Fixed speed setpoint effective
r1050: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator
Dependency: See also: p1071, r1073, r1078
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p1070[0...n] CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3001, 3030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 755[0]
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
622 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the signal source for the main setpoint.
Examples:
r1024: Fixed speed setpoint effective
r1050: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator
Dependency: See also: p1071, r1073, r1078
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p1071[0...n] CI: Main setpoint scaling / Main setp scal
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3001, 3030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the main setpoint.
r1073 CO: Main setpoint effective / Main setpoint eff
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the effective main setpoint.
The value shown is the main setpoint after scaling.
p1075[0...n] CI: Supplementary setp / Suppl setp
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3001, 3030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the supplementary setpoint.
Dependency: See also: p1076, r1077, r1078
p1076[0...n] CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling / Suppl setp scal
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3001, 3030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the supplementary setpoint.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 623
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r1077 CO: Supplementary setpoint effective / Suppl setpoint eff
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the effective supplementary setpoint. The value shown is the additional setpoint after scaling.
r1078 CO: Total setpoint effective / Total setpoint eff
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the total effective setpoint.
The value indicates the sum of the effective main setpoint and supplementary setpoint.
Note
If the fixed speed setpoint is the source for the speed setpoint, then when the extended service mode is activated
(r3889.0 = 1) fixed speed setpoint 15 is displayed.
p1079 Interpolator clock cycle for speed setpoints / Interp_cyc n_set
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [ms] 127.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the time with which new speed setpoints are interpolated.
With interpolation, the higher-level control adapts the speed setpoint steps to the time grid of the setpoint channel.
Recommendation: For non-synchronous operation, a setting to the maximum time difference between two setpoints is recommended.
For sensorless vector control, interpolation should always be activated if the ramp-up and ramp-down times of the
ramp-function generator are very short. The drive must be able to follow the external speed setpoint (the drive does
not ramp up at the torque limit).
Note
For acceleration precontrol of the speed controller, interpolation prevents torque peaks from occurring if the ramp-up
or ramp-down times in the setpoint channel are zero.
When exiting commissioning, the parameter is preset using the automatic calculation if, as setpoint source for the main
or supplementary setpoint, a PZD receive word is already set and the ramp-up time is zero.
Interpolation is limited to 127 cycles of the setpoint channel.
p1079 = 0 ms: interpolation is deactivated.
p1079 = 0.01 ms: the interpolation is automatically determined the first time that the speed setpoint is changed. After
this, no other changes are made if the send times of the external control increase. Writing to p1079 again initiates the
automatic adaptation of the interpolation time.
p1079 > 0.01 ms: interpolation is performed corresponding to the ratio to the computation clock cycle.
p1080[0...n] Minimum speed / n_min
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C2(1), T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3050, 8022
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [rpm] 19500.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
SINAMICS G120X converter
624 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the lowest possible motor speed.
This value is not undershot in operation.
Dependency: See also: p1106
WARNING
The minimum speed is preassigned to 20% of the rated motor speed.
After all of the enable signal have been switched on, with the appropriate direction specified, the motor accelerates to
this minimum speed.
NOTICE
The effective minimum speed is formed from p1080 and p1106.
Note
The parameter value applies for both motor directions.
In exceptional cases, the motor can operate below this value (e.g. when reversing).
p1081 Maximum speed scaling / n_max scal
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3050, 3095
Min: Max: Factory setting:
100.00 [%] 105.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the maximum speed (p1082).
For a higher-level speed control, this scaling allows the maximum speed to be briefly exceeded.
Dependency: See also: p1082
NOTICE
Continuous operation above a scaling of 100 % is not permitted.
p1082[0...n] Maximum speed / n_max
Access level: 1 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C2(1), T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3020, 3050,
3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 1500.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the highest possible speed.
Example:
Induction motor p0310 = 50 / 60 Hz without output filter and Blocksize power unit
p1082 <= 60 x 240 Hz / r0313 (vector control)
p1082 <= 60 x 550 Hz / r0313 (U/f control)
Dependency: For vector control, the maximum speed is restricted to 60.0 / (8.333 x 500 µs x r0313). This can be identified by a
reduction in r1084. p1082 is not changed in this process due to the fact that the operating mode p1300 can be changed
over.
If a sine-wave filter (p0230 = 3) is parameterized as output filter, then the maximum speed is limited corresponding to
the maximum permissible filter output frequency (refer to the filter data sheet). When using sine-wave filters (p0230
= 3, 4), the maximum speed r1084 is limited to 70% of the resonant frequency of the filter capacitance and the motor
leakage inductance.
For reactors and dU/dt filters, it is limited to 120 Hz / r0313.
See also: p0230, r0313, p0322
NOTICE
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 625
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The parameter applies for both motor directions.
The parameter has a limiting effect and is the reference quantity for all ramp-up and ramp-down times (e.g. down
ramps, ramp-function generator, motor potentiometer).
The parameter is part of the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1); this means that it is appropriately pre-assigned when
changing p0310, p0311, p0322.
The following limits are always effective for p1082:
p1082 <= 60 x minimum (15 x p0310, 550 Hz) / r0313
p1082 <= 60 x maximum power unit pulse frequency / (k x r0313), with k = 12 (vector control), k = 6.5 (U/f control)
During automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0), the parameter value is assigned the maximum motor speed
(p0322). For p0322 = 0 the rated motor speed (p0311) is used as default (pre-assignment) value. For induction motors,
the synchronous no-load speed is used as the default value (p0310 x 60 / r0313).
For synchronous motors, the following additionally applies:
During automatic calculation (p0340, p3900), p1082 is limited to speeds where the EMF does not exceed the DC link
voltage.
p1082 is also available in the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1); this means that when exiting via p3900 > 0, the value
is not changed.
p1082[0...n] Maximum speed / n_max
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 1 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: C2(1), T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3020, 3050,
3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 1500.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the highest possible speed setpoint.
Dependency: The maximum speed is limited to: p1082 <= 60 x 150 Hz / r0313
See also: p0230, p0310, r0313, p0322
NOTICE
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note
The parameter applies for both motor directions.
The parameter has a limiting effect and is the reference quantity for all ramp-up and ramp-down times (e.g. down
ramps, ramp-function generator, motor potentiometer).
The parameter is part of the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1); this means that it is appropriately pre-assigned when
changing p0310, p0311 and p0322 (p0310 x 60 / r0313, for p0322 = 0).
p1083[0...n] CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3050
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the maximum speed for the positive direction.
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
SINAMICS G120X converter
626 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r1084 CO: Speed limit positive effective / n_limit pos eff
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3050, 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display and connector output for the active positive speed limit.
Dependency: See also: p1082, p1083, p1085
Note
Vector control: r1084 <= 60 x 240 Hz / r0313
p1085[0...n] CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3050
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1083[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the positive direction.
p1086[0...n] CO: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3050
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm] -210000.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed limit for the negative direction.
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
r1087 CO: Speed limit negative effective / n_limit neg eff
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3050, 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display and connector output for the active negative speed limit.
Dependency: See also: p1082, p1086, p1088
Note
Vector control: r1087 >= -60 x 240 Hz / r0313
p1088[0...n] CI: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3050
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1086[0]
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 627
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed/velocity limit of the negative direction.
p1091[0...n] Skip speed 1 / n_skip 1
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3050
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets skip speed 1.
Dependency: See also: p1092, p1093, p1094, p1101
NOTICE
Skip bandwidths can also become ineffective as a result of the downstream limits in the setpoint channel.
Note
The skip (suppression) speeds can be used to prevent the effects of mechanical resonance.
p1092[0...n] Skip speed 2 / n_skip 2
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3050
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets skip speed 2.
Dependency: See also: p1091, p1093, p1094, p1101
NOTICE
Skip bandwidths can also become ineffective as a result of the downstream limits in the setpoint channel.
p1093[0...n] Skip speed 3 / n_skip 3
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3050
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets skip speed 3.
Dependency: See also: p1091, p1092, p1094, p1101
NOTICE
Skip bandwidths can also become ineffective as a result of the downstream limits in the setpoint channel.
p1094[0...n] Skip speed 4 / n_skip 4
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3050
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets skip speed 4.
Dependency: See also: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1101
NOTICE
Skip bandwidths can also become ineffective as a result of the downstream limits in the setpoint channel.
SINAMICS G120X converter
628 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1098[0...n] CI: Skip speed scaling / n_skip scal
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3050
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the skip speeds.
Dependency: See also: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1094
r1099.0 CO/BO: Skip band status word / Skip band ZSW
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the skip bands.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 r1170 within the skip band Yes No 3050
Dependency: See also: r1170
Note
For bit 00:
With the bit set, the setpoint speed is within the skip band after the ramp-function generator (r1170).
The signal can be used to switch over the drive data set (DDS).
p1101[0...n] Skip speed bandwidth / n_skip bandwidth
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3050
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the bandwidth for the skip speeds/velocities 1 to 4.
Dependency: See also: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1094
Note
The setpoint (reference) speeds are skipped (suppressed) in the range of the skip speed +/-p1101.
Steady-state operation is not possible in the skipped (suppressed) speed range. The skip (suppression) range is
skipped.
Example:
p1091 = 600 and p1101 = 20
--> setpoint speeds between 580 and 620 [rpm] are skipped.
For the skip bandwidths, the following hysteresis behavior applies:
For a setpoint speed coming from below, the following applies:
r1170 < 580 [rpm] and 580 [rpm] <= r1114 <= 620 [rpm] --> r1119 = 580 [rpm]
For a setpoint speed coming from above, the following applies:
r1170 > 620 [rpm] and 580 [rpm] <= r1114 <= 620 [rpm] --> r1119 = 620 [rpm]
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 629
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1106[0...n] CI: Minimum speed signal source / n_min s_s
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3050
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for lowest possible motor speed.
Dependency: See also: p1080
NOTICE
The effective minimum speed is formed from p1080 and p1106.
p1108[0...n] BI: Total setpoint selection / Total setp sel
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the total setpoint.
Dependency: The selection of the total speed setpoint is automatically interconnected to the status word of the technology controller
(r2349.4) if the technology controller is selected (p2200 > 0) and operated in the mode p2251 = 0.
If the "hibernation mode" function is activated (p2398 = 1), an interconnection is made to r2399.7.
See also: p1109
CAUTION
If the technology controller is to supply the total setpoint using p1109, then it is not permissible to disable the
interconnection to its status word (r2349.4).
If the "hibernation mode" function is activated, then it is not permissible to disable the interconnection to status word
r2399.
p1109[0...n] CI: Total setpoint / Total setp
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the total setpoint.
For p1108 = 1 signal, the total setpoint is read in via p1109.
Dependency: The signal source of the total setpoint is automatically interconnected to the output of the technology controller (r2294)
if the technology controller is selected (p2200 > 0) and operated in the mode p2251 = 0.
If the "hibernation mode" function is activated (p2398 = 1), an interconnection is made to r2397[0].
See also: p1108
CAUTION
If the technology controller is to supply the total setpoint using p1109, then it is not permissible to disable the
interconnection to its output (r2294).
If the "hibernation mode" function is activated, then it is not permissible to withdraw the interconnection to setpoint
r2398[0].
SINAMICS G120X converter
630 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1110[0...n] BI: Inhibit negative direction / Inhib neg dir
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2505, 3040
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source to disable the negative direction.
Dependency: See also: p1111
p1111[0...n] BI: Inhibit positive direction / Inhib pos dir
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2505, 3040
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to disable the positive direction.
Dependency: See also: p1110
r1112 CO: Speed setpoint after minimum limiting / n_set aft min_lim
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3050
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the speed setpoint after the minimum limiting.
Dependency: See also: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1094, p1101
p1113[0...n] BI: Setpoint inversion / Setp inv
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2441, 2442,
2505, 3040
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 2090.11
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source to invert the setpoint.
Dependency: See also: r1198
CAUTION
If the technology controller is being used as the speed main setpoint (p2251 = 0), do not invert the setpoint using p1113
when the technology controller is enabled because this can cause the speed to change suddenly and lead to positive
couplings in the control loop.
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 631
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1113[0...n] BI: Setpoint inversion / Setp inv
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2441, 2442,
2505, 3040
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to invert the setpoint.
Dependency: See also: r1198
CAUTION
If the technology controller is being used as the speed main setpoint (p2251 = 0), do not invert the setpoint using p1113
when the technology controller is enabled because this can cause the speed to change suddenly and lead to positive
couplings in the control loop.
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
r1114 CO: Setpoint after the direction limiting / Setp after limit
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3001, 3040,
3050
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the speed/velocity setpoint after the changeover and limiting the direction.
r1119 CO: Ramp-function generator setpoint at the input / RFG setp at inp
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3050, 3070,
6300, 8022
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the setpoint at the input of the ramp-function generator.
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note
The setpoint is influenced by other functions, e.g. skip (suppressed) speeds, minimum and maximum limits.
p1120[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-up time / RFG ramp-up time
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C2(1), T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
Description: The ramp-function generator ramps-up the speed setpoint from standstill (setpoint = 0) up to the maximum speed
(p1082) in this time.
Dependency: See also: p1082, p1123
SINAMICS G120X converter
632 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The ramp-up time can be scaled via connector input p1138.
The parameter is adapted during the rotating measurement (p1960 > 0). This is the reason that during the rotating
measurement, the motor can accelerate faster than was originally parameterized.
For U/f control and sensorless vector control (see p1300), a ramp-up time of 0 s does not make sense. The setting
should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.
p1120[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-up time / RFG ramp-up time
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: C2(1), T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 20.000 [s]
Description: The ramp-function generator ramps-up the speed setpoint from standstill (setpoint = 0) up to the maximum speed
(p1082) in this time.
Dependency: See also: p1082, p1123
Note
The ramp-up time can be scaled via connector input p1138.
The parameter is adapted during the rotating measurement (p1960 > 0). This is the reason that during the rotating
measurement, the motor can accelerate faster than was originally parameterized.
For U/f control and sensorless vector control (see p1300), a ramp-up time of 0 s does not make sense. The setting
should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.
p1121[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-down time / RFG ramp-down time
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C2(1), T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time for the ramp-function generator.
The ramp-function generator ramps-down the speed setpoint from the maximum speed (p1082) down to standstill
(setpoint = 0) in this time.
Further, the ramp-down time is always effective for OFF1.
Dependency: See also: p1082, p1127
Note
For U/f control and sensorless vector control (see p1300), a ramp-down time of 0 s does not make sense. The setting
should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.
p1121[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-down time / RFG ramp-down time
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: C2(1), T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 30.000 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time for the ramp-function generator.
The ramp-function generator ramps-down the speed setpoint from the maximum speed (p1082) down to standstill
(setpoint = 0) in this time.
Further, the ramp-down time is always effective for OFF1.
Dependency: The parameter is pre-assigned depending on the size of the power unit.
See also: p1082, p1127
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 633
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
For U/f control and sensorless vector control (see p1300), a ramp-down time of 0 s does not make sense. The setting
should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.
p1122[0...n] BI: Bypass ramp-function generator / Bypass RFG
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2505
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for bypassing the ramp generator (ramp-up and ramp-down times = 0).
CAUTION
If the technology controller is operated in mode p2251 = 0 (technology controller as main speed setpoint), or the
"hibernation mode" function is activated, then it is not permissible to disable the interconnection to the relevant status
word (r2349, r2399).
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note
In the case of sensorless vector control, the ramp-function generator must not be bypassed, other than indirectly by
means of interconnection with r2349 or r2399.
p1123[0...n] Ramp-function generator minimum ramp-up time / RFG t_RU min
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the minimum ramp-up time.
The ramp-up time (p1120) is limited internally to this minimum value.
Dependency: See also: p1082
Note
The setting should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.
If the maximum speed p1082 changes, p1123 is re-calculated.
p1127[0...n] Ramp-function generator minimum ramp-down time / RFG t_RD min
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the minimum ramp-down time.
The ramp-down time (p1121) is limited internally to this minimum value.
The parameter cannot be set shorter than the minimum ramp-up time (p1123).
Dependency: See also: p1082
SINAMICS G120X converter
634 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
For U/f control and sensorless vector control (see p1300), a ramp-down time of 0 s does not make sense. The setting
should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.
If the maximum speed p1082 changes, p1127 is re-calculated.
If a braking resistor is connected to the DC link (p0219 > 0), then the minimum ramp-down time is automatically adapted
using p1127.
p1130[0...n] Ramp-function generator initial rounding-off time / RFG t_start_round
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the initial rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.
Note
Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.
Rounding off is not active if the technology controller is used as main speed setpoint (p2251 = 0).
p1130[0...n] Ramp-function generator initial rounding-off time / RFG t_start_round
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 2.000 [s]
Description: Sets the initial rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.
Note
Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.
Rounding off is not active if the technology controller is used as main speed setpoint (p2251 = 0).
p1131[0...n] Ramp-function generator final rounding-off time / RFG t_end_delay
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the final rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator.
The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.
Note
Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.
Rounding off is not active if the technology controller is used as main speed setpoint (p2251 = 0).
p1131[0...n] Ramp-function generator final rounding-off time / RFG t_end_delay
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 3.000 [s]
Description: Sets the final rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator.
The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 635
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.
Rounding off is not active if the technology controller is used as main speed setpoint (p2251 = 0).
p1134[0...n] Ramp-function generator rounding-off type / RFG round-off type
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the smoothed response to the OFF1 command or the reduced setpoint for the extended ramp-function generator.
Value: 0: Continuous smoothing
1: Discontinuous smoothing
Dependency: No effect up to initial rounding-off time (p1130) > 0 s.
Note
p1134 = 0 (continuous smoothing)
If the setpoint is reduced while ramping-up, initially a final rounding-off is carried out and then the ramp-up completed.
During the final rounding-off, the output of the ramp-function generator continues to go in the direction of the previous
setpoint (overshoot). After the final rounding-off has been completed, the output goes toward the new setpoint.
p1134 = 1 (discontinuous smoothing)
If the setpoint is reduced while ramping-up, then the output goes immediately in the direction of the new setpoint. For
the setpoint change there is no rounding-off.
p1135[0...n] OFF3 ramp-down time / OFF3 t_RD
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: C2(1), T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 5400.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time from the maximum speed down to zero speed for the OFF3 command.
Note
This time can be exceeded if the DC link voltage reaches its maximum value.
p1135[0...n] OFF3 ramp-down time / OFF3 t_RD
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: C2(1), T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 5400.000 [s] 3.000 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time from the maximum speed down to zero speed for the OFF3 command.
Dependency: The parameter is pre-assigned depending on the size of the power unit.
Note
This time can be exceeded if the DC link voltage reaches its maximum value.
SINAMICS G120X converter
636 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1136[0...n] OFF3 initial rounding-off time / RFGOFF3 t_strt_rnd
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the initial rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator.
p1136[0...n] OFF3 initial rounding-off time / RFGOFF3 t_strt_rnd
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 0.500 [s]
Description: Sets the initial rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator.
p1137[0...n] OFF3 final rounding-off time / RFG OFF3 t_end_del
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the final rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator.
p1138[0...n] CI: Ramp-function generator ramp-up time scaling / RFG t_RU scal
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the ramp-up time of the ramp-function generator.
Dependency: See also: p1120
Note
The ramp-up time is set in p1120.
p1139[0...n] CI: Ramp-function generator ramp-down time scaling / RFG t_RD scal
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the ramp-down time of the ramp-function generator.
Dependency: See also: p1121
Note
The ramp-down time is set in p1121.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 637
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1140[0...n] BI: Enable ramp-function generator/inhibit ramp-function generator / Enable RFG
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 2090.4
[1] 1
[2] 2090.4
[3] 2090.4
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable ramp-function generator/inhibit ramp-function generator".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 4 (STW1.4).
BI: p1140 = 0 signal:
Inhibits the ramp-function generator (the ramp-function generator output is set to zero).
BI: p1140 = 1 signal:
Enable ramp-function generator.
Dependency: See also: r0054, p1141, p1142
CAUTION
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p1140[0...n] BI: Enable ramp-function generator/inhibit ramp-function generator / Enable RFG
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable ramp-function generator/inhibit ramp-function generator".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 4 (STW1.4).
BI: p1140 = 0 signal:
Inhibits the ramp-function generator (the ramp-function generator output is set to zero).
BI: p1140 = 1 signal:
Enable ramp-function generator.
Dependency: See also: r0054, p1141, p1142
CAUTION
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p1141[0...n] BI: Continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator / Continue RFG
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 2090.5
[1] 1
[2] 2090.5
[3] 2090.5
SINAMICS G120X converter
638 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 5 (STW1.5).
BI: p1141 = 0 signal:
Freezes the ramp-function generator.
BI: p1141 = 1 signal:
Continue ramp-function generator.
Dependency: See also: r0054, p1140, p1142
CAUTION
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
NOTICE
The ramp-function generator is, independent of the state of the signal source, active in the following cases:
- OFF1/OFF3.
- ramp-function generator output within the suppression bandwidth.
- ramp-function generator output below the minimum speed.
p1141[0...n] BI: Continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator / Continue RFG
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 5 (STW1.5).
BI: p1141 = 0 signal:
Freezes the ramp-function generator.
BI: p1141 = 1 signal:
Continue ramp-function generator.
Dependency: See also: r0054, p1140, p1142
CAUTION
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
NOTICE
The ramp-function generator is, independent of the state of the signal source, active in the following cases:
- OFF1/OFF3.
- ramp-function generator output within the suppression bandwidth.
- ramp-function generator output below the minimum speed.
p1142[0...n] BI: Enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint / Setpoint enable
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 2090.6
[1] 1
[2] 2090.6
[3] 2090.6
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 639
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 6 (STW1.6).
BI: p1142 = 0 signal
Inhibits the setpoint (the ramp-function generator input is set to zero).
BI: p1142 = 1 signal
Setpoint enable.
Dependency: See also: p1140, p1141
CAUTION
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note
When the function module "position control" (r0108.3 = 1) is activated, this binector input is interconnected as follows
as standard:
BI: p1142 = 0 signal
p1142[0...n] BI: Enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint / Setpoint enable
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2501
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 6 (STW1.6).
BI: p1142 = 0 signal
Inhibits the setpoint (the ramp-function generator input is set to zero).
BI: p1142 = 1 signal
Setpoint enable.
Dependency: See also: p1140, p1141
CAUTION
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note
When the function module "position control" (r0108.3 = 1) is activated, this binector input is interconnected as follows
as standard:
BI: p1142 = 0 signal
p1143[0...n] BI: Ramp-function generator, accept setting value / RFG accept set v
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 29640.0
Description: Sets the signal source for accepting the setting value of the ramp-function generator.
Dependency: The signal source for the ramp-function generator setting value is set using parameters.
See also: p1144
SINAMICS G120X converter
640 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
0/1 signal:
The ramp-function generator output is immediately (without delay) set to the setting value of the ramp-function
generator.
1 signal:
The setting value of the ramp-function generator is effective.
1/0 signal:
The input value of the ramp-function generator is effective. The ramp-function generator output is adapted to the input
value using the ramp-up time or the ramp-down time.
0 signal:
The input value of the ramp-function generator is effective.
p1144[0...n] CI: Ramp-function generator setting value / RFG setting value
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 29641[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the ramp-function generator setting value.
Dependency: The signal source for accepting the setting value is set using parameters.
See also: p1143
p1145[0...n] Ramp-function generator tracking intensity. / RFG track intens
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3080
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 50.0 0.0
Description: Sets the ramp-function generator tracking.
The output value of the ramp-function generator is tracked (corrected) corresponding to the maximum possible drive
acceleration.
The reference value is the deviation at the speed controller/velocity controller input that is necessary to ensure that the
motor accelerates at the torque/force limit.
Recommendation: If at least one speed setpoint filter/velocity setpoint filter is activated (p1414), then the ramp-function generator
tracking should be deactivated (p1145 = 0.0). When the speed setpoint filter is activated, the output value of the ramp-
function generator can no longer be tracked (corrected) corresponding to the maximum possible drive acceleration.
For p1145 = 0.0:
This value deactivates the ramp-function generator tracking.
For p1145 = 0.0 ... 1.0:
Generally, these values are not practical. They cause the motor to accelerate below its torque limit. The lower the
selected value, the greater the margin between the controller and torque limit when accelerating.
For p1145 > 1.0:
The greater the value, the higher the permissible deviation between the speed setpoint and speed actual value.
NOTICE
If ramp-function generator tracking is activated and the ramp time is set too short, this can cause unsteady
acceleration.
Remedy:
- deactivate ramp-function generator tracking (p1145 = 0).
- increase the ramp-up/ramp-down time (p1120, p1121).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 641
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
In the U/f mode, ramp-function generator tracking is not active.
The speed difference is reduced if the integral component of the speed controller is not maintained when the torque limit
is reached (p1400.16 = 1).
p1148[0...n] Ramp-function gen. tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down active / RFG tol HL/RL act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [rpm] 1000.000 [rpm] 19.800 [rpm]
Description: Sets the tolerance value for the status of the ramp-function generator (ramp-up active, ramp-down active).
If the input of the ramp-function generator does not change in comparison to the output by more than the entered
tolerance time, then the status bits "ramp-up active" and "ramp-down active" are not influenced.
Dependency: See also: r1199
r1149 CO: Ramp-function generator acceleration / RFG acceleration
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2007 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 39_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rev/s²] - [rev/s²] - [rev/s²]
Description: Displays the acceleration of the ramp-function generator.
Dependency: See also: p1145
r1170 CO: Speed controller setpoint sum / Speed setpoint sum
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3001, 3080,
6300
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display and connector output for the speed setpoint after selecting the ramp-function generator.
The value is the sum of speed setpoint 1 (p1155) and speed setpoint 2 (p1160).
r1197 Fixed speed setpoint number actual / n_set_fixed No act
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the number of the selected fixed speed/velocity setpoint.
Dependency: See also: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023
Note
If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).
SINAMICS G120X converter
642 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r1198.0...15 CO/BO: Control word setpoint channel / STW setpoint chan
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2505
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the control word of the setpoint channel.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fixed setpoint bit 0 Yes No 3010
01 Fixed setpoint bit 1 Yes No 3010
02 Fixed setpoint bit 2 Yes No 3010
03 Fixed setpoint bit 3 Yes No 3010
05 Inhibit negative direction Yes No 3040
06 Inhibit positive direction Yes No 3040
11 Setpoint inversion Yes No 3040
13 Motorized potentiometer raise Yes No 3020
14 Motorized potentiometer lower Yes No 3020
15 Bypass ramp-function generator Yes No 3070
r1199.0...8 CO/BO: Ramp-function generator status word / RFG ZSW
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 3001, 3080
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status word for the ramp-function generator (RFG).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Ramp-up active Yes No -
01 Ramp-down active Yes No -
02 RFG active Yes No -
03 Ramp-function generator set Yes No -
04 Ramp-function generator held Yes No -
05 Ramp-function generator tracking active Yes No -
06 Maximum limit active Yes No -
07 Ramp-function generator acceleration positive Yes No -
08 Ramp-function generator acceleration negative Yes No -
Note
For bit 02:
The bit is the result of the OR logic operation - bit 00 and bit 01.
p1200[0...n] Flying restart operating mode / FlyRest op_mode
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6300, 6850
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 643
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the operating mode for flying restart.
The flying restart allows the drive converter to be switched on while the motor is still rotating. In so doing, the drive
converter output frequency is changed until the actual motor speed/velocity is found. The motor then accelerates up
to the setpoint at the ramp-function generator setting.
Value: 0: Flying restart inactive
1: Flying restart always active (start in setpoint direction)
4: Flying restart always active (start only in setpoint direction)
Dependency: A differentiation is made between flying restart for U/f control and for vector control (p1300).
Flying restart, U/f control: p1202, p1203, r1204
Flying restart, vector control: p1202, p1203, r1205
For synchronous motors, flying restart cannot be activated.
See also: p1201
See also: F07330, F07331
NOTICE
The "flying restart" function must be used in cases where the motor may still be running (e.g. after a brief line supply
interruption) or is being driven by the load. The system might otherwise shut down as a result of overcurrent.
Note
For p1200 = 1, 4, the following applies:
Flying restart is active after faults, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3.
For p1200 = 1, the following applies:
The search is made in both directions.
For p1200 = 4, the following applies:
The search is only made in the setpoint direction.
For U/f control (p1300 < 20), the following applies:
The speed can only be sensed for values above approx. 5 % of the rated motor speed. For lower speeds, it is assumed
that the motor is at a standstill.
If p1200 is changed during commissioning (p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be able to be
set. The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1200 have been changed by a parameter that was set when the
drive was commissioned (e.g. p0300).
p1201[0...n] BI: Flying restart enable signal source / Fly_res enab s_s
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source to enable the "flying restart" function.
Dependency: See also: p1200
Note
Withdrawing the enable signal has the same effect as setting p1200 = 0.
p1202[0...n] Flying restart search current / FlyRest I_srch
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
10 [%] 400 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the search current for the "flying restart" function.
The value is referred to the motor magnetizing current.
Dependency: See also: r0331
SINAMICS G120X converter
644 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
CAUTION
An unfavorable parameter value can result in the motor behaving in an uncontrollable fashion.
NOTICE
The following applies for a synchronous reluctance motor:
The minimum search current is limited (p1202 >= 50 %).
Note
In U/f control mode, the parameter serves as a threshold value for establishing the current at the beginning of the flying
restart function. When the threshold value is reached, the actual search current is set as a function of the frequency
based on the voltage setpoints.
Reducing the search current can also improve flying restart performance (if the system moment of inertia is not very
high, for example).
The following applies for a synchronous reluctance motor:
Adjusting the search current only has an effect if a motor data identification run is then performed (see p1909 bit 22).
It is possible that a value exceeding 100% cannot be reached if the motor rated power is significantly less than that of
the power unit.
If the motor rated power is significantly higher than that of the power unit, then the search current should be increased
for the higher speed range.
p1203[0...n] Flying restart search rate factor / FlyRst v_Srch Fact
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
10 [%] 4000 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the factor for the search speed for flying restart.
The value influences the rate at which the output frequency is changed during a flying restart . A higher value results
in a longer search time.
Recommendation: For sensorless vector control and motor cables longer than 200 m, set the factor p1203 >= 300 %.
CAUTION
An unfavorable parameter value can result in the motor behaving in an uncontrollable fashion.
For vector control, a value that is too low or too high can cause flying restart to become unstable.
Note
The parameter factory setting is selected so that standard induction motors that are rotating can be found and restarted
as quickly as possible (fast flying restart).
With this pre-setting, if the motor is not found (e.g. for motors that are accelerated as a result of active loads or with U/
f control and low speeds), we recommend that the search rate is reduced (by increasing p1203).
For the flying restart of a reluctance motor, the minimum search velocity is limited (p1203 >= 50 %).
r1204.0...15 CO/BO: Flying restart U/f control status / FlyRest Uf st
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status for checking and monitoring flying restart states in the U/f control mode.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Current impressed Yes No -
01 No current flow Yes No -
02 Voltage input Yes No -
03 Voltage reduced Yes No -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 645
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
04 Start ramp-function generator Yes No -
05 Wait for execution Yes No -
06 Slope filter act Yes No -
07 Positive gradient Yes No -
08 Current < threshold Yes No -
09 Current minimum Yes No -
10 Search in the positive direction Yes No -
11 Stop after positive direction Yes No -
12 Stop after negative direction Yes No -
13 No result Yes No -
14 Fast flying restart w/ voltage model for induction motor activ. Yes No -
15 Flying restart with VSM active Yes No -
r1205.0...21 CO/BO: Flying restart vector control status / FlyRest vector st
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and connector output for the status for checking and monitoring flying restart states in the vector control mode.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Speed adaptation circuit record angle Yes No -
01 Speed adaptation circuit set gain to 0 Yes No -
02 Isd channel enable Yes No -
03 Speed control switched out Yes No -
04 Quadrature arm switched in Yes No -
05 Special transformation active Yes No -
06 Speed adaptation circuit set I component to 0 Yes No -
07 Current control on Yes No -
08 Isd_set = 0 A Yes No -
09 Frequency held Yes No -
10 Search in the positive direction Yes No -
11 Search Started Yes No -
12 Current impressed Yes No -
13 Search interrupted Yes No -
14 Speed adaptation circuit deviation = 0 Yes No -
15 Speed control activated Yes No -
16 Fast flying restart w/ voltage model for induction motor activ. Yes No -
17 Fast flying restart w/ voltage model for induction motor exited Yes No -
18 Apply VSM voltage to the monitor Yes No -
19 Preassign flux ramp Yes No -
20 Adaptation current controller and speed adapt. controller gain Yes No -
21 Voltage pulse active Yes No -
Note
For bit 00 ... 09:
Used to control internal sequences during the flying restart.
Depending on the motor type (p0300), the number of active bits differs.
For bits 10 ... 15:
Are used to monitor the flying restart sequence.
SINAMICS G120X converter
646 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r1205.0...20 CO/BO: Flying restart vector control status / FlyRest vector st
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and connector output for the status for checking and monitoring flying restart states in the vector control mode.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Speed adaptation circuit record angle Yes No -
01 Speed adaptation circuit set gain to 0 Yes No -
02 Isd channel enable Yes No -
03 Speed control switched out Yes No -
04 Quadrature arm switched in Yes No -
05 Special transformation active Yes No -
06 Speed adaptation circuit set I component to 0 Yes No -
07 Current control on Yes No -
08 Isd_set = 0 A Yes No -
09 Frequency held Yes No -
10 Search in the positive direction Yes No -
11 Search Started Yes No -
12 Current impressed Yes No -
13 Search interrupted Yes No -
14 Speed adaptation circuit deviation = 0 Yes No -
15 Speed control activated Yes No -
16 Fast flying restart w/ voltage model for induction motor activ. Yes No -
17 Fast flying restart w/ voltage model for induction motor exited Yes No -
18 Apply VSM voltage to the monitor Yes No -
19 Preassign flux ramp Yes No -
20 Adaptation current controller and speed adapt. controller gain Yes No -
Note
For bit 00 ... 09:
Used to control internal sequences during the flying restart.
Depending on the motor type (p0300), the number of active bits differs.
For bits 10 ... 15:
Are used to monitor the flying restart sequence.
p1206[0...9] Automatic restart faults not active / AR fault not act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 65535 0
Description: Sets faults for which automatic restart should not be effective.
Dependency: The setting is only effective for p1210 = 6, 16, 26.
See also: p1210
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 647
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1210 Automatic restart mode / AR mode
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 26 0
Description: Sets the automatic restart mode (AR).
The parameters must be saved in the non-volatile memory p0971 = 1 in order that the setting becomes effective.
Value: 0: Inhibit automatic restart
1: Acknowledge all faults without restarting
4: Restart after line supply failure w/o additional start attempts
6: Restart after fault with additional start attempts
14: Restart after line supply failure following man. acknowledgment
16: Restart after fault following manual acknowledgment
26: Acknowledging all faults and reclosing for an ON command
Recommendation: For brief line supply failures, the motor shaft may still be rotating when restarting. The "flying restart" function (p1200)
might need to be activated to restart while the motor shaft is still rotating.
Dependency: The automatic restart requires an active ON command (e.g., via a digital input). If, for p1210 > 1, there is no active ON
command, then the automatic restart is interrupted.
When using an Operator Panel in the LOCAL mode, then there is no automatic start.
For p1210 = 14, 16, a manual acknowledgment is required for an automatic restart.
See also: p0840, p0857, p1267
See also: F30003
DANGER
If the automatic restart is activated (p1210 > 1) if there is an ON command (refer to p0840), the drive is switched on
as soon as any fault messages that are present can be acknowledged. This also occurs after the line supply returns
or the Control Unit boots if the DC link voltage is present again. This automatic switching-on operation can only be
interrupted by withdrawing the ON command.
NOTICE
A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1). When faults
are present, therefore, the parameter cannot be changed.
For p1210 > 1, the motor is automatically started.
Note
For p1210 = 1:
Faults that are present are automatically acknowledged. If new faults occur after a successful fault acknowledgment,
then these are also automatically acknowledged again. p1211 has no influence on the number of acknowledgment
attempts.
For p1210 = 4:
An automatic restart is only performed if fault F30003 has occurred on the power unit. If additional faults are present,
then these faults are also acknowledged and when successful, starting continues.
For p1210 = 6:
An automatic restart is carried out if any fault has occurred.
For p1210 = 14:
as for p1210 = 4. However, active faults must be manually acknowledged.
For p1210 = 16:
as for p1210 = 6. However, active faults must be manually acknowledged.
For p1210 = 26:
as for p1210 = 6. For this mode, the switch-on command can be entered with a delay. The restart is interrupted with
either OFF2 or OFF3. Alarm A07321 is only displayed if the cause of the fault has been removed and the drive is
restarted by setting the switch-on command.
SINAMICS G120X converter
648 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1211 Automatic restart start attempts / AR start attempts
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 10 3
Description: Sets the start attempts of the automatic restart function for p1210 = 4, 6, 14, 16, 26.
Dependency: A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1).
See also: p1210, r1214
See also: F07320
NOTICE
After fault F07320 occurs, the switch-on command must be withdrawn and all of the faults acknowledged so that the
automatic restart function is re-activated.
After a complete power failure (blackout) the start counter always starts with the counter value that applied before the
power failure, and decrements this start attempt by 1. If a further attempt to acknowledge is started by the automatic
restart function prior to power failure, e.g. when the CU remains active on power failure longer than the time p1212 /
2, the fault counter will already have been decremented once. In this case, the start counter is thus decreased by the
value 2.
Note
A start attempt starts immediately when a fault occurs. The start attempt is considered to been completed if the motor
was magnetized (r0056.4 = 1) and an additional delay time of 1 s has expired.
As long as a fault is present, an acknowledge command is generated in the time intervals of p1212 / 2. When
successfully acknowledged, the start counter is decremented. If, after this, a fault re-occurs before a restart has been
completed, then acknowledgment starts again from the beginning.
Fault F07320 is output if, after several faults occur, the number of parameterized start attempts has been reached. After
a successful start attempt, i.e. a fault/error has no longer occurred up to the end of the magnetizing phase, the start
counter is again reset to the parameter value after 1 s. If a fault re-occurs - the parameterized number of start attempts
is again available.
At least one start attempt is always carried out.
After a line supply failure, acknowledgment is immediate and when the line supply returns, the system is switched on.
If, between successfully acknowledging the line fault and the line supply returning, another fault occurs, then its
acknowledgment also causes the start counter to be decremented.
For p1210 = 26:
The start counter is decremented if after a successful fault acknowledgment, the on command is present.
p1212 Automatic restart delay time start attempts / AR t_wait start
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.1 [s] 1000.0 [s] 1.0 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time up to restart.
Dependency: This parameter setting is active for p1210 = 4, 6, 26.
For p1210 = 1, the following applies:
Faults are only automatically acknowledged in half of the waiting time, no restart.
See also: p1210, r1214
NOTICE
A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1).
Note
The faults are automatically acknowledged after half of the delay time has expired and the full delay time.
If the cause of a fault is not removed in the first half of the delay time, then it is no longer possible to acknowledge in
the delay time.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 649
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1213[0...1] Automatic restart monitoring time / AR t_monit
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [s] 10000.0 [s] [0] 60.0 [s]
[1] 0.0 [s]
Description: Sets the monitoring time of the automatic restart (AR).
Index: [0] = Restart
[1] = Reset start counter
Dependency: See also: p1210, r1214
NOTICE
A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1).
After fault F07320 occurs, the switch-on command must be withdrawn and all of the faults acknowledged so that the
automatic restart function is re-activated.
Note
For index 0:
The monitoring time starts when the faults are detected. If the automatic acknowledgments are not successful, the
monitoring time runs again. If, after the monitoring time has expired, the drive has still not successfully started again
(flying restart and magnetizing of the motor must have been completed: r0056.4 = 1), then fault F07320 is output.
The monitoring is deactivated with p1213 = 0. If p1213 is set lower than the sum of p1212, the magnetizing time p0346
and the additional delay time due to the flying restart, then fault F07320 is generated at each restart. If, for p1210 = 1,
the time in p1213 is set lower than in p1212, then fault F07320 is also generated at each restart.
The monitoring time must be extended if the faults that occur cannot be immediately and successfully acknowledged
(e.g. for faults that are permanently present).
In the case of p1210 = 14, 16, the faults which are present must be acknowledged manually within the time in p1213[0].
Otherwise, fault F07320 is generated after the set time.
For index 1:
The start counter (refer to r1214) is only set back to the starting value p1211 if, after successful restart, the time in
p1213[1] has expired. The delay time is not effective for fault acknowledgment without automatic restart (p1210 = 1).
After a power failure (blackout) the delay time only starts after the line supply returns and the Control Unit boots. The
start counter is set to p1211, if F07320 occurred, the switch-on command is withdrawn and the fault is acknowledged.
The start counter is immediately updated if the starting value p1211 or the mode p1210 is changed.
For p1210 = 26, the fault must have been successfully acknowledged and the switch-on command issued within the
time in p1213[0]. Otherwise, fault F07320 is generated after the set time.
r1214.0...15 CO/BO: Automatic restart status / AR status
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status of the automatic restart (AR).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Initialization Yes No -
01 Wait for alarm Yes No -
02 Auto restart act Yes No -
03 Setting the acknowledgment command Yes No -
04 Acknowledge alarms Yes No -
05 Restart Yes No -
06 Delay time running after automatic switch-on Yes No -
07 Fault Yes No -
SINAMICS G120X converter
650 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
10 Effective fault Yes No -
12 Start counter bit 0 ON OFF -
13 Start counter bit 1 ON OFF -
14 Start counter bit 2 ON OFF -
15 Start counter bit 3 ON OFF -
Note
For bit 00:
State to display the single initialization after POWER ON.
For bit 01:
State in which the automatic restart function waits for faults (initial state).
For bit 02:
General display that a fault has been identified and that the restart or acknowledgment has been initiated.
For bit 03:
Displays the acknowledge command within the "acknowledge alarms" state (bit 4 = 1). For bit 5 = 1 or bit 6 = 1, the
acknowledge command is continually displayed.
For bit 04:
State in which the faults that are present are acknowledged. The state is exited again after successful
acknowledgment. A change is only made into the next state if it is signaled that a fault is no longer present after an
acknowledgment command (bit 3 = 1).
For bit 05:
State in which the drive is automatically switched on (only for p1210 = 4, 6).
For bit 06:
State in which the system waits after having been switched on, to the end of the start attempt (to the end of the
magnetizing process).
For p1210 = 1, this signal is directly set after the faults have been successfully acknowledged.
For bit 07:
State which is assumed after a fault occurs within the automatic restart function. This is only reset after acknowledging
the fault and withdrawing the switch-on command.
For bit 10:
When the automatic restart function is active, r1214.7 is displayed, otherwise the active fault r2139.3.
The bit is set if the automatic restart can no longer acknowledge a fault, and cancels with fault F07320.
For bits 12 ... 15:
Actual state of the start counter (binary coded).
For bit 04 in addition:
For p1210 = 26, the system waits in this state until the switch-on command is available.
p1226[0...n] Threshold for zero speed detection / n_standst n_thresh
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8022
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 20.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold for the standstill identification.
Acts on the actual value and setpoint monitoring.
When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, when the threshold is undershot, standstill is identified.
Dependency: See also: p1227
CAUTION
The following applies for encoderless speed control:
If p1226 is set to values under approx. 1 % of the rated motor speed, then the model switchover limits of the vector
control must be increased in order to guarantee reliable shutdown (see p1755, p1750.7).
NOTICE
For reasons relating to the compatibility to earlier firmware versions, a parameter value of zero in indices 1 to 31 is
overwritten with the parameter value in index 0 when the Control Unit boots.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 651
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
Standstill is identified in the following cases:
- the speed actual value falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1228 has expired.
- the speed setpoint falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1227 has expired.
The actual value sensing is subject to measuring noise. For this reason, standstill cannot be detected if the speed
threshold is too low.
p1227 Zero speed detection monitoring time / n_standst t_monit
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 300.000 [s] 300.000 [s]
Description: Sets the monitoring time for the standstill identification.
When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, standstill is identified after this time has expired, after the setpoint speed has fallen
below p1226 (also refer to p1145).
Dependency: The parameter is pre-assigned depending on the size of the power unit.
See also: p1226
NOTICE
For p1145 > 0.0 (RFG tracking) the setpoint is not equal to zero dependent on the selected value. This can therefore
cause the monitoring time in p1227 to be exceeded. In this case, for a driven motor, the pulses are not suppressed.
Note
Standstill is identified in the following cases:
- the speed actual value falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1228 has expired.
- the speed setpoint falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1227 has expired.
For p1227 = 300.000 s the following applies:
Monitoring is deactivated.
For p1227 = 0.000 s, the following applies:
With OFF1 or OFF3 and a ramp-down time = 0, the pulses are immediately suppressed and the motor "coasts" down.
Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time or if the factory settings have been defined accordingly, the
parameter is defined in accordance with the power unit.
p1228 Pulse suppression delay time / Pulse suppr t_del
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8022
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 299.000 [s] 0.010 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time for pulse suppression.
After OFF1 or OFF3, the pulses are canceled, if at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled:
- the speed actual value falls below the threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1228 has expired.
- the speed setpoint falls below the threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1227 has expired.
Dependency: See also: p1226, p1227
p1230[0...n] BI: DC braking activation / DC brake act
G120X_DP (DC Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
braking), G120X_PN Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
(DC braking),
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7017
G120X_USS (DC
braking) Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
652 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the signal source to activate DC braking.
Dependency: See also: p1231, p1232, p1233, p1234, r1239
Note
1 signal: DC braking activated.
0 signal: DC braking deactivated.
p1231[0...n] DC braking configuration / DCBRK config
G120X_DP (DC Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
braking), G120X_PN Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
(DC braking),
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7014, 7016,
G120X_USS (DC
7017
braking)
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 14 0
Description: Setting to activate DC braking.
Value: 0: No function
4: DC braking
5: DC braking for OFF1/OFF3
14: DC braking below starting speed
Dependency: See also: p0300, p1232, p1233, p1234, r1239
Note
DCBRK: DC Braking
For p1231 = 4:
The function is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled.
- the function can be superseded by an OFF2 response.
Activation criterion (one of the following criteria is fulfilled):
- binector input p1230 = 1 signal (DC braking activation, depending on the operating mode).
- the drive is not in the state "S4: Operation" or in "S5x".
- the internal pulse enable is missing (r0046.19 = 0).
DC braking can only be withdrawn (p1231 = 0) if it is not being used as a fault response in p2101.
In order that DC braking is active as fault response, the corresponding fault number must be entered in p2100 and fault
response p2101 set = 6.
For p1231 = 5:
DC braking is activated if the OFF1 or OFF3 command is present. Binector input p1230 is ineffective. If the drive speed
still lies above the speed threshold p1234, then initially, the drive is ramped-down to this threshold, demagnetized (see
p0347) and is then switched into DC braking for the time set in p1233. After this, the drive is switched-off. If, at OFF1,
the drive speed is below p1234, then it is immediately demagnetized and switched into DC braking. The system
switches back to normal operation if the OFF1 command is withdrawn prematurely (the system waits for
demagnetization). Flying restart must be activated if the motor is still rotating.
DC braking by means of fault response continues to be possible.
For p1231 = 14:
In addition to the function for p1231 = 5, binector input p1230 is evaluated.
DC braking is only automatically activated when the speed threshold p1234 is fallen below if binector input p1230 = 1
signal. This is also the case, if no OFF command is present.
After demagnetization and after the time in p1233 has expired, the drive changes back into normal operation or is
switched-off (for OFF1/OFF3).
If a 0 signal is applied to binector input p1230, for OFF1 and OFF3 no DC braking is executed.
p1232[0...n] DC braking braking current / DCBRK I_brake
G120X_DP (DC Access level: 2 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
braking), G120X_PN Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
(DC braking),
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7017
G120X_USS (DC
braking) Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 653
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the braking current for DC braking.
Dependency: See also: p1230, p1231, p1233, p1234, r1239, p1345, p1346
Note
A change to the braking current becomes effective the next time that DC braking is switched on.
The value for p1232 is specified as an rms value in the 3-phase system. The magnitude of the braking current is the
same as that of an identical output current at frequency zero (see r0067, r0068, p0640). The braking current is internally
limited to r0067.
For the current controller, the settings of parameters p1345 and p1346 (I_max limiting controller) are used.
p1233[0...n] DC braking time / DCBRK time
G120X_DP (DC Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
braking), G120X_PN Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
(DC braking),
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7017
G120X_USS (DC
braking) Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [s] 3600.0 [s] 1.0 [s]
Description: Sets the DC braking time (as fault response).
Dependency: See also: p1230, p1231, p1232, p1234, r1239
p1234[0...n] Speed at the start of DC braking / DCBRK n_start
G120X_DP (DC Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
braking), G120X_PN Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
(DC braking),
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7017
G120X_USS (DC
braking) Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the starting speed for DC braking.
If the actual speed falls below this threshold, then DC braking is activated.
Dependency: See also: p1230, p1231, p1232, p1233, r1239
r1239.8...13 CO/BO: DC braking status word / DCBRK ZSW
G120X_DP (DC Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
braking), G120X_PN Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
(DC braking),
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
G120X_USS (DC
braking) Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Status word of the DC braking.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
08 DC braking active Yes No 7017
10 DC braking ready Yes No 7017
11 DC braking selected Yes No -
12 DC braking selection internally inhibited Yes No -
13 DC braking for OFF1/OFF3 Yes No -
Dependency: See also: p1231, p1232, p1233, p1234
Note
For bit 12, 13:
Only effective for p1231 = 14.
SINAMICS G120X converter
654 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1240[0...n] Vdc controller configuration (vector control) / Vdc ctr config vec
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6220, 6827
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 3 1
Description: Sets the controller configuration of the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the closed-loop control mode. For U/f control:
see p1280.
Value: 0: Inhibit Vdc ctrl
1: Enable Vdc_max controller
2: Enable Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering)
3: Enable Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller
Dependency: See also: p1245
See also: A07400, A07401, A07402, F07405, F07406
NOTICE
An excessively high value in p1245 can possibly negatively influence the normal operation of the drive.
Note
If a braking resistor is connected to the DC link (p0219 > 0), then the Vdc_max control is automatically deactivated.
p1240 = 1, 3:
When the DC link voltage limit specified for the power unit is reached the following applies:
- the Vdc_max controller limits the regenerative energy in order that the DC link voltage is kept below the maximum DC
link voltage when braking.
- the ramp-down times are automatically increased.
p1240 = 2, 3:
When the switch-in threshold of the Vdc_min controller is reached (p1245), the following applies:
- the Vdc_min controller limits the energy taken from the DC link in order to keep the DC link voltage above the minimum
DC link voltage when accelerating.
- the motor is braked in order to use its kinetic energy to buffer the DC link.
r1242 Vdc_max controller switch-in level / Vdc_max on_level
G120X_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
(Vdc_max), Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dynamic index: -
G120X_PN
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6220
(Vdc_max),
G120X_USS Min: Max: Factory setting:
(Vdc_max) - [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.
If p1254 = 0 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = off), then the following applies:
r1242 = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * p0210 (supply voltage)
PM230: r1242 is limited to Vdc_max - 50.0 V.
If p1254 = 1 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = on), then the following applies:
r1242 = Vdc_max - 50.0 V (Vdc_max: Overvoltage threshold of the power unit)
r1242 = Vdc_max - 25.0 V (for 230 V power units)
NOTICE
If the activation level of the Vdc_max controller is already exceeded in the deactivated state (pulse inhibit) by the DC
link voltage, then the controller can be automatically deactivated (see F07401), so that the drive is not accelerated the
next time that it is activated.
Note
The Vdc_max controller is not switched back off until the DC link voltage falls below the threshold 0.95 * r1242 and the
controller output is zero.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 655
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1243[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor / Vdc_max dyn_factor
G120X_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
(Vdc_max), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_PN
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6220
(Vdc_max),
G120X_USS Min: Max: Factory setting:
(Vdc_max) 1 [%] 10000 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_max controller).
100% means that p1250, p1251, and p1252 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used corresponding to their basic
settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case p1250, p1251,
p1252 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1243.
p1245[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level
G120X_DP (Vdc_min), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (Vdc_min), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
(Vdc_min)
Min: Max: Factory setting:
65 [%] 150 [%] 76 [%]
Description: Sets the switch-in level for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
The value is obtained as follows:
r1246[V] = p1245[%] * sqrt(2) * p0210
Dependency: See also: p0210
WARNING
An excessively high value possibly negatively influences normal drive operation, and can mean that after the line
supply returns, the Vdc minimum control can no longer be exited.
r1246 Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level
G120X_DP (Vdc_min), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (Vdc_min), Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6220
(Vdc_min)
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Note
The Vdc_min controller is not switched back off until the DC link voltage rises above the threshold 1.05 * p1246 and the
controller output is zero.
p1247[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min dyn_factor
G120X_DP (PM330, Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Vdc_min, Vdc_min), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_PN (PM330,
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6220
Vdc_min, Vdc_min),
G120X_USS (PM330, Min: Max: Factory setting:
Vdc_min, Vdc_min) 1 [%] 10000 [%] 300 [%]
Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
100% means that p1250, p1251, and p1252 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used corresponding to their basic
settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case p1250, p1251,
p1252 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1247.
SINAMICS G120X converter
656 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1249[0...n] Vdc_max controller speed threshold / Vdc_max n_thresh
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 10.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the lower speed threshold for the Vdc_max controller.
When this speed threshold is undershot, the Vdc_max control is switched out and the speed is controlled using the
ramp-function generator.
Note
For fast braking where the ramp-function generator tracking was active, it is possible to prevent the drive rotating in the
opposite direction by increasing the speed threshold and setting a final rounding-off time in the ramp-function generator
(p1131). This is supported using a dynamic setting of the speed controller.
p1249[0...n] Vdc_max controller speed threshold / Vdc_max n_thresh
G120X_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
(Vdc_max), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_PN
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: -
(Vdc_max),
G120X_USS Min: Max: Factory setting:
(Vdc_max) 0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 10.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the lower speed threshold for the Vdc_max controller.
When this speed threshold is undershot, the Vdc_max control is switched out and the speed is controlled using the
ramp-function generator.
Note
For fast braking where the ramp-function generator tracking was active, it is possible to prevent the drive rotating in the
opposite direction by increasing the speed threshold and setting a final rounding-off time in the ramp-function generator
(p1131). This is supported using a dynamic setting of the speed controller.
p1250[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain / Vdc_ctrl Kp
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 100.00 1.00
Description: Sets the proportional gain for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller).
Dependency: The effective proportional gain is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor) and the DC
link capacitance of the power unit.
p1251[0...n] Vdc controller integral time / Vdc_ctrl Tn
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6220
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral time for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller).
Dependency: The effective integral time is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor).
Note
p1251 = 0: The integral component is deactivated.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 657
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1252[0...n] Vdc controller rate time / Vdc_ctrl t_rate
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6220
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the rate time constant for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller).
Dependency: The effective rate time is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor).
p1254 Vdc_max controller automatic ON level detection / Vdc_max SenseOnLev
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 1
Description: Activates/deactivates the automatic sensing of the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.
Value: 0: Automatic detection inhibited
1: Automatic detection enabled
p1255[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold / Vdc_min t_thresh
G120X_DP (Vdc_min), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (Vdc_min), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
(Vdc_min)
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 1800.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the time threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized.
Prerequisite: p1256 = 1
Dependency: See also: F07406
NOTICE
If a time threshold has been parameterized, the Vdc_max controller should also be activated (p1240 = 3) so that the
drive does not shut down with overvoltage when Vdc_min control is exited (due to the time violation) and in the event
of fault response OFF3. It is also possible to increase the OFF3 ramp-down time p1135.
p1256[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min response
G120X_DP (Vdc_min), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
G120X_PN (Vdc_min), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
(Vdc_min)
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the response for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Value: 0: Buffer Vdc until undervoltage, n<p1257 -> F07405
1: Buff. Vdc until undervolt., n<p1257 -> F07405, t>p1255 -> F07406
Dependency: See also: F07405, F07406
SINAMICS G120X converter
658 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1257[0...n] Vdc_min controller speed threshold / Vdc_min n_thresh
G120X_DP (Vdc_min), Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (Vdc_min), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: -
(Vdc_min)
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 50.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized .
Kinetic buffering is not started below the speed threshold.
Note
Exiting the Vdc_min control before reaching motor standstill prevents the regenerative braking current from increasing
significantly at low speeds, and after a pulse inhibit, means that the motor coasts down.
However, the maximum braking torque can be set via the appropriate torque limiting.
r1258 CO: Vdc controller output / Vdc_ctrl output
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6220
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the actual output of the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller)
Note
The regenerative power limit p1531 is used for vector control to precontrol the Vdc_max controller. The lower the power
limit is set, the lower the correction signals of the controller when the voltage limit is reached.
p1260 Bypass configuration / Bypass config
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 3 0
Description: Sets the configuration for the bypass function.
Value: 0: Bypass deactivated
3: Bypass without synchronization
Dependency: The "Bypass" function is only available for induction motors.
Note
When the converter is switched on, the state of the bridging contactor is evaluated.
If the automatic restart is active (p1210 = 4) and both an ON command (r0054.0 = 1) and the bypass signal (p1266 =
1, configuration p1267.0 = 1) are still present during power up, the converter goes into "ready for operation and bypass"
state (r0899.0 = 1 and r0046.25 = 1) after power up, and the motor continues to run directly on the line.
The "bypass" function can only be switched off again (p1260 = 0) if the bypass is not active or the bypass function has
a fault.
The "flying restart" function must be activated (p1200).
r1261.0...11 CO/BO: Bypass control/status word / Bypass STW / ZSW
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 659
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Control and feedback signals of the bypass switch.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Command switch motor - power unit Close Open -
01 Command switch motor - line supply Close Open -
05 Feedback signal switch motor - power unit Closed Opened -
06 Feedback signal switch motor - line supply Closed Opened -
07 Bypass command (from p1266) Yes No -
10 Bypass in process sequence Yes No -
11 Bypass enabled Yes No -
Dependency: The "Bypass" function is only available for induction motors.
Note
Control bits 0 and 1 should be interconnected to the signal outputs via which the switches in the motor feeder cables
should be controlled. These should be selected/dimensioned for switching under load.
p1262[0...n] Bypass dead time / Bypass t_dead
Access level: 2 Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 20.000 [s] 1.000 [s]
Description: Sets the dead time for non-synchronized bypass.
Dependency: The "Bypass" function is only available for induction motors.
Note
This parameter is used to define the changeover time of the contactors. It should not be shorter than the de-magnetizing
time of the motor (p0347).
The total changeover time for the bypass is based on the total of p1262 plus the OFF time for the relevant switch
(p1274[x]).
p1263 Debypass delay time / Debypass t_del
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 300.000 [s] 1.000 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time to switch back to converter operation for a non-synchronized bypass.
Dependency: The "Bypass" function is only available for induction motors.
p1264 Bypass delay time / Bypass t_del
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 300.000 [s] 1.000 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time for switching to line operation for a non-synchronized bypass.
Dependency: The "Bypass" function is only available for induction motors.
SINAMICS G120X converter
660 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1265 Bypass speed threshold / Bypass n_thresh
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 1480.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold to activate the bypass.
Dependency: The "Bypass" function is only available for induction motors.
If the drive setpoint speed is entered via a motorized potentiometer, then the configuration bit p1030.4 should be set
in order to ensure the bypass via speed threshold function.
Note
When selecting p1260 = 3 and p1267.1 = 1, the bypass is automatically activated when this speed is reached.
The bypass speed threshold is only effective for positive directions of rotation. If the drive connected to the line supply
requires negative speeds, then this can be achieved using p1820 (direction of rotation reversal).
p1266 BI: Bypass control command / Bypass command
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the control command to the bypass.
Dependency: The "Bypass" function is only available for induction motors.
p1267 Bypass changeover source configuration / Chngov_src config
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the cause that should initiate the bypass.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bypass via signal (BI: p1266) Yes No -
01 Bypass via reaching the speed threshold Yes No -
Dependency: The "Bypass" function is only available for induction motors.
Note
The parameter only has an effect for a non-synchronized bypass.
p1267.0 = 1:
The bypass is initiated by setting a binary signal. When the command is reset, after the debypass delay time (p1263)
has expired, operation at the power unit is re-selected.
p1267.1 = 1:
When the speed threshold entered in p1265 is reached, the bypass is switched in. The system only switches back when
the speed setpoint again falls below the threshold value.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 661
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1269[0...1] BI: Bypass switch feedback signal / Bypass FS
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 1261.0
[1] 1261.1
Description: Sets the signal source for the feedback signal of the bypass switch.
Index: [0] = Switch motor/drive
[1] = Switch motor/line supply
Dependency: The "Bypass" function is only available for induction motors.
Note
In the case of switches without a feedback signal, interconnect the corresponding control bit as the signal source:
BI: p1269[0] = r1261.0
BI: p1269[1] = r1261.1
Entering p1269 = 0 sets this interconnection automatically for switches without a feedback signal.
p1270[0...n] Flying restart configuration / Fly restart config
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0000 0000 0011 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the "flying restart function" function.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fast flying restart with voltage model for induction motor Yes No -
01 PLL expansion for fast flying restart w/ voltage model for ASM Yes No -
12 Use peak current values Yes No -
13 Number of current controller cycles (test pulse) bit 0 1 0 -
14 Number of current controller cycles (test pulse) bit 1 1 0 -
15 Number of current controller cycles (test pulse) bit 2 1 0 -
Note
ASM: Induction motor
For bit 00:
This bit is equivalent to p1780 bit 11.
For bit 01:
This bit should only be set when required for large drives.
p1271[0...n] Flying restart maximum frequency for the inhibited direction / FlyRes f_max dir
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [Hz] 650 [Hz] 0 [Hz]
Description: Sets the maximum search frequency for a flying restart in an inhibited setpoint direction (p1110, p1111).
Note
The parameter has no effect for an operating mode, which only searches in the setpoint direction (p1200 > 3).
SINAMICS G120X converter
662 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1271[0...n] Flying restart maximum frequency for the inhibited direction / FlyRes f_max dir
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [Hz] 650 [Hz] 5 [Hz]
Description: Sets the maximum search frequency for a flying restart in an inhibited setpoint direction (p1110, p1111).
Note
The parameter has no effect for an operating mode, which only searches in the setpoint direction (p1200 > 3).
p1274[0...1] Bypass switch monitoring time / Switch t_monit
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 5000 [ms] 1000 [ms]
Description: Sets the monitoring time for the bypass switch.
Index: [0] = Switch motor/drive
[1] = Switch motor/line supply
Dependency: The "Bypass" function is only available for induction motors.
Note
The monitoring is deactivated with p1274 = 0 ms.
The changeover time for the bypass (p1262) is extended by the value in this parameter.
p1280[0...n] Vdc controller configuration (U/f) / Vdc_ctr config U/f
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6300, 6320,
6854
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 3 1
Description: Sets the configuration of the controller for the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the U/f operating mode.
Value: 0: Inhibit Vdc ctrl
1: Enable Vdc_max controller
2: Enable Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering)
3: Enable Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller
Note
For high input voltages (p0210), the following settings can improve the degree of ruggedness of the Vdc_max controller:
- set the input voltage as low as possible, and in so doing, avoid A07401 (p0210).
- set the rounding times (p1130, p1136).
- increase the ramp-down times (p1121).
- reduce the integral time of the controller (p1291), factor 0.5.
- activate the Vdc correction in the current controller (p1810.1 = 1) or reduce the derivative action time of the controller
(p1292, factor 0.5).
In this case, we generally recommend to use vector control (p1300 = 20) (Vdc controller, see p1240).
The following measures are suitable to improve the Vdc_min controller:
- Optimize the Vdc_min controller (see p1287).
- Activate the Vdc correction in the current controller (p1810.1 = 1).
If a braking resistor is connected to the DC link (p0219 > 0), then the Vdc_max control is automatically deactivated.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 663
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1281[0...n] Vdc controller configuration / Vdc ctrl config
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the DC link voltage controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Vdc min control (U/f) without up ramp Yes No -
02 Vdc min shorter wait time when the line returns Yes No -
Note
For bit 00:
Deactivate the ramp-up for Vdc_min control.
For drives with a mechanical system that can oscillate and high moment of inertia, the speed can be more quickly
tracked.
For bit 02:
When the line supply returns, normal operation is resumed earlier, and the system does not wait until the Vdc min
controller reaches the setpoint speed.
r1282 Vdc_max controller switch-in level (U/f) / Vdc_max on_level
G120X_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
(Vdc_max), Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dynamic index: -
G120X_PN
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6320, 6854
(Vdc_max),
G120X_USS Min: Max: Factory setting:
(Vdc_max) - [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.
If p1294 = 0 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = off), then the following applies:
r1282 = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * p0210 (supply voltage)
If p1294 = 1 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = on), then the following applies:
r1282 = Vdc_max - 50.0 V (Vdc_max: Overvoltage threshold of the power unit)
r1282 = Vdc_max - 25.0 V (for 230 V power units)
NOTICE
If the activation level of the Vdc_max controller is already exceeded in the deactivated state (pulse inhibit) by the DC
link voltage, then the controller can be automatically deactivated (see F07401), so that the drive is not accelerated the
next time that it is activated.
Note
The Vdc_max controller is not switched back off until the DC link voltage falls below the threshold 0.95 * r1282 and the
controller output is zero.
p1283[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor (U/f) / Vdc_max dyn_factor
G120X_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
(Vdc_max), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_PN
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6320, 6854
(Vdc_max),
G120X_USS Min: Max: Factory setting:
(Vdc_max) 1 [%] 10000 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_max controller).
100% means that p1290, p1291, and p1292 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used in accordance with their basic
settings and on the basis of a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case, p1290, p1291, and
p1292 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1283.
SINAMICS G120X converter
664 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1284[0...n] Vdc_max controller time threshold (U/f) / Vdc_max t_thresh
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 300.000 [s] 4.000 [s]
Description: Sets the monitoring time for the Vdc_max controller.
If the down ramp of the speed setpoint is held for longer than the time set in p1284, then fault F07404 is output.
p1285[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min on_level
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6320, 6854
Min: Max: Factory setting:
65 [%] 150 [%] 76 [%]
Description: Sets the switch-in level for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
The value is obtained as follows:
r1286[V] = p1285[%] * sqrt(2) * p0210
WARNING
An excessively high value may adversely affect normal drive operation.
r1286 Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min on_level
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6320, 6854
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Note
The Vdc_min controller is not switched back off until the DC link voltage rises above the threshold 1.05 * r1286 and the
controller output is zero.
p1287[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min dyn_factor
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6320, 6854
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 [%] 10000 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
100% means that p1290, p1291, and p1292 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used corresponding to their basic
settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case, p1290, p1291, and
p1292 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1287.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 665
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1290[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl Kp
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6320, 6854
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 100.00 1.00
Description: Sets the proportional gain for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
Note
The gain factor is proportional to the capacitance of the DC link.
The parameter is pre-set to a value that is optimally adapted to the capacitance of the power unit.
p1291[0...n] Vdc controller integral time (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl Tn
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6320, 6854
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 40 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral time for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
p1292[0...n] Vdc controller rate time (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl t_rate
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6320, 6854
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Sets the rate time constant for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
p1294 Vdc_max controller automatic detection ON signal level (U/f) / Vdc_max SenseOnLev
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6320, 6854
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Activates/deactivates the automatic sensing of the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller. When the sensing
function is deactivated, the activation threshold r1282 for the Vdc_max controller is determined from the
parameterized connection voltage p0210.
Value: 0: Automatic detection inhibited
1: Automatic detection enabled
p1295[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold (U/f) / Vdc_min t_thresh
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 10000.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the time threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized.
Prerequisite: p1296 = 1
SINAMICS G120X converter
666 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
NOTICE
If a time threshold has been parameterized, the Vdc_max controller should also be activated (p1280 = 3) so that the
drive does not shut down with overvoltage when Vdc_min control is exited (due to the time violation) and in the event
of fault response OFF3. It is also possible to increase the OFF3 ramp-down time p1135.
p1296[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min response
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the response for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Value: 0: Buffer Vdc until undervoltage, n<p1297 -> F07405
1: Buff. Vdc until undervolt., n<p1297 -> F07405, t>p1295 -> F07406
Note
For p1296 = 1:
The quick stop ramp entered in p1135 must not be equal to zero, to prevent overcurrent shutdown if F07406 is triggered.
p1297[0...n] Vdc_min controller speed threshold (U/f) / Vdc_min n_thresh
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 50.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized .
Note
Exiting the Vdc_min control before reaching motor standstill prevents the regenerative braking current from increasing
significantly at low speeds, and after a pulse inhibit, means that the motor coasts down.
r1298 CO: Vdc controller output (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl output
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6320, 6854
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the actual output of the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller)
p1300[0...n] Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode / Op/cl-lp ctrl_mode
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C2(1), T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6300, 6301,
6851, 8012
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 20 0
Description: Sets the open and closed-loop control mode of a drive.
Value: 0: U/f control with linear characteristic
1: U/f control with linear characteristic and FCC
2: U/f control with parabolic characteristic
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 667
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
4: U/f control with linear characteristic and ECO
7: U/f control for a parabolic characteristic and ECO
20: Speed control (encoderless)
Dependency: For Standard Drive Control (p0096 = 1), settings p1300 = 0, 2 are possible, for Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2) only
p1300 = 20 can be set.
Only operation with U/f characteristic is possible if the rated motor speed is not entered (p0311).
See also: p0300, p0311, p0500
NOTICE
Active slip compensation is required in the U/f control types with Eco mode (p1300 = 4, 7). The scaling of the slip
compensation (p1335) should be set so that the slip is completely compensated (generally 100%).
The Eco mode is only effective in steady-state operation and when the ramp-function generator is not bypassed. In
the case of analog setpoints, if required the tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down should be actively increased for the
ramp-function generator using p1148 in order to reliably signal a steady-state condition.
Note
For motors, type p0300 = 6 and 6xx, operation with U/f control is only recommended for diagnostic purposes.
p1300[0...n] Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode / Op/cl-lp ctrl_mode
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: C2(1), T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6300, 6301,
6851, 8012
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 20 20
Description: Sets the open and closed-loop control mode of a drive.
Value: 0: U/f control with linear characteristic
1: U/f control with linear characteristic and FCC
2: U/f control with parabolic characteristic
4: U/f control with linear characteristic and ECO
7: U/f control for a parabolic characteristic and ECO
20: Speed control (encoderless)
Dependency: For Dynamic Drive Control (p0096 = 2), only p1300 = 20 can be set.
Only operation with U/f characteristic is possible if the rated motor speed is not entered (p0311).
See also: p0300, p0311, p0500
NOTICE
Active slip compensation is required in the U/f control types with Eco mode (p1300 = 4, 7). The scaling of the slip
compensation (p1335) should be set so that the slip is completely compensated (generally 100%).
The Eco mode is only effective in steady-state operation and when the ramp-function generator is not bypassed. In
the case of analog setpoints, if required the tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down should be actively increased for the
ramp-function generator using p1148 in order to reliably signal a steady-state condition.
Note
For motors, type p0300 = 14, operation with U/f control is only recommended for diagnostic purposes.
p1302[0...n] U/f control configuration / U/f config
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the U/f control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
SINAMICS G120X converter
668 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
04 Field orientation Yes No -
05 Starting current when accelerating without flux boost Yes No -
07 Inhibit Iq,max controller I component Yes No -
08 Saturation characteristic for the starting current Yes No -
09 Current boost for fast magnetization Yes No -
NOTICE
p1302 bit 5 = 1: (only for field orientation p1302 bit 4 = 1)
This setting is only selected for very fast acceleration.
Note
For bit 04:
Field orientation for the closed-loop control of application class Standard Drive Control (p0096 = 1). The field orientation
is activated with the automatic calculation if p0096 is set = 1.
For bit 05 (only effective for p1302.4 = 1):
The starting current when accelerating (p1311) generally results in an increase in the absolute current and flux. With
p1302.5 = 1 the current is only increased in the direction of the load. p1302.5 - in conjunction with p1310 and p1311
- are decisive when it comes to defining the quality of the starting response.
For bit 07:
For field orientation (bit04 = 1), an Iq,max controller supports the current limiting controller (see p1341). Inhibiting the
integral component can prevent the drive from stalling under overload conditions.
For bit 08:
Taking into account the saturation characteristic can be activated to improve faster starting operations for high-rating
motors.
For bit 09:
For field orientation (bit04 = 1), while the induction motor is being magnetized, the current is automatically increased
if the magnetization time p0346 is shortened.
p1310[0...n] Starting current (voltage boost) permanent / I_start (Ua) perm
Access level: 2 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6300, 6301,
6851
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Description: Defines the voltage boost as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305).
The magnitude of the permanent voltage boost is reduced with increasing frequency so that at the rated motor
frequency, the rated motor voltage is present.
The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows:
Voltage boost [V] = 1.732 x p0305 (rated motor current [A]) x r0395 (stator/primary section resistance [ohm]) x p1310
(permanent voltage boost [%]) / 100 %
At low output frequencies, there is only a low output voltage in order to maintain the motor flux. However, the output
voltage can be too low in order to achieve the following:
- magnetize the induction motor.
- hold the load.
- compensate for losses in the system.
This is the reason that the output voltage can be increased using p1310.
The voltage boost can be used for both linear as well as square-law U/f characteristics.
For field orientation (p1302.4 = 1, default setting for Standard Drive Control p0096 = 1), in the vicinity of low output
frequencies, a minimum current is impressed with the magnitude of the rated magnetizing current. In this case, for
p1310 = 0%, a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the no-load case. For p1610 = 100 %, a current
setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the rated motor current.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 669
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Dependency: The starting current (voltage boost) is limited by the current limit p0640.
Only for p1302.4 = 0 (no field orientation):
The accuracy of the starting current depends on the setting of the stator and feeder cable resistance (p0350, p0352).
For vector control, the starting current is realized using p1610.
See also: p1300, p1311, p1312, r1315
NOTICE
The starting current (voltage boost) increases the motor temperature (particularly at zero speed).
Note
The starting current as a result of the voltage boost is only effective for U/f control (p1300).
The boost values are combined with one another if the permanent voltage boost (p1310) is used in conjunction with
other boost parameters (acceleration boost (p1311), voltage boost for starting (p1312)).
However, these parameters are assigned the following priorities: p1310 > p1311, p1312
For field orientation (p1302 bit 4 = 1, not PM230, PM250, PM260), then p1310 together with p1311 and p1302.5 are
mainly responsible for the quality of the drive response.
p1311[0...n] Starting current (voltage boost) when accelerating / I_start accel
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6300, 6301,
6851
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: p1311 only results in a voltage boost when accelerating and generates a supplementary torque to accelerate the load.
The voltage boost becomes effective for a positive setpoint increase and disappears as soon as the setpoint has been
reached. The build-up and withdrawal of the voltage boost are smoothed.
The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows (not for field orientation):
Voltage boost [V] = 1.732 * p0305 (rated motor current [A]) x r0395 (stator/primary section resistance [ohm]) x p1311
(voltage boost when accelerating [%]) / 100 %
Dependency: The current limit p0640 limits the boost.
For field orientation (p1302 bit 4 = 1, not PM230, PM250, PM260), p1311 is pre-assigned by the automatic calculation.
For vector control, the starting current is realized using p1611.
See also: p1300, p1310, p1312, r1315
NOTICE
The voltage boost results in a higher motor temperature increase.
Note
The voltage boost when accelerating can improve the response to small, positive setpoint changes.
Assigning priorities for the voltage boosts: refer to p1310
For field orientation (p1302 bit 4 = 1, not PM230, PM250, PM260), then p1311 together with p1310 and p1302.5 are
mainly responsible for the quality of the drive response.
p1312[0...n] Starting current (voltage boost) when starting / I_start start
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6300, 6301,
6851
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Setting for an additional voltage boost when powering-up, however, only for the first acceleration phase.
The voltage boost becomes effective for a positive setpoint increase and disappears as soon as the setpoint has been
reached. The build-up and withdrawal of the voltage boost are smoothed.
SINAMICS G120X converter
670 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Dependency: The current limit p0640 limits the boost.
See also: p1300, p1310, p1311, r1315
NOTICE
The voltage boost results in a higher motor temperature increase.
Note
The voltage boost when accelerating can improve the response to small, positive setpoint changes.
Assigning priorities for the voltage boosts: refer to p1310
For field orientation (p1302.4 = 1, not PM230, PM250, PM260), p1312 of the voltage boost is also added in the direction
of the load current (non-linear).
r1315 Voltage boost total / U_boost total
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6301, 6851
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the total resulting voltage boost in volt.
For field orientation (p1302.4 = 1, not for PM230, PM250, PM260), at low speeds, as a minimum the magnetizing
current is set, so that the voltage depends on r0331.
Dependency: See also: p1310, p1311, p1312
p1331[0...n] Voltage limiting / U_lim
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6300
Min: Max: Factory setting:
50.00 [Vrms] 2000.00 [Vrms] 1000.00 [Vrms]
Description: Limiting the voltage setpoint.
This means that the output voltage can be reduced with respect to the calculated maximum voltage r0071 and the start
of field weakening.
Note
The output voltage is only limited if, as a result of p1331, the maximum output voltage (r0071) is fallen below.
p1333[0...n] U/f control FCC starting frequency / U/f FCC f_start
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6301
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets the starting frequency at which FCC (Flux Current Control) is activated.
Dependency: The correct operating mode must be set (p1300 = 1, 6).
WARNING
An excessively low value can result in instability.
Note
For p1333 = 0 Hz, the FCC starting frequency is automatically set to 6 % of the rated motor frequency.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 671
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1334[0...n] U/f control slip compensation starting frequency / Slip comp start
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6310, 6853
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets the starting frequency of the slip compensation.
Note
For p1334 = 0, the starting frequency of the slip compensation is automatically set to 6 % of the rated motor frequency.
p1335[0...n] Slip compensation scaling / Slip comp scal
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6300, 6310,
6853
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 600.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Sets the setpoint for slip compensation in [%] referred to r0330 (motor rated slip).
p1335 = 0.0 %: Slip compensation deactivated.
p1335 = 100.0 %: The slip is completely compensated.
Dependency: Prerequisite for a precise slip compensation for p1335 = 100 % are the precise motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360).
If the parameters are not precisely known, a precise compensation can be achieved by varying p1335.
For U/f control types with Eco optimization (4 and 7), the slip compensation must be activated in order to guarantee
correct operation.
For p0096 = 1 (Standard Drive Control), the scaling of the slip compensation is set as default to 100%.
Note
The purpose of slip compensation is to maintain a constant motor speed regardless of the applied load. The fact that
the motor speed decreases with increasing load is a typical characteristic of induction motors.
For synchronous motors, this effect does not occur and the parameter has no effect in this case.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sector), the slip compensation is internally disabled in order
to be able to precisely set the output frequency.
If p1335 is changed during commissioning (p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be able to be
set. The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1335 have been changed by a parameter that was set when the
drive was commissioned (e.g. p0300).
p1335[0...n] Slip compensation scaling / Slip comp scal
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6300, 6310
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 600.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the setpoint for slip compensation in [%] referred to r0330 (motor rated slip).
p1335 = 0.0 %: Slip compensation deactivated.
p1335 = 100.0 %: The slip is completely compensated.
Dependency: Prerequisite for a precise slip compensation for p1335 = 100 % are the precise motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360).
If the parameters are not precisely known, a precise compensation can be achieved by varying p1335.
For U/f control types with Eco optimization (4 and 7), the slip compensation must be activated in order to guarantee
correct operation.
SINAMICS G120X converter
672 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The purpose of slip compensation is to maintain a constant motor speed regardless of the applied load. The fact that
the motor speed decreases with increasing load is a typical characteristic of induction motors.
For synchronous motors, this effect does not occur and the parameter has no effect in this case.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sector), the slip compensation is internally disabled in order
to be able to precisely set the output frequency.
If p1335 is changed during commissioning (p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be able to be
set. The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1335 have been changed by a parameter that was set when the
drive was commissioned (e.g. p0300).
p1336[0...n] Slip compensation limit value / Slip comp lim val
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6310, 6853
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [%] 600.00 [%] 250.00 [%]
Description: Sets the limit value for slip compensation in [%] referred to r0330 (motor rated slip).
r1337 CO: Actual slip compensation / Slip comp act val
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6310, 6853
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the actual compensated slip [%] referred to r0330 (rated motor slip).
Dependency: p1335 > 0 %: Slip compensation active.
See also: p1335
p1338[0...n] U/f mode resonance damping gain / Uf Res_damp gain
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6300, 6310,
6853
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 100.00 0.00
Description: Sets the gain for resonance damping for U/f control.
Dependency: See also: p1300, p1339, p1349
Note
The resonance damping function dampens active current oscillations that frequency occur under no-load conditions.
The resonance damping is active in a range from approximately 6 % of the rated motor frequency (p0310). The shutoff
frequency is determined by p1349.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sectors), the resonance damping is internally disabled in order
that the output frequency can be precisely set.
p1339[0...n] U/f mode resonance damping filter time constant / Uf Res_damp T
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6310, 6853
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms] 20.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the filter time constant for resonance damping for U/f control.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 673
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Dependency: See also: p1300, p1338, p1349
p1340[0...n] I_max frequency controller proportional gain / I_max_ctrl Kp
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6300
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 0.500 0.000
Description: Sets the proportional gain of the I_max frequency controller.
The I_max controller reduces the drive converter output current if the maximum current (r0067) is exceeded.
In the U/f operating modes (p1300) for the I_max control, one controller is used that acts on the output frequency and
one controller that acts on the output voltage. The frequency controller reduces the current by decreasing the
converter output frequency. The frequency is reduced down to a minimum value (equaling twice rated slip). If the
overcurrent condition cannot be successfully resolved using this measure, then the drive converter output voltage is
reduced using the I_max voltage controller. Once the overcurrent condition has been resolved, the drive is accelerated
along the ramp set in p1120 (ramp-up time).
Dependency: In the U/f modes (p1300) for textile applications and for external voltage setpoints, only the I_max voltage controller
is used.
NOTICE
When deactivating the I_max controller, the following must be carefully observed:
When the maximum current (r0067) is exceeded, the output current is no longer reduced. The drive is switched off
when the overcurrent limits are exceeded.
Note
The I_max limiting controller becomes ineffective if the ramp-function generator is deactivated with p1122 = 1.
p1341 = 0:
I_max frequency controller deactivated and I_max voltage controller activated over the complete speed range.
p1341[0...n] I_max frequency controller integral time / I_max_ctrl Tn
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6300, 6850
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 50.000 [s] 0.300 [s]
Description: Sets the integral time for the I_max frequency controller.
Dependency: See also: p1340
Note
When p1341 = 0, the current limiting controller influencing the frequency is deactivated and only the current limiting
controller influencing the output voltage remains active (p1345, p1346).
In the case of power units with regenerative feedback (PM250, PM260), current limitation control for a regenerative
load is always implemented by influencing the frequency. This current limiting function is deactivated with p1340 =
p1341 = 0.
r1343 CO: I_max controller frequency output / I_max_ctrl f_outp
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6300, 6850
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the effective frequency limit.
Dependency: See also: p1340
SINAMICS G120X converter
674 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r1344 I_max controller voltage output / I_max_ctrl U_outp
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6300
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the amount by which the converter output voltage is reduced.
Dependency: See also: p1340
p1345[0...n] I_max voltage controller proportional gain / I_max_U_ctrl Kp
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6300, 7017
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 100000.000 0.000
Description: Sets the proportional gain for the I_max voltage controller.
Dependency: See also: p1340
Note
The controller settings are also used in the current controller of the DC braking (refer to p1232).
p1346[0...n] I_max voltage controller integral time / I_max_U_ctrl Tn
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6300, 7017
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 50.000 [s] 0.030 [s]
Description: Sets the integral time for the I_max voltage controller.
Dependency: See also: p1340
Note
The controller settings are also used in the current controller of the DC braking (refer to p1232).
For p1346 = 0, the following applies:
The integral time of the I_max voltage controller is deactivated.
r1348 CO: U/f control Eco factor actual value / U/f Eco fac act v
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6300, 6301
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the economic factor determined for optimizing motor consumption.
Dependency: See also: p1335
Note
The value is only determined for operating modes with Economic (p1300 = 4, 7).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 675
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1349[0...n] U/f mode resonance damping maximum frequency / Uf res_damp f_max
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6310
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets the maximum output frequency for resonance damping for U/f control.
Resonance damping is inactive above this output frequency.
Dependency: See also: p1338, p1339
Note
For p1349 = 0, the changeover limit is automatically set to 95 % of the rated motor frequency - however, to a max. of
45 Hz.
p1382[0...n] Saturation limit for flux setpoint / Max FluxSaturation
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
100 [%] 130 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Maximum flux setpoint (saturation limit) for calculating the EMF in the range of the impressed starting current.
p1400[0...n] Speed control configuration / n_ctrl config
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6490
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 1000
0000 0010 0001 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the closed-loop speed control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active Yes No 6040
05 Kp/Tn adaptation active Yes No 6040
15 Sensorless vector control speed precontrol Yes No 6030
16 I component for limiting Enable Hold 6030
18 Reserved - - -
19 Anti-windup for integral component Yes No 6030
20 Acceleration model ON OFF 6031
21 Free Tn reduction active Yes No 6030
22 Reserved - - -
25 Acceleration torque instantaneous in the I/f mode Yes No -
Note
For bit 16:
When the bit is set, the integral component of the speed controller is only held if it reaches the torque limit.
For bit 19, 20:
When this bit is set, speed overshoots when accelerating along the torque limit and for load surges are reduced.
For bit 20:
The acceleration model for the speed setpoint is only active if p1496 is not zero.
For bit 25:
When the bit is set, for high dynamic starting in the I/f mode, the acceleration precontrol torque smoothing only has a
short minimum time (4 ms).
SINAMICS G120X converter
676 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1400[0...n] Speed control configuration / n_ctrl config
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6490
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0000 0011 1000 1000
0000 0010 0001 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the closed-loop speed control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active Yes No 6040
05 Kp/Tn adaptation active Yes No 6040
15 Sensorless vector control speed precontrol Yes No 6030
16 I component for limiting Enable Hold 6030
18 Reserved - - -
19 Anti-windup for integral component Yes No 6030
20 Acceleration model ON OFF 6031
21 Free Tn reduction active Yes No 6030
22 Reserved - - -
25 Acceleration torque instantaneous in the I/f mode Yes No -
Note
For bit 16:
When the bit is set, the integral component of the speed controller is only held if it reaches the torque limit.
For bit 19, 20:
When this bit is set, speed overshoots when accelerating along the torque limit and for load surges are reduced.
For bit 20:
The acceleration model for the speed setpoint is only active if p1496 is not zero.
For bit 25:
When the bit is set, for high dynamic starting in the I/f mode, the acceleration precontrol torque smoothing only has a
short minimum time (4 ms).
p1401[0...n] Flux control configuration / Flux ctrl config
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6491
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0000 0000 1110 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for flux setpoint control
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
01 Flux setpoint differentiation active Yes No 6723
02 Flux build-up control active Yes No 6722,
6723
03 Flux characteristic load-dependent Yes No 6725
06 Quick magnetizing Yes No 6722
09 Dynamic load-dependent flux boost Yes No 6790,
6823
10 Flux boost low speed Yes No -
14 Efficiency optimization 2 active Yes No 6722,
6837
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 677
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
RESM: reluctance synchronous motor (synchronous reluctance motor)
For bit 01:
Initially, the flux is only established with a low rate of rise when magnetizing the induction motor. The flux setpoint p1570
is reached again at the end of the magnetizing time p0346.
The flux differentiation can be switched out if a significant ripple occurs in the field-generating current setpoint (r0075)
when entering the field weakening range. However, this is not suitable for fast acceleration operations because then,
the flux decays more slowly and the voltage limiting responds.
For bit 02:
The flux build-up control operates during the magnetizing phase p0346 of the induction motor. If it is switched out, a
constant current setpoint is injected and the flux is built up corresponding to the rotor time constant.
For bit 03:
Synchronous-reluctance motor:
Activation of the load-dependent optimum flux characteristic.
For bit 06:
Magnetizing is performed with maximum current (0.9 * r0067). With active identification of the stator resistance (see
p0621) quick magnetizing is internally deactivated and alarm A07416 is displayed. During a flying restart of a rotating
motor (see p1200) no quick magnetizing takes place.
For bit 09:
Synchronous reluctance motor (RESM):
Dynamic increase in the flux setpoint when torque is quickly established.
For bit 10:
Synchronous reluctance motor (RESM):
For load-dependent optimum flux characteristic (p1401.3 = 1) the flux setpoint is increased at low speeds.
For bit 14:
When the function is activated, the following applies:
- the optimum flux is calculated and the power loss is entered for optimization purposes
- the efficiency optimization (p1580) is not active.
It only makes sense to activate this function if the dynamic response requirements of the speed controller are low.
In order to avoid oscillations, if required, the speed controller parameters should be adapted (increase Tn, reduce Kp).
Further, the smoothing time of the flux setpoint filter (p1582) should be increased.
p1402[0...n] Closed-loop current control and motor model configuration / I_ctrl config
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the closed-loop control and the motor model.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
02 Current controller adaptation active Yes No -
10 d-current controller adaptation model-based Yes No -
12 q-current controller adaptation model-based Yes No -
13 Current controller decoupling filter Yes No -
Note
For bit 02:
The current controller adaptation (p0391 ... p0393) is only calculated when the bit is set.
For bits 10, 12:
Only for closed-loop controlled reluctance motor: The gain of the d, q current controller is realized adaptively at the
saturation model depending on the operating point.
Parameters p1720, p1715 act as scaling factor.
For bit 13: only permanent magnet synchronous motors
For stabilization in the field weakening range.
SINAMICS G120X converter
678 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1402[0...n] Closed-loop current control and motor model configuration / I_ctrl config
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Data type: Unsigned16
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the closed-loop control and the motor model.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
02 Current controller adaptation active Yes No -
Note
For bit 02:
The current controller adaptation (p0391 ... p0393) is only calculated when the bit is set.
r1407.0...23 CO/BO: Status word speed controller / ZSW n_ctrl
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2522
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the status word of the speed controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 U/f control active Yes No -
01 Encoderless operation active Yes No -
02 Reserved - - -
03 Speed control active Yes No 6040
05 Speed controller I component frozen Yes No 6040
06 Speed controller I component set Yes No 6040
07 Torque limit reached Yes No 6060
08 Upper torque limit active Yes No 6060
09 Lower torque limit active Yes No 6060
10 Reserved - - -
11 Speed setpoint limited Yes No 6030
12 Ramp-function generator set Yes No -
13 Encoderless operation due to a fault Yes No -
14 I/f control active Yes No -
15 Torque limit reached (without precontrol) Yes No 6060
17 Speed limiting control active Yes No 6640
23 Acceleration model activated Yes No -
r1408.0...14 CO/BO: Status word current controller / ZSW I_ctrl
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2530
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the status word of the current controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Current controller active Active Not active -
01 Id control I component limiting Active Not active 6714
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 679
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
03 Voltage limiting Active Not active 6714
10 Speed adaptation limiting Active Not active -
12 Motor stalled Yes No -
13 Separately excited synchronous motor is excited Yes No -
14 Current model SESM magnetizing excit. current limited to Yes No -
zero
p1416[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 time constant / n_set_filt 1 T
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6020, 6030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [ms] 5000.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the time constant for the speed setpoint filter 1 (PT1).
r1438 CO: Speed controller speed setpoint / n_ctrl n_set
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 3001, 6020,
6031
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display and connector output of the speed setpoint after setpoint limiting for the P component of the speed controller.
For U/f operation, the value that is displayed is of no relevance.
Note
In the standard state (the reference model is deactivated), r1438 = r1439.
r1445 CO: Actual speed smoothed / n_act smooth
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6040
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display and connector output for the actual smoothed speed actual value of the speed control.
p1452[0...n] Speed controller speed actual value smoothing time (sensorless) / n_C n_act T_s SL
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6020, 6040
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [ms] 32000.00 [ms] 10.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time for the actual speed of the speed controller for encoderless closed-loop speed control.
Note
The smoothing must be increased if there is gear backlash. For longer smoothing times, the integral time of the speed
controller must also be increased (e.g. using p0340 = 4).
SINAMICS G120X converter
680 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1461[0...n] Speed controller Kp adaptation speed upper scaling / n_ctr Kp n up scal
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6050
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 200000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the P gain of the speed controller for the upper adaptation speed range (> p1465).
The entry is made referred to the P gain for the lower adaptation speed range of the speed controller (% referred to
p1470).
Dependency: See also: p1464, p1465
Note
If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition
p1464, then the controller gain below p1465 is adapted with p1461. This means that an adaptation can be implemented
for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.
p1463[0...n] Speed controller Tn adaptation speed upper scaling / n_ctr Tn n up scal
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6050
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 200000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the integral time of the speed controller after the adaptation speed range (> p1465).
The entry is made referred to the integral time for the lower adaptation speed range of the speed controller (% referred
to p1472).
Dependency: See also: p1464, p1465
Note
If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition point
p1464, then the controller integral time below p1465 is adapted with p1463. This means that an adaptation can be
implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.
p1464[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed lower / n_ctrl n lower
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6050
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the lower adaptation speed of the speed controller.
No adaptation is effective below this speed.
Dependency: See also: p1461, p1463, p1465
Note
If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition point
p1464, then the controller below p1465 is adapted with p1461 or p1463. This means that an adaptation can be
implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.
p1465[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed upper / n_ctrl n upper
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6050
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm]
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 681
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the upper adaptation speed of the speed controller.
No adaptation is effective above this speed.
For the proportional gain, p1470 x p1461 is effective.
For the integral time, p1472 x p1463 is effective.
Dependency: See also: p1461, p1463, p1464
Note
If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition point
p1464, then the controller below p1465 is adapted with p1461 or p1463. This means that an adaptation can be
implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.
r1468 CO: Speed controller P-gain effective / n_ctr Kp eff
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6040
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the effective P gain of the speed controller.
Dependency: The connector output signal r1468 is increased by a factor of 100 in order to improve the resolution.
r1469 Speed controller integral time effective / n_ctr Tn eff
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 5040, 5042,
6040
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the effective integral time of the speed controller.
p1470[0...n] Speed controller encoderless operation P-gain / n_ctrl SL Kp
Access level: 2 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6040, 6050
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 999999.000 0.300
Description: Sets the P gain for encoderless operation for the speed controller.
Note
The product p0341 x p0342 is taken into account when automatically calculating the speed controller (p0340 = 1, 3, 4).
p1472[0...n] Speed controller encoderless operation integral time / n_ctrl SL Tn
Access level: 2 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6040, 6050
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [ms] 100000.0 [ms] 20.0 [ms]
Description: Set the integral time for encoderless operation for the speed controller.
Note
The integral component is stopped if the complete controller output or the sum of controller output and torque precontrol
reach the torque limit.
SINAMICS G120X converter
682 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r1482 CO: Speed controller I torque output / n_ctrl I-M_outp
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 5040, 5042,
5210, 6030, 6040
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Display and connector output for the torque setpoint at the output of the I speed controller.
r1493 CO: Moment of inertia total, scaled / M_inert tot scal
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 25_1 Unit selection: p0100 Function diagram: 6031
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [kgm²] - [kgm²] - [kgm²]
Description: Display and connector output for the parameterized total moment of inertia.
The value is calculated as follows: (p0341 * p0342) + p1496
p1496[0...n] Acceleration precontrol scaling / a_prectrl scal
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6020, 6031
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 10000.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the acceleration precontrol of the speed/velocity controller.
Dependency: See also: p0341, p0342
WARNING
The acceleration precontrol r1518 is kept at the old value if the ramp-function generator tracking (r1199.5) is active or
the ramp-function generator output is set (r1199.3). This is used to avoid torque peaks. Depending on the application,
it may therefore be necessary to disable the ramp-function generator tracking (p1145 = 0) or the acceleration
precontrol (p1496 = 0).
The acceleration precontrol is set to zero, if the Vdc control is active (r0056.14/15).
Note
The parameter is set to 100% by the rotating measurement (refer to p1960).
The acceleration precontrol may not be used if the speed setpoint manifests significant ripple (e.g. analog setpoint) and
the rounding-off in the speed ramp-function generator is disabled.
We also recommend that the precontrol mode is not used if there is gearbox backlash.
p1496[0...n] Acceleration precontrol scaling / a_prectrl scal
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6020, 6031
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 10000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the acceleration precontrol of the speed/velocity controller.
Dependency: See also: p0341, p0342
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 683
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
WARNING
The acceleration precontrol r1518 is kept at the old value if the ramp-function generator tracking (r1199.5) is active or
the ramp-function generator output is set (r1199.3). This is used to avoid torque peaks. Depending on the application,
it may therefore be necessary to disable the ramp-function generator tracking (p1145 = 0) or the acceleration
precontrol (p1496 = 0).
The acceleration precontrol is set to zero, if the Vdc control is active (r0056.14/15).
Note
The parameter is set to 100% by the rotating measurement (refer to p1960).
The acceleration precontrol may not be used if the speed setpoint manifests significant ripple (e.g. analog setpoint) and
the rounding-off in the speed ramp-function generator is disabled.
We also recommend that the precontrol mode is not used if there is gearbox backlash.
r1508 CO: Torque setpoint before supplementary torque / M_set bef. M_suppl
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6030, 6060,
6722
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the torque setpoint before entering the supplementary torque.
For closed-loop speed control, r1508 corresponds to the speed controller output.
p1517[0...n] Accelerating torque smoothing time constant / M_accel T_smooth
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms] 4.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the accelerating torque.
Note
The acceleration precontrol is inhibited if the smoothing is set to the maximum value.
r1518[0...1] CO: Accelerating torque / M_accel
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the accelerating torque for precontrol of the speed controller.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed
Dependency: See also: p0341, p0342, p1496
p1520[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper / M_max upper
Access level: 2 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2003 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6020, 6630
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-1000000.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
SINAMICS G120X converter
684 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the fixed, upper torque limit.
Dependency: See also: p1521, p1522, p1523, r1538, r1539
DANGER
Negative values when setting the upper torque limit (p1520 < 0) can result in the motor accelerating in an
uncontrollable fashion.
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note
The torque limit is limited to 400% of the rated motor torque. When automatically calculating the motor/closed-loop
control parameters (p0340), the torque limit is set to match the current limit (p0640).
p1521[0...n] CO: Torque limit lower / M_max lower
Access level: 2 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2003 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6020, 6630
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-20000000.00 [Nm] 1000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the fixed, lower torque limit.
Dependency: See also: p1520, p1522, p1523
DANGER
Positive values when setting the lower torque limit (p1521 > 0) can result in the motor accelerating in an uncontrollable
fashion.
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note
The torque limit is limited to 400% of the rated motor torque. When automatically calculating the motor/closed-loop
control parameters (p0340), the torque limit is set to match the current limit (p0640).
p1522[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper / M_max upper
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2003 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6630
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1520[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the upper torque limit.
Dependency: See also: p1520, p1521, p1523
DANGER
Negative values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled
manner.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 685
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1523[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower / M_max lower
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2003 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6020, 6630
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1521[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the lower torque limit.
Dependency: See also: p1520, p1521, p1522
DANGER
Positive values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled
manner.
p1524[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper/motoring scaling / M_max up/mot scal
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 5620, 5630
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-2000.0 [%] 2000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the upper torque limit or the torque limit when motoring.
Dependency: p1400.4 = 0: upper/lower
p1400.4 = 1: motoring / regenerating
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note
This parameter can be freely interconnected.
The value has the meaning stated above if it is interconnected from connector input p1528.
p1525[0...n] CO: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6630
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-2000.0 [%] 2000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the lower torque limit.
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note
This parameter can be freely interconnected.
The value has the meaning stated above if it is interconnected from connector input p1528.
r1526 CO: Torque limit upper without offset / M_max up w/o offs
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6060, 6630,
6640
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
SINAMICS G120X converter
686 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Display and connector output for the upper torque limit of all torque limits without offset.
Dependency: See also: p1520, p1521, p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529
r1527 CO: Torque limit lower without offset / M_max low w/o offs
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6060, 6630,
6640
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Display and connector output for the lower torque limit of all torque limits without offset.
Dependency: See also: p1520, p1521, p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529
p1528[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6630
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1524[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the upper torque limit in p1522.
DANGER
For p1400.4 = 0 (torque limiting, upper/lower) the following applies:
Negative values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled
manner.
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p1529[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6630
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1525[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the lower torque limit in p1523.
DANGER
For p1400.4 = 0 (torque limiting, upper/lower) the following applies:
Positive values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled
manner.
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 687
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1530[0...n] Power limit motoring / P_max mot
Access level: 2 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 14_5 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6640
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [kW] 100000.00 [kW] 0.00 [kW]
Description: Sets the power limit when motoring.
Dependency: See also: p0500, p1531
Note
The power limit is limited to 300% of the rated motor power.
p1531[0...n] Power limit regenerative / P_max gen
Access level: 2 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 14_5 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6640
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-100000.00 [kW] -0.01 [kW] -0.01 [kW]
Description: Sets the regenerative power limit.
Dependency: See also: r0206, p0500, p1530
Note
The power limit is limited to 300% of the rated motor power.
For power units without energy recovery capability, the regenerative power limit is preset to 30 % of the power r0206[0].
For a braking resistor connected to the DC link (p0219 > 0), the power limit when generating is automatically adapted.
For power units with energy recovery, the parameter is limited to the negative value of r0206[2].
r1533 Current limit torque-generating total / Iq_max total
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6640
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the maximum torque/force generating current as a result if all current limits.
r1536[0...1] Current limit maximum torque-generating current / Isq_max
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6640, 6710
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the maximum limit for the torque-generating current component.
Index 0 indicates the signal limited by the Vdc controller.
Index: [0] = Limited
[1] = Unlimited
SINAMICS G120X converter
688 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r1537[0...1] Current limit minimum torque-generating current / Isq_min
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6640, 6710
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the minimum limit for the torque-generating current component.
Index 0 indicates the signal limited by the Vdc controller.
Index: [0] = Limited
[1] = Unlimited
r1538 CO: Upper effective torque limit / M_max upper eff
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6020, 6640
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Display and connector output for the actual effective upper torque limit.
Note
The effective upper torque limit is reduced with respect to the selected upper torque limit p1520, if the current limit
p0640 is reduced or the rated magnetizing current of the induction motor p0320 is increased.
This may be the case for rotating measurements (see p1960).
The torque limit p1520 can be re-calculated using p0340 = 1, 3 or 5.
r1539 CO: Lower effective torque limit / M_max lower eff
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6020, 6640
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Display and connector output for the actual effective lower torque limit.
Note
The effective lower torque limit is reduced with respect to the selected lower torque limit p1521, if the current limit p0640
is reduced or the rated magnetizing current of the induction motor p0320 is increased.
This may be the case for rotating measurements (see p1960).
The torque limit p1520 can be re-calculated using p0340 = 1, 3 or 5.
r1547[0...1] CO: Torque limit for speed controller output / M_max outp n_ctrl
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2003 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the torque limit to limit the speed controller output.
Index: [0] = Upper limit
[1] = Lower limit
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 689
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r1548[0...1] CO: Stall current limit torque-generating maximum / Isq_max stall
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the limit for the torque-generating current component using the stall calculation, the current limit of the power
unit as well as the parameterization in p0640.
Index: [0] = Upper limit
[1] = Lower limit
p1552[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling without offset / M_max up w/o offs
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the upper torque limiting to limit the speed controller output without taking into
account the current and power limits.
p1553[0...n] Stall limit scaling / Stall limit scal
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
80.0 [%] 130.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling of the stall limit for the start of field weakening.
DANGER
If the stall current limit is increased, then the q current setpoint can exceed the stall limit; as a consequence, a
hysteresis effect can occur when loading and unloading.
p1554[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling without offset / M_max low w/o offs
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the lower torque limiting to limit the speed controller output without taking into
account the current and power limits.
r1566[0...n] Flux reduction torque factor transition value / Flux red M trans
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6790
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
SINAMICS G120X converter
690 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: The following applies for a synchronous reluctance motor:
Displays the transition value for the start of the evaluation of the optimum flux characteristic.
The value is referred to the rated motor torque.
Note
The transition value corresponds with the lower limit of the flux setpoint (p1581).
For a lower absolute torque setpoint, the flux setpoint remains at the lower limit (p1581).
p1567[0...n] Magnetization rate time scaling / Mag Tv scale
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6790
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [%] 1000 [%] 100 [%]
Description: The following applies for a synchronous reluctance motor:
Sets the scaling of the rate time Tv for dynamic flux increase when the torque is quickly established.
The value is referred to the inverse value of the rated motor frequency.
Tv = p1567 / 100 % / p0310
Dependency: See also: p1401
Note
The "Dynamic load-dependent flux boost" function can be deactivated using p1401.9 = 0.
r1568[0...5] CO: Synchronous reluctance motor flux channel / RESM flux channel
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for signals of the flux channel for a synchronous reluctance motor (RESM).
The values are referred to the rated motor flux of the in-line axis (p0357 * r0331).
Index: [0] = Setpoint before filter
[1] = Optimum flux characteristic output
[2] = Minimum value at low speed
[3] = Dynamic load-dependent boost
[4] = Field weakening value total
[5] = Field weakening value precontrol
Note
RESM: reluctance synchronous motor (synchronous reluctance motor)
p1570[0...n] CO: Flux setpoint / Flex setp
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6722
Min: Max: Factory setting:
50.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the flux setpoint referred to rated motor flux.
The following applies for a synchronous reluctance motor:
Scaling the flux setpoint.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 691
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note
For p1570 > 100%, the flux setpoint increases as a function of the load from 100% (no-load operation) to the setting
in p1570 (above rated motor torque), if p1580 > 0% has been set.
The following applies for a synchronous reluctance motor:
The scaling allows the flux setpoint to be adapted when operating with load-dependent optimum flux characteristic or
with constant flux setpoint.
p1570[0...n] CO: Flux setpoint / Flex setp
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
G120X_USS (PM330) Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6722
Min: Max: Factory setting:
50.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 103.0 [%]
Description: Sets the flux setpoint referred to rated motor flux.
The following applies for a synchronous reluctance motor:
Scaling the flux setpoint.
Dependency: See also: p0500
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note
For p1570 > 100%, the flux setpoint increases as a function of the load from 100% (no-load operation) to the setting
in p1570 (above rated motor torque), if p1580 > 0% has been set.
The following applies for a synchronous reluctance motor:
The scaling allows the flux setpoint to be adapted when operating with load-dependent optimum flux characteristic or
with constant flux setpoint.
p1574[0...n] Voltage reserve dynamic / U_reserve dyn
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6723, 6724
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [Vrms] 150.0 [Vrms] 10.0 [Vrms]
Description: Sets a dynamic voltage reserve.
Dependency: See also: p0500
Note
In the field weakening range, it must be expected that the control dynamic performance is somewhat restricted due to
the limited possibilities of controlling/adjusting the voltage. This can be improved by increasing the voltage reserve.
Increasing the reserve reduces the steady-state maximum output voltage (r0071).
p1574[0...n] Voltage reserve dynamic / U_reserve dyn
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
G120X_USS (PM330) Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6723, 6724
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [Vrms] 150.0 [Vrms] 2.0 [Vrms]
SINAMICS G120X converter
692 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets a dynamic voltage reserve.
Dependency: See also: p0500
Note
In the field weakening range, it must be expected that the control dynamic performance is somewhat restricted due to
the limited possibilities of controlling/adjusting the voltage. This can be improved by increasing the voltage reserve.
Increasing the reserve reduces the steady-state maximum output voltage (r0071).
p1575[0...n] Voltage target value limit / U_tgt val lim
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6725
Min: Max: Factory setting:
50.00 [%] 300.00 [%] 200.00 [%]
Description: Sets the limit of the voltage target value.
In steady-state field weakening operation this corresponds to the required output voltage.
The value of 100% refers to p0304.
Note
The output voltage is only limited if the maximum output voltage (r0071) minus the voltage reserve (p1574)
corresponds to a value higher than p1575.
Limiting via p1575 allows the influence of the voltage ripple of the line supply voltage to be eliminated at the operating
point.
p1578[0...n] Flux reduction flux decrease time constant / Flux red dec T
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6791
Min: Max: Factory setting:
20 [ms] 5000 [ms] 200 [ms]
Description: The following applies for a synchronous reluctance motor:
Sets the time constant for reducing the flux setpoint for a load-dependent optimum flux characteristic.
Dependency: See also: p1579
Note
To avoid remagnetization processes for load-dependent flux characteristics and for fast load changes, the time
constant to reduce the flux setpoint must be set to an appropriately high value.
As a consequence, it is preset with a multiple of the time constant used for the flux build up.
p1579[0...n] Flux reduction flux build-up time constant / Flux red incr T
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6791
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 5000 [ms] 4 [ms]
Description: The following applies for a synchronous reluctance motor:
Sets the time constant for establishing the flux setpoint for a load-dependent optimum flux characteristic.
Dependency: See also: p1578
Note
To quickly establish the flux for torque changes, an appropriately short time constant for the flux build-up must be
selected.
It is preset with the inverse value of the rated motor frequency (p0310).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 693
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1580[0...n] Efficiency optimization / Efficiency opt.
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6722
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [%] 100 [%] 0 [%]
Description: Sets the efficiency optimization.
When optimizing the efficiency, the flux setpoint of the closed-loop control is adapted as a function of the load.
For p1580 = 100 %, under no-load operating conditions, the flux setpoint is reduced to 50 % of the rated motor flux.
Note
It only makes sense to activate this function if the dynamic response requirements of the speed controller are low.
In order to avoid oscillations, if required, the speed controller parameters should be adapted (increase Tn, reduce Kp).
Further, the smoothing time of the flux setpoint filter (p1582) should be increased.
p1580[0...n] Efficiency optimization / Efficiency opt.
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
G120X_USS (PM330) Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6722
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [%] 100 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the efficiency optimization.
When optimizing the efficiency, the flux setpoint of the closed-loop control is adapted as a function of the load.
For p1580 = 100 %, under no-load operating conditions, the flux setpoint is reduced to 50 % of the rated motor flux.
Dependency: See also: p0500
Note
It only makes sense to activate this function if the dynamic response requirements of the speed controller are low.
In order to avoid oscillations, if required, the speed controller parameters should be adapted (increase Tn, reduce Kp).
Further, the smoothing time of the flux setpoint filter (p1582) should be increased.
p1581[0...n] Flux reduction factor / Flux red factor
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [%] 100 [%] 100 [%]
Description: The following applies for a synchronous reluctance motor:
Sets the lower limit of the flux setpoint to evaluate the optimum flux characteristic.
The value is referred to the rated motor flux (p0357 * r0331).
p1582[0...n] Flux setpoint smoothing time / Flux setp T_smth
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6722, 6724
Min: Max: Factory setting:
4 [ms] 5000 [ms] 15 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time for the flux setpoint.
SINAMICS G120X converter
694 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1584[0...n] Field weakening operation flux setpoint smoothing time / Field weak T_smth
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6722
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 20000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time for the flux setpoint in the field-weakening range
Recommendation: Smoothing should be especially used if there is no regenerative feedback into the line supply. This means that the DC
link voltage can quickly increase in regenerative operation
Note
Only the flux setpoint rise is smoothed
p1586[0...n] Field weakening characteristic scaling / Field weak scal
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
80.0 [%] 120.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling of the precontrol characteristic for the start of field weakening.
For values above 100 % and for partial load situations, the field weakening starts at higher speeds.
Note
If the start of field weakening is shifted to lower speeds, then the voltage reserve is increased for partial load situations.
If the start of field weakening is shifted to higher speeds, the voltage reserve is appropriately reduced so that for fast
load changes, it can be expected that this will have a negative impact on the dynamic performance.
p1590[0...n] Flux controller P gain / Flux controller Kp
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6723
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 999999.0 10.0
Description: Sets the proportional gain for the flux controller.
Note
The value is automatically pre-assigned dependent on the motor when the drive system is first commissioned.
When calculating controller parameters (p0340 = 4), this value is re-calculated.
p1592[0...n] Flux controller integral time / Flux controller Tn
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6723
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 30 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral time for the flux controller.
Note
The value is automatically pre-assigned dependent on the motor when the drive system is first commissioned.
When calculating controller parameters (p0340 = 4), this value is re-calculated.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 695
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r1593[0...1] CO: Field weakening controller / flux controller output / Field/Fl_ctrl outp
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6724
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Display and connector output for the output of the field weakening controller (synchronous motor).
Index: [0] = PI output
[1] = I output
p1595[0...n] Field weakening controller additional setpoint / Field_ctr add_setp
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6726
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-80.00 [%] 50.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets an additional setpoint for the field weakening controller.
The value refers to the dynamic voltage reserve (p1574).
Note
For a value equal to zero, the field weakening controller is activated when the maximum voltage, calculated with the
average value of the DC link voltage, is reached.
Negative values cause the field weakening controller to intervene earlier, so that the voltage can move away from the
modulation depth limit.
p1596[0...n] Field weakening controller integral-action time / Field_ctrl Tn
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6723, 6724
Min: Max: Factory setting:
10 [ms] 10000 [ms] 300 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral-action time of the field-weakening controller.
r1597 CO: Field weakening controller output / Field_ctrl outp
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6723
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the output of the field weakening controller.
The value is referred to the rated motor flux.
r1598 CO: Total flux setpoint / Flux setp total
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6714, 6723,
6724, 6725, 6726
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
SINAMICS G120X converter
696 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Displays the effective flux setpoint.
The value is referred to the rated motor flux.
p1601[0...n] Current injection ramp time / I_inject t_ramp
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6790
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 [ms] 10000 [ms] 20 [ms]
Description: Synchronous-reluctance motor:
Sets the ramp-up time of the current setpoint (p1610, p1611) when switching over from closed-loop controlled to open-
loop controlled operation.
p1610[0...n] Torque setpoint static (sensorless) / M_set static
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6700, 6721,
6722, 6726
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Description: Sets the static torque setpoint for sensorless vector control in the low speed range.
This parameter is entered as a percentage referred to the rated motor torque (r0333).
For sensorless vector control, when the motor model is shut down, an absolute current is impressed. p1610 represents
the maximum load that occurs at a constant setpoint speed.
NOTICE
p1610 should always be set to at least 10 % higher than the maximum steady-state load that can occur.
Note
For p1610 = 0%, a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the no-load case (ASM: rated magnetizing current,
RESM: no-load magnetizing current).
For p1610 = 100 %, a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the rated motor torque.
Negative values are converted into positive setpoints in the case of induction and permanent-magnet synchronous
motors as well as closed-loop controlled reluctance motors.
p1611[0...n] Additional acceleration torque (sensorless) / M_suppl_accel
Access level: 2 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6700, 6721,
6722, 6726
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 30.0 [%]
Description: Enters the dynamic torque setpoint for the low-speed range for sensorless vector control.
This parameter is entered as a percentage referred to the rated motor torque (r0333).
Note
When accelerating and braking p1611 is added to p1610 and the resulting total torque is converted into an appropriate
current setpoint and controlled.
For pure accelerating torques, it is always favorable to use the torque precontrol of the speed controller (p1496).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 697
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r1614 EMF maximum / EMF max
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6725
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the actual maximum possible electromotive force (EMF) of the separately excited synchronous motor.
Dependency: The value is the basis for the flux setpoint.
The maximum possible EMF depends on the following factors:
- Actual DC link voltage (r0070).
- Maximum modulation depth (p1803).
- Field-generating and torque-generating current setpoint.
p1616[0...n] Current setpoint smoothing time / I_set T_smooth
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6721, 6722
Min: Max: Factory setting:
4 [ms] 10000 [ms] 40 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time for the current setpoint.
The current setpoint is generated from p1610 and p1611.
Note
This parameter is only effective in the range where current is injected for sensorless vector control.
r1623[0...1] Field-generating current setpoint (steady-state) / Id_set stationary
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6723
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the steady-state field generating current setpoint (Id_set).
Note
For index 1:
Reserved.
r1624 Field-generating current setpoint total / Id_setp total
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6640, 6721,
6723, 6727
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the limited field-generating current setpoint (Id_set).
This value comprises the steady-state field-generating current setpoint r1623 and a dynamic component that is only
set when changes are made to the flux setpoint.
SINAMICS G120X converter
698 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1654[0...n] Curr. setpoint torque-gen. smoothing time field weakening range / Isq_s T_smth FW
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6710
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.1 [ms] 50.0 [ms] 4.8 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant for the setpoint of the torque-generating current components.
Note
The smoothing time does not become effective until the field-weakening range is reached.
p1703[0...n] Isq current controller precontrol scaling / Isq_ctr_prectrScal
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6714
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 60.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling of the dynamic current controller precontrol for the torque/force-generating current component Isq.
p1715[0...n] Current controller P gain / I_ctrl Kp
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6714
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 100000.000 0.000
Description: Sets the proportional gain of the current controller.
This value is automatically pre-set using p3900 or p0340 when commissioning has been completed.
p1717[0...n] Current controller integral-action time / I_ctrl Tn
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 5714, 6700,
6714, 7017
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms] 2.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral-action time of the current controller.
Dependency: See also: p1715
p1720[0...n] Current controller d axis p gain / Id_ctrl Kp
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 100000.000 0.000
Description: Sets the proportional gain of the d-current controller for the lower adaptation current range.
This value is automatically pre-set using p3900 or p0340 when commissioning has been completed.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 699
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1722[0...n] Current controller d axis integral time / I_ctrl d-axis Tn
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms] 2.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral time of the d-current controller.
p1730[0...n] Isd controller integral component shutdown threshold / Isd ctrl Tn shutd
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
30 [%] 150 [%] 30 [%]
Description: Sets the speed threshold for deactivating the integral component of the Isd controller.
The d current controller is only effective as P controller for speeds greater than the threshold value. Instead of the
integral component, the quadrature arm decoupling is effective.
WARNING
For settings above 80%, the d current controller is active up to the field weakening limit. When operated at the voltage
limit, this can result in an unstable behavior. In order to avoid this, the dynamic voltage reserve p1574 should be
increased.
Note
The parameter value is referred to the synchronous rated motor speed.
p1731[0...n] Isd controller combination current time component / Isd ctr I_combi T1
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [ms] 10000.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the time constant to calculate the d current DC component difference (combination current) to add to the d current
controller actual value.
Note
It is not added for p1731 = 0.
r1732[0...1] CO: Direct-axis voltage setpoint / Direct U set
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 5700, 5714,
6714, 5718
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Display and connector output for the direct axis voltage setpoint Ud.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
SINAMICS G120X converter
700 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r1733[0...1] CO: Quadrature-axis voltage setpoint / Quad U set
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 5_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6714, 6731
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Display and connector output for the quadrature axis voltage setpoint Uq.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
p1740[0...n] Gain resonance damping for encoderless closed-loop control / Gain res_damp
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 10.000 0.025
Description: Defines the gain of the controller for resonance damping for operation with sensorless vector control in the range that
current is injected.
p1745[0...n] Motor model error threshold stall detection / MotMod ThreshStall
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 1000.0 [%] 5.0 [%]
Description: Sets the fault threshold in order to detect a motor that has stalled.
If the error signal (r1746) exceeds the parameterized error threshold, then status signal r1408.12 is set to 1.
Dependency: If a stalled drive is detected (r1408.12 = 1), fault F07902 is output after the delay time set in p2178.
See also: p2178
Note
Monitoring is only effective in the low-speed range (below p1755 * (100% - p1756)).
r1746 Motor model error signal stall detection / MotMod sig stall
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Signal to initiate stall detection
Note
The signal is not calculated while magnetizing and only in the low speed range (below p1755 * (100 % - p1756)).
p1749[0...n] Motor model increase changeover speed encoderless operation / Incr n_chng no enc
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 99.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 701
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Minimum operating frequency for rugged operation.
If the minimum value is greater than the lower changeover limit parameterized with p1755 * (1 - 2 * p1756), then the
difference is displayed using p1749 * p1755. The parameter value cannot be changed.
Dependency: See also: p1755, p1756
p1750[0...n] Motor model configuration / MotMod config
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: Unsigned16
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the motor model.
Bit 0 = 1: Forces open-loop speed-controlled starting (ASM).
Bit 1 = 1: Forces the system to pass through frequency zero, open-loop-controlled (ASM).
Bit 2 = 1: Drive remains in full closed-loop control mode, even at zero frequency (ASM).
Bit 3 = 1: Motor model evaluates the saturation characteristic (ASM).
Bit 6 = 1: If the motor is blocked, sensorless vector control remains speed-controlled (ASM).
Bit 7 = 1: Use rugged switchover limits to switchover the model (open-loop/closed-loop controlled) for regenerative
operation (ASM).
Bit 8 = 1: Open-loop speed controlled operation independent of the speed setpoint (except for OFF3) (ASM).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Controlled start Yes No -
01 Controlled through 0 Hz Yes No -
02 Closed-loop ctrl oper. down to zero freq. for passive loads Yes No -
03 Motor model Lh_pre = f(PsiEst) Yes No -
06 Closed-loop/open-loop controlled (PMSM) for a blocked Yes No -
motor
07 Use rugged changeover limits Yes No -
08 Closed-loop controlled until wait time p1758 has expired Yes No -
Dependency: See also: p0500
CAUTION
Do not use bit 6 = 1 if the motor can be slowly reversed by the load at the torque limit. Long delay times due to blocking
(p2177 > p1758) can cause the motor to stall. In this case you should deactivate the function or use closed-loop control
throughout the speed range (note the information re bit 2 = 1).
SINAMICS G120X converter
702 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
Bits 0 ... 2 only have an influence for sensorless vector control, bit 2 is pre-assigned depending on p0500.
For bit 2 = 1:
The sensorless vector control is effective down to zero frequency. A change is not made into the open-loop speed
controlled mode.
This operating mode is possible for passive loads. These include applications where the load itself does not generate
any active torque and therefore only acts reactively to the drive torque of the induction motor.
If bit 2 = 1, then bit 3 is automatically set to 1. Manual de-selection is possible and may be sensible if the saturation
characteristic (p1960) was not measured for third-party motors. Generally, for standard SIEMENS motors, the already
pre-assigned (default value) saturation characteristic is adequate.
When the bit is set, the selection of bits 0 and 1 is ignored.
For bit 2 = 0:
Bit 3 is also automatically deactivated.
For bit 6 = 1:
The following applies for sensorless vector control of induction motors:
For a blocked motor (see p2175, p2177) the time condition in p1758 is bypassed and a change is not made into open-
loop controlled operation.
For bit 7 = 1:
The following applies for sensorless vector control of induction motors:
If the changeover limits are parameterized too low (p1755, p1756), then they are automatically increased to rugged
values by the absolute amount p1749 * p1755.
The effective time condition for changing over into open-controlled operation is obtained from the minimum value of
p1758 and 0.5 * r0384.
Is recommended that bit 7 is activated for applications that demand a high torque at low frequencies, and at the same
time require low speed gradients..
Adequate parameterization of the current setpoint must be ensured (p1610, p1611).
For bit 8 = 1: no influence on the functionality of bits 0, 1, 2
The following applies for sensorless vector control of induction motors:
Changeover into open-loop speed controlled operation is no longer dependent on the speed setpoint (except for
OFF3), but instead is essentially dependent on time condition p1758. As a consequence, a drive can be started or
reversed in closed-loop speed controlled operation with setpoints from an external control system, if these briefly lie in
the open-loop speed control range.
p1750[0...n] Motor model configuration / MotMod config
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 4 Calculated: Data type: Unsigned16
G120X_PN (PM330), CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
G120X_USS (PM330) Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0000 0100 1100 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the motor model.
Bit 0 = 1: Forces open-loop speed-controlled starting (ASM).
Bit 1 = 1: Forces the system to pass through frequency zero, open-loop-controlled (ASM).
Bit 2 = 1: Drive remains in full closed-loop control mode, even at zero frequency (ASM).
Bit 3 = 1: Motor model evaluates the saturation characteristic (ASM).
Bit 6 = 1: If the motor is blocked, sensorless vector control remains speed-controlled (ASM).
Bit 7 = 1: Use rugged switchover limits to switchover the model (open-loop/closed-loop controlled) for regenerative
operation (ASM).
Bit 8 = 1: Open-loop speed controlled operation independent of the speed setpoint (except for OFF3) (ASM).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Controlled start Yes No -
01 Controlled through 0 Hz Yes No -
02 Closed-loop ctrl oper. down to zero freq. for passive loads Yes No -
03 Motor model Lh_pre = f(PsiEst) Yes No -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 703
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
06 Closed-loop/open-loop controlled (PMSM) for a blocked Yes No -
motor
07 Use rugged changeover limits Yes No -
08 Closed-loop controlled until wait time p1758 has expired Yes No -
Dependency: See also: p0500
CAUTION
Do not use bit 6 = 1 if the motor can be slowly reversed by the load at the torque limit. Long delay times due to blocking
(p2177 > p1758) can cause the motor to stall. In this case you should deactivate the function or use closed-loop control
throughout the speed range (note the information re bit 2 = 1).
Note
Bits 0 ... 2 only have an influence for sensorless vector control, bit 2 is pre-assigned depending on p0500.
For bit 2 = 1:
The sensorless vector control is effective down to zero frequency. A change is not made into the open-loop speed
controlled mode.
This operating mode is possible for passive loads. These include applications where the load itself does not generate
any active torque and therefore only acts reactively to the drive torque of the induction motor.
If bit 2 = 1, then bit 3 is automatically set to 1. Manual de-selection is possible and may be sensible if the saturation
characteristic (p1960) was not measured for third-party motors. Generally, for standard SIEMENS motors, the already
pre-assigned (default value) saturation characteristic is adequate.
When the bit is set, the selection of bits 0 and 1 is ignored.
For bit 2 = 0:
Bit 3 is also automatically deactivated.
For bit 6 = 1:
The following applies for sensorless vector control of induction motors:
For a blocked motor (see p2175, p2177) the time condition in p1758 is bypassed and a change is not made into open-
loop controlled operation.
For bit 7 = 1:
The following applies for sensorless vector control of induction motors:
If the changeover limits are parameterized too low (p1755, p1756), then they are automatically increased to rugged
values by the absolute amount p1749 * p1755.
The effective time condition for changing over into open-controlled operation is obtained from the minimum value of
p1758 and 0.5 * r0384.
Is recommended that bit 7 is activated for applications that demand a high torque at low frequencies, and at the same
time require low speed gradients..
Adequate parameterization of the current setpoint must be ensured (p1610, p1611).
For bit 8 = 1: no influence on the functionality of bits 0, 1, 2
The following applies for sensorless vector control of induction motors:
Changeover into open-loop speed controlled operation is no longer dependent on the speed setpoint (except for
OFF3), but instead is essentially dependent on time condition p1758. As a consequence, a drive can be started or
reversed in closed-loop speed controlled operation with setpoints from an external control system, if these briefly lie in
the open-loop speed control range.
r1751 Motor model status / MotMod status
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status of the motor model.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Controlled operation Active Inactive 6721
01 Set ramp-function generator Active Inactive -
02 Stop RsLh adaptation Yes No -
03 Feedback Active Inactive -
SINAMICS G120X converter
704 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
05 Holding angle Yes No -
06 Acceleration criterion Active Inactive -
11 Speed controller output cannot be set to zero Yes No -
12 Rs adapt waits Yes No -
13 Motor operation Yes No -
14 Stator frequency sign Positive Negative -
15 Torque sign Motor mode Regenerative -
mode
17 Operation with rugged model feedback Enabled Inhibited -
18 Operation of the current model with current feedback Enabled Inhibited -
19 Current feedback in the current model Active Inactive -
20 Rugged increase of the changeover limits Active Inactive -
Note
For bit 17:
Displays the enabled status of the rugged model feedback (p1784).
The feedback is used to increase the parameter ruggedness of the motor model and is effective in the operating range
of the two-component closed loop current control.
For bit 18:
Displays the status when enabling the differential current feedback in the current model for operation with encoder.
The function is automatically enabled with p1784 > 0 or p1731 > 0. The feedback is used for a rugged change between
the current model and complete machine model with active rugged model feedback and combination current.
For bit 19:
Displays the currently active stator circuit feedback in current model operation.
For bit 20:
Displays the currently effective increase of the changeover limits by the value p1749 * p1755.
For bit 21:
For a blocked synchronous motor, the speed ramp-function generator is held in the open-loop speed controlled
operating range if the torque setpoint reaches the torque limit and the speed is less than the threshold value in p2175.
p1755[0...n] Motor model changeover speed encoderless operation / MotMod n_chgSnsorl
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed to change over the motor model to encoderless operation.
Dependency: See also: p1749, p1756
NOTICE
The changeover speed represents the steady-state minimum speed up to which the motor model can be used in
sensorless steady-state operation.
If the stability is not adequate close to the changeover speed, it may make sense to increase the parameter value. On
the other hand, very low changeover speeds can negatively impact the stability.
Note
The changeover speed applies for the changeover between open-loop and closed-loop control mode.
p1756 Motor model changeover speed hysteresis encoderless operation / MotMod n_chgov hys
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6730, 6731
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 95.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 705
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the hysteresis for the changeover speed of the motor model for encoderless operation.
Dependency: See also: p1755
Note
The parameter value refers to p1755.
Extremely small hystereses can have a negative impact on the stability in the changeover speed range, and very high
hystereses in the standstill range.
p1758[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time closed/open-loop control / MotMod t cl_op
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
100 [ms] 10000 [ms] 500 [ms]
Description: Sets the minimum time for falling below the changeover speed when changing from closed-loop controlled operation
to open-loop controlled operation.
Dependency: The wait time has no significance if the setpoint speed before the ramp-function generator lies in the open-loop speed
controlled operating range. In this case, the change is made without any delay.
See also: p1755, p1756
Note
If p1758 is changed, commissioning must be selected in order to validate the value for the blocking monitoring.
p1759[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time open/closed-loop control / MotMod t op_cl
Access level: 4 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 2000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the minimum time for a transition from open-loop controlled to closed-loop controlled operation after the lower
changeover speed p1755 * (1 - p1756 / 100 %) has been exceeded.
Dependency: See also: p1755, p1756
Note
With p1759 = 2000 ms, the delay time becomes ineffective and the model changeover is determined by the output
frequency only (changeover for p1755).
p1764[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod woE n_adaKp
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6730
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 100000.000 1000.000
Description: Sets the proportional gain of the controller for speed adaptation without encoder.
p1767[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod woE n_adaTn
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6730
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 [ms] 200 [ms] 4 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral time of the controller for speed adaptation without encoder
SINAMICS G120X converter
706 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1769[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time closed-loop control / MotMod t cl_ctrl
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the wait time for a transition from open-loop controlled to closed-loop controlled operation after twice the lower
changeover speed p1755 * (1 - p1756 / 100 %) has been exceeded - and below the upper switchover speed p1755.
Dependency: See also: p1755, p1756
Note
With p1759 = 0 ms and above p1755, the delay time becomes ineffective and the model changeover is determined by
the output frequency only (changeover for p1755).
r1770 CO: Motor model speed adaptation proportional component / MotMod n_adapt Kp
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6730
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the P component of the controller for speed adaptation.
r1771 CO: Motor model speed adaptation I comp. / MotMod n_adapt Tn
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 6730
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the I component of the controller for speed adaptation.
p1774[0...n] Motor model offset voltage compensation alpha / MotMod offs comp A
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-5.000 [V] 5.000 [V] 0.000 [V]
Description: Sets the offset voltage in the alpha direction; this compensates the offset voltages of the drive converter/inverter at low
speeds. The value is valid for the rated (nominal) pulse frequency of the power unit.
Note
The value is pre-set during the rotating measurement.
p1775[0...n] Motor model offset voltage compensation beta / MotMod offs comp B
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-5.000 [V] 5.000 [V] 0.000 [V]
Description: Sets the offset voltage in the beta direction; this compensates the offset voltages of the drive converter/inverter at low
speeds. The value is valid for the rated (nominal) pulse frequency of the power unit.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 707
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The value is pre-set during the rotating measurement.
r1776[0...6] Motor model status signals / MotMod status sig
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the internal status signals of the motor model.
Index 0: Changeover ramp between current and voltage models
Index 1: Changeover ramp for model feedback (only for induction motors without encoder)
Index 2: Changeover ramp for zero frequency range (only for induction motors without encoder)
Index: [0] = Changeover ramp motor model
[1] = Changeover ramp model tracking
[2] = Changeover ramp zero frequency induction motor without encoder
[3...6] = Reserved
p1780[0...n] Motor model adaptation configuration / MotMod adapt conf
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0000 0001 0100 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the adaptation circuit of the motor model.
Induction motor (ASM):
Rs, Lh and offset compensation.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
01 Select motor model ASM Rs adaptation Yes No -
02 Select motor model ASM Lh adaptation Yes No -
03 Select motor model PMSM kT adaptation Yes No -
04 Select motor model offset adaptation Yes No -
06 Select pole position identification PMSM encoderless Yes No -
07 Select T(valve) with Rs adaptation Yes No -
08 Deselect prelim. meas. of inductance for pole position ident. Yes No -
10 Filter time combination current like current ctrl integral time Yes No -
11 Fast flying restart with voltage model for induction motor Yes No -
12 Start PMSM sensorless with last angle Yes No -
13 Fast pulsed pole position identification Yes No -
14 Delay of the precontrol speed to the motor model Yes No -
15 RESM Q flux model linear active Yes No -
Dependency: In U/f characteristic operating mode only bit 7 is relevant.
For active motor model feedback (see p1784), the Lh adaptation is internally deactivated automatically.
Note
When selecting the compensation of the valve interlocking via Rs (bit 7), the compensation in the gating unit is
deactivated and is instead taken into account in the motor model.
In order that the correction values of the Rs and Lh adaptation (selected using bit 0 ... bit 1) are correctly accepted when
changing over the drive data set, a dedicated motor number must be entered into p0826 for each different motor.
ASM: Induction motor
RESM: synchronous reluctance motor
SINAMICS G120X converter
708 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1780[0...n] Motor model adaptation configuration / MotMod adapt conf
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: Unsigned16
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 1000 0001 0100 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the adaptation circuit of the motor model.
Induction motor (ASM):
Rs, Lh and offset compensation.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
01 Select motor model ASM Rs adaptation Yes No -
02 Select motor model ASM Lh adaptation Yes No -
04 Select motor model offset adaptation Yes No -
07 Select T(valve) with Rs adaptation Yes No -
10 Filter time combination current like current ctrl integral time Yes No -
11 Fast flying restart with voltage model for induction motor Yes No -
Dependency: In the U/f characteristic operating mode, only bit 7 and bit 11 are relevant.
For active motor model feedback (see p1784), the Lh adaptation is internally deactivated automatically.
Note
When selecting the compensation of the valve interlocking via Rs (bit 7), the compensation in the gating unit is
deactivated and is instead taken into account in the motor model.
In order that the correction values of the Rs and Lh adaptation (selected using bit 0 ... bit 1) are correctly accepted when
changing over the drive data set, a dedicated motor number must be entered into p0826 for each different motor.
ASM: Induction motor
RESM: synchronous reluctance motor
p1784[0...n] Motor model feedback scaling / MotMod fdbk scal
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 1000.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for model fault feedback.
Note
Feeding back the measured model fault to the model states increases the control stability and makes the motor model
rugged against parameter errors.
When feedback is selected (p1784 > 0), Lh adaptation is not effective.
p1785[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation Kp / MotMod Lh Kp
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 10.000 0.100
Description: Sets the proportional gain for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 709
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1786[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation integral time / MotMod Lh Tn
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
10 [ms] 10000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral time for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).
r1787[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation corrective value / MotMod Lh corr
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the corrective value for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).
Dependency: See also: p0826, p1780
Note
The adaptation result is reset if the magnetizing inductance of the induction motor is changed (p0360, r0382). This also
happens when changing over the data set if a different motor is not being used (p0826).
The display of the inactive data sets is only updated when changing over the data set.
p1800[0...n] Pulse frequency setpoint / Pulse freq setp
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8021
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.500 [kHz] 16.000 [kHz] 4.000 [kHz]
Description: Sets the pulse frequency for the converter.
This parameter is pre-set to the rated converter value when the drive is first commissioned.
Dependency: Minimum pulse frequency: p1800 >= 12 * p1082 * r0313 / 60
See also: p0230
Note
The maximum and minimum possible pulse frequency is also determined by the power unit being used (minimum pulse
frequency: 2 kHz or 4 kHz).
When the pulse frequency is increased, depending on the particular power unit, the maximum output current can be
reduced (derating, refer to r0067).
If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3), then the pulse frequency cannot be set below the
minimum value required for the filter.
For operation with output reactors, the pulse frequency is limited to 4 kHz (see p0230).
If p1800 is changed during commissioning (p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be able to be
set. The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1800 have been changed by a parameter that was set when the
drive was commissioned (e.g. p1082).
The pulse frequency cannot be changed when the motor data identification is activated.
p1800[0...n] Pulse frequency setpoint / Pulse freq setp
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8021
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.500 [kHz] 4.000 [kHz] 4.000 [kHz]
SINAMICS G120X converter
710 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the drive converter switching frequency.
This parameter is pre-set to twice the rated converter value when the drive is first commissioned.
Dependency: Minimum pulse frequency: p1800 >= 12 * p1082 * r0313 / 60
See also: p0230
Note
The maximum and minimum possible pulse frequency is also determined by the power unit being used (minimum pulse
frequency: 2 kHz or 4 kHz).
When the pulse frequency is increased, depending on the particular power unit, the maximum output current can be
reduced (derating, refer to r0067).
If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3), then the pulse frequency cannot be set below the
minimum value required for the filter.
For operation with output reactors, the pulse frequency is limited to 4 kHz (see p0230).
If p1800 is changed during commissioning (p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be able to be
set. The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1800 have been changed by a parameter that was set when the
drive was commissioned (e.g. p1082).
The pulse frequency cannot be changed when the motor data identification is activated.
r1801[0...1] CO: Pulse frequency / Pulse frequency
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [kHz] - [kHz] - [kHz]
Description: Display and connector output for the actual converter switching frequency.
Index: [0] = Actual
[1] = Modulator minimum value
Note
The selected pulse frequency (p1800) may be reduced if the drive converter has an overload condition (p0290).
p1802[0...n] Modulator mode / Modulator mode
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: Integer16
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 10 0
Description: Sets the modulator mode.
Value: 0: Automatic changeover SVM/FLB
2: Space vector modulation (SVM)
3: SVM without overcontrol
4: SVM/FLB without overcontrol
10: SVM/FLB with modulation depth reduction
Dependency: If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), then only space vector modulation without
overcontrol can be selected as modulation type (p1802 = 3). This does not apply to power units PM260.
p1802 = 10 can only be set for power units PM230 and PM240 and for r0204.15 = 0.
See also: p0230, p0500
Note
When modulation modes are enabled that could lead to overmodulation (p1802 = 0, 2, 10), the modulation depth must
be limited using p1803 (default, p1803 < 100 %). The higher the overmodulation, the greater the current ripple and
torque ripple.
When changing p1802[x], the values for all of the other existing indices are also changed.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 711
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1802[0...n] Modulator mode / Modulator mode
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 4 Calculated: Data type: Integer16
G120X_PN (PM330), CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
G120X_USS (PM330) Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 19 9
Description: Sets the modulator mode.
Value: 0: Automatic changeover SVM/FLB
2: Space vector modulation (SVM)
9: Edge modulation
19: Optimized pulse pattern
Dependency: Setting p1802 = 19 (optimized pulse pattern) is only released for chassis/built-in power units and SIMOTICS FD
motors up to a maximum speed of p1082 <= 60 x 100 Hz / r0313.
See also: p0500
NOTICE
When modulation modes are enabled that could lead to overmodulation (p1802 = 0, 2), the modulation depth must be
limited using p1803 (default p1803 < 100 %). The higher the overmodulation, the greater the current ripple and torque
ripple.
When changing p1802[x], the values for all of the other existing indices are also changed.
Note
When modulation modes are enabled that could lead to overmodulation (p1802 = 0, 2, 10), the modulation depth must
be limited using p1803 (default, p1803 < 100 %). The higher the overmodulation, the greater the current ripple and
torque ripple.
When changing p1802[x], the values for all of the other existing indices are also changed.
p1803[0...n] Maximum modulation depth / Modulat depth max
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6723
Min: Max: Factory setting:
20.0 [%] 150.0 [%] 106.0 [%]
Description: Defines the maximum modulation depth.
Dependency: See also: p0500
Note
p1803 = 100% is the overcontrol limit for space vector modulation (for an ideal drive converter without any switching
delay).
p1803[0...n] Maximum modulation depth / Modulat depth max
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 4 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
G120X_USS (PM330) Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6723
Min: Max: Factory setting:
20.0 [%] 150.0 [%] 106.0 [%]
Description: Defines the maximum modulation depth.
Dependency: See also: p0500
SINAMICS G120X converter
712 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
p1803 = 100% is the overcontrol limit for space vector modulation (for an ideal drive converter without any switching
delay).
p1806[0...n] Filter time constant Vdc correction / T_filt Vdc_corr
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the filter time constant for the DC link voltage.
This time constant is used to calculate the modulation depth.
r1809 CO: Modulator mode actual / Modulator mode act
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 9 -
Description: Displays the effective modulator mode.
Value: 1: Flat top modulation (FLB)
2: Space vector modulation (SVM)
9: Optimized pulse pattern
r1809 CO: Modulator mode actual / Modulator mode act
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 9 -
Description: Displays the effective modulator mode.
Value: 1: Flat top modulation (FLB)
2: Space vector modulation (SVM)
3: Edge modulation from 28 Hz; 23:3
4: Edge modulation from 28 Hz; 19:1
5: Edge modulation from 60 Hz; 17:3
6: Edge modulation from 60 Hz; 17:1
7: Edge modulation from 100 Hz; 9:2
8: Edge modulation from 100 Hz; 9:1
9: Optimized pulse pattern
p1810 Modulator configuration / Modulator config
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the modulator.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 713
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
00 Avg value filter for V_lim (only for Vdc_comp in modulator) Yes No -
01 DC link voltage compensation in the current control Yes No -
NOTICE
Bit 1 = 1 can only be set under a pulse inhibit and for r0192.14 = 1.
Note
For bit 00 = 0:
Voltage limitation from the minimum of the DC link voltage (lower ripple in the output current, reduced output voltage).
For bit 00 = 1:
Voltage limitation from averaged DC link voltage (higher output voltage with increased ripple in the output current).
The selection is only valid if the DC link compensation is not performed in the Control Unit (bit 1 = 0).
For bit 01 = 0:
DC link voltage compensation in the modulator.
For bit 01 = 1:
DC link voltage compensation in the current control.
p1811[0...n] Pulse frequency wobbulation amplitude / Puls wobb ampl
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [%] 20 [%] 10 [%]
Description: Sets the amplitude of the statistical wobbulation signal.
This signal is used to vary the pulse frequency to create a more pleasant sound.
Note
p1811 > 0 is possible, if the following applies:
- configuration: p1810.2 = 1 (wobbulation activated)
- pulse frequency: p1800 <= 2000 / p115[0]
- output filter, filter type: p0230 < 3 (no sine-wave filter)
p1820[0...n] Reverse the output phase sequence / Outp_ph_seq rev
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the phase sequence reversal for the motor without setpoint change.
If the motor does not rotate in the required direction, then the output phase sequence can be reversed using this
parameter. This means that the direction of the motor is reversed without the setpoint being changed.
Value: 0: OFF
1: ON
Note
This setting can only be changed when the pulses are inhibited.
p1822 Power unit line phases monitoring tolerance time / PU ph monit t_tol
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
500 [ms] 540000 [ms] 1000 [ms]
SINAMICS G120X converter
714 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the tolerance time for line phase monitoring for blocksize power units.
If a line phase fault is present for longer than this tolerance time, then a corresponding fault is output.
Dependency: See also: F30011
NOTICE
When operating with a failed line phase, depending on the active power, values higher than the default value can either
immediately damage the power unit or damage it over the long term.
Note
For the setting p1822 = maximum value, line phase monitoring is deactivated.
p1825 Converter valve threshold voltage / Threshold voltage
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [Vrms] 100.0 [Vrms] 0.6 [Vrms]
Description: Sets the threshold voltage drop of the valves (power semiconductor devices) to be compensated.
Note
The value is automatically calculated in the motor data identification routine.
p1828 Compensation valve lockout time phase U / Comp t_lock ph U
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [µs] 3.99 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase U.
Note
The value is automatically calculated in the motor data identification routine.
p1828 Compensation valve lockout time phase U / Comp t_lock ph U
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [µs] 7.80 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase U.
Note
The value is automatically calculated in the motor data identification routine.
p1829 Compensation valve lockout time phase V / Comp t_lock ph V
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [µs] 3.99 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase V.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 715
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1829 Compensation valve lockout time phase V / Comp t_lock ph V
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [µs] 7.80 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase V.
p1830 Compensation valve lockout time phase W / Comp t_lock ph W
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [µs] 3.99 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase W.
p1830 Compensation valve lockout time phase W / Comp t_lock ph W
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [µs] 7.80 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase W.
p1832 Dead time compensation current level / t_dead_comp I_lev
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [Arms] 10000.0 [Arms] 0.0 [Arms]
Description: Sets the current level for the dead time compensation.
Above the current level, the dead time - resulting from the converter switching delays - is compensated by a previously
calculated constant value. If the relevant phase current setpoint falls below the absolute value defined by p1832, the
corrective value for this phase is continuously reduced.
Dependency: The factory setting of p1832 is automatically set to 0.02 * rated drive converter current (r0207).
r1838.0...15 CO/BO: Gating unit status word 1 / Gating unit ZSW1
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for status word 1 of the power unit.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fault time-critical ON OFF -
01 Gating unit mode bit 0 ON OFF -
02 Pulse enable ON OFF -
03 Switch-off signal path STO_B Inactive Active -
04 Switch-off signal path STO_A Inactive Active -
SINAMICS G120X converter
716 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
05 Gating unit mode bit 1 ON OFF -
06 Gating unit mode bit 2 ON OFF -
07 Brake state ON OFF -
08 Brake diagnostics ON OFF -
09 Armature short-circuit braking Active Not active -
10 Gating unit state bit 0 ON OFF -
11 Gating unit state bit 1 ON OFF -
12 Gating unit state bit 2 ON OFF -
13 Alarm status bit 0 ON OFF -
14 Alarm status bit 1 ON OFF -
15 Diagnostics 24 V ON OFF -
p1900 Motor data identification and rotating measurement / MotID and rot meas
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C2(1), T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 12 0
Description: Sets the motor data identification and speed controller optimization.
The motor identification should first be performed with the motor stationary (p1900 = 1, 2; also refer to p1910). Based
on this, additional motor and control parameters can be determined using the motor data identification with the motor
rotating (p1900 = 1, 3; also refer to p1960; not for p1300 < 20).
p1900 = 0:
Function inhibited.
p1900 = 1:
Sets p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0, 1 depending on p1300
When the drive enable signals are present, a motor data identification routine is carried out at standstill with the next
switch-on command. Current flows through the motor which means that it can align itself by up to a quarter of a
revolution.
With the following switch-on command, a rotating motor data identification routine is carried out - and in addition, a
speed controller optimization by making measurements at different motor speeds.
p1900 = 2:
Sets p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0
When the drive enable signals are present, a motor data identification routine is carried out at standstill with the next
switch-on command. Current flows through the motor which means that it can align itself by up to a quarter of a
revolution.
p1900 = 3:
Sets p1960 = 0, 1 depending on p1300
This setting should only be selected if the motor data identification was already carried out at standstill.
When the drive enable signals are present, with the next switch-on command, a rotating motor data identification
routine is carried out - and in addition, speed controller optimization by taking measurements at different motor speeds.
p1900 = 11, 12:
The same as p1900 = 1, 2 with the difference, that after the measurement, the system immediately goes into operation.
For this purpose, p1909.18 is set = p1959.13 is set = 1 .
Value: 0: Inhibited
1: Identifying motor data and optimizing the speed controller
2: Identifying motor data (at standstill)
3: Optimizing the speed controller (in rotating operation)
11: Motor data ident. and speed controller opt., switch to operation
12: Motor data identification (at standstill), switch to operation
Dependency: See also: p1300, p1910, p1960
See also: A07980, A07981, F07983, F07984, F07985, F07986, F07988, F07990, A07991
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 717
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
NOTICE
p1900 = 3:
This setting should only be selected if the motor data identification was already carried out at standstill.
To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971).
During the rotating measurement it is not possible to save the parameter (p0971).
Note
The motor and control parameters of the vector control are only optimally set when both measurements are carried out
(initially at standstill, and then with the motor rotating). The measurement with rotating motor is not performed for p1300
< 20 (U/f controls).
An appropriate alarm is output when the parameter is set.
The switch-on command must remain set during a measurement and after the measurement has been completed, the
drive automatically resets it.
The duration of the measurements can lie between 0.3 s and several minutes. This time is, for example, influenced by
the motor size and the mechanical conditions.
p1900 is automatically set to 0 after the motor data identification routine has been completed.
If a reluctance motor has been parameterized, a pole position identification is carried out during the stationary
measurement. As a consequence, faults that occur can also be assigned to the pole position identification.
For U/f control (p1300), identification with speed controller optimization does not make sense (e.g. P1900 = 1).
p1900 Motor data identification and rotating measurement / MotID and rot meas
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: C2(1), T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 12 2
Description: Sets the motor data identification and speed controller optimization.
The motor identification should first be performed with the motor stationary (p1900 = 1, 2; also refer to p1910). Based
on this, additional motor and control parameters can be determined using the motor data identification with the motor
rotating (p1900 = 1, 3; also refer to p1960).
p1900 = 0:
Function inhibited.
p1900 = 1:
Sets p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0, 1 depending on p1300
When the drive enable signals are present, a motor data identification routine is carried out at standstill with the next
switch-on command. Current flows through the motor which means that it can align itself by up to a quarter of a
revolution.
With the following switch-on command, a rotating motor data identification routine is carried out - and in addition, a
speed controller optimization by making measurements at different motor speeds.
p1900 = 2:
Sets p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0
When the drive enable signals are present, a motor data identification routine is carried out at standstill with the next
switch-on command. Current flows through the motor which means that it can align itself by up to a quarter of a
revolution.
p1900 = 3:
Sets p1960 = 0, 1 depending on p1300
This setting should only be selected if the motor data identification was already carried out at standstill.
When the drive enable signals are present, with the next switch-on command, a rotating motor data identification
routine is carried out - and in addition, speed controller optimization by taking measurements at different motor speeds.
p1900 = 11, 12:
The same as p1900 = 1, 2 with the difference, that after the measurement, the system immediately goes into operation.
For this purpose, p1909.18 is set = p1959.13 is set = 1 .
Value: 0: Inhibited
1: Identifying motor data and optimizing the speed controller
2: Identifying motor data (at standstill)
SINAMICS G120X converter
718 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
3: Optimizing the speed controller (in rotating operation)
11: Motor data ident. and speed controller opt., switch to operation
12: Motor data identification (at standstill), switch to operation
Dependency: See also: p1300, p1910, p1960
See also: A07980, A07981, F07983, F07984, F07985, F07986, F07988, F07990, A07991
NOTICE
p1900 = 3:
This setting should only be selected if the motor data identification was already carried out at standstill.
To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971).
During the rotating measurement it is not possible to save the parameter (p0971).
Note
The motor and control parameters of the vector control are only optimally set when both measurements are carried out
(initially at standstill, and then with the motor rotating). The measurement with rotating motor is not performed for p1300
< 20 (U/f controls).
An appropriate alarm is output when the parameter is set.
The switch-on command must remain set during a measurement and after the measurement has been completed, the
drive automatically resets it.
The duration of the measurements can lie between 0.3 s and several minutes. This time is, for example, influenced by
the motor size and the mechanical conditions.
p1900 is automatically set to 0 after the motor data identification routine has been completed.
If a reluctance motor has been parameterized, a pole position identification is carried out during the stationary
measurement. As a consequence, faults that occur can also be assigned to the pole position identification.
For U/f control (p1300), identification with speed controller optimization does not make sense (e.g. P1900 = 1).
p1901 Test pulse evaluation configuration / Test puls config
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the test pulse evaluation.
Bit 00: Check for conductor-to-conductor short circuit once/always when the pulses are enabled.
Bit 01: Check for ground fault once/always when the pulses are enabled.
Bit 02: Activation of the tests selected using bit 00 and/or bit 01 each time the pulses are enabled
Recommendation: If the ground fault test is incorrectly initiated because the motor is not at a complete standstill, then the pulse
cancellation delay time (p1228) should be increased.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Phase short-circuit test pulse active Yes No -
01 Ground fault detection test pulse active Yes No -
02 Test pulse at each pulse enable Yes No -
Dependency: The ground fault test is only possible when the motor is stationary, and is therefore only realized when flying restart
is deactivated (p1200 = 0).
See also: p0287
Note
If a conductor-to-conductor short-circuit is detected during the test, this is displayed in r1902.1.
If a ground fault is detected during the test, this is displayed in r1902.2.
For bit 02 = 0:
If the test was successful once after POWER ON (see r1902.0), then it is not repeated.
For bit 02 = 1:
The test is not only performed after POWER ON, but also each time the pulses are enabled.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 719
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1901 Test pulse evaluation configuration / Test puls config
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the test pulse evaluation.
Bit 00: Check for conductor-to-conductor short circuit once/always when the pulses are enabled.
Bit 01: Check for ground fault once/always when the pulses are enabled.
Bit 02: Activation of the tests selected using bit 00 and/or bit 01 each time the pulses are enabled
Recommendation: If the ground fault test is incorrectly initiated because the motor is not at a complete standstill, then the pulse
cancellation delay time (p1228) should be increased.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Phase short-circuit test pulse active Yes No -
01 Ground fault detection test pulse active Yes No -
02 Test pulse at each pulse enable Yes No -
Dependency: The ground fault test is only possible when the motor is stationary, and is therefore only realized when flying restart
is deactivated (p1200 = 0).
See also: p0287
Note
If a conductor-to-conductor short-circuit is detected during the test, this is displayed in r1902.1.
If a ground fault is detected during the test, this is displayed in r1902.2.
For bit 02 = 0:
If the test was successful once after POWER ON (see r1902.0), then it is not repeated.
For bit 02 = 1:
The test is not only performed after POWER ON, but also each time the pulses are enabled.
For chassis power units, the ground fault is also determined using the summed output current (see p0287).
r1902 Test pulse evaluation status / Test puls ev stat
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status of the test pulse evaluation.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Short-circuit test successfully performed Yes No -
01 Phase short-circuit detected Yes No -
02 Ground fault test successfully performed Yes No -
03 Ground fault detected Yes No -
04 Identification pulse width greater than the minimum pulse Yes No -
width
05 Pulse frequency for short-circuit test requested Yes No -
06 Short-circuit test in power stack driver activated Yes No -
07 Short-circuit test pulse suppression active Yes No -
08 Motor phase interrupted Yes No -
Note
If the ground fault test was selected, but not successfully performed, then sufficient current was not be able to be
established during the test pulses.
For bit 04:
A test pulse longer than one sampling time has occurred
SINAMICS G120X converter
720 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1909[0...n] Motor data identification control word / MotID STW
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the motor data identification.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Stator inductance estimate no measurement Yes No -
02 Rotor time constant estimate no measurement Yes No -
03 Leakage inductance estimate no measurement Yes No -
05 Determine Tr and Lsig evaluation in the time range Yes No -
06 Activate vibration damping Yes No -
07 Deactivate vibration detection Yes No -
11 Deactivate pulse measurement Lq Ld Yes No -
12 Deactivate rotor resistance Rr measurement Yes No -
14 Deactivate valve interlocking time measurement Yes No -
15 Determine only stator resistance, valve voltage fault, dead Yes No -
time
16 Short motor identification (lower quality) Yes No -
17 Measurement without control parameter calculation Yes No -
18 After motID direct transition into operation Yes No -
19 After MotID automatically save results Yes No -
20 Estimate cable resistance Yes No -
21 Calibrating the output voltage measurement Yes No -
22 Only identify circle Yes No -
23 Deactivate circle identification Yes No -
24 Circle identification with 0 and 90 degrees Yes No -
26 Measure with long cable Yes No -
Note
The following applies to permanent-magnet synchronous motors:
Without de-selection in bit 11, in the closed-loop control mode, the direct inductance LD and the quadrature inductance
Lq are measured at a low current.
When de-selecting with bit 11 or in the U/f mode, the stator inductance is measured at half the rated motor current.
If the stator is inductance is not measured but is to be estimated, then bit 0 should be set and bit 11 should be de-
selected.
Bit 19 = 1:
All parameters are automatically saved after a successful motor data identification.
If a speed controller optimization run is then selected, the parameters are only saved after this measurement has been
completed.
Bit 22 ... 24: only for reluctance motors
Bit 22 = 1:
Only that measurement is carried out that is required for the flying restart of a reluctance motor. The bit is reset after
a successful measurement
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 721
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1909[0...n] Motor data identification control word / MotID STW
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the motor data identification.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Stator inductance estimate no measurement Yes No -
02 Rotor time constant estimate no measurement Yes No -
03 Leakage inductance estimate no measurement Yes No -
05 Determine Tr and Lsig evaluation in the time range Yes No -
06 Activate vibration damping Yes No -
07 Deactivate vibration detection Yes No -
11 Deactivate pulse measurement Lq Ld Yes No -
12 Deactivate rotor resistance Rr measurement Yes No -
14 Deactivate valve interlocking time measurement Yes No -
15 Determine only stator resistance, valve voltage fault, dead Yes No -
time
16 Short motor identification (lower quality) Yes No -
17 Measurement without control parameter calculation Yes No -
18 After motID direct transition into operation Yes No -
19 After MotID automatically save results Yes No -
20 Estimate cable resistance Yes No -
21 Calibrating the output voltage measurement Yes No -
26 Measure with long cable Yes No -
Note
The following applies to permanent-magnet synchronous motors:
Without de-selection in bit 11, in the closed-loop control mode, the direct inductance LD and the quadrature inductance
Lq are measured at a low current.
When de-selecting with bit 11 or in the U/f mode, the stator inductance is measured at half the rated motor current.
If the stator is inductance is not measured but is to be estimated, then bit 0 should be set and bit 11 should be de-
selected.
For bit 19 = 1:
All parameters are automatically saved after a successful motor data identification.
If a speed controller optimization run is then selected, the parameters are only saved after this measurement has been
completed.
For bit 21 = 1:
The converter output voltage measurement is calibrated at the start of the motor data identification.
p1910 Motor data identification selection / MotID selection
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 28 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
722 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the motor data identification routine.
The motor data identification routine is carried out after the next switch-on command.
p1910 = 1:
All motor data and the drive converter characteristics are identified and then transferred to the following parameters:
p0350, p0354, p0356, p0357, p0358, p0360, p1825, p1828, p1829, p1830
After this, the control parameter p0340 = 3 is automatically calculated.
p1910 = 20:
Only for internal SIEMENS use.
Value: 0: Inhibited
1: Complete identification (ID) and acceptance of motor data
2: Complete identification (ID) of motor data without acceptance
20: Voltage vector input
21: Voltage vector input without filter
22: Rectangular voltage vector input without filter
23: Triangular voltage vector input without filter
24: Rectangular voltage vector input with filter
25: Triangular voltage vector input with filter
26: Enter voltage vector with DTC correction
27: Enter voltage vector with AVC
28: Enter voltage vector with DTC + AVC correction
Dependency: "Quick commissioning" must be carried out (p0010 = 1, p3900 > 0) before executing the motor data identification
routine!
When selecting the motor data identification routine, the drive data set changeover is suppressed.
See also: p1900
See also: F07990, A07991
NOTICE
After the motor data identification (p1910 > 0) has been selected, alarm A07991 is output and a motor data
identification routine is carried out as follows at the next switch-on command:
- current flows through the motor and a voltage is present at the drive converter output terminals.
- during the identification routine, the motor shaft can rotate through a maximum of half a revolution.
- however, no torque torque is generated.
Note
To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971).
When setting p1910, the following should be observed:
1. "With acceptance" means:
The parameters specified in the description are overwritten with the identified values and therefore have an influence
on the controller setting.
2. "Without acceptance" means:
The identified parameters are only displayed in the range r1912 ... r1926 (service parameters). The controller settings
remain unchanged.
3. For settings 27 and 28, the AVC configuration set using p1840 is active.
The switch-on command must remain set during a measurement and after the measurement has been completed, the
drive automatically resets it. The duration of the measurements can lie between 0.3 s and several minutes. This time
is mainly influenced by the motor size. At the end of the motor data identification, p1910 is automatically set to 0, if only
the stationary measurement is selected, then p1900 is also reset to 0, otherwise, the rotating measurement is activated.
p1910 Motor data identification selection / MotID selection
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 28 1
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 723
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the motor data identification routine.
The motor data identification routine is carried out after the next switch-on command.
p1910 = 1:
All motor data and the drive converter characteristics are identified and then transferred to the following parameters:
p0350, p0354, p0356, p0357, p0358, p0360, p1825, p1828, p1829, p1830
After this, the control parameter p0340 = 3 is automatically calculated.
p1910 = 20:
Only for internal SIEMENS use.
Value: 0: Inhibited
1: Complete identification (ID) and acceptance of motor data
2: Complete identification (ID) of motor data without acceptance
20: Voltage vector input
21: Voltage vector input without filter
22: Rectangular voltage vector input without filter
23: Triangular voltage vector input without filter
24: Rectangular voltage vector input with filter
25: Triangular voltage vector input with filter
26: Enter voltage vector with DTC correction
27: Enter voltage vector with AVC
28: Enter voltage vector with DTC + AVC correction
Dependency: "Quick commissioning" must be carried out (p0010 = 1, p3900 > 0) before executing the motor data identification
routine!
When selecting the motor data identification routine, the drive data set changeover is suppressed.
See also: p1900
See also: F07990, A07991
NOTICE
After the motor data identification (p1910 > 0) has been selected, alarm A07991 is output and a motor data
identification routine is carried out as follows at the next switch-on command:
- current flows through the motor and a voltage is present at the drive converter output terminals.
- during the identification routine, the motor shaft can rotate through a maximum of half a revolution.
- however, no torque torque is generated.
Note
To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971).
When setting p1910, the following should be observed:
1. "With acceptance" means:
The parameters specified in the description are overwritten with the identified values and therefore have an influence
on the controller setting.
2. "Without acceptance" means:
The identified parameters are only displayed in the range r1912 ... r1926 (service parameters). The controller settings
remain unchanged.
3. For settings 27 and 28, the AVC configuration set using p1840 is active.
The switch-on command must remain set during a measurement and after the measurement has been completed, the
drive automatically resets it. The duration of the measurements can lie between 0.3 s and several minutes. This time
is mainly influenced by the motor size. At the end of the motor data identification, p1910 is automatically set to 0, if only
the stationary measurement is selected, then p1900 is also reset to 0, otherwise, the rotating measurement is activated.
r1912[0...2] Identified stator resistance / R_stator ident
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
SINAMICS G120X converter
724 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Displays the identified stator resistance.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1913[0...2] Identified rotor time constant / T_rotor ident
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the identified rotor time constant.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1914[0...2] Identified total leakage inductance / L_total_leak ident
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the identified total leakage inductance.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1915[0...2] Identified nominal stator inductance / L_stator ident
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1925[0...2] Identified threshold voltage / U_threshold ident
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the identified IGBT threshold voltage.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 725
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r1926[0...2] Identified effective valve lockout time / t_lock_valve id
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [µs] - [µs] - [µs]
Description: Displays the identified effective valve lockout time.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1927[0...2] Identified rotor resistance / R_rotor ident
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays identified rotor resistance (on separately excited synchronous motors: damping resistance).
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
p1959[0...n] Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0000 0001 1110 bin
Description: Sets the configuration of the rotating measurement.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
01 Saturation characteristic identification Yes No -
02 Moment of inertia identification Yes No -
03 Re-calculates the speed controller parameters Yes No -
04 Speed controller optimization (vibration test) Yes No -
11 Do not change the controller parameters during the Yes No -
measurement
12 Measurement shortened Yes No -
13 After measurement direct transition into operation Yes No -
14 Calculate speed actual value smoothing time Yes No -
Dependency: See also: F07988
Note
The following parameters are influenced for the individual optimization steps:
Bit 01: p0320, p0360, p0362 ... p0369
Bit 02: p0341, p0342
Bit 03: p1400.0, p1458, p1459, p1463, p1470, p1472, p1496
Bit 04: Dependent on p1960
p1960 = 1, 3: p1400.0, p1458, p1459, p1470, p1472, p1496
SINAMICS G120X converter
726 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p1959[0...n] Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned16
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0001 0000 0001 1110 bin
Description: Sets the configuration of the rotating measurement.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
01 Saturation characteristic identification Yes No -
02 Moment of inertia identification Yes No -
03 Re-calculates the speed controller parameters Yes No -
04 Speed controller optimization (vibration test) Yes No -
11 Do not change the controller parameters during the Yes No -
measurement
12 Measurement shortened Yes No -
13 After measurement direct transition into operation Yes No -
14 Calculate speed actual value smoothing time Yes No -
Dependency: See also: F07988
Note
The following parameters are influenced for the individual optimization steps:
Bit 01: p0320, p0360, p0362 ... p0369
Bit 02: p0341, p0342
Bit 03: p1400.0, p1458, p1459, p1463, p1470, p1472, p1496
Bit 04: Dependent on p1960
p1960 = 1, 3: p1400.0, p1458, p1459, p1470, p1472, p1496
For bit 12 = 1:
The selection only has an effect on the measurement p1960 = 1. For the shortened measurement, the magnetizing
current and moment of inertia are determined with a somewhat lower accuracy.
p1960 Rotating measurement selection / Rot meas sel
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 3 0
Description: Sets the rotating measurement.
The rotating measurement is carried out after the next switch-on command.
The setting possibilities of the parameter depend on the open-loop/closed-loop control mode (p1300).
p1300 < 20 (U/f open-loop control):
It is not possible to select rotating measurement or speed controller optimization.
p1300 = 20, 22 (encoderless operation):
Only rotating measurement or speed controller optimization can be selected in the encoderless mode.
Value: 0: Inhibited
1: Rotating measurement in encoderless operation
3: Speed controller optimization in encoderless operation
Dependency: Before the rotating measurement is carried out, the motor data identification routine (p1900, p1910, r3925) should
have already been done.
When selecting the rotating measurement, the drive data set changeover is suppressed.
See also: p1300, p1900, p1959, p1967, r1968
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 727
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
DANGER
For drives with a mechanical system that limits the distance moved, it must be ensured that this is not reached during
the rotating measurement. If this is not the case, then it is not permissible that the measurement is carried out.
NOTICE
To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971).
During the rotating measurement it is not possible to save the parameter (p0971).
Note
When the rotating measurement is activated, it is not possible to save the parameters (p0971).
Parameter changes are automatically made for the rotating measurement (e.g. p1120); this is the reason that up to the
end of the measurement, and if no faults are present, no manual changes should be made.
The ramp-up and ramp-down times (p1120, p1121) are limited, for the rotating measurement, to 900 s.
p1961 Saturation characteristic speed to determine / Sat_char n determ
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
26 [%] 75 [%] 40 [%]
Description: Sets the speed to determine the saturation characteristic.
The percentage value is referred to p0310 (rated motor frequency).
Dependency: See also: p0310, p1959
See also: F07983
Note
The saturation characteristics should be determined at an operating point with the lowest possible load.
p1961 Saturation characteristic speed to determine / Sat_char n determ
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
26 [%] 75 [%] 30 [%]
Description: Sets the speed to determine the saturation characteristic.
The percentage value is referred to p0310 (rated motor frequency).
Dependency: See also: p0310, p1959
See also: F07983
Note
The saturation characteristics should be determined at an operating point with the lowest possible load.
p1965 Speed_ctrl_opt speed / n_opt speed
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
10 [%] 75 [%] 40 [%]
Description: Sets the speed for the identification of the moment of inertia and the vibration test.
Induction motor:
The percentage value is referred to p0310 (rated motor frequency).
Synchronous motor:
The percentage value is referred to the minimum from p0310 (rated motor frequency) and p1082 (maximum speed).
SINAMICS G120X converter
728 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Dependency: See also: p0310, p1959
See also: F07984, F07985
Note
In order to calculate the inertia, sudden speed changes are carried out - the specified value corresponds to the lower
speed setpoint. This value is increased by 20 % for the upper speed value.
The q leakage inductance (refer to p1959.5) is determined at zero speed and at 50 % of p1965 - however, with a
maximum output frequency of 15 Hz and at a minimum of 10% of the rated motor speed.
p1967 Speed_ctrl_opt dynamic factor / n_opt dyn_factor
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 [%] 400 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the dynamic response factor for speed controller optimization.
After optimization, the dynamic response achieved is displayed in r1968.
Dependency: See also: p1959, r1968
See also: F07985
Note
For a rotating measurement, this parameter can be used to optimize the speed controller.
p1967 = 100 % --> speed controller optimization according to a symmetric optimum.
p1967 > 100 % --> optimization with a higher dynamic response (Kp higher, Tn lower).
If the actual dynamic response (see r1968) is significantly reduced with respect to the required dynamic response
(p1967), then this can be as a result of mechanical load oscillations. If, in spite of this load behavior, a higher dynamic
response is required, then the oscillation test (p1959.4 = 0) should be deactivated and the measurement repeated.
r1968 Speed_ctrl_opt dynamic factor actual / n_opt dyn_fact act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the dynamic factor which is actually achieved for the vibration test
Dependency: See also: p1959, p1967
See also: F07985
Note
This dynamic factor only refers to the control mode of the speed controller set in p1960.
r1969 Speed_ctrl_opt moment of inertia determined / n_opt M_inert det
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 25_1 Unit selection: p0100 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [kgm²] - [kgm²] - [kgm²]
Description: Displays the determined moment of inertia of the drive.
After it has been determined, the value is transferred to p0341, p0342.
Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg m^2
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb ft^2
See also: p0341, p0342, p1959
See also: F07984
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 729
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r1970[0...1] Speed_ctrl_opt vibration test vibration frequency determined / n_opt f_vib det
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Displays the vibration frequencies determined by the vibration test.
Index: [0] = Frequency low
[1] = Frequency high
Dependency: See also: p1959
See also: F07985
p1974 Speed_ctrl_opt saturation characteristic rotor flux maximum / n_opt rot_fl max
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
104 [%] 120 [%] 120 [%]
Description: Sets the maximum flux setpoint to measure the saturation characteristic.
p1980[0...n] PolID technique / PolID technique
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 10 4
Description: Sets the pole position identification technique.
p1980 = 1, 8: The current magnitude is set using p0329.
p1980 = 4, 6: The current magnitude of the first measurement section is set using p0325, the second using p0329.
p1980 = 10: The rated motor current is impressed to align.
The current magnitudes are limited to the rated power unit values.
Value: 1: Voltage pulsing 1st harmonics
4: Voltage pulsing 2-stage
6: Voltage pulsing 2-stage inverse
8: Voltage pulsing 2nd harmonic, inverse
10: DC current injection
Dependency: See also: p1780
See also: F07969
Note
Voltage pulse technique (p1980 = 1, 4, 8) cannot be applied for operation with sine-wave output filters (p0230).
r1992.0...15 CO/BO: PolID diagnostics / PolID diag
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the diagnostics information of the pole position identification (polID)
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
SINAMICS G120X converter
730 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
00 Critical encoder fault occurred Yes No -
02 Encoder parking active Yes No -
05 Encoder fault Class 1 Yes No -
06 Encoder fault Class 2 Yes No -
07 Pole position identification for encoder carried out Yes No -
08 Fine synchronization carried out Yes No -
09 Coarse synchronization carried out Yes No -
10 Commutation information available Yes No -
11 Speed information available Yes No -
12 Position information available Yes No -
15 Zero mark passed Yes No -
Dependency: See also: p0325, p0329, p1980
Note
The data of p1992 are updated in a 4 ms cycle.
Fast changes of the encoder status word bits can be better investigated using p7830 and following.
PolID: Pole position identification
p1998[0...n] PolID circle center point / PolID circ center
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0000 [A] 10000.0000 [A] 0.0000 [A]
Description: Current offset determined to measure the speed (RESM)
Dependency: See also: p1980, r1992
p2000 Reference speed reference frequency / n_ref f_ref
Access level: 2 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
6.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 1500.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for speed and frequency.
All speeds or frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).
The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) = reference speed (in ((rpm) / 60) x pole pair number)
Dependency: This parameter is only updated during the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) if motor commissioning was
carried out beforehand for drive data set zero. This means that the parameter is not locked against overwriting using
p0573 = 1.
See also: p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004, r3996
NOTICE
When the reference speed / reference frequency is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 731
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities
are used as internal conversion factor.
Example 1:
The signal of an analog input (e.g. r0755[0]) is connected to a speed setpoint (e.g. p1070[0]). The actual percentage
input value is cyclically converted into the absolute speed setpoint using the reference speed (p2000).
Example 2:
The setpoint from PROFIBUS (r2050[1]) is connected to a speed setpoint (e.g. p1070[0]). The actual input value is
cyclically converted into a percentage value via the pre-specified scaling 4000 hex. This percentage value is converted
to the absolute speed setpoint via reference speed (p2000).
p2001 Reference voltage / Reference voltage
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
10 [Vrms] 100000 [Vrms] 1000 [Vrms]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for voltages.
All voltages specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. This also applies for direct voltage values
(= rms value) like the DC link voltage.
The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).
Note:
This reference quantity also applies to direct voltage values. It is not interpreted as rms value, but as DC voltage value.
Dependency: p2001 is only updated during automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) if motor commissioning has been carried
out first for drive data set zero and as a result overwriting of the parameter has not been blocked by setting p0573 =
1.
See also: r3996
p2002 Reference current / I_ref
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.10 [Arms] 100000.00 [Arms] 100.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for currents.
All currents specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).
Dependency: This parameter is only updated during the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) if motor commissioning was
carried out beforehand for drive data set zero. This means that the parameter is not locked against overwriting using
p0573 = 1.
See also: r3996
NOTICE
If various DDS are used with different motor data, then the reference quantities remain the same as these are not
changed over with the DDS. The resulting conversion factor must be taken into account.
Example:
p2002 = 100 A
Reference quantity 100 A corresponds to 100 %
p0305[0] = 100 A
Rated motor current 100 A for MDS0 in DDS0 --> 100 % corresponds to 100 % of the rated motor current
p0305[1] = 50 A
Rated motor current 50 A for MDS1 in DDS1 --> 100 % corresponds to 200 % of the rated motor current
When the reference current is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
SINAMICS G120X converter
732 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
Pre-assigned value is p0640.
If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities
are used as internal conversion factor.
For infeed units, the rated line current, which is obtained from the rated power and parameterized rated line supply
voltage (p2002 = r0206 / p0210 / 1.73) is pre-assigned as the reference quantity.
Example:
The actual value of a phase current (r0069[0]) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual current value
is cyclically converted into a percentage of the reference current (p2002) and output according to the parameterized
scaling.
p2003 Reference torque / M_ref
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 7_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.01 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 1.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for torque.
All torques specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).
Dependency: This parameter is only updated during the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) if motor commissioning was
carried out beforehand for drive data set zero. This means that the parameter is not locked against overwriting using
p0573 = 1.
See also: r3996
NOTICE
When the reference torque is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note
Preassigned value is 2 * p0333.
If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities
are used as internal conversion factor.
Example:
The actual value of the total torque (r0079) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual torque is cyclically
converted into a percentage of the reference torque (p2003) and output according to the parameterized scaling.
r2004 Reference power / P_ref
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 14_10 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]
Description: Displays the reference quantity for power.
All power ratings specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).
Dependency: This value is calculated as follows:
Infeed: Calculated from voltage times current.
Closed-loop control: Calculated from torque times speed.
See also: p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 733
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities
are used as internal conversion factor.
The reference power is calculated as follows:
- 2 * Pi * reference speed / 60 * reference torque (motor)
- reference voltage * reference current * root(3) (infeed)
p2006 Reference temperature / Ref temp
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
50.00 [°C] 300.00 [°C] 100.00 [°C]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for temperature.
All temperatures specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).
p2010 Comm IF baud rate / Comm baud
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
6 12 12
Description: Sets the baud rate for the commissioning interface (USS, RS232).
Value: 6: 9600 baud
7: 19200 baud
8: 38400 baud
9: 57600 baud
10: 76800 baud
11: 93750 baud
12: 115200 baud
Note
COMM-IF: Commissioning interface
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p2011 Comm IF address / Comm add
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 31 2
Description: Sets the address for the commissioning interface (USS, RS232).
Note
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
SINAMICS G120X converter
734 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2016[0...3] CI: Comm IF USS PZD send word / Comm USS send word
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: 4000H Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) to be sent via the commissioning interface USS.
The actual values are displayed on an intelligent operator panel (IOP).
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
r2019[0...7] Comm IF error statistics / Comm err
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the receive errors at the commissioning interface (USS, RS232).
Index: [0] = Number of error-free telegrams
[1] = Number of rejected telegrams
[2] = Number of framing errors
[3] = Number of overrun errors
[4] = Number of parity errors
[5] = Number of starting character errors
[6] = Number of checksum errors
[7] = Number of length errors
p2020 Field bus interface baud rate / Field bus baud
G120X_USS Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9310
Min: Max: Factory setting:
4 13 8
Description: Sets the baud rate for the field bus interface (RS485).
Value: 4: 2400 baud
5: 4800 baud
6: 9600 baud
7: 19200 baud
8: 38400 baud
9: 57600 baud
10: 76800 baud
11: 93750 baud
12: 115200 baud
13: 187500 baud
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 735
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
Fieldbus IF: Fieldbus interface
Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
The parameter is set to the factory setting when the protocol is reselected.
When p2030 = 1 (USS), the following applies:
Min./max./factory setting: 4/13/8
For p2030 = 2 (Modbus RTU), the following applies:
Min./max./factory setting: 5/13/7
For p2030 = 5 (BACnet MS/TP) the following applies:
Possible values/factory setting: (6, 7, 8, 10) / 8
If p2030 = 8 (P1), the following applies:
Min./max./factory setting: 5/7/5
p2021 Field bus interface address / Field bus address
G120X_USS Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9310
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 255 0
Description: Displays or sets the address for the fieldbus interface (RS485).
The address can be set as follows:
1) Using the address switch on the Control Unit.
--> p2021 displays the address setting.
--> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
2) Using p2021
--> Only if an address of 0 or an address that is invalid for the fieldbus selected in p2030 has been set using the address
switch.
--> The address is saved in a non-volatile fashion using the function "copy from RAM to ROM".
--> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
Dependency: See also: p2030
Note
Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
The parameter is set to the factory setting when the protocol is reselected.
When p2030 = 1 (USS), the following applies:
Min./max./factory setting: 0/31/0
When p2030 = 2 (Modbus), the following applies:
Min./max./factory setting: 1/247/1
If p2030 = 5 (BACnet), the following applies:
Min./max./factory setting: 0/127/1
If p2030 = 8 (P1), the following applies:
Min./max./factory setting: 1/99/99
p2022 Field bus int USS PZD no. / Field bus USS PZD
G120X_USS Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9310
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 8 2
Description: Sets the number of 16-bit words in the PZD part of the USS telegram for the field bus interface.
Dependency: See also: p2030
SINAMICS G120X converter
736 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p2023 Field bus interface USS PKW count / Field bus USS PKW
G120X_USS Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9310
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 127 127
Description: Sets the number of 16-bit words in the PKW part of the USS telegram for the field bus interface.
Value: 0: PKW 0 words
3: PKW 3 words
4: PKW 4 words
127: PKW variable
Dependency: See also: p2030
Note
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p2024[0...2] Fieldbus interface times / Fieldbus times
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9310
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] [0] 6000 [ms]
[1] 0 [ms]
[2] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the time values for the fieldbus interface.
For Modbus the following applies:
p2024[0, 1]: Not relevant.
p2024[2]: Telegram pause time (pause time between two telegrams).
The following applies for BACnet:
p2024[0]: APDU timeout.
p2024[1, 2]: Not relevant.
Index: [0] = Max. processing time
[1] = Character delay time
[2] = Telegram pause time
Dependency: See also: p2020, p2030
Note
For p2024[2] (Modbus):
If the field bus baud rate is changed (p2020), the default time setting is restored.
The default setting corresponds to a time of 3.5 characters (dependent on the baud rate that has been set).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 737
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2025[0...4] Fieldbus interface BACnet settings / BACnet setting
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9310
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4194303 [0] 1
[1] 5
[2] 3
[3] 32
[4] 0
Description: Sets the parameter for communication via BACnet.
p2025[0]:
Device object instance number (0 ... 4194303).
p2025[1]:
Maximum number of info frames (1 ... 10).
p2025[2]:
Number of APDU retries (0 ... 39).
p2025[3]:
Maximum master address (1 ... 127).
Index: [0] = Device object instance number
[1] = Maximum number of info frames
[2] = Number of APDU retries
[3] = Maximum master address
[4] = Reserved
Dependency: See also: p2030
p2026[0...74] Fieldbus interface BACnet COV increment / BACnet COV incr
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9310
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4194303 1
Description: Sets BACnet COV (change of value) increment values.
SINAMICS G120X converter
738 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Index: [0] = Analog input 0
[1] = Analog input 1
[2] = Analog input 2
[3] = Analog input 3
[4] = Analog input 4
[5] = Analog input 5
[6] = Analog input 6
[7] = Analog input 7
[8] = Analog Output 0
[9] = Analog Output 1
[10] = Analog Value 0
[11] = Analog Value 1
[12] = Analog Value 2
[13] = Analog Value 3
[14] = Analog Value 4
[15] = Analog Value 5
[16] = Analog Value 6
[17] = Analog Value 7
[18] = Analog Value 8
[19] = Analog Value 9
[20] = Analog Value 10
[21] = Analog Value 12
[22] = Analog Value 13
[23] = Analog Value 14
[24] = Analog Value 15
[25] = Analog Value 16
[26] = Analog Value 17
[27] = Analog Value 18
[28] = Analog Value 19
[29] = Analog Value 20
[30] = Analog Value 21
[31] = Analog Value 22
[32] = Analog Value 25
[33] = Analog Value 28
[34] = Analog Value 29
[35] = Analog Value 30
[36] = Analog Value 31
[37] = Analog Value 32
[38] = Analog Value 33
[39] = Analog Value 34
[40] = Analog Value 39
[41] = Analog Value 40
[42] = Analog Value 41
[43] = Analog Value 5000
[44] = Analog Value 5001
[45] = Analog Value 5002
[46] = Analog Value 5003
[47] = Analog Value 5004
[48] = Analog Value 5005
[49] = Analog Value 5006
[50] = Analog Value 5007
[51] = Analog Value 5100
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 739
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
[52] = Analog Value 5101
[53] = Analog Value 5102
[54] = Analog Value 5103
[55] = Analog Value 5104
[56] = Analog Value 5105
[57] = Analog Value 5106
[58] = Analog Value 5107
[59] = Analog Value 5200
[60] = Analog Value 5201
[61] = Analog Value 5202
[62] = Analog Value 5203
[63] = Analog Value 5204
[64] = Analog Value 5205
[65] = Analog Value 5206
[66] = Analog Value 5207
[67] = Analog Value 5300
[68] = Analog Value 5301
[69] = Analog Value 5302
[70] = Analog Value 5303
[71] = Analog Value 5304
[72] = Analog Value 5305
[73] = Analog Value 5306
[74] = Analog Value 5307
Dependency: See also: p2030
p2027 Fieldbus interface BACnet language selection / BACnet language
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9310
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the language for the BACnet object properties.
Value: 0: German
1: English
Note
Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
r2029[0...7] Field bus interface error statistics / Field bus error
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9310
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the receive errors on the field bus interface (RS485).
SINAMICS G120X converter
740 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Index: [0] = Number of error-free telegrams
[1] = Number of rejected telegrams
[2] = Number of framing errors
[3] = Number of overrun errors
[4] = Number of parity errors
[5] = Number of starting character errors
[6] = Number of checksum errors
[7] = Number of length errors
p2030 Field bus interface protocol selection / Field bus protocol
G120X_DP Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9310
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 3 3
Description: Sets the communication protocol for the field bus interface.
Value: 0: No protocol
3: PROFIBUS
Note
Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p2030 Field bus interface protocol selection / Field bus protocol
G120X_PN Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9310
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 10 7
Description: Sets the communication protocol for the field bus interface.
Value: 0: No protocol
7: PROFINET
10: EtherNet/IP
Note
Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p2030 Field bus interface protocol selection / Field bus protocol
G120X_USS Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9310
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 5 0
Description: Sets the communication protocol for the field bus interface.
Value: 0: No protocol
1: USS
2: Modbus RTU
5: BACnet MS/TP
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 741
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p2031 Fieldbus interface MODBUS parity / Modbus parity
G120X_USS Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9310
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 2 2
Description: Sets the parity for the Modbus protocol (p2030 = 2).
Value: 0: No parity
1: Odd parity
2: Even parity
Note
Fieldbus IF: Fieldbus interface
Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
The parameter is set to the factory setting when the protocol is reselected (p2030 = 2).
r2032 Master control control word effective / PcCtrl STW eff
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the effective control word 1 (STW1) of the drive for the master control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No -
01 OC / OFF2 Yes No -
02 OC / OFF3 Yes No -
03 Enable operation Yes No -
04 Enable ramp-function generator Yes No -
05 Start ramp-function generator Yes No -
06 Enable speed setpoint Yes No -
07 Acknowledge fault Yes No -
08 Jog bit 0 Yes No 3030
09 Jog bit 1 Yes No 3030
10 Master control by PLC Yes No -
NOTICE
The master control only influences control word 1 and speed setpoint 1. Other control word/setpoints can be
transferred from another automation device.
Note
OC: Operating condition
SINAMICS G120X converter
742 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2037 PROFIdrive STW1.10 = 0 mode / PD STW1.10=0
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
G120X_PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 2 0
Description: Sets the processing mode for PROFIdrive STW1.10 "master control by PLC".
Generally, control world 1 is received with the first receive word (PZD1) (this is in conformance to the PROFIdrive
profile). The behavior of STW1.10 = 0 corresponds to that of the PROFIdrive profile. For other applications that deviate
from this, the behavior can be adapted using this particular parameter.
Value: 0: Freeze setpoints and continue to process sign-of-life
1: Freeze setpoints and sign-of-life
2: Do not freeze setpoints
Recommendation: Do not change the setting p2037 = 0.
Note
If the STW1 is not transferred according to the PROFIdrive with PZD1 (with bit 10 "master control by PLC"), then p2037
should be set to 2.
p2038 PROFIdrive STW/ZSW interface mode / PD STW/ZSW IF mode
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
G120X_PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 2 0
Description: Sets the interface mode of the PROFIdrive control words and status words.
When selecting a telegram via p0922 (p2079), this parameter influences the device-specific assignment of the bits in
the control and status words.
Value: 0: SINAMICS
2: VIK-NAMUR
Dependency: See also: p0922, p2079
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note
- For p0922 (p2079) = 1, 350 ... 999, p2038 is automatically set to 0.
- For p0922 (p2079) = 20, p2038 is automatically set to 2.
It is not then possible to change p2038.
p2039 Select debug monitor interface / Debug monit select
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 3 0
Description: The serial interface for the debug monitor is COM1 (commissioning interface, RS232) or COM2 (fieldbus interface,
RS485).
Value = 0: Deactivated
Value = 1: COM1, commissioning protocol is deactivated
Value = 2: COM2, field bus is deactivated
Value = 3: Reserved
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 743
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
Value = 2 is only possible for Control Units with RS485 as a field bus interface.
p2040 Fieldbus interface monitoring time / Fieldbus t_monit
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9310
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 1999999 [ms] 1000 [ms]
Description: Sets the monitoring time to monitor the process data received via the fieldbus interface.
If no process data is received within this time, then an appropriate message is output.
Dependency: See also: F01910
Note
p2040 = 0:
Monitoring is deactivated.
For p2030 = 2 (Modbus RTU) or p2030 = 5 (BACnet MS/TP) the following deviation applies:
Factory setting: 10000
p2042 PROFIBUS Ident Number / PB ident No.
G120X_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the PROFIBUS ident number (PNO-ID).
SINAMICS can be operated with various identities on PROFIBUS. This allows the use of a PROFIBUS GSD that is
independent of the device (e.g. PROFIdrive VIK-NAMUR with ident number 3AA0 hex).
Value: 0: SINAMICS
1: VIK-NAMUR
Note
Every change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
r2043.0...2 BO: PROFIdrive PZD state / PD PZD state
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
G120X_PN Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2410
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the PROFIdrive PZD state.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Setpoint failure Yes No -
02 Fieldbus operation Yes No -
Dependency: See also: p2044
Note
When using the "setpoint failure" signal, the bus can be monitored and an application-specific response triggered when
the setpoint fails.
SINAMICS G120X converter
744 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2044 PROFIdrive fault delay / PD fault delay
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2410
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [s] 100 [s] 0 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time to initiate fault F01910 after a setpoint failure.
The time until the fault is initiated can be used by the application. This means that is is possible to respond to the failure
while the drive is still operational (e.g. emergency retraction).
Dependency: See also: r2043
See also: F01910
p2047 PROFIBUS additional monitoring time / PB suppl t_monit
G120X_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2410
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 20000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the additional monitoring time to monitor the process data received via PROFIBUS.
Enables short bus faults to be compensated.
If no process data is received within this time, then an appropriate message is output.
Dependency: See also: F01910
Note
For controller STOP, the additional monitoring time is not effective.
r2050[0...11] CO: PROFIdrive PZD receive word / PZD recv word
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: 4000H Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2440, 2468,
9360
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with word format received from the fieldbus controller.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
NOTICE
Where there is a multiple interconnection of a connector output, all the connector inputs must either have Integer or
FloatingPoint data types. A BICO interconnection for a single PZD can only take place either on r2050 or r2060.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 745
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2051[0...16] CI: PROFIdrive PZD send word / PZD send word
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
G120X_PN Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: 4000H Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2450, 2470,
9370
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 2089[0]
[1] 63[0]
[2...16] 0
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with word format to be sent to the fieldbus controller.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p2051[0...16] CI: PROFIdrive PZD send word / PZD send word
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: 4000H Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2450, 2470,
9370
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with word format to be sent to the fieldbus controller.
SINAMICS G120X converter
746 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
r2053[0...16] PROFIdrive diagnostics send PZD word / Diag send word
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2450, 2470,
9370
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) with word format sent to the fieldbus controller.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 747
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -
r2054 PROFIBUS status / PB status
G120X_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2410
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4 -
Description: Status display for the PROFIBUS interface.
Value: 0: OFF
1: No connection (search for baud rate)
2: Connection OK (baud rate found)
3: Cyclic connection with master (data exchange)
4: Cyclic data OK
r2055[0...2] PROFIBUS diagnostics standard / PB diag standard
G120X_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2410
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Diagnostics display for the PROFIBUS interface.
Index: [0] = Master bus address
[1] = Master input total length bytes
[2] = Master output total length bytes
r2060[0...10] CO: PROFIdrive PZD receive double word / PZD recv DW
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer32
Can be changed: - Scaling: 4000H Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2440, 2468
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with double word format received from the fieldbus controller.
SINAMICS G120X converter
748 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
Dependency: See also: r2050
NOTICE
Where there is a multiple interconnection of a connector output, all the connector inputs must either have Integer or
FloatingPoint data types.
A BICO interconnection for a single PZD can only take place either on r2050 or r2060.
p2061[0...15] CI: PROFIdrive PZD send double word / PZD send DW
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
Integer32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: 4000H Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2470
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with double word format to be sent to the fieldbus controller.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
[15] = PZD 16 + 17
Dependency: See also: p2051
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection for a single PZD can only take place either on p2051 or p2061.
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 749
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r2063[0...15] PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send double word / Diag send DW
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2470
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) with double word format sent to the fieldbus controller.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
[15] = PZD 16 + 17
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -
16 Bit 16 ON OFF -
17 Bit 17 ON OFF -
18 Bit 18 ON OFF -
19 Bit 19 ON OFF -
20 Bit 20 ON OFF -
21 Bit 21 ON OFF -
22 Bit 22 ON OFF -
23 Bit 23 ON OFF -
24 Bit 24 ON OFF -
25 Bit 25 ON OFF -
SINAMICS G120X converter
750 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
26 Bit 26 ON OFF -
27 Bit 27 ON OFF -
28 Bit 28 ON OFF -
29 Bit 29 ON OFF -
30 Bit 30 ON OFF -
31 Bit 31 ON OFF -
NOTICE
A maximum of 4 indices of the "trace" function can be used.
r2067[0...1] PZD maximum interconnected / PZDmaxIntercon
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display for the maximum interconnected PZD in the receive/send direction
Index 0: receive (r2050, r2060)
Index 1: send (p2051, p2061)
r2074[0...11] PROFIdrive diagnostics bus address PZD receive / Diag addr recv
G120X_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the PROFIBUS address of the sender from which the process data (PZD) is received.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
Note
Value range:
0 - 125: Bus address of the sender
65535: Not assigned
r2075[0...11] PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / Diag offs recv
G120X_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2410
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 751
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive receive telegram (controller output).
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
Note
Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
65535: Not assigned
r2076[0...16] PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / Diag offs send
G120X_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2410
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive send telegram (controller input).
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
Note
Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
65535: Not assigned
SINAMICS G120X converter
752 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r2077[0...15] PROFIBUS diagnostics peer-to-peer data transfer addresses / PB diag peer addr
G120X_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the addresses of the slaves (peers) where peer-to-peer data transfer has been configured via PROFIBUS.
p2079 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended / PZD telegr ext
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
G120X_PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 999 1
Description: Sets the send and receive telegram.
Contrary to p0922, a telegram can be selected using p2079 and subsequently expanded.
Value: 1: Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2
20: Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6
350: SIEMENS telegram 350, PZD-4/4
352: SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6
353: SIEMENS telegram 353, PZD-2/2, PKW-4/4
354: SIEMENS telegram 354, PZD-6/6, PKW-4/4
999: Free telegram configuration with BICO
Dependency: See also: p0922
Note
For p0922 < 999 the following applies:
p2079 has the same value and is inhibited. All of the interconnections and extensions contained in the telegram are
inhibited.
For p0922 = 999 the following applies:
p2079 can be freely set. If p2079 is also set to 999, then all of the interconnections can be set.
For p0922 = 999 and p2079 < 999 the following applies:
The interconnections contained in the telegram are inhibited. However, the telegram can be extended.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 753
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2080[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 1 / Bin/con ZSW1
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2472
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 899.0
[1] 899.1
[2] 899.2
[3] 2139.3
[4] 899.4
[5] 899.5
[6] 899.6
[7] 2139.7
[8] 2197.7
[9] 899.9
[10] 2199.1
[11] 1407.7
[12] 0
[13] 2135.14
[14] 2197.3
[15] 2135.15
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller.
The individual bits are combined to form status word 1.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: See also: p2088, r2089
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p2080[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 1 / Bin/con ZSW1
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2472
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
754 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller.
The individual bits are combined to form status word 1.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: See also: p2088, r2089
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p2081[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 2 / Bin/con ZSW2
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2472
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller.
The individual bits are combined to form status word 2.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: See also: p2088, r2089
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 755
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2082[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 3 / Bin/con ZSW3
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2472
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller.
The individual bits are combined to form free status word 3.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: See also: p2088, r2089
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p2083[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 4 / Bin/con ZSW4
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2472
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller.
The individual bits are combined to form free status word 4.
SINAMICS G120X converter
756 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: See also: p2088, r2089
p2084[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 5 / Bin/con ZSW5
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2472
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller.
The individual bits are combined to form free status word 5.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: See also: p2088, r2089
p2088[0...4] Invert binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW inv
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
G120X_PN Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2472
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 1010 1000 0000 0000 bin
[1...4] 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 757
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Setting to invert the individual binector inputs of the binector-connector converter.
Index: [0] = Status word 1
[1] = Status word 2
[2] = Free status word 3
[3] = Free status word 4
[4] = Free status word 5
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Inverted Not inverted -
01 Bit 1 Inverted Not inverted -
02 Bit 2 Inverted Not inverted -
03 Bit 3 Inverted Not inverted -
04 Bit 4 Inverted Not inverted -
05 Bit 5 Inverted Not inverted -
06 Bit 6 Inverted Not inverted -
07 Bit 7 Inverted Not inverted -
08 Bit 8 Inverted Not inverted -
09 Bit 9 Inverted Not inverted -
10 Bit 10 Inverted Not inverted -
11 Bit 11 Inverted Not inverted -
12 Bit 12 Inverted Not inverted -
13 Bit 13 Inverted Not inverted -
14 Bit 14 Inverted Not inverted -
15 Bit 15 Inverted Not inverted -
Dependency: See also: p2080, p2081, p2082, p2083, r2089
p2088[0...4] Invert binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW inv
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2472
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Setting to invert the individual binector inputs of the binector-connector converter.
Index: [0] = Status word 1
[1] = Status word 2
[2] = Free status word 3
[3] = Free status word 4
[4] = Free status word 5
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Inverted Not inverted -
01 Bit 1 Inverted Not inverted -
02 Bit 2 Inverted Not inverted -
03 Bit 3 Inverted Not inverted -
04 Bit 4 Inverted Not inverted -
05 Bit 5 Inverted Not inverted -
06 Bit 6 Inverted Not inverted -
07 Bit 7 Inverted Not inverted -
08 Bit 8 Inverted Not inverted -
09 Bit 9 Inverted Not inverted -
10 Bit 10 Inverted Not inverted -
SINAMICS G120X converter
758 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
11 Bit 11 Inverted Not inverted -
12 Bit 12 Inverted Not inverted -
13 Bit 13 Inverted Not inverted -
14 Bit 14 Inverted Not inverted -
15 Bit 15 Inverted Not inverted -
Dependency: See also: p2080, p2081, p2082, p2083, r2089
r2089[0...4] CO: Send binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW send
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2472
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Connector output to interconnect the status words to a PZD send word.
Index: [0] = Status word 1
[1] = Status word 2
[2] = Free status word 3
[3] = Free status word 4
[4] = Free status word 5
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -
Dependency: See also: p2051, p2080, p2081, p2082, p2083
Note
r2089 together with p2080 to p2084 forms five binector-connector converters.
r2090.0...15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD1 receive bit-serial / PZD1 recv bitw
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2468, 9204,
9206, 9360
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD1 (normally control word 1) received from the PROFIdrive
controller.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 759
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -
r2091.0...15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD2 receive bit-serial / PZD2 recv bitw
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2468, 9204,
9206
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD2 received from the PROFIdrive controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -
SINAMICS G120X converter
760 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r2092.0...15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD3 receive bit-serial / PZD3 recv bitw
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2468, 9204,
9206
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD3 received from the PROFIdrive controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -
r2093.0...15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD4 receive bit-serial / PZD4 recv bitw
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2468, 9204,
9206
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD4 (normally control word 2) received from the PROFIdrive
controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 761
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -
r2094.0...15 BO: Connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2468, 9360
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial onward interconnection of a PZD word received from the PROFIdrive controller.
The PZD is selected via p2099[0].
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -
Dependency: See also: p2099
r2095.0...15 BO: Connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2468, 9360
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of a PZD word received from the PROFIdrive controller.
The PZD is selected via p2099[1].
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
SINAMICS G120X converter
762 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -
Dependency: See also: p2099
p2098[0...1] Inverter connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp inv
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2468, 9360
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Setting to invert the individual binector outputs of the connector-binector converter.
Using p2098[0], the signals of connector input p2099[0] are influenced.
Using p2098[1], the signals of connector input p2099[1] are influenced.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Inverted Not inverted -
01 Bit 1 Inverted Not inverted -
02 Bit 2 Inverted Not inverted -
03 Bit 3 Inverted Not inverted -
04 Bit 4 Inverted Not inverted -
05 Bit 5 Inverted Not inverted -
06 Bit 6 Inverted Not inverted -
07 Bit 7 Inverted Not inverted -
08 Bit 8 Inverted Not inverted -
09 Bit 9 Inverted Not inverted -
10 Bit 10 Inverted Not inverted -
11 Bit 11 Inverted Not inverted -
12 Bit 12 Inverted Not inverted -
13 Bit 13 Inverted Not inverted -
14 Bit 14 Inverted Not inverted -
15 Bit 15 Inverted Not inverted -
Dependency: See also: r2094, r2095, p2099
p2099[0...1] CI: Connector-binector converter signal source / Con/bin s_s
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2468, 9360
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the connector-binector converter.
A PZD receive word can be selected as signal source. The signals are available to be serially passed-on
(interconnection).
Dependency: See also: r2094, r2095
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 763
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
From the signal source set via the connector input, the corresponding lower 16 bits are converted.
p2099[0...1] together with r2094.0...15 and r2095.0...15 forms two connector-binector converters:
Connector input p2099[0] to binector output in r2094.0...15
Connector input p2099[1] to binector output in r2095.0...15
p2100[0...19] Change fault response fault number / Chng resp F_no
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8050, 8075
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 65535 0
Description: Selects the faults for which the fault response should be changed
Dependency: The fault is selected and the required response is set under the same index.
See also: p2101
Note
Re-parameterization is also possible if a fault is present. The change only becomes effective after the fault has been
resolved.
p2101[0...19] Change fault response response / Chng resp resp
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8050, 8075
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 6 0
Description: Sets the fault response for the selected fault.
Value: 0: NONE
1: OFF1
2: OFF2
3: OFF3
5: STOP2
6: Internal armature short-circuit / DC braking
Dependency: The fault is selected and the required response is set under the same index.
See also: p2100
NOTICE
For the following cases, it is not possible to re-parameterize the fault response to a fault:
- fault number does not exist (exception value = 0).
- Message type is not "fault" (F).
- fault response is not permissible for the set fault number.
SINAMICS G120X converter
764 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
Re-parameterization is also possible if a fault is present. The change only becomes effective after the fault has been
resolved.
The fault response can only be changed for faults with the appropriate identification.
Example:
F12345 and fault response = NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
--> The fault response NONE can be changed to OFF1 or OFF2.
For value = 1 (OFF1):
Braking along the ramp-function generator down ramp followed by a pulse inhibit.
For value = 2 (OFF2):
Internal/external pulse inhibit.
For value = 3 (OFF3):
Braking along the OFF3 down ramp followed by a pulse inhibit.
For value = 5 (STOP2):
n_set = 0
For value = 6 (armature short-circuit, internal/DC braking):
This value can only be set for all drive data sets when p1231 = 4.
a) DC braking is not possible for synchronous motors.
b) DC braking is possible for induction motors.
p2103[0...n] BI: 1st acknowledge faults / 1st acknowledge
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2441, 2442,
2443, 2447, 2475, 2546, 9220,
9677, 9678
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 2090.7
[1] 0
[2] 2090.7
[3] 2090.7
Description: Sets the first signal source to acknowledge faults.
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note
A fault acknowledgment is triggered with a 0/1 signal.
p2103[0...n] BI: 1st acknowledge faults / 1st acknowledge
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2441, 2442,
2443, 2447, 2475, 2546, 9220,
9677, 9678
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the first signal source to acknowledge faults.
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note
A fault acknowledgment is triggered with a 0/1 signal.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 765
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2104[0...n] BI: 2nd acknowledge faults / 2nd acknowledge
G120X_DP, Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2546, 8060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 722.5
[1] 722.5
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the second signal source to acknowledge faults.
Note
A fault acknowledgment is triggered with a 0/1 signal.
p2104[0...n] BI: 2nd acknowledge faults / 2nd acknowledge
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2546, 8060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 722.5
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the second signal source to acknowledge faults.
Note
A fault acknowledgment is triggered with a 0/1 signal.
p2105[0...n] BI: 3rd acknowledge faults / 3rd acknowledge
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2546, 8060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the third signal source to acknowledge faults.
Note
A fault acknowledgment is triggered with a 0/1 signal.
p2106[0...n] BI: External fault 1 / External fault 1
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2546
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 1.
Dependency: See also: F07860
Note
An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
SINAMICS G120X converter
766 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2107[0...n] BI: External fault 2 / External fault 2
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2546
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 2.
Dependency: See also: F07861
Note
An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
p2108[0...n] BI: External fault 3 / External fault 3
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2546
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 3.
External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation:
- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Dependency: See also: p3110, p3111, p3112
See also: F07862
Note
An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
p2108[0...n] BI: External fault 3 / External fault 3
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2546
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 4022.1
Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 3.
External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation:
- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Dependency: See also: p3110, p3111, p3112
See also: F07862
Note
An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
r2109[0...63] Fault time removed in milliseconds / t_flt resolved ms
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8050, 8060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 767
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the fault was removed.
Dependency: See also: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2130, r2133, r2136, p8400
NOTICE
The time comprises r2136 (days) and r2109 (milliseconds).
Note
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.
r2110[0...63] Alarm number / Alarm number
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8065
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: This parameter is identical to r2122.
p2111 Alarm counter / Alarm counter
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8050, 8065
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 65535 0
Description: Number of alarms that have occurred after the last reset.
Dependency: When p2111 is set to 0, the following is initiated:
- all of the alarms of the alarm buffer that have gone [0...7] are transferred into the alarm history [8...63].
- the alarm buffer [0...7] is deleted.
See also: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125
Note
The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON.
p2112[0...n] BI: External alarm 1 / External alarm 1
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2546
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 1.
Dependency: See also: A07850
Note
An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
r2114[0...1] System runtime total / Sys runtime tot
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
SINAMICS G120X converter
768 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Displays the total system runtime for the drive unit.
The time comprises r2114[0] (milliseconds) and r2114[1] (days).
After r2114[0] has reached a value of 86.400.000 ms (24 hours) this value is reset and r2114[1] is incremented.
Index: [0] = Milliseconds
[1] = Days
Dependency: See also: r0948, r2109, r2123, r2125, r2130, r2136, r2145, r2146
Note
When the electronic power supply is switched out, the counter values are saved.
After the drive unit is switched on, the counter continues to run with the last value that was saved.
p2116[0...n] BI: External alarm 2 / External alarm 2
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2546
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 2.
Dependency: See also: A07851
Note
An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
p2117[0...n] BI: External alarm 3 / External alarm 3
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2546
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 3.
Dependency: See also: A07852
Note
An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
p2117[0...n] BI: External alarm 3 / External alarm 3
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2546
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 4022.0
Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 3.
Dependency: See also: A07852
Note
An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 769
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2118[0...19] Change message type message number / Chng type msg_no
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8050, 8075
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 65535 0
Description: Selects faults or alarms for which the message type should be changed.
Dependency: Selects the fault or alarm selection and sets the required type of message realized under the same index.
See also: p2119
Note
Re-parameterization is also possible if a message is present. The change only becomes effective after the message
has gone.
p2119[0...19] Change message type type / Change type type
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8050, 8075
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 3 1
Description: Sets the message type for the selected fault or alarm.
Value: 1: Fault (F)
2: Alarm (A)
3: No message (N)
Dependency: Selects the fault or alarm selection and sets the required type of message realized under the same index.
See also: p2118
Note
Re-parameterization is also possible if a message is present. The change only becomes effective after the message
has gone.
The message type can only be changed for messages with the appropriate identification (exception, value = 0).
Example:
F12345(A) --> Fault F12345 can be changed to alarm A12345.
In this case, the message number that may be possibly entered in p2100[0...19] and p2126[0...19] is automatically
removed.
r2120 CO: Sum of fault and alarm buffer changes / Sum buffer changed
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8065
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the sum of all of the fault and alarm buffer changes in the drive unit.
Dependency: See also: r0944, r2121
r2121 CO: Counter alarm buffer changes / Alrm buff changed
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8065
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
SINAMICS G120X converter
770 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: This counter is incremented every time the alarm buffer changes.
Dependency: See also: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125
r2122[0...63] Alarm code / Alarm code
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8050, 8065
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the number of alarms that have occurred.
Dependency: See also: r2110, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146, r3121, r3123
NOTICE
The properties of the alarm buffer should be taken from the corresponding product documentation.
Note
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
Alarm buffer structure (general principle):
r2122[0], r2124[0], r2123[0], r2125[0] --> alarm 1 (the oldest)
...
r2122[7], r2124[7], r2123[7], r2125[7] --> Alarm 8 (the latest)
When the alarm buffer is full, the alarms that have gone are entered into the alarm history:
r2122[8], r2124[8], r2123[8], r2125[8] --> Alarm 1 (the latest)
...
r2122[63], r2124[63], r2123[63], r2125[63] --> alarm 56 (the oldest)
r2123[0...63] Alarm time received in milliseconds / t_alarm recv ms
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8050, 8065
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the alarm occurred.
Dependency: See also: r2110, r2122, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146, p8400
NOTICE
The time comprises r2145 (days) and r2123 (milliseconds).
Note
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.
r2124[0...63] Alarm value / Alarm value
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8050, 8065
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays additional information about the active alarm (as integer number).
Dependency: See also: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146, r3121, r3123
Note
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 771
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r2125[0...63] Alarm time removed in milliseconds / t_alarm res ms
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8050, 8065
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the alarm was cleared.
Dependency: See also: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2134, r2145, r2146, p8400
NOTICE
The time comprises r2146 (days) and r2125 (milliseconds).
Note
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.
p2126[0...19] Change acknowledge mode fault number / Chng ackn F_no
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8050, 8075
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 65535 0
Description: Selects the faults for which the acknowledge mode is to be changed
Dependency: Selects the faults and sets the required acknowledge mode realized under the same index
See also: p2127
Note
Re-parameterization is also possible if a fault is present. The change only becomes effective after the fault has been
resolved.
p2127[0...19] Change acknowledge mode mode / Chng ackn mode
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8050, 8075
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 2 1
Description: Sets the acknowledge mode for selected fault.
Value: 1: Acknowledgment only using POWER ON
2: Ack IMMEDIATELY after the fault cause has been removed
Dependency: Selects the faults and sets the required acknowledge mode realized under the same index
See also: p2126
NOTICE
It is not possible to re-parameterize the acknowledge mode for a fault in the following cases:
- fault number does not exist (exception value = 0).
- Message type is not "fault" (F).
- Acknowledge mode is not permissible for the set fault number.
SINAMICS G120X converter
772 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
Re-parameterization is also possible if a fault is present. The change only becomes effective after the fault has been
resolved.
The acknowledge mode can only be changed for faults with the appropriate identification.
Example:
F12345 and acknowledge mode = IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
--> The acknowledge mode can be changed from IMMEDIATELY to POWER ON.
p2128[0...15] Faults/alarms trigger selection / F/A trigger sel
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8050, 8070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 65535 0
Description: Sets the faults/alarms for which a trigger signal should be generated in r2129.0...15.
Dependency: If the fault/alarm set in p2128[0...15] occurs, then the particular binector output r2129.0...15 is set.
See also: r2129
r2129.0...15 CO/BO: Faults/alarms trigger word / F/A trigger word
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8070
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the trigger signals of the faults/alarms set in p2128[0...15].
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Trigger signal p2128[0] ON OFF -
01 Trigger signal p2128[1] ON OFF -
02 Trigger signal p2128[2] ON OFF -
03 Trigger signal p2128[3] ON OFF -
04 Trigger signal p2128[4] ON OFF -
05 Trigger signal p2128[5] ON OFF -
06 Trigger signal p2128[6] ON OFF -
07 Trigger signal p2128[7] ON OFF -
08 Trigger signal p2128[8] ON OFF -
09 Trigger signal p2128[9] ON OFF -
10 Trigger signal p2128[10] ON OFF -
11 Trigger signal p2128[11] ON OFF -
12 Trigger signal p2128[12] ON OFF -
13 Trigger signal p2128[13] ON OFF -
14 Trigger signal p2128[14] ON OFF -
15 Trigger signal p2128[15] ON OFF -
Dependency: If the fault/alarm set in p2128[0...15] occurs, then the particular binector output r2129.0...15 is set.
See also: p2128
Note
CO: r2129 = 0 --> None of the selected messages has occurred.
CO: r2129 > 0 --> At least one of the selected messages has occurred.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 773
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r2130[0...63] Fault time received in days / t_fault recv days
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the fault occurred.
Dependency: See also: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2133, r2136, p8401
NOTICE
The time comprises r2130 (days) and r0948 (milliseconds).
The value displayed in r2130 refers to January 1, 1970
Note
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
r2131 CO: Actual fault code / Act fault code
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the code of the oldest active fault.
Dependency: See also: r3131, r3132
Note
0: No fault present.
r2132 CO: Actual alarm code / Actual alarm code
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8065
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the code of the last alarm that occurred.
Note
0: No alarm present.
r2133[0...63] Fault value for float values / Fault val float
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays additional information about the fault that occurred for float values.
Dependency: See also: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2136
Note
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
SINAMICS G120X converter
774 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r2134[0...63] Alarm value for float values / Alarm value float
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8065
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays additional information about the active alarm for float values.
Dependency: See also: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2145, r2146, r3121, r3123
Note
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
r2135.12...15 CO/BO: Status word faults/alarms 2 / ZSW fault/alarm 2
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2548
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the second status word of faults and alarms.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
12 Fault motor overtemperature Yes No 8016
13 Fault power unit thermal overload Yes No 8021
14 Alarm motor overtemperature Yes No 8016
15 Alarm power unit thermal overload Yes No 8021
r2136[0...63] Fault time removed in days / t_flt resolv days
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the fault was removed.
Dependency: See also: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, p8401
NOTICE
The time comprises r2136 (days) and r2109 (milliseconds).
Note
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
r2138.7...15 CO/BO: Control word faults/alarms / STW fault/alarm
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2546
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the control word of faults and alarms.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
07 Acknowledge fault Yes No 8060
10 External alarm 1 (A07850) effective Yes No 8065
11 External alarm 2 (A07851) effective Yes No 8065
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 775
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
12 External alarm 3 (A07852) effective Yes No 8065
13 External fault 1 (F07860) effective Yes No 8060
14 External fault 2 (F07861) effective Yes No 8060
15 External fault 3 (F07862) effective Yes No 8060
Dependency: See also: p2103, p2104, p2105, p2106, p2107, p2108, p2112, p2116, p2117, p3110, p3111, p3112
r2139.0...15 CO/BO: Status word faults/alarms 1 / ZSW fault/alarm 1
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2548
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for status word 1 of faults and alarms.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Being acknowledged Yes No -
01 Acknowledgment required Yes No -
03 Fault present Yes No 8060
06 Internal message 1 present Yes No -
07 Alarm present Yes No 8065
08 Internal message 2 present Yes No -
11 Alarm class bit 0 High Low -
12 Alarm class bit 1 High Low -
13 Maintenance required Yes No -
14 Maintenance urgently required Yes No -
15 Fault gone/can be acknowledged Yes No -
Note
For bit 03, 07:
These bits are set if at least one fault/alarm occurs. Data is entered into the fault/alarm buffer with delay. This is the
reason that the fault/alarm buffer should only be read if, after "fault present" or "alarm present" has occurred, a change
in the buffer was also detected (r0944, r9744, r2121).
For bit 06, 08:
These status bits are used for internal diagnostic purposes only.
For bits 11, 12:
These status bits are used for the classification of internal alarm classes and are intended for diagnostic purposes only
on certain automation systems with integrated SINAMICS functionality.
p2140[0...n] Hysteresis speed 2 / n_hysteresis 2
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm] 90.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the following signals:
"|n_act| < = speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.1)
"|n_act| > speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.2)
Dependency: See also: p2155, r2197
SINAMICS G120X converter
776 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2141[0...n] Speed threshold 1 / n_thresh val 1
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 5.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the signal "f or n comparison value reached or exceeded" (BO: r2199.1).
Dependency: See also: p2142, r2199
p2142[0...n] Hysteresis speed 1 / n_hysteresis 1
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm] 2.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the signal "f or n / v comparison value reached or exceeded" (BO: r2199.1).
Dependency: See also: p2141, r2199
p2144[0...n] BI: Motor stall monitoring enable (negated) / Mot stall enab neg
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8012
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the negated enable (0 = enable) of the motor stall monitoring.
Dependency: See also: p2163, p2164, p2166, r2197, r2198
See also: F07900
Note
When interconnecting the enable signal with r2197.7 then the stall signal is suppressed if there is no speed setpoint -
actual value deviation.
r2145[0...63] Alarm time received in days / t_alarm recv days
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8065
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the alarm occurred.
Dependency: See also: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2146, p8401
NOTICE
The time comprises r2145 (days) and r2123 (milliseconds).
Note
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 777
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r2146[0...63] Alarm time removed in days / t_alarm res days
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8065
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the alarm was cleared.
Dependency: See also: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, p8401
NOTICE
The time comprises r2146 (days) and r2125 (milliseconds).
Note
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
p2148[0...n] BI: RFG active / RFG active
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8011
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the signal "ramp-function generator active" for the following signals/messages:
"Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_on" (BO: r2199.4)
"Ramp-up/ramp-down completed" (BO: r2199.5)
NOTICE
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note
The binector input is automatically interconnected to r1199.2 as a default setting.
p2149[0...n] Monitoring configuration / Monit config
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 1001 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for messages and monitoring functions.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enable alarm A07903 Yes No 8011
01 Load monitoring only in the 1st quadrant Yes No 8013
03 n_act > p2155 own hysteresis Yes No 8010
05 Stall monitoring for encoderless speed control Yes No -
Dependency: See also: r2197
See also: A07903
SINAMICS G120X converter
778 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
For bit 00:
Alarm A07903 is output when the bit is set with r2197.7 = 0 (n_set <> n_act).
For bit 01:
When the bit is set, the load monitoring is only executed in the 1st quadrant as a result of the positive characteristic
parameters (p2182 ... p2190).
For bit 03:
When the bit is set, r2197.1 and r2197.2 are determined using separate hysteresis functions.
For bit 05:
When this bit is set, a change to open-loop speed controlled operation is only possible when the motor is stationary.
p2150[0...n] Hysteresis speed 3 / n_hysteresis 3
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8010, 8011,
8022
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm] 2.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the following signals:
"|n_act| < speed threshold value 3" (BO: r2199.0)
"n_set >= 0" (BO: r2198.5)
"n_act >= 0" (BO: r2197.3)
Dependency: See also: p2161, r2197, r2199
p2151[0...n] CI: Speed setpoint for messages/signals / n_set for msg
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8011
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1170[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed setpoint for the following messages:
"Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off" (BO: r2197.7)
"Ramp-up/ramp-down completed" (BO: r2199.5)
"|n_set| < p2161" (BO: r2198.4)
"n_set > 0" (BO: r2198.5)
Dependency: See also: r2197, r2198, r2199
p2153[0...n] Speed actual value filter time constant / n_act_filt T
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 1000000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the time constant of the PT1 element to smooth the speed / velocity actual value.
The smoothed actual speed/velocity is compared with the threshold values and is only used for messages and signals.
Dependency: See also: r2169
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 779
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2155[0...n] Speed threshold 2 / n_thresh val 2
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 900.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the following messages:
"|n_act| < = speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.1)
"|n_act| > speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.2)
Dependency: See also: p2140, r2197
p2156[0...n] On delay comparison value reached / t_on cmpr val rchd
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the switch-in delay time for the signal "comparison value reached" (BO: r2199.1).
Dependency: See also: p2141, p2142, r2199
p2161[0...n] Speed threshold 3 / n_thresh val 3
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8010, 8011
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 5.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the signal "|n_act| < speed threshold value 3" (BO: r2199.0).
Dependency: See also: p2150, r2199
p2162[0...n] Hysteresis speed n_act > n_max / Hyst n_act>n_max
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 60000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the signal "n_act > n_max" (BO: r2197.6).
Dependency: See also: r1084, r1087, r2197
NOTICE
For p0322 = 0, the following applies: p2162 <= 0.1 * p0311
For p0322 > 0, the following applies: p2162 <= 1.02 * p0322 - p1082
If one of the conditions is violated, p2162 is appropriately and automatically reduced when exiting the commissioning
mode.
SINAMICS G120X converter
780 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
For a negative speed limit (r1087) the hysteresis is effective below the limit value and for a positive speed limit (r1084)
above the limit value.
If significant overshoot occurs in the maximum speed range (e.g. due to load shedding), you are advised to increase
the dynamic response of the speed controller (if possible). If this is insufficient, the hysteresis p2162 can only be
increased by more than 10% of the rated speed when the maximum speed (p0322) of the motor is sufficiently greater
than the speed limit p1082.
p2163[0...n] Speed threshold 4 / n_thresh val 4
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8011
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 90.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" signal/message (BO:
r2197.7).
Dependency: See also: p2164, p2166, r2197
p2164[0...n] Hysteresis speed 4 / n_hysteresis 4
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8011
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 200.00 [rpm] 2.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" signal/
message (BO: r2197.7).
Dependency: See also: p2163, p2166, r2197
p2165[0...n] Load monitoring stall monitoring upper threshold / Stall_mon up thr
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8013
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the upper speed threshold of the stall monitoring of the pump or fan.
The lower limit is formed by the speed threshold 1 of the load monitoring (p2182).
The stall monitoring is active between p2182 and p2165.
Dependency: The following applies: p2182 < p2165
See also: p2181, p2182, p2193
See also: A07891, F07894, A07926
Note
For p2165 = 0 or p2165 < p2182, the following applies:
There is no special stall monitoring for the pump/fan, but only the remaining load monitoring functions (e.g. leakage
monitoring for a pump) for the pump or fan are active.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 781
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2166[0...n] Off delay n_act = n_set / t_del_off n_i=n_so
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8011
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 200.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the switch-off delay time for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" signal/message (BO:
r2197.7).
Dependency: See also: p2163, p2164, r2197
p2167[0...n] Switch-on delay n_act = n_set / t_on n_act=n_set
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8011
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 200.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the switch-on delay for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_on" signal/message (BO:
r2199.4).
p2168[0...n] Load monitoring stall monitoring torque threshold / Stall_mon M_thresh
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8013
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 10000000.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the torque threshold of the stall monitoring of the pump or fan.
If, in the monitored speed range from p2182 to p2165, the torque exceeds this threshold, then this is evaluated as
either the motor having stalled or heavy-duty starting.
Dependency: For pumps, the following applies (p2193 = 4):
- the leakage characteristic must lie below the torque threshold for the stall monitoring
- the torque threshold for dry running operation must lie below the torque threshold for stall monitoring
For fans, the following applies (p2193 = 5):
- the torque threshold for the stall monitoring must lie above the torque threshold to identify belt breakage (p2191).
See also: p2165, p2181, p2191, p2193
See also: A07891, F07894, A07926
Note
The following applies for p2168 = 0:
The special stall monitoring for pump/fan is deactivated.
Then, only the remaining load monitoring functions (e.g. the leakage monitoring for a pump) for pump or fan are
realized.
r2169 CO: Actual speed smoothed signals / n_act smth message
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8010
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display and connector output of the smoothed speed actual value for messages.
Dependency: See also: p2153
SINAMICS G120X converter
782 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2170[0...n] Current threshold value / I_thres
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8022
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the absolute current threshold for the messages.
"I_act >= I_threshold p2170" (BO: r2197.8)
"I_act < I_threshold p2170" (BO: r2198.8)
Dependency: See also: p2171
p2171[0...n] Current threshold value reached delay time / I_thresh rch t_del
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8022
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for the comparison of the current actual value (r0068) with the current threshold value (p2170).
Dependency: See also: p2170
p2172[0...n] DC link voltage threshold value / Vdc thresh val
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2001 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 5_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [V] 2000 [V] 800 [V]
Description: Sets the DC link voltage threshold value for the following messages:
"Vdc_act <= Vdc_threshold p2172" (BO: r2197.9)
"Vdc_act > Vdc_threshold p2172" (BO: r2197.10)
Dependency: See also: p2173
p2173[0...n] DC link voltage comparison delay time / t_del Vdc
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for the comparison of the DC link voltage r0070 with the threshold value p2172.
Dependency: See also: p2172
p2175[0...n] Motor blocked speed threshold / Mot lock n_thresh
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8012
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 120.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold for the message "Motor blocked" (BO: r2198.6).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 783
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Dependency: See also: p0500, p2177, r2198
See also: F07900
Note
The following applies for sensorless vector control for induction motors:
At low speeds in open-loop speed controlled operation (see p1755, p1756), a blocked motor cannot be detected.
p2177[0...n] Motor blocked delay time / Mot lock t_del
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8012
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 65.000 [s] 3.000 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time for the message "Motor blocked" (BO: r2198.6).
Dependency: See also: p0500, p2175, r2198
See also: F07900
Note
The following applies for sensorless vector control:
At low speeds a locked motor can only be detected if no change is made to open-loop speed controlled operation. If this
is the case, the value in p2177 must be reduced accordingly (p2177 < p1758) before time p2177 has elapsed in order
to detect the locked state reliably.
As countermeasure, it is generally also possible to set p1750.6. This is only not permitted if the drive is slowly reversed
by the load at the torque limit (speed below p1755 for longer than p1758).
p2178[0...n] Motor stalled delay time / Mot stall t_del
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8012
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 10.000 [s] 0.010 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time for the message "Motor stalled" (BO: r2198.7).
Dependency: See also: r2198
Note
In the open-loop speed controlled operating range (see p1755, p1756), vector control stall monitoring depends on
threshold p1745.
At higher speeds, the difference between flux setpoint r0083 and flux actual value r0084 is monitored.
p2179[0...n] Output load identification current limit / Outp_ld iden I_lim
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2002 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8022
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Arms] 1000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the current limit for output load identification.
A missing output load is displayed using the "Output load not available" message (r2197.11 = 1).
This message is output with a delay time (p2180).
Dependency: See also: p2180
NOTICE
For synchronous motors the output current can be almost zero under no load conditions.
SINAMICS G120X converter
784 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
Missing output load is signaled in the following cases:
- the motor is not connected.
- a phase failure has occurred.
p2180[0...n] Output load detection delay time / Out_load det t_del
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8022
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 2000 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for the message "output load not available" (r2197.11 = 1).
Dependency: See also: p2179
p2181[0...n] Load monitoring response / Load monit resp
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8013
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 8 0
Description: Sets the response when evaluating the load monitoring.
Value: 0: Load monitoring disabled
1: A07920 for torque/speed too low
2: A07921 for torque/speed too high
3: A07922 for torque/speed out of tolerance
4: F07923 for torque/speed too low
5: F07924 for torque/speed too high
6: F07925 for torque/speed out of tolerance
7: Pump/fan load monitoring as alarm
8: Pump/fan load monitoring as fault
Dependency: See also: p2182, p2183, p2184, p2185, p2186, p2187, p2188, p2189, p2190, p2192, p2193, r2198, p3230, p3231
See also: A07891, A07892, A07893, F07894, F07895, F07896, F07898, A07920, A07921, A07922, F07923, F07924,
F07925
Note
The response to the faults F07923 ... F07925 can be set.
This parameter setting has no effect on the generation of fault F07936.
p2181 = 7, 8 can only be combined with p2193 = 4, 5.
p2182[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 1 / n_thresh 1
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8013
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 150.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.
The envelope curve (upper and lower envelope curve) is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds:
p2182 (n_threshold 1) --> p2185 (M_threshold 1, upper), p2186 (M_threshold 1, lower)
p2183 (n_threshold 2) --> p2187 (M_threshold 2, upper), p2188 (M_threshold 2, lower)
p2184 (n_threshold 3) --> p2189 (M_threshold 3, upper), p2190 (M_threshold 3, lower)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 785
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Dependency: The following applies: p2182 < p2183 < p2184
See also: p2183, p2184, p2185, p2186
See also: A07926
Note
In order that the load monitoring can reliably respond, the speed threshold p2182 should always be set lower than the
minimum motor speed to be monitored.
p2183[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 2 / n_thresh 2
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8013
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 900.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.
The envelope curve (upper and lower envelope curve) is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds:
p2182 (n_threshold 1) --> p2185 (M_threshold 1, upper), p2186 (M_threshold 1, lower)
p2183 (n_threshold 2) --> p2187 (M_threshold 2, upper), p2188 (M_threshold 2, lower)
p2184 (n_threshold 3) --> p2189 (M_threshold 3, upper), p2190 (M_threshold 3, lower)
Dependency: The following applies: p2182 < p2183 < p2184
See also: p2182, p2184, p2187, p2188
See also: A07926
p2184[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 3 / n_thresh 3
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8013
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 1500.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.
The envelope curve (upper and lower envelope curve) is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds:
p2182 (n_threshold 1) --> p2185 (M_threshold 1, upper), p2186 (M_threshold 1, lower)
p2183 (n_threshold 2) --> p2187 (M_threshold 2, upper), p2188 (M_threshold 2, lower)
p2184 (n_threshold 3) --> p2189 (M_threshold 3, upper), p2190 (M_threshold 3, lower)
Dependency: The following applies: p2182 < p2183 < p2184
See also: p2182, p2183, p2189, p2190
See also: A07926
Note
In order that the load monitoring can reliably respond, the speed threshold p2184 should always be set higher than the
maximum motor speed to be monitored.
p2185[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 1 upper / M_thresh 1 upper
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8013
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 10000000.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2185 > p2186
See also: p2182, p2186
See also: A07926
SINAMICS G120X converter
786 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The upper envelope curve is defined by p2185, p2187 and p2189.
p2186[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 1 lower / M_thresh 1 lower
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8013
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2186 < p2185
See also: p2182, p2185
See also: A07926
Note
The lower envelope curve is defined by p2186, p2188 and p2190.
p2187[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 2 upper / M_thresh 2 upper
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8013
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 10000000.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2187 > p2188
See also: p2183, p2188
See also: A07926
Note
The upper envelope curve is defined by p2185, p2187 and p2189.
p2188[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 2 lower / M_thresh 2 lower
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8013
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2188 < p2187
See also: p2183, p2187
See also: A07926
Note
The lower envelope curve is defined by p2186, p2188 and p2190.
p2189[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 3 upper / M_thresh 3 upper
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8013
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 10000000.00 [Nm]
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 787
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2189 > p2190
See also: p2184, p2190
See also: A07926
Note
The upper envelope curve is defined by p2185, p2187 and p2189.
p2190[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 3 lower / M_thresh 3 lower
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8013
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2190 < p2189
See also: p2184, p2189
See also: A07926
Note
The lower envelope curve is defined by p2186, p2188 and p2190.
p2191[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold no load / M_thresh no load
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 7_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8013
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Setting of the torque threshold to identify dry running operation for pumps or belt breakage for fans.
Dependency: The following applies: p2191< p2168 if p2168 <> 0
See also: p2181, p2182, p2184, p2193
See also: A07892, F07895, A07926
Note
For the setting p2191 = 0, the monitoring for dry running operation or belt breakage is deactivated.
Pre-assignment: p2191 = 5 % of the rated motor torque (p0333).
p2192[0...n] Load monitoring delay time / Load monit t_del
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8013
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [s] 65.00 [s] 10.00 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time to evaluate the load monitoring.
p2193[0...n] Load monitoring configuration / Load monit config
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8013
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 5 1
Description: Sets the load monitoring configuration.
SINAMICS G120X converter
788 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Value: 0: Monitoring switched out
1: Monitoring torque and load drop
2: Monitoring speed and load drop
3: Monitoring load drop
4: Monitoring pump and load failure
5: Monitoring fan and load failure
Dependency: See also: p2182, p2183, p2184, p2185, p2186, p2187, p2188, p2189, p2190, p2192, r2198, p3230, p3231, p3232
See also: A07891, A07892, A07893, F07894, F07895, F07896, F07898, A07920, A07921, A07922, F07923, F07924,
F07925, F07936
Note
p2193 = 4, 5 can only be combined with p2181 = 7, 8.
r2197.0...13 CO/BO: Status word monitoring 1 / ZSW monitor 1
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2534
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the first status word of the monitoring functions.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 |n_act| <= n_min p1080 Yes No 8022
01 |n_act| <= speed threshold value 2 p2155 Yes No 8010
02 |n_act| > speed threshold value 2 p2155 Yes No 8010
03 n_act >= 0 Yes No 8011
04 |n_act| >= n_set Yes No 8022
05 |n_act| <= n_standstill p1226 Yes No 8022
06 |n_act| > n_max Yes No 8010
07 Speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off Yes No 8011
08 I_act >= I_threshold value p2170 Yes No 8022
09 Vdc_act <= Vdc_threshold value p2172 Yes No 8022
10 Vdc_act > Vdc_threshold value p2172 Yes No 8022
11 Output load is not present Yes No 8022
13 |n_act| > n_max (F07901) Yes No -
NOTICE
For bit 06:
When the overspeed is reached, this bit is set and F07901 output immediately following this. The bit is canceled again
as soon as the next pulse inhibit is present.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 789
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
For bit 00:
The threshold value is set in p1080 and the hysteresis in p2150.
For bit 01, 02:
The threshold value is set in p2155 and the hysteresis in p2140.
For bit 03:
1 signal direction of rotation positive.
0 signal: direction of rotation negative.
The hysteresis is set in p2150.
For bit 04:
The threshold value is set in r1119 and the hysteresis in p2150.
For bit 05:
The threshold value is set in p1226 and the delay time in p1228.
For bit 06:
The hysteresis is set in p2162.
For bit 07:
The threshold value is set in p2163 and the hysteresis is set in p2164.
For bit 08:
The threshold value is set in p2170 and the delay time in p2171.
For bit 09, 10:
The threshold value is set in p2172 and the delay time in p2173.
For bit 11:
The threshold value is set in p2179 and the delay time in p2180.
For bit 13:
Only for internal Siemens use.
r2198.4...12 CO/BO: Status word monitoring 2 / ZSW monitor 2
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2536
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the second status word of the monitoring functions.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
04 |n_set| < p2161 Yes No 8011
05 n_set > 0 Yes No 8011
06 Motor blocked Yes No 8012
07 Motor stalled Yes No 8012
08 |I_act| < I_threshold value p2170 Yes No 8022
11 Load in the alarm range Yes No 8013
12 Load in the fault range Yes No 8013
Note
For bit 12:
This bit is reset after the fault cause disappears, even if the fault itself is still present.
r2199.0...5 CO/BO: Status word monitoring 3 / ZSW monitor 3
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2537
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the third status word of the monitoring functions.
SINAMICS G120X converter
790 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 |n_act| < speed threshold value 3 Yes No 8010
01 f or n comparison value reached or exceeded Yes No 8010
04 Speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_on Yes No 8011
05 Ramp-up/ramp-down completed Yes No 8011
Note
For bit 00:
The speed threshold value 3 is set in p2161.
For bit 01:
The comparison value is set in p2141. We recommend setting the hysteresis (p2142) for canceling the bit to a value
lower than that in p2141. Otherwise, the bit is not reset.
p2200[0...n] BI: Technology controller enable / Tec_ctrl enable
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to switch in/switch out the technology controller.
The technology controller is switched in with a 1 signal.
p2201[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 1 / Tec_ctrl fix val1
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7950, 7951
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 10.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 1 of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p2202[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 2 / Tec_ctr fix val 2
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7950, 7951
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 20.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 2 of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 791
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2203[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 3 / Tec_ctr fix val 3
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7950, 7951
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 30.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 3 of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p2204[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 4 / Tec_ctr fix val 4
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7950, 7951
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 40.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 4 of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p2205[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 5 / Tec_ctr fix val 5
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7950
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 50.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 5 of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p2206[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 6 / Tec_ctr fix val 6
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7950
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 60.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 6 of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
SINAMICS G120X converter
792 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2207[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 7 / Tec_ctr fix val 7
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7950
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 70.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 7 of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p2208[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 8 / Tec_ctr fix val 8
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7950
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 80.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 8 of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p2209[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 9 / Tec_ctr fix val 9
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7950
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 90.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 9 of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p2210[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 10 / Tec_ctr fix val 10
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7950
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 10 of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 793
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2211[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 11 / Tec_ctr fix val 11
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7950
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 110.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 11 of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p2212[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 12 / Tec_ctr fix val 12
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7950
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 120.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 12 of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p2213[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 13 / Tec_ctr fix val 13
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7950
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 130.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 13 of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p2214[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 14 / Tec_ctr fix val 14
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7950
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 140.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 14 of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
SINAMICS G120X converter
794 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2215[0...n] CO: Technology controller fixed value 15 / Tec_ctr fix val 15
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7950
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 150.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 15 of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p2216[0...n] Technology controller fixed value selection method / Tec_ctr FixVal sel
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7950, 7951
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 2 1
Description: Sets the method to select the fixed setpoints.
Value: 1: Direct selection
2: Binary selection
p2220[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 0 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 0
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7950, 7951
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select a fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2221, p2222, p2223
p2221[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 1 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 1
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7950, 7951
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select a fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2220, p2222, p2223
p2222[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 2 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 2
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7950, 7951
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select a fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2220, p2221, p2223
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 795
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2223[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 3 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 3
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7950, 7951
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select a fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2220, p2221, p2222
r2224 CO: Technology controller fixed value effective / Tec_ctr FixVal eff
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7950, 7951
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the selected and active fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: r2229
r2225.0 CO/BO: Technology controller fixed value selection status word / Tec_ctr FixVal ZSW
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the status word of the fixed value selection of the technology controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Technology controller fixed value selected Yes No 7950,
7951
r2229 Technology controller number actual / Tec_ctrl No. act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7950
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the number of the selected fixed setpoint of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: r2224
p2230[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer configuration / Tec_ctr mop config
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7954
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0100 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Data save active Yes No -
02 Initial rounding-off active Yes No -
03 Non-volatile data save active for p2230.0 = 1 Yes No -
SINAMICS G120X converter
796 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
04 Ramp-function generator always active Yes No -
Dependency: See also: r2231, p2240
Note
For bit 00:
0: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p2240.
1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved and after ON is entered using r2231. In order to save in a non-
volatile fashion, bit 03 should be set to 1.
For bit 02:
0: Without initial rounding-off
1: With initial rounding-off.
The selected ramp-up/down time is correspondingly exceeded. The initial rounding-off is a sensitive way of specifying
small changes (progressive reaction when keys are pressed). The jerk for initial rounding is independent of the ramp-
up time and only depends on the selected maximum value (p2237).
It is calculated as follows:
r = 0.0001 x max(p2237, |p2238|) [%] / 0.13^2 [s^2]
The jerk is effective until the maximum acceleration is reached (a_max = p2237 [%] / p2247 [s] or a_max = p2238 [%] /
p2248 [s]), after which the drive continues to run linearly with constant acceleration.
The higher the maximum acceleration (the lower that p2247 is), the longer the ramp-up time increases with respect to
the set ramp-up time.
For bit 03:
0: Non-volatile data save deactivated.
1. The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a non-volatile fashion (for p2230.0 = 1).
For bit 04:
When the bit is set, the ramp-function generator is computed independent of the pulse enable. The actual output value
of the motorized potentiometer is always in r2250.
r2231 Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint memory / Tec_ctrl mop mem
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7954
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the setpoint memory for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
For p2230.0 = 1, the last setpoint that was saved is entered after ON.
Dependency: See also: p2230
p2235[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer raise setpoint / Tec_ctrl mop raise
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7954
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to continually increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
The setpoint change (CO: r2250) depends on the set ramp-up time (p2247) and the duration of the signal that is
present (BI: p2235).
Dependency: See also: p2236
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 797
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2236[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Tec_ctrl mop lower
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7954
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to continually reduce the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
The setpoint change (CO: r2250) depends on the set ramp-down time (p2248) and the duration of the signal that is
present (BI: p2236).
Dependency: See also: p2235
p2237[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum value / Tec_ctrl mop max
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7954
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the maximum value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2238
p2238[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum value / Tec_ctrl mop min
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7954
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] -100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the minimum value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2237
p2240[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer starting value / Tec_ctrl mop start
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7954
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the starting value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
For p2230.0 = 0, this setpoint is entered after ON.
Dependency: See also: p2230
r2245 CO: Technology controller mot. potentiometer setpoint before RFG / Tec_ctr mop befRFG
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7954
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Sets the effective setpoint in front of the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator of the technology
controller.
Dependency: See also: r2250
SINAMICS G120X converter
798 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2247[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Tec_ctr mop t_r-up
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7954
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [s] 1000.0 [s] 10.0 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-up time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the technology
controller.
Dependency: See also: p2248
Note
The time is referred to 100 %.
When the initial rounding-off is activated (p2230.2 = 1) the ramp-up is correspondingly extended.
p2248[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Tec_ctrMop t_rdown
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7954
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [s] 1000.0 [s] 10.0 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the technology
controller.
Dependency: See also: p2247
Note
The time is referred to 100 %.
When the initial rounding-off is activated (p2230.2 = 1) the ramp-down is correspondingly extended.
r2250 CO: Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint after RFG / Tec_ctr mop aftRFG
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7954
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the effective setpoint after the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the
technology controller.
Dependency: See also: r2245
p2251 Technology controller mode / Tec_ctrl mode
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 0 0
Description: Sets the mode for using the technology controller output.
Value: 0: Technology controller as main speed setpoint
Dependency: p2251 = 0 is only effective if the enable signal of the technology controller is interconnected (p2200 > 0).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 799
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2252 Technology controller configuration / Tec_ctrl config
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration of the technology controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
04 Ramp-up/ramp-down function generator bypass Deactivated Activated -
05 Integrator active for skip speeds Yes No -
06 Internal controller limit not displayed Yes No -
07 Activate Kp adaptation Yes No 7958
08 Activate Tn adaptation Yes No 7958
Dependency: For bit 04 = 0:
The setting is only effective when the PID controller is deactivated.
CAUTION
For bit 04 = 1:
The PID controller can oscillate if the ramp-up and ramp-down times of the speed setpoint channel are not taken into
account when setting controller parameters p2280 and p2285.
Note
For bit 04 = 0:
The ramp-function generator in the speed setpoint channel is bypassed when the technology controller is operational.
As a consequence, ramp times p1120, p1121 are not taken into consideration when configuring the controller.
For bit 04 = 1:
The ramp-function generator in the speed setpoint channel is not bypassed when the technology controller is
operational.
As a consequence, the ramp-up and ramp-down times (p1120, p1121) remain effective, and must be taken into
account as controlled system variables when setting the PID controller parameters (p2280, p2285).
The enable ramps of the PID controller are ensured in this setting by p1120, p1121 as well as rounding functions p1130
and p1131. The ramp-up/ramp-down time of the PID controller limiting p2293 must be set appropriately shorter, as
otherwise this has an impact on the speed setpoint channel.
For bit 05 = 0:
The integral component of the PID controller is held if a skip band or the minimum speed range is passed through in
the speed set point channel.
This prevents the speed from oscillating between the edges of the skip band.
For bit 05 = 1:
The setting is only effective if a skip band is no longer active.
The integral component of the PID controller is not held in the range of the skip speeds.
The skip band is passed through even for small system deviations and low controller gain factors. In so doing, the
controller integral time must be selected large enough so that no undesirable speed oscillations occur between the skip
band edges.
The influence of a minimum speed p1080 on the integration behavior can be reduced by raising the lower PID controller
limit to p1080 / p2000 * 100%.
For bit 06 = 1:
In r2349, bit 10 and bit 11 are not displayed when reaching internal limits (e.g. for OFF1/3).
p2253[0...n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 1 / Tec_ctrl setp 1
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
800 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint 1 of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2254, p2255
p2254[0...n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 2 / Tec_ctrl setp 2
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint 2 of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2253, p2256
p2255 Technology controller setpoint 1 scaling / Tec_ctrl set1 scal
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the setpoint 1 of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2253
p2256 Technology controller setpoint 2 scaling / Tec_ctrl set2 scal
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the setpoint 2 of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2254
p2257 Technology controller ramp-up time / Tec_ctrl t_ramp-up
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-up time of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2258
Note
The ramp-up time is referred to 100 %.
p2258 Technology controller ramp-down time / Tec_ctrl t_ramp-dn
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time of the technology controller.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 801
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Dependency: See also: p2257
Note
The ramp-down time is referred to 100 %.
r2260 CO: Technology controller setpoint after ramp-function generator / Tec_ctr set aftRFG
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Sets the setpoint after the ramp-function generator of the technology controller.
p2261 Technology controller setpoint filter time constant / Tec_ctrl set T
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the time constant for the setpoint filter (PT1) of the technology controller.
r2262 CO: Technology controller setpoint after filter / Tec_ctr set aftFlt
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the smoothed setpoint after the setpoint filter (PT1) of the technology controller.
p2263 Technology controller type / Tec_ctrl type
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the type of technology controller.
Value: 0: D component in the actual value signal
1: D component in system deviation
p2264[0...n] CI: Technology controller actual value / Tec_ctrl act val
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the actual value of the technology controller.
SINAMICS G120X converter
802 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2265 Technology controller actual value filter time constant / Tec_ctrl act T
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the time constant for the actual value filter (PT1) of the technology controller.
r2266 CO: Technology controller actual value after filter / Tec_ctr act aftFlt
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the smoothed actual value after the filter (PT1) of the technology controller.
p2267 Technology controller upper limit actual value / Tec_ctrl u_lim act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the upper limit for the actual value signal of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2264, p2265, p2271
See also: F07426
NOTICE
If the actual value exceeds this upper limit, this results in fault F07426.
p2268 Technology controller lower limit actual value / Tec_ctrl l_lim act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] -100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the lower limit for the actual value signal of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2264, p2265, p2271
See also: F07426
NOTICE
If the actual value falls below this lower limit, this results in fault F07426.
p2269 Technology controller gain actual value / Tech_ctrl gain act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [%] 500.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling factor for the actual value of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2264, p2265, p2267, p2268, p2271
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 803
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
For 100%, the actual value is not changed.
p2270 Technology controller actual value function / Tec_ctr ActVal fct
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 3 0
Description: Setting to use an arithmetic function for the actual value signal of the technology controller.
Value: 0: Output (y) = input (x)
1: Root function (root from x)
2: Square function (x * x)
3: Cube function (x * x * x)
Dependency: See also: p2264, p2265, p2267, p2268, p2269, p2271
p2271 Technology controller actual value inversion (sensor type) / Tech_ctrl act inv
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Setting to invert the actual value signal of the technology controller.
The inversion depends on the sensor type for the actual value signal.
Value: 0: No inversion
1: Inversion actual value signal
CAUTION
If the actual value inversion is incorrectly selected, then the closed-loop control with the technology controller can
become unstable and can oscillate!
Note
The correct setting can be determined as follows:
- inhibit the technology controller (p2200 = 0).
- increase the motor speed and in so doing, measure the actual value signal of the technology controller.
--> If the actual value increases as the motor speed increases, then p2271 should be set to 0 (no inversion).
--> If the actual value decreases as the motor speed increases, then p2271 should be set to 1 (the actual value signal
is inverted).
r2272 CO: Technology controller actual value scaled / Tech_ctrl act scal
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the scaled actual value signal of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2264, p2265, r2266, p2267, p2268, p2269, p2270, p2271
SINAMICS G120X converter
804 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r2273 CO: Technology controller system deviation / Tec_ctrl sys_dev
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the system deviation between the setpoint and actual value of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2263
p2274 Technology controller differentiation time constant / Tec_ctrl D comp T
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the time constant for the differentiation (D component) of the technology controller.
Note
p2274 = 0: Differentiation is disabled.
p2280 Technology controller proportional gain / Tec_ctrl Kp
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 1000.000 0.500
Description: Sets the proportional gain (P component) of the technology controller.
Note
p2280 = 0: The proportional gain is disabled.
p2285 Technology controller integral time / Tec_ctrl Tn
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 10000.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
Description: Sets the integral time (I component, integrating time constant) of the technology controller.
NOTICE
The following applies for p2251 = 0:
If the output of the technology controller lies within the range of a suppression (skip) bandwidth (p1091 ... p1094,
p1101) or below the minimum speed (p1080), the integral component of the controller is held so that the controller
temporarily works as a P controller. This is necessary in order to prevent the controller from behaving in an unstable
manner, as the ramp-function generator switches to the parameterized up and down ramps (p1120, p1121) at the
same time in order to avoid setpoint steps. This state can be exited or avoided by changing the controller setpoint or
by using the start speed (= minimum speed).
Note
When the controller output reaches the limit, the I component of the controller is held.
p2285 = 0:
The integral time is disabled and the I component of the controller is reset.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 805
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2286[0...n] BI: Hold technology controller integrator / Tec_ctr integ hold
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 56.13
Description: Sets the signal source to hold the integrator for the technology controller.
p2289[0...n] CI: Technology controller precontrol signal / Tec_ctr prectr_sig
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the precontrol signal of the technology controller.
p2290[0...n] BI: Technology controller limiting enable / Tec_ctrl lim enab
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source to enable the technology controller output.
The technology controller output is enabled with a 1 signal.
The technology controller output is held with a 0 signal.
p2291 CO: Technology controller maximum limiting / Tec_ctrl max_lim
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the maximum limit of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2292
CAUTION
The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p2291 > p2292).
p2292 CO: Technology controller minimum limiting / Tec_ctrl min_lim
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the minimum limit of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2291
CAUTION
The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p2291 > p2292).
SINAMICS G120X converter
806 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2293 Technology controller ramp-up/ramp-down time / Tec_ctr t_RU/RD
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [s] 100.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramping time for the output signal of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2291, p2292
Note
The time refers to the set maximum and minimum limits (p2291, p2292).
r2294 CO: Technology controller output signal / Tec_ctrl outp_sig
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the output signal of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2295
p2295 CO: Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctrl outp scal
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-100.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the output signal of the technology controller.
p2296[0...n] CI: Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctrl outp scal
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 2295[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling value of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2295
p2297[0...n] CI: Technology controller maximum limit signal source / Tec_ctrMaxLim s_s
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1084[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the maximum limiting of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2291
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 807
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
In order that the output of the technology controller does not exceed the maximum speed limit, its upper limit p2297
should be connected to the actual maximum speed r1084.
p2298[0...n] CI: Technology controller minimum limit signal source / Tec_ctrl min_l s_s
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 2292[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the minimum limiting of the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2292
Note
If the technology controller is rotated in a negative direction in mode p2251 = 0, its lower limit p2298 should be
connected to the actual minimum speed r1087.
p2299[0...n] CI: Technology controller limit offset / Tech_ctrl lim offs
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the offset of the output limiting of the technology controller.
p2302 Technology controller output signal starting value / Tec_ctr start val
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the start value for the output of the technology controller.
If the drive is switched on and the technology controller is already enabled (see p2200, r0056.3), then its output signal
r2294 first goes to the start value p2302, before the controller starts to operate.
Dependency: The starting value is only effective in the mode "technology controller as main speed setpoint" (p2251 = 0).
If the technology controller is first enabled when the drive is switched on, a start speed remains ineffective, and the
controller output starts with the actual setpoint speed of the ramp-function generator.
Note
If the technology controller operates on the speed/setpoint channel (p2251 = 0), then the starting value is interpreted
as the starting speed and when operation is enabled, is connected to the output of the technology controller (r2294).
If fault F07426 "technology controller actual value limited" occurs while ramping up to the starting value and if the
associated reaction has been set to "NONE" (see p2100, p2101), the starting value is kept as the speed setpoint
instead of a switch to closed-loop control operation.
SINAMICS G120X converter
808 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2306 Technology controller system deviation inversion / Tec_ctr SysDev inv
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Setting to invert the system deviation of the technology controller.
The setting depends on the type of control loop.
Value: 0: No inversion
1: Inversion
CAUTION
If the actual value inversion is incorrectly selected, then the closed-loop control with the technology controller can
become unstable and can oscillate!
Note
The correct setting can be determined as follows:
- inhibit the technology controller (p2200 = 0).
- increase the motor speed and in so doing, measure the actual value signal (of the technology controller).
- if the actual value increases with increasing motor speed, then the inversion should be switched out.
- if the actual value decreases with increasing motor speed, then the inversion should be set.
If value = 0:
The drive reduces the output speed when the actual value rises (e.g. for heating fans, intake pump, compressor).
If value = 1:
The drive increases the output speed when the actual value increases (e.g. for cooling fans, discharge pumps).
p2310 CI: Technology controller Kp adaptation input value signal source / Kp adapt inp s_s
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7959
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the input value of the adaptation of proportional gain Kp for the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2252, p2311, p2312, p2313, p2314, p2315, r2316
p2311 Technology controller Kp adaptation lower value / Kp adapt lower val
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7959
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 1000.000 1.000
Description: Sets the lower value for the adaptation of proportional gain Kp for the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2310, p2312, p2313, p2314, p2315, r2316
CAUTION
The upper value must be set higher than the lower value (p2312 > p2311).
Note
Kp adaptation is activated with p2252.7 = 1.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 809
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2312 Technology controller Kp adaptation upper value / Kp adapt upper val
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7959
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 1000.000 10.000
Description: Sets the upper value for the adaptation of proportional gain Kp for the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2310, p2311, p2313, p2314, p2315, r2316
CAUTION
The upper value must be set higher than the lower value (p2312 > p2311).
Note
Kp adaptation is activated with p2252.7 = 1.
p2313 Technology controller Kp adaptation lower starting point / Kp adapt lower pt
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7959
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [%] 400.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the lower starting point for the adaptation of proportional gain Kp for the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2310, p2311, p2312, p2314, p2315, r2316
CAUTION
The upper starting point must be set higher than the lower starting point (p2314 > p2313).
Note
Kp adaptation is activated with p2252.7 = 1.
p2314 Technology controller Kp adaptation upper starting point / Kp adapt upper pt
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7959
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [%] 400.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the upper activation point for the adaptation of proportional gain Kp for the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2310, p2311, p2312, p2313, p2315, r2316
CAUTION
The upper starting point must be set higher than the lower starting point (p2314 > p2313).
Note
Kp adaptation is activated with p2252.7 = 1.
p2315 CI: Technology controller Kp adaptation scaling signal source / Kp adapt scal s_s
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7959
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source to scale the results of the adaptation of the proportional gain Kp for the technology controller.
SINAMICS G120X converter
810 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Dependency: See also: p2310, p2311, p2312, p2313, p2314, r2316
Note
Kp adaptation is activated with p2252.7 = 1.
r2316 CO: Technology controller, Kp adaptation output / Kp adapt outp
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7959
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and connector output for the output signal of the adaption of proportional gain Kp for the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2252, p2310, p2311, p2312, p2313, p2314, p2315
p2317 CI: Technology controller Tn adaptation input value signal source / Tn adapt inp s_s
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7959
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the input value of the adaptation of integral time Tn for the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2252, p2318, p2319, p2320, p2321, r2322
Note
Tn adaptation is activated with p2252.8 = 1.
p2318 Technology controller Tn adaptation upper value / Tn adapt upper val
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7959
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 3.000 [s]
Description: Sets the upper value for the adaptation of integral time Tn for the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2317, p2319, p2320, p2321, r2322
Note
Tn adaptation is activated with p2252.8 = 1.
p2319 Technology controller Tn adaptation lower value / Tn adapt lower val
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7959
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
Description: Sets the lower value for the adaptation of integral time Tn for the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2317, p2318, p2320, p2321, r2322
Note
Tn adaptation is activated with p2252.8 = 1.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 811
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2320 Technology controller Tn adaptation lower starting point / Tn adapt lower pt
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7959
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [%] 400.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the lower activation point for the adaptation of integral time Tn for the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2317, p2318, p2319, p2321, r2322
CAUTION
The upper starting point must be set higher than the lower starting point (p2321 > p2320).
Note
Tn adaptation is activated with p2252.8 = 1.
p2321 Technology controller Tn adaptation upper starting point / Tn adapt upper pt
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7959
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [%] 400.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the upper activation point for the adaptation of integral time Tn for the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2317, p2318, p2319, p2320, r2322
CAUTION
The upper starting point must be set higher than the lower starting point (p2321 > p2320).
Note
Tn adaptation is activated with p2252.8 = 1.
r2322 CO: Technology controller Tn adaptation output / Tn adapt output
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7959
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [s] - [s] - [s]
Description: Display and connector output for the output signal of the adaption of integral time Tn for the technology controller.
Dependency: See also: p2252, p2317, p2318, p2319, p2320, p2321
Note
Tn adaptation is activated with p2252.8 = 1.
p2339 Techn. controller threshold value f. I comp. hold for skip speed / Tec_ctrl thr_skip
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 2.00 [%]
Description: Sets the threshold value for the system deviation of the technology controller, which controls holding the controller
integral component in the range of the skip speeds of the ramp-function generator.
Recommendation: To avoid speed setpoint steps in the range of the skip speeds, we recommend setting p2252 bit 4 = 1 (ramp-function
generator bypass deactivated).
SINAMICS G120X converter
812 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Dependency: The parameter has no effect for p2252 bit 5 = 1 (integrator hold deactivated).
See also: r2273
Note
Only p2251 = 0:
If the output signal of the technology controller reaches a skip band in the speed setpoint channel, then the integral
component of the controller is held, if at the same time, the system deviation is lower than the threshold value set here.
By holding the integral component, it can be avoided that the controller oscillates in the range of the skip bands.
r2344 CO: Technology controller last speed setpoint (smoothed) / Tec_ctrl n_setp_sm
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the smoothed speed setpoint of the technology controller prior to switching to operation with fault response
(see p2345).
Dependency: See also: p2345
Note
Smoothing time = 10 s
p2345 Technology controller fault response / Tech_ctrl flt resp
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 2 0
Description: Sets the response of the technology controller to the occurrence of fault F07426 (technology controller actual value
limited).
The fault response is executed if status bit 8 or 9 in the technology controller status word r2349 is set. If both status
bits are zero, a switch back to technology controller operation will follow.
Value: 0: Function inhibited
1: On fault: Changeover to r2344 (or p2302)
2: On fault: Changeover to p2215
Dependency: The parameterized fault response is only effective if the technology controller mode is set to p2251 = 0 (technology
controller as main setpoint).
See also: p2267, p2268, r2344
See also: F07426
NOTICE
Dependent upon the application, the changing over of the setpoint when fault F07426 occurs can lead to the fault
condition disappearing and the re-activation of the technology controller. This can repeat itself and cause limit
oscillations. In this case, a different fault response or a different fixed setpoint 15 for the fault response p2345 = 2
should be selected.
Note
The parameterized fault response can only be achieved if the default fault response of the technology controller fault
F07426 is set to "NONE" (see p2100, p2101). If a fault response other than "NONE" is entered in p2101 for F07426,
p2345 must be set to zero.
If the fault occurs during ramping up to the starting setpoint p2302, this starting setpoint is retained as the final value
(there is no changeover to the fault response setpoint).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 813
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r2349.0...13 CO/BO: Technology controller status word / Tec_ctrl status
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7958
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the status word of the technology controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Technology controller deactivated Yes No -
01 Technology controller limited Yes No -
02 Technology controller motorized potentiometer limited max Yes No -
03 Technology controller motorized potentiometer limited min Yes No -
04 Technology controller speed setpoint total in setpoint channel Yes No -
05 Technology controller RFG bypassed in the setpoint channel Yes No -
06 Technology controller starting value at the current limit No Yes -
07 Technology controller output negative Yes No -
08 Technology controller actual value at the minimum Yes No -
09 Technology controller actual value at the maximum Yes No -
10 Technology controller output at the minimum Yes No -
11 Technology controller output at the maximum Yes No -
12 Fault response active Yes No -
13 Technology controller limiting enable Yes No -
Note
While the technology controller is enabled, the following applies:
When switching off with OFF1, OFF3 and for pulse inhibit, bits 10 and 11 are simultaneously set to 1 as the controller
output is defined by the internal limiting.
p2350 Enable PID autotuning / PID autotuning
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4 0
Description: Activates the function to automatically tune the PID controller.
Value: 0: PID autotuning deactivated
1: PID autotuning with ZN technique
2: As 1 with low overshoot
3: As 2 + low or no overshoot
4: PID autotuning, only PI
Dependency: Active if the PID controller is enabled (see P2200).
SINAMICS G120X converter
814 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
P2350 = 1
This is the Ziegler-Nichols standard tuning (ZN tuning). In this case, it should involve a response to a step.
P2350 = 2
For this tuning, a low overshoot is obtained (O/S). However, it should be faster than option 1.
P2350 = 3
For this tuning, a low or no overshoot is obtained. However, it is not as fast as option 2.
P2350 = 4
For this tuning, only values P and I are changed, and it should involve a dampened response.
Which option should be selected depends on the particular application. It can be generally stated that option 1
manifests a good response. However, if a faster response is required, then option 2 should be selected.
If no overshoot is desirable, then option 3 should be the preferred choice.
Option 4 should be selected for cases in which no D component is required.
The tuning technique is identical for all options.
Only the P, I and D values are calculated differently.
This parameter is set to zero after automatic tuning has been completed.
p2354 PID autotuning monitoring time / PID tuning t_monit
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
60 [s] 65000 [s] 240 [s]
Description: Sets the monitoring time for the PID autotuning
This time is started after activating PID autotuning (p2350). If, within this time, the control loop is not excited, then the
automatic setting is canceled and an appropriate fault is output.
Dependency: See also: p2350
See also: F07445
p2355 PID autotuning offset / PID autotun.offset
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [%] 20 [%] 5 [%]
Description: This parameter is used to set the excitation type of the PID control loop to be used.
p2370[0...n] Closed-loop cascade control enable / Csc_ctrl enab
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the signal source to switch in/switch out the closed-loop cascade control function.
1 signal: The function is switched in.
Value: 0: Closed-loop cascade control inhibited
1: Closed-loop cascade control enabled
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 815
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The technology controller must be activated (p2200) and configured (p2251 = 0) in order to use the function.
Negative speed setpoints should be excluded.
p2371 Closed-loop cascade control configuration / Csc_ctrl config
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 8 0
Description: Parameter for configuring the connection and disconnection of external motors to and from the line voltage.
Connecting external motors to the line voltage enables up to three additional drives to be controlled by the technology
controller in addition to the main drive. The complete system, therefore, comprises one closed-loop-controlled main
drive and up to three other drives, which can be controlled via contactors or motor starters. The contactors or motor
starters are switched by the converter's digital outputs (see also r2379).
Switching-in motor:
If the main drive is operated at maximum speed and the deviation at the technology controller input increases further,
the control will in addition connect external motors M1 through M3 to the line voltage. At the same time, the main drive
is ramped down to the closed-loop cascade control switch-in/switch-out speed (p2378) via the down ramp, so that the
total output power can be kept as constant as possible. During this time the technology controller is switched off.
Switching-off the motor:
If the main drive is operated at minimum speed and the deviation at the technology controller input decreases further,
the control will disconnect external motors M1 through M3 from the line voltage. At the same time, the main drive is
ramped up to the closed-loop cascade control switch-in/switch-out speed (p2378) via the up ramp, so that the total
output power can be kept as constant as possible.
Value: 0: Closed-loop cascade control inhibited
1: M1 = 1X
2: M1 = 1X, M2 = 1X
3: M1 = 1X, M2 = 2X
4: M1 = 1X, M2 = 1X, M3 = 1X
5: M1 = 1X, M2 = 1X, M3 = 2X
6: M1 = 1X, M2 = 2X, M3 = 2X
7: M1 = 1X, M2 = 1X, M3 = 3X
8: M1 = 1X, M2 = 2X, M3 = 3X
Dependency: See also: p2372
Note
Selecting 2X means that a motor is switched in with twice the power (as opposed to 1X, which equates to the motor
power at the converter).
p2372 Closed-loop cascade control mode motor selection / Csc_ctrl mode
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 3 0
Description: Parameter for selecting the control mode for switching-in and switching-out external motors.
Selection 2 and 3 support selection options for automatically interchanging the motors, which are connected to the line
supply.
Value: 0: Fixed sequence
1: Closed-loop cascade control after absolute operating hours
2: Automatic replacement after continuous operating hours
SINAMICS G120X converter
816 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
3: Automatic replacement after absolute operating hours
Note
For p2372 = 0:
Motor selection for switching-in/switching-out follows a fixed sequence and is dependent on the closed-loop cascade
control configuration (p2371).
For p2372 = 1:
Motor selection for switching-in/switching-out is derived from the operating hours counter p2380. When switching-in,
the motor with the least operating hours is connected. When switching-out, the motor with the most operating hours is
disconnected.
For p2372 = 2:
Motor selection for switching-in/switching-out is derived from the operating hours counter p2380. When switching-in,
the motor with the least operating hours is connected. When switching-out, the motor with the most operating hours is
disconnected.
In addition, those motors which have been in operation continuously for longer than the time set in p2381 are
interchanged automatically.
If p2371 = 4 (selection of three identical motors), the switch is only performed between two motors, if the required input
power of one single external motor is sufficient for the actual operating point.
For p2372 = 3:
Motor selection for switching-in/switching-out is derived from the operating hours counter p2380. When switching-in,
the motor with the least operating hours is connected. When switching-out, the motor with the most operating hours is
disconnected.
In addition, those motors which have been in operation for a total time longer than that set in p2382 are interchanged
automatically.
For p2372 = 2, 3:
This automatic interchange (autochange) is only possible if the designated motor is not in operation. If all motors are
in operation, the interchange will not be possible and alarm A07427 appears.
Autochange mode is only possible if p2371 = 2, 4 (motors of the same size).
p2373 Closed-loop cascade control switch-in threshold / Csc_ctrl sw-in thr
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 20.0 [%]
Description: Threshold value for the delayed switching-in or non-delayed switching-out of external motors connected to the line.
Motor switching-in is activated if the maximum speed is reached and the wait time in p2374 has expired.
Dependency: See also: p2374
p2374 Closed-loop cascade control switch-in delay / Csc_ctrl t_in_del
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [s] 650 [s] 30 [s]
Description: Additional delay time for connecting external motors to the line voltage after the system deviation of the technology
controller has exceeded the threshold value p2373 and the motor has reached the maximum speed.
Dependency: See also: p2373
Note
If the deviation at the technology controller input exceeds the overcontrol threshold p2376, the delay time is bypassed.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 817
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2375 Closed-loop cascade control switch-out delay / Csc_ctrl t_out_del
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [s] 650 [s] 30 [s]
Description: Additional delay time for the disconnection of external motors from the line after the system deviation of the technology
controller has exceeded the threshold p2373 and the motor has reached the minimum speed p1080.
Dependency: See also: p2373, p2376
Note
If the deviation at the technology controller input exceeds the overcontrol threshold -p2376, the delay time is bypassed.
p2376 Closed-loop cascade control overcontrol threshold / Csc_ctr ovctr_thr
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 25.0 [%]
Description: Threshold value for instantaneous switching-in or switching-out external motors.
Note
If the maximum speed is reached and the deviation at the technology controller input exceeds the overcontrol threshold
p2376 at the same time, the delay time p2374 is bypassed and the motor is immediately switched-in (connected).
If the minimum speed is reached and the deviation at the technology controller input exceeds the overcontrol threshold
-p2376 at the same time, the delay time p2375 is bypassed and the motor is immediately switched-out (disconnected).
p2377 Closed-loop cascade control interlocking time / Csc_ctrl t_interl
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [s] 650 [s] 0 [s]
Description: Interlocking time during which, following the connection or disconnection of an external motor, no further motors are
connected or disconnected using the closed-loop cascade control. This avoids duplicate switching operations.
p2378 Closed-loop cascade control switch-in/switch-out speed / Csc_ctrl n_in/out
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 100.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Description: Sets the speed for the main drive, which is approached directly after an external motor has been connected or
disconnected.
The parameter value refers to the maximum speed (p1082).
SINAMICS G120X converter
818 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r2379.0...7 CO/BO: Closed-loop cascade control status word / Csc_ctrl ZSW
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status word of the closed-loop cascade control
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Start external motor 1 Yes No -
01 Start external motor 2 Yes No -
02 Start external motor 3 Yes No -
03 Switch-in motor Yes No -
04 Switch-in/switch-out active Yes No -
05 All motors active Yes No -
06 Automatic replacement not possible Yes No -
07 Alarm active Yes No -
p2380[0...2] Closed-loop cascade control operating hours / Csc_ctrl op_hrs
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [h] 340.28235E36 [h] 0.0 [h]
Description: Displays the operating hours for the external motors.
The display can only be reset to zero.
Index: [0] = Motor 1
[1] = Motor 2
[2] = Motor 3
p2381 Closed-loop cascade control max time for continuous operation / Csc_ctrl t_max
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.1 [h] 100000.0 [h] 24.0 [h]
Description: Time limit for the continuous operation of external motors.
Continuous operation is measured starting from when a motor is connected to the line voltage. It ends when a motor
is disconnected from the line.
p2382 Closed-loop cascade control operating time limit / Csc_ctrl t_max op
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.1 [h] 100000.0 [h] 24.0 [h]
Description: Limit for the total operating time of external motors.
The total operating time of an external motor increases every time it is switched in.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 819
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2383 Closed-loop cascade control switch-out sequence / Csc_ctr sw-out seq
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Selection of the response used to stop the motors when the OFF command is sent.
For p2383 = 1:
OFF1 disconnects the external motors from the line in the order 3 - 2 - 1. The time set in p2387 is applied as a delay
time between the disconnection of each motor. The main motor is only switched off if all the external motors have
already been switched off.
In the case of OFF2 and OFF3, the external motors and the main motor are switched off immediately with the OFF
command (same behavior as with p2383 = 0).
Value: 0: Normal stop
1: Sequential stop
CAUTION
If p2383 = 1 and the OFF1 command is pending, the main motor will not be stopped until all external motors have been
disconnected and time p2387 has elapsed. By switching off the external motors the main motor can be accelerated
again.
p2384 Closed-loop cascade control motor switch-on delay / Csc_ctr t_del_on
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 999.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Delay time once the switch-in conditions have been met until the external motor is switched on.
The activation of the corresponding status bit (r2379) for controlling the contactors or the motor starter is delayed by
this time, while the main motor speed already decreases down to the switch-in speed (p2378).
p2385 Closed-loop cascade control holding time switch-in speed / Csc_ctr t_hld n_in
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 999.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Time during which the switch-in speed (see p2378) of the main motor is maintained after an external motor has been
switched-in and the main motor has been decelerated to the switch-in speed.
p2386 Closed-loop cascade control motor switch-off delay / Csc_ctrl t_del_off
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 999.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Delay time once the switch-out conditions have been met until the external motor is switched off.
The resetting of the corresponding status bit (r2379) for controlling the contactors or the motor starter is delayed by
this time, while the main motor ramps up to the switch-out speed (p2378).
SINAMICS G120X converter
820 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2387 Closed-loop cascade control holding time switch-out speed / CscCtr t_hld n_out
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 999.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Time during which the switch-out speed (see p2378) of the main motor is maintained after an external motor has been
switched-out and the main motor has been accelerated to the switch-out speed.
p2390[0...n] Speed start of hibernation mode / Hib mode n_start
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 7038
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [rpm] 21000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed for the start of the "hibernation mode" function.
The total speed of this activation threshold is the sum of the minimum speed p1080 and p2390.
If the speed setpoint undershoots this start speed, the delay time in p2391 is started. If the restart threshold is no longer
reached before the delay time expires, the hibernation mode boost speed p2395 is impressed for the time period
p2394 and then the motor is brought to a standstill via the down ramp of the setpoint channel. The drive is switched
off (hibernation mode active). The drive is automatically switched on again as soon as the speed setpoint exceeds the
restart threshold.
Note
The speed at which the hibernation mode is started is set to 4 % of the nominal speed when commissioning is
completed.
p2391[0...n] Hibernation mode delay time / Hib mode t_delay
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7038
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [s] 3599 [s] 120 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time for the "hibernation mode" function.
To ensure that the drive can be shut down (pulse inhibit), a restart condition must not occur during this time.
Dependency: See also: p2390, p2392, p2393
p2392 Hibernation mode restart value with technology controller / Hib start w/ tec
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: 7038
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [%] 200.000 [%] 0.000 [%]
Description: Sets the motor restart time with the "Hibernation mode" function.
If the hibernation mode function is active, the technology controller continues to operate and supplies a speed setpoint
to the setpoint channel. Since the drive is deactivated, there is no system deviation at the input of the technology
controller. As soon as this exceeds the restart value p2392, the drive is automatically switched on and the speed is
controlled to 1.05 * (p1080 + p2390) via the up ramp of the setpoint channel.
Note
The restart value is set to 5 % when commissioning is completed.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 821
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2393[0...n] Hibernation mode restart speed relative w/o techn controller / Hib start w/o tec
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: FloatingPoint32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 7038
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [rpm] 21000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the starting speed to restart the motor for the "hibernation mode" function.
When the hibernation mode is active, a speed setpoint is still supplied to the setpoint channel. If the setpoint increases
again and in so doing exceeds the restart speed, the drive is automatically switched on and the speed setpoint is
controlled to p1080 + p2390 + p2393 via the up ramp of the setpoint channel.
The restart speed is the sum of the minimum speed p1080, the hibernation start speed p2390 and the relative restart
speed p2393.
Dependency: See also: p1080
Note
The parameter is set to 6 % of the nominal speed when commissioning is exited.
p2394[0...n] Hibernation mode boost time period / Hib mode t_boost
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7038
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [s] 3599 [s] 0 [s]
Description: Sets the boost time period for the "hibernation mode" function.
Before the drive is finally switched off (hibernation mode), the setpoint speed is moved to the boost speed p2395 for
the time set in p2394. Depending on the application, this allows the hibernation intervals to be extended (in time).
CAUTION
The controller is not operational while the boost speed is being impressed. As a result, for example, for pump
applications, it must be ensured that the tank does not overflow as a result of the additional boost. For compressors,
it must be ensured that the boost speed does not result in an overpressure condition.
Note
For p2394 = 0 s, the following applies:
The boost speed is not used.
p2395[0...n] Hibernation mode boost speed / Hib mode n_boost
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 7038
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [rpm] 21000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the boost speed for the "hibernation mode" function.
The motor is accelerated to the hibernation mode boost speed p2395 for the hibernation mode boost time period
p2394 before it is brought to a standstill via the down ramp of the setpoint channel (p1121) and subsequently switched
off (pulse inhibit).
Dependency: See also: p2394
CAUTION
The controller is not operational while the boost speed is being impressed. As a result, for example, for pump
applications, it must be ensured that the tank does not overflow as a result of the additional boost. For compressors,
it must be ensured that the boost speed does not result in an overpressure condition.
SINAMICS G120X converter
822 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2396[0...n] Hibernation mode max. shutdown time / Hib t_off max
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7038
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [s] 863999 [s] 0 [s]
Description: Sets the maximum shutdown time for the "Hibernation mode" function.
If the drive is in the hibernation mode (pulse inhibit) then it is switched on again at the latest after the maximum switch-
off time has expired. If the restart conditions are fulfilled earlier, then the drive is correspondingly switched on earlier.
DANGER
The drive automatically powers itself up at the latest after the maximum switch-off time has expired.
CAUTION
Once the maximum shutdown time has expired, the drive switches itself on automatically and accelerates to the start
speed. The technology controller only becomes effective again when this speed is reached (for p2398 = 1).
Depending on the application, for instance for pumps, it should be ensured that as a result of cyclic starts the tank does
not overflow or for compressors, an overpressure condition does not occur.
Note
Automatic restart once the maximum OFF time has elapsed is deactivated by setting p2396 = 0 s.
r2397[0...1] CO: Hibernation mode output speed actual / Hib n_outp act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 7038
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Display and connector output for the actual output speed for the "hibernation mode" function.
Note
Zero is displayed if the boost or starting speed is not active.
p2398 Hibernation mode operating type / Hib mode op_type
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7038
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the operating mode for the "Hibernation mode" function.
Value: 0: Hibernation mode inhibited
1: Hibernation mode activated
Dependency: See also: p2200, p2251
See also: A07325
CAUTION
When the "hibernation mode" function is active, the motor can start again automatically.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 823
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
When the "hibernation mode" function (p2398 = 1) is activated, its behavior is defined as to whether the technology
controller is additionally switched in (closed-loop) or switched out (open-loop).
The technology controller is enabled via binector input p2200 and its mode is set in p2251.
p2200 = 0, p2251 = 0:
Hibernation mode operates without technology controller (open-loop)
p2200 = 1, p2251 = 0:
Hibernation mode operates with technology controller (closed-loop)
r2399.0...8 CO/BO: Hibernation mode status words / Hib ZSW
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7038
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the status word of the "hibernation mode" function.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Hibernation mode enabled (p2398 <> 0) Yes No -
01 Hibernation mode active Yes No -
02 Hibernation mode delay active Yes No -
03 Hibernation boost active Yes No -
04 Hibernation mode motor switched off Yes No -
05 Hibernation mode switched off cyclic restart active Yes No -
06 Hibernation motor motor restarts Yes No -
07 Hibernation mode supplies total setpoint for ramp-fct Yes No -
generator
08 Hibernation mode bypasses ramp-fct generator in setpoint Yes No -
channel
Dependency: See also: p2398
See also: A07325
p2900[0...n] CO: Fixed value 1 [%] / Fixed value 1 [%]
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 1021
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-10000.00 [%] 10000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Setting and connector output for a fixed percentage value.
Dependency: See also: p2901, r2902, p2930
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note
The value can be used to interconnect a scaling function (e.g. scaling the main setpoint).
SINAMICS G120X converter
824 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p2901[0...n] CO: Fixed value 2 [%] / Fixed value 2 [%]
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 1021
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-10000.00 [%] 10000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Setting and connector output for a fixed percentage value.
Dependency: See also: p2900, p2930
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note
The value can be used to interconnect a scaling function (e.g. scaling of the supplementary setpoint)
r2902[0...14] CO: Fixed values [%] / Fixed values [%]
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 1021
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for frequently used percentage values.
Index: [0] = Fixed value +0 %
[1] = Fixed value +5 %
[2] = Fixed value +10 %
[3] = Fixed value +20 %
[4] = Fixed value +50 %
[5] = Fixed value +100 %
[6] = Fixed value +150 %
[7] = Fixed value +200 %
[8] = Fixed value -5 %
[9] = Fixed value -10 %
[10] = Fixed value -20 %
[11] = Fixed value -50 %
[12] = Fixed value -100 %
[13] = Fixed value -150 %
[14] = Fixed value -200 %
Dependency: See also: p2900, p2901, p2930
Note
The signal sources can, for example, be used to interconnect scalings.
p2930[0...n] CO: Fixed value M [Nm] / Fixed value M [Nm]
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2003 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 1021
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-100000.00 [Nm] 100000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Setting and connector output for a fixed torque value.
Dependency: See also: p2900, p2901, r2902
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 825
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
NOTICE
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
Note
The value can, for example, be used to interconnect a supplementary torque.
r2969[0...6] Flux model value display / Psi_mod val displ
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the values of the direct access flux model for the synchronous reluctance motor (RESM) for diagnostic
purposes.
Valid values are only displayed when the pulses are inhibited.
For index 0:
Displays the entered direct axis current id in Arms:
For index 1, 2, 3:
Displays the saturation curves of the direct axis flux psid(id, iq):
- r2969[1]: flux in Vsrms with respect to the direct axis current for iq = 0
- r2969[2]: flux in Vsrms with respect to the direct axis current for iq = 0.5* p2950
- r2969[3]: flux in Vsrms with respect to the direct axis current for iq = p2950
For index 4, 5, 6:
Displays the relative error of the current inversion (id(psid, iq) - id) / p2950:
- r2969[4]: error with respect to direct axis current for iq = 0
- r2969[5]: error with respect to direct axis current for iq = 0.5 * p2950
- r2969[6]: error with respect to direct axis current for iq = p2950
Index: [0] = d-current
[1] = d-flux iq0
[2] = d-flux iq1
[3] = d-flux iq2
[4] = d-current error iq0
[5] = d-current error iq1
[6] = d-current error iq2
Note
RESM: reluctance synchronous motor (synchronous reluctance motor)
p3110 External fault 3 switch-on delay / Ext fault 3 t_on
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2546
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for external fault 3.
Dependency: See also: p2108, p3111, p3112
See also: F07862
SINAMICS G120X converter
826 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p3111[0...n] BI: External fault 3 enable / Ext fault 3 enab
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the enable signal of external fault 3.
External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation:
- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Dependency: See also: p2108, p3110, p3112
See also: F07862
p3112[0...n] BI: External fault 3 enable negated / Ext flt 3 enab neg
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the negated enable signal of external fault 3.
External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation:
- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Dependency: See also: p2108, p3110, p3111
See also: F07862
r3113.0...15 CO/BO: NAMUR message bit bar / NAMUR bit bar
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the status of the NAMUR message bit bar.
The faults and alarms are assigned to the appropriate signaling/message classes and influence a specific message
bit.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fault converter information electronics/software error Yes No -
01 Network fault Yes No -
02 DC link overvoltage Yes No -
03 Fault drive converter power electronics Yes No -
04 Drive converter overtemperature Yes No -
05 Ground fault Yes No -
06 Motor overload Yes No -
07 Bus error Yes No -
08 External safety-relevant shutdown Yes No -
10 Error communication internal Yes No -
11 Fault infeed Yes No -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 827
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
15 Other faults Yes No -
Note
For bit 00:
Hardware or software malfunction was identified. Carry out a POWER ON of the component involved. If it occurs again,
contact Technical Support.
For bit 01:
A line supply fault has occurred (phase failure, voltage level, ...). Check the line supply / fuses. Check the supply
voltage. Check the wiring.
For bit 02:
The DC link voltage has assumed an inadmissibly high value. Check the dimensioning of the system (line supply,
reactor, voltages). Check the infeed settings.
For bit 03:
An inadmissible operating state of the power electronics was identified (overcurrent, overtemperature, IGBT failure, ...).
Check that the permissible load cycles are maintained. Check the ambient temperatures (fan).
For bit 04:
The temperature in the component has exceeded the highest permissible limit. Check the ambient temperature /
control cabinet cooling.
For bit 05:
A ground fault / inter-phase short-circuit was detected in the power cables or in the motor windings. Check the power
cables (connection). Check the motor.
For bit 06:
The motor was operated outside the permissible limits (temperature, current, torque, ...). Check the load cycles and
limits that have been set. Check the ambient temperature / motor cooling.
For bit 07:
The communication to the higher-level control system (internal coupling, PROFIBUS, PROFINET, ...) is faulted or
interrupted. Check the state of the higher-level control system. Check the communication connection/wiring. Check the
bus configuration / clock cycles.
For bit 08:
A safety operation monitoring function (Safety) has detected an error.
For bit 09:
When evaluating the encoder signals (track signals, zero marks, absolute values, ...) an illegal signal state was
detected. Check the encoder / state of the encoder signals. Observe the maximum frequencies.
For bit 10:
The internal communication between the SINAMICS components is faulted or interrupted. Check the DRIVE-CLiQ
wiring. Ensure an EMC-compliant design. Observe the maximum permissible quantity structure / clock cycles.
For bit 11:
The infeed is faulted or has failed. Check the infeed and the surroundings (line supply, filter, reactors, fuses, ...). Check
the closed-loop infeed control.
For bit 15:
Group fault. Determine the precise cause of the fault using the commissioning tool.
p3117 Change safety message type / Ch. SI mess type
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the re-parameterization of all safety messages for faults and alarms.
The relevant message type during changeover is selected by the firmware.
0: Safety messages are not re-parameterized
1: Safety messages are re-parameterized
Note
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
SINAMICS G120X converter
828 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r3120[0...63] Component fault / Comp fault
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 3 -
Description: Displays the component of the fault which has occurred.
Value: 0: No assignment
1: Control Unit
2: Power Module
3: Motor
Dependency: See also: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3122
Note
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.
r3121[0...63] Component alarm / Comp alarm
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8065
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 3 -
Description: Displays the component of the alarm which has occurred.
Value: 0: No assignment
1: Control Unit
2: Power Module
3: Motor
Dependency: See also: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146, r3123
Note
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.
r3122[0...63] Diagnostic attribute fault / Diag_attr fault
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the diagnostic attribute of the fault which has occurred.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Hardware replacement recommended Yes No -
15 Message has gone Yes No -
16 PROFIdrive fault class bit 0 High Low -
17 PROFIdrive fault class bit 1 High Low -
18 PROFIdrive fault class bit 2 High Low -
19 PROFIdrive fault class bit 3 High Low -
20 PROFIdrive fault class bit 4 High Low -
Dependency: See also: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3120
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 829
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.
For bits 20 ... 16:
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 0: not assigned
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 0, 0, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 1: hardware fault/software error
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 0, 1, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 2: line fault
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 0, 1, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 3: supply voltage fault
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 1, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 4: DC link fault
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 1, 0, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 5: power electronics faulted
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 1, 1, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 6: overtemperature electronic components
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 1, 1, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 7: ground fault/phase fault detected
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 0, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 8: motor overload
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 0, 0, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 9: communication error to the higher-level control
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 0, 1, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 10: safe monitoring channel has identified an error
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 0, 1, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 11: incorrect position actual value/speed actual
value or not available
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 1, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 12: internal (DRIVE-CLiQ) communication error
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 1, 0, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 13: infeed unit faulted
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 1, 1, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 14: braking controller/Braking Module faulted
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 1, 1, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 15: line filter faulted
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 1, 0, 0, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 16: external measured value/signal state outside
the permissible range
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 1, 0, 0, 0, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 17: application/technology function faulted
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 1, 0, 0, 1, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 18: error in the parameterization/configuration/
commissioning sequence
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 1, 0, 0, 1, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 19: general drive fault
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 1, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 20: auxiliary unit faulted
r3123[0...63] Diagnostic attribute alarm / Diag_attr alarm
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8065
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the diagnostic attribute of the alarm which has occurred.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Hardware replacement recommended Yes No -
11 Alarm class bit 0 High Low -
12 Alarm class bit 1 High Low -
13 Maintenance required Yes No -
14 Maintenance urgently required Yes No -
15 Message has gone Yes No -
16 PROFIdrive fault class bit 0 High Low -
17 PROFIdrive fault class bit 1 High Low -
18 PROFIdrive fault class bit 2 High Low -
19 PROFIdrive fault class bit 3 High Low -
20 PROFIdrive fault class bit 4 High Low -
Dependency: See also: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146, r3121
SINAMICS G120X converter
830 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.
For bit 12, 11:
These status bits are used for the classification of internal alarm classes and are intended for diagnostic purposes only
on certain automation systems with integrated SINAMICS functionality.
For bits 20 ... 16:
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 0: not assigned
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 0, 0, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 1: hardware fault/software error
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 0, 1, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 2: line fault
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 0, 1, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 3: supply voltage fault
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 1, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 4: DC link fault
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 1, 0, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 5: power electronics faulted
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 1, 1, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 6: overtemperature electronic components
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 0, 1, 1, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 7: ground fault/phase fault detected
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 0, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 8: motor overload
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 0, 0, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 9: communication error to the higher-level control
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 0, 1, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 10: safe monitoring channel has identified an error
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 0, 1, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 11: incorrect position actual value/speed actual
value or not available
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 1, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 12: internal (DRIVE-CLiQ) communication error
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 1, 0, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 13: infeed unit faulted
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 1, 1, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 14: braking controller/Braking Module faulted
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 1, 1, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 15: line filter faulted
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 1, 0, 0, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 16: external measured value/signal state outside
the permissible range
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 1, 0, 0, 0, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 17: application/technology function faulted
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 1, 0, 0, 1, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 18: error in the parameterization/configuration/
commissioning sequence
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 1, 0, 0, 1, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 19: general drive fault
Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 1, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 20: auxiliary unit faulted
r3131 CO: Actual fault value / Act fault val
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the fault value of the oldest active fault.
Dependency: See also: r2131, r3132
r3132 CO: Actual component number / Comp_no act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the component number of the oldest fault that is still active.
Dependency: See also: r2131, r3131
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 831
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p3230[0...n] CI: Load monitoring speed actual value / Load monit n_act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8012, 8013
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed actual value of the load monitoring.
Dependency: See also: r2169, p2181, p2192, p2193, p3231
See also: A07920, A07921, A07922, F07923, F07924, F07925
Note
The parameter is only effective for p2193 = 2.
p3231[0...n] Load monitoring speed deviation / Load monit n_dev
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8013
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 150.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the permissible speed deviation during load monitoring (for p2193 = 2).
Dependency: See also: r2169, p2181, p2193, p3230
See also: A07920, A07921, A07922, F07923, F07924, F07925
p3232[0...n] BI: Load monitoring failure detection / Load_moni fail_det
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8013
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for detecting a failure.
Dependency: See also: p2192, p2193
See also: F07936
Note
Monitoring is triggered with a 0 signal, as soon as the time in p2192 has expired.
p3233[0...n] Torque actual value filter time constant / M_act_filt T
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8013
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 1000000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the time constant for the PT1 element to smooth the torque actual value.
The smoothed torque actual value is compared with the threshold values and is only used for messages and signals.
SINAMICS G120X converter
832 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p3235 Phase failure signal motor monitoring time / Ph_fail t_monit
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 2000 [ms] 320 [ms]
Description: Sets the monitoring time for phase failure detection of the motor.
NOTICE
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note
For p3235 = 0 the function is deactivated.
The monitoring is automatically deactivated during a flying restart for a motor that is still rotating.
3-phase phase failures cannot be detected and are indicated by other messages (e.g. F07902).
r3313 Efficiency optimization 2 optimum flux / Optimum flux
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: r2004 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6722, 6837
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the calculated, optimum flux.
Dependency: See also: p1401, p3315, p3316
Note
The function is activated via p1401.14 = 1.
p3315[0...n] Efficiency optimization 2 minimum flux limit value / Min flux lim val
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6722, 6837
Min: Max: Factory setting:
10.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Description: Sets the minimal limit value for the calculated optimum flux.
Dependency: See also: p1401, r3313, p3316
Note
The function is activated via p1401.14 = 1.
p3316[0...n] Efficiency optimization 2 maximum flux limit value / Max flux lim val
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6722, 6837
Min: Max: Factory setting:
10.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 110.0 [%]
Description: Sets the maximum limit value for the calculated optimum flux.
Dependency: See also: p1401, r3313, p3315
Note
The function is activated via p1401.14 = 1.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 833
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p3320[0...n] Fluid flow machine power point 1 / Fluid_mach P1
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 100.00 25.00
Description: For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the
characteristic is required.
This parameter specifies the power (P) of point 1 as a [%].
The characteristic comprises the following value pairs:
Power (P) / speed (n)
p3320 / p3321 --> point 1 (P1 / n1)
p3322 / p3323 --> point 2 (P2 / n2)
p3324 / p3325 --> point 3 (P3 / n3)
p3326 / p3327 --> point 4 (P4 / n4)
p3328 / p3329 --> point 5 (P5 / n5)
Dependency: See also: r0041, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329
Note
The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed.
The energy saved is displayed in r0041.
p3321[0...n] Fluid flow machine speed point 1 / Fluid_mach n1
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 100.00 0.00
Description: For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the
characteristic is required.
This parameter specifies the speed (n) of point 1 as a [%].
The characteristic comprises the following value pairs:
Power (P) / speed (n)
p3320 / p3321 --> point 1 (P1 / n1)
p3322 / p3323 --> point 2 (P2 / n2)
p3324 / p3325 --> point 3 (P3 / n3)
p3326 / p3327 --> point 4 (P4 / n4)
p3328 / p3329 --> point 5 (P5 / n5)
Dependency: See also: r0041, p3320, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329
Note
The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed.
The energy saved is displayed in r0041.
p3322[0...n] Fluid flow machine power point 2 / Fluid_mach P2
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 100.00 50.00
SINAMICS G120X converter
834 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the
characteristic is required.
This parameter specifies the power (P) of point 2 as a [%].
Dependency: See also: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329
Note
The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed.
The energy saved is displayed in r0041.
p3323[0...n] Fluid flow machine speed point 2 / Fluid_mach n2
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 100.00 25.00
Description: For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the
characteristic is required.
This parameter specifies the speed (n) of point 2 as a [%].
Dependency: See also: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329
Note
The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed.
The energy saved is displayed in r0041.
p3324[0...n] Fluid flow machine power point 3 / Fluid_mach P3
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 100.00 77.00
Description: For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the
characteristic is required.
This parameter specifies the power (P) of point 3 as a [%].
Dependency: See also: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329
Note
The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed.
The energy saved is displayed in r0041.
p3325[0...n] Fluid flow machine speed point 3 / Fluid_mach n3
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 100.00 50.00
Description: For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the
characteristic is required.
This parameter specifies the speed (n) of point 3 as a [%].
Dependency: See also: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329
Note
The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed.
The energy saved is displayed in r0041.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 835
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p3326[0...n] Fluid flow machine power point 4 / Fluid_mach P4
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 100.00 92.00
Description: For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the
characteristic is required.
This parameter specifies the power (P) of point 4 as a [%].
Dependency: See also: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3327, p3328, p3329
Note
The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed.
The energy saved is displayed in r0041.
p3327[0...n] Fluid flow machine speed point 4 / Fluid_mach n4
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 100.00 75.00
Description: For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the
characteristic is required.
This parameter specifies the speed (n) of point 4 as a [%].
Dependency: See also: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3328, p3329
Note
The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed.
The energy saved is displayed in r0041.
p3328[0...n] Fluid flow machine power point 5 / Fluid_mach P5
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 100.00 100.00
Description: For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the
characteristic is required.
This parameter specifies the power (P) of point 5 as a [%].
Dependency: See also: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3329
Note
The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed.
The energy saved is displayed in r0041.
p3329[0...n] Fluid flow machine speed point 5 / Fluid_mach n5
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 100.00 100.00
SINAMICS G120X converter
836 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the
characteristic is required.
This parameter specifies the speed (n) of point 5 as a [%].
Dependency: See also: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328
Note
The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed.
The energy saved is displayed in r0041.
p3330[0...n] BI: 2/3 wire control command 1 / 2/3 wire cmd 1
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2272, 2273
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for command 1 for the two-wire control/three-wire control.
Dependency: See also: p0015, p3331, p3332, r3333, p3334
Note
The mode of operation of this binector input is dependent on the wire control set in p0015.
p3331[0...n] BI: 2/3 wire control command 2 / 2/3 wire cmd 2
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2272, 2273
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for command 2 for the two-wire control/three-wire control.
Dependency: See also: p0015, p3330, p3332, r3333, p3334
Note
The mode of operation of this binector input is dependent on the wire control set in p0015.
p3332[0...n] BI: 2/3 wire control command 3 / 2/3 wire cmd 3
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2273
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for command 3 for the two-wire control/three-wire control.
Dependency: See also: p0015, p3330, p3331, r3333, p3334
Note
The mode of operation of this binector input is dependent on the wire control set in p0015.
r3333.0...3 CO/BO: 2/3 wire control control word / 2/3 wire STW
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2272, 2273
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 837
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Displays the control word for the two wire control/three wire control.
The control signals are dependent on the wire control set in p0015 and the signal states at the digital inputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON Yes No -
01 Reversing Yes No -
02 ON inverted Yes No -
03 Reversing inverted Yes No -
Dependency: See also: p0015, p3330, p3331, p3332, p3334
p3334 2/3 wire control selection / 2/3 wire select
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2272, 2273
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4 0
Description: Sets the two wire control/three wire control.
Value: 0: No wire control
1: Two wire control clockwise/counterclockwise 1
2: Two wire control clockwise/counterclockwise 2
3: Three wire control enable clockwise/counterclockwise
4: Three wire control enable ON/reversing
Dependency: See also: p0015, p3330, p3331, p3332, r3333
Note
This value depends on the wire control set in p0015.
p3340[0...n] BI: Limit switch start / Lim switch start
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the start of motion dependent on the sign of the setpoint.
Dependency: See also: p3342, p3343, r3344
See also: A07352
p3342[0...n] BI: Limit switch plus / Lim switch plus
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the limit switch plus.
BI: p3342 = 1-signal:
Limit switch is inactive.
BI: p3342 = 0 signal:
Limit switch is active.
Dependency: See also: p3340, p3343, r3344
SINAMICS G120X converter
838 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
For p1113 = 0, the drive traverses with a positive speed setpoint towards the positive limit switch – or for p1113 = 1 with
a negative speed setpoint.
p3343[0...n] BI: Limit switch minus / Lim switch minus
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the limit switch minus.
BI: p3343 = 1-signal:
Limit switch is inactive.
BI: p3343 = 0 signal:
Limit switch is active.
Dependency: See also: p3340, p3342, r3344
Note
For p1113 = 0, the drive traverses with a negative speed setpoint towards the minus limit switch – or for p1113 = 1 with
a positive speed setpoint.
r3344.0...5 CO/BO: Limit switch status word / Lim sw ZSW
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the status word of the limit switch.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Limit switch ON/OFF1 Yes No -
01 Limit switch OFF3 No Yes -
02 Limit switch axis stationary (standstill) Yes No -
04 Plus limit switch reached Yes No -
05 Minus limit switch reached Yes No -
Dependency: See also: p3340, p3342, p3343
Note
For bit 00 = 1:
The limit switch enables motion.
For example, this bit can be used for interconnection with binector input p0840 (ON/OFF1).
For bit 01 = 0:
The drive cannot be moved as a result of the limit switch function (e.g. as a result of the switching on inhibited).
For example, this bit can be used for interconnection with binector input p0848 (OFF3).
For bit 02 = 1:
The axis is at zero speed.
For bit 04 = 1:
The plus limit switch reached.
For bit 05 = 1:
The minus limit switch reached.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 839
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p3380 Forming activation/duration / Form act/duration
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [h] 10.0 [h] 0.0 [h]
Description: Setting to activate the "DC link capacitor forming" function.
This value also defines the forming duration.
The function is deactivated with p3380 = 0.
Recommendation: Recommended forming duration depending on the storage time:
1 - 2 years: p3380 = 1 hour
2 - 3 years: p3380 = 2 hours
>3 years: p3380 = 8 hours
Dependency: The "DC link capacitor forming" function can only be executed when commissioning the power unit (p0010 = 2). The
function is automatically deactivated (p3380 = 0) once commissioning has been exited (p0010 = 0).
Procedure when forming:
1. Activate power unit commissioning (p0010 = 2).
2. Activate forming (p3380 > 0, value, see recommendation).
3. Switch on the drive unit (p0840 = 0/1 signal).
4. Wait for forming to be completed (r3381 = 0).
5. Exit power unit commissioning (p0010 = 0).
See also: r3381, r3382
See also: F07390, A07391
NOTICE
If drive units are not commissioned within 2 years after their original manufacture, then the DC link capacitors must be
reformed before use. If this is not done, then the units could be damaged in operation.
Note
The "DC link capacitor forming" function can only be activated online in the drive unit.
If switched off while forming is active, the remaining time (r3381) is lost, and forming must be repeated for the full
forming time. If the forming duration is changed, then forming starts again from the beginning.
r3381 Forming remaining time / Forming t_remain
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [h] - [h] - [h]
Description: Displays the remaining time after activating the "DC link capacitor forming" function.
Dependency: See also: p3380, r3382
r3382 Forming status word / Forming ZSW
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status word of the "DC link capacitor forming" function.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Forming activated Yes No -
01 Forming active Yes No -
SINAMICS G120X converter
840 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
02 Forming completed Yes No -
03 Forming fault Yes No -
Dependency: See also: p3380, r3381
See also: F07390, A07391
Note
For bit 00 = 1:
The parameter for activation/duration has been set (p3380 > 0) - however, forming has still not been started (p0840 =
0 signal).
For bit 01 = 1:
The parameter for activation/duration has been set (p3380 > 0) - however, forming has still not been started (p0840 =
0/1 signal).
This status is displayed through alarm A07391.
The procedure can be interrupted via binector input p0840, p0844, p0848 (r3382.1 = 0) - and reactivated again using
p0840.
For bit 03 = 1:
Forming was not able to be successfully performed within the set duration.
This status is displayed using fault F07390.
p3855[0...n] DC quantity controller configuration / Rect_ctrl config
Access level: 3 Calculated: Data type: Unsigned32
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6797, 6844,
6855
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0111 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the DC quantity controller in the overmodulation range.
There is no DC quantity control for power units that can also be connected through 1 phase to the line supply (r0204.15
= 1).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DC quantity controller on Yes No -
01 Bandwidth increased Yes No -
02 7th harmonic reduced Yes No -
03 Filter active Yes No -
Dependency: The modulator mode p1802 must enable operation in the overmodulation range. In addition, the overmodulation limit
p1803 must be greater than 103 %.
Set the modulator mode p1802 = 10, if the DC quantity control is deactivated and overmodulation is to be prevented.
NOTICE
Motor identification must be carried out before activating the DC quantity control in the overmodulation range.
p3856[0...n] Compound braking current / Compound I_brake
G120X_DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
(Compound brake), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
G120X_PN
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
(Compound brake),
G120X_USS Min: Max: Factory setting:
(Compound brake) 0.00 [%] 250.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 841
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Compound braking current is used to define the amount of DC current that is produced on stopping the motor during
U/f operation to further increase the DC braking function.
Compound braking is a superimposition of the DC braking function with regenerative braking (net braking along the
ramp) after OFF1 or OFF3. This permits braking with controlled motor frequency and minimum power input into the
motor.
Effective braking without using additional hardware components is obtained by optimizing the ramp down time and
compound braking.
Dependency: The compound braking current is only activated if the DC link voltage exceeds the threshold value in r1282.
Compound braking does not operate in the following cases:
- DC braking activated (p1230, r1239).
- motor is still not magnetized (e.g. for flying restart).
- vector control parameterized (p1300 >= 20).
- synchronous motor used (p0300 = 2xx).
NOTICE
Generally, increasing the braking current improves the braking effect when stopping the motor. However, if the value
is set too high, then the drive can be tripped (shut down) as a result of overcurrent or ground fault.
Recommendation: p3856 < 100 % x (r0209 - r0331) / p0305 / 2
Compound braking generates a current in the motor with a ripple manifesting the rotational frequency. The higher the
braking current is set, the higher the resulting ripple, especially when the Vdc_max control is simultaneously active
(refer to p1280).
Note
The parameter value is entered relative to the rated motor current (p0305).
Compound braking is deactivated with p3856 = 0%.
p3857[0...n] DC quantity controller P gain / DC_ctrl Kp
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6797
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 100000.000 0.000
Description: Sets the proportional gain of the DC quantity controller for the overmodulation range.
p3858[0...n] DC quantity controller integral time / DC_ctrl Tn
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6797
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms] 2.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral time for the DC quantity controller.
r3859.0...1 CO/BO: Compound braking/DC quantity control status word / Comp-br/DC_ctr ZSW
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 6797
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and connector output for the status word of the compound braking and DC quantity control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Compound braking active Yes No -
01 DC quantity control active in the overmodulation range Yes No -
SINAMICS G120X converter
842 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Dependency: See also: p3856
p3880 BI: ESM activation signal source / ESM act s_s
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7033
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to activate the essential service mode (ESM) via digital input.
Using this function, when required the motor can be operated for as long as possible (e.g. to extract smoke).
BI: p3880 = 1 signal:
The essential service mode is activated.
BI: p3880 = 0 signal:
The essential service mode is deactivated.
Dependency: See also: p3881, p3882, p3883, p3884, r3887, p3888, r3889
WARNING
When activating the essential service mode (BI: p3880 = 1 signal), the motor immediately runs according to the
selected setpoint source. When the essential service mode is activated, the motor cannot be stopped using the OFF
commands.
Note
ESM: Essential Service Mode
Permissible signal sources:
- BO: r0722.x (high active)
- BO: r0723.x (low active), x = 0 ... 5, 11, 12
p3881 ESM setpoint source / ESM setp_src
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7033
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 7 0
Description: Sets the setpoint source for essential service mode (ESM).
Value: 0: Last known setpoint (r1078 smoothed)
1: Fixed speed setpoint 15 (p1015)
2: Control Unit analog input 0 (AI 0, r0755[0])
3: Fieldbus
4: Technology controller
6: Enable the response OFF1
7: Enable the response OFF2
WARNING
For p3881 = 4:
If the technology controller is used as setpoint source, then this must first be configured. p2251 must be set to 0.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 843
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
ESM: Essential Service Mode
When the essential service mode is activated, the effective speed setpoint is displayed in r1114.
For p3881 = 0:
The last known setpoint value is only transmitted safely if it was present consistently for at least 30 s prior to activating
the essential service mode. If this condition is not met, fixed speed setpoint 15 (p1015) is used.
For p3881 = 6:
n_act = 0: pulse suppression and switching on inhibited.
n_active > 0: braking along the ramp-function generator down ramp (p1121), pulse cancellation and switching on
inhibited.
For p3881 = 7:
n_act = 0: pulse suppression and switching on inhibited.
n_act > 0: immediate pulse cancellation and switching on inhibited.
p3882 ESM setpoint source alternative / ESM setp_src alt
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7033
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 2 0
Description: Sets the alternative setpoint source for essential service mode (ESM).
This setpoint is used when the setpoint source set in p3881 is lost.
Value: 0: Last known setpoint (r1078 smoothed)
1: Fixed speed setpoint 15 (p1015)
2: Maximum speed (p1082)
Dependency: See also: p3881
Note
ESM: Essential Service Mode
The alternative setpoint source is only active for p3881 = 2, 3, 4.
p3883 BI: ESM direction of rotation signal source / ESM rot dir s_s
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7033
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the direction of rotation during essential service mode (ESM).
p3883 = 1 signal:
Direction of rotation of the setpoint, parameterized for essential service mode, is reversed.
p3883 = 0 signal:
Direction of rotation of the setpoint parameterized for essential service mode is kept.
WARNING
The direction reversal is not taken into account if p3881 = 4 is set (technology controller) and the technology controller
is also active as the setpoint source.
Note
ESM: Essential Service Mode
SINAMICS G120X converter
844 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p3884 CI: ESM setpoint technology controller / ESM setp tech_ctrl
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7033
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint for p3881 = 4 (technology controller) in the essential service mode (ESM).
Dependency: See also: p3881
Note
ESM: Essential Service Mode
For p3884 = 0:
The technology controller uses the setpoint from p2253.
r3887[0...1] ESM number of activations/faults / ESM act/fault qty
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7033
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the number of activations and faults that have occurred for the essential service mode (ESM).
Index: [0] = Activation of the essential service mode
[1] = Faults during the essential service mode
Dependency: See also: p3888
Note
ESM: Essential Service Mode
p3888 ESM reset number of activations/faults / ESM act/F qty r
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7033
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Setting to reset the number of activations and faults that have occurred for the essential service mode (ESM).
1: counter reset active (r3887[0, 1])
0: inactive
Dependency: See also: r3887
Note
ESM: Essential Service Mode
The parameter is automatically reset to zero after the counter has been reset.
r3889.0...10 CO/BO: ESM status word / ESM ZSW
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7033
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for the status word of the essential service mode (ESM).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 845
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
00 Essential service mode (ESM) activated Yes No -
01 Direction of rotation inverted Yes No -
02 Setpoint signal lost Yes No -
03 Technology controller actual value (p2264) lost Yes No -
04 Bypass active Yes No -
05 Setpoint technology controller parameterized (p3884) Yes No -
06 Technology controller during essential service mode active Yes No -
09 Response OFF1/OFF2 activated Yes No -
10 Automatic restart interrupted (F07320) Yes No -
Note
ESM: Essential Service Mode
p3900 Completion of quick commissioning / Compl quick_comm
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C2(1) Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 3 0
Description: Exits quick commissioning (p0010 = 1) with automatic calculation of all parameters of all existing drive data sets that
depend on the entries made during quick commissioning.
p3900 = 1 initially includes a parameter reset (factory setting, the same as p0970 = 1) for all parameters of the drive
object; however, without overwriting the entries made during the quick commissioning.
The interconnections of PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection (p0922) and the interconnections via p15 and p1500 are
re-established and all of the dependent motor, open-loop and control-loop control parameters are calculated
(corresponding to p0340 = 1).
p3900 = 2 includes the restoration of the interconnections of PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection (p0922) and the
interconnections via p15 and p1500 and the calculations corresponding to p0340 = 1.
p3900 = 3 only includes the calculations associated with the motor, open-loop and closed-loop control parameters
corresponding to p0340 = 1.
Value: 0: No quick parameterization
1: Quick parameterization after parameter reset
2: Quick parameterization (only) for BICO and motor parameters
3: Quick parameterization for motor parameters (only)
NOTICE
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note
When the calculations have been completed, p3900 and p0010 are automatically reset to a value of zero.
When calculating motor, open-loop and closed-loop control parameters (such as for p0340 = 1) parameters associated
with a selected Siemens catalog motor are not overwritten.
If a catalog motor has not been selected (p0300), then the following parameters are reset with p3900 > 0 in order to
restore the situation that applied when commissioning the drive for the first time:
induction motor: p0320, p0352, p0362 ... p0369, p0604, p0605, p0626 ... p0628
synchronous motor: p0326, p0327, p0352, p0604, p0605
r3925[0...n] Identification final display / Ident final_disp
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
SINAMICS G120X converter
846 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Displays the commissioning steps that have been carried out.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Motor/control parameters calculated (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) Yes No -
02 Motor data identification carried out at standstill (p1910 = 1) Yes No -
03 Rotating measurement carried out (p1960 = 1, 2) Yes No -
08 Identified motor data are automatically backed up Yes No -
11 Automatic parameterization as Standard Drive Control Yes No -
12 Automatic parameterization as Dynamic Drive Control Yes No -
14 First motor commissioning Yes No -
15 Equivalent circuit diagram parameters changed Yes No -
18 Circle identification executed Yes No -
Note
The individual bits are only set if the appropriate action has been initiated and successfully completed.
The identification final display is reset when changing the type plate parameters.
r3926[0...n] Voltage generation alternating base voltage amplitude / U_gen altern base
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the base voltage for the alternating voltage in the context of motor data identification.
0:
No alternating voltages. The function is deactivated.
<0:
Automatic determination of the base voltage and wobbulation / self-setting based on the converter and the connected
motor.
Otherwise:
Base voltage for alternating current generation in volts (wobbulation active).
r3927[0...n] Motor data identification control word / MotID STW
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Successfully completed component of the last motor data identification carried out.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Stator inductance estimate no measurement Yes No -
02 Rotor time constant estimate no measurement Yes No -
03 Leakage inductance estimate no measurement Yes No -
05 Determine Tr and Lsig evaluation in the time range Yes No -
06 Activate vibration damping Yes No -
07 Deactivate vibration detection Yes No -
11 Deactivate pulse measurement Lq Ld Yes No -
12 Deactivate rotor resistance Rr measurement Yes No -
14 Deactivate valve interlocking time measurement Yes No -
15 Determine only stator resistance, valve voltage fault, dead Yes No -
time
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 847
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
16 Short motor identification (lower quality) Yes No -
17 Measurement without control parameter calculation Yes No -
18 After motID direct transition into operation Yes No -
19 After MotID automatically save results Yes No -
20 Estimate cable resistance Yes No -
21 Calibrating the output voltage measurement Yes No -
22 Only identify circle Yes No -
23 Deactivate circle identification Yes No -
24 Circle identification with 0 and 90 degrees Yes No -
26 Measure with long cable Yes No -
Dependency: See also: r3925
Note
The parameter is a copy of p1909.
r3928[0...n] Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config
Access level: 3 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Successfully completed component of the last rotating measurement carried out.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
01 Saturation characteristic identification Yes No -
02 Moment of inertia identification Yes No -
03 Re-calculates the speed controller parameters Yes No -
04 Speed controller optimization (vibration test) Yes No -
05 q leakage inductance ident. (for current controller adaptation) Yes No -
11 Do not change the controller parameters during the Yes No -
measurement
12 Measurement shortened Yes No -
13 After measurement direct transition into operation Yes No -
14 Calculate speed actual value smoothing time Yes No -
Dependency: See also: r3925
Note
The parameter is a copy of p1959.
r3929[0...n] Motor data identification modulated voltage generation / MotID U_gen mod
Access level: 4 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Configuration of voltage generation for the various MotID sections in the case of the most recent successful MotID.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Wobble U_generate to determine dead-time correction Yes No -
01 Wobble U_generate to determine stator resistance Yes No -
02 Wobble U_generation to determine rotor time constant Yes No -
03 Wobble U_generation to determine leakage inductance Yes No -
SINAMICS G120X converter
848 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
04 Wobble U_generation to determine dynamic leakage Yes No -
inductance
05 Wobble U_generation to determine magnetizing inductance Yes No -
08 Alternating U_generate to determine dead-time correction Yes No -
09 Alternating U_generate to determine stator resistance Yes No -
10 Alternating U_generate to determine rotor time constant Yes No -
11 Alternating U_generate to determine leakage inductance Yes No -
12 Alternating U_generate to determine dyn. leakage Yes No -
inductance
13 Alternating U_generate to determine magnetizing inductance Yes No -
r3930[0...4] Power unit EEPROM characteristics / PU characteristics
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the characteristics (A5E number and versions) of the power unit.
[0]: A5E number xxxx (A5Exxxxyyyy)
[1]: A5E number yyyy (A5Exxxxyyyy)
[2]: File version (logistic)
[3]: File version (fixed data)
[4]: File version (calib data)
p3931 Options for electrical cabinets / Opt elec cabinet
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the options for the Power Module 330 (PM330).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Line filter Yes No -
01 Line Harmonics Filter Yes No -
02 du/dt filter compact Voltage Peak Limiter Yes No -
03 Motor reactor Yes No -
04 du/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter Yes No -
05 w/o line reactor Yes No -
07 EmergOff button Yes No -
08 Emergency Stop category 0 Yes No -
09 Emergency Stop category 1 Yes No -
10 Emergency Stop category 1 24 V Yes No -
11 Braking Module (25 kW) Yes No -
12 Braking Module (50 kW) Yes No -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 849
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p3950 Service parameter / Serv par
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: C1, T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: For service personnel only.
r3974 Drive unit status word / Drv_unit ZSW
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status word for the drive unit.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Software reset active Yes No -
01 Writing of parameters disabled as parameter save in Yes No -
progress
02 Writing of parameters disabled as macro is running Yes No -
r3978 BICO CounterDevice / BICO CounterDevice
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the counter reading for modified BICO interconnections on this device.
The counter is incremented by one for each modified BICO interconnection.
p3981 Acknowledge drive object faults / Ackn DO faults
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8060
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Setting to acknowledge all active faults of a drive object.
NOTICE
Safety messages cannot be acknowledged using this parameter.
Note
Parameter should be set from 0 to 1 to acknowledge.
After acknowledgment, the parameter is automatically reset to 0.
SINAMICS G120X converter
850 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p3985 Master control mode selection / PcCtrl mode select
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the mode to change over the master control / LOCAL mode.
Value: 0: Change master control for STW1.0 = 0
1: Change master control in operation
DANGER
When changing the master control in operation, the drive can manifest undesirable behavior - e.g. it can accelerate
up to another setpoint.
r3986 Number of parameters / Param count
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the number of parameters for this drive unit.
The number comprises the device-specific and the drive-specific parameters.
Dependency: See also: r0980, r0981, r0989
r3988[0...1] Boot state / Boot_state
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 800 -
Description: Index 0:
Displays the boot state.
Index 1:
Displays the partial boot state
Value: 0: Not active
1: Fatal fault
10: Fault
20: Reset all parameters
30: Drive object modified
40: Download using commissioning software
50: Parameter download using commissioning software
90: Reset Control Unit
100: Start initialization
101: Only for internal Siemens use
110: Instantiate Control Unit basis
111: Only for internal Siemens use
112: Only for internal Siemens use
113: Only for internal Siemens use
114: Only for internal Siemens use
115: Parameter download using commissioning software
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 851
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
117: Only for internal Siemens use
150: Wait until Power Module is determined
160: Evaluate Power Module
170: Instantiate Control Unit reset
180: Only for internal Siemens use
200: First commissioning
210: Create drive packages
250: Wait for fault acknowledge
325: Wait for input of drive type
350: Determine drive type
360: Only for internal Siemens use
370: Wait until p0010 is set to 0
380: Only for internal Siemens use
550: Call conversion functions for parameter
625: Wait for non-cyclic start
650: Start cyclic operation
660: Evaluate drive commissioning status
670: Only for internal Siemens use
680: Only for internal Siemens use
690: Wait for non-cyclic start
700: Save parameters
725: Wait for cyclic
740: Check the ability to operate
745: Start cyclic calculations
750: Interrupt enable
800: Initialization finished
Index: [0] = System
[1] = Partial boot
r3996[0...1] Parameter write inhibit status / Par_write inhib st
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays whether writing to parameters is inhibited.
r3996[0] = 0:
Parameter write not inhibited.
0 < r3996[0] < 100:
Parameter write inhibited. The value shows how the calculations are progressing.
Index: [0] = Progress calculations
[1] = Cause
Note
For index 1:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
SINAMICS G120X converter
852 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r4022.0...3 CO/BO: PM330 digital inputs status / PM330 DI status
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status of the digital inputs of the PM330 power unit.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X9.3, external alarm) High Low -
01 DI 1 (X9.4, external fault) High Low -
02 DI 2 (X9.5, Emergency Off category 0) High Low -
03 DI 3 (X9.6, Emergency Off category 1) High Low -
Dependency: See also: r4023
Note
DI: Digital Input
r4023.0...3 CO/BO: PM330 digital inputs status inverted / PM330 DI stat inv
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs of Power Module 330 (PM330).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X9.3, external alarm) High Low -
01 DI 1 (X9.4, external fault) High Low -
02 DI 2 (X9.5, Emergency Off category 0) High Low -
03 DI 3 (X9.6, Emergency Off category 1) High Low -
Dependency: See also: r4022
Note
DI: Digital Input
r4047 PM330 digital outputs status / PM330 DO status
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status of the digital outputs of Power Module 330 (PM330).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DO 0 (X9.8: enable signal UDC link charged) High Low -
01 DO 1 (X9.11/X9.12: main contactor control) High Low -
Note
DO: Digital Output
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 853
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p4095 PM330 digital inputs simulation mode / PM330 DI sim_mode
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the simulation mode for digital inputs of the PM330 power unit.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X9.3, external alarm) Simulation Terminal eval -
01 DI 1 (X9.4, external fault) Simulation Terminal eval -
02 DI 2 (X9.5, Emergency Off category 0) Simulation Terminal eval -
03 DI 3 (X9.6, Emergency Off category 1) Simulation Terminal eval -
Dependency: The setpoint for the input signals is specified using p4096.
See also: p4096
Note
This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).
DI: Digital Input
p4096 PM330 digital inputs simulation mode setpoint / PM330 DI sim setp
G120X_DP (PM330), Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
G120X_PN (PM330), Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
G120X_USS (PM330)
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2275
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the digital input simulation mode of the PM330 power unit.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X9.3, external alarm) High Low -
01 DI 1 (X9.4, external fault) High Low -
02 DI 2 (X9.5, Emergency Off category 0) High Low -
03 DI 3 (X9.6, Emergency Off category 1) High Low -
Dependency: The simulation of a digital input is selected using p4095.
See also: p4095
Note
This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).
DI: Digital Input
p5350[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1/3 boost factor at standstill / Standst boost_fact
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8017
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1.0000 2.0000 2.0000
SINAMICS G120X converter
854 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the boost factor for the copper losses at standstill for motor temperature models 1 and 3.
The entered factor is active for speed n = 0 [rpm].
This factor is linearly reduced down to 1 between speeds n = 0 ... 1 [rpm].
The following values are required to calculate the boost factor:
- stall current (I_0, p0318, catalog value)
- thermal stall current (I_th0, catalog value)
The boost factor is calculated as follows:
- p5350 = (I_0 / I_th0)^2
Dependency: See also: p0318, p0612, p5390, p5391
See also: F07011, A07012, F07013, A07014
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note
Temperature model 1 (I2t):
The following applies for firmware version < 4.7 SP6 or p0612.8 = 0:
- parameter p5350 is not active. Internally, a fixed boost factor of 1.333 is used as basis for the calculation.
The following applies from firmware version 4.7 SP6 and p0612.8 = 1:
- parameter p5350 becomes active as described above.
r5389.0...8 CO/BO: Mot_temp status word faults/alarms / Mot_temp ZSW F/A
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 8016
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and BICO output for faults and alarms of the motor temperature monitoring.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Motor temperature measurement fault active Yes No -
01 Motor temperature model fault active Yes No -
02 Encoder temperature measurement fault active Yes No -
04 Motor temperature measurement alarm active Yes No -
05 Motor temperature measurement alarm active Yes No -
08 Current reduction active Yes No -
Dependency: See also: r0034, p0612, r0632
See also: F07011, A07012, A07910
Note
For bit 00, 04:
The motor temperature is measured using a temperature sensor (p0600, p0601). When the bit is set, a high
temperature is identified, and a corresponding signal is additionally output.
For bit 01, 05:
The motor temperature is monitored based on a temperature model (p0612). When the bit is set, a high temperature
is identified, and a corresponding signal is additionally output.
For bit 02:
The encoder temperature is measured using a temperature sensor. When the bit is set, a high temperature is identified,
and a corresponding signal is additionally output.
For bit 08:
When reaching the motor temperature alarm threshold, reduction of the maximum current is set as response (p0610
= 1). When the bit is set, reduction of the maximum current is active.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 855
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p5390[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1/3 alarm threshold / A thresh
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8017
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [°C] 200.0 [°C] 110.0 [°C]
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for monitoring the motor temperature for motor temperature models 1 and 3.
The stator winding temperature (r0632) is used to initiate the signal.
The following applies for temperature model 1 (I2t):
- only effective from firmware version 4.7 SP6 and p0612.8 = 1.
- Alarm A07012 is output after the alarm threshold is exceeded.
- when commissioning a catalog motor for the first time, the threshold value is copied from p0605 to p5390.
The following applies for temperature model 3:
- after the alarm threshold is exceeded, alarm A07012 is output and a calculated delay time (t = p5371/p5381) is
started.
- if the delay time has expired and the alarm threshold has, in the meantime, not been fallen below, then fault F07011
is output.
Dependency: See also: r0034, p0605, p0612, r0632, p5391
See also: F07011, A07012, F07013, A07014
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note
The hysteresis is 2 K.
p5391[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 1/3 fault threshold / F thresh
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: MDS, p0130
Unit group: 21_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: 8017
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [°C] 200.0 [°C] 120.0 [°C]
Description: Sets the fault threshold for monitoring the motor temperature for motor temperature models 1 and 3.
Fault F07011 is output after the fault threshold is exceeded.
The stator winding temperature (r0632) is used to initiate the signal.
The following applies for temperature model 1 (I2t):
- only effective from firmware version 4.7 SP6 and p0612.8 = 1.
- when commissioning a catalog motor for the first time, the threshold value is copied from p0615 to p5391.
Dependency: See also: r0034, p0612, p0615, r0632, p5390
See also: F07011, F07013, A07014
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected.
Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note
The hysteresis is 2 K.
SINAMICS G120X converter
856 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r5600 Pe energy-saving mode ID / Pe mode ID
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2381, 2382
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 255 -
Description: Displays the PROFIenergy mode ID of the effective energy-saving mode.
Value: 0: POWER OFF
2: Energy-saving mode 2
240: Operation
255: Ready
Note
Pe: PROFIenergy profiles
p5602[0...1] Pe energy-saving mode pause time minimal / Pe mod t_pause min
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2381
Min: Max: Factory setting:
300000 [ms] 4294967295 [ms] [0] 300000 [ms]
[1] 480000 [ms]
Description: Sets the minimum possible pause time for the energy-saving mode.
The value is the sum of the following times:
- Energy-saving mode transition time
- Operating state transition time regular
- Energy-saving mode, time of minimum stay
Index: [0] = Reserved
[1] = Mode 2
Note
It is not permissible that the value is less than the sum of the "energy-saving mode transition time" and the "operating
state transition time" (system properties).
Pe: PROFIenergy profiles
p5606[0...1] Pe energy-saving mode time of maximum stay / Pe t_max_stay
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2381
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [ms] 4294967295 [ms] 4294967295 [ms]
Description: Sets the time of maximum stay for the energy-saving mode.
Index: [0] = Reserved
[1] = Mode 2
Note
Pe: PROFIenergy profiles
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 857
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p5611 Pe energy-saving properties general / Pe properties gen
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2381, 2382
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the general properties for energy-saving.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Inhibit PROFIenergy control commands Yes No -
01 Drive initiates OFF1 when transitioning to energy-saving Yes No -
mode
02 Trans to energy-saving mode from PROFIdrive state S3/4 Yes No -
poss
Note
Pe: PROFIenergy profiles
PROFIdrive state S4: operation
p5612[0...1] Pe energy-saving properties mode-dependent / Pe properties mod
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 0110 bin
[1] 0000 bin
Description: Sets the mode-dependent properties for energy-saving.
Index: [0] = Reserved
[1] = Mode 2
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Reserved Yes No -
Note
Pe: PROFIenergy profiles
r5613.0...1 CO/BO: Pe energy-saving active/inactive / Pe save act/inact
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2382
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and binector output for the state display PROFIenergy energy saving active or inactive.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Pe active Yes No -
01 Pe inactive Yes No -
Note
Bit 0 and bit 1 are inverse of one another.
Pe: PROFIenergy profiles
SINAMICS G120X converter
858 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p5614 BI: Pe set switching on inhibited signal source / Pe sw-on_inh s_s
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2382
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to set in the PROFIdrive state S1 "switching on inhibited".
Dependency: See also: r5613
Note
Pe: PROFIenergy profiles
p7610[0...78] Fieldbus interface BACnet device name / BACnet device name
G120X_USS Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 9310
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Sets the object name for the BACnet device object.
This name must be unique within the complete BACnet network.
The object name is only preassigned with device name and serial number the first time that the system runs up, e.g.
"SINAMICS G120 CU230P-2 HVAC - XAB812-005806"
Note
An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual.
r7758[0...19] KHP Control Unit serial number / KHP CU ser_no
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the actual serial number of the Control Unit.
The individual characters of the serial number are displayed in the ASCII code in the indices.
For the commissioning software, the ASCII characters are displayed uncoded.
Dependency: See also: p7765, p7766, p7767, p7768
NOTICE
An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual.
Note
KHP: Know-How Protection
p7759[0...19] KHP Control Unit reference serial number / KHP CU ref ser_no
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Sets the reference serial number for the Control Unit.
Using this parameter, if a Control Unit and/or a memory card is replaced at the end customer, the OEM can again adapt
the project to the modified hardware.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 859
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Dependency: See also: p7765, p7766, p7767, p7768
Note
KHP: Know-How Protection
- the OEM may only change this parameter for the use case "Sending encrypted SINAMICS data".
- SINAMICS only evaluates this parameter when powering up from the encrypted "Load into file system..." output or
when powering up from the encrypted PS files. The evaluation is only made when know-how protection and memory
card copy protection have been activated.
r7760.0...12 CO/BO: Write protection/know-how protection status / Wr_prot/KHP stat
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status for the write protection and know-how protection.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Write protection active Yes No -
01 Know-how protection active Yes No -
02 Know-how protection temporarily withdrawn Yes No -
03 Know-how protection cannot be deactivated Yes No -
04 Extended copy protection is active Yes No -
05 Basic copy protection is active Yes No -
06 Trace and measuring functions for diagnostic purposes Yes No -
active
12 Reserved Siemens Yes No -
Dependency: See also: p7761, p7765, p7766, p7767, p7768
Note
KHP: Know-How Protection
For bit 00:
Write protection can be activated/deactivated via p7761 on the Control Unit.
For bit 01:
The know-how protection can be activated by entering a password (p7766 ... p7768).
For bit 02:
If it has already been activated, know-how protection can be temporarily deactivated by entering the valid password in
p7766. In this case, bit 1 = 0 and bit 2 = 1 offset.
For bit 03:
Know-how protection cannot be deactivated, as p7766 is not entered in the OEM exception list (only the factory setting
is possible). This bit is only set if know-how protection is active (bit 1 = 1) and p7766 has not been entered in the OEM
exception list.
For bit 04:
When know-how protection has been activated, the contents of the memory card (parameter and DCC data) can be
additionally protected against being used with other memory cards/Control Units. This bit is only set if know-how
protection is active and p7765 bit 00 is set.
For bit 05:
When know-how protection has been activated, the contents of the memory card (parameter and DCC data) can be
additionally protected against being used with other memory cards. This bit is only set if know-how protection is active
and in p7765 bit 01 is set and not bit 00.
For bit 06:
When know-how protection is activated, the drive data can be traced using the device trace function. This bit is only set
if know-how protection is active and in p7765.2 is set.
SINAMICS G120X converter
860 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p7761 Write protection / Write protection
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Setting for activating/deactivating the write protection for adjustable parameters.
Value: 0: Deactivate write protection
1: Activate write protection
Dependency: See also: r7760
Note
Parameters with the "WRITE_NO_LOCK" attributes are excluded from the write protection.
A product-specific list of these parameters is also available in the corresponding List Manual.
p7762 Write protection multi-master fieldbus system access behavior / Fieldbus acc_behav
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the behavior for write protection when accessing via multi-master fieldbus systems (e.g. CAN, BACnet).
Value: 0: Write access independent of p7761
1: Write access dependent on p7761
Dependency: See also: r7760, p7761
p7763 KHP OEM exception list number of indices for p7764 / KHP OEM qty p7764
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 500 1
Description: Sets the number of parameters for the OEM exception list (p7764[0...n]).
p7764[0...n], with n = p7763 - 1
Dependency: See also: p7764
Note
KHP: Know-How Protection
Even if know-how protection is set, parameters in this list can be read and written to.
p7764[0...n] KHP OEM exception list / KHP OEM excep list
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: p7763
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 65535 [0] 7766
[1...499] 0
Description: OEM exception list (p7764[0...n] for setting parameters that should be excluded from know-how protection.
p7764[0...n], with n = p7763 - 1
Dependency: The number of indices depends on p7763.
See also: p7763
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 861
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
KHP: Know-How Protection
Even if know-how protection is set, parameters in this list can be read and written to.
p7765 KHP configuration / KHP config
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 bin
Description: Configuration settings for know-how protection.
For bit 00, 01:
When KHP is activated, this means that the OEM can define whether the parameters and DCC data encrypted on the
memory card should be protected before using on other memory cards/Control Units.
For bit 02:
This means that the OEM can define whether it is possible or not to trace the drive data using the device trace function
although KHP is activated.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Extended copy protection - linked to the memory card and CU Yes No -
01 Basic copy protection - linked to the memory card Yes No -
02 Permit trace and measuring functions for diagnostic Yes No -
purposes
Dependency: See also: p7766, p7767, p7768
Note
KHP: Know-How Protection
For copy protection, the serial numbers of the memory card and/or Control Unit are checked.
The memory card copy protection and preventing data to be traced are only effective when the know-how protection
has been activated.
For bit 00, 01:
If both bits are inadvertently set to 1 (e.g. at the BOP), then the setting of bit 0 applies.
There is no copy protection if both bits are set to 0.
p7766[0...29] KHP password input / KHP passw input
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Sets the password for know-how protection.
Example of a password:
123aBc = 49 50 51 97 66 99 dec (ASCII characters)
[0] = character 1 (e.g. 49 dec)
[1] = character 2 (e.g. 50 dec)
...
[5] = character 6 (e.g. 99 dec)
[29] = 0 dec (completes the entry)
Dependency: See also: p7767, p7768
SINAMICS G120X converter
862 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
NOTICE
An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the Appendix of the List Manual.
When using the STARTER commissioning tool, the password should be entered via the associated dialogs.
The following rules apply when entering the password:
- password entry must start with p7766[0].
- no gaps are permissible in the password.
- entering a password is completed when writing to p7766[29] (p7766[29] = 0 for passwords less than 30 characters).
Note
KHP: Know-How Protection
When reading, p7766[0...29] = 42 dec (ASCII character = "*") is displayed.
Parameters with the "KHP_WRITE_NO_LOCK" attribute are not involved in the know-how protection.
Parameters with the "KHP_ACTIVE_READ" attribute can be read even when know-how protection is activated.
A product-specific list of these parameters is also available in the corresponding List Manual.
p7767[0...29] KHP password new / KHP passw new
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Sets the new password for know-how protection.
Dependency: See also: p7766, p7768
Note
KHP: Know-How Protection
When reading, p7767[0...29] = 42 dec (ASCII character = "*") is displayed.
p7768[0...29] KHP password confirmation / KHP passw confirm
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Confirms the new password for know-how protection.
Dependency: See also: p7766, p7767
Note
KHP: Know-How Protection
When reading, p7768[0...29] = 42 dec (ASCII character = "*") is displayed.
p7769[0...20] KHP memory card reference serial number / KHP mem ref ser_no
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Sets the reference serial number for the memory card.
Using this parameter, if a Control Unit and/or a memory card is replaced at the end customer, the OEM can again adapt
the project to the modified hardware.
Dependency: See also: p7765, p7766, p7767, p7768
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 863
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
KHP: Know-How Protection
- the OEM may only change this parameter for the use case "Sending encrypted SINAMICS data".
- SINAMICS only evaluates this parameter when powering up from the encrypted "Load into file system..." output or
when powering up from the encrypted PS files. The evaluation is only made when know-how protection and memory
card copy protection have been activated.
p7775 NVRAM data backup/import/delete / NVRAM backup
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C1, T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 17 0
Description: Setting to backup/import/delete NVRAM data.
NVRAM data are non-volatile data in the device (e.g. fault buffer).
For NVRAM data actions, the following data are excluded:
- crash diagnostics
- CU operating hours counter
- CU temperature
- safety logbook
Value: 0: Inactive
1: NVRAM data backup to memory card
2: Import NVRAM data from the memory card
3: Delete NVRAM data in the device
10: Error when clearing
11: Error when backing up, memory card not available
12: Error when backing up, insufficient memory space
13: Error when backing up
14: Error when importing, memory card not available
15: Error when importing, checksum error
16: Error when importing, no NVRAM data available
17: Error when importing
NOTICE
For value = 2, 3:
These actions are only possible when pulses are inhibited.
Note
After the action has been successfully completed, the parameter is automatically set to zero.
The actions importing and deleting NVRAM data immediately initiate a warm restart.
If the procedure was not successfully completed, then an appropriate fault value is displayed (p7775 >= 10).
r7841[0...15] Power Module serial number / PM serial no.
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the actual serial number of the Power Module.
The individual characters of the serial number are displayed in the ASCII code in the indices.
SINAMICS G120X converter
864 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
NOTICE
An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual.
r7843[0...20] Memory card serial number / Mem_card ser.no
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the actual serial number of the memory card.
The individual characters of the serial number are displayed in the ASCII code in the indices.
NOTICE
An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual.
Note
Example: displaying the serial number for a memory card:
r7843[0] = 49 dec --> ASCII characters = "1" --> serial number, character 1
r7843[1] = 49 dec --> ASCII characters = "1" --> serial number, character 2
r7843[2] = 49 dec --> ASCII characters = "1" --> serial number, character 3
r7843[3] = 57 dec --> ASCII characters = "9" --> serial number, character 4
r7843[4] = 50 dec --> ASCII characters = "2" --> serial number, character 5
r7843[5] = 51 dec --> ASCII characters = "3" --> serial number, character 6
r7843[6] = 69 dec --> ASCII characters = "E" --> serial number, character 7
r7843[7] = 0 dec --> ASCII characters = " " --> serial number, character 8
...
r7843[19] = 0 dec --> ASCII characters = " " --> serial number, character 20
r7843[20] = 0 dec
Serial number = 111923E
r7844[0...2] Memory card/device memory firmware version / Mem_crd/dev_mem FW
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the version of the firmware stored on the memory medium of the drive device.
Depending on the drive device being used, the memory medium is a memory card, or an internal non-volatile device
memory.
Index: [0] = Internal
[1] = External
[2] = Parameter backup
Note
For index 0:
Displays the internal firmware version (e.g. 04402315).
This firmware version is the version of the memory card/device memory and not the CU firmware (r0018), however,
normally they have the same versions.
For index 1:
Displays the external firmware version (e.g. 04040000 -> 4.4).
For automation systems with SINAMICS Integrated this is the runtime version of the automation system.
For index 2:
Displays the internal firmware version of the parameter backup.
With this CU firmware version, the parameter backup was saved, which was used when powering up.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 865
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r7901[0...81] Sampling times / t_sample
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [µs] - [µs] - [µs]
Description: Displays the sampling times currently present on the drive unit.
r7901[0...63]: sampling times of hardware time slices.
r7901[64...82]: sampling times of software time slices.
r7901[x] = 0, means the following:
No methods have been registered in the time slice involved.
Note
The basis for the software time slices is T_NRK = p7901[13].
r7903 Hardware sampling times still assignable / HW t_samp free
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the number of hardware sampling times that can still be assigned.
These free sampling times can be used by OA applications such as DCC or FBLOCKS.
Note
OA: Open Architecture
p8400[0...2] RTC time / RTC time
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 59 0
Description: Sets and displays the time on the real-time clock in hours, minutes, and seconds.
The time is stored in the internal clock block in the drive and continues to run even if the supply voltage for the Control
Unit is interrupted (for approx. 5 days).
Index: [0] = Hour (0 ... 23)
[1] = Minute (0 ... 59)
[2] = Second (0 ... 59)
Note
The time from p8400 and p8401 is used to display the fault and alarm times.
When displaying the fault time and alarm time, the switchover to daylight saving time is not taken into account.
The parameter is not reset when the factory setting is restored (p0010 = 30, p0970).
The time is entered and displayed in 24-hour format.
RTC: Real-time clock
SINAMICS G120X converter
866 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p8401[0...2] RTC date / RTC date
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 9999 [0] 1
[1] 1
[2] 1970
Description: Sets and displays the date on the real-time clock in year, month, and day.
The date is stored in the internal clock block in the drive and continues to run even if the supply voltage for the Control
Unit is interrupted (for approx. 5 days).
Recommendation: When the date is set as an index, the day should always be written last because, if a date is invalid, the day is always
corrected to the last valid day in that particular month of the year.
Index: [0] = Day (1 ... 31)
[1] = Month (1 ... 12)
[2] = Year (YYYY)
Note
The time from p8400 and p8401 is used to display the fault and alarm times.
When displaying the fault time and alarm time, the switchover to daylight saving time is not taken into account.
The parameter is not reset when the factory setting is restored (p0010 = 30, p0970).
RTC: Real-time clock
p8402[0...8] RTC daylight saving time setting / RTC DST
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 23 [0] 0
[1] 3
[2] 6
[3] 7
[4] 2
[5] 10
[6] 6
[7] 7
[8] 3
Description: Setting the daylight saving time.
The factory setting corresponds to the time change for central european summer time (CEST). You only have to set
p8402[0] = 1 to activate CEST.
Index: [0] = Difference (0 ... 3 hours)
[1] = Start of month (1 ... 12)
[2] = Start of the week of the month (1 ... 4, 6)
[3] = Start of weekday (1 ... 7)
[4] = Start of hour (0 ... 23)
[5] = End of month (1 ... 12)
[6] = End of the week of the month (1 ... 4, 6)
[7] = End of weekday (1 ... 7)
[8] = End of hour (0 ... 23)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 867
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The switchover to daylight saving time only effects the RTC and DTC parameters (p8400 ... p8433).
When displaying the fault time and alarm time, the switchover to daylight saving time is not taken into account.
There must be at least two months between the start and end of daylight saving time.
For index 0:
0: daylight saving time switchover deactivated
1 ... 3: time difference
For indices 1 and 5:
1 = January, ... , 12 = December
For indices 2 and 6:
1 = from the 1st to the 7th of the month
2 = from the 8th to the 14th of the month
3 = from the 15th to the 21st of the month
4 = from the 22nd to the 28th of the month
6 = the last 7 days of the month
For indices 3 and 7:
1 = Monday, ... , 7 = Sunday
r8403 RTC actual daylight saving time difference / RTC act DST
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the actual time difference in hours for the daylight saving time
Note
The value is 0, if daylight saving time has not been defined using p8402.
If it is presently daylight saving time according to what is defined in p8402, then the parameter indicates the time
difference between daylight saving time and normal time (p8402[0]).
r8404 RTC weekday / RTC weekday
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 7 -
Description: Displays the weekday on the real-time clock.
Value: 1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
7: Sunday
Note
RTC: Real-time clock
SINAMICS G120X converter
868 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p8405 Activate/deactivate RTC alarm A01098 / RTC A01098 act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 1
Description: Sets whether the real-time clock outputs an alarm if the time is not synchronized (e.g. if the power supply was switched
off for an extended period).
Value: 0: Alarm A01098 deactivated
1: Alarm A01098 activated
Dependency: See also: A01098
Note
RTC: Real-time clock
p8409 RTC DTC activation / RTC DTC act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 1
Description: Sets the activation/deactivation of the parameters for timers DTC1, DTC2, DTC3.
For p8409 = 0, the following applies:
DTC1 parameters p8410, p8411, p8412 are inactive and can be set. Binector output r8413.0 = 0.
DTC2 parameters p8420, p8421, p8422 are inactive and can be set. Binector output r8423.0 = 0.
DTC3 parameters p8430, p8431, p8432 are inactive and can be set. Binector output r8433.0 = 0.
For p8409 = 1, the following applies:
DTC1 parameters p8410, p8411, p8412 are active and cannot be set. Binector outputs r8413 are active.
DTC2 parameters p8420, p8421, p8422 are active and cannot be set. Binector outputs r8423 are active.
DTC3 parameters p8430, p8431, p8432 are active and cannot be set. Binector outputs r8433 are active.
Value: 0: DTC inactive and can be set
1: DTC active and cannot be set
Dependency: See also: p8410, p8411, p8412, r8413, p8420, p8421, p8422, r8423, p8430, p8431, p8432, r8433
Note
DTC: Digital Time Clock (timer)
RTC: Real-time clock
p8410[0...6] RTC DTC1 weekday of activation / RTC DTC1 day act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the weekday on which timer 1 is activated (DTC1).
The switch-on/off time is set in p8411/p8412 and the result displayed via binector output r8413.
Value: 0: Weekday deactivated
1: Weekday activated
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 869
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Index: [0] = Monday
[1] = Tuesday
[2] = Wednesday
[3] = Thursday
[4] = Friday
[5] = Saturday
[6] = Sunday
Dependency: See also: p8409, p8411, p8412, r8413
NOTICE
This parameter can only be changed when p8409 = 0.
Note
DTC: Digital Time Clock (timer)
RTC: Real-time clock
p8411[0...1] RTC DTC1 switch-on time / RTC DTC1 t_ON
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 59 0
Description: Sets the switch-on time in hours and minutes for time switch 1 (DTC1).
BO: r8413 = 1 signal:
The condition for the set weekday (p8410) and switch-on time has been fulfilled.
Index: [0] = Hour (0 ... 23)
[1] = Minute (0 ... 59)
Dependency: See also: p8409, p8410, r8413
NOTICE
This parameter can only be changed when p8409 = 0.
Note
DTC: Digital Time Clock (timer)
RTC: Real-time clock
p8412[0...1] RTC DTC1 off time / RTC DTC1 t_OFF
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 59 0
Description: Sets the switch-off time in hours and minutes for time switch 1 (DTC1).
BO: r8413 = 0 signal:
The condition for the set weekday (p8410) and switch-off time has been fulfilled.
Index: [0] = Hour (0 ... 23)
[1] = Minute (0 ... 59)
Dependency: See also: p8409, p8410, r8413
NOTICE
This parameter can only be changed when p8409 = 0.
SINAMICS G120X converter
870 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
DTC: Digital Time Clock (timer)
RTC: Real-time clock
r8413.0...1 BO: RTC DTC1 output / RTC DTC1 output
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and binector output for the output of time switch 1 (DTC1).
Where a weekday is deactivated, the following applies (p8410):
- the binector output for this timer is inactive (r8413.0 = 0).
Where a weekday is activated, the following applies (p8410):
- the ON/OFF time setting (p8411, p8412) for this timer has an instant effect on the binector output (r8413).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Timer on Yes No -
01 Timer ON negated No Yes -
Dependency: See also: p8409, p8410, p8411, p8412
NOTICE
This parameter can only be changed when p8409 = 0.
Note
DTC: Digital Time Clock (timer)
RTC: Real-time clock
p8420[0...6] RTC DTC2 weekday of activation / RTC DTC2 day act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the weekday on which timer 2 is activated (DTC2).
The switch-on/off time is set in p8421/p8422 and the result displayed via binector output r8423.
Value: 0: Weekday deactivated
1: Weekday activated
Index: [0] = Monday
[1] = Tuesday
[2] = Wednesday
[3] = Thursday
[4] = Friday
[5] = Saturday
[6] = Sunday
Dependency: See also: p8409, p8421, p8422, r8423
NOTICE
This parameter can only be changed when p8409 = 0.
Note
DTC: Digital Time Clock (timer)
RTC: Real-time clock
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 871
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p8421[0...1] RTC DTC2 switch-on time / RTC DTC2 t_ON
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 59 0
Description: Sets the switch on time in hours and minutes for time switch 2 (DTC2).
BO: r8423 = 1 signal:
The condition for the set weekday (p8420) and switch-on time has been fulfilled.
Index: [0] = Hour (0 ... 23)
[1] = Minute (0 ... 59)
Dependency: See also: p8409, p8420, r8423
NOTICE
This parameter can only be changed when p8409 = 0.
Note
DTC: Digital Time Clock (timer)
RTC: Real-time clock
p8422[0...1] RTC DTC2 off time / RTC DTC2 t_OFF
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 59 0
Description: Sets the switch off time in hours and minutes for time switch 2 (DTC2).
BO: r8423 = 0 signal:
The condition for the set weekday (p8420) and switch-off time has been fulfilled.
Index: [0] = Hour (0 ... 23)
[1] = Minute (0 ... 59)
Dependency: See also: p8409, p8420, r8423
NOTICE
This parameter can only be changed when p8409 = 0.
Note
DTC: Digital Time Clock (timer)
RTC: Real-time clock
r8423.0...1 BO: RTC DTC2 output / RTC DTC2 output
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and binector output for the output of timer 2 (DTC2).
Where a weekday is deactivated, the following applies (p8420):
- the binector output for this timer is inactive (r8423.0 = 0).
Where a weekday is activated, the following applies (p8420):
- the ON/OFF time setting (p8421, p8422) for this timer has an instant effect on the binector output (r8423).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
SINAMICS G120X converter
872 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
00 Timer on Yes No -
01 Timer ON negated No Yes -
Dependency: See also: p8409, p8420, p8421, p8422
NOTICE
This parameter can only be changed when p8409 = 0.
Note
DTC: Digital Time Clock (timer)
RTC: Real-time clock
p8430[0...6] RTC DTC3 weekday of activation / RTC DTC3 day act
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the weekday on which timer 3 is activated (DTC3).
The switch-on/off time is set in p8431/p8432 and the result displayed via binector output r8433.
Value: 0: Weekday deactivated
1: Weekday activated
Index: [0] = Monday
[1] = Tuesday
[2] = Wednesday
[3] = Thursday
[4] = Friday
[5] = Saturday
[6] = Sunday
Dependency: See also: p8409, p8431, p8432, r8433
NOTICE
This parameter can only be changed when p8409 = 0.
Note
DTC: Digital Time Clock (timer)
RTC: Real-time clock
p8431[0...1] RTC DTC3 switch-on time / RTC DTC3 t_ON
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 59 0
Description: Sets the switch on time in hours and minutes for timer 3 (DTC3).
BO: r8433 = 1 signal:
The condition for the set weekday (p8430) and switch-on time has been fulfilled.
Index: [0] = Hour (0 ... 23)
[1] = Minute (0 ... 59)
Dependency: See also: p8409, p8430, r8433
NOTICE
This parameter can only be changed when p8409 = 0.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 873
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
DTC: Digital Time Clock (timer)
RTC: Real-time clock
p8432[0...1] RTC DTC3 off time / RTC DTC3 t_OFF
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 59 0
Description: Sets the switch off time in hours and minutes for timer 3 (DTC3).
BO: r8433 = 0 signal:
The condition for the set weekday (p8430) and switch-off time has been fulfilled.
Index: [0] = Hour (0 ... 23)
[1] = Minute (0 ... 59)
Dependency: See also: p8409, p8430, r8433
NOTICE
This parameter can only be changed when p8409 = 0.
Note
DTC: Digital Time Clock (timer)
RTC: Real-time clock
r8433.0...1 BO: RTC DTC3 output / RTC DTC3 output
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and binector output for the output of timer 3 (DTC3).
Where a weekday is deactivated, the following applies (p8430):
- the binector output for this timer is inactive (r8433.0 = 0).
Where a weekday is activated, the following applies (p8430):
- the ON/OFF time setting (p8431, p8432) for this timer has an instant effect on the binector output (r8433).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Timer on Yes No -
01 Timer ON negated No Yes -
Dependency: See also: p8409, p8430, p8431, p8432
NOTICE
This parameter can only be changed when p8409 = 0.
Note
DTC: Digital Time Clock (timer)
RTC: Real-time clock
SINAMICS G120X converter
874 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r8540.0...15 BO: STW1 from IOP in the manual mode / STW1 IOP
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: For the manual mode: the STW1 (control word 1) entered from the IOP is displayed.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No -
01 OC / OFF2 Yes No -
02 OC / OFF3 Yes No -
03 Reserved Yes No -
04 Reserved Yes No -
05 Reserved Yes No -
06 Reserved Yes No -
07 Acknowledge fault Yes No -
08 Jog bit 0 Yes No 3030
09 Jog bit 1 Yes No 3030
10 Reserved Yes No -
11 Direction reversal (setpoint) Yes No -
12 Reserved Yes No -
13 Reserved Yes No -
14 Reserved Yes No -
15 Reserved Yes No -
r8541 CO: Speed setpoint from the IOP in the manual mode / n_set IOP
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: For the manual mode: the speed setpoint entered from the IOP is displayed.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 875
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p8542[0...15] BI: Active STW1 in the BOP/IOP manual mode / STW1 act OP
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 8540.0
[1] 8540.1
[2] 8540.2
[3] 8540.3
[4] 8540.4
[5] 8540.5
[6] 8540.6
[7] 8540.7
[8] 8540.8
[9] 8540.9
[10] 8540.10
[11] 8540.11
[12] 8540.12
[13] 8540.13
[14] 8540.14
[15] 8540.15
Description: For the manual mode: Setting of the signal sources for STW1 (control word 1).
Index: [0] = ON/OFF1
[1] = OC / OFF2
[2] = OC / OFF3
[3] = Enable operation
[4] = Enable ramp-function generator
[5] = Continue ramp-function generator
[6] = Enable speed setpoint
[7] = Acknowledge fault
[8] = Jog bit 0
[9] = Jog bit 1
[10] = Master control by PLC
[11] = Direction reversal (setpoint)
[12] = Enable speed controller
[13] = Motorized potentiometer raise
[14] = Motorized potentiometer lower
[15] = CDS bit 0
p8543 CI: Active speed setpoint in the BOP/IOP manual mode / N_act act OP
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 8541[0]
Description: For the manual mode: Sets the signal source for the speed setpoint.
SINAMICS G120X converter
876 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p8552 IOP speed unit / IOP speed unit
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 2 1
Description: Sets the unit for displaying and entering speeds.
Value: 1: Hz
2: rpm
p8558 BI: Select IOP manual mode / Sel IOP man mode
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
r8570[0...39] Macro drive object / Macro DO
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the macro file saved in the appropriate directory on the memory card/device memory.
Dependency: See also: p0015
Note
For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running.
r8571[0...39] Macro Binector Input (BI) / Macro BI
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the ACX file saved in the appropriate directory in the non-volatile memory.
Note
For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running.
r8572[0...39] Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for speed setpoints / Macro CI n_set
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the ACX file saved in the appropriate directory in the non-volatile memory.
Dependency: See also: p1000
Note
For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 877
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r8573[0...39] Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for torque setpoints / Macro CI M_set
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the ACX file saved in the appropriate directory in the non-volatile memory.
Note
For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running.
r8585 Macro execution actual / Macro executed
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the macro currently being executed on the drive object.
Dependency: See also: p0015, p1000, r8570, r8571, r8572, r8573
p8805 Identification and maintenance 4 configuration / I&M 4 config
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the configuration for the content of identification and maintenance 4 (I&M 4, p8809).
Value: 0: Standard value for I&M 4 (p8809)
1: User value for I&M 4 (p8809)
Dependency: For p8805 = 0, if the user writes at least one value in p8809[0...53], then p8805 is automatically set to = 1.
When p8805 is reset = 0, then the content of the factory setting is set in p8809.
Note
For p8805 = 0:
PROFINET I&M 4 (p8809) contains the information for the SI change tracking.
For p8805 = 1:
PROFINET I&M 4 (p8809) contains the values written by the user.
p8806[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 1 / I&M 1
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- -
Description: Parameters for the PROFINET data set "Identification and Maintenance 1" (I&M 1).
This information is known as "System identifier" and "Location identifier".
Dependency: See also: p8807, p8808
NOTICE
Only characters belonging to the standard ASCII character set may be used (32 dec to 126 dec).
SINAMICS G120X converter
878 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual.
For p8806[0...31]:
System identifier.
For p8806[32...53]:
Location identifier.
p8807[0...15] Identification and Maintenance 2 / I&M 2
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- -
Description: Parameters for the PROFINET data set "Identification and Maintenance 2" (I&M 2).
This information is known as "Installation date".
Dependency: See also: p8806, p8808
Note
An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual.
For p8807[0...15]:
Dates of installation or first commissioning of the device with the following format options (ASCII):
YYYY-MM-DD
or
YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm
- YYYY: year
- MM: month 01 ... 12
- DD: day 01 ... 31
- hh: hours 00 ... 23
- mm: minutes 00 ... 59
Separators must be placed between the individual data, i.e. a hyphen '-', space ' ' and colon ':'.
p8808[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 3 / I&M 3
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- -
Description: Parameters for the PROFINET data set "Identification and Maintenance 3" (I&M 3).
This information is known as "Supplementary information".
Dependency: See also: p8806, p8807
NOTICE
Only characters belonging to the standard ASCII character set may be used (32 dec to 126 dec).
Note
An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual.
For p8808[0...53]:
Any supplementary information and comments (ASCII).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 879
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p8809[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 4 / I&M 4
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0000 bin 1111 1111 bin 0000 bin
Description: Parameters for the PROFINET data set "Identification and Maintenance 4" (I&M 4).
This information is known as "Signature".
Dependency: This parameter is preassigned as standard (see note).
After writing information to p8809, p8805 is automatically set to = 1.
See also: p8805
Note
For p8805 = 0 (factory setting) the following applies:
Parameter p8809 contains the information described below.
For p8809[0...3]:
Contains the value from r9781[0] "SI change tracking checksum functional".
For p8809[4...7]:
Contains the value from r9782[0] "SI change tracking time stamp checksum functional".
For p8809[8...53]:
Reserved.
r8854 PROFINET state / PN state
G120X_PN Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 255 -
Description: State display for PROFINET.
Value: 0: No initialization
1: Fatal fault
2: Initialization
3: Send configuration
4: Receive configuration
5: Non-cyclic communication
6: Cyclic communications but no setpoints (stop/no clock cycle)
255: Cyclic communication
r8858[0...39] PROFINET read diagnostics channel / PN diag_chan read
G120X_PN Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the PROFINET diagnostics data.
Note
Only for internal Siemens diagnostics.
SINAMICS G120X converter
880 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r8859[0...7] PROFINET identification data / PN ident data
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the PROFINET identification data
Index: [0] = Version interface structure
[1] = Version interface driver
[2] = Company (Siemens = 42)
[3] = CB type
[4] = Firmware version
[5] = Firmware date (year)
[6] = Firmware date (day/month)
[7] = Firmware patch/hot fix
Note
Example:
r8859[0] = 100 --> version of the interface structure V1.00
r8859[1] = 111 --> version of the interface driver V1.11
r8859[2] = 42 --> SIEMENS
r8859[3] = 0
r8859[4] = 1300 --> first part, firmware version V13.00 (second part, see index 7)
r8859[5] = 2011 --> year 2011
r8859[6] = 2306 --> 23rd of June
r8859[7] = 1700 --> second part, firmware version (complete version: V13.00.17.00)
r8909 PN device ID / PN device ID
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the PROFINET Device ID.
Every SINAMICS device type has its own PROFINET Device ID and its own PROFINET GSD.
Note
List of the SINAMICS Device IDs:
0501 hex: S120/S150
0504 hex: G130/G150
050A hex: DC MASTER
050C hex: MV
050F hex: G120P
0510 hex: G120C
0511 hex: G120 CU240E-2
0512 hex: G120D
0513 hex: G120 CU250S-2 Vector
0514 hex: G110M
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 881
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p8920[0...239] PN Name of Station / PN Name Stat
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Sets the station name for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.
The actual station name is displayed in r8930.
Dependency: See also: p8925, r8930
Note
An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual.
The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated with p8925.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
PN: PROFINET
p8921[0...3] PN IP address / PN IP addr
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 255 0
Description: Sets the IP address for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.
The actual IP address is displayed in r8931.
Dependency: See also: p8925, r8931
Note
The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated with p8925.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p8922[0...3] PN Default Gateway / PN Def Gateway
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 255 0
Description: Sets the default gateway for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.
The actual standard gateway is displayed in r8932.
Dependency: See also: p8925, r8932
Note
The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated with p8925.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p8923[0...3] PN Subnet Mask / PN Subnet Mask
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 255 0
Description: Sets the subnet mask for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.
The actual subnet mask is displayed in r8933.
SINAMICS G120X converter
882 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Dependency: See also: p8925, r8933
Note
The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated with p8925.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p8924 PN DHCP Mode / PN DHCP mode
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 3 0
Description: Sets the DHCP mode for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.
The actual DHCP mode is displayed in r8934.
Value: 0: DHCP off
2: DHCP on, identification using MAC address
3: DHCP on, identification via name of station
Dependency: See also: p8925, r8934
NOTICE
When the DHCP mode is active (p8924 not equal to 0), then PROFINET communication via this interface is no longer
possible!
Note
The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated with p8925.
The active DHCP mode is displayed in parameter r8934.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p8925 Activate PN interface configuration / PN IF config
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 3 0
Description: Setting to activate the interface configuration for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.
p8925 is automatically set to 0 at the end of the operation.
Value: 0: No function
1: Reserved
2: Activate and save configuration
3: Delete configuration
Dependency: See also: p8920, p8921, p8922, p8923, p8924
NOTICE
When the DHCP mode is active (p8924 > 0), then PROFINET communication via this interface is no longer possible!
Note
For p8925 = 2:
The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is saved and activated after the next POWER ON.
For p8925 = 3:
The factory setting of the interface configuration is loaded after the next POWER ON.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 883
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r8930[0...239] PN Name of Station actual / PN Name Stat act
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the actual station name for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.
r8931[0...3] PN IP address actual / PN IP addr act
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 255 -
Description: Displays the actual IP address for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.
r8932[0...3] PN Default Gateway actual / PN Def Gateway act
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 255 -
Description: Displays the actual default gateway for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.
r8933[0...3] PN Subnet Mask actual / PN Subnet Mask act
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 255 -
Description: Displays the actual subnet mask for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.
r8934 PN DHCP Mode actual / PN DHCP Mode act
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 3 -
Description: Displays the actual DHCP mode for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.
Value: 0: DHCP off
2: DHCP on, identification using MAC address
3: DHCP on, identification via name of station
NOTICE
When the DHCP mode is active (parameter value not equal to 0), PROFINET communication via this interface is no
longer possible!
SINAMICS G120X converter
884 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r8935[0...5] PN MAC address / PN MAC addr
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0000 hex 00FF hex -
Description: Displays the MAC address for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit.
r8939 PN DAP ID / PN DAP ID
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the PROFINET Device Access Point ID (DAP ID) for the onboard PROFINET interface.
The combination of device ID (r8909) and DAP ID uniquely identifies a PROFINET access point.
Note
List of the SINAMICS DAP IDs:
20007 hex: CBE20 V4.5
20008 hex: CBE20 V4.6
20107 hex: CU310-2 PN V4.5
20108 hex: CU310-2 PN V4.6
20307 hex: CU320-2 PN V4.5
20308 hex: CU320-2 PN V4.6
20407 hex: CU230P-2 PN /CU240x-2 PN V4.5
20408 hex: CU230P-2 PN /CU240x-2 PN /CU250S-2 PN /G110M PN V4.6
20507 hex: CU250D-2 PN V4.5
20508 hex: CU250D-2 PN V4.6
p8980 Ethernet/IP profile / Eth/IP profile
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2473
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the profile for Ethernet/IP.
Value: 0: SINAMICS
1: ODVA AC/DC
Note
Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
ODVA: Open DeviceNet Vendor Association
p8981 Ethernet/IP ODVA STOP mode / Eth/IP ODVA STOP
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2473
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the STOP mode for the Ethernet/IP ODVA profile (p8980 = 1).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 885
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Value: 0: OFF1
1: OFF2
Dependency: See also: p8980
Note
Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p8982 Ethernet/IP ODVA speed scaling / Eth/IP ODVA n scal
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
123 133 128
Description: Sets the scaling for the speed for Ethernet/IP ODVA profile (p8980 = 1).
Value: 123: 32
124: 16
125: 8
126: 4
127: 2
128: 1
129: 0.5
130: 0.25
131: 0.125
132: 0.0625
133: 0.03125
Dependency: See also: p8980
Note
Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p8983 Ethernet/IP ODVA torque scaling / Eth/IP ODVA M scal
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
123 133 128
Description: Sets the scaling for the torque for Ethernet/IP ODVA profile (p8980 = 1).
Value: 123: 32
124: 16
125: 8
126: 4
127: 2
128: 1
129: 0.5
130: 0.25
131: 0.125
132: 0.0625
133: 0.03125
Dependency: See also: p8980
SINAMICS G120X converter
886 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p8991 USB memory access / USB mem acc
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 2 1
Description: Selects the storage medium for access via the USB mass storage.
Value: 1: Memory card
2: Flash r/w internal
Note
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p8999 USB functionality / USB Fct
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 3 3
Description: Setting the USB functionality.
Value: 1: USS commissioning via the virtual COM port
2: Only memory access
3: USB commissioning and memory access
Note
COMM: Commissioning.
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p9400 Safely remove memory card / Mem_card rem
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 100 0
Description: Setting and display when memory card is "removed safely".
Procedure:
Setting p9400 = 2 results in a value of 3
--> The memory card can be removed safely. After removal the value sets itself to 0 automatically.
Setting p9400 = 2 results in a value of 100
--> The memory card cannot be removed safely. Removal may destroy the file system on the memory card. It may be
necessary to set p9400 = 2 again.
Value: 0: No memory card inserted
1: Memory card inserted
2: Request "safe removal" of the memory card
3: "Safe removal" possible
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 887
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
100: "Safe removal" not possible due to access
Dependency: See also: r9401
NOTICE
Removing the memory card without a request (p9400 = 2) and confirmation (p9400 = 3) may destroy the file system
on the memory card. The memory card will then no longer work properly and must be replaced.
Note
The status when the memory card is being "removed safely" is shown in r9401.
For value = 0, 1, 3, 100:
These values can only be displayed, not set.
r9401.0...3 CO/BO: Safely remove memory card status / Mem_card rem stat
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status of the memory card.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Memory card inserted Yes No -
01 Memory card activated Yes No -
02 SIEMENS memory card Yes No -
03 Memory card as USB data storage medium from the PC used Yes No -
Dependency: See also: p9400
Note
For bit 01, 00:
Bit 1/0 = 0/0: No memory card inserted (corresponds to p9400 = 0).
Bit 1/0 = 0/1: "Safe removal" possible (corresponds to p9400 = 3).
Bit 1/0 = 1/0: Status not possible.
Bit 1/0 = 1/1: Memory card inserted (corresponds to p9400 = 1, 2, 100).
For bit 02, 00:
Bit 2/0 = 0/0: No memory card inserted.
Bit 2/0 = 0/1: Memory card inserted, but not a SIEMENS memory card.
Bit 2/0 = 1/0: Status not possible.
Bit 2/0 = 1/1: SIEMENS memory card inserted.
r9406[0...19] PS file parameter number parameter not transferred / PS par_no n transf
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the parameters that were not able to be transferred when reading the parameter back-up files (PS files) from
the non-volatile memory (e.g. memory card).
r9406[0] = 0
--> All of the parameter values were able to be transferred error-free.
r9406[0...x] > 0
--> indicates the parameter number in the following cases:
- parameter, whose value was not able to be completely accepted.
- indexed parameter, where at least 1 index was not able to be accepted. The first index that is not transferred is
displayed in r9407.
Dependency: See also: r9407, r9408
SINAMICS G120X converter
888 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
All indices from r9406 to r9408 designate the same parameter.
r9406[x] parameter number, parameter not accepted
r9407[x] parameter index, parameter not accepted
r9408[x] fault code, parameter not accepted
r9407[0...19] PS file parameter index parameter not transferred / PS parameter index
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the first index of the parameters that could not be transferred when the parameter backup files (PS files) were
read from the non-volatile memory (e.g. memory card).
If, from an indexed parameter, at least one index was not able to be transferred, then the parameter number is
displayed in r9406[n] and the first index that was not transferred is displayed in r9407[n].
r9406[0] = 0
--> All of the parameter values were able to be transferred error-free.
r9406[n] > 0
--> Displays r9407[n] the first index of the parameter number r9406[n] that was not transferred.
Dependency: See also: r9406, r9408
Note
All indices from r9406 to r9408 designate the same parameter.
r9406[x] parameter number, parameter not accepted
r9407[x] parameter index, parameter not accepted
r9408[x] fault code, parameter not accepted
r9408[0...19] PS file fault code parameter not transferred / PS fault code
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Only for internal Siemens service purposes.
Dependency: See also: r9406, r9407
Note
All indices from r9406 to r9408 designate the same parameter.
r9406[x] parameter number, parameter not accepted
r9407[x] parameter index, parameter not accepted
r9408[x] fault code, parameter not accepted
r9409 Number of parameters to be saved / Qty par to save
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the number of modified parameters and those that have still not be saved for this drive object.
Dependency: See also: p0971
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 889
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
NOTICE
Inherent to the system, the list of the parameters to be backed up is empty after the following actions:
- Download
- Warm restart
- Factory setting
In these cases, a new parameter backup must be initiated, which is then the starting point for the list of modified
parameters.
Note
The modified parameters that still need to be saved are internally listed in r9410 ... r9419.
r9451[0...29] Units changeover adapted parameters / Unit_chngov par
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the parameters whose parameter would have to be changed during a units changeover.
Dependency: See also: F07088
r9463 Actual macro / Actual macro
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 999999 -
Description: Displays the set valid macro.
Note
A value of 0 is displayed if a parameter set by a macro is changed.
p9484 BICO interconnections search signal source / BICO s_s srch
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the signal source (BO/CO parameter, BICO coded) to search in the signal sinks.
The signal source to be searched for is set in p9484 (BICO-coded) and the search result is specified using the number
(r9485) and the first index (r9486).
Dependency: See also: r9485, r9486
r9485 BICO interconnections signal source search count / BICO s_s srch qty
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the number of BICO interconnections to the signal sink being searched for.
Dependency: See also: p9484, r9486
SINAMICS G120X converter
890 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The signal source to be searched is set in p9484 (BICO-coded).
The search result is contained in r9482 and r9483 and is specified by the count (r9485) and the first index (r9486).
r9486 BICO interconnections signal source search first index / BICO s_s srch Idx
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the first index of the signal source being searched for.
The signal source to be searched for is set in p9484 (BICO-coded) and the search result is specified using the number
(r9485) and the first index (r9486).
Dependency: See also: p9484, r9485
Note
The signal source to be searched is set in p9484 (BICO-coded).
The search result is contained in r9482 and r9483 and is specified by the count (r9485) and the first index (r9486).
r9925[0...99] Firmware file incorrect / FW file incorr
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the directory and name of the file whose status as shipped from the factory was identified as impermissible.
Dependency: See also: r9926
See also: A01016
Note
The directory and name of the file is displayed in the ASCII code.
r9926 Firmware check status / FW check status
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status when the firmware is checked when the system is booted.
0: Firmware not yet checked.
1: Check running.
2: Check successfully completed.
3: Check indicates an error.
Dependency: See also: r9925
See also: A01016
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 891
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p9930[0...8] System logbook activation / SYSLOG activation
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 255 0
Description: Only for service purposes.
Index: [0] = System logbook stage (0: Not active)
[1] = COM2/COM1 (0: COM2, 1: COM1)
[2] = Activate file write (0: Not active)
[3] = Display time stamp (0: Not displayed)
[4...7] = Reserved
[8] = System logbook file size (stages, each 10 kB)
NOTICE
Before switching off the Control Unit, ensure that the system logbook is switched out (p9930[0] = 0).
If writing to the file is activated (p9930[2] = 1), writing to the file must be deactivated again before switching off the
Control Unit (p9930[2] = 0) in order to ensure that the system logbook has been completely written to the file.
p9931[0...180] System logbook module selection / SYSLOG mod select.
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Description: Only for service purposes.
p9932 Save system logbook EEPROM / SYSLOG EEPROM save
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 255 0
Description: Only for service purposes.
r9935.0 BO: POWER ON delay signal / POWER ON t_delay
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Display and binector output for a delay after POWER ON.
After switch-on, binector output r9935.0 is set with the start of the first sampling time and is again reset after approx.
100 ms.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 POWER ON delay signal High Low -
SINAMICS G120X converter
892 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r9975[0...7] System utilization measured / Sys util meas
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the measured system utilization.
The higher the value displayed, the higher the system utilization.
Index: [0] = Computing time utilization (min)
[1] = Computing time utilization (averaged)
[2] = Computing time utilization (max)
[3] = Largest total utilization (min)
[4] = Largest total utilization (averaged)
[5] = Largest total utilization (max)
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
Dependency: See also: A01053, F01054, F01205
Note
For index 3 ... 5:
The total utilizations are determined using all sampling times used. The largest total utilizations are mapped here. The
sampling time with the largest total utilization is displayed in r9979.
Total utilization:
Computing time load of sampling time involved including load from higher-priority sampling times (interrupts).
r9999[0...99] Software error internal supplementary diagnostics / SW_err int diag
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Diagnostics parameter to display additional information for internal software errors.
Note
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
p11000 BI: Free tec_ctrl 0 enable / Ftec0 enab
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to switch in/switch out the free technology controller 0.
1 signal: The technology controller is switched in.
0 signal: The technology controller is switched out.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 893
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p11026 Free tec_ctrl 0 unit selection / Ftec0 unit sel
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C2(5) Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 48 1
Description: Sets the unit for the parameters of the free technology controller 0.
Value: 1: %
2: 1 referred no dimensions
3: bar
4: °C
5: Pa
6: ltr/s
7: m³/s
8: ltr/min
9: m³/min
10: ltr/h
11: m³/h
12: kg/s
13: kg/min
14: kg/h
15: t/min
16: t/h
17: N
18: kN
19: Nm
20: psi
21: °F
22: gallon/s
23: inch³/s
24: gallon/min
25: inch³/min
26: gallon/h
27: inch³/h
28: lb/s
29: lb/min
30: lb/h
31: lbf
32: lbf ft
33: K
34: rpm
35: parts/min
36: m/s
37: ft³/s
38: ft³/min
39: BTU/min
40: BTU/h
41: mbar
42: inch wg
SINAMICS G120X converter
894 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
43: ft wg
44: m wg
45: % r.h.
46: g/kg
47: ppm
48: kg/cm²
Dependency: Only units of parameters with unit group 9_2 can be changed over using this parameter.
See also: p11027
p11027 Free tec_ctrl 0 unit reference quantity / Ftec0 unit ref
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.01 340.28235E36 1.00
Description: Sets the reference quantity for the unit of the parameters of the free technology controller 0.
When changing over using changeover parameter p11026 to absolute units, all of the parameters involved refer to the
reference quantity.
Dependency: See also: p11026
p11028 Free tec_ctrl 0 sampling time / Ftec0 t_samp
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4 2
Description: Sets the sampling time for the free technology controller 0.
Value: 0: Reserved
1: 128 ms
2: 256 ms
3: 512 ms
4: 1024 ms
r11049.0...11 CO/BO: Free tec_ctrl 0 status word / Ftec0 stat_word
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status word of the free technology controller 0.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Deactivated Yes No -
01 Limited Yes No -
08 Actual value at the minimum Yes No -
09 Actual value at the maximum Yes No -
10 Output at the minimum Yes No -
11 Output at the maximum Yes No -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 895
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p11053 CI: Free tec_ctrl 0 setpoint signal source / Ftec0 setp s_s
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint of the free technology controller 0.
p11057 Free tec_ctrl 0 setpoint ramp-up time / Ftec0 setp t_r-up
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-up time for the free technology controller 0.
Dependency: See also: p11058
Note
The ramp-up time is referred to 100 %.
p11058 Free tec_ctrl 0 setpoint ramp-down time / Ftec0 setp t_r-dn
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time for the free technology controller 0.
Dependency: See also: p11057
Note
The ramp-down time is referred to 100 %.
r11060 CO: Free tec_ctrl 0 setpoint after ramp-function generator / Ftec0 setp aft RFG
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_2 Unit selection: p11026 Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the setpoint after the ramp-function generator of the free technology controller 0.
p11063 Free tec_ctrl 0 system deviation inversion / Ftec0 sys_dev inv
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the inversion of the system deviation of the free technology controller 0.
The setting depends on the type of control loop.
Value: 0: No inversion
SINAMICS G120X converter
896 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
1: Inversion
CAUTION
If the actual value inversion is incorrectly selected, then the closed-loop control with the technology controller can
become unstable and can oscillate!
Note
The correct setting can be determined as follows:
- inhibit free technology controller (p11200 = 0).
- increase the motor speed and in so doing, measure the actual value signal (of the free technology controller).
- if the actual value increases with increasing motor speed, then deactivate inversion.
- if the actual value decreases with increasing motor speed, then activate inversion.
If value = 0:
The drive reduces the output speed when the actual value rises (e.g. for heating fans, intake pump, compressor).
If value = 1:
The drive increases the output speed when the actual value increases (e.g. for cooling fans, discharge pumps).
p11064 CI: Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value signal source / Ftec0 act v s_s
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the actual value of the free technology controller 0.
p11065 Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value smoothing time constant / Ftec0 act v T
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [s] 60.00 [s] 0.00 [s]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant (PT1) for the actual value of the free technology controller 0.
p11067 Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value upper limit / Ftec0 act v up lim
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_2 Unit selection: p11026 Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the upper limit for the actual value signal of the free technology controller 0.
Dependency: See also: p11064
p11068 Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value lower limit / Ftec0 act v lo lim
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_2 Unit selection: p11026 Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] -100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the lower limit for the actual value signal of the free technology controller 0.
Dependency: See also: p11064
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 897
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p11071 Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value inversion / Ftec0 act v inv
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the inversion of the actual value signal of the free technology controller 0.
Value: 0: No inversion
1: Inversion
r11072 CO: Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value after limiter / Ftec0 act v af lim
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_2 Unit selection: p11026 Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the actual value after the limiter of the free technology controller 0.
r11073 CO: Free tec_ctrl 0 system deviation / Ftec0 sys dev
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_2 Unit selection: p11026 Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the system deviation of the free technology controller 0.
p11074 Free tec_ctrl 0 differentiation time constant / Ftec0 D comp T
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the time constant for the differentiation (D component) of the free technology controller 0.
Note
Value = 0: Differentiation is deactivated.
p11080 Free tec_ctrl 0 proportional gain / Ftec0 Kp
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 1000.000 1.000
Description: Sets the proportional gain (P component) of the free technology controller 0.
Note
Value = 0: The proportional gain is deactivated.
SINAMICS G120X converter
898 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p11085 Free tec_ctrl 0 integral time / Ftec0 Tn
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 10000.000 [s] 30.000 [s]
Description: Sets the integral time (I component, integrating time constant) of the free technology controller 0.
Note
Value = 0: The integral time is disabled.
If the parameter is set to zero during operation, the I component retains its most recent value.
p11091 CO: Free tec_ctrl 0 limit maximum / Ftec0 lim max
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the maximum limit of the free technology controller 0.
Dependency: See also: p11092
Note
The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p11091 > p11092).
p11092 CO: Free tec_ctrl 0 limit minimum / Ftec0 lim min
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the minimum limit of the free technology controller 0.
Dependency: See also: p11091
Note
The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p11091 > p11092).
p11093 Free tec_ctrl 0 limit ramp-up/ramp-down time / Ftec0 lim r-u/r-dn
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [s] 100.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-up and ramp-down time for the maximum and minimum limit (p11091, p11092) of the free technology
controller 0.
Dependency: See also: p11091, p11092
Note
The ramp-up/ramp-down times are referred to 100%.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 899
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r11094 CO: Free tec_ctrl 0 output signal / Ftec0 out_sig
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the output signal of the free technology controller 0.
p11097 CI: Free tec_ctrl 0 limit maximum signal source / Ftec0 lim max s_s
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 11091[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the maximum limit of the free technology controller 0.
Dependency: See also: p11091
p11098 CI: Free tec_ctrl 0 limit minimum signal source / Ftec0 lim min s_s
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 11092[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the minimum limit of the free technology controller 0.
Dependency: See also: p11092
p11099 CI: Free tec_ctrl 0 limit offset signal source / Ftec0 lim offs
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the limit offset of the free technology controller 0.
p11100 BI: Free tec_ctrl 1 enable / Ftec1 enab
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to switch in/switch out the free technology controller 1.
1 signal: The technology controller is switched in.
0 signal: The technology controller is switched out.
SINAMICS G120X converter
900 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p11126 Free tec_ctrl 1 unit selection / Ftec1 unit sel
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C2(5) Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 48 1
Description: Sets the unit for the parameters of the free technology controller 1.
Value: 1: %
2: 1 referred no dimensions
3: bar
4: °C
5: Pa
6: ltr/s
7: m³/s
8: ltr/min
9: m³/min
10: ltr/h
11: m³/h
12: kg/s
13: kg/min
14: kg/h
15: t/min
16: t/h
17: N
18: kN
19: Nm
20: psi
21: °F
22: gallon/s
23: inch³/s
24: gallon/min
25: inch³/min
26: gallon/h
27: inch³/h
28: lb/s
29: lb/min
30: lb/h
31: lbf
32: lbf ft
33: K
34: rpm
35: parts/min
36: m/s
37: ft³/s
38: ft³/min
39: BTU/min
40: BTU/h
41: mbar
42: inch wg
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 901
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
43: ft wg
44: m wg
45: % r.h.
46: g/kg
47: ppm
48: kg/cm²
Dependency: Only units of parameters with unit group 9_3 can be changed over using this parameter.
See also: p11127
p11127 Free tec_ctrl 1 unit reference quantity / Ftec1 unit ref
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.01 340.28235E36 1.00
Description: Sets the reference quantity for the unit of the parameters of the free technology controller 1.
When changing over using changeover parameter p11126 to absolute units, all of the parameters involved refer to the
reference quantity.
Dependency: See also: p11126
p11128 Free tec_ctrl 1 sampling time / Ftec1 t_samp
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4 2
Description: Sets the sampling time for the free technology controller 1.
Value: 0: Reserved
1: 128 ms
2: 256 ms
3: 512 ms
4: 1024 ms
r11149.0...11 CO/BO: Free tec_ctrl 1 status word / Ftec1 stat_word
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status word of the free technology controller 1.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Deactivated Yes No -
01 Limited Yes No -
08 Actual value at the minimum Yes No -
09 Actual value at the maximum Yes No -
10 Output at the minimum Yes No -
11 Output at the maximum Yes No -
SINAMICS G120X converter
902 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p11153 CI: Free tec_ctrl 1 setpoint signal source / Ftec1 setp s_s
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint of the free technology controller 1.
p11157 Free tec_ctrl 1 setpoint ramp-up time / Ftec1 setp t_r-up
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-up time for the free technology controller 1.
Dependency: See also: p11158
Note
The ramp-up time is referred to 100 %.
p11158 Free tec_ctrl 1 setpoint ramp-down time / Ftec1 setp t_r-dn
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time of the free technology controller 1.
Dependency: See also: p11157
Note
The ramp-down time is referred to 100 %.
r11160 CO: Free tec_ctrl 1 setpoint after ramp-function generator / Ftec1 setp aft RFG
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_3 Unit selection: p11126 Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the setpoint after the ramp-function generator of the free technology controller 1.
p11163 Free tec_ctrl 1 system deviation inversion / Ftec1 sys_dev inv
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the inversion of the system deviation of the free technology controller 1.
The setting depends on the type of control loop.
Value: 0: No inversion
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 903
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
1: Inversion
CAUTION
If the actual value inversion is incorrectly selected, then the closed-loop control with the technology controller can
become unstable and can oscillate!
Note
The correct setting can be determined as follows:
- inhibit free technology controller (p11200 = 0).
- increase the motor speed and in so doing, measure the actual value signal (of the free technology controller).
- if the actual value increases with increasing motor speed, then deactivate inversion.
- if the actual value decreases with increasing motor speed, then activate inversion.
If value = 0:
The drive reduces the output speed when the actual value rises (e.g. for heating fans, intake pump, compressor).
If value = 1:
The drive increases the output speed when the actual value increases (e.g. for cooling fans, discharge pumps).
p11164 CI: Free tec_ctrl 1 actual value signal source / Ftec1 act v s_s
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the actual value of the free technology controller 1.
p11165 Free tec_ctrl 1 actual value smoothing time constant / Ftec1 act v T
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [s] 60.00 [s] 0.00 [s]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant (PT1) for the actual value of the free technology controller 1.
p11167 Free tec_ctrl 1 actual value upper limit / Ftec1 act v up lim
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_3 Unit selection: p11126 Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the upper limit for the actual value signal of the free technology controller 1.
Dependency: See also: p11164
p11168 Free tec_ctrl 1 actual value lower limit / Ftec1 act v lo lim
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_3 Unit selection: p11126 Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] -100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the lower limit for the actual value signal of the free technology controller 1.
Dependency: See also: p11164
SINAMICS G120X converter
904 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p11171 Free tec_ctrl 1 actual value inversion / Ftec1 act v inv
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the inversion of the actual value signal of the free technology controller 1.
Value: 0: No inversion
1: Inversion
r11172 CO: Free tec_ctrl 1 actual value after limiter / Ftec1 act v af lim
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_3 Unit selection: p11126 Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the actual value after the limiter of the free technology controller 1.
r11173 CO: Free tec_ctrl 1 system deviation / Ftec1 sys dev
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_3 Unit selection: p11126 Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the system deviation of the free technology controller 1.
p11174 Free tec_ctrl 1 differentiation time constant / Ftec1 D comp T
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the time constant for the differentiation (D component) of the free technology controller 1.
Note
Value = 0: Differentiation is deactivated.
p11180 Free tec_ctrl 1 proportional gain / Ftec1 Kp
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 1000.000 1.000
Description: Sets the proportional gain (P component) of the free technology controller 1.
Note
Value = 0: The proportional gain is deactivated.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 905
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p11185 Free tec_ctrl 1 integral time / Ftec1 Tn
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 10000.000 [s] 30.000 [s]
Description: Sets the integral time (I component, integrating time constant) of the free technology controller 1.
Note
Value = 0: The integral time is disabled.
If the parameter is set to zero during operation, the I component retains its most recent value.
p11191 CO: Free tec_ctrl 1 limit maximum / Ftec1 lim max
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the maximum limit of the free technology controller 1.
Dependency: See also: p11192
Note
The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p11191 > p11192).
p11192 CO: Free tec_ctrl 1 limit minimum / Ftec1 lim min
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the minimum limit of the free technology controller 1.
Dependency: See also: p11191
Note
The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p11191 > p11192).
p11193 Free tec_ctrl 1 limit ramp-up/ramp-down time / Ftec1 lim r-u/r-dn
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [s] 100.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-up and ramp-down time for the maximum and minimum limit (p11191, p11192) of the free technology
controller 1.
Dependency: See also: p11191, p11192
Note
The ramp-up/ramp-down times are referred to 100%.
SINAMICS G120X converter
906 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r11194 CO: Free tec_ctrl 1 output signal / Ftec1 out_sig
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the output signal of the free technology controller 1.
p11197 CI: Free tec_ctrl 1 limit maximum signal source / Ftec1 lim max s_s
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 11191[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the maximum limit of the free technology controller 1.
Dependency: See also: p11191
p11198 CI: Free tec_ctrl 1 limit minimum signal source / Ftec1 lim min s_s
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 11192[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the minimum limit of the free technology controller 1.
Dependency: See also: p11192
p11199 CI: Free tec_ctrl 1 limit offset signal source / Ftec1 lim offs
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the limit offset of the free technology controller 1.
p11200 BI: Free tec_ctrl 2 enable / Ftec2 enab
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to switch in/switch out the free technology controller 2.
1 signal: The technology controller is switched in.
0 signal: The technology controller is switched out.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 907
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p11226 Free tec_ctrl 2 unit selection / Ftec2 unit sel
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: C2(5) Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 48 1
Description: Sets the unit for the parameters of the free technology controller 2.
Value: 1: %
2: 1 referred no dimensions
3: bar
4: °C
5: Pa
6: ltr/s
7: m³/s
8: ltr/min
9: m³/min
10: ltr/h
11: m³/h
12: kg/s
13: kg/min
14: kg/h
15: t/min
16: t/h
17: N
18: kN
19: Nm
20: psi
21: °F
22: gallon/s
23: inch³/s
24: gallon/min
25: inch³/min
26: gallon/h
27: inch³/h
28: lb/s
29: lb/min
30: lb/h
31: lbf
32: lbf ft
33: K
34: rpm
35: parts/min
36: m/s
37: ft³/s
38: ft³/min
39: BTU/min
40: BTU/h
41: mbar
42: inch wg
SINAMICS G120X converter
908 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
43: ft wg
44: m wg
45: % r.h.
46: g/kg
47: ppm
48: kg/cm²
Dependency: Only units of parameters with unit group 9_4 can be changed over using this parameter.
See also: p11227
p11227 Free tec_ctrl 2 unit reference quantity / Ftec2 unit ref
Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.01 340.28235E36 1.00
Description: Sets the reference quantity for the unit of the parameters of the free technology controller 2.
When changing over using changeover parameter p11226 to absolute units, all of the parameters involved refer to the
reference quantity.
Dependency: See also: p11226
p11228 Free tec_ctrl 2 sampling time / Ftec2 t_samp
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 4 2
Description: Sets the sampling time for the free technology controller 2.
Value: 0: Reserved
1: 128 ms
2: 256 ms
3: 512 ms
4: 1024 ms
r11249.0...11 CO/BO: Free tec_ctrl 2 status word / Ftec2 stat_word
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status word of the free technology controller 2.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Deactivated Yes No -
01 Limited Yes No -
08 Actual value at the minimum Yes No -
09 Actual value at the maximum Yes No -
10 Output at the minimum Yes No -
11 Output at the maximum Yes No -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 909
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p11253 CI: Free tec_ctrl 2 setpoint signal source / Ftec2 setp s_s
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint of the free technology controller 2.
p11257 Free tec_ctrl 2 setpoint ramp-up time / Ftec2 setp t_r-up
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-up time for the free technology controller 2.
Dependency: See also: p11258
Note
The ramp-up time is referred to 100 %.
p11258 Free tec_ctrl 2 setpoint ramp-down time / Ftec2 setp t_r-dn
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time of the free technology controller 2.
Dependency: See also: p11257
Note
The ramp-down time is referred to 100 %.
r11260 CO: Free tec_ctrl 2 setpoint after ramp-function generator / Ftec2 setp aft RFG
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_4 Unit selection: p11226 Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the setpoint after the ramp-function generator of the free technology controller 2.
p11263 Free tec_ctrl 2 system deviation inversion / Ftec2 sys_dev inv
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the inversion of the system deviation of the free technology controller 2.
The setting depends on the type of control loop.
Value: 0: No inversion
SINAMICS G120X converter
910 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
1: Inversion
CAUTION
If the actual value inversion is incorrectly selected, then the closed-loop control with the technology controller can
become unstable and can oscillate!
Note
The correct setting can be determined as follows:
- inhibit free technology controller (p11200 = 0).
- increase the motor speed and in so doing, measure the actual value signal (of the free technology controller).
- if the actual value increases with increasing motor speed, then deactivate inversion.
- if the actual value decreases with increasing motor speed, then activate inversion.
If value = 0:
The drive reduces the output speed when the actual value rises (e.g. for heating fans, intake pump, compressor).
If value = 1:
The drive increases the output speed when the actual value increases (e.g. for cooling fans, discharge pumps).
p11264 CI: Free tec_ctrl 2 actual value signal source / Ftec2 act v s_s
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the actual value of the free technology controller 2.
p11265 Free tec_ctrl 2 actual value smoothing time constant / Ftec2 act v T
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [s] 60.00 [s] 0.00 [s]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant (PT1) for the actual value of the free technology controller 2.
p11267 Free tec_ctrl 2 actual value upper limit / Ftec2 act v up lim
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_4 Unit selection: p11226 Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the upper limit for the actual value signal of the free technology controller 2.
Dependency: See also: p11264
p11268 Free tec_ctrl 2 actual value lower limit / Ftec2 act v lo lim
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_4 Unit selection: p11226 Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] -100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the lower limit for the actual value signal of the free technology controller 2.
Dependency: See also: p11264
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 911
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p11271 Free tec_ctrl 2 actual value inversion / Ftec2 act v inv
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the inversion of the actual value signal of the free technology controller 2.
Value: 0: No inversion
1: Inversion
r11272 CO: Free tec_ctrl 2 actual value after limiter / Ftec2 act v af lim
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_4 Unit selection: p11226 Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the actual value after the limiter of the free technology controller 2.
r11273 CO: Free tec_ctrl 2 system deviation / Ftec2 sys dev
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_4 Unit selection: p11226 Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the system deviation of the free technology controller 2.
p11274 Free tec_ctrl 2 differentiation time constant / Ftec2 D comp T
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the time constant for the differentiation (D component) of the free technology controller 2.
Note
Value = 0: Differentiation is deactivated.
p11280 Free tec_ctrl 2 proportional gain / Ftec2 Kp
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 1000.000 1.000
Description: Sets the proportional gain (P component) of the free technology controller 2.
Note
Value = 0: The proportional gain is deactivated.
SINAMICS G120X converter
912 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p11285 Free tec_ctrl 2 integral time / Ftec2 Tn
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 10000.000 [s] 30.000 [s]
Description: Sets the integral time (I component, integrating time constant) of the free technology controller 2.
Note
Value = 0: The integral time is disabled.
If the parameter is set to zero during operation, the I component retains its most recent value.
p11291 CO: Free tec_ctrl 2 limit maximum / Ftec2 lim max
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the maximum limit of the free technology controller 2.
Dependency: See also: p11292
Note
The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p11291 > p11292).
p11292 CO: Free tec_ctrl 2 limit minimum / Ftec2 lim min
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the minimum limit of the free technology controller 2.
Dependency: See also: p11291
Note
The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p11291 > p11292).
p11293 Free tec_ctrl 2 limit ramp-up/ramp-down time / Ftec2 lim r-u/r-dn
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [s] 100.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-up and ramp-down time for the maximum and minimum limit (p11291, p11292) of the free technology
controller 2.
Dependency: See also: p11291, p11292
Note
The ramp-up/ramp-down times are referred to 100%.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 913
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r11294 CO: Free tec_ctrl 2 output signal / Ftec2 out_sig
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Display and connector output for the output signal of the free technology controller 2.
p11297 CI: Free tec_ctrl 2 limit maximum signal source / Ftec2 lim max s_s
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 11291[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the maximum limit of the free technology controller 2.
Dependency: See also: p11291
p11298 CI: Free tec_ctrl 2 limit minimum signal source / Ftec2 lim min s_s
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 11292[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the minimum limit of the free technology controller 2.
Dependency: See also: p11292
p11299 CI: Free tec_ctrl 2 limit offset signal source / Ftec2 lim offs
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 7030
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the limit offset of the free technology controller 2.
r29018[0...1] Application firmware version / APP FW version
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the application firmware version.
Index: [0] = Firmware version
[1] = Build increment number
SINAMICS G120X converter
914 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p29520 Multi-pump control enable / Mpc enab
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Enables the multi-pump control function.
0: Multi-pump control inhibited
1: Multi-pump control enabled
Value: 0: Disable MPC
1: Enable MPC
Dependency: The "Multi-pump control" function is only available for induction motors.
The "Multi-pump control" function is not supported on G120X converter variants of power rating 30kW or above.
Note
when P29520=0, P29521 can not set to a !0 value.
when P29520 value change from 1 to 0, P29521 value will change to 0 automatically
p29521 Multi-pump control motor configuration / Mpc mtr num config
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 6 0
Description: Selects the number of motors that will be used as multi-pump control.
Value: 0: NONE
1: M1=1X
2: M1=1X,M2=1X
3: M1=1X,M2=1X,M3=1X
4: M1=1X,M2=1X,M3=1X,M4=1X
5: M1=1X,M2=1X,M3=1X,M4=1X,M5=1X
6: M1=1X,M2=1X,M3=1X,M4=1X,M5=1X,M6=1X
Note
1X means motor power that configured in P307.
Currently multi-pump control only support that all motors should have the same power.
p29522 Multi-pump control motor selection mode / Mpc mtr sel mode
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Parameter for selecting the control mode for swtiching-in and switching-out motors
Value: 0: Fixed sequence
1: Absolute operating hours
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 915
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
For p29522=0:
Motor selection for switching-in/switching-out follows a fixed sequence and is dependent on the multi-pump control
configuratin(p29521).
For p29522=1:
Motor selection for switching-in/switching-out is derived from the operating hours counter p29530.When switching-in,
the motor with the least operating hours is connected.When switching-out,the motor with the most operating hours is
disconnected.
p29523 Multi-pump control switch-in threshold / Mpc sw_in thr
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 20.0 [%]
Description: Threshold value for the delayed switching-in or switching-out of motors.
Motor switching-in is activated if the maximum speed is reached and the wait time in p29524 has expired.
Dependency: refer to P29524
p29524 Multi-pump control switch-in delay / Mpc_ctrl t_in_del
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [s] 650 [s] 30 [s]
Description: Additional delay time for staging motors after the system deviation of the technology controller has exceeded the
threshold value p29523 and the motor has reached the maximum speed.
Dependency: refer to P29523
Note
If the deviation at the technology controller input exceeds the overcontrol threshold p29526, the delay time is bypassed.
p29525 Multi-pump control switch-out delay / Mpc sw_out del
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [s] 650 [s] 30 [s]
Description: Additional delay time for switch-out motor after the system deviation of the technology controller has exceeded the
threshold p29523 and the motor has reached the speed threshold p1080+P29528.
Dependency: Refer to P29523,P29526
Note
If the deviation at the technology controller input exceeds the overcontrol threshold p29526, the delay time is bypassed.
If the hibernation mode is active, ensure that p2391 is longer than p29525 to avoid false operation of hibernation.
p29526 Multi-pump control overcontrol threshold / Mpc overctrl thr
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 25.0 [%]
SINAMICS G120X converter
916 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Sets the threshold value for instaneous switching-in or switching-out motors.
Note
If the PID error rises above the multi-pump control overcontrol threshold p29526, the converter skips the switch-in delay
time and performs the switch-in operation immediately.
If the PID error drops below the multi-pump control overcontrol threshold -p29526, the converter skips the switch-out
delay and performs the switch-out operation immediately.
p29527 Multi-pump control interlocking time / Mpc t_interl
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 [s] 650 [s] 0 [s]
Description: Interlocking time during which, following the connection or disconnection of a motor, no further motors are connected
or disconnected using the multi-control control. This avoids duplicate switching operations.
p29528 Multi-pump control switch-out speed offset / Mpc sw_out offset
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.0 [rpm] 21000.0 [rpm] 100.0 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed offset which pluses p1080 as the speed threshold.
If the system deviation of the technology controller has exceeded the threshold p29523 for p29525s (or exceeded the
threshold p29526) and the motor has reached the speed threshold p1080+p29528, a motor will be switched out.
r29529.0...19 CO/BO: Multi-pump control status word / Mpc ZSW
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status word of the multi-pump control
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Start motor 1 Yes No -
01 Start motor 2 Yes No -
02 Start motor 3 Yes No -
03 Start motor 4 Yes No -
04 Start motor 5 Yes No -
05 Start motor 6 Yes No -
06 Reserved -
07 Reserved -
08 Reserved -
09 Reserved -
10 Reserved -
11 Reserved -
12 Reserved -
13 Reserved -
14 Reserved -
15 Reserved -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 917
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
16 Switch-in/switch-out active Yes No -
17 All motors active Yes No -
18 Switch Over not possible Yes No -
19 Alarm active Yes No -
p29530[0...5] Multi-pump control absolute operating hours / Mpc op_hrs
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [h] 340.28235E36 [h] 0.00 [h]
Description: Displays the total operating hours for motors.
The display can only be reset to zero.
Index: [0] = Motor 1 operating hours
[1] = Motor 2 operating hours
[2] = Motor 3 operating hours
[3] = Motor 4 operating hours
[4] = Motor 5 operating hours
[5] = Motor 6 operating hours
Note
Absolute operating hours means the total operating hours since the motor's initial operation.
p29531 Multi-pump control maximum time for continuous operation / Mpc t_max
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.01 [h] 100000.00 [h] 24.00 [h]
Description: Time limit for the continuous operation of motors.
Continuous operation is measured starting from when a motor is ON and It ends when a motor is OFF.
p29533 Multi-pump control switch-off sequence / Mpc sw_off seq
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Selection of the response used to stop the motors when the OFF command is sent.
For p29533 = 1:
when OFF1:
In this mode the motors connecting with the mains stop one at a time separated by one ramp down delay in the reverse
order in which they were switched on. The converter controlled motor stops with a normal ramp down (OFF1) which
commences when the first motor connecting with the mains is switched off.
The time set in p29537 is applied as a delay time between the disconnection of each line motor.
Then speed-regulated motor is ramp down following OFF1 behavior.
In the case of OFF2 and OFF3, the motors connecting to the line are switched off immediately with the OFF
command(same behavior as with p29533=0).Then the converter controlled motor is ramp down following OFF2 or
OFF3 behavior.
Value: 0: Halt normal
1: Halt sequential
SINAMICS G120X converter
918 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p29537 Multi-pump control disconnection lockout time / Mpc t_disc_lockout
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [s] 999.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Multi-pump control-holding time switch-out: The time set in p29537 is applied as a delay time between the
disconnection of each motor.
r29538 Multi-pump control variable-speed motor / Mpc driven mtr
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the No. of the motor which is driven by drive.
Valid Value :
1-6
p29539 Multi-pump control pump switchover enable / Mpc sw-over enab
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Enables the multi-pump control pump switchover function.
0: Pump switchover function inhibited
1: Pump switchover function enabled
Value: 0: Disable switchover
1: Enable switchover
Note
With pump switchover enabled, the converter monitors the operation status of all running pumps.
If the continuous operating hours of the pump in converter operation exceed the threshold, the converter switches off
the pump and then switches in an idle pump to keep constant output power.
If the continuous operating hours of a pump in mains operation exceed the threshold, the converter switches off the
pump, switches the converter-controlled pump to mains operation, and switches in an idle pump to run in converter
operation to keep constant output power.
p29540 Multi-pump control service mode enable / Mpc SerMode enab
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Enables the multi-pump control service mode.
0: Service mode inhibited
1: Service mode enabled
Value: 0: Disable MPC
1: Enable MPC
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 919
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
When a pump is in service mode, the converter locks the corresponding relay. Then you can perform troubleshooting
of this pump without interrupting the operation of other pumps.
p29542.0...5 CO/BO: Multi-pump control service mode interlock manually / Mpc ser_interl
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the service mode manually.
When a motor fault is activated or a motor is not to run, user can set the corresponding bit to 1 to lock it.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Motor 1 locked Yes No -
01 Motor 2 locked Yes No -
02 Motor 3 locked Yes No -
03 Motor 4 locked Yes No -
04 motor 5 locked Yes No -
05 motor 6 locked Yes No -
p29543[0...5] BI: Multi-pump control motor under repair / Mpc mtr_und_ser
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - [0] 29542.0
[1] 29542.1
[2] 29542.2
[3] 29542.3
[4] 29542.4
[5] 29542.5
Description: Sets the signal source(digital input or p29542) for service mode.
The signal indicates the motor/motors which is/are under repair or locked manually.
Index: [0] = Motor 1 under repair
[1] = Motor 2 under repair
[2] = Motor 3 under repair
[3] = Motor 4 under repair
[4] = Motor 5 under repair
[5] = Motor 6 under repair
r29544[0...5] Multi-pump control index of motors under repair / Mpc mtr und repair
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
SINAMICS G120X converter
920 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Description: Displays the motors which are interlocked/under repair.
Value:
r29544.0 = 1: Motor 1 is interlocked / under repair
r29544.1 = 1: Motor 2 is interlocked / under repair
r29544.2 = 1: Motor 3 is interlocked / under repair
r29544.3 = 1: Motor 4 is interlocked / under repair
r29544.4 = 1: Motor 5 is interlocked / under repair
r29544.5 = 1: Motor 6 is interlocked / under repair
Index: [0] = Motor 1 under repair
[1] = Motor 2 under repair
[2] = Motor 3 under repair
[3] = Motor 4 under repair
[4] = Motor 5 under repair
[5] = Motor 6 under repair
r29545 CO/BO: Multi-pump control bypass command / Mpc bypass cmd
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the signal source for the control command to the bypass.It is BiCo to p1266.
Note
The "Bypass" function switches the motor between converter and line operation.
p29546 Multi-pump control deviation threshold / Mpc devia thres
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 20.00 [%]
Description: If the system deviation (p2273) at the PID technology controller exceeds the threshold (p29546) and no more motor
is available, alarm A52963 occurs.
p29547[0...5] Multi-pump control continuous operating hours / Mpc Conti_oper_hrs
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [h] 1000000.00 [h] 0.00 [h]
Description: Displays the continuous operating hours for the motors.
The display can only be reset to zero.
Index: [0] = Motor 1 operating hours
[1] = Motor 2 operating hours
[2] = Motor 3 operating hours
[3] = Motor 4 operating hours
[4] = Motor 5 operating hours
[5] = Motor 6 operating hours
Note
Continuous operation is measured starting from when a motor is ON. It ends when a motor is OFF.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 921
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r29549 CO/BO: Multi-pump control feedback signal for contactor / Mpc fdb signal
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Bico to p1269[0] as a feedback signal
p29570[0...n] Ramp-up scaling 1 / RmpUpScaling1
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [%] 9999999.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the ramp-up scaling 1 for the dual ramp function [%].
Note
The linear acceleration time from speed 0 to speed p29571 can be calculated via formula
(p29571/p1082)*p1120*p29570.
If p1130 is not equal to 0, the time will be adapted.
p29571[0...n] Threshold speed 2 / Thresh_2_Ramp
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 30.00 [rpm]
Description: Defines the threshold 2 for comparing the speed actual value with the speed threshold.
p29572[0...n] Ramp-up scaling 2 / RmpUpScaling2
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [%] 9999999.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the ramp-up scaling 2 for the dual ramp function [%].
Note
The linear acceleration time from speed p29571 to constant speed V can be calculated via formula
((V-p29571)/p1082)*p1120*p29572.
If p1130 is not equal to 0, the time will be adapted.
p29573[0...n] Ramp-down scaling 1 / RmpDnScaling1
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [%] 9999999.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Defines the ramp-down scaling 1 for the dual ramp function [%].
SINAMICS G120X converter
922 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
The linear deceleration time from constant speed V to speed p29574 can be calculated via formula ((V-p29574)/
p1082)*p1121*p29573.
If p1131 is not equal to 0, the time will be adapted.
p29574[0...n] Threshold speed 3 / Thresh_3_Ramp
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 30.00 [rpm]
Description: Defines the threshold 3 for comparing the speed actual value to the speed threshold.
p29575[0...n] Ramp-down scaling 2 / RmpDnScaling2
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [%] 9999999.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the ramp-down scaling 2 for dual ramp function [%].
Note
The linear deceleration time from speed p29574 to speed 0 can be calculated via formula (p29574/
p1082)*p1121*p29575.
If p1131 is not equal to 0, the time will be adapted.
r29576 CO: Ramp-up scaling output / RmpUpScale output
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the actual output of the ramp-up scaling.
r29577 CO: Ramp-down scaling output / RmpDnScale output
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the actual output of the ramp-down scaling.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 923
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p29578[0...n] CI: Ramp-up scaling input / RmpUp scale input
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the ramp-up time of the ramp-function generator when p1138 is BICO to r29576.
When the dual ramp functionality is not enabled, p29578 will function.
p29579[0...n] CI: Ramp-down scaling input / RmpDn scale input
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the ramp-down time of the ramp-function generator when p1139 is BICO to r29577.
When the dual ramp functionality is not enabled, p29579 will function.
p29580[0...n] BI: Dual ramp enable / DualRmp En
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to enable the dual ramp function.
p29590[0...n] Deragging mode / Derag mod
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 3 0
Description: Select the startup mode of deragging, if the condition is met with selected mode, deragging will perform when drive
start to run, then switch to user setpoint automatically.
Value: 0: deragging disable
1: enabled on first run after power up
2: enabled on every run
3: enabled by BI input
Note
If deragging is enabled (P29590 > 0), make sure that reverse direction is not inhibited, i.e. P1110 = 0;
If P29590=3, enable source is defined by P29591.
SINAMICS G120X converter
924 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p29591[0...n] BI: Deragging enable / Derag en
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: The source of deragging enable.
Note
Effective only if mode set as BI input(p29590=3).
p29592[0...n] Deragging forward speed / Derag fw spd
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 500.00 [rpm]
Description: Defines forward speed setpoint for deragging.
Note
The actual speed setpoint is limited by minimal(P1080) and maximum(P1082) value.
If both forward speed(P29592) and the time of duration(P29596) are 0, forward rotation will not perform in each cycle.
p29593[0...n] Deragging reverse speed / Derag rev spd
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 500.00 [rpm]
Description: Defines reverse speed setpoint for deragging.
Note
The actual speed setpoint is limited by minimal(P1080) and maximum(P1082) value.
If both reverse speed(P29593) and the time of duration(P29597) are 0, reverse rotation will not perform in each cycle.
p29594[0...n] Deragging ramp up time / Derag rup
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [s] 1000.00 [s] 5.00 [s]
Description: Defines ramp time from 0 to forward/reverse speed setpoint for deragging.
Note
Too short ramp up time for deragging may trigger F7902, and speed jump may occur.
The minimal time is upon the inertia of motor and power stage.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 925
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p29595[0...n] Deragging ramp down time / Derag rdn
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [s] 1000.00 [s] 5.00 [s]
Description: Defines ramp time from forward/reverse speed setpoint to 0 for deragging.
Note
Speed jump may occur if ramp down time is too short, and that may trigger the fault of DC-link overvoltage.
The minimal time is upon the inertia of motor and power stage.
p29596[0...n] Deragging forward time / Derag fw time
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [s] 1000.00 [s] 5.00 [s]
Description: Defines the duration time at each forward speed for deragging.
p29597[0...n] Deragging reverse time / Derag rev tim
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [s] 1000.00 [s] 5.00 [s]
Description: Defines the duration time at reverse speed for deragging.
p29598[0...n] Number of deragging cycles / Derag cycs
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 999 1
Description: The number of the deragging cycle is repeated
p29610[0...n] Pipe filling enable / PF en
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Enable the pipe filling function.
Value: 0: The pipe filling function is disabled
1: The pipe filling function is enabled
Note
The pipe filling function allows the converter to fill an empty pipe slowly when the converter works for the first time after
each power-up.
SINAMICS G120X converter
926 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p29611[0...n] Pipe filling mode / PF mode
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Selects the mode for pipe filling.
Value: 0: The pipe is filled based on specified time
1: The pipe is filled based on the actual pressure feedback
p29612[0...n] Pipe filling speed / PF spd
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 900.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed applied to the motor for the pipe filling.
p29613[0...n] Pipe filling time / PF time
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.50 [s] 10000.00 [s] 50.00 [s]
Description: Sets the duration time for the pipe filling.
p29614[0...n] Pipe filling threshold / PF thresh
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 10.00 [%]
Description: Defines the threshold for stopping the pipe filling. The filling stops if the actual PID feedback reaches the threshold.
It's used when p29611=1.
p29615[0...n] Pipe filling monitoring time / PF mon time
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [s] 100.00 [s] 0.00 [s]
Description: Monitors the duration time for actual pressure (r2272) >= the threshold (p29614). The pipe filling stops if the duration
time is reached.
Note
It is used when p29611 = 1.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 927
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p29622[0...n] BI: Frost protection enable / Fro en
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to enable frost protection. If the binary input is equal to 1, then protection will be initiated. If the
converter is stopped and the protection signal becomes active, protection measure is applied as follows:
- If p29623 != 0, frost protection is activated by applying the specified speed to the motor;
- If p29623 = 0, and p29624 != 0, condensation protection is activated by applying the specified current to the motor.
Note
The protection function may be overridden under the following conditions:
- If the converter is running and the protection signal becomes active, the signal is ignored.
- If the converter is turning a motor due to active protection signal and a RUN command is received, RUN command
overrides the frost protection signal.
- Issuing an OFF command while protection is active will stop the motor.
p29623[0...n] Frost protection speed / Fro spd
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Specifies the speed applied to the motor when frost protection is active.
And this parameter can't be changed when the frost or condensation function is active.
Dependency: See also p29622.
p29624[0...n] Condensation protection current / Cond current
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.000 [%] 100.000 [%] 30.000 [%]
Description: Specifies the DC current (as a percentage of rated current) applied to the motor when condensation protection is
active.
Dependency: See also p29622.
Note
The change to the current becomes effective the next time condensation protection is active.
p29625[0...n] Cavitation protection enable / Cavi en
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 2 0
Description: Enables the cavitation protection function. A fault/alarm is generated when cavitation conditions are deemed to be
present.
Value: 0: The cavitation protection function is deactivated
1: The cavitation protection function triggers fault F52960
2: The cavitation protection function triggers warning A52961
SINAMICS G120X converter
928 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
p29626[0...n] Cavitation protection threshold / Cavi thresh
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: 9_1 Unit selection: p0595 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 40.00 [%]
Description: Defines the feedback threshold (as a percentage) for triggering a fault/alarm.
p29627[0...n] Cavitation protection time / Cavi time
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
1 [s] 65000 [s] 30 [s]
Description: Sets the time for which cavitation conditions have to be present before a fault/alarm is triggered.
r29629.0...2 CO/BO: Status word: application / App status word
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the status word for application:
bit 0:
= 1, pipe filling is active;
= 0, pipe filling is not active.
bit 2/1:
= 0/1, condesation protection is active;
= 1/1, frost protection is active;
= 0/0, frost and condensation protections are not active;
= 1/0, not used.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Pipe filling Active Inactive -
01 Condensation protection Active Inactive -
02 Frost protection Active Inactive -
p29630 Keep-running operation enable / KeepRun
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 1 0
Description: Sets the signal source to enable converter keep-running operation. This attempts to prevent the converter from
tripping by enabling all possible existing de-rating features and the automatic restart function.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 929
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
p29630 = 1
Sets the following parameter values to minimize likelihood of a trip:
p0290 = 2 (power unit overload reaction: reduce pulse frequency, output current and output frequency)
p1210 = 4 (restart after line supply failure without additional start attempts)
P1211 = 10 (number of times converter will attempt to restart)
p1240 = 2 and p1280 = 2 (configuration of Vdc controller: Vdc_max controller and kinetic buffering (KIB) enabled)
p29630 = 0
Resets the parameters to their default values:
p0290 = 2 (power unit overload reaction: reduce pulse frequency, output current and output frequency)
p1210 = 0 (automatic restart function: trip reset after power on, p1211 disabled)
p1211 = 3 (number of times converter will attempt to restart)
p1240 = 1 and p1280 = 1(configuration of Vdc controller: Vdc_max controller enabled)
p29631[0...4] Flow meter pump power / FlowM_power
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [kW] 340.28235E36 [kW] 0.00 [kW]
Description: Determines the power points for flow estimation.
Five power values are put into the indexes of this parameter. These values should be spread across the full power
range of the converter.
User should guarantee values in all indexes is increasing in sequence (p29631[0] <= p29631 [1] <= p29631[2] <= ...).
Otherwise the calculated flow value will be 0.
p29632[0...4] Flow meter pump flow / FlowM_flow
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [m³/h] 340.28235E36 [m³/h] 0.00 [m³/h]
Description: Determines the flow for the corresponding pump power point used for flow estimation.
Five correcponding flow values should be entered derived from the manufacturer's pump characteristic curve.
r29633 Flow meter calculated flow / FlowM_calc flow
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [m³/h] - [m³/h] - [m³/h]
Description: The calculation result of flow meter.
r29640.0...18 CO/BO: Extented setpoint channel selection output / Setp selection
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays the actual output of the extended setpoint channel selection.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
SINAMICS G120X converter
930 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
00 Extend speed setpoint selected 1 0 -
01 Frost or condensation executing 1 0 -
03 Deragging executing 1 0 -
04 Pipe filling executing 1 0 -
05 Total executing 1 0 -
06 Normal executing 1 0 -
16 Ramp up status 1 0 -
17 Ramp down status 1 0 -
18 Target setpoint reached flag 1 0 -
r29641 CO: Extented setpoint channel setpoint output / Setp output
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the actual output of the extended setpoint channel setpoint.
p29642 BI: Ramp-function generator, accept setpoint / Total setp sel
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for accepting the setpoint of the ramp-function generator.
p29643 CI: Ramp-function generator setpoint input / Total Setpoint
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for inputting the setpoint of the ramp-function generator.
p29650[0...n] DI selection for ON/OFF2 / DI sel ON/OFF2
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
-1 5 0
Description: Defines the DI selection for ON/OFF2. After setting, configuration will be done internally(Except DP/PN variants),
p0840[0...n] = r29659.0
p0844[0...n] = r29659.1
p29652[0...n] = 722.n
You can also configure p29651[0...n] and p29652[0...n] after setting p29650[0...n].
Similar to p0840[0...n] and p0844[0...n], p29651[0...n] and p29652[0...n] are for ON/OFF1 input and OFF2 input
respectively.
Value: -1: NONE
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 931
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
0: DI0
1: DI1
2: DI2
3: DI3
4: DI4
5: DI5
Note
On variants with PN/DP interface, ON/OFF2 is disabled as default(p29650=-1), when enabled(p29650>=0), the
configuration of p840 and p844 will not be updated internally. ON/OFF2 is only effective if both are configured as r29659
bit0 and bit1 respectively.
p29651[0...n] BI: ON/OFF1 (OFF1) / ON/OFF1 (OFF1)
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "ON/OFF1 (OFF1)".
p29652[0...n] BI: ON/OFF2 (OFF2) / ON/OFF2 (OFF2)
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "ON/OFF2 (OFF2)".
r29659.0...1 CO/BO: Command word / Cmd word
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Command status is for ON/OFF1, OFF2 which can connect to p0840, p0844.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 Active Inactive -
01 coast-down(OFF2) signal source Active Inactive -
p29700[0...n] Temperature sensor type / TempSen type
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: DDS, p0180
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 3 0
Description: Sets the sensor type for temperature measurement.
This means that the temperature sensor type is selected and the evaluation is switched in.
Value: 0: Evaluation disabled
1: 1 x PT100
2: 2 x PT100
SINAMICS G120X converter
932 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
3: 3 x PT100
Dependency: When enabled(p29700>0):
1. One analog input and output should be used to connect the sensor, the connected analog input should be set as
0-10V voltage input(p756[x]=0), and the analog output should be set as 0-20mA current output(p776[x]=0);
2. The measure sensor voltage should connect to the sensor voltage input(p29701=r755.x)and the sensor exciting
current value should connect to analog output source(p771[x]=r29706.x).
Note
The temperature sensor is connected at CU AIx and AOx terminals.
When the measurement is enabled(p29700>0), the set value of p601 is not impact on the motor temperature sensor
selection.
If p29700=0, the motor temperature sensor can be selected by p601.
p29701 CI: Temperature sensor voltage input source / TempSen V_src
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32 /
FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: PERCENT Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for temperature sensor voltage.
Note
The value may be the measured value of the analog input(e.g. r755[x]), which is the AI channel of the sensor connected.
p29704 Equivalent wire resistance / TempSen R_wire
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [ohm] 3000.00 [ohm] 0.00 [ohm]
Description: Sets the equivalent wire resistance for temperature sensor.
If the wire resistance can't be ignored for the temperature accuracy, that should be measured or calculated and set via
p29704.
Note
The value may be measured by short-circuit the sensor conductor close to the sensor, set p29704=0, then that can be
read via r29707.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
r29705 CO: Temperature sensor actual value / TempSen T_actual
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the temperature actual value of the temperature sensor
Note
PT100: Valid temperature range -48 ... 248 degree.
r29705=20 degree is displayed when the sensor type is not selected(p29700 = 0).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 933
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
r29706 CO: Temperature sensor exciting current output / TempSen I_out
Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Current output to temperature sensor in percent of 20mA.
Note
This CO parameter may connect to the analog output source set(e.g. p771[x]), which is the AO channel of sensor
connected.
r29707 CO: Temperature sensor resistance value / TempSen R
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Display the actual resistance value of the temperature sensor.
p29708 Temperature sensor exiting current set / TempSen I_exit
Access level: 4 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T, U Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 50.00 [%]
Description: Sets the exciting current of temperature sensor.
p60000 PROFIdrive reference speed reference frequency / PD n_ref f_ref
G120X_DP, Access level: 2 Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL Data type: FloatingPoint32
G120X_PN Can be changed: T Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
6.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 1500.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for speed and frequency.
All speeds or frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).
The following applies: reference frequency (in Hz) = reference speed (in ((rpm) / 60) x pole pair number)
Dependency: See also: p2000
NOTICE
When the reference speed / reference frequency is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
SINAMICS G120X converter
934 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.2 Parameter list
Note
Parameter p60000 is an image of parameter p2000 in conformance with PROFIdrive. A change always effects both
parameters.
If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities
are used as internal conversion factor.
Example:
The setpoint from PROFIBUS (r2050[1]) is connected to a speed setpoint (e.g. p1070[0]). The actual input value is
cyclically converted into a percentage value via the pre-specified scaling 4000 hex. This percentage value is converted
to the absolute speed setpoint using the reference speed (p60000).
The setpoint from PROFIBUS (r2060[1]) is connected to a speed setpoint (e.g. p1155[0]). The actual input value is
cyclically converted into a percentage value via the pre-specified scaling 4000 0000 hex. This percentage value is
converted to the absolute speed setpoint using the reference speed (p60000).
r61000[0...239] PROFINET Name of Station / PN Name of Station
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2410
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays PROFINET Name of Station.
NOTICE
An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual.
r61001[0...3] PROFINET IP of Station / PN IP of Station
G120X_PN Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned8
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Dynamic index: -
Unit group: - Unit selection: - Function diagram: 2410
Min: Max: Factory setting:
- - -
Description: Displays PROFINET IP of Station.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 935
Parameters
7.3 ASCII table
7.3 ASCII table
Function description
The following table contains the characters that can be used for certain parameters, e.g. serial
number, password or device name on a fieldbus.
Table 7-1 Permissible characters
Character Decimal Hexadecimal Meaning
32 20 Space
! 33 21 Exclamation mark
" 34 22 Quotation mark
# 35 23 Number sign
$ 36 24 Dollar
% 37 25 Percent
& 38 26 Ampersand
’ 39 27 Apostrophe, closing single quotation
mark
( 40 28 Opening parenthesis
) 41 29 Closing parenthesis
* 42 2A Asterisk
+ 43 2B Plus
, 44 2C Comma
- 45 2D Hyphen, minus
. 46 2E Period, decimal point
/ 47 2F Slash, slant
0 48 30 Digit 0
… … … …
9 57 39 Digit 9
: 58 3A Colon
; 59 3B Semicolon
< 60 3C Less than
= 61 3D Equals
> 62 3E Greater than
? 63 3F Question mark
@ 64 40 Commercial At
A 65 41 Capital Letter A
… … … …
Z 90 5A Capital letter Z
[ 91 5B Opening bracket
\ 92 5C Backslash
] 93 5D Closing bracket
^ 94 5E Circumflex
_ 95 5F Underline
SINAMICS G120X converter
936 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Parameters
7.3 ASCII table
Character Decimal Hexadecimal Meaning
‘ 96 60 Opening single quotation mark
a 97 61 Small letter a
… … … …
z 122 7A Small Letter z
{ 123 7B Opening brace
| 124 7C Vertical line
} 125 7D Closing brace
~ 126 7E Tilde
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 937
Parameters
7.3 ASCII table
SINAMICS G120X converter
938 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Saving the settings and series commissioning 8
Overview
After commissioning, your settings are saved in the converter so that they are protected against
power failure.
We recommend that you additionally back up the settings on a storage medium outside the
converter. Without backup, your settings could be lost if the converter develops a defect.
The following storage media are available for your settings:
● Memory card
● Operator panel
● SINAMICS G120 Smart Access
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 939
Saving the settings and series commissioning
8.1 Memory card
8.1 Memory card
8.1.1 Recommended memory cards
Function description
Table 8-1 Memory card to back up converter settings
Scope of delivery Article number
Memory card without firmware 6SL3054-4AG00-2AA0
More information
Using memory cards from other manufacturers
If you use a different SD memory card, then you must format it as follows:
● Insert the card into your PC's card reader.
● Command to format the card:
format x: /fs:fat or format x: /fs:fat32 (x: Drive code of the memory card on your PC.)
Functional restrictions with memory cards from other manufacturers
The following functions are either not possible – or only with some restrictions – when using
memory cards from other manufacturers:
● Know-how protection is only possible with one of the recommended memory cards.
● In certain circumstances, memory cards from other manufacturers do not support writing or
reading data from/to the converter.
8.1.2 Saving setting on a memory card
Overview
We recommend that you insert the memory card before switching on the converter. The
converter always also backs up its settings on an inserted card.
If you wish to back up the converter settings on a memory card, you have two options:
● Automatic backup (Page 941)
● Manual backup (Page 942)
SINAMICS G120X converter
940 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Saving the settings and series commissioning
8.1 Memory card
8.1.2.1 Automatic backup
Precondition
The converter power supply has been switched off.
Function description
Procedure
1. Insert an empty memory card into the converter.
2. Switch on the power supply for the converter.
After the power supply has been switched on, the converter copies its changed settings to the
memory card.
❒
Note
Accidental damage to the converter firmware
If the memory card contains converter firmware, the converter may perform an operating
system update the next time the supply voltage is switched on. If you switch off the supply
voltage during the operating system update, the converter firmware may be incompletely
loaded and damaged. The converter cannot be operated with corrupt firmware.
● Before inserting the memory card, ascertain whether it also contains converter firmware.
● Do not switch off converter power supply during an operating system update.
Firmware upgrade and downgrade (Page 1073)
Note
Accidental overwrite of the converter settings
When the supply voltage is switched on, the converter automatically accepts the settings
already backed up on the memory card. If you use a memory card on which settings are already
backed up, you will overwrite the settings of the converter.
● To automatically backup your settings, use only a memory card that does not contain any
other settings.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 941
Saving the settings and series commissioning
8.1 Memory card
8.1.2.2 Manual backup
Requirement
● The converter power supply has been switched on.
● A memory card is inserted in the converter.
Function description
Procedure with BOP-2
237,216 In the "OPTIONS" menu, select "TO CARD".
72&$5'
3$5$06(7 Set the number of your data backup. You can back up 99 different settings on
the memory card.
(6&2. Start data transfer with OK.
6$9,1*
3$U$6
&/21,1*
;;;<<<
72&$5' Wait until the converter has backed up the settings to the memory card.
G2Q(
You have backed up the settings of the converter to the memory card.
❒
8.1.3 Transferring the setting from the memory card
8.1.3.1 Automatic transfer
Precondition
The converter power supply has been switched off.
SINAMICS G120X converter
942 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Saving the settings and series commissioning
8.1 Memory card
Function description
Procedure
1. Insert the memory card into the converter.
2. Then switch on the converter power supply.
If there is valid parameter data on the memory card, then the converter accepts the data from
the memory card.
❒
8.1.3.2 Manually transferring
Requirement
● The converter power supply has been switched on.
● A memory card is inserted in the converter.
Function description
Procedure with the BOP-2
237,216 In the "OPTIONS" menu, select "FROM CRD".
)520&5'
3$5$06(7 Set the number of your data backup. You can back up 99 different settings on
the memory card.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 943
Saving the settings and series commissioning
8.1 Memory card
(6&2. Start data transfer with OK.
&/21,1*
;;;<<<
)520&5' Wait until the converter has transferred the settings from the memory card.
G2Q(
Switch off the converter power supply.
Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
Switch on the converter power supply again.
You have transferred the settings from the memory card to the converter.
❒
8.1.4 Safely remove the memory card
NOTICE
Data loss from improper handling of the memory card
If you remove the memory card when the converter is switched on without implementing the
"safe removal" function you may destroy the file system on the memory card. The data on the
memory card are lost. The memory card will only function again after formatting.
● Only remove the memory card using the "safe removal" function.
Function description
Procedure with the BOP-2
3$5$06 1. Set p9400 = 2.
67$1'$5'
If a memory card is inserted, p9400 = 1.
),/7(5
3
ැ
3 2. The converter sets p9400 = 3 or p9400 = 100.
● p9400 = 3: You may remove the memory card from the converter.
3
● p9400 = 100: You must not remove the memory card. Wait for several
seconds and then set p9400 = 2 again.
3 3. Remove the memory card. After removing the memory card, p9400 = 0.
You have now safely removed the memory card using BOP-2.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
944 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Saving the settings and series commissioning
8.1 Memory card
8.1.5 Message for a memory card that is not inserted
Function description
The converter identifies that a memory card is not inserted, and signals this state. The message
is deactivated in the converter factory setting.
Activate message
Procedure
1. Set p2118[x] = 1101, x = 0, 1, … 19
2. Set p2119[x] = 2
Message A01101 for a memory card that is not inserted is activated.
❒
To cyclically signal to the higher-level control that a memory card is not inserted, connect
parameter r9401 to the send data of the fieldbus interface.
Deactivate message
Procedure
1. Set p2118[x] = 1101, x = 0, 1, … 19
2. Set p2119[x] = 3
Message A01101 for a memory card that is not inserted is deactivated.
❒
Parameter
Parameter Explanation Factory setting
p2118[0 … 19] Change message type, message number 0
p2119[0 … 19] Change message type, type 0
r9401 Safely remove memory card status -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 945
Saving the settings and series commissioning
8.2 Operator panel
8.2 Operator panel
8.2.1 Backup using the operator panel
Precondition
The converter power supply has been switched on.
Function description
Procedure
(;75$6 1. In the "OPTIONS" menu, select "TO BOP".
72%23
(6&2. 2. Start data transfer with OK.
6$9,1* 3. Wait until the converter has backed up the settings to the BOP‑2.
3$U$6
=,3,1*
),/(6
&/21,1*
;;;<<<
72%23
G2Q(
You have backed up the settings to the BOP-2.
❒
8.2.2 Transfer to the converter
Precondition
The converter power supply has been switched on.
SINAMICS G120X converter
946 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Saving the settings and series commissioning
8.2 Operator panel
Function description
Procedure
(;75$6 1. In the "OPTIONS" menu, select "FROM BOP".
)520%23
(6&2. 2. Start data transfer with OK.
&/21,1* 3. Wait until the oonverter has written the settings to the memory card.
;;;<<<
81=,3,1*
),/(6
)520%23
G2Q(
4. Switch off the converter power supply.
5. Wait until all converter LEDs are dark.
6. Switch on the converter power supply again. Your settings become active after switching on.
You have transferred the settings to the converter.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 947
Saving the settings and series commissioning
8.3 Other ways to back up settings
8.3 Other ways to back up settings
Function description
In addition to the default setting, the converter has an internal memory for backing up three
other settings.
On the memory card, you can back up 99 other settings in addition to the default setting.
Additional information is available on the Internet: Memory options (http://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/43512514).
SINAMICS G120X converter
948 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Saving the settings and series commissioning
8.4 Series commissioning
8.4 Series commissioning
Overview
Series commissioning is the commissioning of several identical drives.
Precondition
The converter to which the settings are transferred has the same article number and the same
or a higher firmware version as the source converter.
Function description
Procedure
1. Commission the first converter.
2. Back up the settings of the first converter to an external storage medium.
3. Transfer the settings from the first converter to another converter via the data storage
medium.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 949
Saving the settings and series commissioning
8.5 Write protection
8.5 Write protection
Overview
The write protection prevents unauthorized changing of the converter settings.
Function description
Write protection is applicable for all user interfaces:
● Operator panel BOP-2 and IOP‑2
● SINAMICS G120 Smart Access
● Parameter changes via fieldbus
No password is required for write protection.
Activate and deactivate write protection
Parameter
r7760 Write protection/know-how protection status
.00 1 signal: Write protection active
p7761 Write protection (factory setting: 0)
0: Deactivate write protection
1: Activate write protection
Parameters
Table 8-2 Parameters that can be changed with active write protection
Number Name
p0003 Access level / Acc_level
p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter / Drv comm par_filt
p0124[0...n] CU detection using LED / CU detect LED
p0970 Reset drive parameters / Drive par reset
p0971 Save parameters / Sav par
p0972 Drive unit reset / Drv_unit reset
p2111 Alarm counter / Alarm counter
p3950 Service parameter / Serv par
p3981 Acknowledge drive object faults / Ackn DO faults
p3985 Master control mode selection / PcCtrl mode select
p7761 Write protection / Write protection
p8805 Identification and Maintenance 4 Configuration / I&M 4 Config
p8806[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 1 / I&M 1
p8807[0...15] Identification and Maintenance 2 / I&M 2
p8808[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 3 / I&M 3
p8809[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 4 / I&M 4
SINAMICS G120X converter
950 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Saving the settings and series commissioning
8.5 Write protection
Number Name
p9400 Safely remove memory card / Mem_card rem
p9484 BICO interconnections search signal source / BICO S_src srch
Note
Write protection for multimaster fieldbus systems
Via multimaster fieldbus systems, e.g. BACnet or Modbus RTU, in spite of write protection
being activated, parameters can still be changed. So that write protection is also active when
accessing via these fieldbuses, you must additionally set p7762 to 1.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 951
Saving the settings and series commissioning
8.6 Know-how protection
8.6 Know-how protection
Overview
Know-how protection prevents unauthorized reading of the converter settings.
To protect your converter settings against unauthorized copying, in addition to know-how
protection, you can also activate copy protection.
Precondition
Know-how protection requires a password.
Combination of know-how protection and copy Is a memory card necessary?
protection
Know-how protection without copy protection The converter can be operated with or without mem‐
ory card.
Know-how protection with basic copy protection The converter can only be operated
Know-how protection with extended copy pro‐ with a SIEMENS memory card
tection Recommended memory
cards (Page 940)
Function description
The active know-how protection provides the following:
● With just a few exceptions, the values of all adjustable parameters p … are invisible.
– Several adjustable parameters can be read and changed when know-how protection is
active.
In addition, you can define an exception list of adjustable parameters, which end users
may change.
– Several adjustable parameters can be read but not changed when know-how protection
is active.
● The values of monitoring parameters r … remain visible.
● Adjustable parameters cannot be changed using commissioning tools.
SINAMICS G120X converter
952 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Saving the settings and series commissioning
8.6 Know-how protection
● Locked functions:
– Automatic controller optimization
– Stationary or rotating measurement of the motor data identification
– Deleting the alarm history and the fault history
– Generating acceptance documents for safety functions
● Executable functions:
– Restoring factory settings
– Acknowledging faults
– Displaying faults, alarms, fault history, and alarm history
– Reading out the diagnostic buffer
– Uploading adjustable parameters that can be changed or read when know-how
protection is active.
When know-how protection is active, support can only be provided (from Technical Support)
after prior agreement from the machine manufacturer (OEM).
Know-how protection without copy protection
You can transfer converter settings to other converters using a memory card or an Operator
Panel.
Know-how protection with basic copy protection
After replacing a converter, to be able to operate the new converter with the settings of the
replaced converter without knowing the password, the memory card must be inserted in the
new converter.
Know-how protection with extended copy protection
It is not possible to insert and use the memory card in another converter without knowing the
password.
Commissioning know-how protection
1. Check as to whether you must extend the exception list.
List of exceptions (Page 955)
2. Activate the know-how protection.
Know-how protection (Page 956)
Parameters
Table 8-3 Parameters that can be changed with active know-how protection
Number Name
p0003 Access level / Acc_level
p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter / Drv comm par_filt
p0124[0...n] CU detection using LED / CU detect LED
p0791[0...1] CO: Fieldbus analog outputs / Fieldbus AO
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 953
Saving the settings and series commissioning
8.6 Know-how protection
Number Name
p0970 Reset drive parameters / Drive par reset
p0971 Save parameters / Sav par
p0972 Drive unit reset / Drv_unit reset
p2040 Fieldbus interface monitoring time / Fieldbus t_monit
p2111 Alarm counter / Alarm counter
p3950 Service parameter / Serv par
p3981 Acknowledge drive object faults / Ackn DO faults
p3985 Master control mode selection / PcCtrl mode select
p7761 Write protection / Write protection
p8402[0...8] RTC daylight saving time setting / RTC DST
p8805 Identification and Maintenance 4 Configuration / I&M 4 Config
p8806[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 1 / I&M 1
p8807[0...15] Identification and Maintenance 2 / I&M 2
p8808[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 3 / I&M 3
p8809[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 4 / I&M 4
p8980 EtherNet/IP profile / Eth/IP profile
p8981 EtherNet/IP ODVA STOP mode / Eth/IP ODVA STOP
p8982 EtherNet/IP ODVA speed scaling / Eth/IP ODVA n scal
p8983 EtherNet/IP ODVA torque scaling / Eth/IP ODVA M scal
p9400 Safely remove memory card / Mem_card rem
p9484 BICO interconnections search signal source / BICO S_src srch
Table 8-4 Parameters that can be read with active know-how protection
Number Name
p0015 Macro drive unit / Macro drv unit
p0100 IEC/NEMA Standards / IEC/NEMA Standards
p0170 Number of Command Data Sets (CDS) / CDS count
p0180 Number of Drive Data Sets (DDS) / DDS count
p0300[0...n] Motor type selection / Mot type sel
p0304[0...n] Rated motor voltage / Mot U_rated
p0305[0...n] Rated motor current / Mot I_rated
p0505 Selecting the system of units / Unit sys select
p0595 Technological unit selection / Tech unit select
p0730 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 0 / CU S_src DO 0
p0731 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 1 / CU S_src DO 1
p0732 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 2 / CU S_src DO 2
p0806 BI: Inhibit master control / Inhibit PcCtrl
p0870 BI: Close main contactor / Close main cont
p0922 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection / PZD telegr_sel
p1080[0...n] Minimum velocity / v_min
p1082[0...n] Maximum velocity / v_max
SINAMICS G120X converter
954 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Saving the settings and series commissioning
8.6 Know-how protection
Number Name
p1520[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper / M_max upper
p2000 Reference speed reference frequency / n_ref f_ref
p2001 Reference voltage / Reference voltage
p2002 Reference current / I_ref
p2003 Reference torque / M_ref
p2006 Reference temperature / Ref temp
p2030 Fieldbus interface protocol selection / Fieldbus protocol
p2038 PROFIdrive STW/ZSW interface mode / PD STW/ZSW IF mode
p2079 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended / PZD telegr ext
p7763 KHP OEM exception list number of indices for p7764 / KHP OEM qty p7765
p7764[0...n] KHP OEM exception list / KHP OEM excep list
p11026 Free tec_ctrl 0 unit selection / Ftec0 unit sel
p11126 Free tec_ctrl 1 unit selection / Ftec1 unit sel
p11226 Free tec_ctrl 2 unit selection / Ftec2 unit sel
8.6.1 Extending the exception list for know-how protection
In the factory setting, the exception list only includes the password for know-how protection.
Before activating know-how protection, you can additionally enter the adjustable parameters in
the exception list, which must still be able to be read and changed by end users – even if know-
how protection has been activated.
You do not need to change the exception list, if, with exception of the password, you do not
require additional adjustable parameters in the exception list.
Absolute know-how protection
If you remove password p7766 from the exception list, it is no longer possible to enter or change
the password for know-how protection.
You must reset the converter to the factory settings in order to be able to gain access to the
converter adjustable parameters. When restoring the factory settings, you lose what you have
configured in the converter, and you must recommission the converter.
Parameter
Parameter Description Factory setting
p7763 KHP OEM exception list, number of indices for p7764 1
p7764[0…p7763] KHP OEM exception list [0] 7766
p7766 is the password for know-how protection [1...499] 0
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 955
Saving the settings and series commissioning
8.6 Know-how protection
8.6.2 Activating and deactivating know-how protection
Requirements
● The converter has now been commissioned.
● You have generated the exception list for know-how protection.
● To guarantee know-how protection, you must ensure that the project does not remain at the
end user as a file.
Function description
Activating know-how protection
1. Enter a password of your choice in p7767.
Each index of p7767 corresponds with a character in the ASCII format.
2. Complete entry of the password with p7767[29] = 0.
3. Enter the same password in p7768 as that for p7767.
4. Complete entry of the password with p7768[29] = 0.
The know-how protection for the converter is activated.
❒
Deactivating know-how protection
1. Enter the password for the know-how protection in p7766.
Each index of p7766 corresponds with a character in the ASCII format.
2. Complete entry of the password with p7766[29] = 0.
The know-how protection for the converter is deactivated.
❒
Parameter
Parameter Description Factory setting
r7758[0...19] KHP Control Unit serial number ---
p7759[0...19] KHP Control Unit reference serial number ---
r7760 Write protection/know-how protection status ---
p7765 KHP configuration 0000 bin
p7766[0...29] KHP password, input ---
p7767[0...29] KHP password, new ---
p7768[0...29] KHP password, confirmation ---
p7769[0...20] KHP memory card reference serial number ---
r7843[0...20] Memory card serial number ---
SINAMICS G120X converter
956 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Saving the settings and series commissioning
8.6 Know-how protection
Further information
Preventing data reconstruction from the memory card
As soon as know-how protection has been activated, the converter only backs up encrypted
data to the memory card.
In order to guarantee know-how protection, after activating know-how protection, we
recommend that you insert a new, empty memory card. For memory cards that have already
been written to, previously backed up data that was not encrypted can be reconstructed.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 957
Saving the settings and series commissioning
8.6 Know-how protection
SINAMICS G120X converter
958 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages 9
The converter has the following diagnostic types:
● LED
The LEDs at the front of the converter immediately inform you about the most important
converter states.
● Alarms and faults
Every alarm and every fault has a unique number.
The converter signals alarms and faults via the following interfaces:
– Fieldbus
– Terminal strip with the appropriate setting
– Interface to the BOP-2 or IOP‑2 operator panel
– Interface to SINAMICS G120 Smart Access
● Identification & maintenance data (I&M)
If requested, the converter sends data to the higher-level control via PROFINET:
– Converter-specific data
– Plant-specific data
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 959
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.1 Operating states indicated on LEDs
9.1 Operating states indicated on LEDs
Table 9-1 Explanation of symbols for the following tables
LED is ON
LED is OFF
LED flashes slowly
V
LED flashes quickly
V
LED flashes with variable frequency
Please contact Technical Support for LED states that are not described in the following.
Table 9-2 Basic states
RDY Explanation
Temporary state after the supply voltage is switched on.
The converter is free of faults
Commissioning or reset to factory settings
A fault is active
Firmware update is active
Converter waits until the power supply is switched off and switched on again after a firmware
update
Table 9-3 PROFINET fieldbus
LNK Explanation
Communication via PROFINET is error-free
Device naming is active
No communication via PROFINET
SINAMICS G120X converter
960 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.1 Operating states indicated on LEDs
Table 9-4 Fieldbuses via RS 485 interface
BF Explanation
Data exchange between the converter and control system is active
The fieldbus is active, however, the converter is not receiving any process data
RDY When LED RDY flashes simultaneously:
Converter waits until the power supply is switched off and switched on again after
a firmware update
No fieldbus connection is available
RDY When LED RDY flashes simultaneously:
Incorrect memory card
Firmware update failed
Firmware update is active
Communication via Modbus or USS:
If the fieldbus monitoring is deactivated with p2040 = 0, the BF-LED remains dark, independent
of the communication state.
Table 9-5 PROFINET fieldbus
BF Explanation
Data exchange between the converter and control system is active
Fieldbus interface is not being used
The fieldbus is improperly configured.
RDY In conjunction with a synchronously flashing LED RDY:
Converter waits until the power supply is switched off and switched on again after
a firmware update
No communication with higher-level controller
RDY In conjunction with an asynchronously flashing LED RDY:
Incorrect memory card
Firmware update failed
Firmware update is active
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 961
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.2 System runtime
9.2 System runtime
Overview
By evaluating the system runtime of the converter, you can decide when you should replace
components subject to wear in time before they fail - such as fans, motors and gear units.
Function description
The system runtime is started as soon as the Control Unit power supply is switched-on. The
system runtime stops when the Control Unit is switched off.
The system runtime comprises r2114[0] (milliseconds) and r2114[1] (days):
System runtime = r2114[1] × days + r2114[0] × milliseconds
If r2114[0] has reached a value of 86,400,000 ms (24 hours), r2114[0] is set to the value 0 and
the value of r2114[1] is increased by 1.
Example
Parameter Description
r2114[0] System runtime (ms)
r2114[1] System runtime (days)
You cannot reset the system runtime.
Parameters
Parameter Description Factory setting
r2114[0 … 1] Total system runtime -
SINAMICS G120X converter
962 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.3 Identification & maintenance data (I&M)
9.3 Identification & maintenance data (I&M)
I&M data
The converter supports the following identification and maintenance (I&M) data.
I&M Format Explanation Associated pa‐ Example for the
data rameters content
I&M0 u8[64] PROFIBUS Converter-specific data, read only - See below
u8[54] PROFINET
I&M1 Visible String [32] Plant/system identifier p8806[0 … 31] "ak12-
ne.bo2=fu1"
Visible String [22] Location code p8806[32 … 53] "sc2+or45"
I&M2 Visible String [16] Date p8807[0 … 15] "2013-01-21
16:15"
I&M3 Visible String [54] Any comment p8808[0 … 53] -
I&M4 Octet String[54] Check signature to track changes p8809[0 … 53] Values of
for Safety Integrated. r9781[0] and
This value can be changed by the r9782[0]
user.
The test signature is reset to the
value generated by the machine if
p8805 = 0 is used.
When requested, the converter transfers its I&M data to a higher-level control or to a PC/PG
with installed STEP 7 or TIA Portal.
I&M0
Designation Format Example for the Valid for PRO‐ Valid for PRO‐
content FINET FIBUS
Manufacturer-specific u8[10] 00 … 00 hex --- ✓
MANUFACTURER_ID u16 42d hex (=Sie‐ ✓ ✓
mens)
ORDER_ID Visible String "6SL3246-0BA22- ✓ ✓
[20] 1FA0"
SERIAL_NUMBER Visible String "T-R32015957" ✓ ✓
[16]
HARDWARE_REVISION u16 0001 hex ✓ ✓
SOFTWARE_REVISION char, u8[3] "V" 04.70.19 ✓ ✓
REVISION_COUNTER u16 0000 hex ✓ ✓
PROFILE_ID u16 3A00 hex ✓ ✓
PROFILE_SPECIFIC_TYPE u16 0000 hex ✓ ✓
IM_VERSION u8[2] 01.02 ✓ ✓
IM_SUPPORTED bit[16] 001E hex ✓ ✓
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 963
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.4 Alarms, alarm buffer, and alarm history
9.4 Alarms, alarm buffer, and alarm history
Overview
An alarm generally indicates that the converter may no longer be able to maintain the operation
of the motor in future.
The extended diagnostics have an alarm buffer and an alarm history, in which the converter
stores the most recent alarms.
Function description
Alarms have the following properties:
● Incoming alarms have no direct influence on the converter.
● A warning disappears as soon as its cause is eliminated.
● Alarms do not have to be acknowledged.
● Alarms are displayed as follows:
– Display via the fieldbus
– Display on the operator panel with Axxxxx
– Display via SINAMICS G120 Smart Access
Alarm code or alarm value describe the cause of the alarm.
Alarm buffer
$ODUPFRGH $ODUPYDOXH $ODUPWLPHUHFHLYHG $ODUPWLPHUHPRYHG
, IORDW 'D\V PV 'D\V PV
U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ ROG U>@ U>@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ QHZ >@ >@
Figure 9-1 Alarm buffer
The converter saves incoming alarms in the alarm buffer. An alarm includes an alarm code, an
alarm value, and two alarm times:
● Alarm code: r2122
● Alarm value: r2124 in fixed-point format "I32", r2134 in floating-point format "Float"
● Alarm time received = r2145 + r2123
● Alarm time removed = r2146 + r2125
The converter takes its internal time calculation to save the alarm times.
System runtime (Page 962)
Up to 8 alarms can be saved in the alarm buffer.
SINAMICS G120X converter
964 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.4 Alarms, alarm buffer, and alarm history
In the alarm buffer, the alarms are sorted according to "Alarm time received". If the alarm buffer
is completely filled and an additional alarm occurs, then the converter overwrites the values
with Index [7].
Alarm history
$ODUPWLPHUHFHLYHG
>@ 2OG
>@
5HPRYHGDODUP >@
>@
$ODUPEXIIHU
>@
>@
>@
,QFRPLQJDODUPZKHQDODUPEXIIHULV >@ 1HZ
FRPSOHWHO\IXOO
>@ 1HZ
> @
$ODUPKLVWRU\
>@
>@
>@ 2OG
Figure 9-2 Shifting removed alarms into the alarm history
If the alarm buffer is completely filled and an additional alarm occurs, the converter shifts all
removed alarms into the alarm history. The following occurs in detail:
1. To create space after position [8] in the alarm history, the converter shifts the alarms already
stored in the alarm history "down" by one or more positions.
If the alarm history is completely full, the converter will delete the oldest alarms.
2. The converter moves the removed alarms from the alarm buffer to the now freed up
positions of the alarm history.
Alarms that have not been removed remain in the alarm buffer.
3. The converter closes gaps in the alarm buffer that occurred when the removed alarms were
shifted in the alarm history by shifting the alarms that have not been removed "up".
4. The converter saves the received alarm as the latest alarm in the alarm buffer.
The alarm history saves up to 56 alarms.
In the alarm history, alarms are sorted according to the "alarm time received". The latest alarm
has Index [8].
Parameters
Table 9-6 Parameters of the alarm buffer and the alarm history
Parameter Description Factory setting
p2111 Alarm counter 0
r2122[0 … 63] Alarm code -
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 965
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.4 Alarms, alarm buffer, and alarm history
Parameter Description Factory setting
r2123[0 … 63] Alarm time received in milliseconds - ms
r2124[0 … 63] Alarm value -
r2125[0 … 63] Alarm time removed in milliseconds - ms
r2132 CO: Actual alarm code -
r2134[0 … 63] Alarm value for float values -
r2145[0 … 63] Alarm time received in days -
r2146[0 … 63] Alarm time removed in days -
Table 9-7 Extended settings for alarms
Parameter Description Factory setting
You can change up to 20 different alarms into a fault or suppress alarms:
p2118[0 … 19] Change message type, message number 0
p2119[0 … 19] Change message type, type 1
Further information is provided in the parameter list.
SINAMICS G120X converter
966 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.5 Faults, alarm buffer and alarm history
9.5 Faults, alarm buffer and alarm history
Overview
A fault generally indicates that the converter can no longer maintain the operation of the motor.
The extended diagnostics have a fault buffer and a fault history, in which the converter stores
the most recent faults.
Function description
Faults have the following properties:
● In general, a fault leads to the motor being switched off.
● A fault must be acknowledged.
● Faults are displayed as follows:
– Display via the fieldbus
– Display on the operator panel with Fxxxxx
– Display on the converter via the LED RDY
– Display via SINAMICS G120 Smart Access
Fault buffer
)DXOWFRGH )DXOWYDOXH )DXOWWLPHUHFHLYHG )DXOWWLPHUHPRYHG
, IORDW 'D\V PV 'D\V PV
U >@ U >@ U>@ U>@ U >@ 2OG U>@ U >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ 1HZ >@ >@
Figure 9-3 Fault buffer
The converter saves incoming faults in the fault buffer. A fault includes a fault code, a fault
value, and two fault times:
● Fault code: r0945
The fault code and fault value describe the cause of the fault.
● Fault value: r0949 in fixed-point format "I32", r2133 in floating-point format "Float"
● Fault time received = r2130 + r0948
● Fault time removed = r2136 + r2109
The converter takes its internal time calculation to save the fault times.
System runtime (Page 962)
Up to 8 faults can be saved in the fault buffer.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 967
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.5 Faults, alarm buffer and alarm history
In the fault buffer, the faults are sorted according to "Fault time received". If the fault buffer is
completely filled and an additional fault occurs, then the converter overwrites the values with
Index [7].
Acknowledging a fault
To acknowledge a fault, you have the following options:
● Acknowledge via the fieldbus
● Acknowledge via a digital input
● Acknowledge via the operator panel
● Switch off the converter power supply and switch on again
Faults detected during the converter-internal monitoring of hardware and firmware can be
acknowledged only by switching the supply voltage off and on again. The list of fault codes and
alarm codes includes the note on the limitations on the acknowledgment for the corresponding
fault codes.
Fault history
)DXOWEXIIHU )DXOWKLVWRU\
&RS\IDXOWV
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ > @ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ > @ > @
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@
$FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
Figure 9-4 Fault history after acknowledging the faults
If at least one of the fault causes in the fault buffer has been removed and you acknowledge the
faults, the following takes place:
1. The converter shifts the values previously saved in the fault history by eight indexes.
The converter deletes the faults that were saved in the indexes [56 … 63] before the
acknowledgement.
2. The converter copies the contents of the fault buffer to the memory locations [8 … 15] in the
fault history.
3. The converter deletes the faults that have been removed from the fault buffer.
The faults that have not been removed are now saved both in the fault buffer and in the fault
history.
4. The converter writes the time of acknowledgement of the removed faults to "Fault time
removed".
The "Fault time removed" of the faults that have not been removed retains the value = 0.
The fault history can contain up to 56 faults.
Deleting the fault history
To delete all faults from the fault history, set parameter p0952 = 0.
SINAMICS G120X converter
968 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.5 Faults, alarm buffer and alarm history
Parameters
Table 9-8 Parameters of the fault buffer and the fault history
Parameter Description Factory setting
r0945[0 … 63] Fault code -
r0948[0 … 63] Fault time received in milliseconds - ms
r0949[0 … 63] Fault value -
p0952 Fault cases counter 0
r2109[0 … 63] Fault time removed in milliseconds - ms
r2130[0 … 63] Fault time received in days -
r2131 CO: Actual fault code -
r2133[0 … 63] Fault value for float values -
r2136[0 … 63] Fault time removed in days -
Extended settings for faults
Parameter Description Factory setting
p2100[0…19] Changing the fault reaction, fault number 0
p2101[0…19] Changing the fault reaction, reaction 0
p2118[0 … 19] Change message type, message number 0
p2119[0 … 19] Change message type, type 1
p2126[0 … 19] Changing the acknowledge mode, fault number 0
p2127[0 … 19] Changing the acknowledge mode 1
Further information is provided in the parameter list.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 969
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
9.6.1 Overview of faults and alarms
Overview
A message comprises a letter followed by the relevant number.
The letters have the following meaning:
A.... Alarm code . . . .
F.... Fault code . . . .
N.... No report or internal message
9.6.2 Fault codes and alarm codes
All objects: G120X_DP, G120X_PN, G120X_USS
F01000 Internal software error
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An internal software error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - evaluate fault buffer (r0945).
- carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- if required, check the data on the non-volatile memory (e.g. memory card).
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
- replace the Control Unit.
F01001 FloatingPoint exception
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
SINAMICS G120X converter
970 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: An exception occurred during an operation with the FloatingPoint data type.
The error may be caused by the basic system or an OA application (e.g. FBLOCKS, DCC).
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Note:
Refer to r9999 for further information about this fault.
r9999[0]: Fault number.
r9999[1]: Program counter at the time when the exception occurred.
r9999[2]: Cause of the FloatingPoint exception.
Bit 0 = 1: Operation invalid
Bit 1 = 1: Division by zero
Bit 2 = 1: Overflow
Bit 3 = 1: Underflow
Bit 4 = 1: Inaccurate result
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- check configuration and signals of the blocks in FBLOCKS.
- check configuration and signals of DCC charts.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
F01002 Internal software error
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An internal software error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
F01003 Acknowledgment delay when accessing the memory
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A memory area was accessed that does not return a "READY".
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- contact Technical Support.
N01004 (F, A) Internal software error
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An internal software error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - read out diagnostics parameter (r9999).
- contact Technical Support.
See also: r9999 (Software error internal supplementary diagnostics)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 971
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
F01005 File upload/download error
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The upload or download of EEPROM data was unsuccessful.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxxxx hex: yy = component number, xxxx = fault cause
xxxx = 000B hex = 11 dec:
Power unit component has detected a checksum error.
xxxx = 000F hex = 15 dec:
The selected power unit will not accept the content of the EEPROM file.
xxxx = 0011 hex = 17 dec:
Power unit component has detected an internal access error.
xxxx = 0012 hex = 18 dec:
After several communication attempts, no response from the power unit component.
xxxx = 008B hex = 140 dec:
EEPROM file for the power unit component not available on the memory card.
xxxx = 008D hex = 141 dec:
An inconsistent length of the firmware file was signaled. It is possible that the download/upload has been interrupted.
xxxx = 0090 hex = 144 dec:
When checking the file that was loaded, the component detected a fault (checksum). It is possible that the file on the
memory card is defective.
xxxx = 0092 hex = 146 dec:
This SW or HW does not support the selected function.
xxxx = 009C hex = 156 dec:
Component with the specified component number is not available (p7828).
xxxx = Additional values:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Save a suitable firmware file or EEPROM file for upload or download in folder "/ee_sac/" on the memory card.
A01009 (N) CU: Control module overtemperature
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The temperature (r0037[0]) of the control module (Control Unit) has exceeded the specified limit value.
Remedy: - check the air intake for the Control Unit.
- check the Control Unit fan.
Note:
The alarm is automatically withdrawn once the limit value has been fallen below.
F01010 Drive type unknown
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An unknown drive type was found.
Remedy: - replace Power Module.
- carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
F01015 Internal software error
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
SINAMICS G120X converter
972 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: An internal software error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
A01016 (F) Firmware changed
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: At least one firmware file in the directory was illegally changed on the non-volatile memory (memory card/device memory)
with respect to the version when shipped from the factory.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
0: Checksum of one file is incorrect.
1: File missing.
2: Too many files.
3: Incorrect firmware version.
4: Incorrect checksum of the back-up file.
Remedy: For the non-volatile memory for the firmware (memory card/device memory), restore the delivery condition.
Note:
The file involved can be read out using parameter r9925.
The status of the firmware check is displayed using r9926.
See also: r9925, r9926
A01017 Component lists changed
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: On the memory card, one file in the directory /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/DATA or /ADDON/SINAMICS/DATA has been
illegally changed with respect to that supplied from the factory. No changes are permitted in this directory.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
zyx dec: x = Problem, y = Directory, z = File name
x = 1: File does not exist.
x = 2: Firmware version of the file does not match the software version.
x = 3: File checksum is incorrect.
y = 0: Directory /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/DATA/
y = 1: Directory /ADDON/SINAMICS/DATA/
z = 0: File MOTARM.ACX
z = 1: File MOTSRM.ACX
z = 2: File MOTSLM.ACX
z = 3: File ENCDATA.ACX
z = 4: File FILTDATA.ACX
z = 5: File BRKDATA.ACX
z = 6: File DAT_BEAR.ACX
z = 7: File CFG_BEAR.ACX
Remedy: For the file on the memory card involved, restore the status originally supplied from the factory.
F01018 Booting has been interrupted several times
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: POWER ON
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 973
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: Module booting was interrupted several times. As a consequence, the module boots with the factory setting.
Possible reasons for booting being interrupted:
- power supply interrupted.
- CPU crashed.
- parameterization invalid.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on). After switching on, the module reboots from the valid parameterization (if
available).
- restore the valid parameterization.
Examples:
a) Carry out a first commissioning, save, carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
b) Load another valid parameter backup (e.g. from the memory card), save, carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
Note:
If the fault situation is repeated, then this fault is again output after several interrupted boots.
A01019 Writing to the removable data medium unsuccessful
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The write access to the removable data medium was unsuccessful.
Remedy: Remove and check the removable data medium. Then run the data backup again.
A01020 Writing to RAM disk unsuccessful
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A write access to the internal RAM disk was unsuccessful.
Remedy: Adapt the file size for the system logbook to the internal RAM disk (p9930).
See also: p9930 (System logbook activation)
A01021 Removable data medium as USB data storage medium from the PC used
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The removable data medium is used as USB data storage medium from a PC
As a consequence, the drive cannot access the removable data medium. When backing up, the configuration data cannot
be saved on the removable data medium.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: The know-how protection as well as the copy protection for the removable data medium is active. Backup is inhibited.
2: The configuration data are only backed up in the Control Unit.
See also: r7760, r9401
Remedy: Deactivate the USB connection to the PC and back up the configuration data.
Note:
The alarm is automatically canceled when disconnecting the USB connection or when removing the removable data
medium.
See also: r9401 (Safely remove memory card status)
F01023 Software timeout (internal)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An internal software timeout has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
SINAMICS G120X converter
974 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
A01028 (F) Configuration error
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The parameterization that was downloaded was generated with a different module type (Order No., MLFB).
Remedy: Save parameters in a non-volatile fashion (p0971 = 1).
F01030 Sign-of-life failure for master control
Reaction: OFF3 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For active PC master control, no sign-of-life was received within the monitoring time.
The master control was returned to the active BICO interconnection.
Remedy: Set the monitoring time higher at the PC or, if required, completely disable the monitoring function.
For the commissioning software, the monitoring time is set as follows:
<Drive> -> Commissioning -> Control panel -> Button "Fetch master control" -> A window is displayed to set the monitoring
time in milliseconds.
Notice:
The monitoring time should be set as short as possible. A long monitoring time means a late response when the
communication fails!
F01033 Units changeover: Reference parameter value invalid
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When changing over the units to the referred representation type, it is not permissible for any of the required reference
parameters to be equal to 0.0
Fault value (r0949, parameter):
Reference parameter whose value is 0.0.
See also: p0505, p0595
Remedy: Set the value of the reference parameter to a number different than 0.0.
See also: p0304, p0305, p0310, p0596, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004
F01034 Units changeover: Calculation parameter values after reference value change unsuccessful
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The change of a reference parameter meant that for an involved parameter the selected value was not able to be re-
calculated in the per unit representation. The change was rejected and the original parameter value restored.
Fault value (r0949, parameter):
Parameter whose value was not able to be re-calculated.
See also: p0304, p0305, p0310, p0596, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004
Remedy: - Select the value of the reference parameter such that the parameter involved can be calculated in the per unit
representation.
- Technology unit selection (p0595) before changing the reference parameter p0596, set p0595 = 1.
A01035 (F) ACX: Parameter back-up file corrupted
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 975
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: When the Control Unit is booted, no complete data set was found from the parameter back-up files. The last time that the
parameterization was saved, it was not completely carried out.
It is possible that the backup was interrupted by switching off or withdrawing the memory card.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex:
aa = 01 hex:
Power up was realized without data backup. The drive is in the factory setting.
aa = 02 hex:
The last available internal backup data record was loaded. The parameterization must be checked. It is recommended that
the parameterization is downloaded again.
aa = 03 hex:
The last available data record from the memory card was loaded. The parameterization must be checked.
aa = 04 hex:
An invalid data backup was loaded from the memory card into the drive. The drive is in the factory setting.
dd, cc, bb:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
See also: p0971 (Save parameters)
Remedy: - Download the project again with the commissioning software.
- save all parameters (p0971 = 1 or "copy RAM to ROM").
See also: p0971 (Save parameters)
F01036 (A) ACX: Parameter back-up file missing
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When downloading the device parameterization, a parameter back-up file PSxxxyyy.ACX associated with a drive object
cannot be found.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Byte 1: yyy in the file name PSxxxyyy.ACX
yyy = 000 --> consistency back-up file
yyy = 001 ... 062 --> drive object number
yyy = 099 --> PROFIBUS parameter back-up file
Byte 2, 3, 4:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: If you have saved the project data using the commissioning software, carry out a new download for your project.
Save using the function "Copy RAM to ROM" or with p0971 = 1.
This means that the parameter files are again completely written into the non-volatile memory.
Note:
If the project data have not been backed up, then a new first commissioning is required.
F01038 (A) ACX: Loading the parameter back-up file unsuccessful
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
SINAMICS G120X converter
976 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: An error has occurred when downloading PSxxxyyy.ACX or PTxxxyyy.ACX files from the non-volatile memory.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Byte 1: yyy in the file name PSxxxyyy.ACX
yyy = 000 --> consistency back-up file
yyy = 001 ... 062 --> drive object number
yyy = 099 --> PROFIBUS parameter back-up file
Byte 2:
255: Incorrect drive object type.
254: Topology comparison unsuccessful -> drive object type was not able to be identified.
Reasons could be:
- incorrect component type in the actual topology
- Component does not exist in the actual topology.
- Component not active.
Additional values:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Byte 4, 3:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - if you have saved the project data using the commissioning software, download the project again. Save using the function
"Copy RAM to ROM" or with p0971 = 1. This means that the parameter files are again completely written to the non-volatile
memory.
- replace the memory card or Control Unit.
F01039 (A) ACX: Writing to the parameter back-up file was unsuccessful
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Writing to at least one parameter back-up file PSxxxyyy.*** in the non-volatile memory was unsuccessful.
- in the directory /USER/SINAMICS/DATA/ at least one parameter back-up file PSxxxyyy.*** has the "read only" file
attribute and cannot be overwritten.
- there is not sufficient free memory space available.
- the non-volatile memory is defective and cannot be written to.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
dcba hex
a = yyy in the file names PSxxxyyy.***
a = 000 --> consistency back-up file
a = 001 ... 062 --> drive object number
a = 099 --> PROFIBUS parameter back-up file
b = xxx in the file names PSxxxyyy.***
b = 000 --> data save started with p0971 = 1
b = 010 --> data save started with p0971 = 10
b = 011 --> data save started with p0971 = 11
b = 012 --> data save started with p0971 = 12
d, c:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - check the file attribute of the files (PSxxxyyy.***, CAxxxyyy.***, CCxxxyyy.***) and, if required, change from "read only"
to "writeable".
- check the free memory space in the non-volatile memory. Approx. 80 kbyte of free memory space is required for every
drive object in the system.
- replace the memory card or Control Unit.
F01040 Save parameter settings and carry out a POWER ON
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 977
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: A parameter has been changed that requires the parameters to be backed up and the Control Unit to be switched OFF and
ON again.
Remedy: - Save parameters (p0971).
- carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for the Control Unit.
F01042 Parameter error during project download
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An error was detected when downloading a project using the commissioning software (e.g. incorrect parameter value).
For the specified parameter, it was detected that dynamic limits were exceeded that may possibly depend on other
parameters.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
ccbbaaaa hex
aaaa = Parameter
bb = Index
cc = fault cause
0: Parameter number illegal.
1: Parameter value cannot be changed.
2: Lower or upper value limit exceeded.
3: Sub-index incorrect.
4: No array, no sub-index.
5: Data type incorrect.
6: Setting not permitted (only resetting).
7: Descriptive element cannot be changed.
9: Descriptive data not available.
11: No master control.
15: No text array available.
17: Task cannot be executed due to operating state.
20: Illegal value.
21: Response too long.
22: Parameter address illegal.
23: Format illegal.
24: Number of values not consistent.
108: Unit unknown.
Additional values:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - enter the correct value in the specified parameter.
- identify the parameter that restricts the limits of the specified parameter.
F01043 Fatal error at project download
Reaction: OFF2 (OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
SINAMICS G120X converter
978 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: A fatal error was detected when downloading a project using the commissioning software.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Device status cannot be changed to Device Download (drive object ON?).
2: Incorrect drive object number.
8: Maximum number of drive objects that can be generated exceeded.
11: Error while generating a drive object (global component).
12: Error while generating a drive object (drive component).
13: Unknown drive object type.
14: Drive status cannot be changed to "ready for operation" (r0947 and r0949).
15: Drive status cannot be changed to drive download.
16: Device status cannot be changed to "ready for operation".
18: A new download is only possible if the factory settings are restored for the drive unit.
20: The configuration is inconsistent.
21: Error when accepting the download parameters.
22: SW-internal download error.
100: The download was canceled, because no write requests were received from the commissioning client (e.g. for
communication error).
Additional values:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - use the current version of the commissioning software.
- modify the offline project and download again (e.g. compare the motor and Power Module in the offline project and on the
drive).
- change the drive state (is a drive rotating or is there a message/signal?).
- carefully note any other messages/signals and remove their cause.
- boot from previously saved files (switch-off/switch-on or p0970).
F01044 CU: Descriptive data error
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An error was detected when loading the descriptive data saved in the non-volatile memory.
Remedy: Replace the memory card or Control Unit.
A01045 Configuring data invalid
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An error was detected when evaluating the parameter files PSxxxyyy.ACX, PTxxxyyy.ACX, CAxxxyyy.ACX, or
CCxxxyyy.ACX saved in the non-volatile memory. Because of this, under certain circumstances, several of the saved
parameter values were not able to be accepted. Also see r9406 up to r9408.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - check the parameters displayed in r9406 up to r9408, and correct these if required.
- Restore the factory setting using (p0970 = 1) and re-load the project into the drive unit.
Then save the parameterization in STARTER using the function "Copy RAM to ROM" or with p0971 = 1. This overwrites
the incorrect parameter files in the non-volatile memory – and the alarm is withdrawn.
See also: r9406, r9407, r9408
A01049 It is not possible to write to file
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 979
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: It is not possible to write into a write-protected file (PSxxxxxx.acx). The write request was interrupted.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Drive object number.
Remedy: Check whether the "write protected" attribute has been set for the files in the non-volatile memory under .../USER/
SINAMICS/DATA/... When required, remove write protection and save again (e.g. set p0971 to 1).
F01054 CU: System limit exceeded
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: At least one system overload has been identified.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Computing time load too high (r9976[1]).
5: Peak load too high (r9976[5]).
Note:
As long as this fault is present, it is not possible to save the parameters (p0971).
See also: r9976 (System utilization)
Remedy: For fault value = 1, 5:
- reduce the computing time load of the drive unit (r9976[1] and r9976[5]) to under 100 %.
- check the sampling times and adjust if necessary (p0115, p0799, p4099).
- deactivate function modules.
- deactivate drive objects.
- remove drive objects from the target topology.
- note the DRIVE-CLiQ topology rules and if required, change the DRIVE-CLiQ topology.
When using the Drive Control Chart (DCC) or free function blocks (FBLOCKS), the following applies:
- the computing time load of the individual run-time groups on a drive object can be read out in r21005 (DCC) or r20005
(FBLOCKS).
- if necessary, the assignment of the run-time group (p21000, p20000) can be changed in order to increase the sampling
time (r21001, r20001).
- if necessary, reduce the number of cyclically calculated blocks (DCC) and/or function blocks (FBLOCKS).
A01066 Buffer memory: 70% fill level reached or exceeded
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The non-volatile buffer memory for parameter changes is filled to at least 70%.
This can also occur if the buffer memory is active (p0014 = 1) and parameters are continually changed via a fieldbus
system.
Remedy: If required, deactivate and clear the buffer memory (p0014 = 0).
If required, clear the buffer memory (p0014 = 2).
In the following cases, the entries in the buffer memory are transferred into the ROM and then the buffer memory is cleared:
- p0971 = 1
- switch-off/switch-on Control Unit
See also: p0014 (Buffer memory mode)
A01067 Buffer memory: 100 % fill level reached
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The non-volatile buffer memory for parameter changes is filled to 100%.
All additional parameter changes will no longer be taken into account in the non-volatile buffer memory. However,
parameter changes can still be made in the volatile memory (RAM).
This can also occur if the buffer memory is active (p0014 = 1) and parameters are continually changed via a fieldbus
system.
SINAMICS G120X converter
980 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: If required, deactivate and clear the buffer memory (p0014 = 0).
If required, clear the buffer memory (p0014 = 2).
In the following cases, the entries in the buffer memory are transferred into the ROM and then the buffer memory is cleared:
- p0971 = 1
- switch-off/switch-on Control Unit
See also: p0014 (Buffer memory mode)
F01068 CU: Data memory memory overflow
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The utilization for a data memory area is too large.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: High-speed data memory 1 overloaded
Bit 1 = 1: High-speed data memory 2 overloaded
Bit 2 = 1: High-speed data memory 3 overloaded
Bit 3 = 1: High-speed data memory 4 overloaded
Remedy: - deactivate the function module.
- deactivate drive object.
- remove the drive object from the target topology.
A01069 Parameter backup and device incompatible
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The parameter backup on the memory card and the drive unit do not match.
The module boots with the factory settings.
Example:
Devices A and B. are not compatible and a memory card with the parameter backup for device A is inserted in device B.
Remedy: - insert a memory card with compatible parameter backup and carry out a POWER ON.
- insert a memory card without parameter backup and carry out a POWER ON.
- if required, withdraw the memory card and carry out POWER ON.
- save the parameters (p0971 = 1).
F01072 Memory card restored from the backup copy
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The Control Unit was switched-off while writing to the memory card. This is why the visible partition became defective.
After switching on, the data from the non-visible partition (backup copy) were written to the visible partition.
Remedy: Check that the firmware and parameterization is up-to-date.
A01073 (N) POWER ON required for backup copy on memory card
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The parameter assignment on the visible partition of the memory card has changed.
In order that the backup copy on the memory card is updated on the non-visible partition, it is necessary to carry out a
POWER ON or hardware reset (p0972) of the Control Unit.
Note:
It is possible that a new POWER ON is requested via this alarm (e.g. after saving with p0971 = 1).
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for the Control Unit.
- carry out a hardware reset (RESET button, p0972).
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 981
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
A01098 RTC: Date and time setting required
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The power supply for the Control Unit was interrupted for an extended period. The date and time displayed on the real-time
clock are no longer accurate.
Note:
This alarm is only output when p8405 = 1 (factory setting).
See also: p8405 (Activate/deactivate RTC alarm A01098)
Remedy: Set the date and time on the real-time clock.
Note:
RTC: Real-time clock
See also: p8400, p8401
N01101 (A) CU: memory card not available
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The memory card is not available for the drive.
Remedy: Insert a memory card.
If Starter is not active, interrupt the USB connection to the PC
F01105 (A) CU: Insufficient memory
Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: Too many data sets are configured on this Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - reduce the number of data sets.
F01107 Save to memory card unsuccessful
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A data save to the memory card was not able to be successfully carried out.
- Memory card defective
- insufficient space on memory card.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The file on the RAM was not able to be opened.
2: The file on the RAM was not able to be read.
3: A new directory could not be created on the memory card.
4: A new file could not be created on the memory card.
5: A new file could not be written on the memory card.
Remedy: - try to save again.
- replace the memory card or Control Unit.
F01112 CU: Power unit not permissible
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The connected power unit cannot be used together with this Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Power unit is not supported (e.g. PM340).
Remedy: Replace the power unit that is not permissible by a component that is permissible.
SINAMICS G120X converter
982 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
F01120 (A) Terminal initialization has failed
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: An internal software error occurred while the terminal functions were being initialized.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
- replace the Control Unit.
F01152 CU: Invalid constellation of drive object types
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: It is not possible to simultaneously operate drive object types SERVO, VECTOR and HLA.
A maximum of 2 of these drive object types can be operated on a Control Unit.
Remedy: - switch off the unit.
- restrict the use of drive object types SERVO, VECTOR, HLA to a maximum of 2.
- re-commission the unit.
F01205 CU: Time slice overflow
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: Insufficient computation time.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Contact Technical Support.
F01250 CU: CU-EEPROM incorrect read-only data
Reaction: NONE (OFF2)
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: Error when reading the read-only data of the EEPROM in the Control Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the Control Unit.
A01251 CU: CU-EEPROM incorrect read-write data
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Error when reading the read-write data of the EEPROM in the Control Unit.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: For alarm value r2124 < 256, the following applies:
- carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the Control Unit.
For alarm value r2124 >= 256, the following applies:
- clear the fault memory (p0952 = 0).
- replace the Control Unit.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 983
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
F01257 CU: Firmware version out of date
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: The Control Unit firmware is too old.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
bbbbbbaa hex: aa = unsupported component
aa = 01 hex = 1 dec:
The firmware being used does not support the Control Unit.
aa = 02 hex = 2 dec:
The firmware being used does not support the Control Unit.
aa = 03 hex = 3 dec:
The firmware being used does not support the Power Module.
aa = 04 hex = 4 dec:
The firmware being used does not support the Control Unit.
Remedy: For fault value = 1, 2, 4:
- Upgrade the firmware of the Control Unit.
For fault value = 3:
- Upgrade the firmware of the Control Unit.
- Replace the Power Module by a component that is supported.
F01340 Topology: Too many components on one line
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For the selected communications clock cycle, too many DRIVE-CLiQ components are connected to one line of the Control
Unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
xyy hex: x = fault cause, yy = component number or connection number.
1yy:
The communications clock cycle of the DRIVE-CLiQ connection on the Control Unit is not sufficient for all read transfers.
2yy:
The communications clock cycle of the DRIVE-CLiQ connection on the Control Unit is not sufficient for all write transfers.
3yy:
Cyclic communication is fully utilized.
4yy:
The DRIVE-CLiQ cycle starts before the earliest end of the application. An additional dead time must be added to the
control. Sign-of-life errors can be expected.
The conditions of operation with a current controller sampling time of 31.25 µs have not been maintained.
5yy:
Internal buffer overflow for net data of a DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
6yy:
Internal buffer overflow for receive data of a DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
7yy:
Internal buffer overflow for send data of a DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
8yy:
The component clock cycles cannot be combined with one another
900:
The lowest common multiple of the clock cycles in the system is too high to be determined.
901:
The lowest common multiple of the clock cycles in the system cannot be generated with the hardware.
SINAMICS G120X converter
984 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring.
- reduce the number of components on the DRIVE-CLiQ line involved and distribute these to other DRIVE-CLiQ sockets
of the Control Unit. This means that communication is uniformly distributed over several lines.
For fault value = 1yy - 4yy in addition:
- increase the sampling times (p0112, p0115, p4099). If necessary, for DCC or FBLOCKS, change the assignment of the
run-time group (p21000, p20000) so that the sampling time (r21001, r20001) is increased.
- if necessary, reduce the number of cyclically calculated blocks (DCC) and/or function blocks (FBLOCKS).
- reduce the function modules (r0108).
- establish the conditions for operation with a current controller sampling time of 31.25 µs (at the DRIVE-CLiQ line, only
operate Motor Modules and Sensor Modules with this sampling time and only use a permitted Sensor Module (e.g. SMC20,
this means a 3 at the last position of the order number)).
- For an NX, the corresponding Sensor Module for a possibly existing second measuring system should be connected to
a free DRIVE-CLiQ socket of the NX.
For fault value = 8yy in addition:
- check the clock cycles settings (p0112, p0115, p4099). Clock cycles on a DRIVE-CLiQ line must be perfect integer
multiples of one another. As clock cycle on a line, all clock cycles of all drive objects in the previously mentioned parameters
apply, which have components on the line involved.
For fault value = 9yy in addition:
- check the clock cycles settings (p0112, p0115, p4099). The lower the numerical value difference between two clock
cycles, the higher the lowest common multiple. This behavior has a significantly stronger influence, the higher the
numerical values of the clock cycles.
F01505 (A) BICO: Interconnection cannot be established
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A PROFIdrive telegram has been set (p0922).
An interconnection contained in the telegram was not able to be established.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter receiver that should be changed.
Remedy: Establish another interconnection.
F01510 BICO: Signal source is not float type
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The requested connector output does not have the correct data type. This interconnection is not established.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number to which an interconnection should be made (connector output).
Remedy: Interconnect this connector input with a connector output having a float data type.
F01511 (A) BICO: Interconnection with different scalings
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 985
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: The requested BICO interconnection was established. However, a conversion is made between the BICO output and BICO
input using the reference values.
- the BICO output has different normalized units than the BICO input.
- message only for interconnections within a drive object.
Example:
The BICO output has, as normalized unit, voltage and the BICO input has current.
This means that the factor p2002/p2001 is calculated between the BICO output and the BICO input.
p2002: contains the reference value for current
p2001: contains the reference value for voltage
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number of the BICO input (signal sink).
Remedy: Not necessary.
F01512 BICO: No scaling available
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An attempt was made to determine a conversion factor for a scaling that does not exist.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Unit (e.g. corresponding to SPEED) for which an attempt was made to determine a factor.
Remedy: Apply scaling or check the transfer value.
F01513 (N, A) BICO: Interconnection cross DO with different scalings
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The requested BICO interconnection was established. However, a conversion is made between the BICO output and BICO
input using the reference values.
An interconnection is made between different drive objects and the BICO output has different normalized units than the
BICO input or the normalized units are the same but the reference values are different.
Example 1:
BICO output with voltage normalized unit, BICO input with current normalized unit, BICO output and BICO input lie in
different drive objects. This means that the factor p2002/p2001 is calculated between the BICO output and the BICO input.
p2002: contains the reference value for current
p2001: contains the reference value for voltage
Example 2:
BICO output with voltage normalized unit in drive object 1 (DO1), BICO input with voltage normalized unit in drive object
2 (DO2). The reference values for voltage (p2001) of the two drive objects have different values. This means that the factor
p2001(DO1)/p2001(DO2) is calculated between the BICO output and the BICO input.
p2001: contains the reference value for voltage, drive objects 1, 2
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number of the BICO input (signal sink).
Remedy: Not necessary.
A01514 (F) BICO: Error when writing during a reconnect
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: During a reconnect operation (e.g. while booting or downloading - but can also occur in normal operation) a parameter was
not able to be written to.
Example:
When writing to BICO input with double word format (DWORD), in the second index, the memory areas overlap (e.g.
p8861). The parameter is then reset to the factory setting.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Parameter number of the BICO input (signal sink).
SINAMICS G120X converter
986 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: Not necessary.
F01515 (A) BICO: Writing to parameter not permitted as the master control is active
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When changing the number of CDS or when copying from CDS, the master control is active.
Remedy: If required, return the master control and repeat the operation.
A01590 (F) Drive: Motor maintenance interval expired
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected service/maintenance interval for this motor was reached.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Motor data set number.
See also: p0650, p0651
Remedy: carry out service/maintenance and reset the service/maintenance interval (p0651).
F01662 Error internal communications
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: A module-internal communication error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- check whether an impermissible voltage is connected at one of the digital outputs.
- check whether a digital output is loaded with an impermissible current.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
A01900 (F) PROFIBUS: Configuration telegram error
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A PROFIBUS master attempts to establish a connection using an incorrect configuring telegram.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
2: Too many PZD data words for input or output. The number of possible PZD is specified by the number of indices in r2050/
p2051.
3: Uneven number of bytes for input or output.
211: Unknown parameterizing block.
Additional values:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Check the bus configuration on the master and the slave sides.
For alarm value = 2:
Check the number of data words for input and output.
For alarm value = 211:
Ensure offline version <= online version.
F01910 (N, A) Fieldbus interface setpoint timeout
Reaction: OFF3 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 987
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: The reception of setpoints from the fieldbus interface has been interrupted.
- bus connection interrupted.
- communication partner switched off.
CU230P-2 DP:
- PROFIBUS master set into the STOP state.
See also: p2040, p2047
Remedy: Ensure bus connection has been established and switch on communication partner.
CU230P-2 BT, CU230P-2 HVAC:
- if required, adapt p2040.
CU230P-2 DP:
- set the PROFIBUS master to the RUN state.
- if the error is repeated, check the set response monitoring in the bus configuration (HW Config).
- slave redundancy: For operation on a Y link, it must be ensured that "DP alarm mode = DPV1" is set in the slave
parameterization.
A01920 (F) PROFIBUS: Interruption cyclic connection
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The cyclic connection to the PROFIBUS master is interrupted.
Remedy: Establish the PROFIBUS connection and activate the PROFIBUS master in the cyclic mode.
Note:
If there is no communication to a higher-level control system, then p2030 should be set = 0 to suppress this message.
See also: p2030 (Field bus interface protocol selection)
A01945 PROFIBUS: Connection to the Publisher failed
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For PROFIBUS peer-to-peer data transfer, the connection to at least one Publisher has failed.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: Publisher with address in r2077[0], connection failed.
...
Bit 15 = 1: Publisher with address in r2077[15], connection failed.
Remedy: Check the PROFIBUS cables.
See also: r2077 (PROFIBUS diagnostics peer-to-peer data transfer addresses)
F01946 (A) PROFIBUS: Connection to the Publisher aborted
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The connection to at least one Publisher for PROFIBUS peer-to-peer data transfer in cyclic operation has been aborted.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: Publisher with address in r2077[0], connection aborted.
...
Bit 15 = 1: Publisher with address in r2077[15], connection aborted.
Remedy: - check the PROFIBUS cables.
- check the state of the Publisher that has the aborted connection.
See also: r2077 (PROFIBUS diagnostics peer-to-peer data transfer addresses)
A02050 Trace: Start not possible
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
SINAMICS G120X converter
988 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: The trace has already been started.
See also: p4700 (Trace control)
Remedy: Stop the trace and, if necessary, start again.
A02051 Trace: recording not possible as a result of know-how protection
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: TRACE recording is not possible as at least one signal or trigger signal being used is under know-how protection.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Recorder 0
2: Recorder 1
3: Recorders 0 and 1
See also: p4700, p4711, p4730, p4731, p4732, p4733, p4734, p4735, p4736, p4737
Remedy: - Temporarily activate or deactivate know-how protection (p7766).
- include the signal in the OEM exception list (p7763, p7764).
- Where relevant do not record the signal.
See also: p7763, p7764
A02055 Trace: Recording time too short
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The trace duration is too short.
The minimum is twice the value of the trace clock cycle.
See also: p4721 (Trace recording time)
Remedy: Check the selected recording time and, if necessary, adjust.
A02056 Trace: Recording cycle too short
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected recording clock cycle is lower than the basic clock cycle 500µs.
See also: p4720 (Trace recording cycle)
Remedy: Increase the value for the trace cycle.
A02057 Trace: Time slice clock cycle invalid
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The time slice clock cycle selected does not match any of the existing time slices.
See also: p4723 (Trace time slice cycle)
Remedy: Enter an existing time slice clock cycle. The existing time slices can be read out via p7901.
See also: r7901 (Sampling times)
A02058 Trace: Time slice clock cycle for endless trace not valid
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected time slice clock cycle cannot be used for the endless trace
See also: p4723 (Trace time slice cycle)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 989
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: Enter the clock cycle of an existing time slice with a cycle time >= 2 ms for up to 4 recording channels or >= 4 ms from 5
recording channels per trace.
The existing time slices can be read out via p7901.
See also: r7901 (Sampling times)
A02059 Trace: Time slice clock cycle for 2 x 8 recording channels not valid
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected time slice clock cycle cannot be used for more than 4 recording channels.
See also: p4723 (Trace time slice cycle)
Remedy: Enter the clock cycle of an existing time slice with a cycle time >= 4 ms or reduce the number of recording channels to 4
per trace.
The existing time slices can be read out via p7901.
See also: p4702, r7901
A02060 Trace: Signal to be traced missing
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: - a signal to be traced was not specified.
- the specified signals are not valid.
See also: p4730, p4731, p4732, p4733
Remedy: - specify the signal to be traced.
- check whether the relevant signal can be traced.
A02061 Trace: Invalid signal
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: - the specified signal does not exist.
- the specified signal can no longer be traced (recorded).
See also: p4730, p4731, p4732, p4733
Remedy: - specify the signal to be traced.
- check whether the relevant signal can be traced.
A02062 Trace: Invalid trigger signal
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: - a trigger signal was not specified.
- the specified signal does not exist.
- the specified signal is not a fixed-point signal.
- the specified signal cannot be used as a trigger signal for the trace.
See also: p4711 (Trace trigger signal)
Remedy: Specify a valid trigger signal.
A02063 Trace: Invalid data type
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The specified data type to select a signal using a physical address is invalid.
See also: p4711, p4730, p4731, p4732, p4733
Remedy: Use a valid data type.
SINAMICS G120X converter
990 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
A02070 Trace: Parameter cannot be changed
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The trace parameter settings cannot be changed when the trace is active.
See also: p4700, p4710, p4711, p4712, p4713, p4714, p4715, p4716, p4720, p4721, p4722, p4730, p4731, p4732, p4733,
p4780, p4781, p4782, p4783, p4789, p4795
Remedy: - stop the trace before parameterization.
- if required, start the trace.
A02075 Trace: Pretrigger time too long
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected pretrigger time must be shorter than the trace time.
See also: p4721, p4722
Remedy: Check the pretrigger time setting and change if necessary.
F02080 Trace: Parameterization deleted due to unit changeover
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The trace parameterization in the drive unit was deleted due to a unit changeover or a change in the reference parameters.
Remedy: Restart trace.
A02095 MTrace 0: multiple trace cannot be activated
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The following functions or settings are not permissible in conjunction with a multiple trace (trace recorder 0):
- measuring function
- long-time trace
- trigger condition "immediate recording start" (IMMEDIATE)
- trigger condition "start with function generator" (FG_START)
Remedy: - if required, deactivate the multiple trace (p4840[0] = 0).
- deactivate function or setting that is not permissible
See also: p4840 (MTrace cycle number setting)
A02096 MTrace 0: cannot be saved
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: It is not possible to save the measurement results of a multiple trace on the memory card (trace recorder 0).
A multiple trace is not started or is canceled.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Memory card cannot be accessed.
- card is not inserted or is blocked by a mounted USB drive.
3: data save operation to slow.
- a second trace has been completed before the measurement results of the first trace were able to be saved.
- writing the measurement result files to the card is blocked by the parameter save.
4: Data save operation canceled.
- for instance, the file required for the data save operation was not able to be found.
See also: p4840 (MTrace cycle number setting)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 991
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: - insert or remove the memory card.
- use a larger memory card.
- configure a longer trace time or use an endless trace.
- avoid saving parameters while a multiple trace is running.
- check whether other functions are presently accessing measurement result files.
A02097 MTrace 1: multiple trace cannot be activated
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The following functions or settings are not permissible in conjunction with a multiple trace (trace recorder 1):
- measuring function
- long-time trace
- trigger condition "immediate recording start" (IMMEDIATE)
- trigger condition "start with function generator" (FG_START)
Remedy: - if required, deactivate the multiple trace (p4840[1] = 0).
- deactivate function or setting that is not permissible
See also: p4840 (MTrace cycle number setting)
A02098 MTrace 1: cannot be saved
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: It is not possible to save the measurement results of a multiple trace on the memory card (trace recorder 1).
A multiple trace is not started or is canceled.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Memory card cannot be accessed.
- card is not inserted or is blocked by a mounted USB drive.
3: data save operation to slow.
- a second trace has been completed before the measurement results of the first trace were able to be saved.
- writing the measurement result files to the card is blocked by the parameter save.
4: Data save operation canceled.
- for instance, the file required for the data save operation was not able to be found.
See also: p4840 (MTrace cycle number setting)
Remedy: - insert or remove the memory card.
- use a larger memory card.
- configure a longer trace time or use an endless trace.
- avoid saving parameters while a multiple trace is running.
- check whether other functions are presently accessing measurement result files.
A02099 Trace: Insufficient Control Unit memory
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The memory space still available on the Control Unit is no longer sufficient for the trace function.
Remedy: Reduce the memory required, e.g. as follows:
- reduce the trace time.
- increase the trace clock cycle.
- reduce the number of signals to be traced.
See also: r4708, r4799
A02150 OA: Application cannot be loaded
Reaction: NONE
SINAMICS G120X converter
992 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The system was not able to load an OA application.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
16:
The interface version in the DCB user library is not compatible to the DCC standard library that has been loaded.
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
For alarm value = 16:
Load a compatible DCB user library (compatible to the interface of the DCC standard library).
Note:
OA: Open Architecture
DCB: Drive Control Block
DCC: Drive Control Chart
See also: r4950, r4955, p4956, r4957
F02151 (A) OA: Internal software error
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: An internal software error has occurred within an OA application.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
- replace the Control Unit.
Note:
OA: Open Architecture
See also: r4950, r4955, p4956, r4957
F02152 (A) OA: Insufficient memory
Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: Too many functions have been configured on this Control Unit (e.g. too many drives, function modules, data sets, OA
applications, blocks, etc.).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - change the configuration on this Control Unit (e.g. fewer drives, function modules, data sets, OA applications, blocks,
etc.).
- use an additional Control Unit.
Note:
OA: Open Architecture
F03000 NVRAM fault on action
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 993
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: A fault occurred during execution of action p7770 = 1 or 2 for the NVRAM data.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyxx hex: yy = fault cause, xx = application ID
yy = 1:
The action p7770 = 1 is not supported by this version if Drive Control Chart (DCC) is activated for the drive object
concerned.
yy = 2:
The data length of the specified application is not the same in the NVRAM and the backup.
yy = 3:
The data checksum in p7774 is not correct.
yy = 4:
No data available to load.
Remedy: - Perform the remedy according to the results of the troubleshooting.
- if necessary, start the action again.
F03001 NVRAM checksum incorrect
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A checksum error occurred when evaluating the non-volatile data (NVRAM) on the Control Unit.
The NVRAM data affected was deleted.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
F03505 (N, A) Analog input wire breakage
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The wire-break monitoring for an analog input has responded.
The input value of the analog input has undershot the threshold value parameterized in p0761[0...3].
p0756[0]: Analog input 0
p0756[1]: Analog input 1
p0756[2]: Analog input 2
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
yxxx dec
y = analog input (0 = analog input 0 (AI 0), 1 = analog input 1 (AI 1), 2 = analog input 2 (AI 2))
xxx = component number (p0151)
Note:
For the following analog input type, the wire breakage monitoring is active:
p0756[0...1] = 1 (2 ... 10 V with monitoring)
p0756[0...2] = 3 (4 ... 20 mA with monitoring)
Remedy: - Check the connection to the signal source for interruptions.
- check the magnitude of the injected current - it is possible that the infed signal is too low.
Note:
The input current measured by the analog input can be read in r0752[x].
A03510 (F, N) Calibration data not plausible
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: During booting, the calibration data for the analog inputs is read and checked with respect to plausibility.
At least one calibration data point was determined to be invalid.
SINAMICS G120X converter
994 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: - switch-off/switch-on the power supply for the Control Unit.
Note:
If it reoccurs, then replace the module.
In principle, operation could continue.
The analog channel involved possibly does not achieve the specified accuracy.
A03520 (F, N) Temperature sensor fault
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred.
It is expected that one of the following temperature sensors is connected via an analog input:
- LG-Ni1000 (p0756[2...3] = 6)
- PT1000 (p0756[2...3] = 7)
- DIN Ni 1k (p0756[2...3] = 10)
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
33: Analog input 2 (AI2) wire breakage or sensor not connected.
34: Analog input 2 (AI2) measured resistance too low (short circuit).
49: Analog input 3 (AI3) wire breakage or sensor not connected.
50: Analog input 3 (AI3) measured resistance too low (short circuit).
See also: p0756 (CU analog inputs type)
Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly.
- check the sensor for correct function and if required, replace.
- change over the analog input to type "no sensor connected" (p0756 = 8).
A05000 (N) Power unit: Overtemperature heat sink AC inverter
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The alarm threshold for overtemperature at the inverter heat sink has been reached. The response is set using p0290.
If the heat sink temperature exceeds the value set in p0292[0], then fault F30004 is output.
Remedy: Check the following:
- is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned?
- has the cooling failed?
A05001 (N) Power unit: Overtemperature depletion layer chip
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Alarm threshold for overtemperature of the power semiconductor in the AC converter has been reached.
Note:
- the response is set using p0290.
- if the temperature of the barrier layer increases by the value set in p0292[1], then fault F30025 is initiated.
Remedy: Check the following:
- is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned?
- has the cooling failed?
- pulse frequency too high?
See also: r0037, p0290
A05002 (N) Power unit: Air intake overtemperature
Reaction: NONE
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 995
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For chassis power units, the following applies:
The alarm threshold for the air intake overtemperature has been reached. For air-cooled power units, the threshold is 42
°C (hysteresis 2 K). The response is set using p0290.
If the air intake temperature increases by an additional 13 K, then fault F30035 is output.
Remedy: Check the following:
- is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- has the fan failed? Check the direction of rotation.
A05003 (N) Power unit: Internal overtemperature
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For chassis power units, the following applies:
The alarm threshold for internal overtemperature has been reached.
If the temperature inside the power unit increases by an additional 5 K, then fault F30036 is triggered.
Remedy: Check the following:
- is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- has the fan failed? Check the direction of rotation.
A05004 (N) Power unit: Rectifier overtemperature
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The alarm threshold for the overtemperature of the rectifier has been reached. The response is set using p0290.
If the temperature of the rectifier increases by an additional 5 K, then fault F30037 is triggered.
Remedy: Check the following:
- is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned?
- has the fan failed? Check the direction of rotation.
- has a phase of the line supply failed?
- is an arm of the supply (incoming) rectifier defective?
A05006 (N) Power unit: Overtemperature thermal model
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The temperature difference between the chip and heat sink has exceeded the permissible limit value (blocksize power
units only).
Depending on p0290, an appropriate overload response is initiated.
See also: r0037
Remedy: Not necessary.
The alarm disappears automatically once the limit value is undershot.
Note:
If the alarm does not disappear automatically and the temperature continues to rise, this can result in fault F30024.
See also: p0290
A05065 (F, N) Voltage measured values not plausible
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
SINAMICS G120X converter
996 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: The voltage measurement does not supply any plausible values and is not used.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret bitwise binary):
Bit 1: Phase U
Bit 2: Phase V
Bit 3: Phase W
Remedy: The following parameterization must be made in order to deactivate the alarm:
- Deactivate voltage measurement (p0247.0 = 0).
- Deactivate flying restart with voltage measurement (p0247.5 = 0) and deactivate fast flying restart (p1780.11 = 0).
F06310 (A) Supply voltage (p0210) incorrectly parameterized
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The measured DC voltage lies outside the tolerance range after precharging has been completed.
Permissible range:
1.16 * p0210 < r0070 < 1.6 * p0210
Note:
The fault can only be acknowledged when the drive is switched off.
See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage)
Remedy: - check the parameterized supply voltage and if required change (p0210).
- check the line supply voltage.
See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage)
A06921 (N) Braking resistor phase asymmetry
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: - the three resistors of the braking chopper are not symmetrical.
- DC link voltage oscillations caused by fluctuating loads of the connected drives.
Remedy: - check the feeder cables to the braking resistors.
- if required, increase the value for detecting asymmetry (p1364).
See also: p1360, p1362, r1363, p1364
F06922 Braking resistor phase failure
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A phase failure for the brake resistor was detected.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
11: Phase U
12: Phase V
13: Phase W
See also: p3235 (Phase failure signal motor monitoring time)
Remedy: Check the feeder cables to the braking resistors.
See also: p1360, p1362, r1363, p1364
F07011 Drive: Motor overtemperature
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 997
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: KTY84/PT1000:
The motor temperature has exceeded the fault threshold (p0605) or a timer after the alarm threshold was exceeded
(p0604) has expired. The response parameterized in p0610 becomes active. The alarm is withdrawn if the response
threshold for wire breakage or sensor not connected is exceeded (R > 2120 Ohm).
PTC or bimetallic NC contact:
The response threshold of 1650 Ohm was exceeded or the NC contact opened and a timer has expired. The response
parameterized in p0610 becomes active.
Possible causes:
- motor is overloaded.
- motor ambient temperature too high.
- wire breakage or sensor not connected.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
200:
Motor temperature model 1 (I2t): temperature too high.
See also: p0351, p0604, p0605, p0606, p0612, p0613, p0617, p0618, p0619, p0625, p0626, p0627, p0628
Remedy: - reduce the motor load.
- check the ambient temperature and the motor ventilation.
- check the wiring and the connection of the PTC or bimetallic NC contact.
See also: p0351, p0604, p0605, p0606, p0612, p0617, p0618, p0619, p0625, p0626, p0627, p0628
A07012 (N) Drive: Motor temperature model 1/3 overtemperature
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The motor temperature model 1/3 identified that the alarm threshold was exceeded.
Hysteresis:2K.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
200:
Motor temperature model 1 (I2t): temperature too high.
300:
Motor temperature model 3: temperature too high.
See also: r0034, p0351, p0605, p0611, p0612, p0613
Remedy: - check the motor load and if required, reduce.
- check the motor ambient temperature.
- check activation of the motor temperature model (p0612).
Motor temperature model 1 (I2t):
- check the thermal time constant (p0611).
- check alarm threshold.
Motor temperature model 3:
- check the motor type.
- check alarm threshold.
- check the model parameters.
See also: r0034, p0351, p0605, p0611, p0612, r5397
A07014 (N) Drive: Motor temperature model configuration alarm
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A fault has occurred in the configuration of the motor temperature model.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1:
All motor temperature models: It is not possible to save the model temperature
See also: p0610 (Motor overtemperature response)
SINAMICS G120X converter
998 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: - set the response for motor overtemperature to "Alarm and fault, no reduction of I_max" (p0610 = 2).
See also: p0610 (Motor overtemperature response)
A07015 Drive: Motor temperature sensor alarm
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An error was detected when evaluating the temperature sensor set in p0601.
With the fault, the time in p0607 is started. If the fault is still present after this time has expired, then fault F07016 is output;
however, at the earliest, 50 ms after alarm A07015.
Possible causes:
- wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 2120 Ohm, PT1000: R > 2120 Ohm).
- measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm, PT1000: R < 603 Ohm).
Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly.
- check the parameterization (p0601).
See also: r0035, p0601, p0607
F07016 Drive: Motor temperature sensor fault
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An error was detected when evaluating the temperature sensor set in p0601.
Possible causes:
- wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 2120 Ohm, PT1000: R > 2120 Ohm).
- measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm, PT1000: R < 603 Ohm).
Note:
If alarm A07015 is present, the time in p0607 is started. If the fault is still present after this time has expired, then fault
F07016 is output; however, at the earliest, 50 ms after alarm A07015.
See also: p0607 (Temperature sensor fault timer)
Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly.
- check the parameterization (p0601).
- induction motors: Deactivate temperature sensor fault (p0607 = 0).
See also: r0035, p0601, p0607
F07080 Drive: Incorrect control parameter
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The closed-loop control parameters have been parameterized incorrectly (e.g. p0356 = L_spread = 0).
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
The fault value includes the parameter number involved.
See also: p0310, p0311, p0341, p0344, p0350, p0354, p0356, p0357, p0358, p0360, p0400, p0640, p1082, p1300
Remedy: Modify the parameter indicated in the fault value (r0949) (e.g. p0640 = current limit > 0).
See also: p0311, p0341, p0344, p0350, p0354, p0356, p0358, p0360, p0400, p0640, p1082
F07082 Macro: Execution not possible
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 999
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: The macro cannot be executed.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
ccccbbaa hex:
cccc = preliminary parameter number, bb = supplementary information, aa = fault cause
Fault causes for the trigger parameter itself:
19: Called file is not valid for the trigger parameter.
20: Called file is not valid for parameter 15.
21: Called file is not valid for parameter 700.
22: Called file is not valid for parameter 1000.
23: Called file is not valid for parameter 1500.
24: Data type of a TAG is incorrect (e.g. Index, number or bit is not U16).
Fault causes for the parameters to be set:
25: Error level has an undefined value.
26: Mode has an undefined value.
27: A value was entered as string in the tag value that is not "DEFAULT".
31: Entered drive object type unknown.
32: A device was not able to be found for the determined drive object number.
34: A trigger parameter was recursively called.
35: It is not permissible to write to the parameter via macro.
36: Check, writing to a parameter unsuccessful, parameter can only be read, not available, incorrect data type, value range
or assignment incorrect.
37: Source parameter for a BICO interconnection was not able to be determined.
38: An index was set for a non-indexed (or CDS-dependent) parameter.
39: No index was set for an indexed parameter.
41: A bit operation is only permissible for parameters with the parameter format DISPLAY_BIN.
42: A value not equal to 0 or 1 was set for a BitOperation.
43: Reading the parameter to be changed by the BitOperation was unsuccessful.
51: Factory setting for DEVICE may only be executed on the DEVICE.
61: The setting of a value was unsuccessful.
Remedy: - check the parameter involved.
- check the macro file and BICO interconnection.
See also: p0015, p0700, p1000, p1500
F07083 Macro: ACX file not found
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The ACX file (macro) to be executed was not able to be found in the appropriate directory.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number with which the execution was started.
See also: p0015, p0700, p1000, p1500
Remedy: - check whether the file is saved in the appropriate directory on the memory card.
F07084 Macro: Condition for WaitUntil not fulfilled
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The WaitUntil condition set in the macro was not fulfilled in a certain number of attempts.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number for which the condition was set.
Remedy: Check and correct the conditions for the WaitUntil loop.
SINAMICS G120X converter
1000 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
F07086 Units changeover: Parameter limit violation due to reference value change
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A reference parameter was changed in the system. This resulted in the fact that for the parameters involved, the selected
value was not able to be written in the per unit notation.
The values of the parameters were set to the corresponding violated minimum limit/maximum limit or to the factory setting.
Possible causes:
- the steady-state minimum limit/maximum limit or that defined in the application was violated.
Fault value (r0949, parameter):
Diagnostics parameter to display the parameters that were not able to be re-calculated.
See also: p0304, p0305, p0310, p0596, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004
Remedy: Check the adapted parameter value and if required correct.
See also: r9450 (Reference value change parameter with unsuccessful calculation)
F07088 Units changeover: Parameter limit violation due to units changeover
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A changeover of units was initiated. This resulted in a violation of a parameter limit
Possible causes for the violation of a parameter limit:
- When rounding off a parameter corresponding to its decimal places, the steady-state minimum limit or maximum limit was
violated.
- inaccuracies for the data type "FloatingPoint".
In these cases, when the minimum limit is violated then the parameter value is rounded up and when the maximum limited
is violated the parameter value is rounded down.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Diagnostics parameter r9451 to display all parameters whose value had to be adapted.
See also: p0100, p0505, p0595
Remedy: Check the adapted parameter values and if required correct.
See also: r9451 (Units changeover adapted parameters)
A07089 Changing over units: Function module activation is blocked because the units have been changed
over
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An attempt was made to activate a function module. This is not permissible if the units have already been changed over.
See also: p0100, p0505
Remedy: Restore units that have been changed over to the factory setting.
A07094 General parameter limit violation
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: As a result of the violation of a parameter limit, the parameter value was automatically corrected.
Minimum limit violated --> parameter is set to the minimum value.
Maximum limit violated --> parameter is set to the maximum value.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Parameter number, whose value had to be adapted.
Remedy: Check the adapted parameter values and if required correct.
A07200 Drive: Master control ON command present
Reaction: NONE
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1001
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The ON/OFF1 command is present (no 0 signal).
The command is either influenced via binector input p0840 (current CDS) or control word bit 0 via the master control.
Remedy: Switch the signal via binector input p0840 (current CDS) or control word bit 0 via the master control to 0.
F07220 (N, A) Drive: Master control by PLC missing
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The "master control by PLC" signal was missing in operation.
- interconnection of the binector input for "master control by PLC" is incorrect (p0854).
- the higher-level control has withdrawn the "master control by PLC" signal.
- data transfer via the fieldbus (master/drive) was interrupted.
Remedy: - check the interconnection of the binector input for "master control by PLC" (p0854).
- check the "master control by PLC" signal and, if required, switch in.
- check the data transfer via the fieldbus (master/drive).
Note:
If the drive should continue to operate after withdrawing "master control by PLC" then fault response must be
parameterized to NONE or the message type should be parameterized as alarm.
F07300 (A) Drive: Line contactor feedback signal missing
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: - the line contactor was not able to be closed within the time in p0861.
- the line contactor was not able to be opened within the time in p0861.
- the line contactor dropped out during operation
- the line contactor has closed although the drive converter is switched off.
Remedy: - check the setting of p0860.
- check the feedback circuit from the line contactor.
- increase the monitoring time in p0861.
See also: p0860, p0861
F07311 Bypass motor switch
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault value (r0949, interpret bitwise binary):
Bit 1: Switch "Closed" feedback signal missing.
Bit 2: Switch "Open" feedback signal missing.
Bit 3: Switch feedback signal too slow.
After switching, the system waits for the positive feedback signal. If the feedback signal is received later than the specified
time, then a fault trip (shutdown) is issued.
Bit 6: Drive switch feedback signal not consistent with the bypass state.
The drive switch is closed when switching-on or when switching-in the motor.
See also: p1260, r1261, p1266, p1267, p1269, p1274
Remedy: - check the transfer of the feedback signals.
- check the switch.
F07312 Bypass Line Side Switch:
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
SINAMICS G120X converter
1002 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: Fault value (r0949, interpret bitwise binary):
Bit 1: Switch "Closed" feedback signal missing.
Bit 2: Switch "Open" feedback signal missing.
Bit 3: Switch feedback signal too slow.
After switching, the system waits for the positive feedback signal. If the feedback signal is received later than the specified
time, then a fault trip (shutdown) is issued.
Bit 6: Line Side Switch feedback signal not consistent with the bypass state.
When switching-on or when switching-in the motor, the line side switch is closed without this having been requested from
the bypass.
See also: p1260, r1261, p1266, p1267, p1269, p1274
Remedy: - check the transfer of the feedback signals.
- check the switch.
F07320 Drive: Automatic restart interrupted
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: - the specified number of restart attempts (p1211) has been completely used up because within the monitoring time
(p1213) the faults were not able to be acknowledged. The number of restart attempts (p1211) is decremented at each new
start attempt.
- the monitoring time for the power unit has expired (p0857).
- when exiting commissioning or at the end of the motor identification routine or the speed controller optimization, the drive
unit is not automatically switched on again.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - increase the number of restart attempts (p1211). The actual number of starting attempts is displayed in r1214.
- increase the delay time in p1212 and/or the monitoring time in p1213.
- either increase or disable the monitoring time of the power unit (p0857).
- reduce the delay time to reset the start counter (p1213[1]) so that fewer faults are registered in the time interval.
A07321 Drive: Automatic restart active
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The automatic restart (AR) is active. When the line supply returns and/or the causes of the existing faults are removed the
drive is automatically restarted. The pulses are enabled and the motor starts to rotate.
For p1210 = 26, restarting is realized with the delayed setting of the ON command.
Remedy: - the automatic restart (AR) should, if required, be inhibited (p1210 = 0).
- an automatic restart can be directly interrupted by withdrawing the switch-on command (BI: p0840).
- for p1210 = 26: by withdrawing the OFF2- / OFF3 command.
A07325 Drive: Hibernation mode active - drive automatically switched-on again
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The "hibernation" function is active (p2398). The drive automatically powers itself up again as soon as the restart conditions
are present.
See also: p2398, r2399
Remedy: Not necessary.
The alarm is automatically withdrawn when the motor is restarted or when the motor is manually switched off.
F07330 Flying restart: Measured search current too low
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1003
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: During a flying restart, it was identified that the search current reached is too low.
It is possible that the motor is not connected.
Remedy: Check the motor feeder cables.
F07331 Flying restart: Function not supported
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: It is not possible to power up with the motor rotating (no flying restart).
In the following cases, the "flying restart" function is not supported:
PMSM: operation with U/f characteristic and sensorless vector control.
Note:
PMSM: permanent-magnet synchronous motor
Remedy: Deactivate the "flying restart" function (p1200 = 0).
F07332 Flying restart: maximum speed reduced
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The maximum speed that can be reached is reduced; at very high speeds problems associated with the flying restart can
be encountered.
Possible causes:
- power ratio, power unit/motor too high
Remedy: Parameter changes are not required.
Note:
A flying restart at speeds above 3000 rpm should be avoided.
A07352 Drive: Limit switch signals not plausible
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Limit switch signals are not plausible.
Possible causes:
- BICO interconnections are not OK (p3342, p3343).
- sensors are not supplying a valid signal (both supply a 0 signal).
Remedy: - check the BICO interconnections for the limit switch signals.
- check the sensors.
See also: p3342, p3343
A07353 Drive: DC quantity control deactivated
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The DC quantity control has deactivated itself.
The manipulated variable of the DC quantity control was at its limit.
Remedy: Optimize the DC quantity controller (Kp, Tn, bandwidth, PT2 filter).
Note:
After changing the corresponding parameters, the DC quantity control is re-enabled and the alarm is automatically
withdrawn.
See also: p3857, p3858
F07390 Drive: DC link capacitor forming fault
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
SINAMICS G120X converter
1004 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: The "DC link capacitor forming" function was canceled with fault (r3382.3 = 1). The expected DC link voltage is out of
tolerance.
See also: p3380, r3382
Remedy: - check drive device (supply voltage, terminals, ...).
- set activation/duration again (p3380 > 0).
- restart forming (p0840 = 0/1 signal).
A07391 Drive: DC link capacitor forming active
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The "DC link capacitor forming" function is active. The remaining time of the operation is displayed in parameter r3381.
See also: p3380 (Forming activation/duration)
Remedy: Not necessary.
The alarm is automatically withdrawn after forming has been completed (r3382.2 = 1).
See also: r3382 (Forming status word)
A07400 (N) Drive: DC link voltage maximum controller active
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The DC link voltage controller has been activated because the upper switch-in threshold has been exceeded (r1242,
r1282).
The ramp-down times are automatically increased in order to maintain the DC link voltage (r0070) within the permissible
limits. There is a system deviation between the setpoint and actual speeds.
When the DC link voltage controller is switched out (disabled), this is the reason that the ramp-function generator output
is set to the speed actual value.
See also: r0056, p1240, p1280
Remedy: If the controller is not to intervene:
- increase the ramp-down times.
- switch off the Vdc_max controller (p1240 = 0 for vector control, p1280 = 0 for U/f control).
If the ramp-down times are not to be changed:
- use a chopper or regenerative feedback unit.
A07401 (N) Drive: DC link voltage maximum controller deactivated
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The Vdc_max controller can no longer maintain the DC link voltage (r0070) below the limit value (r1242, r1282) and was
therefore switched out (disabled).
- the line supply voltage is permanently higher than specified for the power unit.
- the motor is permanently in the regenerative mode as a result of a load that is driving the motor.
Remedy: - check whether the input voltage is within the permissible range (if required, increase the value in p0210).
- check whether the load duty cycle and load limits are within the permissible limits.
A07402 (N) Drive: DC link voltage minimum controller active
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The DC link voltage controller has been activated as the lower switch-in threshold has been undershot (r1246, r1286).
The kinetic energy of the motor is used to buffer the DC link. The drive is therefore braked.
See also: r0056, p1240, p1280
Remedy: The alarm disappears when power supply returns.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1005
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
F07405 (N, A) Drive: Kinetic buffering minimum speed fallen below
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: During kinetic buffering the speed fell below minimum speed (p1257 or p1297 for vector drives with U/f control) and the line
supply did not return.
Remedy: Check the speed threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) (p1257, p1297).
See also: p1257, p1297
F07406 (N, A) Drive: Kinetic buffering maximum time exceeded
Reaction: OFF3 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The maximum buffer time (p1255 and p1295 for vector drives with U/f control) has been exceeded without the line supply
having returned.
Remedy: Check the time threshold for Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering) (p1255, p1295).
See also: p1255, p1295
A07409 (N) Drive: U/f control, current limiting controller active
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The current limiting controller of the U/f control was activated because the current limit was exceeded.
Remedy: The alarm is automatically withdrawn after one of the following measures:
- increase current limit (p0640).
- reduce the load.
- slow down the ramp up to the setpoint speed.
F07410 Drive: Current controller output limited
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The condition "I_act = 0 and Uq_set_1 longer than 16 ms at its limit" is present and can be caused by the following:
- motor not connected or motor contactor open.
- motor data and motor configuration (star-delta) do not match.
- no DC link voltage present.
- power unit defective.
- the "flying restart" function is not activated.
Remedy: - connect the motor or check the motor contactor.
- check the motor parameterization and the connection type (star-delta).
- check the DC link voltage (r0070).
- check the power unit.
- activate the "flying restart" function (p1200).
F07411 Drive: Flux setpoint not reached when building up excitation
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
SINAMICS G120X converter
1006 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: When quick magnetizing is configured (p1401.6 = 1) the specified flux setpoint is not reached although 90% of the
maximum current is specified.
- incorrect motor data.
- motor data and motor configuration (star-delta) do not match.
- the current limit has been set too low for the motor.
- induction motor (encoderless, open-loop controlled) in I2t limiting.
- power unit is too small.
- the magnetizing time is too short.
Remedy: - correct the motor data. Perform motor data identification and rotating measurement.
- check the motor configuration.
- correct the current limits (p0640).
- reduce the induction motor load.
- if necessary, use a larger power unit.
- check motor supply cable.
- check power unit.
- increase p0346.
A07416 Drive: Flux controller configuration
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The configuration of the flux control (p1401) is contradictory.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ccbbaaaa hex
aaaa = Parameter
bb = Index
cc = fault cause
1: Quick magnetizing (p1401.6) for soft starting (p1401.0).
2: Quick magnetizing for flux build-up control (p1401.2).
3: Quick magnetizing (p1401.6) for Rs identification after restart (p0621 = 2).
Remedy: For fault cause = 1:
- Shut down soft start (p1401.0 = 0).
- Shut down quick magnetizing (p1401.6 = 0).
For fault cause = 2:
- switch-on flux build-up control (p1401.2 = 1).
- Shut down quick magnetizing (p1401.6 = 0).
For fault cause = 3:
- Re-parameterize Rs identification (p0621 = 0, 1)
- Shut down quick magnetizing (p1401.6 = 0).
F07426 (A) Technology controller actual value limited
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The actual value for the technology controller, interconnected via connector input p2264, has reached a limit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: upper limit reached.
2: lower limit reached.
Remedy: - adapt the limits to the signal level (p2267, p2268).
- check the actual value normalization (p0595, p0596).
See also: p0595, p0596, p2264, p2267, p2268
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1007
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
A07427 Motor switch-in alarm
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1:
The technology controller is not active or is not being used to control the main setpoint (see p2251).
2:
The operating time limits have been exceeded in at least one external motor.
Remedy: For alarm value = 1:
- enable technology controller (p2200).
- set technology controller mode p2251 = 0 (main setpoint).
For alarm value = 2:
- increase p2381, p2382 or set p2380 = 0.
A07428 (N) Technology controller parameterizing error
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The technology controller has a parameterizing error.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1:
The upper output limit in p2291 is set lower than the lower output limit in p2292.
Remedy: For alarm value = 1:
Set the output limit in p2291 higher than in p2292.
See also: p2291, p2292
F07435 (N) Drive: Setting the ramp-function generator for sensorless vector control
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: During operation with sensorless vector control (r1407.1) the ramp-function generator was stopped (p1141). An internal
setting command of the ramp-function generator output caused the set setpoint speed to be frozen.
Remedy: - deactivate the holding command for the ramp-function generator (p1141).
- suppress the fault (p2101, p2119). This is necessary if the ramp-function generator is held using jogging and the speed
setpoint is simultaneously inhibited (r0898.6).
F07436 (A) Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value limited
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The actual value for the free technology controller 0 has reached the limit.
The signal source for the actual value is set via connector input p11064.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The actual value has reached the upper limit.
2: The actual value has reached the lower limit.
Remedy: - adapt the limit settings to the actual value signal (p11067, p11068).
- check the scaling of the actual value signal.
- check the signal source setting for the actual value (p11064).
See also: p11064, p11067, p11068
F07437 (A) Free tec_ctrl 1 actual value limited
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
SINAMICS G120X converter
1008 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: The actual value for the free technology controller 1 has reached the limit.
The signal source for the actual value is set via connector input p11164.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The actual value has reached the upper limit.
2: The actual value has reached the lower limit.
Remedy: - adapt the limit settings to the actual value signal (p11167, p11168).
- check the scaling of the actual value signal.
- check the signal source setting for the actual value (p11164).
See also: p11164, p11167, p11168
F07438 (A) Free tec_ctrl 2 actual value limited
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The actual value for the free technology controller 2 has reached the limit.
The signal source for the actual value is set via connector input p11264.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The actual value has reached the upper limit.
2: The actual value has reached the lower limit.
Remedy: - adapt the limit settings to the actual value signal (p11267, p11268).
- check the scaling of the actual value signal.
- check the signal source setting for the actual value (p11264).
See also: p11264, p11267, p11268
A07444 PID autotuning is activated
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Automatic setting of the PID controller parameters (PID autotuning) was activated (p2350).
See also: p2350 (Enable PID autotuning)
Remedy: Not necessary.
This alarm is automatically withdrawn after the PID autotuning has been completed.
F07445 PID autotuning canceled
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The PID autotuning was canceled as a result of an error.
Remedy: - increase the offset.
- check system configuration.
A07530 Drive: Drive Data Set DDS not present
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected drive data set is not available (p0837 > p0180). The drive data set was not changed over.
See also: p0180, p0820, p0821, p0822, p0823, p0824, r0837
Remedy: - select the existing drive data set.
- set up additional drive data sets.
A07531 Drive: Command Data Set CDS not present
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1009
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: The selected command data set is not available (p0836 > p0170). The command data set was not changed over.
See also: p0810, p0811, p0812, p0813, r0836
Remedy: - select the existing command data set.
- set up additional command data sets.
F07800 Drive: No power unit present
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power unit parameters cannot be read or no parameters are stored in the power unit.
Note:
This fault also occurs if an incorrect topology was selected in the commissioning software and this parameterization is then
downloaded to the Control Unit.
See also: r0200 (Power unit code number actual)
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- check the power unit and replace if necessary.
- check the Control Unit, and if required replace it.
- after correcting the topology, the parameters must be again downloaded using the commissioning software.
F07801 Drive: Motor overcurrent
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The permissible motor limit current was exceeded.
- effective current limit set too low.
- current controller not correctly set.
- U/f operation: Up ramp was set too short or the load is too high.
- U/f operation: Short-circuit in the motor cable or ground fault.
- U/f operation: Motor current does not match current of power unit.
- Switch to rotating motor without flying restart function (p1200).
Note:
Limit current = 2 x minimum (p0640, 4 x p0305 x p0306) >= 2 x p0305 x p0306
Remedy: - check the current limits (p0640).
- vector control: Check the current controller (p1715, p1717).
- U/f control: Check the current limiting controller (p1340 ... p1346).
- increase the up ramp (p1120) or reduce the load.
- check the motor and motor cables for short-circuit and ground fault.
- check the motor for the star-delta configuration and rating plate parameterization.
- check the power unit and motor combination.
- Choose "flying restart" function (p1200) if switched to rotating motor.
F07802 Drive: Infeed or power unit not ready
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: After an internal switch-on command, the infeed or drive does not signal ready.
- monitoring time is too short.
- DC link voltage is not present.
- associated infeed or drive of the signaling component is defective.
- supply voltage incorrectly set.
SINAMICS G120X converter
1010 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: - increase the monitoring time (p0857).
- ensure that there is a DC link voltage. Check the DC link busbar. Enable the infeed.
- replace the associated infeed or drive of the signaling component.
- check the line supply voltage setting (p0210).
See also: p0857 (Power unit monitoring time)
A07805 (N) Drive: Power unit overload I2t
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Alarm threshold for I2t overload (p0294) of the power unit exceeded.
The response parameterized in p0290 becomes active.
See also: p0290
Remedy: - reduce the continuous load.
- adapt the load duty cycle.
- check the assignment of the motor and power unit rated currents.
F07806 Drive: Regenerative power limit exceeded (F3E)
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRK)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For blocksize power units, types PM250 and PM260, the regenerative rated power r0206[2] was exceeded for more than
10 s.
See also: r0206, p1531
Remedy: - increase the down ramp.
- reduce the driving load.
- use a power unit with a higher regenerative feedback capability.
- for vector control, the regenerative power limit in p1531 can be reduced so that the fault is no longer triggered.
F07807 Drive: Short-circuit/ground fault detected
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A phase-phase short-circuit or ground fault was detected at the motor-side output terminals of the converter.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Short-circuit, phase UV.
2: Short-circuit, phase UW.
3: Short-circuit, phase VW.
4: Ground fault with overcurrent.
5: Motor cable phase U interrupted
6: Motor cable phase V interrupted
7: Motor cable phase W interrupted
8: Short-circuit with hardware shutdown
1yxxx: Ground fault with current in phase U detected (y = pulse number, xxxx = component of the current in phase V in per
mille).
2yxxx: Ground fault with current in phase V detected (y = pulse number, xxxx = component of the current in phase U in per
mille).
Note:
Also when interchanging the line and motor cables is identified as a motor-side short circuit.
The ground fault test only functions when the motor is stationary.
Connecting to a motor that is either not de-energized or partially de-energized is possibly detected as ground fault.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1011
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: - check the motor-side converter connection for a phase-phase short-circuit.
- rule-out interchanged line and motor cables.
- check for a ground fault.
- check the motor cable connections
For a ground fault the following applies:
- do not enable the pulses when connecting to a rotating motor without the "Flying restart" function activated (p1200).
- increase the de-energization time (p0347).
- increase pulse suppression delay time (p1228) to ensure standstill.
- if required, deactivate the monitoring (p1901).
F07810 Drive: Power unit EEPROM without rated data
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: No rated data are stored in the power unit EEPROM.
See also: p0205, r0206, r0207, r0208, r0209
Remedy: Replace the power unit or inform Siemens Customer Service.
A07850 (F) External alarm 1
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The condition for "External alarm 1" is satisfied.
Note:
The "External alarm 1" is initiated by a 1/0 edge via binector input p2112.
See also: p2112 (External alarm 1)
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this alarm.
A07851 (F) External alarm 2
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The condition for "External alarm 2" is satisfied.
Note:
The "External alarm 2" is initiated by a 1/0 edge via binector input p2116.
See also: p2116 (External alarm 2)
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this alarm.
A07852 (F) External alarm 3
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The condition for "External alarm 3" is satisfied.
Note:
The "External alarm 3" is initiated by a 1/0 edge via binector input p2117.
See also: p2117
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this alarm.
F07860 (A) External fault 1
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
SINAMICS G120X converter
1012 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: The condition for "External fault 1" is satisfied.
Note:
The "External fault 1" is initiated by a 1/0 edge via binector input p2106.
See also: p2106 (External fault 1)
Remedy: - eliminate the causes of this fault.
- acknowledge fault.
F07861 (A) External fault 2
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The condition for "External fault 2" is satisfied.
Note:
The "External fault 2" is initiated by a 1/0 edge via binector input p2107.
See also: p2107 (External fault 2)
Remedy: - eliminate the causes of this fault.
- acknowledge fault.
F07862 (A) External fault 3
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The condition for "External fault 3" is satisfied.
Note:
The "External fault 3" is initiated by a 1/0 edge via the following parameters.
- AND logic operation, binector input p2108, p3111, p3112.
- switch-on delay p3110.
See also: p2108, p3110, p3111, p3112
Remedy: - eliminate the causes of this fault.
- acknowledge fault.
A07891 Drive: Load monitoring pump/fan blocked
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The load monitoring is configured for a pump or fan (p2193 = 4, 5).
The monitoring function detects when the pump/fan is blocked.
It is possible that the blocking torque threshold (p2168) is set too low (e.g. heavy duty starting).
See also: p2165, p2168, p2181, p2193
Remedy: - check whether the pump/fan is blocked, and if blocked, then resolve the problem.
- check that the fan can freely move, and if necessary, resolve the problem.
- adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load (p2165, p2168)..
A07892 Drive: Load monitoring pump/fan no load condition
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The load monitoring is configured for a pump or fan (p2193 = 4, 5).
The monitoring function detects when the pump/fan is operating under no load conditions.
The pump is running in the dry state (no medium to be pumped) – or the fan has a broken belt.
It is possible that the detection torque threshold is too low (p2191).
See also: p2181, p2191, p2193
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1013
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: - for a pump, check the medium being pumped, and if required, provide the medium.
- for a fan, check the belt, and if required, replace.
- if necessary, increase the detection torque threshold (p2191).
A07893 Drive: Load monitoring pump leakage
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The load monitoring is configured for a pump (p2193 = 4).
The monitoring function detects a leak in the pump circuit.
In this case, the pump requires a torque that is lower than in normal operation to pump the reduced quantity.
See also: p2181, p2182, p2183, p2184, p2186, p2188, p2190, p2193
Remedy: - remove the leak in the pump circuit.
- for a nuisance trip, reduce the torque thresholds of the leakage characteristic (p2186, p2188, p2190).
F07894 Drive: Load monitoring pump/fan blocked
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The load monitoring is configured for a pump or fan (p2193 = 4, 5).
The monitoring function detects when the pump/fan is blocked.
It is possible that the blocking torque threshold (p2168) is set too low (e.g. heavy duty starting).
See also: p2165, p2168, p2181, p2193
Remedy: - check whether the pump/fan is blocked, and if blocked, then resolve the problem.
- check that the fan can freely move, and if necessary, resolve the problem.
- adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load (p2165, p2168)..
F07895 Drive: Load monitoring pump/fan no load condition
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The load monitoring is configured for a pump or fan (p2193 = 4, 5).
The monitoring function detects when the pump/fan is operating under no load conditions.
The pump is running in the dry state (no medium to be pumped) – or the fan has a broken belt.
It is possible that the detection torque threshold is too low (p2191).
See also: p2181, p2191, p2193
Remedy: - for a pump, check the medium being pumped, and if required, provide the medium.
- for a fan, check the belt, and if required, replace.
- if necessary, increase the detection torque threshold (p2191).
F07896 Drive: Load monitoring pump leakage
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The load monitoring is configured for a pump (p2193 = 4).
The monitoring function detects a leak in the pump circuit.
In this case, the pump requires a torque that is lower than in normal operation to pump the reduced quantity.
See also: p2181, p2182, p2183, p2184, p2186, p2188, p2190, p2193
Remedy: - remove the leak in the pump circuit.
- for a nuisance trip, reduce the torque thresholds of the leakage characteristic (p2186, p2188, p2190).
F07900 (N, A) Drive: Motor blocked
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
SINAMICS G120X converter
1014 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: Motor has been operating at the torque limit longer than the time specified in p2177 and below the speed threshold in
p2175.
This signal can also be triggered if the speed is oscillating and the speed controller output repeatedly goes to its limit.
It may also be the case that thermal monitoring of the power unit reduces the current limit (see p0290), thereby causing
the motor to decelerate.
See also: p2175, p2177
Remedy: - check that the motor can freely move.
- check the effective torque limit (r1538, r1539).
- check the parameter, message "Motor blocked" and if required, correct (p2175, p2177).
- check the direction of rotation enable signals for a flying restart of the motor (p1110, p1111).
- for U/f control: check the current limits and acceleration times (p0640, p1120).
F07901 Drive: Motor overspeed
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRK)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The maximum permissible speed was either positively or negatively exceeded.
The maximum permissible positive speed is formed as follows: Minimum (p1082, CI: p1085) + p2162
The maximum permissible negative speed is formed as follows: Maximum (-p1082, CI: 1088) - p2162
Remedy: The following applies for a positive direction of rotation:
- check r1084 and if required, correct p1082, CI:p1085 and p2162.
The following applies for a negative direction of rotation:
- check r1087 and if required, correct p1082, CI:p1088 and p2162.
Activate precontrol of the speed limiting controller (p1401.7 = 1).
Increase the hysteresis for the overspeed signal p2162. This upper limit is dependent upon the maximum motor speed
p0322 and the maximum speed p1082 of the setpoint channel.
F07902 (N, A) Drive: Motor stalled
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The system has identified that the motor has stalled for a time longer than is set in p2178.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Reserved.
2: Stall detection using r1408.12 (p1745) or via (r0084 ... r0083).
See also: p2178 (Motor stalled delay time)
Remedy: Steps should always be taken to ensure that both motor data identification and the rotating measurement were carried out
(see p1900, r3925).
- check whether the drive stalls solely due to the load in controlled mode or when the speed setpoint is still zero. If yes, then
increase the current setpoint using p1610.
- if the motor excitation time (p0346) was significantly reduced and the drive stalls when it is switched on and run
immediately, p0346 should be increased again.
- check whether a line phase failure is affecting power unit PM230, PM250, PM260.
- check whether the motor cables are disconnected (see A07929).
If there is no fault, then the fault tolerance (p1745) or the delay time (p2178) can be increased.
- check the current limits (p0640, r0067, r0289). If the current limits are too low, then the drive cannot be magnetized.
- if the fault occurs with fault value 2 when the motor accelerates very quickly to the field weakening range, the deviation
between the flux setpoint and flux actual value can be reduced and, in turn, the message prevented, by reducing p1596
or p1553.
A07903 Drive: Motor speed deviation
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1015
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: The absolute value of the speed difference from the setpoint (p2151) and the speed actual value (r2169) exceeds the
tolerance threshold (p2163) longer than tolerated (p2164, p2166).
The alarm is only enabled for p2149.0 = 1.
Possible causes:
- the load torque is greater than the torque setpoint.
- when accelerating, the torque/current/power limit is reached. If the limits are not sufficient, then it is possible that the drive
has been dimensioned too small.
- for active Vdc controller.
For U/f control, the overload condition is detected as the I_max controller is active.
See also: p2149 (Monitoring configuration)
Remedy: - increase p2163 and/or p2166.
- increase the torque/current/power limits.
- deactivate alarm with p2149.0 = 0.
A07910 (N) Drive: Motor overtemperature
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: KTY84/PT1000 or no sensor:
The measured motor temperature or the temperature of the motor temperature model 2 has exceeded the alarm threshold
(p0604). The response parameterized in p0610 becomes active.
PTC or bimetallic NC contact:
The response threshold of 1650 Ohm was exceeded or the NC contact opened.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
11: No output current reduction.
12: Output current reduction active.
See also: p0604, p0610
Remedy: - check the motor load.
- check the motor ambient temperature.
- check KTY84/PT1000.
- check overtemperatures of the motor temperature model 2 (p0626 ... p0628).
See also: p0612, p0617, p0618, p0619, p0625, p0626, p0627, p0628
A07920 Drive: Torque/speed too low
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For p2193 = 1:
The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic (too low).
For p2193 = 2:
The speed signal from the external encoder (refer to p3230) deviates from the speed (r2169) (too low).
See also: p2181 (Load monitoring response)
Remedy: - check the connection between the motor and load.
- adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load.
A07921 Drive: Torque/speed too high
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For p2193 = 1:
The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic (too high).
For p2193 = 2:
The speed signal from the external encoder (refer to p3230) deviates from the speed (r2169) (too high).
SINAMICS G120X converter
1016 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: - check the connection between the motor and load.
- adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load.
A07922 Drive: Torque/speed out of tolerance
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For p2193 = 1:
The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic.
For p2193 = 2:
The speed signal from the external encoder (refer to p3230) deviates from the speed (r2169).
Remedy: - check the connection between the motor and load.
- adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load.
F07923 Drive: Torque/speed too low
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For p2193 = 1:
The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic (too low).
For p2193 = 2:
The speed signal from the external encoder (refer to p3230) deviates from the speed (r2169) (too low).
Remedy: - check the connection between the motor and load.
- adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load.
F07924 Drive: Torque/speed too high
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For p2193 = 1:
The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic (too high).
For p2193 = 2:
The speed signal from the external encoder (refer to p3230) deviates from the speed (r2169) (too high).
Remedy: - check the connection between the motor and load.
- adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load.
F07925 Drive: Torque/speed out of tolerance
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For p2193 = 1:
The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic.
For p2193 = 2:
The speed signal from the external encoder (refer to p3230) deviates from the speed (r2169).
Remedy: - check the connection between the motor and load.
- adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load.
A07926 Drive: Envelope curve parameter invalid
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1017
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: Invalid parameter values were entered for the envelope characteristic of the load monitoring.
The following rules apply for the speed thresholds:
p2182 < p2183 < p2184
The following rules apply for the torque thresholds:
p2185 > p2186
p2187 > p2188
p2189 > p2190
Load monitoring configuration and response must match.
It is not permissible that the individual load torque monitoring areas overlap.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Number of the parameter with the invalid value.
The load torque monitoring has not been activated as long as the alarm is active.
Remedy: - set the parameters for the load monitoring according to the applicable rules.
- if necessary, deactivate the load monitoring (p2181 = 0, p2193 = 0).
A07927 DC braking active
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The motor is braked with DC current. DC braking is active.
1)
A message with response DCBRK is active. The motor is braked with the braking current set in p1232 for the duration set
in in p1233. If the standstill threshold p1226 is undershot, then braking is prematurely canceled.
2)
DC braking has been activated at binector input p1230 with the DC braking set (p1230 = 4). Braking current p1232 is
injected until this binector input becomes inactive.
Remedy: Not necessary.
The alarm automatically disappears once DC braking has been executed.
A07929 (F) Drive: No motor detected
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The absolute current value is so small after enabling the inverter pulses that no motor is detected.
Note:
- in the case of vector control and an induction motor, this alarm is followed by fault F07902.
- PM330: Correction currents are calculated and displayed in the optimized pulse pattern range.
See also: p2179 (Output load identification current limit)
Remedy: - check the motor feeder cables.
- reduce the threshold value (p2179), e.g. for synchronous motors.
- increase threshold value (PM330).
- check the voltage boost of the U/f control (p1310).
- carry out a standstill measurement to set the stator resistance (p0350).
F07936 Drive: load failure
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The load monitoring has detected a load failure.
Remedy: - check the sensor.
- if necessary, deactivate the load monitoring (p2193).
See also: p2193, p3232
SINAMICS G120X converter
1018 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
F07950 (A) Motor parameter incorrect
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The motor parameters were incorrectly entered while commissioning (e.g. p0300 = 0, no motor)
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Parameter number involved.
See also: p0300, p0301, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0310, p0311, p0314, p0315, p0316, p0320, p0322, p0323
Remedy: Compare the motor data with the rating plate data and if required, correct.
F07967 Drive: Incorrect pole position identification
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred during the pole position identification routine.
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
F07968 Drive: Lq-Ld measurement incorrect
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred during the Lq-Ld measurement.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
10: Stage 1: The ratio between the measured current and zero current is too low.
12: Stage 1: The maximum current was exceeded.
15: Second harmonic too low.
16: Drive converter too small for the measuring technique.
17: Abort due to pulse inhibit.
Remedy: For fault value = 10:
Check whether the motor is correctly connected.
Replace the power unit involved.
Deactivate technique (p1909).
For fault value = 12:
Check whether motor data have been correctly entered.
Deactivate technique (p1909).
For fault value = 16:
Deactivate technique (p1909).
For fault value = 17:
Repeat technique.
F07969 Drive: Incorrect pole position identification
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1019
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: A fault has occurred during the pole position identification routine.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Current controller limited
2: Motor shaft locked.
10: Stage 1: The ratio between the measured current and zero current is too low.
11: Stage 2: The ratio between the measured current and zero current is too low.
12: Stage 1: The maximum current was exceeded.
13: Stage 2: The maximum current was exceeded.
14: Current difference to determine the +d axis too low.
15: Second harmonic too low.
16: Drive converter too small for the measuring technique.
17: Abort due to pulse inhibit.
18: First harmonic too low.
20: Pole position identification requested with the motor shaft rotating and activated "flying restart" function.
Remedy: For fault value = 1:
Check whether the motor is correctly connected.
Check whether motor data have been correctly entered.
Replace the power unit involved.
For fault value = 2:
Bring the motor into a no-load condition.
For fault value = 10:
When selecting p1980 = 4: Increase the value for p0325.
When selecting p1980 = 1: Increase the value for p0329.
Check whether the motor is correctly connected.
Replace the power unit involved.
For fault value = 11:
Increase the value for p0329.
Check whether the motor is correctly connected.
Replace the power unit involved.
For fault value = 12:
When selecting p1980 = 4: Reduce the value for p0325.
When selecting p1980 = 1: Reduce the value for p0329.
Check whether motor data have been correctly entered.
For fault value = 13:
Reduce the value for p0329.
Check whether motor data have been correctly entered.
For fault value = 14:
Increase the value for p0329.
For fault value = 15:
Increase the value for p0325.
Motor not sufficiently anisotropic, change the technique (p1980 = 1, 10).
For fault value = 16:
Change the technique (p1980).
For fault value = 17:
Repeat technique.
For fault value = 18:
Increase the value for p0329.
Saturation not sufficient, change the technique (p1980 = 10).
For fault value = 20:
Before carrying out a pole position identification routine ensure that the motor shaft is absolutely stationary (zero speed).
SINAMICS G120X converter
1020 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
A07980 Drive: Rotating measurement activated
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The rotating measurement (automatic speed controller optimization) is activated.
The rotating measurement is carried out at the next switch-on command.
Note:
During the rotating measurement it is not possible to save the parameters (p0971).
See also: p1960 (Rotating measurement selection)
Remedy: Not necessary.
The alarm disappears automatically after the speed controller optimization has been successfully completed or for the
setting p1900 = 0.
A07981 Drive: Enable signals for the rotating measurement missing
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The rotating measurement cannot be started due to missing enable signals.
For p1959.13 = 1, the following applies:
- enable signals for the ramp-function generator missing (see p1140 ... p1142).
- enable signals for the speed controller integrator missing (see p1476, p1477).
Remedy: - acknowledge faults that are present.
- establish missing enable signals.
See also: r0002, r0046
F07983 Drive: Rotating measurement saturation characteristic
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred while determining the saturation characteristic.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The speed did not reach a steady-state condition.
2: The rotor flux did not reach a steady-state condition.
3: The adaptation circuit did not reach a steady-state condition.
4: The adaptation circuit was not enabled.
5: Field weakening active.
6: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active.
7: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
8: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active.
9: Several values of the determined saturation characteristic are not plausible.
10: Saturation characteristic could not be sensibly determined because load torque too high.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1021
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: For fault value = 1:
- the total drive moment of inertia is far higher than that of the motor (p0341, p0342).
De-select rotating measurement (p1960), enter the moment of inertia p0342, re-calculate the speed controller p0340 = 4
and repeat the measurement.
For fault value = 1 ... 2:
- increase the measuring speed (p1961) and repeat the measurement.
For fault value = 1 ... 4:
- check the motor parameters (rating plate data). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
- check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
- carry out a motor data identification routine (p1910).
- if required, reduce the dynamic factor (p1967 < 25 %).
For fault value = 5:
- the speed setpoint (p1961) is too high. Reduce the speed.
For fault value = 6:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1961) or minimum limiting (p1080).
For fault value = 7:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1961) or suppression (skip) bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094, p1101).
For fault value = 8:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1961) or maximum limit (p1082, p1083 and p1086).
For fault value = 9, 10:
- the measurement was carried out at an operating point where the load torque is too high. Select a more suitable operating
point, either by changing the speed setpoint (p1961) or by reducing the load torque. The load torque may not be varied
while making measurements.
Note:
The saturation characteristic identification routine can be disabled using p1959.1.
See also: p1959
F07984 Drive: Speed controller optimization, moment of inertia
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred while identifying the moment of inertia.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The speed did not reach a steady-state condition.
2: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active.
3. The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
4. The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active.
5: It is not possible to increase the speed by 10% as the minimum limiting is active.
6: It is not possible to increase the speed by 10% as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
7: It is not possible to increase the speed by 10% as the maximum limiting is active.
8: The torque difference after the speed setpoint step is too low in order to be able to still reliably identify the moment of
inertia.
9: Too few data to be able to reliably identify the moment of inertia.
10: After the setpoint step, the speed either changed too little or in the incorrect direction.
11: The identified moment of inertia is not plausible. The measured moment of inertia is less than the 0.1x or greater than
500x the preset moment of inertia of the motor p0341.
SINAMICS G120X converter
1022 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: For fault value = 1:
- check the motor parameters (rating plate data). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
- check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
- carry out a motor data identification routine (p1910).
- if required, reduce the dynamic factor (p1967 < 25 %).
For fault value = 2, 5:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or adapt the minimum limit (p1080).
For fault value = 3, 6:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or suppression (skip) bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094, p1101).
For fault value = 4, 7:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or maximum limit (p1082, p1083 and p1086).
For fault value = 8:
- the total drive moment of inertia is far higher than that of the motor (refer to p0341, p0342). De-select rotating
measurement (p1960), enter the moment of inertia p0342, re-calculate the speed controller p0340 = 4 and repeat the
measurement.
For fault value = 9:
- check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change, re-calculate (p0340 = 3 or 4).
For fault value = 10:
- check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
For fault value = 11:
- reduce the moment of inertia of the motor p0341 (e.g. factor of 0.2) or increase (e.g. factor of 5) and repeat the
measurement.
Note:
The moment of inertia identification routine can be disabled using p1959.2.
See also: p1959
F07985 Drive: Speed controller optimization (oscillation test)
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred during the vibration test.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The speed did not reach a steady-state condition.
2: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active.
3: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
4: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active.
5: Torque limits too low for a torque step.
6: No suitable speed controller setting was found.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1023
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: For fault value = 1:
- check the motor parameters (rating plate data). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
- check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
- carry out a motor data identification routine (p1910).
- if required, reduce the dynamic factor (p1967 < 25 %).
For fault value = 2:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or adapt the minimum limit (p1080).
For fault value = 3:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or suppression (skip) bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094, p1101).
For fault value = 4:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or maximum limit (p1082, p1083 and p1086).
For fault value = 5:
- increase the torque limits (e.g. p1520, p1521).
For fault value = 6:
- reduce the dynamic factor (p1967).
- disable the vibration test (p1959.4 = 0) and repeat the rotating measurement.
See also: p1959
F07986 Drive: Rotating measurement ramp-function generator
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: During the rotating measurements, problems with the ramp-function generator occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The positive and negative directions are inhibited.
Remedy: For fault value = 1:
Enable the direction (p1110 or p1111).
F07988 Drive: Rotating measurement, no configuration selected
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When configuring the rotating measurement (p1959), no function was selected.
Remedy: Select at least one function for automatic optimization of the speed controller (p1959).
See also: p1959
F07990 Drive: Incorrect motor data identification
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
SINAMICS G120X converter
1024 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: A fault has occurred during the identification routine.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: Current limit value reached.
2: Identified stator resistance lies outside the expected range 0.1 ... 100% of Zn.
3: Identified rotor resistance lies outside the expected range 0.1 ... 100% of Zn.
4: identified stator reactance lies outside the expected range 50 ... 500 % of Zn.
5: identified magnetizing reactance lies outside the expected range 50 ... 500 % of Zn.
6: Identified rotor time constant lies outside the expected range 10 ms ... 5 s.
7: identified total leakage reactance lies outside the expected range 4 ... 50 % of Zn.
8: Identified stator leakage reactance lies outside the expected range 2 ... 50% of Zn.
9: Identified rotor leakage reactance lies outside the expected range 2 ... 50% of Zn.
10: Motor has been incorrectly connected.
11: Motor shaft rotates.
12: Ground fault detected.
15: Pulse inhibit occurred during motor data identification.
20: Identified threshold voltage of the semiconductor devices lies outside the expected range 0 ... 10 V.
30: Current controller in voltage limiting.
40: At least one identification contains errors. The identified parameters are not saved to prevent inconsistencies.
60: Incorrect power stack data for the calibration of the converter output voltage
61: Incorrect measured values for the calibration of the converter output voltage
Note:
Percentage values are referred to the rated motor impedance:
Zn = Vmot.nom / sqrt(3) / Imot,nom
Remedy: For fault value = 1 ... 40:
- check whether motor data have been correctly entered in p0300, p0304 ... p0311.
- is there an appropriate relationship between the motor power rating and that of the power unit? The ratio of the power unit
to the rated motor current should not be less than 0.5 and not be greater than 4.
- check connection type (star-delta).
For fault value = 4, 7:
- check whether the inductance in p0233 is correctly set.
- check whether motor has been correctly connected (star-delta).
For fault value = 11 in addition:
- deactivate oscillation monitoring (p1909.7 = 1).
For fault value = 12:
- check the power cable connections.
- check the motor.
- check the CT.
A07991 (N) Drive: Motor data identification activated
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The motor data identification routine is activated.
The motor data identification routine is carried out at the next switch-on command.
If rotating measurement is selected (see p1900, p1960), it will not be possible to save the parameter assignment. Once
motor data identification has been completed or deactivated, the option to save the parameter assignment will be made
available again.
See also: p1910
Remedy: Not necessary.
The alarm automatically disappears after the motor data identification routine has been successfully completed or for the
setting p1900 = 0.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1025
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
A07994 (F, N) Drive: motor data identification not performed
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The "Vector control" mode or application class "Standard Drive Control, STC" (p0096 = 1) has been selected, and a motor
data identification has still not been performed.
The alarm is initiated when changing the drive data set (see r0051) in the following cases:
- vector control is parameterized in the actual drive data set (p1300 >= 20).
and
- motor data identification has still not been performed in the actual drive data set (see r3925).
Note:
For SINAMICS G120, a check is made and the alarm is output also when exiting commissioning and when the system
powers up.
Remedy: - Perform motor data identification (see p1900).
- if required, parameterize "U/f control" (p1300 < 20) or set p0096 = 0 (only G120).
- switch over to a drive data set, in which the conditions do not apply.
F08010 (N, A) CU: Analog-to-digital converter
Reaction: OFF1 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: The analog-to-digital converter on the Control Unit has not supplied any converted data.
Remedy: - check the power supply.
- replace Control Unit.
F08501 (N, A) PROFINET: Setpoint timeout
Reaction: OFF3 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The reception of setpoints from PROFINET has been interrupted.
- bus connection interrupted.
- controller switched off.
- controller set into the STOP state.
Remedy: - Restore the bus connection and set the controller to RUN.
- if the error is repeated, check the update time set in the bus configuration (HW Config).
F08502 (A) PROFINET: Monitoring time sign-of-life expired
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The monitoring time for the sign-of-life counter has expired.
The connection to the PROFINET interface was interrupted.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
- contact Technical Support.
A08511 (F) PROFINET: Receive configuration data invalid
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The drive unit did not accept the receive configuration data.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Return value of the receive configuration data check.
2: Too many PZD data words for input or output. The number of possible PZD is specified by the number of indices in r2050/
p2051.
3: Uneven number of bytes for input or output.
SINAMICS G120X converter
1026 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: Check the receive configuration data.
For alarm value = 2:
- check the number of data words for output and input.
A08526 (F) PROFINET: No cyclic connection
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: There is no connection to a PROFINET controller.
Remedy: Establish the cyclic connection and activate the controller with cyclic operation.
Check the parameters "Name of Station" and "IP of Station" (r61000, r61001).
A08564 PN/COMM BOARD: syntax error in the configuration file
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A syntax error has been detected in the ASCII configuration file for the Communication Board Ethernet. The saved
configuration file has not been loaded.
Remedy: - correct the PROFINET interface configuration (p8920 and following) and activate (p8925 = 2).
- reinitialize the station (e.g. using the STARTER commissioning software)
Note:
The configuration is not applied until the next POWER ON!
See also: p8925 (Activate PN interface configuration)
A08565 PROFINET: Consistency error affecting adjustable parameters
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A consistency error was detected when activating the configuration (p8925) for the PROFINET interface. The currently set
configuration has not been activated.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
0: general consistency error
1: error in the IP configuration (IP address, subnet mask or standard gateway)
2: Error in the station names.
3: DHCP was not able to be activated, as a cyclic PROFINET connection already exists.
4: a cyclic PROFINET connection is not possible as DHCP is activated.
See also: p8920 (PN Name of Station), p8921 (PN IP address), p8922 (PN Default Gateway), p8923 (PN Subnet Mask)
Remedy: - check the required interface configuration (p8920 and following), correct if necessary, and activate (p8925).
or
- reconfigure the station via the "Edit Ethernet node" screen form (e.g. with STARTER commissioning software).
See also: p8925 (Activate PN interface configuration)
A08800 PROFIenergy energy-saving mode active
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The PROFIenergy energy-saving mode is active
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Mode ID of the active PROFIenergy energy-saving mode.
See also: r5600 (Pe energy-saving mode ID)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1027
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: The alarm is automatically withdrawn when the energy-saving mode is exited.
Note:
The energy-saving mode is exited after the following events:
- the PROFIenergy command end_pause is received from the higher-level control.
- the higher-level control has changed into the STOP operating state.
- the PROFINET connection to the higher-level control has been disconnected.
F13009 Licensing OA application not licensed
Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: At least one OA application which is under license does not have a license.
Note:
Refer to r4955 and p4955 for information about the installed OA applications.
Remedy: - enter and activate the license key for OA applications under license (p9920, p9921).
- if necessary, deactivate unlicensed OA applications (p4956).
F13100 Know-how protection: Copy protection error
Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The know-how protection with copy protection for the memory card is active.
An error has occurred when checking the memory card.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0: A memory card is not inserted.
1: An invalid memory card is inserted (not SIEMENS).
2: An invalid memory card is inserted.
3: The memory card is being used in another Control Unit.
12: An invalid memory card is inserted (OEM input incorrect, p7769).
13: The memory card is being used in another Control Unit (OEM input incorrect, p7759).
See also: p7765 (KHP configuration)
Remedy: For fault value = 0, 1:
- insert the correct memory card and carry out POWER ON.
For fault value = 2, 3, 12, 13:
- contact the responsible OEM.
- Deactivate copy protection (p7765) and acknowledge the fault (p3981).
- Deactivate know-how protection (p7766 ... p7768) and acknowledge the fault (p3981).
Note:
In general, the copy protection can only be changed when know-how protection is deactivated.
KHP: Know-How Protection
See also: p3981, p7765
F13101 Know-how protection: Copy protection cannot be activated
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An error occurred when attempting to activate the copy protection for the memory card.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0: A memory card is not inserted.
1: An invalid memory card is inserted (not SIEMENS).
Note:
KHP: Know-How Protection
SINAMICS G120X converter
1028 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: - insert a valid memory card.
- Try to activate copy protection again (p7765).
See also: p7765 (KHP configuration)
F13102 Know-how protection: Consistency error of the protected data
Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An error was identified when checking the consistency of the protected files. As a consequence, the project on the memory
card cannot be run.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = object number, xxxx = fault cause
xxxx = 1:
A file has a checksum error.
xxxx = 2:
The files are not consistent with one another.
xxxx = 3:
The project files, which were loaded into the file system via load (download from the memory card), are inconsistent.
Note:
KHP: Know-How Protection
Remedy: - Replace the project on the memory card or replace project files for download from the memory card.
- Restore the factory setting and download again.
F30001 Power unit: Overcurrent
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power unit has detected an overcurrent condition.
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- motor has a short-circuit or fault to ground (frame).
- U/f operation: Up ramp set too low.
- U/f operation: rated current of motor much greater than that of power unit.
- High discharge and post-charging current for line supply voltage interruptions.
- High post-charging currents for overload when motoring and DC link voltage dip.
- short-circuit currents at switch-on due to the missing line reactor.
- power cables are not correctly connected.
- power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- power unit defective.
- line phase interrupted.
Fault value (r0949, interpret bitwise binary):
Bit 0: Phase U.
Bit 1: Phase V.
Bit 2: Phase W.
Bit 3: Overcurrent in the DC link.
Note:
Fault value = 0 means that the phase with overcurrent is not recognized.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1029
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: - check the motor data - if required, carry out commissioning.
- check the motor circuit configuration (star/delta).
- U/f operation: Increase up ramp.
- U/f operation: Check assignment of rated currents of motor and power unit.
- check the line supply quality.
- reduce motor load.
- correct connection of line reactor.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.
- replace power unit.
- check the line supply phases.
F30002 Power unit: DC link voltage overvoltage
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power unit has detected an overvoltage condition in the DC link.
- motor regenerates too much energy.
- line supply voltage too high.
- line phase interrupted.
- DC link voltage control switched off.
- dynamic response of DC link voltage controller excessive or insufficient.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
DC link voltage at the time of trip [0.1 V].
Remedy: -increase the ramp-down time (p1121).
- set the rounding times (p1130, p1136). This is particularly recommended in U/f operation to relieve the DC link voltage
controller with rapid ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator.
- Activate the DC link voltage controller (p1240, p1280).
- adapt the dynamic response of the DC link voltage controller (p1243, p1247, p1283, p1287).
- check the line supply and DC link voltage. set p0210 as low as possible (also see A07401, p1294 = 0).
- check and correct the phase assignment at the power unit.
- check the line supply phases.
See also: p0210, p1240
F30003 Power unit: DC link voltage undervoltage
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power unit has detected an undervoltage condition in the DC link.
- line supply failure
- line supply voltage below the permissible value.
- line phase interrupted.
Note:
The monitoring threshold for the DC link undervoltage is the minimum of the following values:
- for a calculation, refer to p0210.
Remedy: - check the line supply voltage
- check the line supply phases.
See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage)
F30004 Power unit: Overtemperature heat sink AC inverter
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
SINAMICS G120X converter
1030 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: The temperature of the power unit heat sink has exceeded the permissible limit value.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
- overload.
- ambient temperature too high.
- pulse frequency too high.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Temperature [1 bit = 0.01 °C].
Remedy: - check whether the fan is running.
- check the fan elements.
- check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
- check the motor load.
- reduce the pulse frequency if this is higher than the rated pulse frequency.
Notice:
This fault can only be acknowledged after the alarm threshold for alarm A05000 has been undershot.
See also: p1800
F30005 Power unit: Overload I2t
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power unit was overloaded (r0036 = 100 %).
- the permissible rated power unit current was exceeded for an inadmissibly long time.
- the permissible load duty cycle was not maintained.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
I2t [100 % = 16384].
Remedy: - reduce the continuous load.
- adapt the load duty cycle.
- check the motor and power unit rated currents.
- reduce the current limit (p0640).
- during operation with U/f characteristic: reduce the integral time of the current limiting controller (p1341).
See also: r0036, r0206, p0307
F30011 Power unit: Line phase failure in main circuit
Reaction: OFF2 (OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: At the power unit, the DC link voltage ripple has exceeded the permissible limit value.
Possible causes:
- a line phase has failed.
- the 3 line phases are inadmissibly asymmetrical.
- the capacitance of the DC link capacitor forms a resonance frequency with the line inductance and the reactor integrated
in the power unit.
- the fuse of a phase of a main circuit has ruptured.
- a motor phase has failed.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - check the main circuit fuses.
- check whether a single-phase load is distorting the line voltages.
- Detune the resonant frequency with the line inductance by using an upstream line reactor.
- Dampen the resonant frequency with the line inductance by switching over the DC link voltage compensation in the
software (see p1810) – or increase the smoothing (see p1806). However, this can have a negative impact on the torque
ripple at the motor output.
- check the motor feeder cables.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1031
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
F30012 Power unit: Temperature sensor heat sink wire breakage
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The connection to a heat sink temperature sensor in the power unit is interrupted.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Bit 0: Module slot (electronics slot)
Bit 1: Air intake
Bit 2: Inverter 1
Bit 3: Inverter 2
Bit 4: Inverter 3
Bit 5: Inverter 4
Bit 6: Inverter 5
Bit 7: Inverter 6
Bit 8: Rectifier 1
Bit 9: Rectifier 2
Remedy: Contact the manufacturer.
F30013 Power unit: Temperature sensor heat sink short-circuit
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The heat sink temperature sensor in the power unit is short-circuited.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Bit 0: Module slot (electronics slot)
Bit 1: Air intake
Bit 2: Inverter 1
Bit 3: Inverter 2
Bit 4: Inverter 3
Bit 5: Inverter 4
Bit 6: Inverter 5
Bit 7: Inverter 6
Bit 8: Rectifier 1
Bit 9: Rectifier 2
Remedy: Contact the manufacturer.
F30015 (N, A) Power unit: Phase failure motor cable
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A phase failure in the motor feeder cable was detected.
The signal can also be output in the following cases:
- the motor is correctly connected, but the drive has stalled in U/f control. In this case, a current of 0 A is possibly measured
in one phase due to asymmetry of the currents.
- the motor is correctly connected, however the closed-speed control is instable and therefore an oscillating torque is
generated.
Note:
Chassis power units do not feature phase failure monitoring.
Remedy: - check the motor feeder cables.
- increase the ramp-up or ramp-down time (p1120) if the drive has stalled in U/f control.
- check the speed controller settings.
A30016 (N) Power unit: Load supply switched off
Reaction: NONE
SINAMICS G120X converter
1032 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The DC link voltage is too low.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
DC link voltage at the time of trip [0.1 V].
Remedy: Under certain circumstances, the AC line supply is not switched on.
F30017 Power unit: Hardware current limit has responded too often
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The hardware current limitation in the relevant phase (see A30031, A30032, A30033) has responded too often. The
number of times the limit has been exceeded depends on the design and type of power unit.
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- fault in the motor or in the power cables.
- the power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- motor load too high
- power unit defective.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Phase U
Bit 1: Phase V
Bit 2: Phase W
Remedy: - check the motor data.
- check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta).
- check the motor load.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.
- replace power unit.
F30021 Power unit: Ground fault
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power has detected a ground fault.
Possible causes:
- ground fault in the power cables.
- ground fault at the motor.
- CT defective.
- when the brake closes, this causes the hardware DC current monitoring to respond.
- short-circuit at the braking resistor.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0:
- the hardware DC current monitoring has responded.
- short-circuit at the braking resistor.
> 0:
Absolute value, summation current [32767 = 271 % rated current].
Remedy: - check the power cable connections.
- check the motor.
- check the CT.
- check the cables and contacts of the brake connection (a wire is possibly broken).
- check the braking resistor.
See also: p0287 (Ground fault monitoring thresholds)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1033
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
F30022 Power unit: Monitoring U_ce
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: In the power unit, the monitoring of the collector-emitter voltage (U_ce) of the semiconductor has responded.
Possible causes:
- fiber-optic cable interrupted.
- power supply of the IGBT gating module missing.
- short-circuit at the power unit output.
- defective semiconductor in the power unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0: Short-circuit in phase U
Bit 1: Short circuit in phase V
Bit 2: Short-circuit in phase W
Bit 3: Light transmitter enable defective
Bit 4: U_ce group fault signal interrupted
See also: r0949 (Fault value)
Remedy: - check the fiber-optic cable and if required, replace.
- check the power supply of the IGBT gating module (24 V).
- check the power cable connections.
- select the defective semiconductor and replace.
F30024 Power unit: Overtemperature thermal model
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The temperature difference between the heat sink and chip has exceeded the permissible limit value.
- the permissible load duty cycle was not maintained.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
- overload.
- ambient temperature too high.
- pulse frequency too high.
See also: r0037
Remedy: - adapt the load duty cycle.
- check whether the fan is running.
- check the fan elements.
- check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
- check the motor load.
- reduce the pulse frequency if this is higher than the rated pulse frequency.
- if DC braking is active: reduce braking current (p1232).
F30025 Power unit: Chip overtemperature
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The chip temperature of the semiconductor has exceeded the permissible limit value.
- the permissible load duty cycle was not maintained.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
- overload.
- ambient temperature too high.
- pulse frequency too high.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Temperature difference between the heat sink and chip [0.01 °C].
SINAMICS G120X converter
1034 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: - adapt the load duty cycle.
- check whether the fan is running.
- check the fan elements.
- check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
- check the motor load.
- reduce the pulse frequency if this is higher than the rated pulse frequency.
Notice:
This fault can only be acknowledged after the alarm threshold for alarm A05001 has been undershot.
See also: r0037
F30027 Power unit: Precharging DC link time monitoring
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1035
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: The power unit DC link was not able to be precharged within the expected time.
1) There is no line supply voltage connected.
2) The line contactor/line side switch has not been closed.
3) The line supply voltage is too low.
4) Line supply voltage incorrectly set (p0210).
5) The precharging resistors are overheated as there were too many precharging operations per time unit.
6) The precharging resistors are overheated as the DC link capacitance is too high.
7) The DC link has either a ground fault or a short-circuit.
8) Precharging circuit may be defective.
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = power unit state
0: Fault status (wait for OFF and fault acknowledgment).
1: Restart inhibit (wait for OFF).
2: Overvoltage condition detected -> change into the fault state.
3: Undervoltage condition detected -> change into the fault state.
4: Wait for bridging contactor to open -> change into the fault state.
5: Wait for bridging contactor to open -> change into restart inhibit.
6: Commissioning.
7: Ready for precharging.
8: Precharging started, DC link voltage less than the minimum switch-on voltage.
9: Precharging, DC link voltage end of precharging still not detected.
10: Wait for the end of the de-bounce time of the main contactor after precharging has been completed.
11: Precharging completed, ready for pulse enable.
12: Reserved.
xxxx = Missing internal enable signals, power unit (inverted bit-coded, FFFF hex -> all internal enable signals available)
Bit 0: Power supply of the IGBT gating shut down.
Bit 1: Ground fault detected.
Bit 2: Peak current intervention.
Bit 3: I2t exceeded.
Bit 4. Thermal model overtemperature calculated.
Bit 5: (heat sink, gating module, power unit) overtemperature measured.
Bit 6: Reserved.
Bit 7: Overvoltage detected.
Bit 8: Power unit has completed precharging, ready for pulse enable.
Bit 9: Reserved.
Bit 10: Overcurrent detected.
Bit 11: Reserved.
Bit 12: Reserved.
Bit 13: Vce fault detected, transistor de-saturated due to overcurrent/short-circuit.
Bit 14: Undervoltage detected.
See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage)
SINAMICS G120X converter
1036 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: In general:
- check the line supply voltage at the input terminals.
- check the line supply voltage setting (p0210).
- wait until the precharging resistors have cooled down. For this purpose, preferably disconnect the infeed unit from the line
supply.
For 5):
- carefully observe the permissible precharging frequency (refer to the appropriate Equipment Manual).
For 6):
- check the capacitance of the DC link and, if necessary, reduce it in accordance with the maximum permissible DC link
capacitance (see relevant Equipment Manual).
For 7):
- check the DC link for a ground fault or short circuit.
See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage)
A30030 Power unit: Internal overtemperature alarm
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The temperature inside the drive converter has exceeded the permissible temperature limit.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
- overload.
- ambient temperature too high.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - possibly use an additional fan.
- check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
Notice:
This fault can only be acknowledged once the permissible temperature limit minus 5 K has been fallen below.
A30031 Power unit: Hardware current limiting in phase U
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Hardware current limit for phase U responded. The pulsing in this phase is inhibited for one pulse period.
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- fault in the motor or in the power cables.
- the power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- motor load too high
- power unit defective.
Note:
Alarm A30031 is always output if, for a Power Module, the hardware current limiting of phase U, V or W responds.
Remedy: - check the motor data and if required, recalculate the control parameters (p0340 = 3). As an alternative, run a motor data
identification (p1910 = 1, p1960 = 1).
- check the motor circuit configuration (star/delta).
- check the motor load.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.
A30032 Power unit: Hardware current limiting in phase V
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1037
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: Hardware current limit for phase V responded. The pulsing in this phase is inhibited for one pulse period.
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- fault in the motor or in the power cables.
- the power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- motor load too high
- power unit defective.
Note:
Alarm A30031 is always output if, for a Power Module, the hardware current limiting of phase U, V or W responds.
Remedy: Check the motor data and if required, recalculate the control parameters (p0340 = 3). As an alternative, run a motor data
identification (p1910 = 1, p1960 = 1).
- check the motor circuit configuration (star/delta).
- check the motor load.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.
A30033 Power unit: Hardware current limiting in phase W
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Hardware current limit for phase W responded. The pulsing in this phase is inhibited for one pulse period.
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- fault in the motor or in the power cables.
- the power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- motor load too high
- power unit defective.
Note:
Alarm A30031 is always output if, for a Power Module, the hardware current limiting of phase U, V or W responds.
Remedy: - check the motor data and if required, recalculate the control parameters (p0340 = 3). As an alternative, run a motor data
identification (p1910 = 1, p1960 = 1).
- check the motor circuit configuration (star/delta).
- check the motor load.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.
A30034 Power unit: Internal overtemperature
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The alarm threshold for internal overtemperature has been reached.
If the temperature inside the unit continues to increase, fault F30036 may be triggered.
- ambient temperature might be too high.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - check the ambient temperature.
- check the fan for the inside of the unit.
F30035 Power unit: Air intake overtemperature
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
SINAMICS G120X converter
1038 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: The air intake in the power unit has exceeded the permissible temperature limit.
For air-cooled power units, the temperature limit is at 55 °C.
- ambient temperature too high.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Temperature [0.01 °C].
Remedy: - check whether the fan is running.
- check the fan elements.
- check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
Notice:
This fault can only be acknowledged after the alarm threshold for alarm A05002 has been undershot.
F30036 Power unit: Internal overtemperature
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The temperature inside the drive converter has exceeded the permissible temperature limit.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
- overload.
- ambient temperature too high.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - check whether the fan is running.
- check the fan elements.
- check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
Notice:
This fault can only be acknowledged once the permissible temperature limit minus 5 K has been fallen below.
F30037 Power unit: Rectifier overtemperature
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The temperature in the rectifier of the power unit has exceeded the permissible temperature limit.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
- overload.
- ambient temperature too high.
- line supply phase failure.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Temperature [0.01 °C].
Remedy: - check whether the fan is running.
- check the fan elements.
- check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
- check the motor load.
- check the line supply phases.
Notice:
This fault can only be acknowledged after the alarm threshold for alarm A05004 has been undershot.
A30042 Power unit: Fan has reached the maximum operating hours
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1039
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: The maximum operating time of at least one fan will soon be reached, or has already been exceeded.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary):
Bit 0: heat sink fan will reach the maximum operating time in 500 hours.
Bit 1: heat sink fan has exceeded the maximum operating time.
Bit 8: internal device fan will reach the maximum operating time in 500 hours.
Bit 9: internal device fan has exceeded the maximum operating time.
Note:
The maximum operating time of the heat sink fan in the power unit is displayed in p0252.
The maximum operating time of the internal device fan in the power unit is internally specified and is fixed.
Remedy: For the fan involved, carry out the following:
- replace the fan.
- reset the operating hours counter (p0251, p0254).
See also: p0251, p0252, p0254
A30049 Power unit: Internal fan faulty
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The internal fan has failed.
Remedy: Check the internal fan and replace if necessary.
F30051 Power unit: Motor holding brake short circuit detected
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A short-circuit at the motor holding brake terminals has been detected.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - check the motor holding brake for a short-circuit.
- check the connection and cable for the motor holding brake.
F30052 EEPROM data error
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: EEPROM data error of the power unit module.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0, 2, 3, 4:
The EEPROM data read in from the power unit module is inconsistent.
1:
EEPROM data is not compatible to the firmware of the Control Unit.
Remedy: Replace power unit module.
F30055 Power unit: Braking chopper overcurrent
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An overcurrent condition has occurred in the braking chopper.
Remedy: - check whether the braking resistor has a short circuit.
- for an external braking resistor, check whether the resistor may have been dimensioned too small.
Note:
The braking chopper is only enabled again at pulse enable after the fault has been acknowledged.
SINAMICS G120X converter
1040 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
A30057 Power unit: Line asymmetry
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Frequencies have been detected on the DC link voltage that would suggest line asymmetry or failure of a line phase.
It is also possible that a motor phase has failed.
Fault F30011 is output if the alarm is present and at the latest after 5 minutes.
The precise duration depends on the power unit type and the particular frequencies. For booksize and chassis power units,
the duration also depends on how long the alarm has been active.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - check the line phase connection.
- check the motor feeder cable connections.
If there is no phase failure of the line or motor, then line asymmetry is involved.
- reduce the power in order to avoid fault F30011.
F30059 Power unit: Internal fan faulty
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The internal power unit fan has failed and is possibly defective.
Remedy: Check the internal fan and replace if necessary.
A30065 (F, N) Voltage measured values not plausible
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The voltage measurement is not supplying any plausible values
Alarm value (r2124, interpret bitwise binary):
Bit 1: Phase U.
Bit 2: Phase V.
Bit 3: Phase W.
Remedy: - Deactivate voltage measurement (p0247.0 = 0).
- Deactivate flying restart with voltage measurement (p0247.5 = 0) and deactivate fast flying restart (p1780.11 = 0).
F30068 Power unit: undertemperature inverter heat sink
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The actual inverter heat sink temperature is below the permissible minimum value.
Possible causes:
- the power unit is being operated at an ambient temperature that lies below the permissible range.
- the temperature sensor evaluation is defective.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): inverter heat sink temperature [0.1 °C].
Remedy: - ensure that higher ambient temperatures prevail.
- replace the power unit.
F30071 No new actual values received from the Power Module
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: More than one actual value telegram from the power unit module has failed.
Remedy: Check the interface (adjustment and locking) to the power unit module.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1041
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
F30072 Setpoints can no longer be transferred to the Power Module
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: More than one setpoint telegram was not able to be transferred to the power unit module.
Remedy: Check the interface (adjustment and locking) to the power unit module.
F30074 (A) Communication error between the Control Unit and Power Module
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Communications between the Control Unit (CU) and Power Module (PM) via the interface no longer possible. The CU may
have been withdrawn or is incorrectly inserted.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
0 hex:
- a Control Unit with external 24 V supply was withdrawn from the Power Module during operation.
- with the Power Module switched off, the external 24 V supply for the Control Unit was interrupted for some time.
1 hex:
The Control Unit was withdrawn from the Power Module during operation, although the encoderless safe motion
monitoring functions are enabled. This is not supported. After re-inserting the Control Unit in operation, communications
to the Power Module no longer possible.
20A hex:
The Control Unit was inserted on a Power Module, which has another code number.
20B hex:
The Control Unit was inserted on a Power Module, which although it has the same code number, has a different serial
number. The Control Unit executes an automatic warm restart to accept the new calibration data.
Remedy: For fault value = 0 and 20A hex:
Insert the Control Unit on an appropriate Power Module and continue operation. If required, carry out a POWER ON of the
Control Unit.
For fault value = 1 hex:
Carry out a POWER ON of the Control Unit.
F30075 Configuration of the power unit unsuccessful
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A communication error has occurred while configuring the power unit using the Control Unit. The cause is not clear.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
0:
The output filter initialization was unsuccessful.
1:
Activation/deactivation of the regenerative feedback functionality was unsuccessful.
Remedy: - acknowledge the fault and continue operation.
- if the fault reoccurs, carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
- if required, replace the power unit.
F30080 Power unit: Current increasing too quickly
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
SINAMICS G120X converter
1042 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Cause: The power unit has detected an excessive rate of rise in the overvoltage range.
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- motor has a short-circuit or fault to ground (frame).
- U/f operation: Up ramp set too low.
- U/f operation: rated current of motor much greater than that of power unit.
- power cables are not correctly connected.
- power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- power unit defective.
Fault value (r0949, interpret bitwise binary):
Bit 0: Phase U.
Bit 1: Phase V.
Bit 2: Phase W.
Remedy: - check the motor data - if required, carry out commissioning.
- check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta)
- U/f operation: Increase up ramp.
- U/f operation: Check assignment of rated currents of motor and power unit.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.
- replace power unit.
F30081 Power unit: Switching operations too frequent
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power unit has executed too many switching operations for current limitation.
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- motor has a short-circuit or fault to ground (frame).
- U/f operation: Up ramp set too low.
- U/f operation: rated current of motor much greater than that of power unit.
- power cables are not correctly connected.
- power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- power unit defective.
Fault value (r0949, interpret bitwise binary):
Bit 0: Phase U.
Bit 1: Phase V.
Bit 2: Phase W.
Remedy: - check the motor data - if required, carry out commissioning.
- check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta)
- U/f operation: Increase up ramp.
- U/f operation: Check assignment of rated currents of motor and power unit.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.
- replace power unit.
F30105 PU: Actual value sensing fault
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: At least one incorrect actual value channel was detected on the Power Stack Adapter (PSA).
The incorrect actual value channels are displayed in the following diagnostic parameters.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1043
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: Evaluate the diagnostic parameters.
If the actual value channel is incorrect, check the components and if required, replace.
A30502 Power unit: DC link overvoltage
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The power unit has detected overvoltage in the DC link on a pulse inhibit.
- device connection voltage too high.
- line reactor incorrectly dimensioned.
Alarm value (r0949, interpret decimal):
DC link voltage [1 bit = 100 mV].
See also: r0070 (Actual DC link voltage)
Remedy: - check the device supply voltage (p0210).
- check the dimensioning of the line reactor.
See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage)
F30662 Error in internal communications
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: A module-internal communication error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
F30664 Error while booting
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An error has occurred during booting.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
N30800 (F) Power unit: Group signal
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The power unit has detected at least one fault.
Remedy: Evaluate the other messages that are presently available.
F30802 Power unit: Time slice overflow
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A time slice overflow has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
xx: Time slice number xx
SINAMICS G120X converter
1044 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
F30804 (N, A) Power unit: CRC
Reaction: OFF2 (OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A checksum error (CRC error) has occurred for the power unit.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
F30805 Power unit: EEPROM checksum error
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Internal parameter data is corrupted.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
01: EEPROM access error.
02: Too many blocks in the EEPROM.
Remedy: Replace the module.
F30809 Power unit: Switching information not valid
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For 3P gating unit, the following applies:
The last switching status word in the setpoint telegram is identified by the end ID. Such an end ID was not found.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
A30810 (F) Power unit: Watchdog timer
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When booting it was detected that the cause of the previous reset was an SAC watchdog timer overflow.
Remedy: - carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact Technical Support.
F30850 Power unit: Internal software error
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An internal software error has occurred in the power unit.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - replace power unit.
- if required, upgrade the firmware in the power unit.
- contact Technical Support.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1045
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
F30903 Power unit: I2C bus error occurred
Reaction: OFF2 (IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Communications error with an EEPROM or an analog/digital converter.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
80000000 hex:
- internal software error.
00000001 hex ... 0000FFFF hex:
- module fault.
Remedy: For fault value = 80000000 hex:
- upgrade firmware to later version.
For fault value = 00000001 hex ... 0000FFFF hex:
- replace the module.
A30920 (F) Temperature sensor fault
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected.
KTY: R > 2120 Ohm, PT1000: R > 2120 Ohm
2: Measured resistance too low.
PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm, PT1000: R < 603 Ohm
Remedy: - make sure that the sensor is connected correctly.
- replace the sensor.
F30950 Power unit: Internal software error
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An internal software error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Information about the fault source.
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - if necessary, upgrade the firmware in the power unit to a later version.
- contact Technical Support.
A30999 (F, N) Power unit: Unknown alarm
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An alarm occurred on the power unit that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Alarm number.
Note:
If required, the significance of this new alarm can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit.
Remedy: - replace the firmware on the power unit by an older firmware version (r0128).
- upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018).
F35950 TM: Internal software error
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
SINAMICS G120X converter
1046 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Acknowledge: POWER ON
Cause: An internal software error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Information about the fault source.
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - if necessary, upgrade the firmware in the Terminal Module to a later version.
- contact Technical Support.
A50010 (F) PROFINET: Consistency error affecting adjustable parameters
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A consistency error was detected when activating the configuration (p8925) for the PROFINET interface. The currently set
configuration has not been activated.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
0: general consistency error
1: error in the IP configuration (IP address, subnet mask or standard gateway).
2: Error in the station names.
3: DHCP was not able to be activated, as a cyclic PROFINET connection already exists.
4: a cyclic PROFINET connection is not possible as DHCP is activated.
Note:
DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
See also: p8920 (PN Name of Station), p8921 (PN IP address), p8922 (PN Default Gateway), p8923 (PN Subnet Mask),
p8924 (PN DHCP Mode)
Remedy: - check the required interface configuration (p8920 and following), correct if necessary, and activate (p8925).
or
- reconfigure the station via the "Edit Ethernet node" screen form (e.g. with STARTER commissioning software).
See also: p8925 (Activate PN interface configuration)
A50011 (F) Ethernet/IP: configuration error
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An EtherNet/IP controller attempts to establish a connection using an incorrect configuring telegram.
The telegram length set in the controller does not match the parameterization in the drive device.
Remedy: Check the set telegram length.
For p0922 not equal to 999, then the length of the selected telegram applies.
For p0922 = 999, the maximum interconnected PZD (r2067) applies.
See also: p0922, r2067
F52960 Cavitation protection failure
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Conditions exist for cavitation damage. Cavitation damage is damage caused to a pump in pumping systems when the fluid
is not flowing sufficiently. This can lead to heat build up and subsequent damage to the pump.
Remedy: If cavitation is not occurring, reduce the cavitation threshold p29626, or increase the cavitation protection delay. Ensure
sensor feedback is working.
A52961 Cavitation protection warning
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Conditions for possible cavitation damage are detected.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1047
Warnings, faults and system messages
9.6 List of fault codes and alarm codes
Remedy: See F52960.
A52962 Mpc operating time limit exceeded
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The continuous operating time of at least one motor has exceeded the limit.
Remedy: Increase p29531 or set p29547 = 0.
A52963 Mpc PID deviation exceeded
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The PID deviation (p2273) has exceeded the threashold (p29546) and all motors are running except the motors under
service or locked.
Remedy: - Repair or unlock motors if there are motors under service or locked.
- Add more motors in the system if the number of motors is less than four.
A52964 Mpc one motor available
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Only one motor is not under service or locked manually. All the other motors are under service or locked manually.
Remedy: Repair or unlock motors.
F52965 Mpc no motor available
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: All motors are under service or locked manually.
Remedy: Repair or unlock (set p29542 = 0) motors.
F52966 Mpc motor quantity not matched
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: p29521 and digital output settings do not match.
Remedy: Case 1: without I/O extended module.
Change p29521 or digital output (p0730, p0731, p0732, p0733) settings to ensure that the motor quantity set in p29521
matches with the quantity of digital outputs (mapped in r29529).
Case 2: added I/O extended module.
Change p29521 or digital output (p0730, p0731, p0732, p0733, p0734, p0735) settings to ensure that the motor quantity
set in p29521 matches with the quantity of digital outputs (mapped in r29529). If p29521 is greater than four, but the CU
without I/O extended module, the fault occurs.
SINAMICS G120X converter
1048 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Corrective maintenance 10
WARNING
Fire or electric shock due to defective components
If an overcurrent protection device is triggered, the converter may be defective. A defective
converter can cause a fire or electric shock.
● Have the converter and the overcurrent protection device checked by a specialist.
Repair
WARNING
Fire or electric shock due to improper repair
Improper repair of the converter may cause malfunctions or result in consequential damage
such as fire or electric shock.
● Only commission the following persons to repair the converter:
– Siemens customer service
– A repair center that has been authorized by Siemens
– Specialist personnel who are thoroughly acquainted with all the warnings and operating
procedures contained in this manual.
● Only use original spare parts when carrying out repairs.
CAUTION
Burns due to touching hot surfaces
Certain components (e.g. the heat sink or line reactor) can become very hot during operation.
The components can remain hot for some time after operation. Touching hot surfaces can
cause burns to the skin.
● Do not touch hot components during operation or immediately following operation.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1049
Corrective maintenance
10.1 Replacing the converter
10.1 Replacing the converter
10.1.1 Overview of how to replace a converter
Permissible replacement
You must replace the converter if it continually malfunctions.
Figure 10-1 Replacing a defective converter
In the following cases you will need to replace the converter:
● The new and replaced converters have the same power rating.
● The new and replaced converters have the same frame size. The new converter has a
higher power rating than the converter it replaced.
In this case, the rated powers of converter and motor must not differ too much:
Ratio of the rated powers of the motor and the converter > 1/4
WARNING
Unexpected machine motion caused by incorrect/inappropriate converter settings
Replacing converters of different types can result in incomplete or incorrect/inappropriate
converter settings. As a consequence, unexpected machine motion, e.g. speed oscillation,
overspeed or incorrect direction of rotation. Unexpected machine motion can result in death,
injury or material damage.
● In all cases not permitted according to the above description, recommission the drive after
replacing a converter.
SINAMICS G120X converter
1050 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Corrective maintenance
10.1 Replacing the converter
10.1.2 Replacing a converter with data backup
Replacing a converter with data backup on a memory card
Procedure
1. Disconnect the line voltage to the converter.
WARNING
Electric shock as a result of a residual charge in power components
After the power supply has been switched off, it takes up to 5 min. until the capacitors in the
converter have discharged so that the residual charge is at a non-hazardous level.
● Check the voltage at the converter connections before you carry out any installation
work.
2. Remove the connecting cables of the converter.
3. Remove the defective converter.
4. Install the new converter.
5. Remove the memory card from the old converter
6. Insert the memory card into the new converter.
7. Connect all of the cables to the converter.
NOTICE
Damage from swapping the motor's connection lines
The direction in which the motor rotates switches if you exchange the two phases of the
motor line.
● Connect the three phases of the motor lines in the right order.
● After replacing the converter, check the direction in which the motor rotates.
8. Reconnect the line voltage to the converter.
9. The converter loads the settings from the memory card.
10.After loading, check whether the converter outputs Alarm A01028.
– Alarm A01028:
The loaded settings are not compatible with the converter.
Clear the alarm with p0971 = 1 and recommission the drive.
– No alarm A01028:
The converter has accepted the settings that have been loaded.
You have successfully replaced the converter.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1051
Corrective maintenance
10.1 Replacing the converter
Replacing a converter with data backup in the Operator Panel
Precondition
You have backed up the actual settings of the Control Unit to be replaced to an operator panel.
Procedure
1. Disconnect the line voltage to the converter.
WARNING
Electric shock as a result of a residual charge in power components
After the power supply has been switched off, it takes up to 5 min. until the capacitors in the
converter have discharged so that the residual charge is at a non-hazardous level.
● Check the voltage at the converter connections before you carry out any installation
work.
2. Remove the connecting cables of the converter.
3. Remove the defective converter.
4. Install the new converter.
5. Connect all of the cables to the converter.
6. Reconnect the line voltage to the converter.
7. Plug the Operator Panel onto the converter or connect the handheld device of the Operator
Panel to the converter.
8. Transfer the settings from the operator panel to the converter.
9. Wait until the transfer is complete.
10.After loading, check whether the converter outputs Alarm A01028.
– Alarm A01028:
The loaded settings are not compatible with the converter.
Clear the alarm with p0971 = 1 and recommission the drive.
– No alarm A01028: Proceed with the next step.
11.Back up the settings so they are not lost when the power fails:
– For BOP‑2 in the menu "EXTRAS" - "RAM-ROM".
– For IOP‑2 in the menu "SAVE RAM TO ROM".
You have replaced the converter and transferred the converter settings from the operator panel
to the new converter.
❒
10.1.3 Replacing a converter without data backup
If the settings have not been backed up, after replacing the converter, you must recommission
the drive.
SINAMICS G120X converter
1052 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Corrective maintenance
10.1 Replacing the converter
Procedure
1. Disconnect the line voltage to the converter.
2. Remove the connecting cables of the converter.
3. Remove the defective converter.
4. Install the new converter.
5. Connect all of the cables to the converter.
6. Switch on the line voltage again.
7. Recommission the drive.
Converter replacement has been completed once it has been commissioned.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1053
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Replacing spare parts
10.2 Replacing spare parts
10.2.1 Spare parts compatibility
Continuous development within the scope of product maintenance
Converter components are being continuously developed within the scope of product
maintenance. Product maintenance includes, for example, measures to increase the
ruggedness or hardware changes which become necessary as components are discontinued.
These further developments are "spare parts-compatible" and do not change the article
number.
In the scope of such spare parts-compatible ongoing development, plug connector or
connection positions are sometimes slightly modified. This does not cause any problems when
the components are properly used. Please take this fact into consideration in special
installation situations (e.g. allow sufficient reserve regarding the cable length).
10.2.2 Spare parts overview
The look of the spare part can differ from the picture.
Spare parts Frame size Article number
CU spare part kit, consisting of 4 sets of FSA ... FSJ 6SL3200-0SK10-0AA0
labels, 1 CU cover, 1 ESD cover, 2 U
clamps, 1 functional grounding clamp, 2
STO connectors, 1 RS485 connector,
and 1 set of I/O connectors
1 set of small parts for installation FSD ... FSG 6SL3200-0SK08-0AA0
Shield connection kit for the Power Mod‐ FSA 6SL3262-1AA01-0DA0
ule FSB 6SL3262-1AB01-0DA0
FSC 6SL3262-1AC01-0DA0
FSD 6SL3262-1AD01-0DA0
FSE 6SL3262-1AE01-0DA0
FSF 6SL3262-1AF01-0DA0
FSG 6SL3262-1AG01-0DA0
Shield connection kit for the Control Unit FSD ... FSG 6SL3264-1EA00-0YA0
SINAMICS G120X converter
1054 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Replacing spare parts
Spare parts Frame size Article number
Terminal cover kit FSD 6SL3200-0SM13-0AA0
FSE 6SL3200-0SM14-0AA0
FSF 6SL3200-0SM15-0AA0
FSG 6SL3200-0SM16-0AA0
External fan unit for the heat sink FSA 6SL3200-0SF52-0AA0
FSB 6SL3200-0SF53-0AA0
FSC 6SL3200-0SF54-0AA0
FSD 6SL3200-0SF15-0AA0
FSE 6SL3200-0SF16-0AA0
FSF 6SL3200-0SF17-0AA0
FSG 6SL3200-0SF18-0AA0
FSH/FSJ 6SL3300-0SF01-0AA0
Internal fan unit FSH/FSJ 6SL3200-0SF50-0AA0
Free programmable interface FSH/FSJ 6SL3200-0SP05-0AA0
Power supply board FSH/FSJ 6SL3200-0SP06-0AA0
Current sensor FSH/FSJ 6SL3200-0SE01-0AA0
FSJ 6SL3200-0SE02-0AA0
10.2.3 Fan units
The average service life of the fan is 40,000 hours. In practice, however, the service life may
deviate from this value. Especially a dusty environment can block up the fan. The defective fan
must be replaced timely to ensure that the converter is ready for operation.
When must the fan unit be replaced?
A defective fan in operation results in an overtemperature condition of the converter. For
example, the following messages indicate that the fan unit is defective:
● A05002 (air intake overtemperature)
● A05004 (rectifier overtemperature)
● F30004 (heat sink overtemperature)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1055
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Replacing spare parts
● F30024 (temperature model overtemperature)
● F30025 (chip overtemperature)
● F30035 (air intake overtemperature)
● F30037 (rectifier overtemperature)
Precondition
Switch off the converter power supply before replacing the fan unit.
WARNING
Electric shock as a result of a residual charge in power components
After the power supply has been switched off, it takes up to 5 minutes until the capacitors in
the converter have discharged so that the residual charge is at a non-hazardous level.
Therefore, touching the converter immediately after powering off can result in electric shock
due to residual charge in the power components.
● Check the voltage at the converter connections before you replace the fan unit.
SINAMICS G120X converter
1056 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Replacing spare parts
10.2.3.1 Replacing the fan unit, FSA ... FSC
The fan unit is installed at the top.
Procedure
1. Switch off the converter power supply.
2. For a converter mounted directly on the cabinet panel/mounting plate, skip this step and
proceed to Step 3.
For a push-through mounted converter, you must first remove the top frame by loosening
the two screws before replacing the fan unit.
3. Use a screwdriver to remove the fan unit from the converter as shown below.
4. Install the new fan unit in the inverse sequence as shown below.
By inserting the fan unit, you have established the electrical connection between the
converter and fan unit.
5. For a push-through mounted converter, you must also mount the top push-through
mounting frame back.
You have replaced the fan unit.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1057
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Replacing spare parts
10.2.3.2 Replacing the fan unit, FSD ... FSG
The fan unit is installed at the top.
Procedure
1. Switch off the converter power supply.
2. Press the release clips to remove the fan unit from the converter as shown below. Use a
screwdriver if necessary.
3. Install the new fan unit in the inverse sequence as shown below.
By inserting the fan unit, you have established the electrical connection between the
converter and fan unit.
You have replaced the fan unit.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
1058 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Replacing spare parts
10.2.3.3 Replacing the fan unit, FSH/FSJ
Two external fan units are installed at the bottom of the converter.
Procedure
1. Switch off the converter power supply.
2. Release the fixing screws from one fan unit using a screwdriver (①). The screws are
captive.
3. Shift this fan unit from position "2" to position "1" (this is marked on the housing) (②).
The connector is simultaneously released.
4. Remove the fan unit from the converter (③).
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to remove the other fan unit.
6. Install the new fan units in the inverse sequence (tightening torque for the captive fixing
screws: 1.8 Nm/15.9 lbf.in).
You have replaced the fan unit.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1059
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Replacing spare parts
10.2.3.4 Replacing the internal fan, FSH/FSJ only
Preconditions
The converter power supply is switched off.
Required tools
Torque wrench for TX-25 screws.
Function description
Removing the fan
1. Remove the screws (TX-25) of the upper and lower terminal cover.
– FSH: 3 screws
– FSJ: 4 screws
7; 7;
1P
7;
2. Remove the terminal covers.
SINAMICS G120X converter
1060 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Replacing spare parts
3. Remove 2 screws (TX-25) of the front cover.
1P
7; 7;
4. Remove the front cover.
5. Remove the fan connector.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1061
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Replacing spare parts
6. Remove 2 screws (TX-25).
7;
7;
7. Remove the fan.
The fan is removed.
❒
Installing the fan
1. Mount the fan into the converter.
2. Tighten 2 fan screws (TX-25).
3. Plug the fan connector.
4. Mount the front cover.
5. Tighten 2 screws (TX-25) of the front cover.
6. Mount the terminal covers.
7. Tighten the screws (TX-25) of the upper and lower terminal cover.
The fan is installed.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
1062 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Replacing spare parts
10.2.4 Assemblies for FSH and FSJ
10.2.4.1 Replacing the power supply board
Precondition
The converter power supply is switched off.
Required tools
Torque wrench for the following screws:
● TX-20
● TX-25
Function description
Removing the power supply board
1. Remove the screws (TX-25) of the upper and lower terminal cover.
– FSH: 3 screws
– FSJ: 4 screws
7; 7;
1P
7;
2. Remove the terminal covers.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1063
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Replacing spare parts
3. Remove 2 screws (TX-25) of the front cover.
1P
7; 7;
4. Remove the front cover.
5. Remove the connectors on the power supply board.
6. Remove 5 screws (TX-20).
7; 7;
7;
1P
7; 7;
7. Remove the power supply board.
The power supply board is removed.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
1064 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Replacing spare parts
Installing the power supply board
1. Align the power supply board to the screw holes.
2. Tighten 5 screws (TX-20)
3. Plug the connectors onto the power supply board.
4. Mount the front cover.
5. Tighten 2 screws (TX-25) of the front cover.
6. Mount the terminal covers.
7. Tighten the screws (TX-25) of the upper and lower terminal cover
The power supply board is installed.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1065
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Replacing spare parts
10.2.4.2 Replacing the free programmable interface (FPI)
Precondition
The converter power supply is switched off.
Required tools
Torque wrench for the following screws:
● TX-20
● TX-25
Function description
Removing the FPI board
1. Remove the screws (TX-25) of the upper and lower terminal cover.
– FSH: 3 screws
– FSJ: 4 screws
7; 7;
1P
7;
2. Remove the terminal covers.
SINAMICS G120X converter
1066 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Replacing spare parts
3. Remove 2 screws (TX-25) of the front cover.
1P
7; 7;
4. Remove the front cover.
5. Remove the connectors on the FPI board.
6. Open the locking devices of the IPD.
7. Remove the IPD.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1067
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Replacing spare parts
8. Remove the 6 screws on the FPI board (TX-20).
7; 7;
7;
1P
7; 7; 7;
9. Remove the FPI board.
The FPI board is removed.
❒
Installing the FPI board
1. Align the FPI board to the screw holes.
2. Insert 6 screws (TX-20)
3. Plug the IPD.
4. Close the locking devices of the IPD.
5. Plug the connectors onto the FPI board.
6. Mount the front cover.
7. Tighten 2 screws (TX-25) of the front cover.
8. Mount the terminal covers.
9. Tighten the screws (TX-25) of the upper and lower terminal cover.
The FPI board is installed.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
1068 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Replacing spare parts
10.2.4.3 Replacing the current sensor
Precondition
The converter power supply is switched off.
Required tools
Torque wrench for the following screws:
● TX-20
● TX-25
● TX-30
Function description
Removing the current sensor
1. Remove screws (TX-25) of the upper and lower terminal cover:
– FSH: 3 screws
– FSJ: 4 screws
7; 7;
1P
7;
2. Remove the terminal covers.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1069
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Replacing spare parts
3. Remove 2 screws (TX-25) of the front cover.
1P
7; 7;
4. Open the front door.
5. Remove the IP20 cover (TX-25).
7; 1P
6. Remove the upper copper bar (TX30 and TX-25).
7; 7;
7;
1P
1P
7;
1P
7; 7;
SINAMICS G120X converter
1070 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Replacing spare parts
7. Remove the lower copper bar (TX-25).
7; 7;
1P
7; 7;
1P
7; 7;
8. Remove the connector of the current sensor.
9. Remove the current sensor (TX-20).
7; 7;
1P
7; 7;
The current sensor is removed.
❒
Installing the current sensor
1. Mount the current sensor.
2. Plug the connector of the current sensor.
3. Mount the lower copper bar (TX-25).
4. Mount the upper copper bar (TX30 and TX25).
5. Mount the IP20 cover.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1071
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Replacing spare parts
6. Mount the front cover.
7. Tighten 2 screws (TX-25) of the front cover.
8. Mount the terminal covers.
9. Tighten the screws (TX-25) of the upper and lower terminal cover
The current sensor is installed.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
1072 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Corrective maintenance
10.3 Firmware upgrade and downgrade
10.3 Firmware upgrade and downgrade
Overview
,QYHUWHULVUHDG\
6ZLWFKRIIWKH
SRZHUVXSSO\
/('2))
,QVHUWPHPRU\FDUGZLWKWKH
ILUPZDUH ):
6ZLWFKRQ
WKHSRZHUVXSSO\
):YHUVLRQFDUG
1R
):YHUVLRQLQYHUWHU"
):YHUVLRQFDUG
<HV ! 1R
):YHUVLRQLQYHUWHU"
7KHLQYHUWHUUHVWRUHVLWV
IDFWRU\VHWWLQJV
<HV
)LUPZDUHXSJUDGH )LUPZDUHGRZQJUDGH
7KHLQYHUWHUORDGVWKH 7KHLQYHUWHUORDGVWKH
ILUPZDUH ILUPZDUH
'DWDEDFNXS
DYDLODEOHRQWKHPHPRU\ 1R
FDUG"
<HV
7KHLQYHUWHULPSRUWVWKHGDWD 7KHLQYHUWHUVDYHVLWVGDWDำ 7KHLQYHUWHUVLJQDOV 'DWD
EDFNXSIURPWKHPHPRU\ IDFWRU\VHWWLQJRQWKH KDVEHHQGRZQORDGHGIURP
FDUG PHPRU\FDUG WKHPHPRU\FDUG
6ZLWFKRIIWKH
SRZHUVXSSO\
/('2))
DQGVZLWFKRQDJDLQ
7KHLQYHUWHULVUHDG\
User actions
Converter response
Figure 10-2 Overview of the firmware upgrade and firmware downgrade
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1073
Corrective maintenance
10.3 Firmware upgrade and downgrade
10.3.1 Preparing the memory card
Overview
You can load the converter firmware from the Internet to a memory card.
Precondition
You have the appropriate memory card.
Recommended memory cards (Page 940)
Function description
Procedure
1. Download the required firmware to your PC from the Internet.
Download (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67364620)
2. Extract the files to a directory of your choice on your PC.
3. Transfer the unzipped files into the root directory of the memory card.
Figure 10-3 Example of memory card contents after the file transfer
Depending on the firmware, the filenames and the number of files may differ from the display
above.
The "USER" directory does not exist on unused memory cards. After the memory card is
plugged in for the first time, the converter creates a new "USER" directory.
You have prepared the memory card for the firmware upgrade or downgrade.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
1074 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Corrective maintenance
10.3 Firmware upgrade and downgrade
10.3.2 Upgrading the firmware
Overview
When upgrading the firmware, you replace the converter firmware by a later version.
Precondition
Converter and memory card have different firmware versions.
Function description
Procedure
1. Switch off the converter power supply.
2. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
/('2))
3. Insert the card with the matching firmware into the converter slot
until it latches into place.
4. Switch on the converter power supply again.
5. The converter transfers the firmware from the memory
card into its memory. 5'<
The transfer takes approximately 5 … 10 minutes.
PLQ
%)
While data is being transferred, the LED RDY on the con‐
verter stays red. The LED BF flashes orange with a vari‐
able frequency.
6. At the end of the transfer, the LED RDY and BF slowly flash red
(0.5 Hz).
Power supply failure during transfer 5'<
The converter firmware will be incomplete if the power supply fails
during the transfer. %)
● Start again with step 1 of the instructions.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1075
Corrective maintenance
10.3 Firmware upgrade and downgrade
7. Switch off the converter power supply.
8. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
Decide whether you want to withdraw the memory card from the /('2))
converter:
● You remove the memory card:
⇒ The converter keeps its settings.
● You leave the memory card in the converter:
⇒ If the memory card still does not have a data backup of the converter settings, in
step 9 the converter writes its settings to the memory card.
⇒ If the memory card already includes a data backup, the converter imports the settings
from the memory card in step 9.
9. Switch on the converter power supply again.
10 If the firmware upgrade was successful, after several seconds the
. converter LED RDY turns green. 5'<
If the memory card is still inserted, depending on the previous
content of the memory card, one of the two following cases has
occurred:
● The memory card contains a data backup:
⇒ The converter has taken the settings from the memory card.
● There was no data backup on the memory card:
⇒ The converter has written its settings to the memory card.
You have upgraded the converter firmware.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
1076 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Corrective maintenance
10.3 Firmware upgrade and downgrade
10.3.3 Firmware downgrade
Overview
When downgrading the firmware, you replace the converter firmware by an older version.
Precondition
● Converter and memory card have different firmware versions.
● The settings have been saved on a memory card or in an operator panel.
Function description
Procedure
1. Switch off the converter power supply.
2. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
/('2))
3. Insert the card with the matching firmware into the converter slot
until it latches into place.
4. Switch on the converter power supply again.
5. The converter transfers the firmware from the memory
card into its memory. 5'<
The transfer takes approximately 5 … 10 minutes.
PLQ
%)
While data is being transferred, the LED RDY on the con‐
verter stays red. The LED BF flashes orange with a vari‐
able frequency.
6. At the end of the transfer, the LED RDY and BF slowly flash red
(0.5 Hz).
Power supply failure during transfer 5'<
The converter firmware will be incomplete if the power supply fails
during the transfer. %)
● Start again with Step 1 of these instructions.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1077
Corrective maintenance
10.3 Firmware upgrade and downgrade
7. Switch off the converter power supply.
8. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
Decide whether you want to withdraw the memory card from the /('2))
converter:
● The memory card contains a data backup:
⇒ The converter has taken the settings from the memory card.
● There was no data backup on the memory card:
⇒ The converter has the factory setting.
9. Switch on the converter power supply again.
10 If the firmware downgrade was successful, after several seconds
. the converter LED RDY turns green. 5'<
If the memory card is still inserted, depending on the previous
content of the memory card, one of the two following cases has
occurred:
● The memory card contains a data backup:
⇒ The converter has taken the settings from the memory card.
● There was no data backup on the memory card:
⇒ The converter has the factory setting.
11 If the memory card did not contain a data backup of the converter settings, then you must
. transfer your settings to the converter from another data backup.
Saving the settings and series commissioning (Page 939)
You have replaced the converter firmware by an older version.
❒
SINAMICS G120X converter
1078 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Corrective maintenance
10.3 Firmware upgrade and downgrade
10.3.4 Correcting an unsuccessful firmware upgrade or downgrade
Precondition
The converter signals an unsuccessful firmware upgrade or down‐
5'<
grade by a quickly flashing LED RDY and the lit LED BF.
%)
Function description
You can check the following to correct an unsuccessful firmware upgrade or downgrade:
● Have you correctly inserted the card?
● Does the card contain the correct firmware?
Repeat the firmware upgrade or downgrade
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1079
Corrective maintenance
10.4 Reduced acceptance test after component replacement and firmware change
10.4 Reduced acceptance test after component replacement and firmware
change
After a component has been replaced or the firmware updated, a reduced acceptance test of
the safety functions must be performed.
Measure Reduced acceptance test
Acceptance test Documentation
Replacing the converter with an No. ● Supplement the converter
identical type Only check the direction of data
rotation of the motor. ● Log the new checksums
● Countersignature
● Supplement the hardware
version in the converter data.
Replacing the motor with an identi‐ No change.
cal pole pair number
Replace the gearbox with an iden‐
tical ratio
Replacing safety-related I/O devi‐ No. No change.
ces (e.g. Emergency Stop switch). Only check the control of the
safety functions affected by
the components that have
been replaced.
Converter firmware update. No. ● Supplement firmware version
in the converter data
● Log the new checksums
● Countersignature.
SINAMICS G120X converter
1080 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Technical data 11
11.1 Technical data of inputs and outputs
Property Explanation
Fieldbus interface (depending PROFINET
on the Control Unit) USS
PROFIBUS DP
24 V power supply There are two options regarding the 24 V supply:
● The converter generates its 24 V power supply from the line voltage.
● The converter obtains its 24 V power supply via terminals 31 and 32 with 20.4 … 28.8
VDC. Current consumption: Maximum 0.5A (The current consumption can be higher if
the Control Unit supplies I/O extension module, additional 0.4 A is needed.)
Output voltages ● 24 V (max. 250 mA)
● 10 V (max. 10 mA)
Setpoint resolution 0.01 Hz
Digital inputs 6 (DI 0 … DI 5) ● Electrically isolated
● Type 3 in accordance with EN 61131-2
● Voltage for "low" state: < 5 V
● Voltage for "high" state: > 11 V
● Current for 24 V input voltage: 4 mA
● Minimum current for the "high" state: 2.5 mA
● Maximum input voltage: 30 V
● PNP/NPN switchable
● Compatible to SIMATIC outputs
● 10 ms response time for debounce time p0724 = 0
Additional on FSH, ● Electrically isolated
FSJ: ● Type 3 in accordance with EN 61131-2
4 (DI 0 … DI 3)
● Voltage for "low" state: < 5 V
● Voltage for "high" state: > 15 V
● Current for 24 V input voltage: 6.4 mA
● Minimum current for the "high" state: 4 mA
● Maximum input voltage: 30 V
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1081
Technical data
11.1 Technical data of inputs and outputs
Property Explanation
Failsafe digital input 1 (STO_A, STO_B) ● Electrically isolated
● Maximum input voltage: 60 V
Only on FSH, FSJ: ● Electrically isolated
1 (STO_A1, ● Digital inputs in accordance with EN 61131-2
STO_A2)
● Voltage for "low" state: < 5 V
● Voltage for "high" state: > 15 V
● Current for 24 V input voltage: 15 mA
● Maximum input voltage: 30 V
Analog inputs 2 (AI 0 ... AI 1) ● Differential input
● 12-bit resolution
● 13 ms response time
● Switchable between voltage and current via mechanical switch:
– 0 V ... 10 V or -10 V ... +10 V: typical current drain: 0.1 mA,
maximum voltage 35 V
– 0 mA ... 20 mA: 120 Ω input resistance, voltage < 10 V, current
< 80 mA
● If AI 0 and AI 1 are configured as supplementary digital inputs:
Voltage < 35 V, low < 1.6 V, high > 4.0 V, 13 ms ± 1 ms response
time for debounce time p0724 = 0.
Digital outputs 2 (DO 0 ... DO 1) ● 250 V AC 2 A/30 V DC 2 A, for resistive, inductive or capacitive
load (For FSA ... FSC, the maximum current is 0.5 A to be UL-
compliant)
● Type C relay
● Update time: 2 ms
● Overvoltage category: III (Not for corner grounded network
380-480V AC or power supply network >= 600V AC without
electrical isolation) 1)
● Switching cycle: 1 Hz
Only on FSH, FSJ: ● 30 V DC 0.5 A, for resistive load
1 (FB_Ax, FB_Bx) ● Overvoltage category: III (Not for corner grounded network
380-480V AC or power supply network >= 600V AC without
electrical isolation) 1)
Analog outputs 1 (AO 0) ● Not isolated
● 16-bit resolution
● Switchable between voltage and current via parameter setting:
– 0 ... 10 V
– 0/4 ... 20 mA
● Update time: 4 ms
● <400 mV offset at 0 %
SINAMICS G120X converter
1082 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Technical data
11.1 Technical data of inputs and outputs
Property Explanation
Motor temperature sensor PTC ● Short-circuit monitoring < 20 Ω
● Overtemperature 1650 Ω
KTY84 ● Short-circuit monitoring < 50 Ω
● Wire-break: > 2120 Ω
Pt100 ● Connection of sensors:
– 2-wire technique
– 3-wire technique
– 4-wire technique
● Measurement range: -48 °C to 248 °C
Pt1000 ● Short-circuit monitoring < 603 Ω
● Wire-break > 2120 Ω
Bimetalic temperature switch with NC contact
Memory card (optional) Slot for SD or MMC memory cards
Recommended memory cards (Page 940)
1)
Overvoltage category: III is only supported on the G120X converter with FS version 02 02 (FSA ... FSG)/02 (FSH/FSJ) or
higher.
Note
Short-term voltage dips in the external 24 V supply (≤ 3 ms and ≤ 95% of the rated voltage)
When the mains voltage of the converter is switched off, the converter responds to short-term
voltage dips in the external 24 V supply with fault F30074. Communication via fieldbus,
however, remains in effect in this case.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1083
Technical data
11.2 Load cycles and overload capability
11.2 Load cycles and overload capability
Overload capability is the property of the converter to temporarily supply a current that is higher
than the rated current to accelerate a load. Two typical load cycles are defined to clearly
demonstrate the overload capability: "Low Overload" and "High Overload".
Definitions
Base load
Constant load between the accelerating phases of the converter
Low Overload
● LO base load input current
Permissible input current for a "Low Overload" load cycle
● LO base load output current
Permissible output current for a "Low Overload" load cycle
● LO base load power
Rated power based on the LO base load output current
High Overload
● HO base load input current
Permissible input current for a "High Overload" load cycle
● HO base load output current
Permissible output current for a "High Overload" load cycle
● HO base load power
Rated power based on the HO base load output current
If not specified otherwise, the power and current data in the technical data always refer to a load
cycle according to Low Overload.
Load cycles and typical applications
"Low Overload" load cycle
The "Low Overload" load cycle assumes a uniform base load with low requirements placed on
brief accelerating p phases. Typical "Low Overload" applications include the following:
● Centrifuge pump, fan and compressor
● Axial flow fan
● Propeller pump
"High Overload" load cycle
The "High Overload" load cycle permits, for reduced base load, dynamic accelerating phases.
Typical "High Overload" applications include the following:
● Displacement pump and fan and compressor
● Geared pump
● Screw pump
● Roots blower
SINAMICS G120X converter
1084 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Technical data
11.2 Load cycles and overload capability
Permissible converter overload
The converter has two different power data: "Low Overload" (LO) and "High Overload" (HO),
depending on the expected load.
3HUPLVVLEOHRYHUORDG 3HUPLVVLEOHRYHUORDG
IRU/RZ2YHUORDG /2 IRU+LJK2YHUORDG +2
RYHUORDGIRUV
RYHUORDGIRUV
RYHUORDGIRUV
%DVHORDGIRUV
%DVHORDGIRUV
%DVHORDG/2 %DVHORDG+2
W>V@ W>V@
Note that the rated ambient temperature for the above load cycles is 45°C.
Note
Permissible converter overload for converter FSH/FSJ
When converter FSH/FSJ is operated in low overload, either 135% overload or 110% overload
is permissible, but not together.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1085
Technical data
11.3 General converter technical data
11.3 General converter technical data
Property Explanation
Line voltage FSA … FSG:
● for systems according to IEC:
– 3 AC 380 V (-20 %) ... 480 V (+10 %)
– 3 AC 500 V (-20 %) ... 690 V (+10 %)
● for systems according to UL:
– 3 AC 380 V ... 480 V
– 3 AC 500 V ... 600 V
The actual permissible line voltage depends on the installation altitude.
FSH, FSJ:
● 3 AC 380 V (-15 %) ... 480 V (+10 %)
● 3 AC 500 V (-15 %) ... 690 V (+10 %)
Output voltage 0 V 3 AC ... line voltage x 0.97
Input frequency 47 Hz ... 63 Hz
Output frequency ● FSA ... FSG: 0 Hz ... 550 Hz, depending on the control mode
● FSH/FSJ: 0 Hz ... 150 Hz, depending on the control mode
Power factor λ ● FSA ... FSG: 0.75 ... 0.93
● FSH/FSJ with line reactor uk = 2 %: 0.75 ... 0.93
Line impedance uk 4%
Inrush current < 2 × peak input current
The converter can withstand 100,000 power cycles with an inverval of 120 s.
Overvoltage category According to IEC 61800-5-1:
● III for Power Module
● III for Control Unit (Not for corner grounded network 380-480V AC or power supply
network >= 600V AC without electrical isolation) 1)
Line harmonics The converter fulfils the requirements of IEC 61000-3-12 with Rsce = 120.
Further technical data on request.
Pulse frequency (factory setting) FSA … FSG
● 400 V converters:
– 4 kHz for devices with an LO base load power < 100 kW
– 2 kHz for devices with an LO base load power ≥ 100 kW
● 690 V converters: 2 kHz
FSH/FSJ: 4 kHz
SINAMICS G120X converter
1086 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Technical data
11.3 General converter technical data
Property Explanation
Safety Integrated An external safety device is necessary, e. g. F-PLC or Siemens Safety device
3SK2xxx.The higher-level control system must monitor the selection of STO and the feed‐
back from the converter.
"Safe Torque Off" safety function (Page 128)
STO fulfils the requirements of the following standards:
● SIL 3 according to IEC61508, part 1 to 3 (2010)
● PL e according to IEC61800-5-2 (2016)
● Category 3 according to ISO13849 part 1 (2015)
The function STO corresponds to stop category 0 according to IEC60204 (2005)
Response time: 20 ms
The response time of the Safe Torque Off function is the time between selecting the
function and the function becoming active.
Probability of failures:
● Probability of failures per hour: PFH, PFHD = 5×10-8 1/h
PFH according to IEC 61800‑5‑2, PFHD according to IEC 62061
● Mean probability of failure for a low demand rate of the safety function according to
IEC 61508: PFD = 5×10-3
Mission time: 20 years
You may not operate converters with integrated safety functions for longer than the mis‐
sion time. The mission time starts when the device is delivered. The mission time cannot
be extended. This is the case even if a service department checks the converter – or in the
meantime, the converter was decommissioned.
Degree of protection ● IP20/UL Open Type
● IP21/UL Open Type can be realized for converters FSA ... FSG, with an IP21 top cover
Maximum short-circuit current When using fuses: 100 kA rms
(SCCR or Icc) You can find the data for further overcurrent protection devices on the Internet:
Branch protection and short-circuit strength according to UL and IEC (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/109762895)
Minimum short-circuit current 18 kA rms
The length of the connecting cable from the line to the converter may not reduce the
minimum short-circuit current.
Surrounding air temperature dur‐ ● FSA ... FSG (with PROFINET interface)
ing operation 2) -20 °C to +55 °C (a lateral clearance of 5 cm is required for FSA ... FSC with
surrounding air temperature > 50 °C), > 45 °C with derating
● FSA ... FSG (with USS or PROFIBUS DP interface)
-20 °C to +60 °C (a lateral clearance of 5 cm is required for FSA ... FSC with
surrounding air temperature > 50 °C), > 45 °C with derating
● FSH/FSJ
0 °C to 55 °C, > 45 °C with derating
Current derating as a function of the ambient temperature (Page 1093)
Relative humidity < 95% (non-condensing)
Installation altitude Up to 1000 m above sea level without derating
Above 1000 m with derating
Current derating as a function of the installation altitude (Page 1092)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1087
Technical data
11.3 General converter technical data
Property Explanation
Surrounding air temperature dur‐ ● FSA ... FSG: -40 °C to +70 °C
ing storage ● FSH/FSJ: -25 °C to +55 °C
-40 °C for maximal 24 h
Shock and vibration ● FSA ... FSG
– Transport in transportation packaging according to Class 2M3 according to EN
61800-5-1 and EN 60068-2-6
– Vibration in operation according to Class 3M1 according to EN 60721-3-3: 1995
● FSH/FSJ
– Vibration during operation: Fc test according to EN 60068-2-6 0.075 mm for 10 ...
58 Hz 9.81 m/s² (1 x g) at > 58 ... 200 Hz
– Shock during operation: Test according to EN 60068- 2-27 (EA shock type) 49 m/
s² (5 x g)/30 ms 147 m/s² (15 x g)/11 ms
– Vibration during product packaging: Fc test according to EN 60068-2-6 ±1.5 mm for
5 ... 9 Hz 0.5 g at 9 ... 200 Hz
– Shock during product packaging: Fc test according to EN 60068-2-6 ±1.5 mm for
5 ... 9 Hz 0.5 g at 9 ... 200 Hz
Protection against chemical sub‐ Protected according to EN 60721‑3‑3:
stances ● FSA ... FSG
– Class 3C2
– Class 3C3 (available for converters with PROFINET fieldbus only) 3)
● FSH/FSJ: Class 3C2
Pollution Suitable for environments with degree of pollution 2 according to EN 61800-5-1
Sound pressure level LPA (1 m) ≤ 74 dB (A) 4)
Cooling method Air forced cooling
Cooling air Clean and dry air
1)
Overvoltage category: III is only supported on the G120X converter with FS version 02 02 (FSA ... FSG)/02 (FSH/FSJ) or
higher.
2)
The data is valid without BOP-2, IOP-2 or SINAMICS G120 Smart Access.
3)
Converters with BOP-2 or IOP-2 installed are not designed for operation under the condition of environment class 3C3. But
SIPLUS IOP-2 with environment class 3C4 (article number: 6AG1255-0AA00-2JA2) can be ordered as an optional
component to meet the requirement.
4)
Maximum sound pressure level, ascertained in the IP20 cabinet.
SINAMICS G120X converter
1088 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Technical data
11.4 Technical data dependent on the power
11.4 Technical data dependent on the power
3-phase 380 … 480 V AC
Frame Rated Rated in‐ Rated output Power Input cur‐ Output Power loss (kW) Net weight (kg)
size power put current current [A] [kW] rent [A] current
[kW] (NEC [A] (NEC (NEC 480 V) (NEC (NEC [A] (NEC
[hp]) 480 V) [hp]) 480 V) 480 V)
Based on Low Overload Based on High Overload With‐ With fil‐ With‐ With fil‐
out fil‐ ter out fil‐ ter
ter ter
FSA 0.75 (1) 2.1 (2.0) 2.2 (2.1) 0.55 1.7 (1.6) 1.7 (1.6) 0.043 0.043 3.3 3.5
(0.75)
1.1 (1.5) 2.8 (2.7) 3.1 (3.0) 0.75 (1) 2.1 (2.0) 2.2 (2.1) 0.055 0.055 3.3 3.5
1.5 (2) 3.6 (3.0) 4.1 (3.4) 1.1 (1.5) 2.8 (2.7) 3.1 (3.0) 0.071 0.072 3.3 3.5
2.2 (3) 5.5 (4.6) 5.9 (4.8) 1.5 (2) 3.6 (3.0) 4.1 (3.4) 0.090 0.091 3.4 3.6
3 (4) 6.9 (5.8) 7.7 (6.2) 2.2 (3) 5.5 (4.6) 5.9 (4.8) 0.123 0.125 3.4 3.6
FSB 4 (5) 9.75 10.2 (7.6) 3 (4) 7.75 7.7 (6.2) 0.136 0.138 5.8 6.2
5.5 (7.5) 12 13.2 (11) 4 (5) 9.75 10.2 (7.6) 0.18 0.183 5.8 6.2
7.5 (10) 17 18 (14) 5.5 (7.5) 13.25 13.2 (11) 0.245 0.253 5.8 6.2
FSC 11 (15) 24.5 26 (21) 7.5 (10) 18.25 18 (14) 0.316 0.32 7.1 7.7
15 (20) 29.5 32 (27) 11 (15) 24.5 26 (21) 0.396 0.402 7.1 7.7
FSD 18.5 (25) 36 (32) 38 (34) 15 (20) 33 (28) 32 (27) 0.59 0.60 16.6 18.3
22 (30) 42 (37) 45 (40) 18.5 (25) 38 (35) 38 (34) 0.72 0.73 16.6 18.3
30 (40) 57 (49) 60 (52) 22 (30) 47 (41) 45 (40) 0.83 0.84 16.6 18.3
37 (50) 70 (61) 75 (65) 30 (40) 62 (54) 60 (52) 1.10 1.11 18.8 19.5
FSE 45 (60) 86 (74) 90 (77) 37 (50) 78 (69) 75 (65) 1.33 1.34 17.6 18.3
55 (75) 104 (91) 110 (96) 45 (60) 94 (80) 90 (77) 1.73 1.71 26.7 28.7
FSF 75 (100) 140 (120) 145 (124) 55 (75) 117 (102) 110 (96) 1.97 2.00 61 67.5
90 (125) 172 (151) 178 (156) 75 (100) 154 (132) 145 (124) 2.57 2.61 61 67.5
110 (150) 198 (174) 205 (180) 90 (125) 189 (166) 178 (156) 2.37 2.41 66.5 71
132 (200) 241 (232) 250 (240) 110 (150) 218 (191) 205 (180) 3.10 3.16 66.5 71
FSG 160 (250) 301 (301) 302 (302) 132 (200) 275 (263) 250 (240) 3.22 * 3.66 ** -- 105
200 (300) 365 (356) 370 (361) 160 (250) 330 (327) 302 (302) 4.61 * 4.61 ** -- 113
250 (400) 471 (471) 477 (477) 200 (300) 400 (392) 370 (361) 6.17 * 6.17 ** -- 120
FSH 315 (---) 585 (486) 570 (477) 250 (300) 477 (397) 468 (390) -- 6.79 -- 151
355 (450) 654 (525) 640 (515) 250 (300) 501 (402) 491 (394) -- 7.69 -- 157
400 (500) 735 (602) 720 (590) 315 (350) 562 (461) 551 (452) -- 8.39 -- 159
FSJ 450 (---) 850 (687) 820 (663) 355 (450) 696 (561) 672 (542) -- 10.42 -- 235
500 (600) 924 (751) 890 (724) 400 (500) 756 (614) 728 (591) -- 10.89 -- 250
560 (700) 1038 (862) 1000 (830) 450 (500) 816 (677) 786 (652) -- 12.50 -- 250
* With C3 filter
** With C2 filter
--- not applicable
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1089
Technical data
11.4 Technical data dependent on the power
3-phase 500 … 690 V AC *
Frame Rated Rated in‐ Rated output Power Input cur‐ Output Power loss (kW) Weight (kg)
size power put cur‐ current [A] [kW] rent [A] current
[kW] (NEC rent [A] (NEC 600 V) (NEC (NEC [A] (NEC
[hp]) (NEC [hp]) 600 V) 600 V)
600 V)
Based on Low Overload Based on High Overload With‐ With fil‐ With‐ With fil‐
out fil‐ ter out fil‐ ter
ter ter
FSD 3 (4) 5 (5) 5 (5) 2.2 (3) 4.4 (4.4) 4 (4) 0.16 0.16 16.6 18.3
4 (5) 6 (6) 6.3 (6.3) 3 (4) 5.2 (5.2) 5 (5) 0.19 0.19 16.6 18.3
5.5 (7.5) 9 (9) 9 (9) 4 (5) 6.9 (6.9) 6.3 (6.3) 0.26 0.26 16.6 18.3
7.5 (10) 11 (11) 11 (11) 5.5 (7.5) 9.9 (9.9) 9 (9) 0.31 0.31 16.6 18.3
11 (---) 14 (14) 14 (14) 7.5 (10) 12.1 11 (11) 0.36 0.36 16.6 18.3
(12.1)
15 (15) 18 (18) 19 (19) 11 (n/a) 14.6 14 (14) 0.45 0.45 16.6 18.3
(14.6)
18.5 (20) 22 (22) 23 (23) 15 (15) 20 (20) 19 (19) 0.53 0.54 16.6 18.3
22 (25) 25 (25) 27 (27) 18.5 (20) 23.4 23 (23) 0.61 0.62 16.6 18.3
(23.4)
30 (30) 33 (33) 35 (35) 22 (25) 28 (28) 27 (27) 0.80 0.80 16.6 18.3
37 (40) 40 (40) 42 (42) 30 (30) 36.6 35 (35) 0.97 0.98 18.8 19.5
(36.6)
FSE 45 (50) 50 (50) 52 (52) 37 (40) 44.4 42 (42) 1.11 1.12 17.6 18.3
(44.4)
55 (60) 59 (59) 62 (62) 45 (50) 54.4 52 (52) 1.35 1.36 26.7 28.7
(54.4)
FSF 75 (75) 78 (78) 80 (80) 55 (60) 66.4 62 (62) 1.41 1.41 61 68
(66.4)
90 (100) 97 (97) 100 (100) 75 (75) 85.2 80 (80) 1.80 1.82 61 68
(85.2)
110 (125) 121 (121) 125 (125) 90 (100) 106.3 100 (100) 2.22 2.25 66.5 71
(106.3)
132 (150) 138 (138) 144 (144) 110 (125) 131.6 125 (125) 2.64 2.67 66.5 71
(131.6)
FSG 160 (---) 171 (171) 171 (171) 132 (150) 158.2 144 (144) -- 2.93 -- 105
(158.2)
200 (200) 205 (205) 208 (208) 160 (n/a) 185.1 171 (171) -- 3.70 -- 113
(185.1)
250 (250) 249 (249) 250 (250) 200 (200) 227.5 208 (208) -- 4.63 -- 120
(227.5)
FSH 315 (350) 343 (375) 330 (345) 250 (250) 283 (307) 272 (295) -- 5.40 -- 158
355 (400) 401 (408) 385 (388) 315 (300) 327 (333) 314 (320) -- 6.19 -- 158
400 (450) 437 (461) 420 (432) 355 (350) 362 (381) 348 (367) -- 6.88 -- 162
450 (500) 489 (526) 470 (487) 400 (450) 410 (440) 394 (423) -- 7.72 -- 162
SINAMICS G120X converter
1090 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Technical data
11.4 Technical data dependent on the power
Frame Rated Rated in‐ Rated output Power Input cur‐ Output Power loss (kW) Weight (kg)
size power put cur‐ current [A] [kW] rent [A] current
[kW] (NEC rent [A] (NEC 600 V) (NEC (NEC [A] (NEC
[hp]) (NEC [hp]) 600 V) 600 V)
600 V)
Based on Low Overload Based on High Overload With‐ With fil‐ With‐ With fil‐
out fil‐ ter out fil‐ ter
ter ter
FSJ 500 (---) 540 (591) 520 (546) 450 (450) 461 (501) 444 (482) -- 8.13 -- 236
560 (600) 602 (665) 580 (610) 500 (500) 494 (543) 476 (523) -- 8.83 -- 236
630 (700) 675 (737) 650 (679) 560 (500) 552 (602) 532 (580) -- 9.94 -- 246
*
For systems according to UL: 500 V ... 600 V
--- not applicable
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1091
Technical data
11.5 Derating data
11.5 Derating data
11.5.1 Current derating as a function of the installation altitude
The permissible converter output current is reduced above an installation altitude of 1000 m.
2XWSXWFXUUHQW>@
,QVWDOODWLRQDOWLWXGH>P@
Permissible line supplies dependent on the installation altitude
● For installation altitudes ≤ 2000 m above sea level, it is permissible to connect the converter
to any of the line supplies that are specified for it.
● For installation altitudes 2000 m ... 4000 m above sea level, the following applies:
– Connection to a TN line system with grounded neutral point is permissible.
– TN systems with grounded line conductor are not permitted.
– The TN line system with grounded neutral point can also be supplied using an isolation
transformer.
– The phase-to-phase voltage does not have to be reduced.
Note
Using converters connected to TN line supplies with voltages ≥ 600 V for installation altitudes
2000 m … 4000 m
For voltages ≥600 V, the TN line supply must have a grounded neutral point established using
an isolation transformer.
SINAMICS G120X converter
1092 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Technical data
11.5 Derating data
11.5.2 Current derating as a function of the ambient temperature
2XWSXWFXUUHQW>@
)6$)6*866 3URILEXV'3
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH>ഒ@
2XWSXWFXUUHQW>@
)6$)6*3URILQHW
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH>ഒ@
2XWSXWFXUUHQW>@
)6+)6-
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH>ഒ@
Note that Operator Panel can restrict the maximum permissible operating ambient temperature
of the converter.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1093
Technical data
11.5 Derating data
11.5.3 Current derating as a function of the line voltage
400 V converters
>@
2XSXWFXUUHQW 9
2XSXWSRZHU
9ROWDJHUDQJH
,QSXWYROWDJH>9@
>@
2XSXWFXUUHQW 1(&9
2XSXWSRZHU
9ROWDJHUDQJH
,QSXWYROWDJH>9@
The thermal protection of the converter can reduce the current or the pulse frequency above 415
V or 480 V respectively.
Figure 11-1 Current derating as a function of the input voltage for FSA … FSG
>@ 2XSXWFXUUHQW
9ROWDJHUDQJH
,QSXWYROWDJH>9@
Figure 11-2 Current derating as a function of the input voltage for FSH, FSJ
SINAMICS G120X converter
1094 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Technical data
11.5 Derating data
690 V converters
>@ 2XSXWFXUUHQW
2XSXWSRZHU
9ROWDJHUDQJH
,QSXWYROWDJH>9@
Figure 11-3 Current derating as a function of the input voltage for FSA … FSG
>@ 2XSXWFXUUHQW
9ROWDJHUDQJH
,QSXWYROWDJH>9@
Figure 11-4 Current derating as a function of the input voltage for FSH, FSJ
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1095
Technical data
11.5 Derating data
11.5.4 Current derating as a function of the pulse frequency
400 V converters
Frame Rated power Output current (A) (at 400 V, 45 °C ambient temperature) for a pulse frequency of
size based on LO 2 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12 kHz 14 kHz 16 kHz
(kW)
FSA 0.75 2.2 2.2 1.87 1.54 1.32 1.1 0.99 0.88
1.1 3.1 3.1 2.635 2.17 1.86 1.55 1.395 1.24
1.5 4.1 4.1 3.485 2.87 2.46 2.05 1.895 1.64
2.2 5.9 5.9 5.015 4.13 3.54 2.95 2.655 2.36
3 7.7 7.7 6.545 5.39 4.62 3.85 3.465 3.08
FSB 4 10.2 10.2 8.67 7.14 6.12 5.1 4.59 4.08
5.5 13.2 13.2 11.22 9.24 7.92 6.6 5.94 5.28
7.5 18 18 15.3 12.6 10.8 9 8.1 7.2
FSC 11 26 26 22.1 18.2 15.6 13 11.7 10.4
15 32 32 27.2 22.4 19 18 14.4 12.8
FSD 18.5 38 38 32.3 26.6 22.8 19 17.1 15.2
22 45 45 38.2 31.5 27 22.5 20.2 18
30 60 60 51 42 36 30 27 24
37 75 75 63.7 52.5 45 37.5 33.7 30
FSE 45 90 90 76.5 63 54 45 40.5 36
55 110 110 93.5 77 66 55 49.5 44
FSF 75 145 145 123.2 101.5 87 72.5 65.2 58
90 178 178 151 124.6 107 89 80.1 71.2
110 205 143.5 103 82 -- -- -- --
132 250 175 125 100 -- -- -- --
FSG 160 302 211.4 151 121 -- -- -- --
200 370 259 185 148 -- -- -- --
250 477 334 239 191 -- -- -- --
FSH 315 585 468 1)
-- -- -- -- -- --
355 655 524 1) -- -- -- -- -- --
400 735 588 1)
-- -- -- -- -- --
FSJ 450 840 672 1)
-- -- -- -- -- --
500 910 728 1)
-- -- -- -- -- --
560 1021 817 1) -- -- -- -- -- --
The rated output currents in bold refer to the default pulse frequency at 45 °C ambient temperature.
1)
In the factory setting, the converter starts with a pulse frequency of 4 kHz and reduces automatically the pulse frequency to
the associated required frequencies when loaded. When the load decreases, the pulse frequency is increased automatically
up to 4 kHz.
SINAMICS G120X converter
1096 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Technical data
11.5 Derating data
690 V converters
Frame Size Rated power based on Output current (A) (at 45 °C ambient temperature) for a
LO (kW) pulse frequency of
2 kHz 4 kHz
FSD 3 6 3.6
4 7 4.2
5.5 10 6
7.5 13 7.8
11 16 9.6
15 21 12.6
18.5 25 15
22 29 17.4
30 38 22.8
37 46 27.6
FSE 45 58 34.8
55 68 40.8
FSF 75 90 54
90 112 67.2
110 128 76.8
132 158 94.8
FSG 160 196 118
200 236 142
250 288 173
FSH 315 330 215 1)
355 385 250 1)
400 420 273 1)
450 470 306 1)
FSJ 500 520 338 1)
560 580 377 1)
630 650 423 1)
The rated output currents in bold refer to the default pulse frequency at 45 °C ambient temperature.
1)
In the factory setting, the converter starts with a pulse frequency of 4 kHz and reduces automatically
the pulse frequency to the associated required frequencies when loaded. When the load decreases,
the pulse frequency is increased automatically up to 4 kHz.
The values of the rated current refer to a pulse frequency of 2 kHz at 45 °C ambient temperature and
are reached at any time by the automatic adaptation of the output pulse frequency.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1097
Technical data
11.6 Low frequency performance
11.6 Low frequency performance
The converter can only be operated with reduced output current at low output frequencies.
NOTICE
Reduced converter service life as a result of overheating
Loading the converter with a high output current and at the same time with a low output
frequency can cause the current-conducting components in the converter to overheat.
Excessively high temperatures can damage the converter or reduce the converter service life.
● Never operate the converter continuously with an output frequency = 0 Hz.
● Only operate the converter in the permissible operating range.
6SRUDGLFVKRUWWLPHGXW\ 6KRUWWLPHGXW\
3HUPLVVLEOH ืV
RXWSXWFXUUHQW ืV
ืV
>@
&RQWLQXRXVRSHUDWLRQ
2XWSXWIUHTXHQF\>+]@
● Continuous operation (green area in the figure)
Operating state that is permissible for the complete operating time.
● Short-time duty (yellow area in the figure)
Operating state that is permissible for less than 2% of the total operating time.
● Sporadic short-time duty (red area in the figure)
Operating state that is permissible for less than 0.1% of the total operating time.
SINAMICS G120X converter
1098 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Technical data
11.7 Data regarding the power loss in partial load operation
11.7 Data regarding the power loss in partial load operation
You can find data regarding power loss in partial load operation in the Internet:
Partial load operation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/94059311)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1099
Technical data
11.8 Electromagnetic compability of the converter
11.8 Electromagnetic compability of the converter
11.8.1 Overview
Definition of terms
EMC stands for electromagnetic compatibility.
EMC means that the devices function satisfactorily without interfering with or being disrupted
by other devices. EMC applies when both the emitted interference (emission level) and the
interference immunity are matched with each other.
The product standard IEC/EN 61800-3 describes the EMC requirements placed on variable-
speed drives.
A variable-speed drive (referred to as "Power Drive System", or PDS, in IEC/EN 61800-3)
consists of the converter as well as the associated motors and encoders including the
connecting cables.
The driven machine is not part of the drive.
General information
IEC/EN 61800-3 makes a distinction between the "first environment" and "second
environment" – and defines different requirements for these environments.
● First environment
Residential buildings or locations at which the drive is directly connected to the public low-
voltage system without an intermediate transformer.
● Second environment
An environment that includes all other equipment which is not connected directly to a public
low-voltage line supply for residential buildings. These are basically industrial areas that
have their own medium-voltage supply via their own transformers.
Note
The drive is intended for commercial or industrial use in stationary machines and systems.
Note
The drive is intended to be installed and put into operation by specially trained personnel, in
observance of EMC conditions and the installation information in the operating instructions and
"EMC layout guidelines" configuration manual.
EMC installation guideline (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
60612658)
SINAMICS G120X converter
1100 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Technical data
11.8 Electromagnetic compability of the converter
Note
The drive as a component of machines or systems
For the integration of the drive in machines or systems, additional measures may be necessary
in order to comply with the product standards of these systems or machines. These additional
measures are the responsibility of the system or machine manufacturer.
Note
In a residential environment, the drive may cause radio interference. In such cases, additional
interference suppression measures may be required.
11.8.2 Operation in the Second EMC environment
11.8.2.1 High-frequency interference emissions EMC category C3
Description
The drive may be used in the second EMC environment if at least the limit values of IEC
61800-3 Category C3 with regard to conducted and radiated interference emissions are
complied with. The following requirements must be met for this purpose:
● Operation on TN or TT line supply with star-point grounded
● Permissible motor cable length
Maximum permissible motor cable length (Page 82)
● Shielded motor cable with low capacitance
● Pulse frequency ≤ factotory setting
● With line filter (external or internal)
– Converters with integrated C2 line filter or C3 line filter
– Unfiltered converters with external C2 line filter or C3 line filter
Note
If devices without integrated C3 filters or filters other than those listed above are used, the
machine builder or plant engineer must certify that the emitted interference does not exceed the
limit values of category C3. Separate line filters for each device or a shared line filter for several
devices can be used.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1101
Technical data
11.8 Electromagnetic compability of the converter
11.8.2.2 High-frequency interference emissions EMC category C2
Description
The drive meets the limit values of IEC 61800-3 Category C2 with regard to conducted and
radiated interference emissions under the following conditions:
● Operation on TN or TT line supply with grounded neutral point
● Permissible motor cable length
Maximum permissible motor cable length (Page 82)
● Shieled motor cable with low capacitance
● Pulse frequency ≤ factotory setting
● With C2 line filter (external or internal)
– Converters with integrated C2 line filter
– Unfiltered FSA … FSF converters with external C2 line filter
– FSH/FSJ converters with external C2 line filter and line reactor
Note
If devices without integrated C2 filters or filters other than those listed above are used, the
machine builder or plant engineer must certify that the emitted interference does not exceed the
limit values of category C2. Separate line filters for each device or a shared line filter for several
devices can be used.
11.8.2.3 Current harmonics
Overview
IEC 61800-3 does not define any limits for the emission of current harmonics when used in
industrial networks. A system evaluation according to IEC 61000-3-14 or 61800-3 Annex B.4
is recommended.
SINAMICS G120X converter
1102 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Technical data
11.8 Electromagnetic compability of the converter
11.8.3 Operation in the First EMC environment
11.8.3.1 General information
Overview
Devices and systems that are operated on the public low-voltage system must comply with the
limit values for electromagnetic interference (interference immunity and interference emission)
defined in the relevant standards. Industrial networks are facing increased requirements,
particularly regarding emitted interference. The requirements for standard-conformant
operation on the public low-voltage system are explained in more detail in the following.
Note
Requirements may be defined in the technical connection conditions of the local network
operator that exceed the standard requirements described in this document.
Note
The flicker behavior can only be evaluated in a combination of the drive with an application (see
IEC 61800-3, Section 6.2.4.2). The drive behaves passively in this regard, i.e. load fluctuations
of the application will be visible without changes on the line side.
Note
Influence by ripple control signals
Ripple control signals in public supply systems can affect the operation of the drive system in
unfavorable cases and cause fault shutdowns (e.g. "undervoltage" or "phase failure"). This
particularly applies to FSA-C devices if they are operated in the factory-set U/f control mode.
● If ripple control signals are exerting unwanted influence, replace the U/f control mode
(Standard Drive Control application class) with the vector control (Dynamic Drive Control
application class).
11.8.3.2 High-frequency, conducted and radiated interference emissions, EMC Category C2
Description
The drive may only be used in the first EMC environment if at least the limit values of EMC
Category C2 are adhered to in regard to the interference emissions. To this end, the
requirements listed below must be satisfied:
● Operation on a TN or TT system with a grounded neutral point.
● Use of shielded motor cables with a length of max. 150 meters.
● Operation using the default pulse frequency (or with a reduced pulse frequency)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1103
Technical data
11.8 Electromagnetic compability of the converter
● FSA – FSG: Use converters with an integrated C2 line filter (-0AF0 in the last block of the
article number)
● FSH, FSJ: Use of an external line filter
– 400-480 V 3 AC: 6SL3760-0MR00-0AA0
– 500-690 V 3 AC: 6SL3760-0MS00-0AA0
Note
If converters without integrated C2 filters or filters other than those listed above are used, the
machine builder or plant engineer must certify that the interference emissions are limited
according to EMC Category C2, at a minimum. Separate line filters for each converter or a
shared line filter for several converters can be used.
11.8.3.3 High-frequency, conducted interference emissions, EMC Category C1
Description
In conjunction with upstream C1 line filters, the converter meets the limits of IEC 61800-3
Category C1 with respect to conducted interference.
Conditions for compliance with the limits:
● TN or TT system with a grounded neutral point.
● Use of shielded motor cables
● Compliance with maximum motor cable length
Maximum permissible motor cable length (Page 82)
● Converter operation using the default pulse frequency or with reduced pulse frequency
11.8.3.4 Current harmonics of individual devices
Description
In regard to the adherence to limit values for the harmonic currents, the EMC product standard
IEC 61800-3 for PDS refers to the compliance with standards IEC 61000-3-2 and IEC
61000-3-12. The limit values of these standards apply to devices that are designed for
connecting to the public low-voltage system.
SINAMICS G120X converter
1104 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Technical data
11.8 Electromagnetic compability of the converter
Depending on the rated output and the rated input current of the device, different requirements
result for the direct connection to the low-voltage system.
LO base load LO input cur‐
power rent
≤ 1 kW - The converters comply with the requirements of IEC 61000-3-2.
> 1 kW ≤ 16 A No limit value requirements are defined in IEC 61000-3-2 for professio‐
nally used devices of this output range.
Notification of the network operator and a system evaluation according
to IEC 61000-3-14 or 61800-3 Annex B.4 are recommended.
> 16 A and ≤ The converters comply with IEC 61000-3-12 (Table 4), provided that the
75 A short-circuit capacity (SSC) at the point of connection of the customer
system to the public network is greater than or equal to the value in the
formula below.
SSC = U²rated / Z ≥ 120 · √3 · Urated · ILO
The installer or plant operator must ensure that the converters are only
connected to a supply system with sufficient short-circuit capacity.
If the converters are to be connected to a supply system with a lower
short-circuit capacity, the installer or plant operator must obtain a con‐
nection approval from the network operator in regard to harmonic cur‐
rents.
> 75 A: No limit values for current harmonics are defined for these devices in the
IEC standards. Notification of the network operator and a system eval‐
uation according to IEC 61000-3-14 or 61800-3 Annex B.4 are recom‐
mended.
The converters FSH and FSJ always require an upstream line reactor
and an upstream line filter for operating on the public low-voltage sys‐
tem.
When operated with LO rated power, the converter generates the following typical current
harmonics (as a percentage of the fundamental current):
Converter RSC I5 I7 I11 I13 I17 I19 I23 I25 THC
FSA … FSG 120 38% 18% 8% 5% 4% 3% 3% 2% 43%
FSH, FSJ with 50 37% 13% 7% 3% 3% 2% 1% 1% 40%
2% line reactor
The SIZER configuration tool allows the individual calculation of the harmonic parameters.
Download SIZER (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
10804987/130000)
Line Harmonics Filter (LHF) for reducing current harmonics
The passive LHF (Line Harmonics Filters) available for the converter allow a significant
reduction of the current harmonics. It is especially recommended that LHF be used if devices
FSE ... FSG (above 75 A rated input current) are to be operated on the public low-voltage
system.
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1105
Technical data
11.8 Electromagnetic compability of the converter
Typical current harmonics with LHF when operating with LO rated power (in percentage of the
fundamental current):
Converter RSC I5 I7 I11 I13 I15 I17 I23 I25 THC
FSB … FSG / 33 1.7% 1.9% 2.2% 1.5% 0.8% 0.8% 0.7% 0.6% 4.2%
400 V 120 1.8% 2.2% 2.4% 1.6% 0.8% 0.8% 0.7% 0.6% 4.4%
The power factor λ improves with LHF to approx. 98% when operating with rated output.
With an upstream LHF, the converters satisfy the limit values of IEC 61000-3-2 and IEC
61000-3-12.
11.8.3.5 Harmonics at the power supply connection point acc. to IEC 61000-2-2
Description
IEC 61000-2-2 defines the compatibility level for voltage harmonics for the point of common
coupling (PCC) with the public supply system.
For systems in which converters or other non-linear loads are widely used, a circuit feedback
calculation that takes the individual system configuration into consideration should always be
performed.
The converter with upstream Line Harmonics Filters (LHF) allows adherence to the
compatibility level for voltage harmonics, regardless of what percentage of the overall load is
made up of the converter load.
Note
The voltage distortions behavior in the frequency range of 2 kHz to 9 kHz (IEC 61000-2-2 AMD
1) and from 9 kHz to 150 kHz (IEC 61000-2-2 AMD 2) must be evaluated specifically for each
system as a function of the impedance at the power supply connection point.
11.8.3.6 Harmonics at the power supply connection point acc. to IEEE 519
Description
IEEE 519 defines limit values for voltage and current harmonics for all of the loads at the point
of common coupling (PCC).
As a rule, systems only satisfy the limit values of IEEE 519 without implementing special
measures if the share of converters and other non-linear loads in the overall load is relatively
low. The respective system should always be individually considered.
The converter with upstream Line Harmonics Filters (LHF) enables adherence to the limit
values of IEEE 519 (precondition: RSC ≥ 20).
SINAMICS G120X converter
1106 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Technical data
11.8 Electromagnetic compability of the converter
See also
Maximum permissible motor cable length (Page 82)
EMC-compliant setup of the machine or plant (Page 52)
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1107
Technical data
11.9 Protecting persons from electromagnetic fields
11.9 Protecting persons from electromagnetic fields
Overview
Protection of workers from electromagnetic fields is specified in the European EMF Directive
2013/35/EU. This directive is implemented in national law in the European Economic Area
(EEA). Employers are obligated to design workplaces in such a way that workers are protected
from impermissibly strong electromagnetic fields.
To this end, assessments and/or measurements must be performed for workplaces.
Precondition
1. The laws for protection from electromagnetic fields in force in individual EU member states
can go beyond the minimum requirements of the EMF Directive 2013/35/EU and always
take precedence.
2. The ICNIRP 2010 limits for the workplace are the basis for the assessment.
3. The 26th BImSchV (German Federal Emission Protection Regulation) defines 100 μT
(RMS) for the assessment of active implants.
According to Directive 2013/35/EU, 500 µT (RMS) at 50 Hz is applicable here.
4. Compliance with the limit values was assessed for the following frequencies:
– Line frequency 47 ... 63 Hz
– Pulse frequency, for example 4/8/16 kHz and multiples thereof, assessed up to a
maximum of 100 kHz
5. The routing of power cables has a significant impact on the electromagnetic fields that occur.
Install and operate the components inside metallic cabinets in compliance with the
documentation and use shielded motor cables.
EMC-compliant setup of the machine or plant (Page 52)
Description
The following information regarding electromagnetic fields relates solely to converters supplied
by Siemens.
The converters are normally used in machines. The assessment and testing is based on
DIN EN 12198.
The indicated minimum distances apply to the head and complete torso of the human body.
Shorter distances are possible for extremities.
Table 11-1 Minimum distances to the converter
Individuals without active implants Individuals with active implants
Control cabinet Control cabinet Control cabinet Control cabinet
closed open closed open
0 cm Forearm length (ap‐ Must be separately assessed depending on the
prox. 35 cm) active implant.
SINAMICS G120X converter
1108 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Appendix A
A.1 Manuals and technical support
A.1.1 Overview of the manuals
Manuals with additional information that can be downloaded
● Compact hardware installation instructions (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/109762897)
Installing the converter
● Operating instructions (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/
109762826)
Installing, commissioning and maintaining the converter. Advanced commissioning (this
manual)
● BOP-2 operating instructions (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109483379)
Operating the converter with the BOP-2 operator panel
● Operating instructions IOP-2 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109752613)
Operating the converter with the IOP-2 operator panel
● SINAMICS G120 Smart Access Operating Instructions (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109758122)
Operating the converter from a PC, tablet or smartphone
● Protective devices (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/109762895)
Overcurrent protection devices of the converter
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1109
Appendix
A.1 Manuals and technical support
A.1.2 Configuring support
Catalog
Ordering data and technical information for the converter.
Catalogs for download or online catalog (Industry Mall):
SINAMICS G120X (www.siemens.com/sinamics-g120x)
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) technical overview
Standards and guidelines, EMC-compliant control cabinet design
EMC overview (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/103704610)
EMC Guidelines configuration manual
EMC-compliant control cabinet design, potential equalization and cable routing
EMC installation guideline (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
60612658)
SINAMICS G120X converter
1110 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Appendix
A.1 Manuals and technical support
A.1.3 Product Support
You can find additional information about the product on the Internet:
Product support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/)
This URL provides the following:
● Up-to-date product information (product announcements)
● FAQs
● Downloads
● The Newsletter contains the latest information on the products you use.
● The Knowledge Manager (Intelligent Search) helps you find the documents you need.
● Users and specialists from around the world share their experience and knowledge in the
Forum.
● You can find your local representative for Automation & Drives via our contact database
under "Contact & Partner".
● Information about local service, repair, spare parts and much more can be found under
"Services".
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1111
Appendix
A.1 Manuals and technical support
SINAMICS G120X converter
1112 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Index
Actual stator resistance
r0395[0...n], 535
2 Actual torque smoothed
r0031, 475
2/3 wire control selection
Acyclic communication, 220
p3334, 838
Additional acceleration torque (sensorless)
p1611[0...n], 697
Additional technology controller 0, 296
3 Air barrier, 57
3RK3 (modular safety system), 135 Alarm, 373, 959, 964
Alarm buffer, 373, 964
Alarm code, 964
8 r2122[0...63], 771
Alarm counter
87 Hz characteristic, 98
p2111, 768
87 Hz characteristic, 98
Alarm history, 965
Alarm number
r2110[0...63], 768
A Alarm time, 373, 964
AC/DC drive profile, 226 Alarm time received in days
Accelerating torque smoothing time constant r2145[0...63], 777
p1517[0...n], 684 Alarm time received in milliseconds
Acceleration precontrol scaling r2123[0...63], 771
p1496[0...n], 683 Alarm time removed in days
Acceptance test r2146[0...63], 778
Reduced scope, 1080 Alarm time removed in milliseconds
Test scope, 1080 r2125[0...63], 772
Access level Alarm value, 964
p0003, 470 r2124[0...63], 771
Acknowledge drive object faults Alarm value for float values
p3981, 850 r2134[0...63], 775
Activate PN interface configuration Alert
p8925, 883 A01009 (N), 972
Activate/deactivate RTC alarm A01098 A01016 (F), 973
p8405, 869 A01017, 973
Actual macro A01019, 974
r9463, 890 A01020, 974
Actual motor magnetizing current/short-circuit current A01021, 974
r0331[0...n], 523 A01028 (F), 975
Actual motor operating hours A01035 (F), 975
p0650[0...n], 558 A01045, 979
Actual phase voltage A01049, 979
r0089[0...2], 497 A01066, 980
Actual power unit type A01067, 980
r0203[0...n], 501 A01069, 981
Actual rotor resistance A01073 (N), 981
r0396[0...n], 535 A01098, 982
Actual speed rpm smoothed A01251, 983
r0022, 473 A01514 (F), 986
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1113
Index
A01590 (F), 987 A07530, 1009
A01900 (F), 987 A07531, 1009
A01920 (F), 988 A07805 (N), 1011
A01945, 988 A07850 (F), 1012
A02050, 988 A07851 (F), 1012
A02051, 989 A07852 (F), 1012
A02055, 989 A07891, 1013
A02056, 989 A07892, 1013
A02057, 989 A07893, 1014
A02058, 989 A07903, 1015
A02059, 990 A07910 (N), 1016
A02060, 990 A07920, 1016
A02061, 990 A07921, 1016
A02062, 990 A07922, 1017
A02063, 990 A07926, 1017
A02070, 991 A07927, 1018
A02075, 991 A07929 (F), 1018
A02095, 991 A07980, 1021
A02096, 991 A07981, 1021
A02097, 992 A07991 (N), 1025
A02098, 992 A07994 (F, N), 1026
A02099, 992 A08511 (F), 1026
A02150, 992 A08526 (F), 1027
A03510 (F, N), 994 A08564, 1027
A03520 (F, N), 995 A08565, 1027
A05000 (N), 995 A08800, 1027
A05001 (N), 995 A30016 (N), 1032
A05002 (N), 995 A30030, 1037
A05003 (N), 996 A30031, 1037
A05004 (N), 996 A30032, 1037
A05006 (N), 996 A30033, 1038
A05065 (F, N), 996 A30034, 1038
A06921 (N), 997 A30042, 1039
A07012 (N), 998 A30049, 1040
A07014 (N), 998 A30057, 1041
A07015, 999 A30065 (F, N), 1041
A07089, 1001 A30502, 1044
A07094, 1001 A30810 (F), 1045
A07200, 1001 A30920 (F), 1046
A07321, 1003 A30999 (F, N), 1046
A07325, 1003 A50010 (F), 1047
A07352, 1004 A50011 (F), 1047
A07353, 1004 A52961, 1047
A07391, 1005 A52962, 1048
A07400 (N), 1005 A52963, 1048
A07401 (N), 1005 A52964, 1048
A07402 (N), 1005 F01000, 970
A07409 (N), 1006 F01001, 970
A07416, 1007 F01002, 971
A07427, 1008 F01003, 971
A07428 (N), 1008 F01005, 972
A07444, 1009 F01010, 972
SINAMICS G120X converter
1114 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Index
F01015, 972 F07311, 1002
F01018, 973 F07312, 1002
F01023, 974 F07320, 1003
F01030, 975 F07330, 1003
F01033, 975 F07331, 1004
F01034, 975 F07332, 1004
F01036 (A), 976 F07390, 1004
F01038 (A), 976 F07405 (N, A), 1006
F01039 (A), 977 F07406 (N, A), 1006
F01040, 977 F07410, 1006
F01042, 978 F07411, 1006
F01043, 978 F07426 (A), 1007
F01044, 979 F07435 (N), 1008
F01054, 980 F07436 (A), 1008
F01068, 981 F07437 (A), 1008
F01072, 981 F07438 (A), 1009
F01105 (A), 982 F07445, 1009
F01107, 982 F07800, 1010
F01112, 982 F07801, 1010
F01120 (A), 983 F07802, 1010
F01152, 983 F07806, 1011
F01205, 983 F07807, 1011
F01250, 983 F07810, 1012
F01257, 984 F07860 (A), 1012
F01340, 984 F07861 (A), 1013
F01505 (A), 985 F07862 (A), 1013
F01510, 985 F07894, 1014
F01511 (A), 985 F07895, 1014
F01512, 986 F07896, 1014
F01513 (N, A), 986 F07900 (N, A), 1014
F01515 (A), 987 F07901, 1015
F01662, 987 F07902 (N, A), 1015
F01910 (N, A), 987 F07923, 1017
F01946 (A), 988 F07924, 1017
F02080, 991 F07925, 1017
F02151 (A), 993 F07936, 1018
F02152 (A), 993 F07950 (A), 1019
F03000, 993 F07967, 1019
F03001, 994 F07968, 1019
F03505 (N, A), 994 F07969, 1019
F06310 (A), 997 F07983, 1021
F06922, 997 F07984, 1022
F07011, 997 F07985, 1023
F07016, 999 F07986, 1024
F07080, 999 F07988, 1024
F07082, 999 F07990, 1024
F07083, 1000 F08010 (N, A), 1026
F07084, 1000 F08501 (N, A), 1026
F07086, 1001 F08502 (A), 1026
F07088, 1001 F13009, 1028
F07220 (N, A), 1002 F13100, 1028
F07300 (A), 1002 F13101, 1028
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1115
Index
F13102, 1029 Application class
F30001, 1029 p0096, 497, 498
F30002, 1030 Application example, 144, 148, 188, 202, 260, 339,
F30003, 1030 340
F30004, 1030 Application example, 193, 199
F30005, 1031 Application firmware version
F30011, 1031 r29018[0...1], 914
F30012, 1032 Automatic calculation motor/control parameters
F30013, 1032 p0340[0...n], 524
F30015 (N, A), 1032 Automatic mode, 292, 293
F30017, 1033 Automatic restart, 425
F30021, 1033 Automatic restart delay time start attempts
F30022, 1034 p1212, 649
F30024, 1034 Automatic restart faults not active
F30025, 1034 p1206[0...9], 647
F30027, 1035 Automatic restart mode
F30035, 1038 p1210, 648
F30036, 1039 Automatic restart monitoring time
F30037, 1039 p1213[0...1], 650
F30051, 1040 Automatic restart start attempts
F30052, 1040 p1211, 649
F30055, 1040
F30059, 1041
F30068, 1041 B
F30071, 1041
Bearing code number selection
F30072, 1042
p0531[0...n], 544
F30074 (A), 1042
Bearing maximum speed
F30075, 1042
p0532[0...n], 544
F30080, 1042
Bearing version selection
F30081, 1043
p0530[0...n], 543
F30105, 1043
BF (Bus Fault), 960, 961
F30662, 1044
BI: 1st acknowledge faults
F30664, 1044
p2103[0...n], 765
F30802, 1044
BI: 2/3 wire control command 1
F30804 (N, A), 1045
p3330[0...n], 837
F30805, 1045
BI: 2/3 wire control command 2
F30809, 1045
p3331[0...n], 837
F30850, 1045
BI: 2/3 wire control command 3
F30903, 1046
p3332[0...n], 837
F30950, 1046
BI: 2nd acknowledge faults
F35950, 1046
p2104[0...n], 766
F52960, 1047
BI: 3rd acknowledge faults
F52965, 1048
p2105[0...n], 766
F52966, 1048
BI: Active STW1 in the BOP/IOP manual mode
N01004 (F, A), 971
p8542[0...15], 876
N01101 (A), 982
BI: Binector-connector converter status word 1
N30800 (F), 1044
p2080[0...15], 754
Ambient temperature, 412, 413
BI: Binector-connector converter status word 2
Analog input, 105
p2081[0...15], 755
Function, 197
BI: Binector-connector converter status word 3
Analog output, 105
p2082[0...15], 756
Function, 202
SINAMICS G120X converter
1116 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Index
BI: Binector-connector converter status word 4 BI: Enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint
p2083[0...15], 756 p1142[0...n], 639, 640
BI: Binector-connector converter status word 5 BI: ESM activation signal source
p2084[0...15], 757 p3880, 843
BI: Bypass control command BI: ESM direction of rotation signal source
p1266, 661 p3883, 844
BI: Bypass ramp-function generator BI: External alarm 1
p1122[0...n], 634 p2112[0...n], 768
BI: Bypass switch feedback signal BI: External alarm 2
p1269[0...1], 662 p2116[0...n], 769
BI: Close main contactor BI: External alarm 3
p0870, 596 p2117[0...n], 769
BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 0 BI: External fault 1
p0810, 583 p2106[0...n], 766
BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 1 BI: External fault 2
p0811, 584 p2107[0...n], 767
BI: Continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp- BI: External fault 3
function generator p2108[0...n], 767
p1141[0...n], 638, 639 BI: External fault 3 enable
BI: Control by PLC/no control by PLC p3111[0...n], 827
p0854[0...n], 592, 593 BI: External fault 3 enable negated
BI: CU analog outputs invert signal source p3112[0...n], 827
p0782[0...2], 575 BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 0
BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 0 p1020[0...n], 613
p0730, 561 BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 1
BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 1 p1021[0...n], 613
p0731, 562 BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 2
BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 2 p1022[0...n], 613
p0732, 562 BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 3
BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 3 p1023[0...n], 614
p0733, 563 BI: Flying restart enable signal source
BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 4 p1201[0...n], 644
p0734, 563, 564 BI: Free tec_ctrl 0 enable
BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 5 p11000, 893
p0735, 564 BI: Free tec_ctrl 1 enable
BI: DC braking activation p11100, 900
p1230[0...n], 652 BI: Free tec_ctrl 2 enable
BI: Deragging enable p11200, 907
p29591[0...n], 925 BI: Frost protection enable
BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 0 p29622[0...n], 928
p0820[0...n], 584 BI: Hold technology controller integrator
BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 1 p2286[0...n], 806
p0821[0...n], 585 BI: Inhibit master control
BI: Dual ramp enable p0806, 582
p29580[0...n], 924 BI: Inhibit negative direction
BI: Enable energy usage display p1110[0...n], 631
p0043, 481 BI: Inhibit positive direction
BI: Enable operation/inhibit operation p1111[0...n], 631
p0852[0...n], 591, 592 BI: Jog bit 0
BI: Enable ramp-function generator/inhibit ramp- p1055[0...n], 620
function generator BI: Jog bit 1
p1140[0...n], 638 p1056[0...n], 621
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1117
Index
BI: Limit switch minus BI: Setpoint inversion
p3343[0...n], 839 p1113[0...n], 631, 632
BI: Limit switch plus BI: Technology controller enable
p3342[0...n], 838 p2200[0...n], 791
BI: Limit switch start BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 0
p3340[0...n], 838 p2220[0...n], 795
BI: Line contactor feedback signal BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 1
p0860, 594 p2221[0...n], 795
BI: Load monitoring failure detection BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 2
p3232[0...n], 832 p2222[0...n], 795
BI: Motor stall monitoring enable (negated) BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 3
p2144[0...n], 777 p2223[0...n], 796
BI: Motorized potentiometer accept setting value BI: Technology controller limiting enable
p1043[0...n], 618 p2290[0...n], 806
BI: Motorized potentiometer inversion BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer
p1039[0...n], 617 lower setpoint
BI: Motorized potentiometer lower setpoint p2236[0...n], 798
p1036[0...n], 616 BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer
BI: Motorized potentiometer manual/automatic raise setpoint
p1041[0...n], 618 p2235[0...n], 797
BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint raise BI: Total setpoint selection
p1035[0...n], 615, 616 p1108[0...n], 630
BI: Multi-pump control motor under repair BICO block, 464
p29543[0...5], 920 BICO CounterDevice
BI: No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source r3978, 850
1 BICO interconnections search signal source
p0844[0...n], 588 p9484, 890
BI: No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source BICO interconnections signal source search count
2 r9485, 890
p0845[0...n], 589 BICO interconnections signal source search first
BI: No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) signal source index
1 r9486, 891
p0848[0...n], 590 Bimetallic switch, 409
BI: No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) signal source Binectors, 465
2 BIOS/EEPROM data version
p0849[0...n], 591 r0198[0...2], 500
BI: ON / OFF (OFF1) Block, 464
p0840[0...n], 587 BO: Connector-binector converter binector output
BI: ON/OFF1 (OFF1) r2094.0...15, 762
p29651[0...n], 932 r2095.0...15, 762
BI: ON/OFF2 (OFF2) BO: CU analog inputs status word
p29652[0...n], 932 r0751.0...11, 565
BI: Pe set switching on inhibited signal source BO: CU analog outputs status word
p5614, 859 r0785.0...2, 576
BI: Ramp-function generator, accept setpoint BO: Fixed speed setpoint status
p29642, 931 r1025.0, 614
BI: Ramp-function generator, accept setting value BO: Master control active
p1143[0...n], 640 r0807.0, 582
BI: RFG active BO: POWER ON delay signal
p2148[0...n], 778 r9935.0, 892
BI: Select IOP manual mode BO: PROFIdrive PZD state
p8558, 877 r2043.0...2, 744
SINAMICS G120X converter
1118 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Index
BO: PROFIdrive PZD1 receive bit-serial Cavitation protection time
r2090.0...15, 759 p29627[0...n], 929
BO: PROFIdrive PZD2 receive bit-serial Change acknowledge mode fault number
r2091.0...15, 760 p2126[0...19], 772
BO: PROFIdrive PZD3 receive bit-serial Change acknowledge mode mode
r2092.0...15, 761 p2127[0...19], 772
BO: PROFIdrive PZD4 receive bit-serial Change fault response fault number
r2093.0...15, 761 p2100[0...19], 764
BO: RTC DTC1 output Change fault response response
r8413.0...1, 871 p2101[0...19], 764
BO: RTC DTC2 output Change message type message number
r8423.0...1, 872 p2118[0...19], 770
BO: RTC DTC3 output Change message type type
r8433.0...1, 874 p2119[0...19], 770
BO: STW1 from IOP in the manual mode Change safety message type
r8540.0...15, 875 p3117, 828
Boot state Characteristic
r3988[0...1], 851 Additional, 379
Bootloader version Linear, 379, 388
r0197[0...1], 500 parabolic, 379, 388
BOP-2 square-law, 379, 388
Menu, 174 Checklist
Symbols, 174 PROFINET, 146
Braking functions, 399 CI: Active speed setpoint in the BOP/IOP manual
Braking method, 398 mode
Bus termination, 99, 100 p8543, 876
Bypass, 439 CI: Comm IF USS PZD send word
Bypass changeover source configuration p2016[0...3], 735
p1267, 661 CI: Connector-binector converter signal source
Bypass configuration p2099[0...1], 763
p1260, 659 CI: CU analog outputs signal source
Bypass dead time p0771[0...2], 572
p1262[0...n], 660 CI: Current limit, variable
Bypass delay time p0641[0...n], 557
p1264, 660 CI: ESM setpoint technology controller
Bypass speed threshold p3884, 845
p1265, 661 CI: Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value signal source
Bypass switch monitoring time p11064, 897
p1274[0...1], 663 CI: Free tec_ctrl 0 limit maximum signal source
p11097, 900
CI: Free tec_ctrl 0 limit minimum signal source
C p11098, 900
CI: Free tec_ctrl 0 limit offset signal source
Cable resistance, 376
p11099, 900
p0352[0...n], 528
CI: Free tec_ctrl 0 setpoint signal source
r0372[0...n], 533
p11053, 896
Cascade control, 368
CI: Free tec_ctrl 1 actual value signal source
Catalog, 1110
p11164, 904
Cavitation protection, 320
CI: Free tec_ctrl 1 limit maximum signal source
Cavitation protection enable
p11197, 907
p29625[0...n], 928
CI: Free tec_ctrl 1 limit minimum signal source
Cavitation protection threshold
p11198, 907
p29626[0...n], 929
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1119
Index
CI: Free tec_ctrl 1 limit offset signal source CI: Speed setpoint for messages/signals
p11199, 907 p2151[0...n], 779
CI: Free tec_ctrl 1 setpoint signal source CI: Supplementary setp
p11153, 903 p1075[0...n], 623
CI: Free tec_ctrl 2 actual value signal source CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling
p11264, 911 p1076[0...n], 623
CI: Free tec_ctrl 2 limit maximum signal source CI: Technology controller actual value
p11297, 914 p2264[0...n], 802
CI: Free tec_ctrl 2 limit minimum signal source CI: Technology controller Kp adaptation input value
p11298, 914 signal source
CI: Free tec_ctrl 2 limit offset signal source p2310, 809
p11299, 914 CI: Technology controller Kp adaptation scaling
CI: Free tec_ctrl 2 setpoint signal source signal source
p11253, 910 p2315, 810
CI: Load monitoring speed actual value CI: Technology controller limit offset
p3230[0...n], 832 p2299[0...n], 808
CI: Main setpoint CI: Technology controller maximum limit signal source
p1070[0...n], 622 p2297[0...n], 807
CI: Main setpoint scaling CI: Technology controller minimum limit signal source
p1071[0...n], 623 p2298[0...n], 808
CI: Minimum speed signal source CI: Technology controller output scaling
p1106[0...n], 630 p2296[0...n], 807
CI: Motorized potentiometer automatic setpoint CI: Technology controller precontrol signal
p1042[0...n], 618 p2289[0...n], 806
CI: Motorized potentiometer setting value CI: Technology controller setpoint 1
p1044[0...n], 618 p2253[0...n], 800
CI: PROFIdrive PZD send double word CI: Technology controller setpoint 2
p2061[0...15], 749 p2254[0...n], 801
CI: PROFIdrive PZD send word CI: Technology controller Tn adaptation input value
p2051[0...16], 746 signal source
CI: Ramp-down scaling input p2317, 811
p29579[0...n], 924 CI: Temperature sensor voltage input source
CI: Ramp-function generator ramp-down time scaling p29701, 933
p1139[0...n], 637 CI: Torque limit lower
CI: Ramp-function generator ramp-up time scaling p1523[0...n], 686
p1138[0...n], 637 CI: Torque limit lower scaling
CI: Ramp-function generator setpoint input p1529[0...n], 687
p29643, 931 CI: Torque limit lower scaling without offset
CI: Ramp-function generator setting value p1554[0...n], 690
p1144[0...n], 641 CI: Torque limit upper
CI: Ramp-up scaling input p1522[0...n], 685
p29578[0...n], 924 CI: Torque limit upper scaling
CI: Skip speed scaling p1528[0...n], 687
p1098[0...n], 629 CI: Torque limit upper scaling without offset
CI: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation p1552[0...n], 690
p1088[0...n], 627 CI: Total setpoint
CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation p1109[0...n], 630
p1085[0...n], 627 Closed-loop cascade control configuration
CI: Speed limit RFG negative direction of rotation p2371, 816
p1052[0...n], 620 Closed-loop cascade control enable
CI: Speed limit RFG positive direction of rotation p2370[0...n], 815
p1051[0...n], 620
SINAMICS G120X converter
1120 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Index
Closed-loop cascade control holding time switch-in CO/BO: Compound braking/DC quantity control
speed status word
p2385, 820 r3859.0...1, 842
Closed-loop cascade control holding time switch-out CO/BO: Control word 1
speed r0054.0...15, 488
p2387, 821 CO/BO: Control word faults/alarms
Closed-loop cascade control interlocking time r2138.7...15, 775
p2377, 818 CO/BO: Control word sequence control
Closed-loop cascade control max time for continuous r0898.0...10, 596
operation CO/BO: Control word setpoint channel
p2381, 819 r1198.0...15, 643
Closed-loop cascade control mode motor selection CO/BO: CU digital inputs status
p2372, 816 r0722.0...12, 560
Closed-loop cascade control motor switch-off delay CO/BO: CU digital inputs status inverted
p2386, 820 r0723.0...12, 560
Closed-loop cascade control motor switch-on delay CO/BO: Data set changeover status word
p2384, 820 r0835.2...8, 585
Closed-loop cascade control operating hours CO/BO: DC braking status word
p2380[0...2], 819 r1239.8...13, 654
Closed-loop cascade control operating time limit CO/BO: Drive coupling status word/control word
p2382, 819 r0863.0...1, 594
Closed-loop cascade control overcontrol threshold CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS effective
p2376, 818 r0051.0...1, 485
Closed-loop cascade control switch-in delay CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS selected
p2374, 817 r0837.0...1, 586
Closed-loop cascade control switch-in threshold CO/BO: ESM status word
p2373, 817 r3889.0...10, 845
Closed-loop cascade control switch-in/switch-out CO/BO: Extented setpoint channel selection output
speed r29640.0...18, 930
p2378, 818 CO/BO: Faults/alarms trigger word
Closed-loop cascade control switch-out delay r2129.0...15, 773
p2375, 818 CO/BO: Flying restart U/f control status
Closed-loop cascade control switch-out sequence r1204.0...15, 645
p2383, 820 CO/BO: Flying restart vector control status
Closed-loop current control and motor model r1205.0...20, 647
configuration r1205.0...21, 646
p1402[0...n], 678, 679 CO/BO: Free tec_ctrl 0 status word
CO/BO: 2/3 wire control control word r11049.0...11, 895
r3333.0...3, 837 CO/BO: Free tec_ctrl 1 status word
CO/BO: Automatic restart status r11149.0...11, 902
r1214.0...15, 650 CO/BO: Free tec_ctrl 2 status word
CO/BO: Bypass control/status word r11249.0...11, 909
r1261.0...11, 659 CO/BO: Gating unit status word 1
CO/BO: Closed-loop cascade control status word r1838.0...15, 716
r2379.0...7, 819 CO/BO: Hibernation mode status words
CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS effective r2399.0...8, 824
r0050.0...1, 485 CO/BO: Limit switch status word
CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS selected r3344.0...5, 839
r0836.0...1, 586 CO/BO: Missing enable signal
CO/BO: Command word r0046.0...31, 481
r29659.0...1, 932 CO/BO: Mot_temp status word faults/alarms
r5389.0...8, 855
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1121
Index
CO/BO: Multi-pump control bypass command CO/BO: Technology controller fixed value selection
r29545, 921 status word
CO/BO: Multi-pump control feedback signal for r2225.0, 796
contactor CO/BO: Technology controller status word
r29549, 922 r2349.0...13, 814
CO/BO: Multi-pump control service mode interlock CO/BO: Write protection/know-how protection status
manually r7760.0...12, 860
p29542.0...5, 920 CO: Absolute actual current smoothed
CO/BO: Multi-pump control status word r0027, 474
r29529.0...19, 917 CO: Absolute current actual value
CO/BO: NAMUR message bit bar r0068[0...1], 492
r3113.0...15, 827 CO: Accelerating torque
CO/BO: Pe energy-saving active/inactive r1518[0...1], 684
r5613.0...1, 858 CO: Active power actual value
CO/BO: PM330 digital inputs status r0082[0...2], 496
r4022.0...3, 853 CO: Active power actual value smoothed
CO/BO: PM330 digital inputs status inverted r0032, 476
r4023.0...3, 853 CO: Actual alarm code
CO/BO: PolID diagnostics r2132, 774
r1992.0...15, 730 CO: Actual component number
CO/BO: Ramp-function generator status word r3132, 831
r1199.0...8, 643 CO: Actual DC link voltage
CO/BO: Safely remove memory card status r0070, 493
r9401.0...3, 888 CO: Actual fault code
CO/BO: Skip band status word r2131, 774
r1099.0, 629 CO: Actual fault value
CO/BO: Status word 1 r3131, 831
r0052.0...15, 485 CO: Actual power factor
CO/BO: Status word 2 r0087, 497
r0053.0...11, 486, 487 CO: Actual slip compensation
CO/BO: Status word current controller r1337, 673
r1408.0...14, 679 CO: Actual speed
CO/BO: Status word faults/alarms 1 r0063[0...2], 491
r2139.0...15, 776 CO: Actual speed smoothed
CO/BO: Status word faults/alarms 2 r0021, 473
r2135.12...15, 775 r1445, 680
CO/BO: Status word monitoring 1 CO: Actual speed smoothed signals
r2197.0...13, 789 r2169, 782
CO/BO: Status word monitoring 2 CO: Counter alarm buffer changes
r2198.4...12, 790 r2121, 770
CO/BO: Status word monitoring 3 CO: Counter for fault buffer changes
r2199.0...5, 790 r0944, 598
CO/BO: Status word sequence control CO: CU analog inputs actual value in percent
r0899.0...11, 596 r0755[0...3], 566
CO/BO: Status word speed controller CO: CU analog inputs input voltage/current actual
r1407.0...23, 679 r0752[0...3], 566
CO/BO: Status word, closed-loop control CO: Current actual value field-generating
r0056.0...15, 490 r0076, 495
CO/BO: Status word: application CO: Current actual value torque-generating
r29629.0...2, 929 r0078, 495
CO/BO: Supplementary control word CO: Current setpoint field-generating
r0055.0...15, 488, 489 r0075, 494
SINAMICS G120X converter
1122 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Index
CO: Current setpoint torque-generating CO: Fixed value M [Nm]
r0077, 495 p2930[0...n], 825
CO: DC link voltage smoothed CO: Fixed values [%]
r0026, 474 r2902[0...14], 825
CO: Direct-axis voltage setpoint CO: Flux actual value
r1732[0...1], 700 r0084[0...1], 496
CO: Energy display CO: Flux setpoint
r0039[0...2], 480 p1570[0...n], 691, 692
CO: Extented setpoint channel setpoint output r0083, 496
r29641, 931 CO: Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value after limiter
CO: Field weakening controller / flux controller output r11072, 898
r1593[0...1], 696 CO: Free tec_ctrl 0 limit maximum
CO: Field weakening controller output p11091, 899
r1597, 696 CO: Free tec_ctrl 0 limit minimum
CO: Fieldbus analog outputs p11092, 899
p0791[0...2], 576 CO: Free tec_ctrl 0 output signal
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 1 r11094, 900
p1001[0...n], 609 CO: Free tec_ctrl 0 setpoint after ramp-function
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 10 generator
p1010[0...n], 611 r11060, 896
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 11 CO: Free tec_ctrl 0 system deviation
p1011[0...n], 611 r11073, 898
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 12 CO: Free tec_ctrl 1 actual value after limiter
p1012[0...n], 611 r11172, 905
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 13 CO: Free tec_ctrl 1 limit maximum
p1013[0...n], 612 p11191, 906
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 14 CO: Free tec_ctrl 1 limit minimum
p1014[0...n], 612 p11192, 906
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 15 CO: Free tec_ctrl 1 output signal
p1015[0...n], 612 r11194, 907
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 2 CO: Free tec_ctrl 1 setpoint after ramp-function
p1002[0...n], 609 generator
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 3 r11160, 903
p1003[0...n], 609 CO: Free tec_ctrl 1 system deviation
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 4 r11173, 905
p1004[0...n], 609 CO: Free tec_ctrl 2 actual value after limiter
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 5 r11272, 912
p1005[0...n], 610 CO: Free tec_ctrl 2 limit maximum
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 6 p11291, 913
p1006[0...n], 610 CO: Free tec_ctrl 2 limit minimum
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 7 p11292, 913
p1007[0...n], 610 CO: Free tec_ctrl 2 output signal
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 8 r11294, 914
p1008[0...n], 610 CO: Free tec_ctrl 2 setpoint after ramp-function
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 9 generator
p1009[0...n], 611 r11260, 910
CO: Fixed speed setpoint effective CO: Free tec_ctrl 2 system deviation
r1024, 614 r11273, 912
CO: Fixed value 1 [%] CO: Hibernation mode output speed actual
p2900[0...n], 824 r2397[0...1], 823
CO: Fixed value 2 [%] CO: I_max controller frequency output
p2901[0...n], 825 r1343, 674
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1123
Index
CO: Lower effective torque limit CO: Ramp-down scaling output
r1539, 689 r29577, 923
CO: Main setpoint effective CO: Ramp-function generator acceleration
r1073, 623 r1149, 642
CO: Maximum power unit output current CO: Ramp-function generator setpoint at the input
r0289, 509 r1119, 632
CO: Modulat_depth CO: Ramp-up scaling output
r0074, 494 r29576, 923
CO: Modulator mode actual CO: Send binector-connector converter status word
r1809, 713 r2089[0...4], 759
CO: Moment of inertia total, scaled CO: Setpoint after the direction limiting
r1493, 683 r1114, 632
CO: Mot. potentiometer speed setp. in front of ramp- CO: Speed controller I torque output
fct. gen. r1482, 683
r1045, 619 CO: Speed controller P-gain effective
CO: Motor model speed adaptation I comp. r1468, 682
r1771, 707 CO: Speed controller setpoint sum
CO: Motor model speed adaptation proportional r1170, 642
component CO: Speed controller speed setpoint
r1770, 707 r1438, 680
CO: Motor temperature CO: Speed controller system deviation
r0035, 477 r0064, 491
CO: Motor utilization thermal CO: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation
r0034, 476 p1086[0...n], 627
CO: Motorized potentiometer setpoint after ramp- CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation
function generator p1083[0...n], 626
r1050, 619 CO: Speed limit negative effective
CO: Output current maximum r1087, 627
r0067, 492 CO: Speed limit positive effective
CO: Output frequency r1084, 627
r0066, 492 CO: Speed setpoint after minimum limiting
CO: Output voltage r1112, 631
r0072, 494 CO: Speed setpoint after the filter
CO: Output voltage smoothed r0062, 491
r0025, 474 CO: Speed setpoint before the setpoint filter
CO: Phase current actual value r0060, 490
r0069[0...8], 492 CO: Speed setpoint from the IOP in the manual mode
CO: Power unit overload I2t r8541, 875
r0036, 477 CO: Stall current limit torque-generating maximum
CO: Power unit temperatures r1548[0...1], 690
r0037[0...19], 477, 478 CO: Sum of fault and alarm buffer changes
CO: Process energy display r2120, 770
r0042[0...2], 480 CO: Supplementary setpoint effective
CO: PROFIdrive PZD receive double word r1077, 624
r2060[0...10], 748 CO: Synchronous reluctance motor flux channel
CO: PROFIdrive PZD receive word r1568[0...5], 691
r2050[0...11], 745 CO: Technology controller actual value after filter
CO: Pulse frequency r2266, 803
r1801[0...1], 711 CO: Technology controller actual value scaled
CO: Quadrature-axis voltage setpoint r2272, 804
r1733[0...1], 701 CO: Technology controller fixed value 1
p2201[0...n], 791
SINAMICS G120X converter
1124 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Index
CO: Technology controller fixed value 10 CO: Technology controller system deviation
p2210[0...n], 793 r2273, 805
CO: Technology controller fixed value 11 CO: Technology controller Tn adaptation output
p2211[0...n], 794 r2322, 812
CO: Technology controller fixed value 12 CO: Technology controller, Kp adaptation output
p2212[0...n], 794 r2316, 811
CO: Technology controller fixed value 13 CO: Temperature sensor actual value
p2213[0...n], 794 r29705, 933
CO: Technology controller fixed value 14 CO: Temperature sensor exciting current output
p2214[0...n], 794 r29706, 934
CO: Technology controller fixed value 15 CO: Temperature sensor resistance value
p2215[0...n], 795 r29707, 934
CO: Technology controller fixed value 2 CO: Torque actual value
p2202[0...n], 791 r0080[0...1], 496
CO: Technology controller fixed value 3 CO: Torque limit for speed controller output
p2203[0...n], 792 r1547[0...1], 689
CO: Technology controller fixed value 4 CO: Torque limit lower
p2204[0...n], 792 p1521[0...n], 685
CO: Technology controller fixed value 5 CO: Torque limit lower scaling
p2205[0...n], 792 p1525[0...n], 686
CO: Technology controller fixed value 6 CO: Torque limit lower without offset
p2206[0...n], 792 r1527, 687
CO: Technology controller fixed value 7 CO: Torque limit upper
p2207[0...n], 793 p1520[0...n], 684
CO: Technology controller fixed value 8 CO: Torque limit upper without offset
p2208[0...n], 793 r1526, 686
CO: Technology controller fixed value 9 CO: Torque limit upper/motoring scaling
p2209[0...n], 793 p1524[0...n], 686
CO: Technology controller fixed value effective CO: Torque setpoint
r2224, 796 r0079, 495
CO: Technology controller last speed setpoint CO: Torque setpoint before supplementary torque
(smoothed) r1508, 684
r2344, 813 CO: Total flux setpoint
CO: Technology controller maximum limiting r1598, 696
p2291, 806 CO: Total setpoint effective
CO: Technology controller minimum limiting r1078, 624
p2292, 806 CO: U/f control Eco factor actual value
CO: Technology controller mot. potentiometer r1348, 675
setpoint before RFG CO: Upper effective torque limit
r2245, 798 r1538, 689
CO: Technology controller motorized potentiometer CO: Vdc controller output
setpoint after RFG r1258, 659
r2250, 799 CO: Vdc controller output (U/f)
CO: Technology controller output scaling r1298, 667
p2295, 807 Comm IF address
CO: Technology controller output signal p2011, 734
r2294, 807 Comm IF baud rate
CO: Technology controller setpoint after filter p2010, 734
r2262, 802 Comm IF error statistics
CO: Technology controller setpoint after ramp- r2019[0...7], 735
function generator Command data set, 292
r2260, 802 Command data set (CDS), 292
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1125
Index
Commissioning CU analog inputs simulation mode setpoint
Guidelines, 151 p0798[0...3], 578
Communication CU analog inputs smoothing time constant
Acyclic, 220 p0753[0...3], 566
Compensation valve lockout time phase U CU analog inputs type
p1828, 715 p0756[0...3], 567, 568
Compensation valve lockout time phase V CU analog inputs wire breakage monitoring delay time
p1829, 715, 716 p0762[0...3], 571
Compensation valve lockout time phase W CU analog inputs wire breakage monitoring response
p1830, 716 threshold
Completion of quick commissioning p0761[0...3], 570
p3900, 846 CU analog outputs activate absolute value generation
Component alarm p0775[0...2], 573
r3121[0...63], 829 CU analog outputs characteristic value x1
Component fault p0777[0...2], 574
r3120[0...63], 829 CU analog outputs characteristic value x2
Compound braking, 402, 403 p0779[0...2], 575
Compound braking current CU analog outputs characteristic value y1
p3856[0...n], 841 p0778[0...2], 574
Compressor, 162, 169 CU analog outputs characteristic value y2
Condensation protection, 318 p0780[0...2], 575
Condensation protection current CU analog outputs output value currently referred
p29624[0...n], 928 r0772[0...2], 572
Connectors, 465 CU analog outputs output voltage/current actual
Control terminals, 105 r0774[0...2], 573
Control Unit firmware version CU analog outputs smoothing time constant
r0018, 472 p0773[0...2], 572
Control word CU analog outputs type
Control word 3, 211 p0776[0...2], 573
Control word 1, 209, 265 CU detection via LED
Control word 3 (STW3), 211 p0124[0...n], 498
Converter CU digital inputs debounce time
Update, 1080 p0724, 561
Converter valve threshold voltage CU digital inputs simulation mode
p1825, 715 p0795, 576
Cooling, 57 CU digital inputs simulation mode setpoint
Copy Command Data Set CDS p0796, 577
p0809[0...2], 583 CU digital inputs terminal actual value
Copy Drive Data Set DDS r0721, 559
p0819[0...2], 584 CU digital outputs status
CU analog inputs characteristic value x1 r0747, 564
p0757[0...3], 569 CU invert digital outputs
CU analog inputs characteristic value x2 p0748, 565
p0759[0...3], 570 CU number of inputs and outputs
CU analog inputs characteristic value y1 r0720[0...4], 559
p0758[0...3], 569 Curr. setpoint torque-gen. smoothing time field
CU analog inputs characteristic value y2 weakening range
p0760[0...3], 570 p1654[0...n], 699
CU analog inputs dead zone Current actual value field-generating smoothed
p0764[0...3], 571 r0029, 475
CU analog inputs simulation mode Current actual value torque-generating smoothed
p0797[0...3], 578 r0030, 475
SINAMICS G120X converter
1126 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Index
Current controller d axis integral time DC link voltage overvoltage threshold
p1722[0...n], 700 r0297, 512
Current controller d axis p gain DC link voltage threshold value
p1720[0...n], 699 p2172[0...n], 783
Current controller integral-action time DC link voltage undervoltage threshold
p1717[0...n], 699 r0296, 512
Current controller P gain DC quantity controller configuration
p1715[0...n], 699 p3855[0...n], 841
Current injection ramp time DC quantity controller integral time
p1601[0...n], 697 p3858[0...n], 842
Current input, 197 DC quantity controller P gain
Current limit p3857[0...n], 842
p0640[0...n], 557 DC-link overvoltage, 414
Current limit excitation induction motor Dead time compensation current level
p0644[0...n], 558 p1832, 716
Current limit maximum torque-generating current Deadband, 201
r1536[0...1], 688 Debypass delay time
Current limit minimum torque-generating current p1263, 660
r1537[0...1], 689 Delta connection, 98
Current limit torque-generating total Delta connection (Δ), 153, 154
r1533, 688 Deragging, 322
Current setpoint smoothing time Deragging forward speed
p1616[0...n], 698 p29592[0...n], 925
Current threshold value Deragging forward time
p2170[0...n], 783 p29596[0...n], 926
Current threshold value reached delay time Deragging mode
p2171[0...n], 783 p29590[0...n], 924
Cyclic communication, 218 Deragging ramp down time
p29595[0...n], 926
Deragging ramp up time
D p29594[0...n], 925
Deragging reverse speed
Data backup, 939
p29593[0...n], 925
Data transfer, 943, 946
Deragging reverse time
Data transfer start
p29597[0...n], 926
p0804, 579, 581
Device identification
Data transfer: device memory as source/target
r0964[0...6], 600, 601
p0803, 579
DI selection for ON/OFF2
Data transfer: memory card as source/target
p29650[0...n], 931
p0802, 578
Diagnostic attribute alarm
Date, 373
r3123[0...63], 830
Daylight saving time, 374
Diagnostic attribute fault
DC braking, 211, 400, 401
r3122[0...63], 829
DC braking braking current
Digital input, 105
p1232[0...n], 653
Digital output, 105
DC braking configuration
Function, 194, 197, 202
p1231[0...n], 653
Dimension drawings, 62, 65
DC braking time
DIP switch
p1233[0...n], 654
Analog input, 197
DC link voltage, 414
Direction of rotation, 338
DC link voltage comparison delay time
Display values smoothing time constant
p2173[0...n], 783
p0045, 481
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1127
Index
Download, 943 ESM setpoint source alternative
Drive commissioning parameter filter p3882, 844
p0010, 471 Essential service mode, 430
Drive control, 179 Ethernet/IP ODVA speed scaling
Drive Data Set, 460 p8982, 886
Drive Data Set, DDS, 460 Ethernet/IP ODVA STOP mode
Drive filter type motor side p8981, 885
p0230, 505, 506 Ethernet/IP ODVA torque scaling
Drive operating display p8983, 886
r0002, 470 Ethernet/IP profile
Drive unit line supply voltage p8980, 885
p0210, 504 Extending the telegram, 219
Drive unit reset External fault 3 switch-on delay
p0972, 603 p3110, 826
Drive unit status word
r3974, 850
DS 47, 220 F
DTC (Digital Time Clock), 375
Factory assignment, 105
Dual ramp, 348
Factory settings
Restoring the, 173
Fan, 162, 169
E Fan run-on time
Efficiency optimization p0295, 511
p1580[0...n], 694 Fans, 406, 1055
Efficiency optimization 2 maximum flux limit value Fault, 373, 959, 967
p3316[0...n], 833 Acknowledge, 967, 968
Efficiency optimization 2 minimum flux limit value Fault buffer, 373, 967
p3315[0...n], 833 Fault case, 969
Efficiency optimization 2 optimum flux Fault cases counter
r3313, 833 p0952, 599
EMC, 52 Fault code, 967
EMERGENCY STOP, 298 r0945[0...63], 598
EMERGENCY SWITCHING OFF, 298 Fault code list
EMF maximum r0946[0...65534], 598
r1614, 698 Fault history, 968
EN 60204‑1, 298 Fault number
EN 61800-5-2, 297 r0947[0...63], 599
Enable PID autotuning Fault time, 373, 967
p2350, 814 received, 967
Energy consumption saved removed, 967
r0041, 480 Fault time received in days
Energy-saving display, 453 r2130[0...63], 774
Equivalent wire resistance Fault time received in milliseconds
p29704, 933 r0948[0...63], 599
ESM, 430 Fault time removed in days
ESM number of activations/faults r2136[0...63], 775
r3887[0...1], 845 Fault time removed in milliseconds
ESM reset number of activations/faults r2109[0...63], 767
p3888, 845 Fault value, 967
ESM setpoint source r0949[0...63], 599
p3881, 843 Fault value for float values
r2133[0...63], 774
SINAMICS G120X converter
1128 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Index
Faults and alarms Firmware check status
Overview, 970 r9926, 891
Faults/alarms trigger selection Firmware downgrade, 1077
p2128[0...15], 773 Firmware file incorrect
FCC, 377 r9925[0...99], 891
FCC (Flux Current Control), 379 Fixed speed setpoint number actual
Field bus int USS PZD no. r1197, 642
p2022, 736 Fixed speed setpoint select mode
Field bus interface address p1016, 612
p2021, 736 Flow control, 350
Field bus interface baud rate Flow meter calculated flow
p2020, 735 r29633, 930
Field bus interface error statistics Flow meter pump flow
r2029[0...7], 740 p29632[0...4], 930
Field bus interface protocol selection Flow meter pump power
p2030, 741 p29631[0...4], 930
Field bus interface USS PKW count Fluid flow machine power point 1
p2023, 737 p3320[0...n], 834
Field weakening, 98 Fluid flow machine power point 2
Field weakening characteristic scaling p3322[0...n], 834
p1586[0...n], 695 Fluid flow machine power point 3
Field weakening controller additional setpoint p3324[0...n], 835
p1595[0...n], 696 Fluid flow machine power point 4
Field weakening controller integral-action time p3326[0...n], 836
p1596[0...n], 696 Fluid flow machine power point 5
Field weakening operation flux setpoint smoothing p3328[0...n], 836
time Fluid flow machine speed point 1
p1584[0...n], 695 p3321[0...n], 834
Fieldbus interface BACnet COV increment Fluid flow machine speed point 2
p2026[0...74], 738 p3323[0...n], 835
Fieldbus interface BACnet device name Fluid flow machine speed point 3
p7610[0...78], 859 p3325[0...n], 835
Fieldbus interface BACnet language selection Fluid flow machine speed point 4
p2027, 740 p3327[0...n], 836
Fieldbus interface BACnet settings Fluid flow machine speed point 5
p2025[0...4], 738 p3329[0...n], 836
Fieldbus interface MODBUS parity Flux control configuration
p2031, 742 p1401[0...n], 677
Fieldbus interface monitoring time Flux controller integral time
p2040, 744 p1592[0...n], 695
Fieldbus interface times Flux controller P gain
p2024[0...2], 737 p1590[0...n], 695
Fieldbus interfaces, 99, 100 Flux current control, 377
Field-generating current setpoint (steady-state) Flux model value display
r1623[0...1], 698 r2969[0...6], 826
Field-generating current setpoint total Flux reduction factor
r1624, 698 p1581[0...n], 694
Filter time constant Vdc correction Flux reduction flux build-up time constant
p1806[0...n], 713 p1579[0...n], 693
Firmware Flux reduction flux decrease time constant
Update, 1080 p1578[0...n], 693
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1129
Index
Flux reduction torque factor transition value Free tec_ctrl 1 actual value inversion
r1566[0...n], 690 p11171, 905
Flux setpoint smoothing time Free tec_ctrl 1 actual value lower limit
p1582[0...n], 694 p11168, 904
Flying restart, 423 Free tec_ctrl 1 actual value smoothing time constant
Flying restart configuration p11165, 904
p1270[0...n], 662 Free tec_ctrl 1 actual value upper limit
Flying restart maximum frequency for the inhibited p11167, 904
direction Free tec_ctrl 1 differentiation time constant
p1271[0...n], 662, 663 p11174, 905
Flying restart operating mode Free tec_ctrl 1 integral time
p1200[0...n], 643 p11185, 906
Flying restart search current Free tec_ctrl 1 limit ramp-up/ramp-down time
p1202[0...n], 644 p11193, 906
Flying restart search rate factor Free tec_ctrl 1 proportional gain
p1203[0...n], 645 p11180, 905
Formatting, 940 Free tec_ctrl 1 sampling time
Forming activation/duration p11128, 902
p3380, 840 Free tec_ctrl 1 setpoint ramp-down time
Forming remaining time p11158, 903
r3381, 840 Free tec_ctrl 1 setpoint ramp-up time
Forming status word p11157, 903
r3382, 840 Free tec_ctrl 1 system deviation inversion
Forming the DC link capacitors, 155 p11163, 903
Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value inversion Free tec_ctrl 1 unit reference quantity
p11071, 898 p11127, 902
Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value lower limit Free tec_ctrl 1 unit selection
p11068, 897 p11126, 901
Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value smoothing time constant Free tec_ctrl 2 actual value inversion
p11065, 897 p11271, 912
Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value upper limit Free tec_ctrl 2 actual value lower limit
p11067, 897 p11268, 911
Free tec_ctrl 0 differentiation time constant Free tec_ctrl 2 actual value smoothing time constant
p11074, 898 p11265, 911
Free tec_ctrl 0 integral time Free tec_ctrl 2 actual value upper limit
p11085, 899 p11267, 911
Free tec_ctrl 0 limit ramp-up/ramp-down time Free tec_ctrl 2 differentiation time constant
p11093, 899 p11274, 912
Free tec_ctrl 0 proportional gain Free tec_ctrl 2 integral time
p11080, 898 p11285, 913
Free tec_ctrl 0 sampling time Free tec_ctrl 2 limit ramp-up/ramp-down time
p11028, 895 p11293, 913
Free tec_ctrl 0 setpoint ramp-down time Free tec_ctrl 2 proportional gain
p11058, 896 p11280, 912
Free tec_ctrl 0 setpoint ramp-up time Free tec_ctrl 2 sampling time
p11057, 896 p11228, 909
Free tec_ctrl 0 system deviation inversion Free tec_ctrl 2 setpoint ramp-down time
p11063, 896 p11258, 910
Free tec_ctrl 0 unit reference quantity Free tec_ctrl 2 setpoint ramp-up time
p11027, 895 p11257, 910
Free tec_ctrl 0 unit selection Free tec_ctrl 2 system deviation inversion
p11026, 894 p11263, 910
SINAMICS G120X converter
1130 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Index
Free tec_ctrl 2 unit reference quantity
p11227, 909
Free tec_ctrl 2 unit selection I
p11226, 908
I_max controller, 404
Frost protection, 316
I_max controller voltage output
Frost protection speed
r1344, 675
p29623[0...n], 928
I_max frequency controller integral time
Functions
p1341[0...n], 674
BOP-2, 174
I_max frequency controller proportional gain
p1340[0...n], 674
I_max voltage controller integral time
G p1346[0...n], 675
Gain resonance damping for encoderless closed-loop I_max voltage controller proportional gain
control p1345[0...n], 675
p1740[0...n], 701 i2t monitoring, 408
Generator operation, 398 I2t motor model thermal time constant
Getting Started, 1109 p0611[0...n], 549
Ground fault monitoring thresholds Identification and Maintenance 1
p0287[0...1], 509 p8806[0...53], 878
Identification and Maintenance 2
p8807[0...15], 879
H Identification and Maintenance 3
p8808[0...53], 879
Hardware sampling times still assignable
Identification and Maintenance 4
r7903, 866
p8809[0...53], 880
Hibernation mode boost speed
Identification and maintenance 4 configuration
p2395[0...n], 822
p8805, 878
Hibernation mode boost time period
Identification final display
p2394[0...n], 822
r3925[0...n], 846
Hibernation mode delay time
Identification stator resistance after restart
p2391[0...n], 821
p0621[0...n], 552, 553
Hibernation mode max. shutdown time
Identified effective valve lockout time
p2396[0...n], 823
r1926[0...2], 726
Hibernation mode operating type
Identified nominal stator inductance
p2398, 823
r1915[0...2], 725
Hibernation mode restart speed relative w/o techn
Identified rotor resistance
controller
r1927[0...2], 726
p2393[0...n], 822
Identified rotor time constant
Hibernation mode restart value with technology
r1913[0...2], 725
controller
Identified stator resistance
p2392, 821
r1912[0...2], 724
Hotline, 1111
Identified threshold voltage
Hysteresis speed 1
r1925[0...2], 725
p2142[0...n], 777
Identified total leakage inductance
Hysteresis speed 2
r1914[0...2], 725
p2140[0...n], 776
IEC/NEMA Standards
Hysteresis speed 3
p0100, 498
p2150[0...n], 779
IND (page index), 215, 271, 272
Hysteresis speed 4
Industry Mall, 1110
p2164[0...n], 781
Inhibit automatic reference value calculation
Hysteresis speed n_act > n_max
p0573, 545
p2162[0...n], 780
Installation, 61
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1131
Index
Interfaces, 99 Know-how protection, 940, 953
Internal power unit resistance KTY84, 409
r0238, 507
Interpolator clock cycle for speed setpoints
p1079, 624 L
Invert binector-connector converter status word
LED
p2088[0...4], 757, 758
BF, 960, 961
Inverter connector-binector converter binector output
LNK, 960
p2098[0...1], 763
RDY, 960
IO extension module status
LED (light emitting diode), 959
r0719, 558
Level control, 350
IOP speed unit
Line contactor, 297
p8552, 877
Line contactor monitoring time
Isd controller combination current time component
p0861, 594
p1731[0...n], 700
Line dip, 428
Isd controller integral component shutdown threshold
Linear characteristic, 379, 388
p1730[0...n], 700
List of existing parameters 1
Isq current controller precontrol scaling
r0980[0...299], 604
p1703[0...n], 699
List of existing parameters 10
r0989[0...299], 605
List of existing parameters 2
J r0981[0...299], 604
Jog 1 speed setpoint List of faults and alarms, 970
p1058[0...n], 621 List of modified parameters 1
Jog 2 speed setpoint r0990[0...99], 605
p1059[0...n], 622 List of modified parameters 10
JOG function, 290 r0999[0...99], 606
List of modified parameters 2
r0991[0...99], 605
K LNK (PROFINET Link), 960
Load monitoring configuration
Keep-running operation enable
p2193[0...n], 788
p29630, 929
Load monitoring delay time
KHP configuration
p2192[0...n], 788
p7765, 862
Load monitoring response
KHP Control Unit reference serial number
p2181[0...n], 785
p7759[0...19], 859
Load monitoring speed deviation
KHP Control Unit serial number
p3231[0...n], 832
r7758[0...19], 859
Load monitoring speed threshold value 1
KHP memory card reference serial number
p2182[0...n], 785
p7769[0...20], 863
Load monitoring speed threshold value 2
KHP OEM exception list
p2183[0...n], 786
p7764[0...n], 861
Load monitoring speed threshold value 3
KHP OEM exception list number of indices for p7764
p2184[0...n], 786
p7763, 861
Load monitoring stall monitoring torque threshold
KHP password confirmation
p2168[0...n], 782
p7768[0...29], 863
Load monitoring stall monitoring upper threshold
KHP password input
p2165[0...n], 781
p7766[0...29], 862
Load monitoring torque threshold 1 lower
KHP password new
p2186[0...n], 787
p7767[0...29], 863
Load monitoring torque threshold 1 upper
Kinetic buffering, 428
p2185[0...n], 786
SINAMICS G120X converter
1132 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Index
Load monitoring torque threshold 2 lower Memory card serial number
p2188[0...n], 787 r7843[0...20], 865
Load monitoring torque threshold 2 upper Memory card/device memory firmware version
p2187[0...n], 787 r7844[0...2], 865
Load monitoring torque threshold 3 lower Menu
p2190[0...n], 788 BOP-2, 174
Load monitoring torque threshold 3 upper Operator panel, 174
p2189[0...n], 787 Minimum speed, 158, 338, 343
Load monitoring torque threshold no load p1080[0...n], 624
p2191[0...n], 788 Modular Safety System, 135
Modulation depth smoothed
r0028, 475
M Modulator configuration
p1810, 713
Macro Binector Input (BI)
Modulator mode
r8571[0...39], 877
p1802[0...n], 711, 712
Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for speed setpoints
Monitoring configuration
r8572[0...39], 877
p2149[0...n], 778
Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for torque setpoints
MOP (motorized potentiometer), 330
r8573[0...39], 878
Mot_temp_mod 1 (I2t) fault threshold
Macro drive object
p0615[0...n], 551
r8570[0...39], 877
Mot_temp_mod 1/2/sensor threshold and
Macro drive unit
temperature value
p0015, 471, 472
p0605[0...n], 548
Macro execution actual
Mot_temp_mod 1/3 alarm threshold
r8585, 878
p5390[0...n], 856
Magnetization rate time scaling
Mot_temp_mod 1/3 ambient temperature
p1567[0...n], 691
p0613[0...n], 550
Manual mode, 292, 293
Mot_temp_mod 1/3 boost factor at standstill
Master control control word effective
p5350[0...n], 854
r2032, 742
Mot_temp_mod 1/3 fault threshold
Master control mode selection
p5391[0...n], 856
p3985, 851
Mot_temp_mod 2/sensor alarm threshold
Maximum cable length
p0604[0...n], 547
PROFIBUS, 148
Mot_temp_mod activation
PROFINET, 144
p0612[0...n], 549
Maximum current controller, 404
Mot_temp_mod ambient temperature
Maximum modulation depth
r0630[0...n], 556
p1803[0...n], 712
Mot_temp_mod rotor temperature
r0073, 494
r0633[0...n], 557
Maximum motor current
Mot_temp_mod stator iron temperature
p0323[0...n], 521
r0631[0...n], 556
Maximum motor speed
Mot_temp_mod stator winding temperature
p0322[0...n], 520
r0632[0...n], 557
Maximum operating time power unit fan
MotID (motor data identification), 164, 166, 170
p0252, 508
Motor ambient temperature during commissioning
Maximum output voltage
p0625[0...n], 554
r0071, 493
Motor blocked delay time
Maximum speed, 158, 338
p2177[0...n], 784
p1082[0...n], 625, 626
Motor blocked speed threshold
Maximum speed scaling
p2175[0...n], 783
p1081, 625
Memory card, 940
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1133
Index
Motor changeover motor number Motor model changeover delay time open/closed-
p0826[0...n], 585 loop control
Motor code, 154 p1759[0...n], 706
Motor code number selection Motor model changeover speed encoderless
p0301[0...n], 515 operation
Motor configuration p1755[0...n], 705
p0133[0...n], 499 Motor model changeover speed hysteresis
Motor control, 180 encoderless operation
Motor cooling type p1756, 705
p0335[0...n], 523 Motor model configuration
Motor data, 153 p1750[0...n], 702, 703
Identify, 164, 166, 170, 397 Motor model error signal stall detection
Measure, 164, 166, 170 r1746, 701
Motor data identification and rotating measurement Motor model error threshold stall detection
p1900, 717, 718 p1745[0...n], 701
Motor data identification and speed controller Motor model feedback scaling
optimization p1784[0...n], 709
r0047, 484 Motor model increase changeover speed
Motor data identification control word encoderless operation
p1909[0...n], 721, 722 p1749[0...n], 701
r3927[0...n], 847 Motor model Lh adaptation corrective value
Motor data identification modulated voltage r1787[0...n], 710
generation Motor model Lh adaptation integral time
r3929[0...n], 848 p1786[0...n], 710
Motor data identification selection Motor model Lh adaptation Kp
p1910, 722, 723 p1785[0...n], 709
Motor data set, 461 Motor model offset voltage compensation alpha
Motor Data Set, MDS, 461 p1774[0...n], 707
Motor de-excitation time Motor model offset voltage compensation beta
p0347[0...n], 527 p1775[0...n], 707
Motor excitation build-up time Motor model status
p0346[0...n], 527 r1751, 704
Motor excitation time for Rs_ident after switching on Motor model status signals
again r1776[0...6], 708
p0622[0...n], 554 Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Kp
Motor holding brake, 297 p1764[0...n], 706
Motor leakage inductance total Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Tn
r0377[0...n], 534 p1767[0...n], 706
Motor magnetizing inductance Motor moment of inertia
p0360[0...n], 530 p0341[0...n], 525
Motor magnetizing inductance transformed Motor operating hours maintenance interval
r0382[0...n], 534 p0651[0...n], 558
Motor model adaptation configuration Motor overtemperature response
p1780[0...n], 708, 709 p0610[0...n], 548
Motor model changeover delay time closed/open- Motor overtemperature rotor
loop control p0628[0...n], 555
p1758[0...n], 706 Motor overtemperature, stator core
Motor model changeover delay time closed-loop p0626[0...n], 555
control Motor overtemperature, stator winding
p1769[0...n], 707 p0627[0...n], 555
Motor pole pair number
p0314[0...n], 519
SINAMICS G120X converter
1134 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Index
Motor pole pair number, actual (or calculated) Motor temperature sensor, 105
r0313[0...n], 519 Motor temperature sensor type
Motor pole position identification current p0601[0...n], 547
p0329[0...n], 522 Motor torque constant
Motor pole position identification current 1st phase p0316[0...n], 519
p0325[0...n], 521 Motor type selection
Motor rated magnetizing current/short-circuit current p0300[0...n], 512, 513
p0320[0...n], 520 Motor weight (for the thermal motor model)
Motor rated stator resistance p0344[0...n], 526
r0373[0...n], 533 Motorized potentiometer, 330
Motor reactor in series number Motorized potentiometer configuration
p0235, 507 p1030[0...n], 615
Motor reluctance torque constant Motorized potentiometer maximum speed
p0328[0...n], 522 p1037[0...n], 617
Motor rotor leakage inductance Motorized potentiometer minimum speed
p0358[0...n], 529 p1038[0...n], 617
Motor rotor resistance cold Motorized potentiometer ramp-down time
p0354[0...n], 528 p1048[0...n], 619
r0374[0...n], 534 Motorized potentiometer ramp-up time
Motor rotor time constant / damping time constant d p1047[0...n], 619
axis Motorized potentiometer starting value
r0384[0...n], 534 p1040[0...n], 617
Motor saturation characteristic flux 1 Multi-pump control, 300
p0362[0...n], 530 Pump switch-in, 303
Motor saturation characteristic flux 2 Pump switch-out, 305
p0363[0...n], 530 Pump switchover, 311
Motor saturation characteristic flux 3 Service mode, 313
p0364[0...n], 531 Stop mode, 308
Motor saturation characteristic flux 4 Multi-pump control absolute operating hours
p0365[0...n], 531 p29530[0...5], 918
Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 1 Multi-pump control continuous operating hours
p0366[0...n], 531 p29547[0...5], 921
Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 2 Multi-pump control deviation threshold
p0367[0...n], 532 p29546, 921
Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 3 Multi-pump control disconnection lockout time
p0368[0...n], 532 p29537, 919
Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 4 Multi-pump control enable
p0369[0...n], 533 p29520, 915
Motor stall current Multi-pump control index of motors under repair
p0318[0...n], 520 r29544[0...5], 920
Motor stalled delay time Multi-pump control interlocking time
p2178[0...n], 784 p29527, 917
Motor standard, 294 Multi-pump control maximum time for continuous
Motor stator inductance d axis operation
p0357[0...n], 529 p29531, 918
Motor stator leakage inductance Multi-pump control motor configuration
p0356[0...n], 529 p29521, 915
Motor stator leakage time constant Multi-pump control motor selection mode
r0386[0...n], 535 p29522, 915
Motor stator resistance cold Multi-pump control overcontrol threshold
p0350[0...n], 527 p29526, 916
r0370[0...n], 533
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1135
Index
Multi-pump control pump switchover enable Operating hours counter power unit fan
p29539, 919 p0251[0...n], 508
Multi-pump control service mode enable Operating hours counter power unit fan inside the
p29540, 919 converter
Multi-pump control switch-in delay p0254[0...n], 508
p29524, 916 Operating instruction, 23
Multi-pump control switch-in threshold Operating Instructions, 1109
p29523, 916 Operation, 183
Multi-pump control switch-off sequence Operator panel
p29533, 918 BOP-2, 174
Multi-pump control switch-out delay Menu, 174
p29525, 916 Optimizing the closed-loop speed controller, 397
Multi-pump control switch-out speed offset Optimum motor load angle
p29528, 917 p0327[0...n], 521
Multi-pump control variable-speed motor Options for electrical cabinets
r29538, 919 p3931, 849
Output frequency smoothed
r0024, 473
N Output load detection delay time
p2180[0...n], 785
Nominal motor starting time
Output load identification current limit
r0345[0...n], 526
p2179[0...n], 784
Number of Command Data Sets (CDS)
Output reactor, 376
p0170, 499
Overload, 404
Number of deragging cycles
Overvoltage, 414
p29598[0...n], 926
Overvoltage protection, 140
Number of Drive Data Sets (DDS)
p0180, 499
Number of motors connected in parallel
p0306[0...n], 516
P
Number of parameters Page index, 272
r3986, 851 Parabolic characteristic, 379, 388
Number of parameters to be saved Parameter channel, 213, 268
r9409, 889 IND, 272
NVRAM data backup/import/delete Parameter channel"; "IND, 215, 271
p7775, 864 Parameter index, 215, 271, 272
Parameter number, 177, 215, 271
Parameter value, 177, 220
O Parameter write inhibit status
r3996[0...1], 852
Off delay n_act = n_set
Parameters
p2166[0...n], 782
Overview, 181, 467
OFF3 final rounding-off time
Partial load operation, 1099
p1137[0...n], 637
Pe energy-saving mode ID
OFF3 initial rounding-off time
r5600, 857
p1136[0...n], 637
Pe energy-saving mode pause time minimal
OFF3 ramp-down time, 347
p5602[0...1], 857
p1135[0...n], 636
Pe energy-saving mode time of maximum stay
On delay comparison value reached
p5606[0...1], 857
p2156[0...n], 780
Pe energy-saving properties general
Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode
p5611, 858
p1300[0...n], 667, 668
Pe energy-saving properties mode-dependent
p5612[0...1], 858
SINAMICS G120X converter
1136 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Index
Phase failure signal motor monitoring time PN Subnet Mask actual
p3235, 833 r8933[0...3], 884
PID autotuning monitoring time PolID circle center point
p2354, 815 p1998[0...n], 731
PID autotuning offset PolID technique
p2355, 815 p1980[0...n], 730
PID controller, 350 Power cable length maximum
Pipe filling, 325 r0231[0...1], 506
Pipe filling enable Power factor smoothed
p29610[0...n], 926 r0038, 479
Pipe filling mode Power failure, 425
p29611[0...n], 927 Power limit motoring
Pipe filling monitoring time p1530[0...n], 688
p29615[0...n], 927 Power limit regenerative
Pipe filling speed p1531[0...n], 688
p29612[0...n], 927 Power Module serial number
Pipe filling threshold r7841[0...15], 864
p29614[0...n], 927 Power unit alarm with I2t overload
Pipe filling time p0294, 511
p29613[0...n], 927 Power unit application
PKW (parameter, ID value), 207 p0205, 502
PM330 digital inputs simulation mode Power unit code number
p4095, 854 p0201[0...n], 500
PM330 digital inputs simulation mode setpoint Power unit code number actual
p4096, 854 r0200[0...n], 500
PM330 digital outputs status Power unit data set, 461
r4047, 853 Power Unit Data Set, PDS, 461
PN DAP ID Power unit EEPROM characteristics
r8939, 885 r3930[0...4], 849
PN Default Gateway Power unit hardware properties
p8922[0...3], 882 r0204[0...n], 502
PN Default Gateway actual Power unit line phases monitoring tolerance time
r8932[0...3], 884 p1822, 714
PN device ID Power unit main contactor holding time after OFF1
r8909, 881 p0867, 595
PN DHCP Mode Power unit maximum current
p8924, 883 r0209[0...4], 504
PN DHCP Mode actual Power unit monitoring time
r8934, 884 p0857, 593
PN IP address Power unit motor reactor
p8921[0...3], 882 p0233, 506
PN IP address actual Power unit overload response
r8931[0...3], 884 p0290, 509, 510
PN MAC address Power unit sine-wave filter capacitance
r8935[0...5], 885 p0234, 507
PN Name of Station Power unit temperature alarm threshold
p8920[0...239], 882 p0292[0...1], 511
PN Name of Station actual Power unit thyristor rectifier wait time
r8930[0...239], 884 p0868, 595
PN Subnet Mask Pressure control, 350
p8923[0...3], 882 Procedure, 23
PROFIBUS, 148
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1137
Index
PROFIBUS additional monitoring time PS file fault code parameter not transferred
p2047, 745 r9408[0...19], 889
PROFIBUS address PS file parameter index parameter not transferred
p0918, 597 r9407[0...19], 889
PROFIBUS baud rate PS file parameter number parameter not transferred
r0963, 600 r9406[0...19], 888
PROFIBUS diagnostics peer-to-peer data transfer Pt100, 409
addresses Pt1000, 409
r2077[0...15], 753 PTC, 409
PROFIBUS diagnostics standard Pulse cancellation, 209, 265
r2055[0...2], 748 Pulse enable, 209, 265
PROFIBUS Ident Number Pulse frequency, 407, 408
p2042, 744 Pulse frequency setpoint
PROFIBUS status p1800[0...n], 710
r2054, 748 Pulse frequency wobbulation amplitude
PROFIdrive diagnostics bus address PZD receive p1811[0...n], 714
r2074[0...11], 751 Pulse suppression delay time
PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send double word p1228, 652
r2063[0...15], 750 Pump, 162, 169
PROFIdrive diagnostics send PZD word PZD (process data), 207
r2053[0...16], 747 PZD maximum interconnected
PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive r2067[0...1], 751
r2075[0...11], 751
PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD send
r2076[0...16], 752 Q
PROFIdrive fault delay
Questions, 1111
p2044, 745
PROFIdrive profile number
r0965, 602
PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection
R
p0922, 597 Ramp-down scaling 1
PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended p29573[0...n], 922
p2079, 753 Ramp-down scaling 2
PROFIdrive reference speed reference frequency p29575[0...n], 923
p60000, 934 Ramp-down time, 347
PROFIdrive STW/ZSW interface mode Ramp-function gen. tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-
p2038, 743 down active
PROFIdrive STW1.10 = 0 mode p1148[0...n], 642
p2037, 743 Ramp-function generator, 338
PROFIenergy, 456 Ramp-function generator final rounding-off time
PROFINET identification data p1131[0...n], 635
r8859[0...7], 881 Ramp-function generator initial rounding-off time
PROFINET IP of Station p1130[0...n], 635
r61001[0...3], 935 Ramp-function generator minimum ramp-down time
PROFINET Name of Station p1127[0...n], 634
r61000[0...239], 935 Ramp-function generator minimum ramp-up time
PROFINET read diagnostics channel p1123[0...n], 634
r8858[0...39], 880 Ramp-function generator ramp-down time
PROFINET state p1121[0...n], 633
r8854, 880 Ramp-function generator ramp-up time
Protection functions, 180 p1120[0...n], 632, 633
SINAMICS G120X converter
1138 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Index
Ramp-function generator rounding-off type Reference speed reference frequency
p1134[0...n], 636 p2000, 731
Ramp-function generator tracking intensity. Reference temperature
p1145[0...n], 641 p2006, 734
Ramp-up scaling 1 Reference torque
p29570[0...n], 922 p2003, 733
Ramp-up scaling 2 Reference voltage
p29572[0...n], 922 p2001, 732
Ramp-up time, 347 Replace
Rated motor current Control Unit, 1080
p0305[0...n], 515 Gear unit, 1080
Rated motor current identified Hardware, 1080
r0343[0...n], 526 Motor, 1080
Rated motor efficiency Power Module, 1080
p0309[0...n], 517 Reset
Rated motor EMF Parameter, 173
r0337[0...n], 524 Reset drive parameters
Rated motor frequency p0970, 602
p0310[0...n], 517, 518 Reset energy consumption display
Rated motor power p0040, 480
p0307[0...n], 516 Reverse the output phase sequence
r0394[0...n], 535 p1820[0...n], 714
Rated motor power factor Reversing, 338
p0308[0...n], 517 Rotating measurement configuration
r0332[0...n], 523 p1959[0...n], 726, 727
Rated motor rotor resistance r3928[0...n], 848
r0376[0...n], 534 Rotating measurement selection
Rated motor slip p1960, 727
r0330[0...n], 522 Rounding, 347
Rated motor speed Rounding OFF3, 347
p0311[0...n], 518 Rs identification stator resistance after switch on
Rated motor torque again
r0333[0...n], 523 r0623, 554
Rated motor voltage RS485 interface, 146
p0304[0...n], 515 RTC (Real-Time Clock), 373, 375
Rated power unit current RTC actual daylight saving time difference
r0207[0...4], 503 r8403, 868
Rated power unit line supply voltage RTC date
r0208, 504 p8401[0...2], 867
Rated power unit power RTC daylight saving time setting
r0206[0...4], 503 p8402[0...8], 867
Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia RTC DTC activation
p0342[0...n], 526 p8409, 869
RDY (Ready), 960 RTC DTC1 off time
Ready for operation, 183 p8412[0...1], 870
Ready for switching on, 183 RTC DTC1 switch-on time
Real-time clock, 373 p8411[0...1], 870
Reference current RTC DTC1 weekday of activation
p2002, 732 p8410[0...6], 869
Reference power RTC DTC2 off time
r2004, 733 p8422[0...1], 872
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1139
Index
RTC DTC2 switch-on time Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[9]
p8421[0...1], 872 p0524[0...19], 543
RTC DTC2 weekday of activation Scaling-specific reference values
p8420[0...6], 871 p0514[0...9], 540
RTC DTC3 off time SD (memory card), 940
p8432[0...1], 874 Formatting, 940
RTC DTC3 switch-on time Select debug monitor interface
p8431[0...1], 873 p2039, 743
RTC DTC3 weekday of activation Selecting the system of units
p8430[0...6], 873 p0505, 540
RTC time Sequence control, 183
p8400[0...2], 866 Sequence control configuration
RTC weekday p0869, 595
r8404, 868 Series commissioning, 949
Service parameter
p3950, 850
S Setpoint channel speed limit
p1063[0...n], 622
Safely remove memory card
Setpoint processing, 180, 338
p9400, 887
Setpoint source, 180
Safety function, 179
Selecting, 328, 329, 330
Sampling times
Settling time, 162, 169
r7901[0...81], 866
Short-circuit monitoring, 409, 410
Saturation characteristic speed to determine
Signal interconnection, 464
p1961, 728
Signal states, 960
Saturation limit for flux setpoint
Skip frequency band, 338
p1382[0...n], 676
Skip speed 1
Save parameters
p1091[0...n], 628
p0971, 603
Skip speed 2
Save system logbook EEPROM
p1092[0...n], 628
p9932, 892
Skip speed 3
Scaling
p1093[0...n], 628
Analog input, 199
Skip speed 4
Analog output, 205
p1094[0...n], 628
Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[0]
Skip speed bandwidth
p0515[0...19], 541
p1101[0...n], 629
Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[1]
Slip compensation, 377
p0516[0...19], 541
Slip compensation limit value
Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[2]
p1336[0...n], 673
p0517[0...19], 541
Slip compensation scaling
Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[3]
p1335[0...n], 672
p0518[0...19], 541
Slip frequency
Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[4]
r0065, 491
p0519[0...19], 542
Software error internal supplementary diagnostics
Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[5]
r9999[0...99], 893
p0520[0...19], 542
Speed
Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[6]
change with BOP-2, 174
p0521[0...19], 542
Limiting, 338
Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[7]
Speed actual value filter time constant
p0522[0...19], 543
p2153[0...n], 779
Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514[8]
Speed at the start of DC braking
p0523[0...19], 543
p1234[0...n], 654
SINAMICS G120X converter
1140 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Index
Speed control, 391 Stall limit scaling
Speed control configuration p1553[0...n], 690
p1400[0...n], 676, 677 Standards
Speed controller adaptation speed lower EN 61800-3, 29
p1464[0...n], 681 Star connection (Y), 98
Speed controller adaptation speed upper Starting behavior
p1465[0...n], 681 Optimization, 389
Speed controller encoderless operation integral time Starting behavior"; "Optimization, 382
p1472[0...n], 682 Starting current, 387
Speed controller encoderless operation P-gain Starting current (voltage boost) permanent
p1470[0...n], 682 p1310[0...n], 669
Speed controller integral time effective Starting current (voltage boost) when accelerating
r1469, 682 p1311[0...n], 670
Speed controller Kp adaptation speed upper scaling Starting current (voltage boost) when starting
p1461[0...n], 681 p1312[0...n], 670
Speed controller speed actual value smoothing time State overview, 183
(sensorless) Stator resistance reference
p1452[0...n], 680 p0629[0...n], 556
Speed controller Tn adaptation speed upper scaling Status word
p1463[0...n], 681 Status word 1, 209, 210, 266
Speed setpoint filter 1 time constant Status word 3, 212
p1416[0...n], 680 STO (Safe Torque Off), 297
Speed setpoint selection select, 297
p1000[0...n], 606, 607 Stop Category 0, 298
Speed setpoint smoothed Storage medium, 939
r0020, 472 STW1 (control word 1), 209, 265
Speed start of hibernation mode Subindex, 215, 271, 272
p2390[0...n], 821 Support, 1111
Speed threshold 1 Switch off
p2141[0...n], 777 Motor, 184
Speed threshold 2 OFF1 command, 184
p2155[0...n], 780 OFF2 command, 184
Speed threshold 3 OFF3 command, 184
p2161[0...n], 780 Switch on
Speed threshold 4 Motor, 184
p2163[0...n], 781 ON command, 184
Speed_ctrl_opt dynamic factor Switching on inhibited, 183, 209, 265
p1967, 729 Switching-on a motor with BOP-2, 174
Speed_ctrl_opt dynamic factor actual Switch-on delay n_act = n_set
r1968, 729 p2167[0...n], 782
Speed_ctrl_opt moment of inertia determined Symbols, 23
r1969, 729 System logbook activation
Speed_ctrl_opt saturation characteristic rotor flux p9930[0...8], 892
maximum System logbook module selection
p1974, 730 p9931[0...180], 892
Speed_ctrl_opt speed System runtime, 962
p1965, 728 System runtime relative
Speed_ctrl_opt vibration test vibration frequency p0969, 602
determined System runtime total
r1970[0...1], 730 r2114[0...1], 768
Square-law characteristic, 379, 388 System utilization measured
r9975[0...7], 893
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1141
Index
Technology controller motorized potentiometer
configuration
T p2230[0...n], 796
Technology controller motorized potentiometer
Techn. controller threshold value f. I comp. hold for
maximum value
skip speed
p2237[0...n], 798
p2339, 812
Technology controller motorized potentiometer
Technological application (Dynamic Drive Control)
minimum value
p0502, 538, 539
p2238[0...n], 798
Technological application (Standard Drive Control)
Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-
p0501, 538
down time
Technological unit reference quantity
p2248[0...n], 799
p0596, 546
Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-
Technological unit selection
up time
p0595, 545
p2247[0...n], 799
Technology application
Technology controller motorized potentiometer
p0500, 536, 537
setpoint memory
Technology controller, 211, 295, 350
r2231, 797
Technology controller actual value filter time constant
Technology controller motorized potentiometer
p2265, 803
starting value
Technology controller actual value function
p2240[0...n], 798
p2270, 804
Technology controller number actual
Technology controller actual value inversion (sensor
r2229, 796
type)
Technology controller output signal starting value
p2271, 804
p2302, 808
Technology controller configuration
Technology controller proportional gain
p2252, 800
p2280, 805
Technology controller differentiation time constant
Technology controller ramp-down time
p2274, 805
p2258, 801
Technology controller fault response
Technology controller ramp-up time
p2345, 813
p2257, 801
Technology controller fixed value selection method
Technology controller ramp-up/ramp-down time
p2216[0...n], 795
p2293, 807
Technology controller gain actual value
Technology controller setpoint 1 scaling
p2269, 803
p2255, 801
Technology controller integral time
Technology controller setpoint 2 scaling
p2285, 805
p2256, 801
Technology controller Kp adaptation lower starting
Technology controller setpoint filter time constant
point
p2261, 802
p2313, 810
Technology controller system deviation inversion
Technology controller Kp adaptation lower value
p2306, 809
p2311, 809
Technology controller Tn adaptation lower starting
Technology controller Kp adaptation upper starting
point
point
p2320, 812
p2314, 810
Technology controller Tn adaptation lower value
Technology controller Kp adaptation upper value
p2319, 811
p2312, 810
Technology controller Tn adaptation upper starting
Technology controller lower limit actual value
point
p2268, 803
p2321, 812
Technology controller mode
Technology controller Tn adaptation upper value
p2251, 799
p2318, 811
SINAMICS G120X converter
1142 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Index
Technology controller type Unit system, 294
p2263, 802 Units changeover adapted parameters
Technology controller upper limit actual value r9451[0...29], 890
p2267, 803 Update
Temperature calculation, 412 Firmware, 1080
Temperature monitoring, 408, 412 Upgrading the firmware, 1075
Temperature sensor, 105 Upload, 940
Temperature sensor exiting current set Download, 946
p29708, 934 USB functionality
Temperature sensor type p8999, 887
p29700[0...n], 932 USB memory access
Temperature switch, 409 p8991, 887
Terminal block, 186 Use for the intended purpose, 24
Terminal strip, 140 User interfaces, 99
Factory setting, 105 USS (universal serial interface), 268
Test pulse evaluation configuration UTC (Universal Time Coordinated), 373
p1901, 719, 720
Test pulse evaluation status
r1902, 720 V
Thermal adaptation, stator and rotor resistance
V/f characteristic, 377
p0620[0...n], 552
Vdc controller configuration
Thermal resistance adaptation reduction factor
p1281[0...n], 664
p0614[0...n], 551
Vdc controller configuration (U/f)
Threshold for zero speed detection
p1280[0...n], 663
p1226[0...n], 651
Vdc controller configuration (vector control)
Threshold speed 2
p1240[0...n], 655
p29571[0...n], 922
Vdc controller integral time
Threshold speed 3
p1251[0...n], 657
p29574[0...n], 923
Vdc controller integral time (U/f)
Time, 373
p1291[0...n], 666
Time control, 375
Vdc controller proportional gain
Time switch, 375
p1250[0...n], 657
Torque accuracy, 162, 169
Vdc controller proportional gain (U/f)
Torque actual value filter time constant
p1290[0...n], 666
p3233[0...n], 832
Vdc controller rate time
Torque setpoint static (sensorless)
p1252[0...n], 658
p1610[0...n], 697
Vdc controller rate time (U/f)
p1292[0...n], 666
Vdc_max controller automatic detection ON signal
U level (U/f)
U/f control configuration p1294, 666
p1302[0...n], 668 Vdc_max controller automatic ON level detection
U/f control FCC starting frequency p1254, 658
p1333[0...n], 671 Vdc_max controller dynamic factor
U/f control slip compensation starting frequency p1243[0...n], 656
p1334[0...n], 672 Vdc_max controller dynamic factor (U/f)
U/f mode resonance damping filter time constant p1283[0...n], 664
p1339[0...n], 673 Vdc_max controller speed threshold
U/f mode resonance damping gain p1249[0...n], 657
p1338[0...n], 673 Vdc_max controller switch-in level
U/f mode resonance damping maximum frequency r1242, 655
p1349[0...n], 676
SINAMICS G120X converter
Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC 1143
Index
Vdc_max controller switch-in level (U/f) Write protection multi-master fieldbus system access
r1282, 664 behavior
Vdc_max controller time threshold (U/f) p7762, 861
p1284[0...n], 665
Vdc_min controller, 428
Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) Z
p1247[0...n], 656
Zero speed detection monitoring time
Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering)
p1227, 652
(U/f)
Ziegler Nichols, 363
p1287[0...n], 665
ZSW 1 (status word 1)", 210
Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering)
ZSW1 (status word 1), 209
p1256[0...n], 658
ZWS3 (status word 3), 212
Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) (U/f)
ZWST1 (status word 1), 266
p1296[0...n], 667
Vdc_min controller speed threshold
p1257[0...n], 659
Vdc_min controller speed threshold (U/f)
p1297[0...n], 667
Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering)
p1245[0...n], 656
r1246, 656
Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering)
(U/f)
p1285[0...n], 665
r1286, 665
Vdc_min controller time threshold
p1255[0...n], 658
Vdc_min controller time threshold (U/f)
p1295[0...n], 666
Vector control, 397
Sensorless, 391
Voltage boost, 377, 382, 387, 389
Voltage boost total
r1315, 671
Voltage generation alternating base voltage
amplitude
r3926[0...n], 847
Voltage input, 197
Voltage limiting
p1331[0...n], 671
Voltage measurement configuring
p0247, 507
Voltage reserve dynamic
p1574[0...n], 692
Voltage target value limit
p1575[0...n], 693
W
Wire-break monitoring, 200, 409, 410
Write protection, 950
p7761, 861
SINAMICS G120X converter
1144 Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC
Further information
SINAMICS converters:
www.siemens.com/sinamics
Safety Integrated
www.siemens.com/safety-integrated
PROFINET
www.siemens.com/profinet
Siemens AG
Digital Industries
Motion Control
Postfach 3180
91050 ERLANGEN
Germany
Scan the QR code for
additional
information about
SINAMICS G120X.
You might also like
- OperatingInstructions en 1PH818. 1PH822. 1PH828. en-USNo ratings yetOperatingInstructions en 1PH818. 1PH822. 1PH828. en-US328 pages
- Arduino Based Gloves Translator of Filipino Sign Language FSL Into Speech and TextNo ratings yetArduino Based Gloves Translator of Filipino Sign Language FSL Into Speech and Text62 pages
- SINAMICS G130 Inverter Chassis Units en-USNo ratings yetSINAMICS G130 Inverter Chassis Units en-US658 pages
- SINAMICS S120 Chassis Power Units Air Cooled en-USNo ratings yetSINAMICS S120 Chassis Power Units Air Cooled en-US544 pages
- g120 Cu250s-2 Control Units - Getting StartedNo ratings yetg120 Cu250s-2 Control Units - Getting Started534 pages
- 4BS0751-001-En Installation and Operating Instructions Sinamics G180No ratings yet4BS0751-001-En Installation and Operating Instructions Sinamics G180190 pages
- OperatingInstructions en 6SL38107NN380AA1 en-USNo ratings yetOperatingInstructions en 6SL38107NN380AA1 en-US188 pages
- 4BS0751-010 Eng Montage - Und Betriebsanleitung SINAMICS G180No ratings yet4BS0751-010 Eng Montage - Und Betriebsanleitung SINAMICS G180216 pages
- 4BS0550E-002-en Instructions For Parameterizing Sinamics G180No ratings yet4BS0550E-002-en Instructions For Parameterizing Sinamics G180145 pages
- v20 Operating Instructions Complete en-US en-US PDFNo ratings yetv20 Operating Instructions Complete en-US en-US PDF342 pages
- Manual SIRIUS Innovations Circuit Breaker 3RV2No ratings yetManual SIRIUS Innovations Circuit Breaker 3RV2164 pages
- Function Manual G120, G120D, ET 200S FC, ET 200pro FCNo ratings yetFunction Manual G120, G120D, ET 200S FC, ET 200pro FC258 pages
- SIEMENS - G120 - C - D, G110M Safety Function ManualNo ratings yetSIEMENS - G120 - C - D, G110M Safety Function Manual450 pages
- OperatingInstructions en 6SL38055BG412AA0No ratings yetOperatingInstructions en 6SL38055BG412AA0152 pages
- SINAMICS GH180 OperatingInstructions EN AirCooled 6SR41 PDFNo ratings yetSINAMICS GH180 OperatingInstructions EN AirCooled 6SR41 PDF224 pages
- HPE ProLiant DL380 Gen10 server-PSN1010026818WWEN100% (1)HPE ProLiant DL380 Gen10 server-PSN1010026818WWEN6 pages
- Schneider Electric - Harmony-Timer-Relays - RE17LHBMNo ratings yetSchneider Electric - Harmony-Timer-Relays - RE17LHBM9 pages
- s71500 Io Link Master Manual en-US en-USNo ratings yets71500 Io Link Master Manual en-US en-US39 pages
- Getting - Started - Guide - SINAMICSV50I - 112009 With CoverNo ratings yetGetting - Started - Guide - SINAMICSV50I - 112009 With Cover42 pages
- Distributed Bus Protection White Paper Gea31951No ratings yetDistributed Bus Protection White Paper Gea319518 pages
- FS17027 Datasheet 21 219 Fiber Optic IEEE C37.94 G.703 E1 Multiplexer Singlemode R2100% (1)FS17027 Datasheet 21 219 Fiber Optic IEEE C37.94 G.703 E1 Multiplexer Singlemode R22 pages
- PowerLogic ION8650 Series - S8650A0C0H6C7B0ANo ratings yetPowerLogic ION8650 Series - S8650A0C0H6C7B0A5 pages
- Schneider Electric - Acti-9-C60HDC-C60PVDC - A9N61531No ratings yetSchneider Electric - Acti-9-C60HDC-C60PVDC - A9N615314 pages
- Indian Digital Marketing Spends by IndustryNo ratings yetIndian Digital Marketing Spends by Industry19 pages
- Sentiment Analysis of Tweets Using Natural Language Processing (#1130188) - 2484168No ratings yetSentiment Analysis of Tweets Using Natural Language Processing (#1130188) - 24841683 pages
- Schneider Electric - PowerLogic-ION8650 - M8650C4C0H5E1A1ANo ratings yetSchneider Electric - PowerLogic-ION8650 - M8650C4C0H5E1A1A4 pages
- K Pos Heavy Lift Application Operator Manual Relaese 8.4 (441472E)No ratings yetK Pos Heavy Lift Application Operator Manual Relaese 8.4 (441472E)30 pages
- DD-N-00411-3-01-DDCMS-C-15-STRU-315-P-02 (SH-1) - Rev-ANo ratings yetDD-N-00411-3-01-DDCMS-C-15-STRU-315-P-02 (SH-1) - Rev-A1 page
- Challenges and Approaches for Selecting, Assessing and Qualifying Commercial Industrial Digital Instrumentation and Control Equipment for Use in Nuclear Power Plant ApplicationsFrom EverandChallenges and Approaches for Selecting, Assessing and Qualifying Commercial Industrial Digital Instrumentation and Control Equipment for Use in Nuclear Power Plant ApplicationsNo ratings yet
- Volkswagen India Digital Marketing Case StudyNo ratings yetVolkswagen India Digital Marketing Case Study2 pages
- E20214 Tuf Gaming B650-Plus Um Web 0728221600No ratings yetE20214 Tuf Gaming B650-Plus Um Web 072822160038 pages
- Internal Verification of Assessment Decisions - BTEC (RQF) : Higher NationalsNo ratings yetInternal Verification of Assessment Decisions - BTEC (RQF) : Higher Nationals57 pages
- Safe Use of Smart Devices in Systems Important to Safety in Nuclear Power PlantsFrom EverandSafe Use of Smart Devices in Systems Important to Safety in Nuclear Power PlantsNo ratings yet
- Vibration Basics and Machine Reliability Simplified : A Practical Guide to Vibration AnalysisFrom EverandVibration Basics and Machine Reliability Simplified : A Practical Guide to Vibration Analysis4/5 (2)
- Practical, Made Easy Guide To Building, Office And Home Automation Systems - Part OneFrom EverandPractical, Made Easy Guide To Building, Office And Home Automation Systems - Part OneNo ratings yet